The student's Greek grammar : a grammar of the Greek language

?

oa
ee

’ ah eee

f

Fg

“~

Ts
a

The Student's Greek Grammar,

we

A GRAMMAR

GREEK LANGUAGE.

By DR. GEORGE CURTIUS,

PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG.

.~TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR.

EDITED

By WILLIAM SMITH, D.C.L., LLD.,

EDITOR OF THE CLASSICAL AND LATIN DIUTIONARIES.

LC. [Nee a oy Be Sy

For the Use of Colleges and the Upper Forms in Schools,

ELEVENTH EDITION.

LONDON:

JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.
1882.

,WORKS BY PROFESSOR CURTIUS,

—— ele

A Smaller Greek Grammar. For the Middle and Lower
Foims in Schools, Abridged from the preseut Work, i2umo, 3s, 6d.

Greek Accidence; extracted from the above Work. 12mo.
2s. 6d.

Elucidations of the Student’s Greek Grammar. ‘Trans-
lated by Evetyn Aspor. Po:t 8vo. 4s. 6d.

Principles of Greek Etymology. Translated by A. 8.
Witxnss, M.A., and E. B. ExGuanv, M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. 158. each,

The Greek Verb; Its Structure and Development. Trans-
lated by A. S."Winkoxs, M.A., and E, B. ENGLAND, M.A, 8¥0, 189.

Uniform with the present Work.

The Student's Latin Grammar. For the Higher Forms in
——— By Wo. Suira, D.C.L., and Tueorsitus D, Haut, M.A,
‘ost 8vo, 6s.

A Smaller Latin Grammar. For the Middle and Lower
Forms in Schovls. Abridged from the above Work, 12mo. 3s. 6d.

A School Manual of English Grammar; with Copious
Exercises. By Wat. Smita, D.C.L., and Tuxoruitus D, Haut, M.A,
Post 8vo. 3s. 6d. e

A Primary English Grammar for Elemen‘ary Schools
With 134 Exercises and Questions, Founded on the absve Work, By
Turornitus D, Hatt, M.A. 16mo. 1s.

A Manual of English Composition. With Copious Illustra-
tions and Practical Exercises. By Tuzoruitus D. Hatt, M.A. 12mo,
3s. 6d.

S'udent’s French Grammar; Practical and Historical. For
the Higher Forms. By C. Heron-WaLL, With an Iutroductionby
M. Larteé. Post 8vo, 7s. 6d.

Smaller Grammar of the French Language. For the
SLddle aud Lower Forms. Abridged fiom the above, 12mo, 35. 6d,

LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, STAMFORD STREET
AND CIIARING CROSS,

EDITOR’S PREFAUE.

-_——1or—

Tae Greek Grammar of Dr. Curtius is acknowledged
by the most competent scholars, both in this country
and in Germany, to be the best representative of the
present advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is,
indeed, almost the only Grammar which exhibits the
inflexions of the language in a really scientific form ;
while its extensive use in the schools of Germany, and
the high commendations it has received from practical
teachers in that country, are a sufficient proof of its
excellence as a school-book. It is surprising to find
that many of the public and private schools in this
country continue to use Grammars, which ignore all the
improvements and discoveries of modern philology, and
still cling to the division of the substantives into ten
declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect as
the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr.
Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles
on which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnec-
essary to say more by way of introduction. It only
remains to add, that the translation has been made
from the fifth edition of the original work (1862), with
the author’s sanction, and that the proof-sheets have
enjoyed the advantage of his final correction and
revision.

An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is
published simultaneously with the present work.

W. 8.
London, March, 1863.
az

FROM THE AUTHOR’S PREFACE,

Tue fact that within a few years the present Grammar _
has found its way into a large number of schools in
various countries of Europe seems to be a satisfactory
answer to the question whether a thorough knowledge
of Greek is attainable by the method I have adopted.
Much, therefore, of what I thought it necessary to state
on the first appearance of the book does not now re-
quire to be repeated; but I consider it incumbent
upon me to make some observations upon the objects and
the use of the Grammar, and I beg to recommend
these to the careful consideration of teachers.

Few sciences have within the last half century been
so completely reformed as the science of language.
Not only has our insight into the nature and history of
human speech been greatly advanced, but—and this is
justly regarded as a matter of still greater importance—
quite a different method in treating language in general
has been discovered, after a new era had been opened
up by the philosophical inquiries of William von
Humboldt, and the historical investigations of Francis
Bopp and Jacob Grimm. No one, unless he desires
to exclude schools from the progress thus made, and
to confine them to the mechanical repetition of imper
fect and antiquated rules, will probably doubt that the
new knowledge, the principles of which have stood the
test of nearly half a century, ought to exercise its in-
fluence on the teaching of language.

If the teaching of a language in our schools is in-

PREFACE. v

tended to lead not only to a thorough understanding of
the master-works of literature, but at the same time ta
cultivate and stir up the youthful mind by indeépen-
dent exertion and by occupation with a subject so im-
mensely rich and so harmoniously quickening the most
different mental powers as language, such teaching
cannot possibly continue to keep aloof from the pro-
gress of scientific inquiry, which is, unfortunately, still the
case in many places. The teaching of Greek, however,
seems to be specially called upon to make a commence-
ment. The modern science of language has, indeed, exer-
cised its influence on every part of grammar, but none
has been more affected by it than the first, commonly
called the accidence. In Latin scientific inquiry into the
structure of the forms has not yet reached the same
completeness as in Greek. ‘The structure of the Latin
language is less transparent, and we miss so many aids
which we possess for the Greek in the high antiquity of
its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment
of the structure of the Latin language in schools is,
moreoyer, a matter of great practical difficulty, on
account of the early age at which the elements must
necessarily be learnt. We ought not, however, on this
account to separate the teaching of Latin from all con-
tact with scientific inquiry, the influence of which can
show itself with advantage, at least, in a more suitable
arrangement and distribution of the matter. Granting,
therefore, that our boys, as heretofore, must commit to
memory a large portion of Latin forms; granting that
the most important object in learning Latin consists,
perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed laws of syntax,
which obviously form the principal strength of the
Latin language ;—the case of the Greek is different.
The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the

vi PREFACE.

Greek language is the most ancient work of art which
they have reared upon a very primitive basis, ‘The
student, who approaches the Greek after he has already
gone through a considerable preparation by the study
of Latin, ought to be impressed with the idea that the
structure of this language is one of the most marvellous
productions of the intellectual powers acting uncon-
sciously. Everything lies here clear before us: the
sources of our knowledge are more varied, and the
necessity of analysing the given forms is rendered so
absolute, even on account of the Homeric dialect, that
this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely wanting,
and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 1782,
made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore,
to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the
school with the spirit of science, can here point to
numerous precedents, and it is, no doubt, mainly owing
to this circumstance that it has met with so favourable
a reception. My object has been to produce a con-
sistent system, a careful selection, and a clear and pre-
cise exposition, rather than an entirely new system.

In selecting and expounding the results of scientific
inquiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the
book was intended for practical use in schools. The
first requisite, therefore, was not to admit anything
which is beyond the sphere of the school, to explain only
that which is necessary, and to admit only that which
is absolutely certain. For a school-book must speak
categorically, must exclude all matters of mere opinion,
and has no space for discussion and inquiry. It is,
however, perfectly indifferent whether a result has been
obtained by special researches into the Greek language,
or by the more general inquiries of comparative
philology.

PREFACE. vii

I was further obliged to admit only those things
which find their explanation in the Greek language
itself, or at most in a comparison with the Latin ; but,
even within these limits, I have confined myself to
such innovations as really afford an important insight
into the structure of the forms, whereas all that belongs
to philological learning and many other things have
been passed over because they seemed unnecessary.
Among such superfluous innovations I include espe-
cially all changes of terminology, and the entire altera-
tion of whole parts of Grammar which are often still
less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor-
tance used to be attached.

The new technical terms I have introduced have
generally been approved of, and the principle stated in
my preface to the first edition, though not followed
with pedantic consistency, “if possible, to put signifi-
cant names in the place of dead numbers,” as for e. g.,
A Declension, O Declension, instead of First and
Second Declension, will scarcely be found fault with,
for a name with a meaning at once gives a piece of
information, and therefore facilitates learning. Doubts
have been raised only about the expressions strong and
weak, which I have employed to distinguish the two
Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware now as I was
at the first that, from the point of view of scientific
inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, but
[ nevertheless feel that I cannot give them up. For
the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless
we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more
consistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the
pupil by calling the Aorist which is treated of first the
second, and first the,one with which he is made ac-
quainted afterwards. But a common name to distin-

vill PREFACE.

guish the two forms of the Aorist Active Middle and
Passive, and of the Perfect Active, is indispensable
in a system of Greek Grammar. An innovation had
here become necessary, for both negative and posi-
tive reasons. The expressions strong and weak have
this advantage—that after being introduced by Grimm
into his German Grammar, they have also been adopted
by English Grammarians; and though I use them not
quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible.
It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil under-
stand that those forms are called strong which spring
from the root, as it were, by an internal agency, and
weak those which are formed by syllables added ex-
ternally —especially as he may easily compare the
English take, took, and love, loved. I still know of no
designation which, with so few disadvantages, offers so
many advantages as this, and I shall retain it until a
better one is suggested; and, after all, in necessary
innovations it is often more important that men agree,
than on whet they agree.

The fact that the most essential changes I have
made in the arrangements of the subjects—as, for
example, the strict adherence to the system of Stems in
all the inflexions, and especially the division of the
verb according to temporal Stems—haye met with the
approval of practical teachers, has been to me a source
of great gratification, it being a clear proof that the
demands of scientific inquiry are by no means so much
opposed to a right system of teaching as is still imagined
by many. The arrangement of temporal Stems is made
less upon scientific than upon didactic grounds, in such
a manner that kindred forms are joined together, and
due regard is paid to the progress from that which is
easy to that which is more difficult.

PREFACE. ; ix

- The chapter on the formation of words, though some-
what enlarged, has for the same reasons still been kept
very brief. But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed
attention to the formation of verbal nouns: in treating
of the verbs of the different classes, I have always
directed attention, by a number of characteristic exam-
ples, to the application of the different Stems in the
formation of words. By this means the learner has an
opportunity, during the study of his grammar, of
making himself acquainted with a number of words,
and I have no doubt that teachers will give their sanc-
tion to this arrangement.

In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent
linguistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this
part of the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle
of stating the essential idioms of the Greek language
with the utmost possible precision, and in the utmost
logical order. Only in some chapters, especially in
that on the use of the tenses, my system presents con-
siderable differences from the usual one. All minute
disquisitions, conjectures, and more or less probable
theories—among them especially the ever-repeated
_ theory about the original local meaning of the cases,
with which I cannot agree at all—have been rigorously
excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected to
compare the phenomena of the Greek language with
the corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also
of English, where this could be done with brevity and
advantage; for as the usage of a language must be
mainly comprehended by a feeling of language, I
imagine that every appeal to a Latin usage already
embodied with our feeling of language, or to an English
usage familiar to us from childhood, advances our
knowledge much more than philosophical definitions or |

4 PREFACE,

technical terms of vague or various meanings. Yor the
same reason I everywhere attach great importance te
an accurate translation of a Greek idiom into English
or Latin. I need hardly guard myself against the
opinion as if I considered such a translation to be a
philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon.
A real explanation is beyond the problem of a
Grammar.

I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is
not intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be com-
mitted to memory paragraph by paragraph; but, in
teaching, a suitable selection, according to the degree
of the pupil’s advancement, should be made by the
teacher. By a difference in type I have myself, at
least partially, indicated this.

It may be remarked in general that the first business”
everywhere is that of memory, and only when the
actual forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been
committed to memory, analysis may be added. First
knowledge, then understanding—this ought to be the
leading principle; but, as I have said in another place,
“ Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety
of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported
by an analysing and combining intelligence, which
furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen
that which has been learned, and permanently to im-
press it upon the mind.” If details learned at different
times and carefully committed to memory, during a
subsequent repetition variously combine with one an-
other, and form various groups; if, then, many things
at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of
a law pervading the language, such insight is certainly
not a mere support of memory, but animates the desire
to learn, and incites to exercise the power of thought in

PREFACE, x!

a variety of ways. The present book offers to teachers
abundant opportunities for such exercises, and acquires
its highest efficacy under the guidance of thinking
teachers who are truly familiar with it, and take a
delight in its subjects. That the book has actually
found such teachers has been proved to me in various
ways, and caused me sincere gratification.

G. 0.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

—_—*0o7 —

INTRODUCTION.

Tug Greek LANGUAGE AND ITs DIALEcTs.

FIRST PART. — ETYMOLOGY.

I. Letters and Sounas.

Cuar. I.—Tur Greek CHARACTERS,

A. Letters oe

oe ee ee er ee oe

B. Gilder Oharactors ie Oh eer ary ye ware ete ee

C. Accents

SEMIMEEMAGION: oc ~ ‘ce oa ag. be’. eeur Bord, we

Cuap, II.—Tuer Sounps,

A. The Vowels .. .. ia ery koe
B. The Consonants .. .. $e

Cuap. III.—ComBinaTIons AND CHANGES OF SoUNDS.

A. Vowelsin Combination .. «2 «. «
B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes .. .. “
C. Consonants in Combination with one another

D. Other Changes in the middle of a word

E. Changes of Sound at the end ofaword ..

Cuaap, IV.—Dtvision or SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANT?TY.

A. Division of Syllables .. .. ..

B. Quantity

Cyap, V.—AccEnts oe ee ee ord ee ee *e ee

Sec,
1—9
10—16
17—22
23

24—29
30—34

85—39
40—43
44—54
55—62
63—69

70—73
74—78

7T9—99

xiv CONTENTS.

II. Inflexion.
A. IxrLexion or Nouns anp Pronouns.

Cuar. VI.—DecLeNsIon oF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJEC-
TIVES.

First Prixcrpa (or VowEL) DECLENSION. Sec.
A. The A Declension +3 « 112-113
(Commonly called the First “Declension.)
I. Feminines. 2. <s. "se |, os 6s ae
2. Masculines ee ** * * * * * 120—123
B. The O Declension ae « 124—131
(Commonly called the Second Declenston -)
Attic Declension bot Mash. seer eee -- 182—133
SeconD Principat (on Consonant) DecLENsION .. 1385—143
(Commonly called the Third Declension.\
1. Consonant Stems:
a. Guttural and Labial Stems .. -- 144—145
b. Dental Stems.. g .. 146—149
c. Liquid Stems - 150—153
2. Vowel Stems:
a. Soft Vowel Stems .. .. 154—158
b. Diphthong Stems .. .- 159—161
c. O Stems ‘i . 162—163
3. Stems suffering Elision : :
a. Sigma Stems... .. .. «© « «+ «« 164—167
a, 7-Stems * e * ee * ** . 168—169
c. y-Stems ee or ** oe ee oe oe ee 170—171
Irregularities in Declension .. «2 «. «2 «e 174—177
Case-like Terminations Crd e a) ee - - 178—179
Oxap. VII.—OrTner INFLEXIONS oF THE ADJECTIVE
A. Gender -- ** * se ca e * * -- 180—191
B. Comparison ee * * ee oT * - 192—200
Cc. Adverbs of ‘Adjectives ..; - * ee. oT or oe 201—204
Car, VIII.—InFiexion or Pronouns... .. . 205—219
Cuapr, IX.—TuHeE NuMERALS - - ee ee *- . 220—224

CONTENTS xV
B. INFLEXION OF VERBS, SEc.
General Remarks ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 225—230
List oF PARADIGMS. TABLE,
Eipi,Iam.. .. a,” ee I
Synopsis of vo, I loose (exhibiting the meanings of
the Tenses) .. .2 oc oF e at Feb IT.
VERBS IN Q,
A. Vowel Stems:
Pe WuGon tracted, AU@. > 6s. ee 8s a> os IIL
2. Contracted, riudw, movéw, Sovldo a IV.
B. Consonant Stems:
1. Guttural Stems, rhéxo, fevyo, rdcow .- Vv.
2. Dental Stems, yevdouat, weiOw, kopito .. Vij
8. Labial Stems, réyzr@, Aeitw, kaXintoCli(“w~S(«CV'OUL
4, Liquid Stems, d€pa, dyyédAw, oreipo Vill
VERBS IN MI.
First Class, riOnpe, dSidope, tornpe IX,
Second Class, Seixvupe = 6. ewe X.
Ounar. X.—First Principat ConJUGATION OR VERBS IN Q.
I, The Present-Stem : SEc,
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem .. .. .. 231—233
B. The Augment .. .. . oF «. o 284—242
C. Kbnkineted Verbs ue oo we we 2438-—2.44
D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the
Il. The Strong Aorist-Stem ee ee . es ee 254—257
Ill. The Future-Stem Gates eas eed . 258—266
IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem .. «2 os . 267—271
pre Perlect-HOM sy én ke kw) ws ce ae 272
3 Perfect Active ee ee ee . 276—282
2. Pluperfect Active ae, ee ‘ 283
3. Perfect Middle and Passive .. 284—289
4. Pluperfect Middle and Passive .. . 290—291
VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem . 292—295
VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem . 296—299
Verbal Adjectives ‘ wets ‘es 300
Verbs which leave their Stem-Vowel ‘hat re dug 801

xvl CONTENTS,

Cuar. XI.—Sgconp PrincipaL CoNJUGATION OR VERBS
IN MI. SEc
Preliminary Remarks Tree
1. First Clam 4.) 10 co 60 es we sb)
2. Second Olass .. =... << ce ‘se os” lee nm

Cuap, XII.—Igrecutar VERBS OF THE First ConJu-
GATION 4. 0s cc iss os u:ostineeeeeen

Anomalies in Signification .. .. « « e- 328-—330
Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms -- 881—3833
Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect .. 384D—338D

III. Derivation.

Cuap, XITI.—
A. Simple Derivatives .. oo 0s ce ot OO
1. The most important Suffixes for forming
Substantives .. oe oe 341—349

2. The most important ‘Suffixes for —
Adjectives oo 00, eo 9s) se hen
8. Derivative Verbs oc. se. eb) 353
B. Compound Derivatives :
1. Form of the Combination .. .. « «. 354—858
2. Meaning of Combination .. .. .. «. 859—360

SECOND PART.—SYNTAX.
Preliminary Remarks oe 6b 60 400) See 861
Cuap, XIV.—Numser AND GENDER) os ce os oe SO2—367
Cuap. XV.—THE ARTICLE .. os «2 of of co» S0G—091

Cuap. XVI.—UszE or CasEs: .
A. Nominative... .. so eo eo 08 6 ss Gnaeus
B. Vocative oe “ae "ode: “ew. alled: ge 394
C. Accusative .. .. « e e8 es «e se Svo—400
D. Genitive Pee ee ee PS ™”
| AD US,” PR

Quar. XVII.—THE PREPOSITIONS .. «2 02 oF cs 444
General view of the Prepositions se ee 448
1, Prepositions which take only One Case oo ee 449—457
2. Prepositions which take Two Cases .. .. «. 458—461
8. Prepositions which take Three Cases .. «.. «. 462—462

CONTENTS. xvli
SEc.
Cuap. XVIII.—TuHe Pronouns .. 2. oe of o¢ 469—475
Cuap. XIX.—THE Kinps or VERBS oo ee cs) oe 476—483
Cap. XX.—USE OF THE TENSES .. .. ss ‘eo oe 484
1. The forms for the Incomplete Action... .. .. 486—491
2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action «. 492—498
3. The Future .. .. dt de ee es 499001
4, The forms for the Complete Ketlon ee ee = ee: BOZ—506
Cuap. XXI.—Usz or THE Moons.
A. In Simple Sentences :
Me EEMEEIVG Ss \) ce | 50, Ces. oe anh, oe 507
2. Subjunctive.. .. .. 8 eo e» ee 508—513
TDORLAVG ok). os Ge, | oe. 6a > ons) og DLROLRE
ES Snr ae Coe ee em 518
B, In Compound Sentences :
Connexion of Sentences with one another .. 519—524
1. Dependent, Aes and Interrogative
Sentences .. «. 525—529
2. Sentences expressing a , purpose: . -- 580—533
8. Conditional Sentences <6 en. 160, or DOeSOe
4. Relative Sentences .. .. « « «+. 551—556
5. Temporal Sentences .. .. .. « « 556—558
OCnap, XXII.—Tue Inrinitive.
1. Use of the Infinitive in general .. » 559—566
2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the
Infinitive .. .. os oe ee OOT—HTZ
8. The Infinitive with the “Article ee oe we we HTB —BT4
4. The Infinitive with dy .. .. « « 575—576
5. The Infinitive instead of the Imperative oe 577
Cuap. XXIII.—Ow Participies.
ECMeRSPIIBIVO USO oy ae sk oe wh, se 578
2. Appositive Use .. « ~—«- 579—583
3. The Participle with an “Absolute ‘Case oo o 584—586
4. Supplements to Participles .. .. .. « + 587—588
5. The Predicative Participle .. .. « .. .« 589—594
6. The Participle with dy .. .. . «8 of 595
URE CEDGE ACSCOUVES 4. 46 cc ee te tee 596
CaaPr. XXIV.—Some Pecunianities IN RELATIVE
TP ar Caer ee eT ee Pn 597—606

xviii CONTENTS.

Omar, XXV.—INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES .. .. of 606—611

Cuar. XXVI.—Tue Necatives.
1, Use of Simple Negatives .. .. «. «o «- 612—618
2. Several Negatives combined oo oe oe

8. Some Negative Phrases.. .. «2 «© cf oe 622
Onap, XXVII.—Tue Parricies,
A. Conjunctions oo a6" oe tad, Lee ee 623
1, Copulative Conjunctions .. .. « «. 624—625
2. Disjunctive i. oo oe es os
3. Adversative ss oo oe we we 628—630
4, Comparative ” oo oe oe) ws OSI —632
5. Declarative e oo ‘ae * ae 633
6. Temporal oo oe = oe) ee OO4—BSD
7. Causal Pt oe =x ee ee 636
8. Inferential a 00: pé oad ne 637
9. Final ~ oe ae teen 638
10. Hypothetical _,, a ee 639
11. Concessive Re oo oa “eines 640

B, Emphatic Particles ee * oo * * 641—648

Paez,
eS et ee en 862
GREEK INDEX es ory * os ee ae oa > ee *- 856

THE

STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR.

INTRODUCTION.

THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS.

Tur Greek language is the language of the Ancient
Hellenes (“EAAnves), the inhabitants of Greece, with all
its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the
languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians,
Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister-
languages, and together form the Indo-European family.

The Greeks were early divided into races, each of
which spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of
the Greek language are the Aecolic, Doric, and Ionic.
At first each race employed its own dialect both in
poetry and in prose.

1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race,
especially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous
islands, and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of
the dialects developed by poetry, and produced three
different but nearly related dialects, viz. :—

a) The Old-Ionie or Epic dialect, which is preserved
in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their
followers.

6) The New-Ionie dialect, which we know chiefly -
from the history of Herodotus.

0bs.—The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated Ly the
common name, Jonic, as distinguished from the Attic.

e) The Aftie dialect, in which are written the nume-
rous works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in
B

2 INTRODUCTION.

the time of her glory. The principal writers of the
Attic dialect are—the tragedians, Aeschylus, Sophocles,
Euripides, the comic writer Aristophanes, the historians
Thucydides and Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the
great orators Lysias, Demosthenes, and Aeschines.
Through the importance of Athens in Greece, and the
excellence of the Attic literature, the Attic became the
chief dialect of the Greek language.
Obs.—A less important distinction is made between the earlier and
later Attic writers. The tragedians and Thucydides belong to
the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The

language of Plato is intermediate between the two: that of the
tragedians has also many other peculiarities,

2. The Arouic dialect was spoken by the Aeolians,
particularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly.
Alcaeus and Sappho wrote in this dialect.

3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians,
chiefly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in
Crete, and in the numerous Doric colonies, especially
Sicily and Lower Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect
of Pindar’s lyric poems and Theocritus’ bucolies (herds-
man’s poetry). The choruses in the tragedies also con-
tain some Doric forms.

4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in
Greece, the Attic dialect still remained the language of
educated Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from
its primitive purity and excellence, and thus from the
third century before Christ the common Greek dialect
(% xowwn Siadextos) was distinguished from the Attic.

On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the
common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher
Aristotle. Amongst later authors, the most important
are: the historians Polybius, Plutarch, Arrian, Dion
Cassius; the geographer Strabo; the rhetoricians
Dionysius of Halicarnassus and Lucian.

Parr FIrRsrv.

——

foe eM OE O Gy.

I.—LETTERS AND SOUNDS.

Cuap. I.—THr GREEK CHARACTERS.

A.—Letters.

§ 1. The Greek letters are the following :—

Large Character. Small Character,

SeMSEBHMIYHONAZSEPRYOMNEDP IP

SERGE cwqgyvrnyAomeBrac osvre O2 WR

2)

Name,
Alpha
Beta ,
Gamma
Delta
Epsilon
Zeta
Eta
Theta
Iota
Kappa
Lambda
Mu

Omikron
Pi

Pronunciation.
a (short or long)
b
g
d
é (only short)
Z
é (only long)
th

i (short or long)

ii (short or long
ph
ch

g

6 (only long)

4 LETTERS. § 2.

§ 2. For s there is a double sign in the small charac-
ter: o at the beginning and in the middle, and ¢ at the
end, of a word. Hence, cvv, ceiw, }oav, but roves, Képas.
In compound words s may also stand at the end of the
first word in the compound: zpos-épyouat, dds-Baros.

§ 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the
expression “Alphabet.” The characters of the Greek
alphabet do not essentially differ from those of the
Latin and of modern languages. All come from the
alphabet of the Phoenicians.

In regard to pronunciation the following points are
to be observed :—

§ 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike.
But y is an exception, since, before y, «, y, or &, it is
pronounced ng. Hence in Latin it is represented by n:
Téyyo is pronounced tengo; cvyxara, syngkalo ; doyyn,
longché ; poppy, phormins

§ 5. €is pronounced like the English z. It is of very
different origin in different cases. Compare pe/fwv (for
peywov) from péyas; Svydv with Latin gugum, Engl.
yoke; &c.

§ 6. ¢ we pronounce as f, but probably the Greeks
pronounced the p and h separately ; hence ph, not f, is
used in Latin for d: pirocodgia, philosophia ; DiroxryTys,
Philoctetes.

§ 7. @ we pronounce like the English th.

§ 8. Of the diphthongs, av and e are both pronounced
as et in height ; oc as oy in boy; av,as aw in law; ov, as
ow in bow ; uw, as wy in why (hwy); ev and qu, as ew in
new. The iota subscriptum (underwritten) is not pro-

§ 3. Dialects—The Greek language had in the most ancient times
another letter, F, which was called Digainma (diyappa = “ double
gamma”) from its form, and Vaw (fav) from its pronunciation. It
was pronounced like the Latin v: foivos, wine = Lat. vinum, Ata
later time it was written only by the Aeolians and Dorians.

§ 14. OTHER CHARACTERS. 5

nounced in g, 7, ». It is not written under, but after,
capitals, as Av, Hu, Oz, but still remains unpronounced.

§ 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together,
are to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it
a diaeresis, (Siaipeois=separation): thus mdis is pre.
nounced pa-is ; dimvos, a-wpnos.

B.— Other Characters.

§ 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has
also the sign ‘, which is placed over the initial vowel
to which it belongs, and represents the h: &€ is pro-
nounced hex; ara, hapax. This sign is called spiritus
asper, “ rough breathing.”

§ 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also
mark those initial vowels which have not this breathing
with the sign ’ 2. e., the spiritus lenis, “ gentle breathing.”
This sound indicates only the raising of the voice which
is necessary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no
consonant precedes: é« is pronounced ek ; aya, ago.

§ 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the
second vowel: ottos=howtos ; cidSov=eidon. But when
the first vowel is in large character, the breathing stands
_ before it: “Avdns= Hades ; °O18y= Oda.

§ 15. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it:
parr@dos, pedua. In Latin the aspirate is written after
the p: rhapsodus, rheuma. When two p’s come together
in a word,’ is usually placed over the first, and ‘ over
the second : lvppos=Pyrrhus ; Kadduppon= Callirrhoe.

0bs,—Many write the double p without any breathing: [vppos;

Kad)uppén.

§ 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign ~ over a
yowel denotes that the vowel is long, ~ that it is short,
and ~ that it is sometimes one, sometimes the other
In Greek they are used only with the vowels a, «, v.
since €, 7, 0, w are ‘listinguished by their form.

6 ACCENTS. § is

§ 15. The sign’ at the junction of two words indicates
the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called
an apostrophe: map éxeivp for mapa éxeivp, with that
one; pn “ye for pr) eye (ne ego).

§ 16. The same sign has the name coronis (xopwvis)
when it stands over the junction of two words contracted
into one, Ttovvoua for ro dvopa, the name; xdryabds for
Kal ayabos, and good. It indicates that a crasis (xpaous,
mixture) or contraction of two words has taken place,
and, like the breathing, stands over the second yowel
of a diphthong; radro for rd aire, the same.

C.— Accents.

§ 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or ACCENT
(arposwdia) of words. ‘The sign’ over a vowel is called
the acute accent (o£eta mpos@édia), that is, the sharp or
raised tone: Aoyos, TovTwY, Tapa, repos. The syllable
thus marked must be raised above the rest.

A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable
is called oxytone (o€vrTovov) : mapa, eimé, Bacireus.

A word having the acute accent upon the last but one
is called paroxytone (wapokitovov): réyw, paiva.

A word having the acute accent upon the last but
two is called proparoxytone (rpomapokvrovoy) : Néyerat,
elreTe.

§ 18. Obs.—A proparoxytone having a long vowel or diphthong
in the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so
as to give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the
length of the second syllable: Bé8nxa should be pronounced
bébéka ; axdBave, apdbaine. The accent, however, is usually
disregarded in the English pronunciation of Greek words.

§ 19. The sign ‘ over a vowel is called the grave accent
(Bapeia tpospdia). It indicates a low tone, that is, that
a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in dvéBaivé, the
last two might have the grave accent. The marking of
them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of
the acute being a sufficient guide. All words without

23. PUNCTUATION. . 7

am accent on the final syllable are therefore called
barytone (Bapurova): Néyo, ErEpos.

§ 20. The sign ‘, however, also denotes a subdued
acute, and occupies the place of an acute in every
oxytone not immediately followed by a pause: azo,
from, but azo tovrov, from this; Bactreds, a king, but
Bacireds éyévero, he became king. Oxytones, therefore,
retain their accent unchanged only at the end of a
sentence.

§ 21. The sign * over a vowel is called the circumflex
accent (repioTr@pévn mposwdia), from its shape. The
circumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave ».

A word having a cireumflex on the last syllable is
called perispomenon (repiom@pevov) ; wyabois, oKias.

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable
but one is called properispomenon (potepioTr@evov) :
gebye, Biire.

§ 22. In diphthongs the accent, like the breathing
(§ 12), is put over the second vowel: gevyet, TodTo.

When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet
upon the same vowel the accent is placed over the
breathing: odtos, 700s, Qos. The acute, in a similar
case, stands to the right of the breathing: dye, gpyouar,
“Tov.

Obs.—The acute is placed between the two points of a diaeresis
(9), didios, but the circumflex over them, mpaitva.

D.—Punetuation.

§ 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and
periods the Greeks employ the comma and the full-
point. For the sign of interrogation they use the
semicolon: ti etwas; what did you say? For the
colon or semicolon they place a point at the upper part
of the line: épwTa® buds ti éroujcare; I ask you:
what did you do? éamépa fv" tote HAGEv aryyeros, tt
was evening ; then a messenger came.

8 VOWELS. § 24.

Cuap. Il.—TueE Sovunps.
A.—The Vowels.

§ 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has five
vowels, of which the first four are like the Latin,
a, e, 0, % But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks
have v (pronounced nearly like the French uw and the
German i).

§ 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long
and short, are divided into two classes—the hard and
the soft vowels: a, ¢, 7, 0, w are hard; v, ¢, soft.

§ 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together
arise diphthongs (SipOoyyor, i. e., double-sounds). They
are :—

av from a and v. ov from o and v,
at ”° a 5 i ol ” O ys b&
at tL ey v5 oe

pos the. 8,

§ 27. The union of long hard vowels with « produces

§ 24. Dialects——The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit
different vowels from those usual in the Attic Dialect. Thus—

_i The Jonic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers n, tor Attic

: Att. @opag, Ion. Beopné, breastplate: Att. dyopa, lon. ayopn,
patirtols Att. vais, Ion. ms, ship: but Ion. pecapSpin for Att.
peonpSpia, midday.

2. The Doric, on the sairtcties prefers @: Att. djpos, Dor. dapos
people: Att. unrnp, mother, Dor. parnp (comp. Latin mater): Dor.
*Adava for ’A@nva, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets.

3. The Ionic dialect often changes ¢ to e, and o to ov: Att. £évos,
Ton. £eivos, foreign: Att. évexa, Ion. eivera, on account of: Att.
povos, Ion. podvos, alone: Att. dvopa, Ion. otvoua, name. Rarely
o to ot, or a to at: Att. iyvdnoe, Ion. Hyvoince, he knew not.

§ 26. Dialects—The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong
ev, Which, however, only comes in place of av in the other dialects.
Gwipa for Oadipa, wonder: éwvrod for éavrod, of himself: wv must
be pronounced az ou,

§ 33, CONSONANTS. 9

the spurious diphthongs, g, 7, », in which the under-
written iota is not heard. (Comp. § 8.)

§ 28. The Greek language also combines v with s, but
only before vowels: pvia, a fly.

§ 29. We further distinguish the obscure o-sound (0, w),
the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (e, 7),
and the more obscure v from the clearer «.

B.—The Consonants.

§ 30. The consonants are divided: I. According to
the position in the mouth where they are produced, i.e.,
according to their organ (épyavov, “ instrument”),
into :—

1. GUTTURALS (throat-sounds) x, , x.
2. DENTALS (teeth-sounds) 7, 6, 6, , A, p, 0
8. Laprats. (lip-sounds) _z, 8, ¢, pw.

§ 31. If. According to their power, that is, whether
they can be pronounced with or without a vowel,
into :—

§ 32. 1. Murss (mutae) :—

(a.) hard ‘(tenues) «x, 7, 7.
(5.) soft (mediae) y¥, 6, B.
(c.) aspirated (aspiratae) x, 0, >.

Obs.—The aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant
with the rough breathing, x therefore=«‘ (kh); 6=r* (th);
=n" (ph).

§ 33. 2. Vocats (semivocales) :—

(a.) Inquids (liquidae) 2, p.

(6.) Nasals (nasales) y (y before gutturals, § 4), », pu.

(c.) Stbilant (sibilans) o (s).

§ 32. Dialects.—In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the
breathing : Séxopa: for Attic déyoua, accept; adris for Attic adds,
again, "The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing: x.da»
for Att. xiray, tunic; evOedrev for Att, évreddev.

10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34.

§ 34. The double consonants belong to both kinds:
E,W, ¢: for E=xo, p=mo, $=6 with a soft sibilant
(§ 4).

Obs.—-xco only occurs in compounds with é«: éxowta, J rescue,

Cuar, IJI.—Comprnations AND CHANGES OF
Sounpbs.

A.— Vowels in Combination.

§ 35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may

§ 34. Dialects.—A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want
of the breathing v. The v, however, was not altogether wanting ;
for

1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in
the beginning of the following words: dyvupt, break; Gus, nume-
vous; Gditxopa, am caught; avag, ruler; avacow, rule; dvdave,
please ; dpucés, tender ; Gorv, city; éap, spring [ver]; €Ovos, swarm, -
people; eixoor, twenty (Dor. Fixart, Lat. viginti; ; eikw, yield; eiha,
press; éxnrt, willingly ; éxupds, father-in-law; éxoy, willing ; €Xropat,
hope; the pronominal Stem € (é0, sui) foixa, appear; eros word;
eixov, spoke; épyov, work ; epyw, close in; éppw, go on; epi, draw ;
€péw, shall say ; eo Ons, clothing; «twa, dress (Stem Fes, Latin vestis) ;
érns, relative ; dvs, agreeable ;”Dxos, city Ilios ; icos, equal; oikos,
house ; olvos, wine (vinum). On the operation of the digamma, see
§ 63 D., 75 D.

2. The F in the middle occurred in dis, sheep, from ofts, (Latin
ovis) ; vn-ds, of the ship, from vafos (Latin navis), Gen. of vad-s.

3. The Dorians and Aeolians retained the digamma at the be-
gitning of many words: Aeol. Feros, year, Dor. Fidsos, own.

4, In Homer, at the beginning of many words, ¢ stands for F,
éé, him, self ; éeixoat, twenty ; elon, equal ; eedvov, marriage-gifl=
édvov.

§ 35. Dialects.—The Dialects vary much in regard to the com-
binations of vowels. The Epic and New-Ionic leave many syllables
uncontracted: éi=ed, well: diopar=otopa, I think: wdis=mais,
boy: 1d0s=vois, sense: dirénre=dudrAare (ametis): déxov=Axwy,
unwilling. Some of the forms ustia'ly uncontracted are, on the

§ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. Pf

combine. ‘The dissimilar vowels pair with one another
best :—

1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the
hard vowels: codia, wisdom: dAz%¥w, I loosen: iavw, 1
slumber: der, tt rains: ebtvova, benevolence.

2. Hard vowels before soft ones become diphthongs:
ev, ed, good: mais, mais, boy: yévei, yéver, to the race.

Obs.—Diphthongs sometimes lose their second part before vowels :

Bov-ds becomes Bo-és (bov-is), kai-w, xd-w, burn. Comp.
§§ 160, 248, Obs,

§ 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels cannot well stand to-
gether, and hence when they meet are often contracted
according to the following laws :—

1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel: Adas
becomes as, stone; tyrow, &mro, I am zealous ; Xiios,
Xios, a Chian ; pirénte, pidrjte, amets, in which cases
e and », o and @ are similar.

Still it must be observed that ee usually become «.,
and oo become ov: Trolee, mole, do; md0do0s, TAods,
passage by sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning
a diphthong disappear: )dov, wrod, of a passage ;
oixéet, oixet, dwells; dirén, piry, amet.

§ 37. 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which

contrary, contracted in these dialects: tpds=iepds, holy: Bocas=
Boncas, one who has called.

2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by
this letter first becoming F, and then being quite dropped (comp.
§ 34, D. 2): Bov-és—Bof-ds [ bov-ts |—Bo-és.

§ 37. Dialects—1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus
in New-Ionic especially, eo and cov are contracted into ev, not inte
ov: moteoper, Toredpev, We Make: trovéovor, wovedot, they make.

2. In the Ionic dialect, do (no), often changes to ew: "Arpeidan.
*Arpeidew, of Atrides: taos, thews, merciful. a before @ is often
changed into the thinner sound ¢: Hooedéov=Moceddwr, Att.
Tlocetday, the God Poseidon.

3. In Doric, ao, aw, are contracted into @: ’Arpeidao=’Arpeisa,
MovedSdav=ocedav, Ocawv (dearum)= dear.

12

VOWELS IN COMBINATION.

a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer

(§ 29).

r

Thus from
ao comes @ in Tipdopev
NO 4, @ 4, wn-dduvos
oa 4 @ 4, aidda
aay 393 O59 (nAdnre
€0 4, O04, yéveos

’

oe ,, ov,, (nroe
aot 4, @ 4, aody
aov » @ 4, Tysdov
NOV 45 @ 45 pi) ody
€ov 4, 0vV,, xpucéov
€0L 4, Ol 4, Xpvoeot

oe 4, wt, Cyrdes
ov, vlvdets

Tipa@peyv, we honour,
vaduvos, painless,

aida, pudorem,

(nore, ye are jealous,
yévous, of the race.
(nrov, be jealous,

#67, song.

tipa@, be honoured,
por, surely not.
xpuaod, of the golden,
xpvoot, the golden,
(rois, thou art jealous.
oivovs, abounding in wine.

Obs.—oer become ov when the e represents the lengthening of e

(§ 42).

§ 38. 6) When the medium a-sound and clearer
e-sound meet, the first in order gains the upper hand :-—

ae become 4G in déxoy

any, G4, Tidyre
ae 4, G4, deido
GN 45 @ 5g Tecins
€2 5, 1) 55 €ap
€at 5, «53 Aveat
NAL 45 Ny AUNat

dxov, unwilling.
riysare, honoretis,

ado, I sing.

tipas, honores.

ip, spring.

Avy, thou art loosened,
Avy, solvaris,

Obs.—In the contractions of aes and eat, sometimes at takes the

place of a, es that of y.

So from deckys, unfit, comes aixns ;

from deipo, I lift up, comes aipw; from Aveat comes Aver
(with Avy). Exceptions, §§ 130, 243 (riypay), 244.

§ 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet
together is called Synizesis (cuvifnars, i.e., sinking). It
consists in the first vowel being written but not pro-
nounced as a vowel: @é0s—as one syllable.

§ 39. Dialects.—Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after
€: IIndniddew, of Pelides: xpvoéos, aureis: véa, navem: also,

wdduas, cities: dydoos, the eighth.

§ 43. OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 13

B.— Other kinds of Vowel-changes.

§ 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their
being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are dis-
tinguished, viz. :—

1. Organie lengthening, i.e., that which is required by
inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening—

a generally becomes y tizdw, I honour, Fut. tino.

o always » ® (rdw, Iam jealous, ,, (nioco
oe » 9 mow, I make, » TOT,
i either » t tw, I honour, 4, Thee.
or » € St. Aer, Pres, Aelia, I leave.
sometimes ,, ot ,, Aer, Adj. Aourds, remaining.
3 either » v Avo, I loose, Fut. Ado.
OF. » €v St. guy, Pres. pev'yw, I flee.

§ 41. Obs.—After ¢, 1, and p, a is changed to a instead of y:
édo, J leave, allow; fut. édow; St. ia, heal ; iarpdés, physician ;
St. dpa, see; papa, a view. The Attic dialect is altogether
averse to the combinations, en, un, pn, and frequently puts ed,
ta, pa, in their place,

§ 42. 2. Compensatory lengthening, i. e., that which
is used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it 4,
eyen when ¢, 4, or p does not precede, is often changed
to @: mds, every, from ma-vt-s—e generally becomes
et: elt, I am, from éo-ps (§ 315)—o generally becomes
ov: did0vs for d:50-vr-s [Lat. da-n-s|—i always becomes
i, and # always 0: Sevevi-s for Secxvu-vt-s, showing.

Obs.—Exceptions, in which ¢ becomes 7, and o becomes a, are

given in § 147, and in which a becomes 7 in § 270.

§ 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange
in one and the same Stem, when, generally, ¢ is re-
garded as the Stem-vowel: rpéa, I turn; érparov, I

§ 40. Dialects.—The extension of v to ov appears in eiAnAovéa,
am come, from Stem dvd (§ 327, 2).

§ 41. Dialects ——The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the
coinbinations en, and py: irén=Attic trea, pasture: inrpds=Att.
larpés, physician : metipnoopar=Att. retpdcopa, I will try.

The Doric dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens & into
@: rywaow=tiyjow, I will honour (§ 24, D. 2).

l4 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 4.

turned ; tpotros, turning : Stem reves, Nom. ryévos, race :
[comp. Lat. generis, Nom. genus]: déyo, I burn ;
pro€, flame,

m also is at times changed to w: dpyya, I hae
apwyos, helper.

C.— Consonants in combination with one another.

§ 44. Consonants, in regard to their combination, are
subject to still greater limitation and change than the
vowels, Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33)
agree best with one another, especially the mutes with
the liquids,

That discordant consonants may continue together,
they are either made more like one another (assimilated)
or more unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for
the necessary changes of consonants are the following:

§ 45. 1. Before mute dentals (§§ 30, 31) only conso-
nants of other organs which are of the same order (that
is, both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can
stand; consequently, the only allowable combinationy
of sounds are—xr, m7, 5, 85, x5, $ .

When a different mute stands before the dental,
through inflexion or derivation, it must be assimilated

to the order of the latter. Consequently,

«d and xd become y8. 78.and $8 become 8.

KO ,, y9 ” x9. nO ,, BO ”? go.

YT o> XT ? KT. Br , or ” mT.

Therefore,
mAex-Onva becomes mAexOjva from Ado, I weave.
Aey-ros » Aexrds 9 Aétyo, I say
[lectus instead of leg-tus],

Aey-Onva » AexOnva ,, eyo, J say.

8ex-Tos » Sexros » S€xoua, I receive

[tractus instead of trah-tus from traho].
tun -Onva » TuPOnva from rire, I strike,
ypap-ros » Yypanros 4, ypadhe, I write,
ypap-dny » —- ypdBSnv ” ” ”

Obs.—The preposition éx, out of (Lat. ex) remains unchanged in
all combinations: &Oeois, casting out, €xdpoun, running out.

§ 48. CONSONANTS IN COMBINA™ ON, 15

§ 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mu’e dentals to be audi-
ble are changed into o (Déssimilation) : therefore,

“rr, dr, and 6r become or

70,50, ,, 00 4, o@: hence

avut-ros becomes dvvorés, accomplished from dvitw, I accomplish,
@o-reov » aaréor, canerdum est » ade, I sing.
weO-Onvae 4, meicOnvas, to be persuaded ,, meiOw I persuade.

§ 47. 3. Before w a guttural becomes y, a dental o, a
labial ». Therefore,

di@x-pos becomes Siwypds, persecution, from dioxw, I pursue.
Be-Bpex-par ,, BeBpeypar, I have been wetted, from Bpéxe, I wet.
id-pev » ltopev, we know, from oida, I know.
HvuT-pat, » Hvvopat, I have been perfected, from avira, I
accomplish.
we-metO-pevos ,, memetopévos, persuaded, from reidw, I persuade.
Ko7r-}40$ » koppds, a striking, from xém-ra, I strike {summus
from sup-mus].
re-rpiB-pa ,, rerpiupat, I have been rubbed, from rpiBw, I rub.
ypap-pa » Yypappa, letter, from ypape, I write.
Obs.—Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain
unchanged : axpn, bloom ; pvOuds, movement, rhythm ; apOpés,
number.
The preposition éx leaves its x unchanged : ékpdoow, wipe out.

§ 48. 4. Before o, as a hard consonant, y and y be-
come «, and 8 becomes 7 (Assimilation): xo is then
written £ and wo y: therefore,

dy-cw becomes dx-ow, written dé-o, I shall lead, from ayw, I lead
[reat instead of reg-st from reg-o].
Sex-copae ,, Sex-copat, written dé£opuae, I shall receive, from d€xopat,
I receive (traxt instead of trah-si from trah-o].

tpi3-0@ 4, Tpin-cw, written rpiva, I shall rub, from rpiBo,
I rub (scripsi instead of serib-si from serib-o].
ypap-o® 4, ypan-ow, written ypaya, I shall write, from ypdd-o,
write,
Obs.—It is clear from § 34 that every x and w with o must

§ 47. Dialects.—The change of dentals and gutturals before u
is frequently omitted in Ionic: tk-pevos, favourable, from St. ux
(ixavw, I come); dxaxpevos, pointed, from St. dx, (Lat. acuo) ;
avrpn, breath; dd3un, smell, from St. 08 (6fw) [od-or], Att. do-pn :
id-mev, we know=Att. to-pev: xexopvOpévos, equipped, from St,
copv8 (koptiorw)=Att. Kexapucpevos.

16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 48
become € and y: hence mAcx-ow becomes mAdE@ from mrexa,
I weave ; Nem-ow becomes Aeiyra from dela, J leave.

§ 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before
o, are dropped without compensation ; in like manner y
llisappears before & Therefore,

dvut-ors becomes 4viiots, accomplishment, from dvirw, I accomplish.
7 d-copae joopat, I shall rejoice, from Sopa, I rejoice (laest
eS ee Se Tada a ‘asda
kopvé-ct 4, —Kdpvar, to the helmets, from xépus, Gen, xdpu-Oos,
met,
Baimov-ot gy Saipzoar, to the demons, from Sa/pwv, deemon,
wur-(uyos 4, citvyos, yoked together, from ov, together, and
(vydv, yoke.

Hence o before another o is lost: retyeo-o« becomes reiye-ot, to

walls (from reixos, wall) ; éo-copat, €-copat.

Obs, 1.—yv is not always dropped before o or ¢ in composition,
In the preposition év the y remains for the sake of clearness:
évotata, I trickle in; évgevyvums, I harness. The v in way,
all, every, and wdduv, again, either remains unchanged, or is .
assimilated to the following o: mdvcoqos, all-wise, mahio-
autos from madw-ovros, starting back. The v in ovv, with,
is dropped before ¢ or o with a consonant following: ov{uyos
(see above) ; cvornua, system; it is assimilated before a simple
o: cvociroy from cuv-ctriov, common meat.

2. Sometimes » remains unchanged before o in the 2d, Pers. Sing.
of the Perf. Mid.: wé-pav-ca, thou hast appeared.

3. In exceptional cases compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes
place when a single y is omitted: for instance,

a) In some Nominatives Sing.: pedd-s, black, for pedav-s.

b) In the 3rd Pers. Pl. of the chief tenses, where o has taken
the place of r: Av-ov-ar, they loosen, instead of Av-ov-ot
(originally Av-ov-re) (§ 60).

c) Often in derivation: yepouvoia, senate, instead of yeporria,
from St. yepovr, Nom. yéper, old man,

§ 50. 6. The combinations vr, v0, vd, are likewise
omitted before o, but cause a compensatory lengthening
(§ 42) :—
mavr-ot becomes raox, to all, from St. ravr- Nom. wa-s

ridevt-s ,, TiOeis, putting, » ». Tee
yepovt-ot 4, ‘yépovar, toold men, ,, ,, yepovr Nom. yépor,

§ 49. Dialects.—Homer often assimilates a inute to the following o :
rocci=Att, mooi for mod-o1 (pedibus). He often preserves one ¢
before another: ¢a-roua, J shall be,

§ 5). TONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 17

to those

Secaruvr-arbecomesdetnviiar,{ echo sheid

\ from St.decxvevr Nom. Cerxvi-s,

arevd-c® onion, il pow ts » » omevd Pres.orevdo,

wevO-copat ,, meicopua,Ishallsuffer,,, ,, mev0 Pres. rdoxa.
Obs, 1.—»r disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Pl. of
Stems of Adjectives in evr Nom. ei-s: St. yaprevr, Nom.
xapiers, Dat. Pl. xapie-ox for xaprevt-or.
2.—Of v@ before o, »v remains in éApu-s, tape-worm, instead of
eApw6-s, St. Auwh: Tipuv-s, the city Tiryns, instead of
Tipuv6-s, St. Tipvvd.

§ 500. In later Attic o is readily assimilated to a preceding p:

Old Att. xeprovncos, New Att. xeppdvnoos, Peninsula; Old
Att. Oapoa, New Att. appa, I am courageous.

§ 51. 7. v remains unchanged before mute dentals;
it becomes the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), w before
labials, and is assimilated before liquid consonants:
avuv-riOnpst, I put together, is unchanged.
auv-kahew, J call together, becomes cvyxadéo.
guv-xpovos, contemporaneous, ,. ovyxpovos.

€v-metpos, experienced, » €uaretpos from év and reipa, proof
[so in-peritus becomes im-
peritus].

év-uxos, inspirited, » €pAvuxos from ev and uy, soul.

év-perpos, metrical, » &sperpos from év and pérpor,

measure {so in-modicus be-
comes im-modicus }.
_avv-pew, I flow together, » ovppew from ovy and péw, I flow
(0 con-ruo becomes cor-ruo].
» ovddéyo from civ and éyo, J
gather [so con-ligo becomes
col-ligo].
Obs. 1.—yv in the preposition év remains unchanged before p:
evpvOpos, rhythmical,
2.—v is combined with p by means of 8 in dv-8-pds Gen. of
dynp, man. So is » with p by 8 in peonp-B-pia, mid-day,
instead of peonp(e)pia (uéeoos and jpépa, comp. § 61, ¢).

ovv-eyo, I collect,

§ 51. Dialects—In the Epic dialect 8 is often inserted between
u and p, and between p and A: pé-p-B-Aoxa, I have gone, from Stem
por, by metathesis (§ 59). y before A or p becomes f at the be-
ginning of a word : BAo-cxw, I go, Present of the Stem yor; Bpords,
mortal, for pporos, from the Stem ppo or pop [mor-ior, mortuus sum).

| ;

18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52

§ 52. 8. Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following
rough breathing (spiritus asper) into aspirates (x, 0, d) :
hence

én’ (eri) and jyépa, day, become épypepos, for a day.

Sex’ (Séxa) ,, juéoa, day, ,, Sexnpepos, for ten days,
ten

avr’ (avri) ,, Umaros,Consul ,, dvOimraros, Proconsul,

§ 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following
word begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is
changed into an aspirate :

ovx ovros, not this, for odk otros.
ap’ éorias, from the hearth, ,, an (amd) éorias.
kal’ jpépav, by day, »» kar’ (kara) jepar.

bs,—If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated,

the first must also be aspirated (§ 45): émrd and jpépa form
épOnpepos, for seven days ; vixra and dAnv become vixf dAny,
totam noctem.

§ 536. 10. Two syllables immediately following one
another cannot both begin with aspirates in the follow-
ing cases :—

a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute
takes the place of the aspirate:

re-xopyka for xe-xwpnxa, I have proceeded, from xwpéw, I proceed.

ri-Onyt 9, Ot-Onpe, I put.
ré-pixa .,, he-puxa, I have become.

b) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems Oe (r/@nuu,
I put), Ov (Qvw, I sacrifice), adopt the same modifica-
tion: é-ré-Onv, I was put, for é-Pe-Onv; é-rv-Onv, I was
sacrificed, for é-@v-Onv. (Comp. § 298.)

ec) In the Imperative of the First Aorist Passive
(§ 297), on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed
to a tenuis: o@-On-r1, be saved, for cw-On-O1.

d) Isolated instances are: duméyw, embrace, for
aphex; éexeyetpia, for éyeyerpia, armistice, from éyew,
to hold, and yelp, hand.

§ 52 and 53. Dialects.—The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic

ennpepos, for a day; aminut, 1 send away; ov« otrws=pvx ovTas,
not so; ax’ ob, from the time when, Att. ag’ ov.

§ 55, OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 19

Ubs.—Sometimes the spiritus asper is changed to the lenis,
because the following syllable begins with an aspirate: 6-dpa,
till, for 6-ppa from the relative Stem 6 (§ 218, 217) €y for
éx@ from St. éx (§ 327, 6).

§ 54. Some Stems beginning with 7 change this letter
to @ when an aspirate at the end cannot be retained
(§ 45). This happens:

a) In the Substantive Stem rpvy, whose Nom. is Op.&,
hair, Dat. Pl. Opc&i. The other cases are regular,
formed from the Stem tpry (Gen. tpryds, Nom. Pl.
Ttpixes).

b) In tayds, quie , whose comparative is daccwp
for raxytwov (§ 57; comp. § 198).

ce) In the following Verbal Stems:

rap Pres. Oarre, I bury, Fut. dao, Aor. Pass. éradny,
Subs. radds, grave.

tpep ,, tpepa, I nourish, » Opéra, Subs. Opeupa, cattle.

TPEX 4, TpExa, I run, »» 9OpeEopa

tpvp ,, Opimra, I rub to pieces, ,, Opivo (§ 260).

trup =, tvpw, I smoke, » Ono

Obs.—In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296) and in the Infinitive of
the Perf. Mid. the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet
the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is
not felt to be necessarily an original aspirate, as it might have
been modified by the influence of the @ after it (§ 45):

eOpepony, reOpapea,

D.— Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the
middle of a word.

§ 55. Iniportant changes of sounds are produced by
the modifications of the soft vowel « in connection with
consonants (comp. §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Fre-
quently, for instance,

1. « after v or p is put a syllable farther back,
where it forms-a diphthong with the preceding vowel,
Hence,

20 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. § 56

teivw from rev-iw, J stretch, St. rev [tendo |,
paivoua ,, par-toua, J rage, » Bav.

dpeivev ,, dpev-.ov, better, » ~Gpev.

xeipw from xep-.w, I shear, » KEP.

ddretpa ,, Sorep-ta, the giver, fem. ,, Sorep (Sornp, giver).
XElpov 4, xEp-twr, worse, » X€p-

§ 56. 2. ¢ is assimilated to a preceding 2:

pador from pad-tov, more, from pada, much.
@Dropa ,, dd-topa, I spring, St. dd. (salio],
Gos, adA-tos, another [alius |,

oTedk@ ,, ored-tw, J send, St. cred.

§ 57. 3. Gutturals (7 and 6 less frequently) coalesce
with a following 1 to oc (New Att. 7):

joceyv from ix-twv, less, St. jx, superl. mora.
pacca ,, Opax-sa, Thracian, fem. (masc. Opaé) St. Opak.
tdgo@ ,, tay-tw, I arrange, St. ray.

eXdooay,, é\ax-twv, smaller, »» €Aax, superl. éAdxtoros.
Kpjooa ,, Kpnr-ta Cretan, fem. (masc. Kpys) St. Kpyr.
Koptcow,, Kopvé-., I arm, St. xopvé (xépus, helmet).

§ 58. 4. 6 and sometimes y coalesce with a following
t to &.
€fopat from €8-.opar, I sit, St. €5 (rd Sos, the seat).
Kpd{o ,, Kpay-tw, I cry, St. xpay (Perf. xé-xpay-a).

Other changes of sounds are:

§ 59. 1. Transposition (werdOecs), which most fre-
quently occurs with ), p, also with p, and v:

Opacos together with dapaos, boldness,

@peocxw from the St. dop, I spring, Second Aorist ¢@opov.
Be-BXn-Ka a Bad, I have thrown, ,, » €Badov.
ré-Ovn-ka Se dav, I am dead, a » €Oavoy.
TpA-o1s Ps rep, a cut, Pres. réuvo, I cut.
Obs,—In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened.

§ 59. Dialects.—Transposition is more frequent in the Homeric
dialect (comp. § 295, D.): xaprepdés and xparepds, strong ; kapricros=
Att. xpdriotos, the strongest, from xpdros, strength; rpam-eioper
(comp. § 295, D.) for rapr-eiouer, we desire to rejoice, St. repm (rép-
ropa). So also in é8pixoy, J saw, St. depx (d¢pxopar); empabov, J
destroyed, St. wep0 (rép6w). Homer: draprés=Att. drpamnds, path,

§ 62, OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. .

§ 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. ‘The
most important weakenings are:

a) The very frequent one, especially before «, of r to a:

dvaicOnoia, want of feeling, for dvaicOnria, from dvaicOnros,
without feeling.
act fo parti, they say.

On the rejection of v and the compensation for it,
which frequently occur in this case, see § 49, Obs. 3, ¢;
comp. § 187.

6) The weakening of initial o before vowels to the
spiritus asper :

ts, swine, together with cis. Comp. Lat. sz-s.
t-orn-je for ot-orn-pe, I place. Comp. Lat. si-sto (§§ 308, 327, 5, 6).

§ 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The fol-
lowing cases are important:

a) o is rejected where it would have to stand between
two consonants in inflexion:
yeypap-Oa for yeypap-cba., to be written, St. ypa, Pres. ypapa.

rérup-Ge ,,_~Te-Tup-obe, be ye struck, 4, TUT, 4, TUTTO.

b) « between two vowels is very often rejected :

Aéye-at, Aeyn (§ 38) for Aeyeoat, thou art said, St. Ney, Pr. Neyo.
edeixvu-o for edecxvvco, thow wast shewn, Pr. deixvipu.
yeve-os for yevecos, of the race, St. yeveo (§ 166).

e) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in
the middle of a word is called syncope (cvyxoty):
é-mrt-0-unv for é-ret-o-unv, I flew, St. wer (§ 326, 34).
Comp. § 51, Gds. 2.

§ 62. 4. The doubling of a consonant. This is rare,

§ 60. Dialects.—The Dorians retain r: davtri=aci(v), they say.
The older Att. less frequently : tyyepov=onpepor, to-day.

§ 61. Dialects——Syncope is more frequent in Homer: rimre for
rimore, why ever, why? éxéxero=€-Ke-Kedero, he called, St. xed.

§ 62. Dialects.—In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled
the mutes more rarely: émmws=Att. drws, how; dmmoios=Att.
brows, qualis; Srriz=Att. dri, that; the vocal consonants often’

22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 65.

when it has not arisen through the assimilations men.
tioned above (§§ 47, 504, 51, 56). The liquid p is the
most frequently doubled: é pia for epinra, I hurled ;
appnxtos for a-pynxros, not breakable. The aspirates can
be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Bdx«yos,
Large, ’ArOis.

E.— Changes of sound at the end of aword,

§ 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by
another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied
by a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus, The
Greeks very often suffer the hiatus in prose; but fre-
quently the hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word
is a shorter one and of itself of little importance. This
is done in three ways, that is, either by elision (rejec-
tion of the final vowel), or by erasts (contraction of

the two vowels), or by synizesis (collapse of two syllables’

into one).

—

€ArAaBe= Att. AaBe, he took; proppedjs=Att. Propesdys, readily
smiling ; évvyytos= Att. ed-vyros, well-woven ; dacov= Att. cov, how
great; véxvoot=Att. véxvor, to the corpses; driccaw=Att. orice,
back. On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where the
Attic has double: dktipoos=axippoos, swift-flowing. Often also
both forms are usual together: ’AyiAevs and ’AyiAAeds, ’Oducevs and
Odvecets.

§ 63. Dialects—The Homeric dialect admits the histos? in many
cases: the most important are :

1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma: xara
oixov for xara Foixey, at home.

2. it is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision
is not usual: zadi draccer, he gave to the son,

3. It is softened by a pause or @ cesura after the first short
syllable of the third foot : Kabnoo, eno o° eximeibeo pide, sit down,
and obey my word; réav oi €& éyévorto evi peyapoust, of which six
were born to him in the chambers.

4, A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be-
comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus: ’Arpeidai
re kal rou cixvnpides "Ayatoi, Ye Atridae and ye other well-greaved
Achaense 77 8 Y tS Fw Ss, Comp § Toppa

§ 65. ELISION—ORASIS. 23

§ 64. 1. Elision, or the rejection of the final vowel,
of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only
with short final vowels, but never with v; most fre-
quently at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunc-
tions, and adverbs: ém’ aire, with him, for émi aire,
ovd’ édvvaro, he could not even, arn rOev, but he
came ; less frequently at the end of nouns and verbs:
of wavt eisayyéAXorTes, i. @., of Wavta eisayyéAXorTes,
who reported the whole.

Obs. 1.—The prepositions mepi rownd, dyps and péxpe till, and

the conjunction érz that, never suffer elision.

2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without however being

indicated by the apostrophe: ém-€pyouat from émi-épyopat, 1
come up; but meprépxopa, I go round,

3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (€¢’ npépa),
see § 52,

§ 65. 2. Crasis (xpaous, mixing), is governed, on the

§ 64. Dialects.—Elision is much more frequent with the poets
than in prose; thus, not only ¢ and « even in nominal and verbal
forms are elided, but also the diphthongs ae and o, in the verbal
terminations pat, cat, rat, oar, and in the forms pot and ro. In
Homer ¢ in 6rz that is also sometimes elided.

A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets,’is the Apo-
cope (doko). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a
_ word beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in
Homer with the prepositions dvd, xard, mapd, and with the conjunc-
tion dpa now, seldom with dwé and ind: it takes place in com-
pounds as well as at the meeting of two separate words. The v of
ay(a) then suffers the changes described in § 51; the r of xar(a),
the aw of dé) and tm(d) are made like the following consonant:
dydverar=avadvera emerges, kam mwediov=Kara mediov on the plain,
KadAdire=karedure left behind, mapbero=mapébero put before, an-
reper = drorepyyer will send away, carOaveiv = xatabaveiv die,

§ 65. Dialects.—Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent
in the Attic poets: e. g. obE = 6 €&, nddvperac = kal ddvpera and
laments, dvag= 6 avak O king, xordco=xal bmdéoo and how many.
—Herod. Sror=oi dddor the rest, The logs of a short initial vowel
is sometimes indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): py *yo = ph eyo
ue ego, 78n Eépxerar = dn eEépyerus he is already coming out,

24 SYNIZESIS. § 66,

whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36—39). Is
occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relative
pronoun (especially 6 quod and & quae), after the pre-
position zpo, for, before, Lat. pro, and the conjunction
cai, and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily
long. The sign of crasis is the coronis ($16): tayaa,
bona, from ra ayabd, tadXa from ta adda, the other
things, rodvoya, the name, from 76 dvopa, TadTo, the same,
for Td av’ro.

Obs, 1.—The rough breathing of the article or relative maintains
its place in spite of crasis: dvjp the man irregular for 6 dynp,
in which case the coronis disappears; in Ooiyariov from 7d
iudriov the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into 6 (§ 52),
so also Oarepoy irregular for rd érepov the other.

2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has « subscript only
when « is the last of the contracted vowels: kai ev and in
becomes «ay, but cat efra and then becomes xara, .

On the accent with crasis, § 89.

§ 66. 3. Synizesis (sinking, comp. § 39) occurs at the
meeting of two words, only after a long vowel, espe-
cially after the conjunctions ere, as, ay or, NUM, p41},
not, and after éyo, I: ézrel L ov, as not ; pay ardor, ne alii,
eyo od, I not. It is perceptible only in the poets, who
ceckon the two syllables as one.

§ 67. Wo Greek word ends in any consonant except the
vocal ones, v, p, and s (£, wr). The only exceptions are:
the negative ov« (before consonants ov) and the prepo-
sition éx, out of (before vowels é£), which attach them-
selves so closely to the following word that their « can
hardly be looked upon as final.

When any other consonant, except these three, appears
at the end of a word, it is usually rejected :

parr honey (mel) for perder (Gen. padur-os) } -
capa body » ropar (Gen. odpart-os) compe eres
joav they were ,, avr (comp. Lat. eras.t)

§ 63. MOVEABLE CONSONANTS. 25

But mute Dentals in this case are often changed into
vocal s.

mpos for mpor from mpori to (Hom.).
dds, 508 » S00 give.
Tépas ,, Tepar Gen. répat-os miracle.

§ 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short
vowel at the end, a moveable v (v épedxvotixov). This
v is used before words which begin with a vowel—
by which the hiatus is avoided—and before longer
pauses. Poets employ it also before consonants, espe-
tially at the end of the verse, to make it more sonorous.

The words and forms which have a moveable »v are
the following :—

1. The Dat. Pl. in ou(v) : macw &wxa, I gave to all ;
but waco Soxe? ot tws eivat, to all tt seems to be so.

2. The designations of place in ou(v) : "AOnvncw jr,
he was at Athens; but ’A@jvynor rode éyévero, this hap-
pened at Athens.

8. The single words eixocu(v), twenty ; mépvor(v), last
year; and ravrdraoi(v), entirely ; eixoow avdpes, twenty
men ; but elxocs yuvaixes, twenty women.

4. The third person Sing. in e(v): érwoev adtovs, he
saved them, but érwoe tovs AOnvalovs, he saved the
Athenians.

5. The third person Pl. as well as Sing. in ou(v):
Aéyovow ed they speak well, but rAéyovcs Todo, they say
this ; Seixviiow éxeioe, he points there, but Seixvies tov
advdpa, he points out the man.

§ 68. Dialects—To the words which have a moveable » there are
added in Homer the adverbs of place in Oe(v): dvevbe(v), from
afar ; mapobe(v), from before, Sormerly ; the particles xé(v), perhaps,

and vi(v), now.
The New-Ionie dialect, which aamits the immediate succession of
vowels, omits the moveable On the x in ov« before a spiritus

asper, § 52 D.

26 DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. § 69,

§ 69. Obs, 1.—1n like manner od, not, takes « only before vowels,
which becomes x before the spiritus asper (§ 52): o¥ gnaw, he
says not ; ov airds, not he himself; ovy otrws, not so, The «
appears also in odxere and pnxért, no more.

2. &x, out of, is €€ before vowels (Lat. ex): é&« ris wéAdews, out 7
the city ; €& dxpowddews, out of the acropolis, or castle; éxhéya,
I speak out ; é€deyov, I spoke out.

3. Without any definite reason the words ovres, thus (adverb
of otros, this), axpis, péxprs, till, very frequently lose their
final s; but wodAdxis, many times, loses it only in the poets

Cuar. IV.—Drvision or SYLLABLES AND THEIR
QUANTITY.
A.— Division of Syllables.

§ 70. The Syllables (cvAXaBy, collection) in Greek
words are divided according to the following rules.
Every vowel which stands before another, but does not
form a diphthong with it, or collapse with it by syni-
zesis (§ 39), is reckoned a separate syllable: ‘-arpos,
physician, trisyllabic,

§ 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels,
belongs to the second syllable: &e., has; od-ros, this ;
.-Ka-vos, capable.

Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol
lowing vowel: d-dods, simple; d-pi-ote-pos, on the
left hand; &cyov, I had; a-pvos, lamb; é-yOpds, ini-
mical ; likewise double consonants: 6-yro-yat, I shall
see; &-fw, I sit.

§ 72. Exceptions. 1. Liquids and nasals join the
preceding vowel: dp-ya carriage; dded-hos, brother ;
xary-yato, I laugh; &-Sov, within; du-do, both, ambo.
pv only join the following vowel: xd-yvw, I suffer.
2. When a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to
the preceding, the second to the following syllable:
im-mros, horse; Bar-rw, 1 throw ; Tvp-pos. The same

9 76. : QUANTITY. 27

takes place when aspirates follow the corresponding
tenues: ’At-Ois, Bax-yos, Lam-do.

§ 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out
of which they are formed: cuv-éyo, I hold together ;
e&-ayo, I drive out.

B.— Quantity. -

§ 74. With regard to the quantity (length or short-
ness) of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good
for the Greek as for the Latin. An important excep-
tion, however, consists in one vowel before the other
not needing to be short in Greek: Own, penance ; dads,
people; Bédriov, better. Nor do the special Latin rules
for final syllables hold good in Greek.

§ 75. A syllable is long by nature when it contains a
long vowel or diphthong: dyets, you; xptvo, I decide ;
doo, I sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is
rendered much easier by the characters: does, room,
house; Spa, house; in other cases by the accent
(§§ 83, 84); the rest can be learnt only by practice,
and from the lexicon.

Obs.—Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long: érwv,
unwilling = aéxwv, tpds = iepds, holy.

§ 76. A syllable is long by position, when a vowel is

§ 74. Dialects—Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom
shortened before vowels in the same word: Hom. olos (qualis ~ “),
and S¢BAna, with short n.

§ 75. Dialects.—1. The quantity of the common vowels is very
uncertain generally, but especially in Hom. ‘opev, let us go, Apes
Apes, O Ares, Ares,

2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Hom.
and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel: oixot
éaav, they were at home (~*~ ~), npévn ev, sitting mn (~*~). Comp.
3 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.)
leave a preceding vowel long in Hom.: kxdAdet tre orikBSov kai
Tt alata ta ), glittering with beauty and garments.

28 QUANTITY — § 77.

followed by two or more consonants, or a double conso-
nant, whetner

a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in
the same word: ydpua, joy (~~), &is, mien (“~), Kaorwo
(>), or

b) the first concludes the first word, and the rest
begin the second: Oeds Se, but God (~~~), &v TovTe@,
meanwhile (~~~), or

¢) both or the double consonant stand at the begin-
ning of the second word: ra xrjpata, the goods (~~~ ~),
0 Sav, the living one (~~).

Obs.—When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature, this
must be indicated in the pronunciation: the ain mpaécoe, 1
act, sounds differently from that of raéca, I arrange, though
both words make a spondee in verse; that in pa@AAoyv different
from that of xiAXos, beauty, though both form a trochee,

§ 77. When a vowel short by nature stands. before a
mute with A, p, v, « following, the syllable may be long
or short: téxvov, child (~~), rupdés, blind ( ~), ri Spas,
what art thou doing (~~)?

The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the fol-
lowing cases :

§ 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first,
the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second
word: é« vnay, out of the ships (~~~), and in compounds
in which the mute belongs to the first element: é«réya,
I speak out (-~~);

6) when a soft mute (8, y, 8) is followed by A, p, orv:
BiBnos, book (~~), rayua, task (~~), éyidva, snake (~~~).

‘§ 77. Dialects—In Hom. a mute with A, p, v, p following,

almost regularly makes position: réxvov ri kAaiets, child, why

weepest thou? (~~~~~ ), tnxvos mavdapdtwp, all-subduing sleep
(~"~“*"). Nay, even A, 0, v, pw, at the beginning of words have
often the power of lengthening the short final vowel of the pre-
ceding word : xadyy re peyaAny re, a beautiful and great (~~~*~*~*).
6 in the Steam de (Seioa), fear, and in dy, long, has the same
etiect.

—_—_—_—_—-—

§ 83. ACCENTS. | 29

Cuap. V.—ACCENTS.

§ 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words
are the following :—

1. Every word must have one and can never have
more than one principal accent, which is called simply
the accent: wodumpaypooivn, busy occupation ; atapa-
oxevactos, unprepared. On the designation of words
according to the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21.

§ 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp
accent or the acute (d£cia), and the lengthened or the
circumflex (repiomrwpévn). On the mode of using both,
see §§ 17, 21.

§ 81. 3.'Phe acute may be upon long or short
syllables, the cirewmfler only on such syllables as are
long by nature: as, Néyo, I say ; jy, I cease ; nanos,
beautiful ; adnOyjs, true; avOpwros, man; Kelpevos,
lying ; keira, he lies; cdma, body ; ed, well.

§ 82. 4. The acute accent can be only on one of the
last three syllables, and on the last but two only
when the last is short: adotxos, colonist, but not
amoixov (Gen.); édreyov, I said, but not éreynv, I was
said.

§ 83. 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last
two syllables, and on the last but one only when the
last is short by nature: cdxov, fig, but not cdxou,
(Gen.); capa, body, but not cdparos (Gen.); mpaéis,
act, but not mpafeus (Nom. PL).

Obs. 1—When the last syllable is long by position, it does not
hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one:
advdué, furrow, Gen. atdaxos, but it does when it is long by
nature as well as by position, Owpa&, breast-plate, Gen. @wpaxos.
Comp. § 145.

2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the
chapters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed, that

ey a! oe
. 4
0 ACCENTS. §s4

most of the exceptions occur with the final syllables in a and
ot: drorxor, although ot is long, yrapa, opinions, rimrerat, he is
struck. Comp. §§ 108, 122 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268,

§ 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by
nature, can have no other accent but the circumflex, if —
the last is short by nature: qebye, flee, not hevye:
hpxov, I reigned, not jpyov: HrtE, of the same age, not
HAE, (Gen. HArrKos): Kparivos, not Kpativos. It may,
however, be without an accent: eizé, speak ; dvOpwros,
man.

Obs. 1.—Apparent exceptions, such as dere, so that, be, this,

are explained in § 94,

2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity
of the final syllable or of the last but one may often be inferred
from the accent: i@ (t), go; mpara [ prima Nom. Pl.] (4):
yuvaixas (a), women, Acc. Pl. ; yvapas (4), opinions, Ace. Pl,

§ 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the
last part but one of the word, as far as is possible
according to § 82, &c.: amit, go away ; adiros, friend-
less ; didoyuvos, friendly to women ; arodos, give bask ;
mapévbes, put in besides. (Comp. § 359, Obs. 2.)

§ 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by
the changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the
connexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is:

1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when fol-
lowed by another word, so that the grave takes the
place of the acute. (Comp. § 20.)

§ 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the
syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if
none of the syllables to be contracted had it: yéveos
ryévous, of the race; tipae tiva, honour. The accent
of a contracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself
from the general rules on accent, hence tipmrtes,
honouring (Nom. Pl.) from tiaovtes, tysmvtrev (Gen.
Pl.) from tiadvrwy (according to §§ 83 and 84). A
contracted final syllable has

§ 91. ACCENTS, $1

a) the circumflex, when the first of the uncontracted
syllables was accented : typdee tid, he honours ; ypuceov
xpvaod, of golden ;

6) the acute, when the last was accented: éotads
éoTas, standing.

§ 88. 3. With eliston (§ 64) oxytone prepositions and
conjunctions entirely lose their accent; all other kinds
of words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes-
er avtod, on him= émi aita, oS eSvvdunr, I could
not even = ovdé eduvdpnr, elw "Odvcers, I am Odys-
seus = eiul Oducers, Err’ Hoar, there were seven = érra
Hoav.

§ 89. 4. With crass (§ 65) the accent of the first word
is lost: tayaOd, bona = Ta ayabd, Ooiuariov, the dress
=Td ipativ. Only when paroxytones change the
first syllable by crasis into one long by nature, this
receives a circumflex: 7a Ana, alia, gives Tada, TO
épyov, the work, rodpyov.

On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; or
the accent of verbs, see §§ 229, and 331-333.

§ 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception
of audi, avi, avd, dd, when placed after the noun or verb
to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first
syllable: rovrwy méps about those (wep) tovtwv); im
like manner when, used adverbially, they include the
substantive verb, as mapa = mdpeortt, tt ts there, near ;
é = éveoti, it is therein, is possible. This drawing
back of the accent is called anastrophe. Comp. § 446.

§ 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so

closely with the preceding word, that they throw their
accent on toit. Such words are called enelitics (éyxduTixat

§ 90. Dialects.—Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision,
have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated in
§ 90. Hom. rjot map’ civaeres xadxevov, among them I forged nine
years long,

a

32 ENCLITICS. § 92

AeEers, ¢. €. inclining words), and the throwing back of the
accent, ts called inclinatwn.

§ 92. The following are enelitics:

1. The indefinite pronoun tis, rl, some one, something,
through all forms (§ 214).

2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms pod,
poi, pe, met, mihi, me; cod, coi, oe, tui, tibt, te;
ov, ol, &, sut, sibi, se; opwiv, to them two; and cpicr(r),
to them.

8. The Indicative Pres. of eiui, I am, and of dni
inguam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing.
ei and dys.

4. The indefinite adverbs rod or oOi, somewhere ;
7, somehow ; tot, somewhither ; mobév, from somewhere ;
moré, sometime ; mas, somehow ; ma, yet.

5. The particles yé, quidem ; ré, and ; roi, truly ; viv or
vu, now ; Hom. xév or Ké, perhaps, I suppose ; pa (apa), then ;
Hom, Ov, truly ; wép, very; and dé (meaning towards,
and as a demonstrative appendage). Comp. § 212,

§ 93. These words throw their accent back on the
preceding word, in the following manner:

a) A preceding orytone leaves its sharp tone un-
subdued (§ 20), and this tnen serves also for the en-
clitic: dyaBov tv, something good; avtos dnow, he
himself says. :

b) After a perispome the accent of the enclitic is
entirely lost: op@ twas, I see some; ed éorw, tt ts well ;
Tye oe, L honour thee.

c) After a paroxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely
lose their accent; but those of two. syllables retain
their accent on the last syllable: diros pov, my friend ;
Aoyos Tis, a speech ; but Adyou Tivés, some speeches, Noywv
twav (Gen. PL).

§ 92. Dialects—The Ionic additional form of ¢7, eZs is enclitic, so
also ogéas (Acc, Pl.) them = Att. opis and piv, him, her, § 205 D.

§ 97. ENCLITICS. 33

d) Proparoxytones and properispomes retain their
accent, but receive also from the following enclitic
another accent as acute on the last syllable, which
remains unsubdued: dvOpwros tis, a man; BéBa.oi
elow, they are firm; oma ye, the body at least ; maides
tives, some boys.

e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as
acutes: ot dyow, he says not; ds re, and how,

§ 94. Obs.—Several words of one syllable form one word with
enclitics following: thus, ésre, so that ; etre, sive ; ovre, neque ;
pyre, neque; oidsts, capable; dstis, whoever; iro, truly;
kairot, and yet ; to this also belongs the dé mentioned in § 92,
5: d8¢, this one ; otxade, homewards. These words form partly
apparent exceptions to §§ 79 and 84.

§ 95. f) When several enclitics follow one another,
each throws its accent upon the preceding: e tis uol
gyoi torte, if any one ever says to me.

§96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent
(become orthotoned), viz. :

1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen-
tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its
accent: tues Aéyouer, some say. This position, how-

_ ever, is rare.

2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: cé Néya, -
mean you—no one else ; et Eariv, if it ts really so. Wher
éote denotes exist, be allowed, possible, it retains the
accent and that too on the last syllable but one: éo7¢
Geos, there is a God; otk éatw, tt is not allowed, not
possible. Comp. § 315, Obs. 2,

8. After elision: tadr’ gots wWevdh, this is false =
TavTa éate ypevon.

4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mezxtioned
§ 93, ¢.

§ 97. Altona, t. e., words without accent, also called
proelities or inclining forwards, are several words of one
D

34 ATONA. § 98.

syllable, which have so little independence, that in
regard to accent they combine with the following word.

They are the following:

1. of the article, the forms 6, %, oi, ai;

2. the prepositions, év (in with the Dat.), és or eis
(into with the Acc.), é« or é& out of ;

8. the conjunctions, ei, ¢f, and as, how, that, the
latter also in its use as preposition to ;

4. the negative od or ov« (ovy).

Obs.—otd xi, a more emphatic ov, is always accented.

§ 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. :

a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefore
have no following word on which they can rest: 7s
ov; Do you say so or not ?; so always #s when placed
after the word with which a comparison is made: eds
ws, like a god, Hom. ;

b) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back
its accent: ob dyou, he says not. Comp. § 93, e.

§ 99. The following particles are distinguished accord-
ing to the accent: 7, as, or, and 4, truly, or interro-
gative, Lat. num; dpa, now, consequently, and dpa as an
interrogative; viv, now, and enclitic vu(v), now, particle
of transition ; ws, how, and os, so; ovxody, therefore, and
ovxovv, not therefore.

§ 100. DECLENSION. 30

IL.—INFLEXION,
A—INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS.

Cap, VI.—DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES AND
ADJECTIVES. .

§ 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns
and yerbs undergo, to indicate their relation in a sentence.

A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem
and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination
the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to
indicate the different relations,

The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Deelen-
ston. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modi-
fied according to Cases, the terminations added to them
are called Case-endings. The form, which arises, from a
case-ending being added to a Stem, is called the Case-
form. Thus wpdypart-os is a case-form of the Stem
mpaypat, formed by means of the case-ending -os.

Great care must be taken not to confound tlie
Stem and the Nominative case. The Nominative is
_ itself a case-form, often quite different from the Stem.
Thus the Nominative of the Stem wpaypar is mpaypa,
thing. oyos, speech, is the Nominative of the Stem Aoyo,
which appears, for example, in the compound word Aoyo-
ypado-s, a writer of speeches.*

The Greeks distinguish in the Declension:

1. Three Numbers: the Singular for one, the Dual for
two, the Plural for several.

2. Five Cases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accu-
sative, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms,
one for the Nom., Acc., and Voc., the other for the Gen.
and Dat. In the Plur. the Voce. is always like the Nom.

3. Three Genders: Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.

* The Stem will always be left unaccented.

os

86 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 101,

§ 101. The gender is known :—

1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in
which the Greek language almost entirely coincides
with the Latin. Besides the rule founded in the
nature of things, that the designations of male persons
are masculine, those of females feminine, the following
rules are to be observed:

§ 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of
rivers and winds) and months (6 pjv the month) are
masculine: 6 Evporas, the river Eurotas ; 6 ZLéipos, the
west wind; o ‘ExatouBaov, the month Hecatombaeon.

§ 103. 6) The names of trees, lands () yh the land),
islands (1) viicos the island) and most cities, are feminine:
» Spis, the oak; 7 ’Apxadia, Arcadia; » AécBos, the
island of Lesbos; % Korodey, the city of Colophon.
Most abstract substantives also, 7. e. those which denote
a condition, relation, act or property, are feminine: 7)
errris, hope ; 1 vikn, victory ; 7 Suxatocvvn, righteousness ;
} TaxuTys, quickness.

§ 104. c) Many names of fruits are neuter: To cdxor,
the fig; most diminutives also both of masculine and
feminine words: 7d yepovriov dimin. of 6 yépav, the old
man; To yuvaov dimin. of % yuv7, the woman. Fur-
ther, every name and word, which is adduced merely as
a word: 7d dvOpwrros, the name “ man ;” 1d Sixavoovvn,
the idea of “righteousness ;” and the names of the
letters, Td dAda, TO ciypa.

§ 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is
known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140.

8. In Declension the Neuter may be distinguished
from the Masculine and Feminine, for all Neuters have

a) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom,

6) no s as case-sign of the Nom. Sing.

¢) the ending a in Nom. Ace. and Voe. Pl.

§ 106. The Greek language, like the English, em-
ploys the definite Article. The forms of the Article are
the following :

—-- 7

§ 108. ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 87

Masc. Fem. Neut.
Singular,
Nom. é fT] 76 the
Gen. TOU THs TOD of the
Dat. TO TH T® to the
Ace. Tov THY Td the
Dual
a A. ¥, TO Td Or Td To the
G. D. Toi raw orrow) Tov of or to the
Plural
Nom. oi ai Td the
Gen. TOV TOV Tav of the
Dat. Tois Tats Trois to the
Ace. Tous Tas Td the

The following general rules on accentuation apply to
all the declensions of substantives.

§ 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the
syllable, on which it stood in the Nominative, as long as
the general laws of accent allow: dv@pwrros, man,
avOparre (Voc.), cdxor, fig, cdxca (Nom. Pl.). sm
§§ 121 and 142, 181, 2.

6) But when the original accentuation becomes im-
possible by the length of the final syllable or by
increase at the end, the accent is shifted only as near
to the end of the word, and is changed only as much, as
is absolutely necessary : dvOpw7ros, man, avOpwov (Gen.
Sing.), dvO@pe7os (Dat. Pl.); capa, body, capatos
(Gen. Sing.), cwpdtwy (Gen. Pl.); retyos, wall, relyous
(Gen. Sing.).

§ 108. c) The terminations oc and az are not con-
sidered long in regard to accent, hence dv@pwrou,
yvepat (yvepn, opinion).

§ 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers,
if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute
upon this syllable, but only the circumflex: zoztapot

a

38 Tx: A DECLENSION,. § 116,

Gen. Sing. of zotapos, river; ryvp Dat. Sing. of ren,
honour; woddv Gen. Pl. of zovs, foot; wunvoiv Gen,
Dual of pv, month.

§ 110. Originally there was only a single declension,
for which reason much has still remained common,
which we shall put together below, § 173. _ But we dis-
tinguish Zwo Principal Declensions according to the
ending of the Stems:

1. the First Principal Declenswon (vowel declension),
which comprehends the Stems ending ina ando, and ~

2. the Second Principal Declension (consonant declen-
sion), which comprehends the Stems ending in conso-
nants, but also those in the soft vowels 4, v, in diphthongs,
and a small number of Stems in o.

First Prixcrpat DECLENSION.
( Vowel-declension.)
§ 111. The first principal declension is subdivided
into two, viz. :
A.—The A Declension.
B.—The O Deelension.
What is common to both is put together below, § 134.

A.—TuHE A DECLENSION.
(Commonly called the First Declension.)

§ 112. The A Declension comprehends those words,
whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this
a becomes 7. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks
corresponds both to the A or first, and to the E or fifth
Declension of the Latin language.

§ 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines
and Feminines. The two genders are most easily distin-
guished in the Nom, Sing., in which the masculines take
s, the feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations

§ 115, THE A DECLENSION. 39

of the Nom. Sing. are in the feminine a, n, in the
masculine as, 7s.
§ 114. 1. Feminines.

Examples. | xopa, land yraooa, tongue | run, honour i
Stems. | xywpa [terra] yi\ooca Tia
Singular.
Nom. xopa [terra] yrocod TUyLt
Gen. xopas yAooons TYAS
Dat. xepe [terrae] yAooon rin [re-i]
Ace. xepa-v [terra-m] | yAdood-v Tysn-v [re-m]
Voe. xa@pa [terra | yAéooa run
Dual.
N.A.V. | xopa yoooa Tipe
G. D. xepaw yAocoaw Tysaty
Plural.
Nom. xapa [terrae] yAadooa TYat
Gen. X@per yoooav TtL@Y
Dat. xepas yroocous Tipais
Ace, xopas = yooods Tids
Voe. x@pae [terrae yAdoca Tipat

Examples for Declension.

+ Ged, goddess ddéa, opinion yn, earth
oxia, shadow mvAn, gate yvoun, opinion
Bia, force

§ 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in
the Dual and Plural, a becomes y. Hence the following
rules :—

1. In order to form the Nom. Sing. from the Stem
or from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural:

§§ 115-117. Dialects—1. The Doric dialect never changes a into
Hi Tid Tyas, yhocoa yAoooas.

2. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into n:
copin, méerpn, Bacieins, poipy. Short a is generally unchanged, as
Bacitea, potpiv; but in abstract substantives in -ed, -odi, a is
likewise changed into 7: dAn@ein, truth, Att. ddjdeva, edadoin, good
passage, and also in kvicon, steam from fat, SKidAdyn. The a remains
in Gea and some proper names,

3. The Voc. of vind, young woman, is in Hom. wiupd.

40 THx A DECLENSION, § 116.

a) a remains in the Nom. Sing. after ¢, « or p, (§ 41):
St. cogva, Nom. Sing. copia, wisdom ; Dat. Pl. werpais,
Nom. Sing. rérpa, rock.

b) a remains in the Nom. Sing. after o and after the
double consonants & & yp, eo(or 7 7 ), MA, as well as in
the feminine designations in -arva: St. dua£&a, Nom.
Sing. duaka, carriage; Gen. Pl. Xcawdv, Nom. Sing.
Sdecsis. lioness.

ec) After other vowels and consonants a is generally
changed into 7 in the Nom, Sing.: St. Boa, Nom. Sing.
Bon, ery; Acc. Pl. yvépas, Nom. Sing. yvepm (opinion).

More important exceptions are—to a) xdpn, girl; xéppn, temple ;
deipn, neck—to b) ¢pon, dew—to c) crod, hall ; xpéa, colour;
rodpa, boldness ; Sia:ra, mode of life.

§ 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the

Singular according to a given Nom. Sing.:

a) If the Nom. Sing. ends in », this letter remains
throughout the Sing.: S/«n, justice, diens, Sixy, Sixnv, Sixn.

6) If the Nom. Sing. ends in a, this letter remains
always in the Acc. and Voe.: dpwaka, &yakav.

ec) If the Nom. Sing. ends in a, this letter remains
also in the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or p
(§ 41): Nom. Sing. codia, wisdom, Gen. codpias ; Nom.
Sing. erod, colonnade, Dat. crod: also in some proper
names with long a: Nom. Sing. A7jéa, Gen. A7jdas, and
in va (contracted from puvda), Gen. pvas.

d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing. becomes 7 in Gen. and
Dat.: Nom. Sing. podca, Gen. potons; Nom. Sing.
dfatta, Dat. Scairn.

§ 117. For the quantity of a in the Nom. and Ace.
Sing., the general rule is: a purum (after vowels) and
a after p is long, every other ais short: Oecd, goddess ;
ipirra, fight.

The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2).
The most important are the fem. designations in -rpia and
-era; WdArpia, femule player ; Baciheva, queen (but Baordeia,
dominion), and several words with diphthongs in the last
syllable but one, as oaipa, ball, etvort, good-will, uoipa, fate,

§ 120. TIE A DECLENSION. 41

§ 118. The Gen. Pl. has the ending wv, which com-
bines with the Stem a to form dar, contr. av. This is
the reason that the Gen. Pl. of all words in this deelen-
sion has the circumflex: yada ywpdv, Néawa eawev

(Exceptions, § 181. Comp. § 128).

§ 119. The Dat. Pl. originally ended in o1, before
which 1 is added to the a of the Stem. The asce thus
formed is usually shortened into acs, but the original
form is found even in Attic writers, in poetry and prose.

(Comp. § 128, D.)
§ 120. 2. Masculines.

Examples, | vedvias, youth | moXirns, citizen | ‘Epps, god Hermes
Stems. | vedvia wokita ~ ‘Eppy (trom “Epyea)
Singular
Nom. vedvia-s moXttn-s ‘Epp-s
Gen. vedviov moAt Tov ‘Eppod
Dat. veavia woNt TH ‘Eppy
Acc, veavia-v mONtTH-V “Eppy-y
Voe. veavia moNira ‘Epp
Dual.
N.A.V. | veavia modtra ‘Eppa, statues of
Hermes
G. D. vedviaw - mode ray ‘Eppaiy
Plural.
Nom, vedviat mwoNirat “Eppai
Gen. vedvi@v moNtr av “Eppov
Dat. vedvias mot ras “Eppais
Ace. vedvias moras “Eppas
Voc, vedviat moAirat ‘Eppat

§ 118. Dialects.—4. The -awy of the Gen. Pl. is preserved in the
Hom. dialect : KArordwy (kAvoia tent), dyopdwy (ayopd speech) ; but
-ewy also occurs, in which case ¢ is generally lost by synizesis
(§ 39): macéwr, of all, fem.

The Dorians contract -awy into av (§ 37 D. 3): Oeav, dearum,

$119. Dialects—5. The Dat. Pl. in Ionic ends in -yot(v), -ys
(but also in the Attic -ars): eAroujot, zérpps.

42° «=e THE A DECLENSION, § 121
Examples for Declension.
rapias, treasurer otpatiarns, warrior adoreoxns,
’ Nuxias, Nicias wadorpifns, wrestling- *AAKeBiadys
fsverie judee master

§ 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines,
when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains
and is long; after every other letter it becomes 7 in the
Nom. Dat. and Acc. Sing.

Those words which in the Nom. Sing. end in t-s,
names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in
the Voc. Sing.: wodira, Ilépca (Nom. Sing. Iépon-s
Persian), yewpérpa (Nom. Sing. yewpérpn-s
measurer). The Voc. déorora (Nom. Sing. Seomorn-s
lord) draws back the accent, contrary to § 107, a, to
the first syllable. All others have 7 in the Vocative:
Kpovidn (Nom. Sing. Kpovidn-s).

§ 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distin-
guished from that of the I‘eminines—

1. in the Nom. Sing. by s being added to the Stem,

2. by the Gen. Sing. ending in ov.

Obs.—The termination of the Gen. Sing. of the masculines is pro-
perly -o, which with the a of the Stem forms -ao (see the
Homeric dialect) ; by weakening a to e (§ 118 D.) and contrac-
tion (§ 37) arises ov: wodirao (wohereo) woAirov.

§§ 121 and 122.—Dialects——1. The Epic dialect in some words
omits the s of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the a remains short:
immérit, horseman, vepeAnyepéra, cloud-gatherer. (Comp. Lat. poéta,
scriba.

2. is Dorians also in the masculines put @ for 9 and contract do
intoa. (§§ 24 D.; 37 D.3.)

3. Homer has three forms in the Gen, Sing. :

a) the original -Go: ’Arpeidao ;

b) -ew with the quantity transposed (where ¢ is lost by synizesis,
§§ 37 D., 39 D.): "Arpeidea. The accent remains unchanged, in
spite of the @ in the final syllable. The New-Ionie form is the
same.

c) -@ by contraction: ‘Eppeio (Nom. Sing. ‘Eppeia-s = Attie
Eppijs), Bopéw (Nom. Sing. Bopéds), Comp. § 37 a.

§ 125, THE O DECLENSION. 43

Boppas (contracted from Bopéd-s north wind), contracts the ori-
ginal Go in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d@: Boppa.
The same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names,
and a few other words: SvA\Nas, Sulla, dpviOoOnpas, fowles
Gen. Sing. a.

§ 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the

Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines.

Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are ypjorty-s,
usurer, éernoia, trade-winds, Gen. Pl. xpyorev (ypyoray in
the O-declension from xpyords, good) and érncior.

B.—Tue O DEcLEnsion.
(Commonly called the Second Declension.)

§ 124. The O Declension comprehends those words
whose Stems end in o, together with the few whose
Stems end in w (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second
Declension in Latin.

§ 125. The O Declension is the complement of the
A Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines
and Neuters, but only few Feminines,

The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in
the Nom. Sing. is o-s, that of Neuters o-v [ Lat. u-s, u-m].

The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike;
the Neuters are distinguished from them (comp, § 105}
only by—

1. The Nom. and Voce. Sing. taking the Accusative —
ending v: dépo-v (gift) [donu-m)].

2. The Nom. Ace. and Voce. Pl. ending in &: Sapa
{dona}.

44 THE 0 DECLENSION. § 126,
126.

Examples.) 6 dvOpwro-s, man 7) 686-s, a. rd dapo-v, gift
Stems. | dv@pwre 680 8apo

Singular. +
Nom. | &vOpwro-s [dominu-s] | 686-s 8dpo-v (donu-m }
Gen. avOpa@rov 6800 dapov
Dat. avOpar@ [domino] 65 dépm [dono]
Ace, avOpero-v [dominu-m] | 686-y dapo-v | donu-m
Voc. avOpere [domine] 6b€ 8apo-y | donu-m

Dual.
N. A. V.| avOpore 680 Sapo

GD, | dvOparow ddoiv depo

Plural
Nom. | avOparo [domini] | dd0f dépa [dona]
Gen. avOporrev 6dav dopev
Dat. avOpamrous ddois ddpots
Ace, avOpmrous [domino-s] | ddovs 8épa [dona]
Voc. éivOpwmo. [domini} 650t bapa _ {dona}

Examples for Declension.
pf Gebs, God morauds, river cvkor, fig

vopos, law mévos, trouble pérpov, measure
xivduvos, danger Bios, life inarwoy, dress

tavpos, bull p Oavaros, death

§ 127. Obs.—The Feminines are partly known by the general
rules already given (§§ 101, 103): 4 gnyds, esculent oak; q
dipmedos, vine; 9 vijros, island ; f Ametpos, continent, Képw6os.

The following also are feminine :—

1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: dppos,
sand; xémpos, dung; yvyos, chalk; mdivOos, brick; omodds,
ashes ; ios, pebble; Baravos, touch-stone.

2. Different words for way: 686s, xeAevOos, arpamés, path;
dpuakirés, carriage-road. In the same manner 7 radpos, dike ;
but 6 orevwrds, narrow way.

3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity: xndés, chest of drawers;
yvabos, jaw; xiBwrds, chest; copds, coffin; Anvds, wine-vat ;
xapSoros, kneading-trough; xdaptvos, oven.

4 Several adjectives used as substantives: # Sidperpos (supply
ypappn, line), diameter; ovyxAntos (supply BovAn, Council),
meeting of the Council,

$120, : THE 0 DECLENSION. 45

5. Single words: 3iSdos, book; paBdos, staf: duddeeros, dialect ;
véoos, disease; dpdcos, dew; Soxds, beam. Many designations
of personal beings are common, that is, with the same form they
are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they
denote a female: 6 Oeds, god; % Oeds, goddess; 6 avOpwros
and 4 avOpwros.

§ 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing. is -o, which with

the o of the Stem is contracted into ov (comp. § 122):
avOpwtro-o = avOperrov.

§ 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used
instead of the Vocative form: the Vocative of @eds
is always the same as the Nom.: @ @eds [Lat. deus}:
aderpos, brother, has adedde in the Vocative with the
accent thrown back.

Contracted Declension.

§ 130. Several words which have e¢ or o before the
last letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with
the o. The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied: ea,
however, contrary to § 38, is contracted intoa@ ~~

§ 128. Dialects——The Epic dial. in the Gen. Sing. has the older
form -co for the ending; +o with o of the St. produces oo: dvépo-
toto, Tediowo (medio-v, field). We also, however, find the Attic ov.

Other Epic peculiarities are: -ouwv = ow in the Gen. and Dat.
Dual: dpouv (dpos, shoulder) :—owr(v) = os in the Dat. Plur.:
avOpomo(v), which is also New-Ionic and is found even in Attic
writers (comp. § 119).

§ 130. Dialects.—The Ionic dial. leaves the forms uncontracted.

16 CONTRACTED O DECLENSION, § 121,
Examples. | 6 vov-s, sense rd dorody, bone
Stems. yoo ooreo
Singular,
Nom. yéo-s povs doréo-v éarov-v
Gen, voov vou doréou oorov
Dat. vow vq darew doTo
Ace. vdo-v voo-v daréo-v éarov-y
Voe. voe 100 doréo-v éorov-v
Dual.
N. A. V. vow vo oorTéw dot
G. Dd. voow yoiv \ daréow édoroiv
Plural.
Nom, véot vot éoréa éora
Gen, vowy vav Ooréov é6orav
Dat. véous vos dareos daTois
Ace, vdous vous éoTéa é6orTa
Voc, véot voi oaTea dora

Examples for Declension.
mAods, voyage pos, stream aderpuidovs, brother’s son

§ 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in
the contraction, viz.,

1. the Nom. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to
§ 87.

2. compound words leave the accent on the last
syllable but one, also contrary to § 87: meolmd, Dat.
of mrepirdous, circumnavigation, for repurd@ from -de.

3. the word xdveov, basket, is contracted into xavod»,
contrary to § 87.

On contracted adjectives, see § 183.

Attie Declension.

§ 132. A small number of words, instead of the short
O-sound (0), have the long (w). This at the end of the

§ 131. Dialects—A Gen. ending -o appears in Hom. in Merew-o,
Gen. Sing. from the Nominative Ilered-s.

§ 134, ATTIC O DECLENSION. 47

Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time |
takes the case-endings as far as possible. Most of these
words have e before w, and for -ew there also occurs the
additional form -@o: ved-s, temple, together with vao-s,
Aew-¢, people, together with Aao-s (comp. § 37, D.). This
Declension is called the Attie. .

On adjectives in w-s, see § 184; on some words which
fluctuate between this and the second principal declen-
sion, see § 174,

Examples, 6 ved-s, temple 7d dvayeo-v, upper Toom
Stems, veo avayeo
Singular.
,
Nom, veo-s avayen-v
’ ,
Gen. ve@ avayew
Dat. ved avayeo
Ul > , My
Ace, vEw-V dyayew-v
Dual.
N. A. Vz veo dvdyew
-~ > ’
G. D. ; vedy avdye@y
Plural.
Nom, ved aveyeo
Gen, ve@v dvayeav
Dat. veas avoryews
4 ’ > , &
Ace, yews aveyew

Another example: xddos, rope.

§ 183. The accentuation in these words has a twofold
irregularity, viz. :

1. ew passes always for only one syllable in regard to
accent: Mevédews, apparently contrary to § §2;

2. even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they
are accented, the accent is put not as a circumflex but
as an acute, contrary to § 109.

§ 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Vowel
or First Principal Declension, have the following points
in common:

48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 135,

1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing. the
ending -s.

2. the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. ($$ 122, 128)
the ending -ov,

3. all three genders have « subscriptum with a long
vowel in the Dat. Sing.

4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing.

5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened
in the Nom. Acc. and Voe. Dual.

6, all three genders affix -w to the Stem vowel ir
the Gen. and Dat. Dual.

7. all three genders have -wv in the Gen. Pl.

8. all three genders affix -ow or ¢ with preceding ¢ to
the Stem vowel in the Dat. Pl.

9. the masculines and feminines affix -. to the Stem
vowel in the Nom. Pl.

10. the masculines and feminines affix -s (for vs) in

the Acc. Pl., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate
for the v dropped. (§ 42.)

The difference therefore is only in the formation of
the Gen. Sing. of the feminines and in the accentuation

of the Gen. Pl.

SECOND PrincrpAL DECLENSION.

CoNSONANT-DECLENSION,
(Commonly called the Third Declension.)

§ 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends
all the Stems which end in consonants, the soft vowels o
z and v, or diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in
o (Nom. w). ‘The Stem is best recognised in the Gen.
Sing., where what remains after rejecting the termina-
tion os may generally be considered as the Stem: Gen
Néovt-os, St. Aeovr (Nom. Aéwy, lion), Gen. Pv rax-os,
St. pudax (Nom. gvAak, guard).

§ 139, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 49

Hence for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not only
the Nominative but also the Stem or the Genitive is necessary :
as, Nom. dais, St. dart or Gen. Sarrds, meal [Lat. rex, St. reg or
Gen, regis].

To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third
and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings usually appear
pure, i. e, not mixed up with the end of the Stem.

The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension,
because the soft vowels (§$ 35, 1) can be used together with
the vowels of the terminations: Gen. wirv-os(Stem merv, Nom.
niru-s, pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs the v is
sometimes resolved into F: for example, the Stem Bou (Nom.
Bov-s, ox) was originally in some forms Bof (Lat. bov), as Gen.
Bof-ds (= bov-ts). See § 35, Obs. The O Stems have probably
lost a final consonant.

§ 186. The Second Principal Declension comprehends
all three genders.

The Weuters may be recognised by the inflexion,
according to § 105, from their having the Nom. and
Ace, alike, and these cases in the Pl. always with the
ending -a: cépat-a (St. cwpat, Nom. Sing. sda, body).

§ 137. For determining the gender from the Stem
the following are the most important rules:

a) Masculine are the Stems in ev (Nom. e-s), typ
(Nom. typ), top (Nom. twp), vt (with Nom. ¢ or v

_ preceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in »

.

(of various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel:
St. ypadev, Nom. ypadeds, writer; St. and Nom.
coTip, saviour; St. pntop, Nom. pytwp, orator; St.
Neovt, Nom. réwr, lion, leo ; St. and Nom. dywr, contest

§ 138. 6) Feminine are all Stems in 5 (Nom. -is ,-as),
most in « (Nom. -:-s), those in o (Nom. -w or -w-s), and
the names of qualities in ry7 (Nom. -rn-s): St. €Xm6,
Nom. wis, hope; St. wor, Nom. rons, city; St.
met0o, Nom. trevlw, persuasion; St. icornt, Nom.
icotns, equality.

§ 139. ec) Neuter are the Stems in war (Nom. pa),
the substantive Stems in s with Nom: os or as, those in
¢ or v which append no ¢ in the Nominative, and those

E

50 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 140,

in p preceded by a short vowel in the Nom.: St. cwpar,
Nom. capa, body; St. yeves, Nom. yévos, genus; Bt.
and Nom. yijpas, age; St. and Nom. ofvami, mustard ;
St. and Nom. dotu, city; St. and Nom. #rop, heart.

§ 140. The following words must be noticed separately :

9 yaorHp (St. yaotep), belly; 6 mots (St. rod), foot ;

» xelp (St. yeep), hand; 7d ods (St. oT), ear; 6 whys

(St. rnyxv), forearm; % dpiv (St. dpev), diaphragm,

mind; 06 médexus (St. wedXexv), ave; o Borpus (St.

Sorpuv), bunch of grapes; 6 otayus (St. cTayv), ear

of corn; o odn& (St. coyx), wasp; 6 pds (St. pds),

mouse [mus]; 6 ixOds (St. ix Ov), fish; o anjp (St. dep),

air; To Top (St. wip), fire; To bdwp (St. bSa7), water.

Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as: 6 and

) adextpvay (St. ddexrpvoyr), cock and hen; 6 and % ds, or

avs (St. & or ov), swine [sus]; 6 and # at (St. aly), goat;

6 and 7 Bovis (Stem Bov), ox; and many names of persons:

6 and # mais (St. ward), boy and girl; 6 and 4 daipey (St.

Saipor), god and goddess; 6 and 7 pdytis, prophet and prophetess.

§ 141. The endings of the consonant declension are
the following:

Masculines and Feminines. Neuters. '

Sing.

Nom. s or compensation by lengthening | no ending

Gen. os

Dat. t

Ace. aoryv no ending

Voe. no ending or as in the Nom. as
Dual.

N. A. V. €

G.D. ow
Plur.

Nom. €s a

Gen. po )

Dat. oly

Acc. as a

Voc. = Nom. €s a

§ 141. Dialects—The Hom. dial. has occy for ov in Gen. and
Dat. “Dual (comp. § 129, D.), wod-oiv, and in Dat. Pl. frequently
egatv) for or(v): 2dd-ecor(v), seldom eor(v): aty-eor(v).

§ 143, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51

§ 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declen-
sion deyiates from the rules laid down in § 107 in
the following point :—

Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Dat.
of all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the
vowel be long, § 109): zo8-ds, wod-i (but 765-a), wodoiv,
Too@V, Troi.

Excrptions.—1. Participles, as: dv, being, gyros; Bds, going,
Bavros—accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on
the last syllable but one.

2. mas, omnis, has rayrés, ravti, but mavrev, raci(v).

3. The words mais, boy; Suds, slave; Ods, jackall; Tpas, Trojan ;
To pas, light ; 4 pos, blister ; 7 das, torch; rd ods, ear; 6 ons,
moth ; are paroxytones in Gen. Pl. and Dual: sraid-av, du0-wy,
6d-wv, Tpd-av, pdt-ov, pgd-wy, d45-ay, dt-ow, oé-wv (Com-
pare further §§ 177, 9).

4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction :

ip = €ap, spring (ver), jipos, ijpt.

§ 142 b. In regard to the quantity it must be observed that
several monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are
lengthened: St. mod, Nom. Sing. mov-s, foot; St. ravr, Nom.
Sing. Neut. wav, everything; St. mip, Nom. Sing. mip, fire;
St. o¥, Nom. Sing. cis, boar

§ 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension
are divided into three Classes with different suk.
- divisions :

I, Consonant STEMs.
1. Guttural and Labial Stems.
2. Dental Stems.
3. Liquid Stems.

Il. Vowet Stems.
1. Soft-vowel Stems.
2. Diphthong Stems.
3. o Stenis.

(II. Exipep Stems.
1. > Stems.

2. + Stems,
8. v Stems.

52 CONSONANT PDECLENSION, § 144,
I. Consonant STEMS,
Ԥ144. 1, Guttural and Labial Stems,
i, e. Stems in «, y, ¥, 7, , B.
Examples, 6 pirag, guard » prey, vein
Stems. puhak pr€B
Singular.
Nom. V. gvraé [dux] prey _ [pleb-s]
Gen. pvAak-os [duc-is } prcB-ds [ pléb-is]
Dat. pvdak-t | duc-i] preB-i | pléb-i]
Ace, pirck-i [duc-e-m] | @d¢B-a [pléb-e-m]
Dual.
N, A. V. punrix-e pr€B-e
G. D. puddk-ow pr«B-ow
Plural.
Nom. V. ponrix-es shan. pr€B-es
Gen. dvuddk-wv [duc-um] pr©B-av
Dat. prraki(v) previ(v)
Ace, Pvdr%tx-ds [duc-es] prep-as

Examples for Declension.
‘O pippné, ant, St.puppnk —-) Hdppryé, lyre, St. Poppryy
H paotié, whip, St. party 6 Aidioy, Acthiopian, St. Aidton
7 Big, cough, St. Bnx

§ 145. All these Stems are Mase. or Fem. The
Nom. Sing. is formed by affixing s to the Stem: the ¢
with the final consonant of the Stem forms & w, as
in the Dat. Pl. (§ 48). The Voe. is always the same as
the Nom.

Obs.—The Stem ddwmex has the vowel irregularly lengthened in
the Nom. Sing., ddaané, fox; whilst on the contrary the long
vowel in the Stems x«ypix, powik, is shortened in the Nom.:
xipvé, herald; oink, palm-tree; where the accent shows that
the v and ¢ sre short by nature (comp. § 83, Obs.1). rpex
has Nom. Sing. 60/£, hair, Dat. Pl. @pi€c(v) (comp. § 54, a),

§ 147. CONSONANT DECLENSION, 53
§ 146. 2. Dental Stems, i. e. Stems in 7, 6, 8, v.
Exam 7) Napnas TO c@pa 6 yépav 6 Wyepov
Stems Aapwrad ToOLaT yeporr nyewov
torch body old man leader
Sing.
Nom. Aapmrit-s cpa yéepav Wyepov
Gen. Aapmitd-os o@LiT-os YyépovT-os -NYEpOv-0s
Dat. Aapmitd-i oapir-t yepovr-i nyepov-t
Ace, Aaprad~a copa yépovt-a Wyepov-&
Voe. Aaprid-s copa y€pov ye Haov
Dual.
N.A. V. | Xaprad-e owpiir-e yépovt-e nyepov-e
G. D. Aaprad-ow | cwpdr-ow | yepdvt-ow | Hyepdv-oww
Plural.
a Fs Aapmrdd-es =| wo@piir-a yépovr-es TyEHOv-€s
Gen. Aaprdd-av | copdt-ov | yepdvt-wv MVE HOY
Dat. Aaprd-o(v) | copii-or(v) yépov-o1(y) nyeps-o1(v)
Ace, Aaprdd-ds =| o@par-a yéport-as nyensv-is

§ 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be
noticed below, the Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. may be

Examples for Declension.

9 warpi-s, native country, St. rat pid

TO dvopa, name, St. dvopar
7 vv0&, night [now for nocts], St. vuxr [noct]

9 kakérn-s, badness, St. kaxotnt
7d pert, honey [mel], St. perder

6 d8ovs, tooth [den-s for dent-s], St. o8ovr [dent]
6 deddis, dolphin, St. SeApiv
6 roupnv, shepherd, St. rotpev

6”EdAn», Hellen, St. ‘EXAXnv

6 dyay, contest, St. dyar
Adjectives :
mevn-s, poor, St. mevnt
dkov, neut. dkov, unwilling, St. dkovr
arpaypewv, nent. arpaypor, inactive, St. drpeypLow

formed in two ways, viz. :

1. With Sigma affixed to the stem. sefore this

a
v7 ee

54 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 147. :

sigma the consonants 7, 6, 0, when they stand alone,
disappear altogether (§ 49): DAapzasd-s, Aapma-s,
copv0-s, xdpi-s, helmet; but v and vt have the short
vowels of the Stem lengthened by way of compen-
sation (§ 42), so that a, %, %, become 4, 7, 0; but e
becomes e1, and 0, ov: wavt-s, wa-s, every; év-s, els,
one; oddovt-s, dd0v-5, tooth,

Exceprions.—The monosyllabic Stem 08 [ped] (§ 142, 6) has
the vowel lengthened exceptionally, aov-s [Lat. pé-s, i. e. ped-s];
Sapapr has Nom. Sing. 9 ddapap, spouse, for danaps, because
of its harshness,

2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem; but
in its stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, %
lengthened, so that by this lengthening (§ 42, Ods.) e be-
comes 7, and o becomes w: St. zorpev, Nom. rrousjy,
shepherd; St. jyewov, Nom. ryeudr. If the Stem-
vowel is long of itself, the Nom. Sing. is like the Stem:
0 ayer, contest.

The +r of the Stems in vv in this formation is
rejected according to § 67: yepovr, Nom. yépwy (for
yepwvt). The simple + of the Participial Stems in o7
is changed into >: St. NeXv«ort, Nom. Sing. AcAvKds
(for NeAvKwT), having loosened.

Obs. 1. The vowel shows that s is not a mere affix in AeAukas,

one who has loosened. Comp. xdpi-s, favour, St. xapir.

Obs. 2. The Stems in 8, 6, as well as those in avr, evr, always
form the Nom. Sing. with sigma; but Stems of substantives in
ovr and the Stems in y generally without s.

§ 147 6. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom.
Ace. and Voce. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound
in regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it: AvOé(7),
Joosened (see § 187), AcAvKds (for NeAUKOT); Yara,
milk, from the Stem yaXaxr (Gen. yadaxt-os = Lat.
lact-is). On wav (Stem zravt), see § 142 4,

Obs.—On the Acc. Sing. in v, belonging to some Stems in cr, 0,
13, v8, vd, see § 156. :

§ 149, CONSONANT DECLENSION. — o5

§ 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines
sometimes has the pure Stem, as far as is possible:
“Apteus (St. ’Apreyusd), Atay (St. Aiavt), yépov (St.
yepovtT); sometimes it is like the Nom. (necessarily
so when the accent is on the last syllable): syeuov:
and in all participles even when the accent is not on
the last syllable: Aéywv (St. Neyour), speaking.

The YVoe. zai, boy, from the St. acd, is specially
to be observed.

Obs.—The Stems AmdAXwv, Moceddy, which are like the Nom.,

shorten the vowel and draw back the accent in the Voca-

tive: “AmoNXor, IdceSov. The accent is also drawn back in
many compound words: ’Ayduepuvoy, ’Aprordyecrov (§ 85).

§ 149. The formation of the Dat. Pl. results from the
laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). +, 6, @ and simple », are
dropped before ci(v) without leaving any trace; but
vt is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by
way of compensation.

EXcEPTIon.—The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no

lengthening of the vowel by way of compensation : St. yaprevr

(Nom. Sing. xapiets, graceful, Dat. Pl. xapiecd(v). See In-
flexion, § 18%.

§ 148. Dialects—The Vocative of the Stem dvaxr (Nom. Sing.
avaé, ruler) is in Hom. dvi (shortened from dvaxr : comp. the neuter
yada, § 147 b); some Stems in vr lose the » in the Voc. : “ArAa for
*Ar\ar(r).

§ 149. Dialects—Homer forms the Dat. Pl. moooi(v) instead of
rod-or(v), Att. mociv (rots, foot); the 8 being assimilated instead
of being rejected.

56 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 150
§ 150. 8. Liquid Stems, i. e. Stems in A and p.
Exam. 6 ads 6 pyrep “) piyrnp 6 Onp
Stems, “ar pyntop enTep Onp

salt orator mother game
Sing.
Nom, |a@r-s fsal] | pyrop pytnp [mater] | Onp
Gen. _|dd-~ds [sal-is] hess) pntp-ds poston Onp-ds
Dat. A-i [sal-i] | pyrop-t pntp-t matr-i| p-t
Acc, _|@d-a [sal-e-m]| pyrop-a pytép-a | matr-e-m]} Onp-a
Voc, —|iid-s pijrop Bijrep Onp
Dual. |
N. A. V. Gd-e pnrop-e pnrep-€ Onp-e
G. D. |ad-oiv pyntdp-ow | unrép-ow Onp-oiv
Plural.
N. V. |dd-es [sal-es] piyrop-es pnrép-es [matr-es] | Ojjp-es
Gen. |d4d-dv[sal-um} pytop-av pnrép-ev |matr-um])| Onp-dy
Dat éd-ci(v) pnrop- ouy)) pnrpa-o(y Onp-ci(v)
Ace d-as pnrop-as | pnrép-as Onp-as

Examples for Declension.
6 kparnp, mixing-jug, St. kparnp
6 pop, thief (fur), St. pap

§ 151, The only Stem in A which forms the Nom, Sing. with
sigma is 4X; all Masc. and Fem. Stems in p form the Nom.
Sing. without sigma (§ 147, 2); hence with long Stem-vowels
the Nom. Sing. is like the Stem; short Stem-vowels, however,
are lengthened, 7. e., € into n, o into a.

The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing.: rd #rop, heart
Only the monosyllabic Stem wip lengthens the v: ré mip,
fire (§ 142, b).

§ 152. The Voc. Sing. has the pure Stem: pfrop.

The Stem cwtnp (Nom. cwrnp, saviour) shortens » into
e, and draws back the accent (comp. § 148): Voe. cdrep.

§ 153. The Stems varep, pnrep, Ovyarep,

rd vexrap, nectar
6 alOnp, aether, St. aidep

§ 150. Dialects.—7 As, poet., the sea,

§ 153. Dialects—The «< is often retained in the Gen. and -~
by poets: pnrépos; while it is rejected in other cases:
Instead of “ed in the Dat. Pl. there may be the eoot(v) men-
tioned, § 141, D.: Ovyarépeoor(y).

§ 154, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 57

yaorep, Anuntep (Noms. rarip, father ; pntnp,
mother ; Ovyarnp, daughter ; yaor7p, belly ; Anurjrnp),
reject « in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, ¢) The
first four throw the accent on the case-ending ; ; the last
draws it back (zratpés, Aruntpos)- The e is accented
where it appears: pyrépa, in spite of prnp, except in
the Voc., where the accent is drawn back: watep, in
spite of Sori) but Ace. Sing. Anuntpa. In the Dat.
PL. the syllable rep becomes by metathesis (§ 59) tpa-
untpd-cu(v).

Obs.—The Stem dorep (Nom. Sing. dorjp, star) belongs to these

words only in the formation of the Dat. Pl.: dorpdo(v). For
aynp (St. dvep), see, under the irregular words, § 177. 1.

II. Vowrt Stems.
§ 154. 1. Soft-Vowel Stems, i. e. Stems in z and v.

Exam. | 7) wdXis, city 7) ods, sow | Td dotu (dors) city
Stems. | modAt ot
Sing. |
Nom | moX-s ov-s dotu
Gen. |dre-ws av-os aore-os OF dote-ws
Dat. (wone-i) moder ov-t (dote-i) doret
Ace. wonu-v ov-y autv
Voe. TONG ov-s aoru
Dual.
N.A. V.| wone-€ ov-e (Gare-e) dor
G. D. | modé-ow ov-oiv doté-ow
Plural
N.V. |(wdrde-es) riders | ot'-es (dore-a) darn
Gen. TOAE-@Y ov-Y GaTe-ov
Dat. mode-ou(v) ob-ci(v) dore-o(v)
Ace. (mdde-as) rods =| G¥-as or ais | (doTe-a) doty

Examples for Declension.
6 Bérpu-s, bunch of grapes
7) mitv-s, pine-tree according to § 157.
6 mnxv-s, fore-arm
7 Stvapt-s, power
9 ordot-s, party, faction
Adjectives, § 185

\ both according to § 157,

= ad

58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155,

§ 155. The Nom. Sing. Mase. and Fem. is always
formed by Sigma. The Neuter Sing. as well as the
Vocative Sing. of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet
sometimes the Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and
this is the case in all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing.
Mase. and Fem. v is affixed to the Stem,

On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 6.
But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and
Ace. Sing. of some polysyllabice words.

§ 156. Barytones in it, 18, 10, vd, vO (Nom. ts, vs),
form the Acc. Sing. generally by affixing » after
rejecting the Stem-consonant: St. épcd (Nom. épi-s,
strife), Ace. épi-v; St. copv@ (Nom. kdpu-s, helmet),
Ace. xépu-v; St. dpvid (Nom. dpvi-s, bird), Acc. dpvi-v.
The Ozxytones, on the contrary, always have a: édmi-s,
hope, Acc. édida; Kreis, key, stands alone; St. «recd,
Ace. «rely, (seldom «e«id-a,) Ace. Pl. xreis or KrciOas.

Examples. 4 épt-s, strife 7 €dmi-s, hope
Stems. épd éeAwid
Singular. €pi-s éAri-s

€pid-os " édsrid-08

epid-t eArrid-e

épi-v éArid-a

§ 157. Most Stems in 4, as well as adjective and
some substantive Stems in v, change their final vowel to
e in Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the

§ 156. Dialects —The Acc. Sing. in a of dental Stems is more
frequent in Hom.: yAavxwmid-a (yAavxdms, bright-eyed), épid-a;
kXels is KAnis, Acc. KAnid-a.

§ 157. Dialects.—The Ionic dial. leaves « unchanged : Gen. mrodt-os,
Dat. wédt (from wddu-t), Nom. Pl. wéds-es, Gen. modi-ov, Dat. in
Herod. wédt-or(v), Hom, moXi-eror(v), Acc. médt-as (Herod. also
rods). Other additional forms of the Hom. dialect are: Gen. Sing.
médn-os, Dat. Sing. méde-t and wédn-i, Nom. Pl. wdAn-es, Acc. Pl.
mwoXn-as.

The Stems in v have always os in the Gen, Sing. The Dat. Sing.
only is contracted : 24y«t.—evpv-s, broad, has the additional form
evpéa in the Acc, Sing.

§ 158, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59

Dual and Pl. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing. this «
remains unchanged; in the Stems, however, in ¢, and in
some substantive Stems in v, ¢ is followed by os
(instead of os), called the Attic termination, which does
not prevent the accent from being on the antepenult:
TONE-WS, TEAEKE-wS (TENEKU-S, Axe).

In the Dat. Sing. ei is contracted into ev, in the
Nom. Pl. ees and Acc. eas into ess, and éa of neuter
substantives into ». Adjectives maintain the uncon-
tracted form ea: dotn, but yduKéa.

§ 158. The contraction of e€ to 7 in the Nom. Ace. and
Voe. Dual is rare. The Gen. Pl. of Stems in « follows
the accent of the Gen. Sing.: wéXe-wv like 7roXe-as.

Most subsiantive Stems in v leave this vowel un-
changed; but others like aorv follow the analogy of
Stems in «, and change v into « ve are sometimes
contracted into v in the Nom. Acc. and Voe. Dual; in
the Acc. Pl. also we find iy@is, with iyOv-as (ix Od-s,
fish), and opis, Acc. Pl. of ddpv-s, eyebrow.

éyxerv-s, eel, retains v in the Sing.: Gen. éyyéAv-os:
but changes it in the Dual and Pl. into e: Nom. Pl.
éyyénets.

The adjective iSpi-s, acquainted with, St. idp., keeps
its c unchanged through all the cases.

§ 158. Dialects—The Dat. iy@vi is in Hom. contracted into iyévi.
Tn the Dat. Pl. o is sometimes doubled : véxu-cor(v) with vext-eroXr)

(véxv-s, corpse)

€9 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 159,

§ 159. 2. Diphthong Stems, i. e. Stems in ev, au, ov.

Exam, 6 Barrreds 1} ypais 6 and 4 Bows
Stems. Baoihev ypav Bov
king old woman ox
Sing.
Nom. | Bacrred-s ypai-s Bov-s ]
Gen, Baoé-ws ypa-ds Bo-ds [bov-is]
Dat, (Baowdé-i) Buorted | ypa-i Bo-t v-i}
Ace, Baowré-a ypav-v Bov-v | bov-e-m]
Voe. Bacied ypav Bod
Dual.
N. A.V.) Bacidé-e ypa-e Bo-e
GD. | Baodé-ow ypa-owv Bo-oww
Plural.
N. V. | (Baowdé-es) Baordijs| ypa-es Bo-es [bov-es]
or BaoiXeis
Gen. Baoir\é-ov ypa-av fo-av [bo-um]
Dat. Baored-or(v) ypav-ci(v) | Bov-ai(v)
Ace, Baoidé-as ypav-s Bov-s

Examples for Declension.
6 yovev-s, parent 6 ieped-s, priest ’Odvaced-s, "AxiAed-s.

§ 160. Adi diphthong Stems affix s in the Nom. Sing.
and ov(v) in the Dat. Pl.; those in av and ov affix v in
the Ace. Sing. to the full Stem. In the Vocat. Sing.
the Stem appears pure.

Before vowel case-endings, i. e., in all other forms,
the v of the Stem was changed into F (§ 34, D.):-.
Bof-os [bov-is],.and then was entirely lost: Bo-0s-
[8o0-av = bo-um] (§ 35, D. 2).

Obs.—An isolated diphthong Stem is of. Nom. of-s, sheep [ovi-s]:

ols, oli, otv; Pl. otes, oidy, oiai(v), ots. Comp. § 34, D.

§ 159. Dialects—Ilom. has ypyis for ypai-s, Dat. ypni, Voc. ypnt
or ypu ; from Bod-s, Acc. Pl. Bd-ts, Dat. Bd-eom(v). The forms |
Bas Nom., Bay Acc. Sing., are Doric.

§ 160. Dialects,—Ionic dis (ovis) for ots. Gen. dios, Dat. Pl. di-eoax
or Gero, Acc, Gis.

162, CONSONANT DECLENSION, 61

.

Some compounds of zrov-s, foot, form the Acc. Sing.
like Stems in ov: tpimous, three-footed, Acc. tpizouv.
For vad-s, see among the irregular words, § 177, 11.

§ 161. The stems in ev moreover have in the

a) Gen. Sing., ws for os. Comp. § 157.

6) Dat. Sing., ec always contracted for ei.

¢e) Ace. Sing. and PL, a is long and not contracted.

d) Nom. and Voce. Pl, ees contracted by older Attic
writers into 7s, by the later into ecs.

é) Words which have a vowel before ev may be con-
tracted also in the Gen. and Acc, Sing., and in the Ace.
Pl.: St. Tetpacev, Nom. Iepacev-s, port of Athens,
Gen. Iletpauds, Acc. Tevpara; yoev-s, measure, Acc. Pl.
Nous.

Obs.—The Gen. in -ews has arisen by transmutation of quantity

(§ 37, D. 2) out of the Hom. nos. Hence the length of the
final syllable. In the same manner the Acc. Sing. ea has

arisen out of na: still e& is also found, like eds in the Ace. Pl.;
eas is contracted by later writers into ets.

§ 162. 3. O Stems, i. e. Stems in o and ow.

Examples. | 4) meta, persuasion 6 fipaws, hero
Stems. | meido pe
Singular,
Nom, melo po-s Pl. fpw-es
Gen, met06-os) mevOods | ipw-os p@-wv
Dat. metOd-i) mrevOot Hpw-t jpe-o(v)
Ace, metOd-a) metOa ipe-a Tpw pe-as oY
Voc, meOot Npo-s Hpos
Dual and Plural of we:6a are Dual fpo-e
furmed as in the o declension np o-ow

§ 141. Dialects——The Epic dialect lengthens the e of Stems in
ev into » before vowels: BaotAj-os, BaotAn-t, Baoidij-a, Baord7-es,
Baoih-ev, dporh-erot(v) (dpiored-s, prince) ; still there are Geni-

62 CONSONANT DECLENSION.

Examples for Declension.
i 1X6 (St. x0), echo
Kalua, Anta, dua-s (St. uo) slave
patpe-s (St. pntpe), avunculus,

§ 163. The Stems in 9, all feminine, form the Nom.
Sing. without sigma, except the Stem aiSo0, Nom. Sing.,
aidw-s, shame, Acc. aiid. The Acc. which is like the
Nom. is oxytone (contrary to § 87): zee, not wed.

The Vocative ends in 0+; all other cases are con-
tracted. The Acc. of Stems in @ usually remains un-
contracted. The Stem éw, Nom. 7 é-s, dawn, has
Gen. Sing. &#, Dat. & (according to § 182), Acc. &@
(from €wa).

Obs.—Several Stems in ov follow the above declension in some of

their forms: andav, nightingale, Gen. dndovs, with dnddvos;
eixav, image, Gen. eixods (comp. § 171).

tives also in eos and eis COdvceis), Datives in eZ, et, and Accu-
satéves in ea, n: Tvd7.
The New-Ionic dial. leaves e frequently uncontracted: Baoté-es.
§ 163. Dialects—Hom. contracts jpwi into ape, Mivea inte
Mive. The old and poetic form for éw-s is ia-s (St. no), declined
like aidé-s. Some proper names in o in the Nom, Sing. have in the
New-lonic dial, an Ace. in ofy: Ayrody, "loby,

65. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 63

If. Ex1pEp Stems, i. e. Stems which reject the final
consonant in certain forms.

§ 164. 1. } Stems, i. e. Stems which elide sigma.

Exam. | 1rd yévos, race | M. evdyevys, N. edyevés, of good family

Stems. | yeves evyeves

Sing.

Nom. évos [genus] |M. edyerns N, ebyeves
Gen. Fees) yévous | (evyevé-os) evyevods

Dat. (yéve-i) yever | (edyevé-i) edyevet

Ace. yevos (edyeve-G) evyevrn N. edyevés
Voc. yevos evyeves N, evyevés
Dual.

N. A, V.| (yévere) yévn_ | (ebyevé-e) _ edyevj
G. D. | (yevé-ow) yevow | (edyevé-owv) edyevoiy

N.Y, re’) yern aftr evyeveis N. (edyevéa) edyevij
yevé-wv) yevar| (edyevé-wy) evyevav

Dat. yeve-ou(v) evyeve-oi(v)

Ace, (yéve-t) yévn | (evdyevé-its) edyeveis N. (edyevéa) edyeri)

Examples for Declension.

Td eldos, form Kdddos, beauty ~ pédos, song ayOos, burden
‘Adjectives :

cadys, Neut. cadés, clear axpiBns, Neut. dxpiBés, exact

ein Ons, Neut. evindes, simple

§ 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant
only when it stands at the end, ze. in the Nom.
Ace. and Voc. Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Voce.
Sing. Mase. and Fem.

The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel «¢

§ 165. Dialects.—The Epic dial. frequently, the New-Ionic always,
leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted : yéveos, yéve..
Hom. sometimes has the Gen. Sing. evs (from eos, § 37, D. 1):
Odpoevs (Odpoos, cowrage).

In the Dat. Pl. Homer has three endings: e-egor(v), eo-or(y),
and the usual e-c1(v): Bedé-eoor(v), Bedco-or(v), Bede-or(v)
(Béros, dart),

‘64 CONSONANT DECLENSION, § 166.

into o in the Nom, Acc. and Voce, Sing.: St. yeves,
yévos. Neuter adjectives leave ¢ unchanged: edyevés.
Masculines and Feminines form the Nom, Sing by
lengthening es into ys (§ 147, 2), as ¢ cannot be affixed:
evyevjs from edyeves, like arouuyy from trouper.

Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the
Voe. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxy-
tone in Nom. Sing. the accent is on the last syllable
but two (comp. §§ 148, 85): Nom, Lwxpdrns, Voe.
Lewxpates; Nom. Anuwoobévys, Voc. Anuoobeves.

Obs.—The Neuter adnOés (Mase. ddnOijs, true) draws back the

accent in interrogations: GAn@es, really ?

§ 166. In all other forms ¢ is rejected (§§ 61 and 49):
yéve-i for yéveo-s [gener-t|. Wherever two vowels meet
they are contracted: ee in the Nom. Ace, and Voc. Dual
become 7; e€a generally », but when another vowel
stands before e they sometimes become 4, according to
§ 41: St. évdees, Nom. éevdens, defective, Acc. évdead;
St. dyces, Nom. iryijs, healthy, Acc. iyd, but also
iyup; St. ypees, Nom. 7d ypéos, debt, Neut. Pl. ypéa.
The adjectives in -du7js (St. Pves) have duh and gua:
evpuns, well-disposed, evpuh and edpva.

Obs.—Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Pl. on the

last syllable but one, contrary to § 87: airdpxev (Nom. abrdpans,

self-sufficient). So also rpujpns, trireme, used as a substantive,
Gen. Pl. rpujpaer.

§ 167. Proper names in -xAXens compounded with xdéos, glory
(St. kAXees), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a
single one in all the other cases: Nom. (IepixAens) Hepixdijs,
Gen. (Ilepixdecos) Mepexdéous, Dat. (Tepixdeet, epixdeer) Tepe-
kei, Acc. (Ilepixdcea) Mepixdéa, Voc. (Ilepixdees) Hepixrecs.

§ 166. Dialects—A vowel before « is often contracted with it in
Hom. : owéos or oreios, cave, Gen. omeiovs, Dat. omj-t (from onéei),
Dat. Pl. omjecou(v) and oxéoor(v); edxrdens, glorious, Acc. evxheias
(from evxdéeas), but axAneis (from dxdens, inglorious). Herod.
évdeces (evdens, defective), avOpwrodpveas (avOpamroduis, human).

§ 167. Dialects—The Epic dial. forms ‘HpaxAjjs, “HnpaxAjj-os,
“Hpaxdjj-t, “Hpaxdj-a; the New-Ionic, ‘Hpaxdéns, Hpakdé-os
“Hpakné-i, “Hpax)e-a.

je

|

‘

§ 169. CONSONANT DECLENSION, 65
§ 168. 2. T Stems, i. e. Stems which elide r+.
' Examples. TO Kepas, horn To kpéas, meat
Stems, Kepart Kpeat

Singular.
N. A.V. | képits Kpéas
Gen, Képat-os (xépaos) Képaos Kpé€aos) Kpéas
Dat. képar-t (kepai) Képa Kpéai) pea
Dual.
N. A. V. | képir-e (xépae) képa
G. D. Kepat-ow (xepdow) kepov
Plural,
WA, V; képar-a Képaa) Képa Kpeaa) peat
Gen. Kepat-wv (kepdwy) Kepav Kpedwv) Kpe@v
Dat. Képa-ou(v) kped-ou(v)

§ 169. r becomes s in Nom. Ace. and Voc. Sing.,

according to § 67. In the other cases some words
always reject it: e. g., xpéas, oédas, splendour ; yipas,
age ; kvédas, gloom. Uthers, like xépas, retain both forms
together, with and without +. The vowels which meet
are regularly contracted. The quantity of a@ is very fluc-
tuating. The Dat. Sing. is written also av: cédau.

In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. as) have a
movable r.

§ 169. Dialects.— Hom. has Semd-eoor(v) or Sérac-or(v), Dat, Pl.
of demas, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes e: Hom. ovédas, grownd,
Gen. ovde-os, kaas, fleece, Nom. Pl. kwe-a; xépas, New-lon. Gen.
KEpeos. :

A movable r appears also in the Stems idSpar, yeXor, xpor
(Nom. idpas, sweat; yeAws, laughter; xpos, skin), Dat. id8pa, Acc.
idp@, together with Gen. idpéros; yeAw; and regularly in Hom,
xpo-ds, xpo-i (poct. xpd), xpd-a. Comp, aidas, nas, § 163.

66 CONSONANT DECLENSION.

§ 170. 3. N Stems, i. e. Stems which elide »,

Example. M. F. peigov, greater N. peifov

Stem. pesCov
Singular,
N. V. peilov N. peigov
Gen. peiCov-os
Dat. peiCov-t
Ace. peifov-a [pecCoa] peito N. peifov
Dual.
N. A. V. | peifov-e
1 &. D. per(dv-oev
Plural

N. V. peilov-es [perCoes| peifous N. peifova [peroa] peivo
Gen, per(dv-ov

Dat, peivo-or(v)

Ace, peifov-as [perfoas] peiCous N. peifova [perfoa] peifo

Examples for Declension.
Bedriwr, better aicxiav, more hateful ddylwy, more painful.

§ 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally
in use. But the open ones (we:foa) never occur, Com-
paratives of more than two syllables throw back the
accent in the Nom. Acc. and Voc. Sing. Neuter upon
the last syllable but two: BéArioy, alo-yuov.

Besides the comparatives (Nom. wy, ov), there are
only the two proper names, ’A7roAA wy (Stem and Nom.)
and Ilocedav (Stem and Nom.), Acc. *A7d\X@ (also
"Amro wr-a), Ilocedé (also Tloceday-a). On the
Vocative, see § 148, Obs. We may compare several
Stems which fluctuate between ov and o (§ 163).

§ 171. Dialects—Hom. forms the Acc. xuxe® or xvxer® from
Kuxeoy, Mixture,

§ 172, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 67

§ 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Prin-

cipal Declension.

Nom, | Stem. » Gen.
in -a -ar Td copa, body ooparos
na -ad 6 mais, boy maddés

ait 7 Sais, meal | Satrds
-av M.| -ay av, Pan Tlavés
-av N.| -avr Adj. ro wav, the whole mavros
-ap TO €ap, spring €apos
ap -apt n Sdpap, wife ddpapros
-a(p)r Td ppéap, fountain ppéaros
-is F.) -ad 7 Napras, lamp Aapurados
-is N.| -a(r) TO Kpéas, meat Kpéws
-“ -avrT 6 yiyas, giant ylyavros
ps M. -ay Adj. peas, black pédavos
-avs F'.| -a(v) 9 ypais, old woman ypads
-etp | -e1p 7 xelp, hand xeEtpos
ee Part. AvOels, loosed AUGEevros
: ‘| -ev Adj. eis, one évds
FF -ed 7 kNels, key kAredds
ee a Part. Avb€v, loosed AvbEevTos
‘| ev Adj. apper, male appevos
-es N.| -e(s) | Adj. cadés, clear caois
-evs M.| -e(v) 6 hovets, murderer hovéws
-w Mi 7 6 Auunv, harbour Aipevos
| -ny 6”ENAny, Greek “EXAnvos
si -€p 6 aidnp, aether aidépos
-np 6 Onp, game Onpos

68

CONSONANT DECLENSION.

Nom. | Stem. Cen.
| | eee .
~«(s) 6, 1) Tpuypns, trireme Tpujpous
nl * Adj. pt, acquainted with (pos
~4 ‘| <r TO pers, honey pedcros
wv = 6 deAdiv, dolphin baAdivos
-t 7 dds, city mddews
3 7) €Amris, hope édmidos
“ts “ur 7 xapes, favour xéeeres
-10 6, 7 dpus, bird pvibos
-w 7) Zadapis, Salamis Zadupivos
ee Adj. evdaipor, fortunate evdaipovos
. ‘| -ovr Part. Adov, loosing Avovros
™ -e(s) TO yevos, Trace yevous
os N. -oT Part. meqbixds, having become | meixdros
-ovT 6 ddovs, tooth oddvtos
-ous -08 6 rovs, foot Todds
-o(v) 6, 7 Bois, 0x Bods
-u NJ -v rd dotu, city doreos
-w M.| -w 6 péoiv, wooden tower pooivos
KN. -urr Part. decxviv, shewing OecxvivTos
-uvT Part. derxvis, shewing deixvivros
~us MJ -~v 6 ixOds, fish ixOvos
6 mxus, ell TNXE@S
Fj -vd 7) xAapus, cloak xAapnvdos
-o Fj -o } web, persuasion mebovs
we -ov 7 dnBaby, nightingale dnddvos
-@v 6 ayav, contest ayovos
M.| -ovr 6 A€wv, lion Aeovros
“wp -op 6 pirwp, orator propos

§ 173, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 69

Nom. Stem. Gen.
-@ 6 jpes, hero Hpwos
-osM| 7 7) aidads, shame aidovs
‘| -or Part. repixas, having become | mwepixdros
-oT 6 Epws, love Epwros
7 6 yo, vulture yinds
-~ -B é xavy, steel — -| xaduBos
-p n KaTHuy, wpper story KatnAidos
-K 6 pvdak, guard vdakos
£ ~y 7 PAdE, flame proyds
-x 6 dvvé, nail dvixos
“KT 7 v0k, night VUKTOS

§ 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with
the First in the following particulars:

1. Masculines have s for the Nom. Sing. (or com-
pensation for it); feminines are less consistent in this.
2. The Dat. Sing. affixes « (subscribed in the First
Principal Declension).
8. Vowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take pv in
the Ace. Sing.
Obs.—The original ending of the Acc. Sing. was also in the Second
Principal Declension everywhere v. This consonant was, how-
ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel

a: ddovr-a-v = Lat. dent-e-m. Subsequently v was dropped,
and a left, generally as the only sign: dddvr-a.

4, The Gen. and Dat. Dual have ev (au, ow).
5. The Gen. Pl. wv.
4 The Dat. Pl. cv(v) originally everywhere.
7. The Acc. Pl. ¢ everywhere.
Obs.—The original ending of all Acc. Pl. was vs, but v was
dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was
compensated for by the lengthened ds, ovs. After consonants

there was the same process as in the Acc. Sing.: dddvr-a(v)-s,
Lat. dent-é-s for dent-em-s.

8. Neuters all have & in Nom. Acc. and Voe. Pl.

i as

70. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174

The principal differences in the endings are:

1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal
Declension always has o¢ (@s).

2. In the Nom. Pl., where Mase. and Fem, of the
Second Principal Declension always have es.

Irregularities in Declension.

§ 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one
Nom. is called Heteroclising (érepoxdola, different m-
flexion): Nom. cxoros, darkness, Gen. cxotov (O-Declen-
sion), and oxdrous (Second Principal Declension) ; Awy@s,
hare, according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xayé.

An important irregularity of this kind occurs with
proper names in 7s: Lwxparns (St. Lwxpartes), but
Ace. Lwxparny (as if from Stem Lwxpata of the A-
Declension) with Xwxpdrn. But those in -«rAjs (§ 167)
follow the Second Principal Declension exclusively.

§ 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem
which cannot be that of the Nom. is called Metaplasm
(uetaTTAacpuOs, change of formation): Nom. Sing. 76 dé
Spor, tree, Dat. Pl. dSévdpecc(v), as if from St. Sevdpes;
Nom. Sing. 76 Sdxpvov, tear, Dat. Pl. Sdxpvor(v), from
St. Saxpv (poet. Nom. daxpu) ; 7d wip, fire, Pl. ra wipa,
Dat. tots mipots (O-Declension); Nom. Sing. édveupo-s,
dream, Gen. ovelpatos, Nom. Pl. éveipara.

§ 176. A peculiar irregularity appears in several

§ 174. Dialects—Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. ns in Herod.,
have ea for nv in the Acc. Sing.: dSeomdrn-s, master, deomdrea.
6 6xo-s, carriage, in Hom. has Pl. ra Gyea, 6xeopi(v), from the
St. dxes. Oldirous has poet-forms from a St. O28:a0da, Gen.
Sing. Oidudédao, trag. Oidirdda. Hom. Saprndov, Stems Saprndov
and Sapmndovr. Mives, Acc. Sing. Mivwa (§ 163), and Mivor.

§ 175. Dialects—Hom. metaplasms are: Dat. Pl. dvdpardderau(v),
Nom, Sing. dvdpdamodor, slave ; Nom. Acc. Pl. spoom@mara, Nom. Sing.
npécamov, countenance ; décpata, bonds, Sing. 6 derpds ; epinpo-s,
confidential, Nom. Pl. épinpes; adxy, strength, Dat. Sing. dAx-i;
vopivn battle, bopin; iyop, divine blood, Acc. Sing. iya,

§ 177. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 71

Neuter Stemsin apt,as dpeapt. They reject 7 in the
Nom. Ace. and Voc. Sing., and p in the other cases: 70
dpéap, well, Gen. ppéaros (also dontos); To Frrap, liver,
Gen. #ratos; TO adrepap and dread, salve, Gen. dret-
patos.

To these correspond the Stems oxa(p)r and tSa(p)r:
Nom. oxop, dirt, Gen. cxdtos; tdwp, Gen. sdaros.

§ 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order:

1. advnp, man, (comp. § 153) rejects ¢ of the St. avep,
and inserts 6 in its place (§ 51, Ods. 2): av-d-p-ds, avdpi,
dvdpa; Voc. avep; Dual, dvdpe, dvdpoiv; Pl. avdpes,
avopav, avdpaci(v), avdpas.

2. "A pns (the god Ares): St.’Apes, Gen.” Apews and
"Apeos, Acc.”Apny, together with”Apn; Voc. regul.” Apes.

8. apv, without Nom.: Gen. rod and tijs apv-ds, of
the lamb, apvi, dpva; Dat. Pl. dpvdai(r).

4. 70 yovu, knee (genu), Nom. Ace. Voc. All the
rest from St. yovar, Gen. yovatos.

5. 9 yvv7, woman. All the rest from St. yuvarx-,
Gen. yuvaixds, Dat. yuvarxi, Acc. yuvaixca, Voc. yivar;
Dual yuvaixe, yuvaixotv; Pl. yuvain-es -dv -Et(v) -as.

6. Td Sdpu, wood, spear: St. Sopar (comp. 4). Gen.
_ Sdparos, poet. Sopds, Dat. dSopé and Sdopee.

7. Levs (the god Zeus), Gen. Ards, Dat. Aci, Ace.
Ala, Voc. Zed.

8. 6 and 7) Kva», dog, with Voc. xvov from St. evor.
All the rest from xiv: Gen. xivos, Dat. xivi, Acc. xtva ;
el Kvves, Kuvav, Kiai{v), Kbvas.

9. 0 XG-s, stone, from Hom. déa&a-s, Gen. nano’; Dat.

§ 177. Dialects. —The following forms are peculiar to dialects :-—

1. avip, poet. "dvép-os, "aivép-ty ’avép-a; Dat. Pl. dvdperan(v).

2. “Apns, Hom. *Apnos, “Apri “Apna.

4. yévv, Ion. and poet. yooviir-os, youvar-t, youvior(v); Ep.
Gen. Sing. yotvos, Pl. yodvd, yotvav, yotr-erar(v).

6. dépv, Sovparos, Ep. Sovpds, Soupi, Sodpe, Sodpa, Sovpwr,
Sovperct(r).

7. Zevs, poet. St. Znv: Zyv-ds, Zyv-i, Zijv-a (also Ziv from Zn).

“a oe
72 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 177, %

Ma-i, Ace. Ada-v, Adv; Pl. AG-es, Ad-wv, Ad-eoou(v) or
Ad-eou(v), da-as.

10. 6 pdpri-s, witness, with Dat. Pl. paptuci(v),
from the St. uaprv. ‘The rest from the St. waprup:
pdprupos, paprupt, &e.

1l. 7) vad-s, ship, ve-ws, vn-l, vad-v; Pl. ads ve-@v,
vav-oi(v), vads. Comp. § 159.

Obs.—The Nom. Acc. Sing. and Dat. Acc. Pl. rest on the St. vuv.
Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) wmf, m,
ve-ws is for m-ds (§ 37, D. 2).

12. oand 7) dpvi-s, bird, St. dpvc8 and dpve: dpvid-os,

dpvidi, dpvida and dpyiv; Pl. dpvides and dpveis, dpvewv.

13. TO ods. ear. All the rest from St. @T: @Tds,
etl; Pl. dra, dtwv, o-ci(v). (On the accent, § 142, 3.)

14. 4 Ivvé (the Pnyx), St. ru«v, [ve«v-os, veri,
Tlvxv-a.

15. 6 wpéaBu-s, the aged, has in the Gen. and Dat.
Sing., and throughout the Pl. its forms from mpeoSura
(Nom. Sing. mpecSvrns); mpécBeus, mpécBewv, mpeé-
af8ecuv) signifies ambassadors, to which the Sing. is
mpeaBevrijs.

16. tav. Only Voc. & rav or @ trav, friend or friends,
a defective Stem.

17. 0 vids, son, St. vio, vi, viev, Gen. viéos, TD. vie,
Ace, viéa (rare), Pl. vieis, vigwy, viéou(v), vieis. But also
regularly viov, &e.

18. % xelp, hand, St. xetp, Dual xepoiv, Dat. Pl
xepat(v).

Dialects—11. vai-s, from St. vyv, lon.vni-s, Hom, Ace. Sing,
vn-a, Dat. Pl vyjecor(v), vnvai(v), Ace. vias.

from St. vev, lon. ve-ds, ve-i, vé-a, VE~ES, VE-OV, VE-ETOL, VE-aS,
from St. vav, Dor. va-ds, va-i (navi), vi -ecaus).

13. ods, lon. céas, ovat-os; Pl. ovar-a, Dor. ds, dr-és.

17. vid-s, Ep. Gen. vi-os, vi-t, ui-a, ui-es, vi-aou(v), vi-as.

18. xeip, poet. and New-lon. yep-ds, xep-i, Ep. Dat. Pl. a ca
or xeip-ecor(v).

To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects :

19. Hom. ’Aide-s (Att. “Acdns), St. "Ais, Gen. “Aid-os, “Aid,
alsuv Aiéwvev-s, with regul. inflexion, according to § 159,

§ 178, CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 73

Case-like Terminations.
§ 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain
suffices or appendages, which in meaning very nearly
resemble case-endings. ‘To these belong:

1, -@1, answering to the question where: ddro-M%,

elsewhere ;

Bo. -Gerv, -,, to the question whence :. oixo-Oev,
from home ;

3. -de, PS to the question whither: otxa-de,
homewards,

Dialects.—-20. 6 pws, love, Stems épwr and épo, poet. Acc. épo-r.
21. Oépis, justice, St Oepye and Oepiot, Pl. Oeurot-es, O€psor-as.
22. 7rd napa, head, Hom. St. kapnt, kapnat, kpGart, Kpat, Kap.
Hom. Nom. Sing. xapn.
Gen. ,, Kdpnt-os, Kaptar-os, Kpdaros, Kpards.
Pat. — 4, Kdpyt-t, Kaphar-t, kpdar-t, kpar-i (trag. kapq).
Acc. ,, Kdapn, Tov Kpar-a, TO Kdp.
Nom, Pl. apa, xapjat-a, kpHar-a, secondary form kdonva.
Gen. ,, KpaTev, kapnver,
Dat. ,, xpaci(v).
Acc. ,, = Nom. (also rovs xpar-as).
23. 7 paorié, whip, Hom. Dat. pdori, Acc. paeri-v.
24, 6 peis, month, lon. = Att. pny.
25. dace, eyes. Nom. Acc. Dual, Neut. in Hom. The trag.
have Gen. Pl. éac@v, Dat. dacs or daco1(v).

§ 178. Dialects.—The three local suffixes are very frequent in
Hom, : otxo6:, at home ; "1AcdO rpd, in front of Ilios ; otpavdbev, from
heaven; ayopibev, from the assembly. Ov also supplies the place
of the Gen.-ending: kara xpijOev, down from the head, entirely ; &&
Gdbev, out of the sea. -Se is generally affixed to the Acc. : olxdvde,
homewards ; x\ucinvde, into the tent ; méduwé6e, into the city ; péBovde,
into flight. uyade, into flight, and épage, to the earth, are peculiar.

A suffix peculiar to the Hom. langnage is pi(v); it is added to
the Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. ter-
mination in both Sing. and PI., as:

1. A- decl.: Bin-pr, with force ; krucin-pr, in the tent ; dad vevpi-
gw, from the bow-string.

2. O- decl.: bed-piv, from the gods; Thud-pir, from Ilios.

3. Cons.-decl.: xorv\ndov-d-guv, with the suckers (on the feelers
of the polypus); dx’ dxeo-pi(v), from the carriage; mapa vad-pi(v),
alongside the ships; amd xparec-puy, from the head, (§§ 177, D. 22.)

74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179.

These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun:
AOnjvnbev, from Athens, (with Ion. n); kvKdddev, from
the circle, (kixdo-s). Sometimes o comes in place of the
A-sound: frfo0ev (radicitus) from pita (radix); it also
serves as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems: mavt-
o-Gev, from all sides. The o is sometimes accented,
contrary to § 107, a: xv«d-d-Pev, Mapabwv-d-Bev, from
Marathon. The enclitic suffix Se (§ 92, 5) is often also
combined with the Acc. form: Méyapd-8e, to Megara;
’*EXevotv-a-Se, to Eleusis. olx-a-de, home, from Stem
oixo, is irregular.

For Se we find ce, fe, with the same meaning:
ddrooe, elsewhither ; "AOjvake, to Athens; OnBake, to
Thebes ; Oipate (foras).

§ 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in
t for the Sing., and o«(v) (without a preceding ¢) for the
Plur., answering the question where: oxo, at home;
Ilv60%, at Pytho ; "IcOpoi, on the Isthmus ; "AOnvno(v),
in Athens ; Unarador(v), in Plataea; Oipaor(v), at the
door, (foris); dpaci(v), at the right time.

Cuap. VIL—Orner INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE.

A.—Inflexion according to Genders.
ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION.

§ 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that
which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the O-Declension,
and in the Fem. the A-Declension ; which, consequently,
has in the Nom. Sing. os, 7 (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, wm].

§ 180. Dialects. —The ween have frequently here also y for
Att. @: aloxpn.

§ 182. INFLEXiONS OF ADJECTIVES. 75

Sing. Masc. Fem. WNeut. | Masc. Fem. Neut.
Nom. | aya6és ayabn ayabdv | phirlwos pria Pireor
(fen. |ayaOov adyabjs ayabod | piiiov giriias gidiov
Dat. | dyad dyad ayadG | prio dria dri
Ace, |dyabov ayabyy dyabdv | dittov udtay dor
Voc. |ayadé adyabn ayabdy | dike Grjia girtov

N.A.V.| dya6d ayabad ~~ aya | Grito prt gGrjio
G. D. | dyaOoiv ayabaiv dyaboivy | piiiow giriiaw didiow

Nom. | dayaOoit dyabai dyad | pitktor hd gra
Gen. | dayabav dyabav dyabav | piriov gGittov Pidtov
Dat. | dyabois ayabais ayabois | diriows gGidias Prdiors
Ace, |ayabovs ayabds ayaba | diriovs pirias hikd

In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a vowel or p,
elsewhere 9: Sixavos, Sixala, Sixaiov, just; aicxypos,
aicxpd, airxpov, hateful; codds, copy, copov, wise.

Exception : 9 stands after o, except when o precedes o:

dadéos, dwAén, drdédov, simple.
aOpdos, d0ada, aOpdov, assembled.

§ 181. Though the declension of these Adjectives
conforms to §§ 114, 126, the following points must be
observed :

1. a in the Nom. Sing. is always long.

2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Pl. the Fem.
follows the Masc.: BéBaos, firm, Nom. Pl. Mase.
BéBaior, Fem. BéS8aras (§ 108 would require BeBatas
from Nom. Sing. Be8aia); Gen. of all genders, BeBaiwv
(not even in the Fem. SeBaidv, as would be required by
§ 118).

§ 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two

§ 181. Dialects—<dia, Fem. of dios, heavenly, has in Hom. a:
Sia Oedwy, the heavenly one among the goddesses.

§ 182. Dialects—The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many
compound adjectives: a8pérn (Mase. a ac immortal), avribén
(Mase. dvriéeos, godlike).

76 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. Ԥ 183,

endings, the Masc. being used for the Fem.: Mase. and
Fem. jjovyos. Neut. jovyov, quiet. Compound adjec-
tives especially are all of only two endings: drexvos, child-
less ; xaptropopos, fruitful.

§ 183. Adjectives ending in eos and oo¢ in the Nom.
Masc., are generally contracted (§ 130): ypdceos, golden,
and dzéos, simple, are thus contracted :

Sing. Masc. Fem. Neut. | Masc. Fem. WNeut.
Nom, | xpvcots xpvon xpvoovv | dadovs arAn droov
Gen. | xpvood yxpvans xpvaov | dmdod dmdjs dmhod
Dat. | xpvo@ xpvoy = xpvt@_ | amh@ = amy aA
Ace, | xpvacty ypvany xpvootv|dm\ow dmdrnv dmdovv
Voc. | xptcce xpvon xpucodv|dmr\de darn dmdovv

Dual.
N.A.V.| xpvo®é ‘xpvoa xpvod |dmro dmra admhrho
G. D. | xpvooiv ypvoaiv xpvooiv | dmow dma dmhow

ur.
Nom. | xpvoot xpvoait ypvoa |dmdot davai dma
Gen. | xpvoav yxpvodv xpvoov | dmiov dmhdv dmdov
Dat. | xpvoois xpvoais ypuoois | dwdois dadais dmdois
Acc. | xpvaots xpvods yxpvoa |dmdois dmdas dma

In the Singular (but not in the Dual or Plural) the
Fem. ¢a is contracted to n, except when preceded by a
vowel or p; it is then contracted to a: dpyupéa, dpyupa.
The Nom. Pl. oa, oat, produce a, av: ama, amai.

The contracted final syllable also receives the cireum-
flex, contrary to § 87: ypiceos, ypvcods. But com-
pound adjectives retain the accent on the last syllable
but one: evvous, well-disposed, Gen. ebvov, Dat. ceive,

Nom. Pl. eivor.
§ 184. A few adjectives in ws in the Nom. follow

§ 183. Dialects.—'The adjectives in eos, oos, often remain uncon-
tracted: Hom. xpuaéw (where € disappears by synizesis), cadAippoos,
beautifully-flowing.

§ 184. Dalects,— Hom. fidos, mdeios, wrein, mretov ; New-Ion.
eos= Att. ews; for Att. o@s (sulvus), Hom. odos, n, ov, compa-
rative cu@tepos.

eal

§ 185. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 77

the Attic O-Declension (§ 182): tAews, Neut. trewy,
gracious; akwypews, Neut. -wv, considerable; mréws,
Téa, TréoV, full. ods (from cdos, salvus) has in the
Nom. Sing. Fem. and Neut. Pl. ¢@; but also the forms
coos, cwd, Pl. cdo, coat.

ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION.

§ 185. Other adjectives in the Mase. and Neut. follow
the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a
peculiar Fem. with the ending sa, which, however,
undergoes various changes in combination with the Stem.
Such adjective-stems of three terminations are:

1. Stems in v (Mase. and Neut., § 154). The Fem. is
formed from the Stem as it appears in the Gen. (7 8e) ;
e and za are contracted, and the accent remains on the
last syllable of the Stem: hence

Mase. Fem. Neut.
Nom, v-s ed v
Singular.
Nom. ndv-s, sweet yOeia 480
Gen. nd€os noeias nd€os
Dat. ndet noeia nd«i
Ace. now ndeiav nov
Dual.
Nom, Acc. | 7d€e dela noée
Gen. Dat. ndcow deiauy ndéow
Plural
Nom Hdeis Hodeiat 7d<€a
Gen. ndéwv noevav nd€wv
Dat. dear) noeias nreo(v)
Ace, nodeis 70elas nodéa

§ 185. Dialects,— Hom. sometimes has ey for Att. era. Baden
(Pabcia, deep); the lon. ea for eva: Hom. axeéa "Ips, swift Tris,
Besides @ndus, feminine, we find also 7Svs, movAds (odds, much) as
Fem. Sometimes ea is used for vy in the Ace, Sing. Masc.: edpéa
wévrov, the wide sea,

78 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES.

Examples for Declension. f
sprvxis, sweet Bpaxis, short eipus, broad.
Bpadis, slow Taxus, swift

Obs.—O7dvs, female, differing also in accent, occurs as a Feminine.

§ 186. 2. Stems in v. The ¢ in ca is transferred
to the preceding syllable (§ 55): St. werav, Nom.
Mase. pédas, Fem. pérawa (from perav-ia), Neut.
peray, black.

Singular. Mase. Fem. Neut.
Nom. peras péXatva peardy
Gen. peAavos peAaivns peddvos
Dat. peda pedaivy peau
Ace. pédava péXatvay péday
Voe. peédav péeAawa pedav
Dual.

ae. Me A pédave pedaiva pedave
G. D. peXavow pedaivay peddvow
Plural
Nom. péedaves pedawvat pedava
Gen. peAdveav pedaway peaAdvery
Dat. pedact peAaivats pedagt
Ace, pédAavas pedaivas péXava

Examples for Declension.
St. raXav, radds, rddawa, raddv, unfortunate
St. repev, répny, répewa, reper, tender,

§ 187. 3. Stems in vr. To these belong especially the
numerous participial forms. In the Fem. the yt com-
bines with the ending va to form oa, the previous yowel
being lengthened by compensation (§ 50): Aeyovt-ca
becoming Aéyouca.

The adjectives in evr have eooca in the Fem:
xapieis, yaplerca, yapiev, pleasing, St. yapvevt. For
the Dat. Pl. see § 149.

§ 187. Dialects— Adjectives in evr (Nom. Mase. e:s) are sometimes
contracted: Hom. rimjs=ripyets, honourable; Nwreivra=wrderta,
abounding in lotuses; poet. mrepotoca=nrepéeooa, winged,

§ 187. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 73
Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem, Neut.
Sing. | loosing loosing
Nom. | icas Nicdca = Adotty Avov Avovoa = Avov
Gen. |Xtvcavtos Rvodons dAvoavros |dvovros Avovtons dvovros
Dat. |dvoavre Avedon Rvoavre § |Avovre Avoton = AVorTe
Ace. |Xvoavra RXvcacay dioav Avovra Avovcay vox
Voc. |dAvoas Aveaca = Adoray Avov Avovea _— dor
Dual. ;

N.A.V.jdXtcavre Rvcdea = =rvearvte | Avovre Avovca ~—S AVovTeE
G. D. |Xveavrow Avedoaw Rvodvrow |dvdvrow votoaw védyrow
Plural.

Nom. |dvcarres vcacae Avoavta |dAvorvres tovoat dvovra
Gen. |\vodvreav AvoacGy Avodvtov |dAvdévT@vy vovcdv AvdvTav
Dat. |ticadot Avodoas RAvodor Avovat Avotoats Avovet
Acc, |Xvoavras dAvodoas Rvoavra |Avovras vovtcas dvorta
Sing. | loosed giving
Nom, | dibecis Avbcica = AO ev did0vs didotca diddv
Gen. |dvOévros = AvOcions = AvOevtos | SiddvTos = Sidovons SuddvTos
Dat. |dvOevre =— dVOcinn ~— VO EvTe Ocddvre Sidovtcn Srddvre
Acc. |Avbévra Ss vOcioay = AvOev diddvra = Sudodcav = bud dv
Voc. | dAvOeis Avbcicoa = vO ev did0vs didotca bidder
Dual.

N.A.Vjdvbevte §= vOcica «Ss vOevre §=— | Suddvre §=— Sudotvca =~ Sud re
G. D. |\rvOevrow = Avbcicaw AvOévrow |diddvTrow Sidovcaw diddvrow
Plural.

Nom. |dvOévres dvbcioat §=rvOdvra = Oiddvres = SDodoat §=—SuddvTa
Gen, |dvbevrav Avbeicdv AvOevrav |diddvrav didovedv diddvTwv

Dat. |\dvbeiat rAvOecicas Avdeiar ddodoe Siwdotcas Sdodvor
Ace. |dvOevras dAvbcicas AvOérvta |diddvtas Sidovcas diddvTa
Sing. | pleasing showing
Nom, | yapiets —_ xapieaoa = xapiev Secxvis Setxvdoa = Servo
Gen. | yxaptevros yxapiéoons xapievros | detxvivtos Setxvions Serxvivros
Dat. |yapievre yxapiéoong xapievre | detxvivte Setxvioy Sexy dvr
Acc. |yapievra yxapieocay xaupiev Secxvivra Secxvicay Secxviv
Voc. | yapiev xaplerca xapiev Secxvis — Serxvioa = Seti
Dual.

N.A.Vj xapievre xaptéoca yapievre |Secxvivre Setxvica dSetxvivre
G, D. | xaptévrow yxapteocaw xaprevrow | decxvivrow Secxvicaw Secxvivrov
Plural,

Nom. | xapievtes yxapieooat xapievra | deixvivres Seuxvioa derxvivra
Gen. |xapievray yxapteuoav xaprévroy | Sexvivray Sexvucdav Secxvivtwv
Dat. |yxapieot yaptécoats xapieot |detxvior Serxvicars Setxviot
Ace, |xapievras xaptéooas xapievra | detxvivras Sexvicas detxvivra

a Tha
£0 INCLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. §18s

0ts.—The form of the Fem, isexplained from r before « becoming
g, according to § 60, « being dropped after o, and v before o being
thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel :
TayTta, Tavota, Tava, Taca ; AvovTia, Avovara, Avovea, AVovea,
§ 188. 4. Stems in or. The participles of the Per-
fect Active in ot (Nom. Sing. Mase. ws, Neut. os)
have via in the Fem.: Xedvxos, NeAvKVIA, AEAVKOS, "
one who has freed. See §§ 146, 147.

Singular, Mase. Fem, Neut.
Nom. AeAtKas AeAvkvia AeduKds
Gen. AeAvKdTos AeAvKvias AeAvKdros
Dat, AeAvKdre AeAvKvia Aedukére
Ace. AeAvuKdTa AeAvKviay AeAuKds
Voe. AeAuKosS AeAvKvia eAuKds

Dual. .

N. A. V. AeAvuKdre AeAvevia AeAvkdre
G. D. AeAuKdrow AeAvaviaw AeAvKdrow
Plural,
Nom. AeAvKdres AeAveviae AeAvKédra
Gen AeAvuKGrev AeAvKul@v AeAvKérev
Dat. AeAvKdot AeAvxviats AeAvKdot
Ace, AeAvKéras AeAvKvias AeAvuKéra

Obs.—The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the
Masc. and Neut. is explained by the F which was originally

before the o.

capns

adn Ons

TeT@v

capper

cages, clear
arnbes, true

meTrov, ripe
evdaipov evdapov, happy
cappov, reasonable

» Grbods.
Other Examples for Declension.
wArnpns, full wpevdys, fulse
2, Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as:
Gen. mézov-os.

»» €vdaipov-og,

aogudns, sife

” cadpov-os,

§ 189. Dialects.-- Herod. pany for dpony,

From for-ia came first Foo-ta (§ 60), then by
a peculiar contraction (fo becoming v) ve-ta, finally (o being
dropped, § 61, b) v-ia and via.

§ 189. The most important adjectives of two endings

with Stems according to the Second Principal Declen-

sion are:

1. Stems in s (Inflexion given under §§ 164, 165), as: :

Gen. cadois.

q
:
:
{

dvopevns, hostile,

§ 191, INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 81

Other Examples for Declension.
prnpeyv, mindful of emarnopoyr, forgetful of
modurpaypeov, much occupted
8. Isolated forms, as:

pis (pt, acquainted with Gen. tpr-os
(Inflexion according to § 157 D.)
Gppny (dponv) appev, male Gen. dppev-os

Compounds of substantives, such as dmdrwp, Neut. amarop,
St..carep (Nom. warnp) fatherless; dvopnrep, pytnp, un-
motherly; idrdrodis, -t, Gen. -td-os, loving the city ; evedms
(Gen, evéAmid-os), hopeful.

§ 190. 4. Besides these there is a large number of
adjectives which have only one ending, because either
their meaning or form excludes a Neuter: dpzaf,
rapacious, St. dpray; gvuyds, fugitive, St. duyad;
ayves, unacquainted, St. dyvart; dais, childless, St.
am7atd; pwaxpoyerp, long-handed ; révns, poor, St. revnt ;
yupvns, light-armed, St. yupvnt. Some adjectives of
one ending follow the A-Declension, and are almost
substantives, as: é0edovrns, Gen. éOedovTod, voluntary ;
they occur only in the Masc.

§ 191. The following adjectives are irregular: péyas,
great ; modus, much, and mpdos, gentle, the forms of
each being derived from different Stems, viz., in péyas,

§ 190. Dialects—Hom. has also many adjectives in the Fem. only °
Ka\Avyvvaixa Acc, Sing. ¢.g., Sraprnv, abounding in beautiful women $
Boridvetpa, ¢. 9g. b0ia, men nourishing.

§ 191. Dialects—In Hom. both Stems, woAv and moAXo, in
Mase. and Neut., are almost completely declined; the Fem. is
_ regularly moAAn.

Sing. NV. rodvs movrvs or moddés N, modd movdd roddov
G. modhod or rodéos
D. TOMA@
A, rodiv mouhvy moAddv N, mod mrovdv oAddr
Plur. NV, rodées (modeis) moddoi moa

G, mo\ASv or Todewv
D. modeerat(v) mwodécc(v) modéor(v) or moddois
A, rohéas mohXovs N. modda
Herod. has scarcely any forms except from the Stem modo
moddv, modXol.
Ga

82 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. cc

from the Stems peya and peyado; in wodvs, from
modu and rodXo; in mpdos, from rpao and mpai.

Sing. | Masc, Fem, Neut. | Masco. Fem. Nent.
Nom. | péyas — peyady peéya modvs modAH modwv
Gen, | peyddou peydAns peydAov | woddod modAijs modAod
Dat. peydrdp peydhy peyddp |wohAG = modAQ TOAD
Ace, |péyav peyddny péya Tod modhyy TOAD
Voc, |péya peyddrn péya ToAU woAAn TOAD

Dual.
N. A.V.) peyddko peydda peyddo
G, D. | peyadow peydraw peydrow

Plural. "
Nom. |peyddor peydrar peyddra | oddol modal soda
Gen. peydhov peydrov peyadev | 7wo\kGv toh\AGv wohAOv
Dat. |peyddots peyddais peyddots | roddAois moddais mohhois
Acc, | peyddous peyddas peydda | moddovs moddds mokhad

Sing. Plural. ¥
Nom. |mpGos mpacia smpad mpGot, Or mpaciat mpaga
mpacis
Gen. |mpdov mpacias mpdov | mpacwv mpaciav mpagov Z
Dat. |mpap mpacia szpao mpdots, OF mpacias mpdots, or
mpacou(v) mpagor(v))
Acc, |mpGov mpaciay mpaov mpgovs mpacias mpaéca

B.— Comparison.

§ 192. The first and most frequent ending of the Com-
parative is tepo (Nom. repos, tepa, tepov); of the
Superlative rato (Nom. tatos, tarn, tatov), with the
usual inflexion of adjectives (§ 180). These endings
are affixed to the pure Stem of the Masce., as:

Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative,
coddos, light, Kxovdo xoudérepos, a, ov xoupdraros, n, ov
yAuxis, sweet = =-yuKu yhuxirepos yAuktratos
peAas, black peday peAavrepos peAdvraros
xapies, graceful xaprevr xapteorepos xapteoraros

(from xaptevr-repos, according to §§ 46 and 49).
caps, clear capes capéorepos cadécraros |
udkap, happy paxap ——_paxdprepos paxdpraros
révns, poor TEVnT TEvegTEpos meveararos

(for mevnr-repos, raros, according to § 46, being shortened).

a

§ 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 838

§ 193. The following points are to be observed:

1. The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the
preceding syllable is long (§ 74, &c.), but lengthen it
to » when that is short: zrovnpd-repos, worse; TiKpd-
ratov, most bitter; copd-repos, wiser; akiw-rdtn, most
worthy. Every syllable with a vowel followed by two
consonants or a double consonant is here considered long

(§§ 76, 77).

§ 194. 2. The o is always reje¢ted after as in the adjective
yepaids, senew, sometimes in madaids, antiquus, and oxoXaios,
. at letswre : yepairepos, madairaros.

§ 195. 8. The o or is changed to ae in péoos, medius; iaos,

Vike; «tds, clear; mpaios, early; dyos, late: pecairaros,
mpwiairepoy. iavxos, peaceful, has nrvxairepos, and jovxorepos ;
piros, dear, besides pidwrepos -ratos, also didrepos -raros,
and duAairepos ~ratos; mAnatairepos, mAnovairaros, belong to
mAnoiov, near, and rapamdnotairepos, more like, to the same;
mpovpytatrepos to mpovpyov, from mpd epyov, advantageously.

§ 196. 4. The endings eorepo-s, eoraro-s, are inorganically
applied :—

@) to Stems in ov: cadpovécrepos (St. coppov, Nom. cadpor,
reasonable), evdatpoverrepos (St. eddarpov, Nom. eddaipar, for-
tunate). midrepos -raros, from riwy, fat, and memairepos -raros,
from mérav, ripe, are exceptional.

b) to the Stems of dxparos, unmixed ; éppapevos, strong ; dopevos,
willing : axparéorepos, éppwpevérrepos. More seldom to others,

ce) to some Stems in oo contracted: edvotarepos for eivoéarepos
from eivovs, well-disposed,

§ 197. 5. torepos, toraros, occur with Addos, talkative;
mraxds, beggarly; d\opdyos, epicure; povopdyos, eating alone,
and some adjectives of one ending, as kXémrn-s, thievish: Nadi-
aTepos, Tr@xioratos, Kkentiorepos.

Others of one gender in n-s follow the rule of those in 0: dSpicrd-
repos from iBporis, haughty.

§ 193. Dialects—The quantity of the O-sownd in poets is rather
doubtful : Hom. ditiperaros, the most wretched,

Hom. has i@ivrara, from idis, straight; padvraros, from paetvds,
jlittering; dxapiotepos (for dxapir-repos, according to § 46), from

84 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 198

The compounds of xdpis, grace, favour, form their Comparative
and Superlative as if they ended in yapuiro-s: émyapirorepos,
more obliging.

§ 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com-
parative is ov (Nom. Mase. and Fem. sv, Neut vor),
of the Superlative, toto (Nom. toros, torn, \oTov). The
Stem-vowel is rejected before 4. The accent is placed
as far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl,
Inflexion of the Comp., § 170. So is formed from :

Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative.
ndus, agreeable ndv 7diwv, -ov ndurros =n -ov
raxvs, swift Taxv Odoowy -ov TAaXLoTOS ~1 =O

(from raytwy, according to §§ 54,57)
peyas, large peya peiCav -ov peytoros.

(from peyor, according to § 58)

Obs.—The length of a in 6acaov (comp. pador, § 202), and the
diphthong of peifor, is explained from the « passing into the
preceding syllable, as in dyeivav (comp. § 55).

Further with suppression of p:
€xOp6 -s, hostile exbiavy -ov Superl. éyOioros.

aicxpé -s, shameful aicxiwy -ov 9, aloxtoros,
oixrpé -s, pitiable 4) OLKTLOTOS.

€xOp-ds and oixrp-ds also have the forms in repo-s and raro-s,

§ 199. This comparison occurs also in connection

§ 198. Dialects—The endings twv, toros, are more frequent in
the poets: Hom. didiov (piros, dear); yAukiov (yAuKis, sweet),
&kioros (axis, swift); Babioros (Babis, deep); Bpdoowv = Bpaxiov
(Bpaxits, short), Sup. poet. Bpaxtoros, Hom. Superl. Bapdurros
(Bpadis, slow, § 59, D.); méooav = raxiov (waxvs, thick) ; pacowv
= paxiov (paixpds, long), Sup. phxiros (Dor. paxirros); mnie
(xvdpds, famous); pé{ov, New-lon. for peifov.

§ 199. Dialects—1. Hom. Comp. dpeiov, Positive Kpari-s, Superl.
kdptioros ; Comp. Awlrepos ; New-lon. xpéoowv = xpeloowy; poet,
BéeXrepos, Bedraros, péprepos, hépraros, or peporos, more excellent,
most excellent.

2. Hom. xaxwrepos ; xépns, xepelav, xepetérepos, xeipdrepos ; New-
lon, €rowy = joowv. (Comp. kpécowr, péfor, § 198, Obs.)

e. Hom, in-odifav.

§ 199, COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85

with other peculiarities in the following adjectives,
where the changes of sound of §§ 55*58 are often applied :
1. For the idea of good :

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
ayabés
[St.dpev] dpeivor, dyewor
: [St. dpes] [dpeiwy, Hom. | apioros, n, ov

[St.BerAro] Bedriwy, BeAriov Be&\rtoTos, n, ov

[St.xkparv] xpeloowy (kpeirrwv) xKpdtictos, n, ov
N. xpeioooy (xpeirrov)

[St. Av] Aoiey or Adav Aeros, 7, ov
N. Awiov or Adov

0bs.—-apeivov and idpioros rather express ewcellence, capacity;
Kpelooa@y, Kparicros, strength, preponderance, (Lat. superior) ;
jocey is opposed to kpeioowr.

2. For the idea of bad:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
kakés kaxlov NN. kaxcov KdKLOTOS
{St. xep] xeipwr (deterior) N. xeipov xelptoros
[St. pxv] yoowr (inferior) N. jocov N. Pl. ijxvora, least of all.
3. puxpos, small, besides pixpdrepos puxpéraros
peiov, smaller N. peiov
4. ddiyos, little oAlyioros
(St. €daxv] eddoowy N. €Xdowor éhaxioros
5. modvs, much Telwy (mréwv) meioros

N. mhéov (also reir)
6. xadds, beautiful, as if from
Kd\Aos, bewuty Kaddiov N. xadALov xddduoros

7. padis, easy

(St. pa] pdeov N. paov = Paros
8. ddyewds, painful, as if from
@yos, pain dryiov N.adryov Aywros

Dialects—5. Hom. contracts mAgov to mXedv, wAcoves to medves ;
Plur. also, mAées, meas, mréa.

7. Ion. pyidios; Hom. pnirepos, prioros, pniraros. Hom, forms
single degrees from substantives: xvvrepos, more doggish (kiwr,
dog); pryov, worse, pryos, cold, shudder.

Defectives: évéprepor, also tragic véprepo (inferi, for which
Positive €vepor) ; Hom, riparos and doicbos, Aoia dros, last, borarios
=vUoraros, Sevraros, in a like sense, mpaticros=mparos, the first.

86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 200.

§ 200, Finally observe further the Defectives :—
vorepos, later voraros, ultimus

éoxaros, extremus
(véos, new) véaros, novissimus
(irép, over) braros, summus
(mpé, before) mporepos, prior mparos, primus.

(mépay, on the other side) mepairepos.

C.—Adverbs of Adjectives.

§ 201. Adverbs are derived from the adjective Stem
by affixing to it the syllable ws. The o of the Stem is
entirely dropped: ¢iros, adv. diws. The Stems of the
Second Principal Declension have the same form as in
the Genitive: ays, swift, tayéws; cays, clear,
cahéws, contr. capas; copper, reasonable, cwdppoveas.
Contraction occurs only where the Genitive also has it.
The accent of the adverb is always the same as that
of the Genitive Plural of the corresponding adjective:
wuypés, cold, »ruypas; Sixatos, just, Sicaiws; mas (St.
TAVT), TAaVTWS, every Way.

The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the
Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb.

§ 202. An older adverbial form is that in 4, as:
Taya from rays, quick (meaning, in Att. prose, per-
haps) ; 3 dpa, at the same time ; pada, very. The Comp. of
para is padrov (potius) = wdrwov (§ 56); Sup. udduora
(potissimum). ed, well, as an adverb to dyabos, good,
stands alone.

§ 203. Adverbs in ws are also formed from Compara-
tives and Superlatives: RBeBasorépws, more firmly ; Kad-
Moves, more beautifully. But as a rule the comparative

§ 202. Dialects.—The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer:
dxa, (quickly, exis); Alya, aloud, Xyis; xdpra, strongly, very, to
kparus, comp. § 59, D., rapa (clearly, caps).

Hom. has for ed or éd the adjective é évs or nes, good.

§§ 203, 204. Dialects—Hom. éxaorépw, éxacrdrw (from éxds,
far); Bower (= dyxtov), docorépa (ayxt, near), & éyxvora; New-Ion.
dyxordra, ayxérara. In addition to this there is the Hom. én-
accirepot, crowded, with v instead of o,

ig

§ 205. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 87

has the Weut. Ace. Sing., the superlative, the Neut. Ace

-Pl.as an adverb: PeBaidtepov, xnadrdov; BeBatorara,

KadANoTA.
§ 204. Adverbs in a, like ava, above; xdra, below; Er, inside;
e£o, outside, have no sin Comp. and Superl.: dvorépa,
katratépo, likewise drarépa, Surther (frum a6); eyyuTépa

(or éyybrepov), éyyutdre (or eyyirara) from éyyvs, near, and
some others,

Cuap. VIII.—Inriexion or PRONOUNS.
§ 205. The Personal Pronouns are:

qT
Singular.
Nom es, J [ego] ov, thou [tu]
Gen. | epoi, pod cov od, of him
Dat. épol, poi oot ot
Ace. ene, ae [me] | cé [te} é [se]
Dual,
N, A. ae vo, we char) od, ye (apa), they
GD. | (vaw) vdv cpa) oper | (choir)
Plural.
Nom. | pets, we dpeis, you odeis, they N.oféa
Gen pay dpev opav
Dat. \nw Dpiv opi-or(v)
Acc, |npas dpas oas N. ogéa

§ 205. Dialects.—The following are special additional forms of the
Ton. Dial. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.)

Sing. Nom. éeyav ruvn [tu]

ns toa. ened, pev one ced {fe ed

“\éueio, eue-Oev (§ 178 D.)) cet, oé-Gev | elo, é-Oev

Dat. rol, Teiv €ot| Comp. § 34,

Ace. éé } D. 4.
Plur. Nom. (jpées) dppes (ipées) Bupes

Gen. jpéov, tpeiov ipéov, ipeiov oper, oheiov

Dat. dippu(v) Bupu(v) ofi(r)

Ace, ipéas, dppe tpéas, dupe ods, oéas,

odeias, ope
An isolated Tonic form for the Accusative Sing. of the third person
is ply, trag. viv; both enclitic; in a like sense o¢é occurs in the
poets. viv seldom stands for the Plural,

88 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. - § 206,

§ 206. The Stems of the Sing. are: éwe, for the
first person; oe, for the second; é, for the third.
The Nominative, however, is formed differently from
them: éyoé, ov, and that of the third person is entirely
wanting.

Obs.—The o of the Stem ce has arisen from r (§ 60, a) [te], which

remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem é goes back to Fe,
and this to a still older form o Fe [Lat. se for sve]. (§ 60, 0.)
In the form ode, the F is hardened into ¢.

The Stems of the Dual are: va [no-s], ofa, oda.
The Dual of the third person does not occur in prose.

The Stems of the Plural are: je, dpe ode (e is
generally contracted with the ending, hence the cireum-
flex: see Dialects).

§ 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal
Pronoun, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned
in § 92,2; in that case the first person has the forms
beginning with ». But when emphatic, as well as gene-
rally after prepositions, it retains its accent, and the
first person has the fuller forms: Soxe? pou, tt seems to
me; éuol ov col TovTo apéoxet, this pleases me, not you.

The Gen. Dat. and Acc. Plur. of the first and second persons,

when not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first
syllable: jpyev, duu, and in this case the final syllable of the
Dat. and Acc. is usually shortened: fv, fas (Hom.),
When emphatic with the final syllable shortened they are

written jpiv, dpiv.
§ 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from the
Stems of the Personal Pronouns:

St. ewe, euds, my St. je, mperepos, our
» o€, ods, thy »» UE, Uperepos, your
» €& 6s, his, her. » oe, operepos, their.

Obs.—The ending repos is that of the comparative (§ 192).

§ 208. Dialects—Hom. additional forms of the Possessives: reds
[tuus], éés [suus], duds (properly Dor.), duds, opds. From the
Dual Stems vo, che: vwirepos, nos-ter, opwirepos, belonging to you
two, Guds (also duds) often means my, és sometimes means own,
without any reference to a particular person.

_——— mn ,

§ 211. REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 89

§ 209. adro-s, airy, adto, self, is declined like a
common adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom.
Ace. Voe. Sing. has no v (comp. the article 79).

c > , ¢: f e > , ¢ , \ > / > /

6 autos (avTds), 7 av’Tn (aiTH), TO avTO (TadTo oF
tautov), the same, Lat. idem.

§ 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined
with aitos, produce the Reflexive Pronouns.

Singular. Gen. M.N. F. Dat.M.N. F. AcoM. F. N.
Ist person pavrod-js cuaur@ -7 epavtdv -yy = myself
2d person ceavrod-js ceavr@-f ceavrdv-nv thyself
Or gavTovd -7s cavT@ -7 ocavtdy -nv
3d person avrod -fjs éavr@ -7 éavrdv -nv -d himself, her-
orairod -js atte -7 airév -nv-d self, ttself
In the plural, both Stems are declined together :
Plural. Gen. M. F. N. Dat. M. N. F Ace, M, F.
lst person jay airdy jpivairois -ais tpas adrovs -ds ourselves
2d person tpavairav itpivairois -ais tpas avtovs -ds yourselves
8d person oay airav chicw airois-ais ods aitovs -ds themselves
Neut. opéa aira
Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form:

éavTav éavtois -ais éavtovs -ds -d
or atrav avrois -ais avrovs -ds -d
§ 211. drAXo-s, GAAy, Gro, another (alius), is de-
clined like avros.

The Stem 4X0 combined with itself produces the
Reciprocal Pronoun adXX-nro (for aXX-adXo), OC-
curring only in the Dual and Plural.

§ 209. Dialects —New-Ion. wirds, wiry, roiré ; Hom. wirds = 6
aités.

§ 210. Dialects—The Epic dial. declines both Stems together
evev in the sing.: éué ad’réy = euavrdr, of airg = Eauta, &e.

New-lon, ¢uewvrod, cewvrod, éwvrod, stand for the forms with av.

vO DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 212
a. Mase, Fem. Neut.
-D adAnAow a\Anvaw aAnow
Ac, aANo arpa aAno
Plural
Gen. a@Aiov adANov aAj ov
Dat. a@\Andows @Anras @Anrots -
Ace, a@Andovs a@\An\as @Anha

§ 212. The two most important Demonstrative Pro-

nouns are:
de, 7de, Tdde, that ovTos, auTn, Tovro, this,

65e consists of the article o and the demonstrative
enclitic 6é, and is therefore declined entirely like the
article with Se affixed. od os corresponds to the article
with regard to the rough breathing and the + at the
beginning; it also has the diphthong av in the last
syllable but one where the article has a or 7 (A-sound),
and ov where the article has 0, w, or ov (O-sound).

Singular. Plural,
6 7 6 oi ai Ta
N. bbe = de rdde ode aide rade
* lodros atrn rovro ctron attra rTavra
Trou Tis Tou Tov
Gen. {rt risde rovde ravde
Tovrov TavTns TovToU TouT@y
_ {rd TH T® tois ais ois
Dat. | Tpde Tede toisde taisde roisde
ToUT@ TavTy TOUT@ ToUTols Tavrats TOUTOLS
Tov Ty 6 Tous Tds rd
Ace. {ri thvde Tdde rousde rdsde rade
TovToy .ravTny TovTO TovTous Talras Taira

§ 212. Dialects—In Hom. the article itself is a demonstrative
pronoun, with these special forms: Nom. 6; Gen. roio; Gen. Dat.
Dual rouv; Nom. Pl. roi, rai; Gen. Pl. Fem. rdéwv; Dat. Pl:
roiat(v), Tho), Or THs.

From é8¢ we have Dat. Pl. rotodeo: or roicdecor(v), and xeivos
poet. for éxeivos,

-_

=e

———

§ 214. RELAT. AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 91

Dual.
TO Ta To Tov Tai = roi
N. A. re rade tude G.D.iroivde raivde roivde
revTw TavTa TovT@ TOUTOWW TavTa TovTOLY

The adverb of d8¢ is de; that of obros otrws or otra, in this way.
Like ovros are declined :—

TogoUTos | Togav’Tn TorodvTo OF Togovroy, so great (tantus)
Toovros = Toa’Tn =Toodiro or ToLovTor, such (talis)
tTyAtkodTos THALtKavTN THALKOUTO OF THALKOUTOY, So old
in which, however, the r of the forms beginning with r is
dropped: radra, but roc-atra; by affixing the enclitic dé we
have the forms rogdsde, so large; roidsde, of such quality;
tprkds-Se, of such an age, with a regular adjective declension
before the syllable de.
éxeivo-s, éxeivn, éxeivo, that, is declined like airds.

A long accented : is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns
to strengthen the meaning, without affecting the declension, but
the ¢€ of de is lost: ofrost, 5d, éxewavt, abryt, roisdSt. Com-
pare the Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce,

§ 213. The Relative Pronoun has the rough breathing
in all cases, as:

Singular. Plural, Dual,

Mas. Fem. Neut.| Mas. Fem. Neut. Mas, Fem. Neut,
Nom. és,who ## & |o at 4 NA6& & &
Gen. od Rs ov év G.D. ov aw ow
Dat. 6 7 @ jos als _ ols
Acc. ov qv 6 |ovs ds & |

Obs.—In the phrases kai ds én, and he said, and 7 & ds, but he
said, és is used as a Demonstrative (comp. the Dialects).

§ 214. The Interrogative Pronoun has the same Stem
as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distin-

§ 213. Dialects—Hom. 6 = ds, dou ov, éns=7js, and signifies he.
fon. oto = od, and the forms of the Article which begin with r
are used instead of those of the Relative: rod = ob, cujus; r6 = 4,
cui; rois = ols, quibus.

§ 214. Dialects—Hom., partly also New-Ion. forms are: Gen.
réo, ted; Dat. réo, rg; Gen. Pl. réwv; Dat. Pl. réoco(v); Neut.
Pl. aooa, .

92 INTERROG. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS. gut,

guished only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun
has the accent always on the Stem syllable; the Inde-
finite is enclitic: hence ris, who? ris, enclitic, some one,

Interrogative, Indefinite,
Singular. Singular.
Nom, ris vl ris tt
Gen. Tivos Twos
Dat. rian ri
Ace, Tiva ri Twa =k
Dual. Dual.
Nom. Acc. rive TWwe
Gen. Dat. rivow TWO
Plural. Plural.
Nom. tives riva twés twa (arra)
Gen. tivev TWeV
Dat. riot(v) rigi(v)
Ace, rivas tiva twds tivd (arra)

0bs.—1. rod, r, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used
for rivos, rim, and for rus, revi.

Obs, 2. The Relative and Indefinite combine to form ésris, ris,
6 7, who. Both Stems are declined together: obrwos, fsttvos,
@rim, olvriowy (§ 93, b.). A space is left between o and rm in
6 1, which, to distinguish it from the conjunction drt, that.

The shorter forms of ris are also used with 6s; but the Stem 6
is then not declined: Gen. drov; Dat. drm, more rarely Gen,
Pl. drwy, Dat. Grow(v). Grra is an additional form for drwa,
not to be confounded with @rra for rid.

§ 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is deiva, of three
genders, guidam, sometimes undeclined, sometimes de-
clined as follows:

Sing. 6, 7, 7d Seiva, Seivos, dein, diva.
Pl. of, ai = Seives, Seivwr, dcivas.

The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Hom.
and also in New-Ion. :
Sing. éris, N. Sri; Srev, Srreo, Grrev; drew; Sra, N. orm
PL N. dooa; érewv éréoot; Gras, N. dooa
(for dria, according to § 57).
The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged.

ae ©.

§ 217.

CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS.

93

§ 216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns:

Interrogative.

Indefinite.

Demonstrative.

Relative.

tis, Who?

tis, some one

dde, ovros, this

6s, Sstis, who

morepos, uter ? morepos, one of | repos, the one | érérepos, which
which of two ? two (alteruter)| of two. (alter) | of two

méaos, how great? | words, of some | récos, técosde, |Ga0s, sémdeos,
how much ? size or number| rocodros, so| how great, how
(quantus, quot) great, so much | much (quantus,

(tantus, tot)

quot)

motos, of what

mods, of some

- ,
Toios, Totdsde,

? 7”
otos, dzroios, of

quality ? (qualis)| quality roovtos, of | what quality
such a quality | (qualis)
(talis)
mmXixos, how old? | anXixos, of some| tnAixos, tydi- | pAckos, dmXikos,
age kosde, TnAukod- | of what age

ros, of such age

Obs.—On the ending repos, see §§ 192, 208, Obs.
In Attic prose of the Demonstratives generally only
those in -de and -ovto-s are used.

§ 217. Correlative Adverbs are formed from the same

’Pronominal Stems.

§ 216. Dialects —<docvs (add. form decdrios), roccos are Epic
for cos, récos. For every Interrogative m the New-Ion. Dial. has
K: Kécos, Koios, KOTe, KOU.

§ 217. Dialects—7d6: is Epic = mov; mofi= mov; dem. réd6t,
there, rel. 601, where. In poetry réev is dem. to ré@ev, New-Ion.
évOadra for évraida, évbcirev for évredbev.

és in the Poets, like o}rws, means so, to be distinguished from os
(without accent), how ; it is written also és with the meaning yet:
kat Ss and yet. With the meaning so ras also occurs. 7ye is an
additional form of #. The m is doubled: énmws, Smmore (§ 62 D.).

94

CORRELATIVE ADVERBS.

Interrogative, Indefinite. Demonstrative.
mow év0a
c . | some- ; there | od where
mov, where ? ali- évOade nt r
"(ubit) | cubiy JM"? | evradda | Ct) | Grou Jui)
mobev ) from | évev Strom
mdbev, whence | (ali- me evbévde there pac? bundle)
(unde ?) | cunde)) where ag (inde) es
mol ge hither | of whither
mot, Whither? | (ali- mi 9p évbade int \-
(quo?) com whither | a ranta 4 0) | eae Kequo)
rére, when? | gore, sometime | rére, then Gre, émdére, when
at tnvika ey
mvixa ; what Thvixdde ae i a
time ? ThviKavTa ee
ds
tras, how ? mas, somehow | &be thus os, Oras, as
oUTws ae
whither ? ; m thither, whither.
rh 4 in what "bao get m7d€ in this | j, dan | in what
way ? sd Noemie way way.

Obs.—évOa and évOev, in their original demonstrative sense, occur
only in a few combinations in Attic prose (¢vOa 64, just then;
évOa xai €vOa, here and there); but they are regularly used in a
relative sense : where, whence.

To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also ws, quamdiu (Rela-
tive, as long); réws, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well
as the poetic éppa (for ddpa, § 53, ¢, Obs.) used in the same
meaning as fas, and rédpa as réws.

To the simple éxeivos (that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs
of place éxei, there ; éxeiOev, from there ; éxeice, thither. The De-
monstrative és occurs in Attic prose only in kal és, even thus,
and 00d’ és, not even thus. It is also written &s in these com-
binations,

§ 218. The conjunctions 87, djrore, and ody (meaning ever, Lat.
cunque), and the enclitic rep, may be joined to any relative pro-
noun or adverb to give prominence: doris 84 more, whosoever,
Gras obv, (utcunque), dorep, just as.

Sometimes # is affixed to the interrog. ri in the sense of why? and
to the corresponding indirect interrogative 6 r1: rin, érin, why?

§ 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed :
ovris, pytis, no one; ovderepos, pndérepos, neither, neuter,
ovdapyod, pndapov, nowhere; ovdapyas, pndapas, in no way,

§ 220,

THE NUMERALS,

95

Cuap. [X.—Tur NUMERALS.
§ 220. The Cardinal, Ordinal, and Adverbial Numerals,

with their value and signs, are :—

Ut, SL

-

Vwe DY LEXQLLLUQUS

e ,
eis, pla, ev, one
ul
dvo
Tpels, Tpia
Téoodpes, TEC-
v ,
oapa, or rerrd-
ys
pes, TeTTapa
TEVTE

tpisxaidexa
en}
Teooapaxaidera
mevTekaideKa
éxxaidexa
émraxaideka
éxrwxaidexa
évveaxaidexa
eixoow(v)
Tpidkovra
Tegoapdkovra
TEVTHKOVTA
ééjxovra
€Bdounkovra
dySonkovra
évevnKovTa
éxardv
Ouaxdcrot, at, a
TpLakdorot, at, a
TETPAKOCLOL, At, a
TEVTAKOT LOL, AL, a
éEtikdotot, at, a
émTakdctot, at, a
éxrakdotot, at, a
{ évitkdotot, at, a
evviikdolot, at, a
xAtot, at, a
Ousyuot, ar, a
TptsxiAuot, at,a
pipot, at, a

6 mp&ros, the first
Sedrepos
Tpiros

Téraptos

A
évatos (€vvaros)
déxaros
is 4
évdéxaros
dwdéxaros
Tpisxaidexaros

dySoos

Teaoapaxatdéxaros

mevrekaoeKaTos
éxkatOexaros
émraxaideKatos
Oxr@xKadéxaros
évveakatdeKaros
elxoords
Tpidkxoarés
TegoapaKxootds
,
TevrnkooTos
éEnxoords
€Bdopunxootds
bySonxoords
évevnkoords
éxatootos
Staxootoords
Tpltaxoc.oords
TeTpaxootoards
mevTakoolooTés
é£axocwoords
émtakootooTés
oxrakooocTés
évaxoctoarés
évvakogtooTés
xALocrds
dusxidcoords
TpisxiALoorés
pupiootés

dma&, once
dis
tpis

TeTpaKis

IrEVTAKLS

c tA

é£dxis
émTakis
OKTaKLS

> s : ,
evdxis (evvdxis)
Sexdxis

c ,
evdekdkis
Swdexaxis

elkooakis
TpidKovrdkes ,
Tea oapaKovrakis
TevTnKOVTaKts
éEnkovradkts
€Bdopnkovrdkis
dySonxorrdkis
évevnxovrdkts
éxarovrdakts
Staxoordkts

xrudKes

puptdkts

96 THE NUMERALS. §221

Obs.—The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un-
interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation,
given above, stigma (s/) is inserted after € for the number 6;
a to @ are therefore units; i is 10, x 20; after a’ (= 80),
G (koppa =90) is inserted; and after 6 (=800) A (sampi
=900). The alphabet begins again at 1000, but here each
letter has the accent under it; hence Srpd’'=2344, awés
=1862.

§ 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 to 4 are declined.

1. Nom.| cis pia 2. N. A. dv0

Gen. | évés puas évds G. D. dvoiv
Dat. | &vi dv
Acc. | &a piav ov

3. Nom. | rpeis N.rpia | 4. réocapes N. réccapa

Gen. | rpidv TETTapoV
Dat. | rpici(v) réooapaiy)
Acc. | rpeis N. rpia régoapas WN, réooapa

ovdels, ovdeula, ovdév, and pmbdels, no one, are de-
clined like efs. 8vo is also used without inflexion. 8veiy
1s another form for Svoiv. +7 occurs for oo in all forms
and derivations of réccapes. dudw (ambo, both), Gen.
Dat. audoiv, is sometimes represented by the Pl. dudo-
Tepot, at, a, of which the Singular dudérepor, both, is
also in use.

§§ 220-223. Dialects—1, Hom. has the fem. 1d, ijjs, iff ; also Mase,
Dat. to. ;

2, dv for all cases: Sor, dorot, Sorat, Soud; Dat. Sovwis; Acc.
Sotovs, ds, a.

38, tpiraros = rpiros.

4, Hom. Aeol. miovpes, New-Ion. récoepes, Hom. rérparos
(§ 59, D.).

7, €B8dparos. 8, dySdaros. 9, elvaros.

12, Hom. d8vedexa, and vo cai déxa, Svodéxaros.

20, Hom. éeixoot, éetxoords. 30, Hom. rpinxovra. 80, dy8dxovra.
90, €vvnxovra. 200, &c., also dinxdcror; Herod. mevrnxdowot, elva-
kdéctot.

9000, Hom. éevedx:Aor. 10,000, SexaytAor.

dixa, Hom dix 6a’; likewise rptyOa, rerpay6d, threefold, fourfold ;
also rpimAy, TeTpaTrAj.

gan. so 'NUMERALS, 97

§ 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable.

We also find rpeis, rpia cat Séxa, réocapes, réooapa Kui Séra, for
13 and 14, Theunitsand tens are united by xal, in any order:
€ikoot Kat wévre and wévre kat elkoot; or without «ai when the
tens are first: eixoou wévre, 25; so also €xardy Séxa. For twenty-

Jirst we have cis kali ecixoorés, or mp@tos kai eixoords, and
elxooris mpa@ros, &c.

The Cardinal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal,
regular adjectives of three terminations: Svaxdctos, at, a.
The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superla-
tive, except Sevrepos, which has that of the comparative
(comp. § 192).

§ 223. By combination with ctv, the numeral Stems form Distri-
| butives: ctvdvo, two and two; civrpeis, three and three;
Multiplicatives, by the syllable mAovs (from mddos, Lat. plex) :
dmdovs, simple; Surdovs, rputdovs, wevrardAois, &c. Observe
also dioads, twofold; rpiocds, threefold ; Sudacwos, twice as
much ; tpimddowos, &c., moddamAdowos, many times as much,
Adverbs : povayy, simply (udvos, alone); dx9 or diya, doubly.
Substantives: povds (St. povad), unity; duds, tpids, terpds,
meumas, €£ds, éBSdopuds, dySods, évveds, Sexas, eixas, ExatovTas,
xAuds, pupias; hence rpeis pupiddes = 30,000.

§ 224. The most important general Adjectives of
quantity are: éxactos, each; éxdtepos, either; was
_maoa, wav (St. wav), all; moards, orécras [quotus] ;
and the adverbs: wodndxuis, many times, often ; éxactaxs,
every time; oodxis, as often as; tocavtdxis, so often;
mrevoTaKis, very often; drvydxis, seldom.

ea |

98 THE VERB. § 225,

B.—INFLEXION OF VERBS.
General Remarks.

§ 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb
1. Three Numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plural. —

2. Three Voices:
Active: édvoa, TI loosed
Middle: &dvodpny, I loosed for myself
Passwe: érvOnv, I was loosed.
Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are
called Deponents: Séyouat, I receive.

Obs.—Only the Aorist and the Future have special forms for the
Passive; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle: in
all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning,

3. Zwo classes of Tenses:

A.—Prineipal, viz.:—
1, Present: vw, I loose
2. Perfect: rérvxa, I have loosed
3. Future: dAdo, I shall loose,

B.— Historical, viz. :—
1. Imperfect: &dvov, I was loosing
2. Pluperfect: &edtxew, I had loosed
3. Aorist: érvoa, I loosed.

4, Four Moods, viz. :—
1. Indicative: rdw, I loose
Finite |2. Sudjunctive: vw, I may loose
Verb. |3. Optative: rvouuw, I would loose
4, Imperative: de, loose.

6. Three Verbal Nouns, viz.:—
1. Infinitive: Aveww, loose
2. Participle: Aver, loosing
8. Verbal Adjective: wvréos, to be loosed,
solvendus,

§ 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS—TENSE-STEMS. 99

§ 226. The Personal Endings had originally the

following forms:

Active. Middle.
Principal Tenses. Historical Tenses.| Principal Tenses, Hist. Tenses.
Sing. 1. =p ~v ~pat -pnv
2. -ot -s -oat -c0
3. “Tt a “Tat -To
Dual, 1. opev -peOov
2. -Tov -o ov
3. Tov -Th -obov -cOny
Plur. 1. ~pev -peba
2. -TE -obe
3. -yTt -y -vrat -VTO

The Active personal endings of the principal tenses

are most easily observed in the verb:

ei-pi, I am éo-pev = é =e.
éa-ci (contr. ef) éo-rdv ég-té.
éo-ri(v) €o-rév ei-ci(v) (ov=vrt, § 60).

The endings of the three persons in the Sing. are really the per-

sonal pronouns affixed, J, thou, he, and to be compared with the
Stems of the Personal Pronouns: ps (St. pe), ot (oe), te (the
Stem of the article, ro). The 1 Dual in the Active is always
identical with the 1 Plur. The ending of the 1 Sing. of the Hist.
Tenses was originally » (Lat. era-m), which at the end of the
word was changed into », according to § 67, Obs. The ending
of the 3 Sing. was originally +r, which, however, could not
continue at the end according to § 67 (comp. § 233, 2); and
that of the 3 Plur, vr (Lat. era-nt); but the r was dropped
(§ 67).

§ 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classi-

fied according to the Stems (Tense-Stems), from which
they are formed. The Tense-Stems are the following:

1. The Present Stem, from which the Present and

Imperfect are formed.

— —

§ 226. Dialects.—Instead of vra:, vro, the Ion. (especially New-

Ton.) often has ara, aro, in 8 Pl. Mid. The vowel a is here pro-
perly a connecting vowel, as in the Acc. Sing. of the Second Principal
Declens. (§ 173, 3 Obs.); and v is dropped in both alike; hence
a-rat, a-ro, for a-vrat, a-vro (comp. §§ 287, 302, 3).

100 TENSE-STEMS, § 228,

2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or
Strong Aorist. Act. and Mid. are formed.

8. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act. and
Mid. are formed.

4. The Weak Aorist Stem, from which the First or
Weak Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed.

5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Plu-
perfect, and Future-Perfect are formed.

These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle,
There are added to them, for the special forms of the
Passive :

6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second
or Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive
are formed.

7. The Weak Passive Stem, from which the First
or Weak Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are
formed.

The form from which all the Tense-Stems of a verb
may be derived is called the Verbal Stem.

§ 228. The Subjunctive is indicated between the Stem

and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it :Av-w-pev,
solv-d-mus ; dd-n-re, solv-d-tis.

The vowel z is characteristic of the Optative, which
generally becomes a diphthong with other yowels:
dv-or-wev, we would loose. The Subjunctive has the
endings of the principal tenses; the Optative (except
1 Sing. Act.) those of the historical tenses.

The Imperative has the following peculiar endings:

Active. Middle,
Sing. 2. -& -co
3. -ro -cba@
Dual 2, -roy -cbov
3. .-Tev -cbwv
Plur. 2. -re -obe
3. -vrev OF -Tecay -cbwy or -cbacay

§ 228. Dialects—The Hom. dial. often shortens the long vowel
of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural.

i.

§ 230, CONJUGATIONS. 101

§ 229. The general law for the aecentuatwn of the
verb is, that the accent is placed as far back as possible
from the end, final az not being considered long, except
in the optative: Aw, Were, Wopar.

Obs.—An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen-
sion (chap. vii.), if possible (§§ 79-87), always keep the accent
on the sume syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc.: Part. Pres.
Act. Baoievor, regnans, Neut. Baoiiedov (not Bacidevor
according to § 84), Part. Fut. Act. Baciietoor, regnaturus,
Neut. Bacicdoor. (The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.)

§ 230. We distinguish Zwo Principal Conjugations :

1. The First—the far more frequent—connects the
personal endings with the first two Tense-Stems by a
connecting vowel: dv-o-wev. The verbs belonging to
it are called verbs in w because the first Pers. Sing.
Pres. Act. ends in : Avo.

2. The Second—the less frequent, but older—affixes
the personal endings to the first two Tense-Stems without
a connecting vowel: éc-yév.. They are called verbs in
jet because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original
ending jos: ei-pi.

The forms of the other five Tense-Stems are common
to both conjugations.

The Paradigms of the verbs are given first: the for-
mation of each T'ense-Stem is then explained in order.

List OF THE PARADIGMS.
Eiul, Iam oe oe Table I,
Synopsis of Avo, I loose (exhibiting the meanings "of
the Tenses) of oe ee ee se oe ee se ee . » IL
Vepss IN Q.
A.— Vowel Stems.
1. Uncontracted, Aw .. .. Saar leae hot Fo mei AE 3
2. Contracted, inde, ToLew, Sovadee Bae ee ee nas
ore Stems. :

. Guttural Stems, rrékw, pedyw, tdoow + oe PWN
2. Dental-Stems, peb5oua, melOw, rol Coo {ene eo NE
8. Labial Stems, wéurw, Aclrw, KaddmTw ws oe a5 OLE
4, Liquid Stems, dépw, ayyéAAw, orelpw .. oe » VIIl

VERBS IN MJ.

First Class, ri@nmr, St5wpr, Tornur «2 06 08 08 oe Pee 2S
Second Class, Selkvups oe oe oe oe 668 ote . x

102 PARADIGMS OF VERBS,

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
Eli, Tam. Stem és.

Soe
Moods, F : Present. Imperfect, Future.
A
Indicative. | S. 1 | ctui v or} €ropat
2 eo jo €on Or eree
8 | éori(v) v éora
D, 1 éodpue boy
2 | éordy Rotoy or Hrov | €oecOov
3 | éordy Horny or irnv | €reaOov
P. 1 | éopev pLev €odueOa
2 | éaré hore Or fre éceabe
3 | eiai joav €vovrat "
Subjunctive.| 8. 1 | @
2 is
3/7
D. 2 | frov
3 | frov
P. 1 | Sper
2 | fire
3 | dor
Optative. S. 1 | etn €ooiuny
2 | eins €rowo
3 | ety écoro
D. 1 €ooipebuv
2 | etyroy or elrov d
3 | elnrny or eirny érourOny
P. 1 | etquey or eipev €ooipe F
2 | etnre or etre €crovobe
3 | etnoay or elev érowro
Imperative. | S. 2 | to&
8 | €oTa
. 2 | €orov
3 | €otwy
P, 2 | €ore
3 | €orwcay or éotrov
Infinitive, eivat éoer Oar
Participle. ov éodpevos
ovea éoopern
dy (Stem ovr) éodevoy

Note.—The formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in § 315;
but they are inserted in this place, because some of them aro required in
conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs.

108

PARADIGMS OF VERBS,

Table II.

“pasoo) uaag anny yoys T “ssvq ‘fash 10fpasoo) aany yoys J

“p9800)] 69 07 (SuLAINbas) Sorsay ‘aygnasooy 10 pasoo) Spsay “qoalpy yeqle A
“soaaTioonnyay “vg ‘mmp.or0ayay “jul ‘alerhooayay “ydQ

"pI ‘mrooayay “puy Jsog “yng

paso) waeq poy J P[PPruLoyy Ot] alirlaya\ pasooy poy [| away? | “pay “dud
pasoo) uaag buaany = Soaslayay pasoo) Burany| s@xayay | “y1Vg
pasoo) Uaag anny 07 pd mMpLAYIY posoon aay 07| Warrayry | “JUT
2800) Uaeq anny Noy? op a ODANIX pasoo) anny NOY? Op SHAYIX *dwy
pasoo) waag anny *o}9 7ybrw T 3 alia Soastlayay pasoo) aany 040 7ybrus J | mMrowayry *4dQ
pasoo) uaag aany *O}0 how 7 a @ soasayry pasoo? anny “040 how 7 eax | “qng (va)
pasoo) Uaag anny T =~ mnlay2X pasoo) aany 7 DNAY2Y | “puy “j10qg T
pasog waag burany 10. pasoo) $1399aY Soaarip.oay pasoa) buaany 10 buasooy spony | “Wed
peer] 69 OF maligay WHOVIRY 9800) 04 mony | "jul
pasoo} nor} 9q 1sligay mony | 29007] moyp asooj} aooay | “duty
pasoo) oq ‘Oya gyhous T alusgay alrlpony | pynoys 10 “pynom ‘pynoo yb J | mmoay | 3dQ
pasoo) aq *030 nw 7 mgrV mrooay as00) woo 10 how 7 @oay | *qng (yee)
pasoo) spm T aligay> aliripoay> pasoo) J poay2 | “puy ‘oy T
paso) aq 02 ynogn | soasrooligay Soaarlo.nny asoo? 07 ynoqn awoay | *ytq
(xajyworor,) pasoo) 09 07 | 1902.ligay 19.03.00Y (toqyea.10q) 2800) 07 aaoay | “Juy
~e194) pasoo) 09 °0}0 pyhru T | alerfpooligay aleriyooay (aoqyworoy) asoog “040 gybyu T| moony | “3dQ
(1095 | pasoo) aq yyoys [| —wrlooligay mro.ony soo) 2y0ys mony | “pus “yng
(ponutj U0.) pasoo) som 7 |e|ppruroyy axl] alirloays buasoo) som J aoays | “puy ‘yduy
pasoo) bunag os Soaarlony buasoo) amny | “4vq
= 2800) 4 07 © Ig.03nVy bursoo) aq 09 aaay | Jur
ve pasoo) Noy} aq & aoay | Buasoo2 aq] bursoo) aq aay | ‘duty
** pasoo) aq ‘040 qyhoru 7 B + alirhoay | pynoys 10 ‘pynom pynoo Guybius T mhoay | 3dQ
“ paso] aq “049 hows [ a wmrloay Bunsoo) 09 wno 10 hin 7 way | *qug
(penurjucs) — pasoop wo = wrloay (as007 7 10) 6ups007 wn T may | “Puy "sag
“a1oA eatsseq | “810A OTPPI ' “BOA BANoY| “DOOTY “Asta,

“(sosua, oyp fo sbuyunau op Burzrqnyxa) oso0) 03 M-ay g4a4 ay? fo sysdoulig

Table 1

104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 2, ;
A.—VOWEL STEMS,
Active
Tenses, i i Indicative. Subjunctive,
A
Present, Imperfect.
Present. 8. 1 | Avo @\vov Avo
2 | Avets erves duns
3 | Avec €dve(v) Avy
D. 2 | Averoy éAveTov Avnrov
3 | Averov eAverny Avnrov
P. 1 | Avopey eAvopev Av@perv
2 | Avere éAvere Aunre
3 | Avovai(v) @\vov Avwad(v)
Future. S. 1 | Avo
2 | Avoets k
3 | Avoe t
D. 2 | Avoerov ;
3 | Avcerov
P. 1 | Avooper
2 | Adoere
3 | Avdoover
1 Aorist 8S. 1 | Avea Avew
(Weak). 2 | €dveas Avons
3 | A&vee(v) Adon
. 2 | &\dcarov AvonTor
3 | eAvoarny Adonror
P. 1 | edAdoapev AVowpev
2 | &dvoare Avonre
3 | Avoay Aiowor
Perfect. Pluperfect.
1 Perfect S. 1 | AeAvKa éXeAvKew erica
(Weak). 2 | NeAuKas ehehuxets AevKys
3 | AeAvKe(v) edeAvKet Aedxy
. 2 | NeAvKarov eAeAvKELTOY AeAvKnTOv
3 | AeAvKaror €deAukeitny AeAvKNTov
P. 1 | AcAdcaper eAeAUKELpEV eAvK@pey
2 | AeAvxure edeAvKerTE AeAvKNTE
3 | AeAvxaor(v) eedvKecay AedvKwot
or éAeAvKetoay
2 Aorist Wanting
(Strong).
2 Perfect and Wanting
Pluperf. (Strong)
Examples for
Ove, 1 sacrifice ; Ocpaneiw, I serve ; Bovdetw, I advise; yxopeva, I dance;

. i ~ A

Table II]. © PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 0. 105
1,.—UNCONTRACTED.
Voice.
Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.
Avoupe Avew Avov
Avots Ade Avovsa
Avoe AvEerTo Adov
Avorror Averov
Avoirny AveTwr Gen. Avovros
Avoupev Avovons
Avoure Advere AvovTos
Avouev AvévT@y OY AvEeT@GaY St. Avovr
AVooupe Avoew Voor
Aveors
voor Avoovea
Avoortov door
Aveoirny Gen. Avcovros
Adootpev Avoovons
Abooure AvcovTos
Avcotev St. Avcovr
Adoatpe Aveat Avoas
| Avoats or Adoeras hdcov Avoaca
Avoay
Avoas Or Adoere(v) | AvTdTo Gen. \veavros
Avoaurov icarov Avodons
Avcairny Avodrov Adcavios
hicatpev St. Avcavr
dare hicare [racay
Aboaev Or Adcetay | AvodyTwY OY Avod-
AeATKoupe AeAvKevas | AeAvK@S
AeAvKors AeAvKE XeAvKvia
RAeAvKds
AeAvKOL eduKer@ Gen. XNeAvKéros
AeAVKotrov AeAvKvias
Aedvkoirny AeAvKeTOv AeAvkédros
AeAvKotper AeAuKer@v St. AeAuKor
AeAvKorre AeAvKeTE
AeAvKorev AeAvKdvTe@v or
AeAvKeT@Cay
Conjugation.

Saxpvo, I weep; mavw, L make to cease (Midd. I cease), [1 Aor. Pass,

’ Verbal, mavoréos.}

106

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN QQ.

,

Table HI.—

A—VOWEL STEMS.
MIDDLE AND
Tenses common

Tenses,

Present,

~ Numbers.

Persons.

Crrcohbeco bre

Indicative.

Subjunetive.

Avopat
Ady or Avec

Averat
Aude Bov
AveoOov
Aveo Oov
AvdpeOa
veo be
Avovrat

Avepat
Avy

Adnrac
AudpeOov
ino Oo
AinoOov
Aveopeba
inode
Avovrat

Imperfect,

eAvduyy
€Avov
eAvero
€AvdpeOov
€dvecbov
édvec On
eAvdpeba
ever be
€Avovra

~ Future.

ww

Rieb rene che

Avoopat
etc., as in the Pres, Avowat

Perfect.

She cob co Lo

AeAvpat
AeAvoa

AeAvrat
AedvpeOov
éeAva Gov
A€eAva Gov
AeAvpeOa
AeAvobe

éAvvrat

AeAupevos &

- Pluperfect.

eAeAvuny
é\éAvco
éX€AUTO
€AeAtpeOov
€A€Ava Gov
eAeAvaOnv
eevee Ba
A\edvobe
€\édvvTo

Future
Perfect.

4) Co DO eH Co DD eS Co De

AeAdoopar
ete,, as in the Pres. Avopa

continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS—VERBS IN 0.

107
— 1—UNCONTRACTED.
Passive Votces. (§ 225, Obs, 2.)
to both Voices,
Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. | Participle,
Avoipny ; Aber Ou Avdpevos
Avovo Avou Avopevyn
| Avdpevoy
Avorro AvécOw
AvoipeOuv
Avorobov Aveo bor
AvoicOnv AvécIav
Avoipeba
Avorobe veobe
AvowrTo Avé Gov or
Avéabacav
Avgoipnv Avoer Oar Avodpevos
etc., as in the Pres. Avolpny Avo open
Avodpevov
AeAvpevos einy AeAvaOae AeAvpevos
; AeAAvgo AeAupevn
eAvpevov
edicba
AAAve Gov
| AekicOov
éeAvobe
’ AeAvo Gav or
E Aericbacay TS:
Aedvooipny AeAvcesOas | AeAvodpevos
| ete., as in the Pres. Avofyny AeAvoopern
*, t ey Pe! Bi Fie

108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 2, Table Il.—

A.—VOWEL STEMS.
Mippie AND
Tenses peculiar to
t
Tenses. i: : Indicative. Subjunctive,
(A Be
1 Aorist S. 1 | &Avoduny Avoopat
(Weak), 2 | Avow Avoy
8 | é\vearo Avonra
1D. 1 | Avodpebor Avo w@pebov
2 | &tcacbov Avonabov
3 | &vadcOnv Avonobov
P. 1 | AvoducOa Ave @peba
2 | &Atvcacbe vonabe
3 | Aveavro Aiowvra
=o date Wanting
(Strong)
Tenses peculiar to
L Aorist |S. 1 | erdém hud
(Weak) 2 | €dvOns AvOjjs (
\
3 | AvOn Avd7 |
2 | edvdnroy AvOnrov |
3 | eAvOnrny | AvOqArov
P. 1 | eAvOnpev AvOapev ;
2 | eAvnre Avb7
3 | Addénoay Avdaai(v)
1 Future Sd. 1 | Avénoopa
(Weak). 2 | AvOnoy or AvOjoe
3 | AvOnoera |
D. 1 = | AvOnodpeOor
2 | AvOnoecbov
3 | AvOnoecOov
P. 1 | AvOnodpeba
2 | AvOnoecbe
3 | AvOnoovrat
2 Aorist Wanting
(Strong).
2 Future Wanting
(Strong).
Verbal Adjectives: Aurds, 7, dv. 2. Auréos, a, ov.

continued. § PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 12. 10%
I.—UNCONTRACTED.
PasstvE VoIces,
the Middle Voice.

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.
dvoaipny Abraobas Avodpevos
Aveao deat Aveapern

Avodpevoy
Aveatto Avedabo
| AvoaipeBov
Avoarabov Avoacbov
AveaicOny — Avodabov
AvoaipeOa
hicaurbe Avoaobe
Avoawro Aveda bor or
Avedobocay
_ the Passive Voice.
Avbernv AvOjvas Avbeis
Avbeins AVOnTe Avbeica
= udev
dvbein AvOénr@ Gen. duvbévros
Avbei or AvOcirov Avbeions
‘vOeunrny or Avbeirny | AVOnTov dvbévros
AvGeinuev or AvOeipey | AvOnTwv St. AvOevr
AvOeinre or AvOeire ADOnTe
Avdeinoay or AvOeiev | AvOnTw@ay OF
AvOevre@y
AvOncoipny AvOjcer Oa AvOnodspevos
AvOnoowo
Avbnooiro Avbnoopevn
Avy coipebov AvOnospevov
Avénoow ov
an
voncoipeba
ideo -
AvOnoowro

110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 22.
aa.
A—VOWEL STEMS. |
Present and Imperfect Tenses,
ripaw, J honour mrovéw, 1 make dovdsa, I subjugate
{comp. Lat. at, am(a)o) {comp. Lat. moneo] ~
Stems. Tipa move ~= Bovro
Active. t
S.1] rydo ripad moe = Told dovldm Sovrd Fy
2\ riders Tipas moles = TFoLeis dovrders Sovdois ;
3 B| rydee Tipe moe moved dovddee SovAoi
3 D. 1 ;
S| 2] rypderov teparoy rotgerov movetrov | Sovdderoy Bovhodroy ||
= | 8!) rupderov tiparov | moerov moreiroy| dSovdderov SovAovroy | yi
g |P.1| rypdopey tipper | woréopev morodper| dovAdopev Sovhodper|
& | 2) rydere tepare | moere moveire | dovddere Sovhodre |
3| ryd-ov- Tipa- mowov- moLov- dovrdov- Sovhod-
ov) atv) ov) ou(v) ov) ou(v)
S.1|rydo ripe Toe Tolm dovlda Sovrd
2\rimdns. Tipas mons Tops dovddns Sovdois
. |. 8) ryan =o rep won = morn Sovkéy Sovdoi
£ |D.1
6 ; c m i. 5 et
= 2| tiydnrov riparoy | moenrov motnroy | Sovdénrov SovABTOV
=| 8) rupdnrov riparoy | monrov motjrov | dovddnrov SovA@TOV
BH |P.1| rydopey ripdper Toewpey TOLOpeEy Sovldwpey SovAOpev
2|rydnre tipare | monte mornrée | dovddnre SovAdTe |
3] riysde- TLpea- TO“@- ToLe- dovldwa- Sovrto-
ov) ot(v) ov) ot(v) ov) ou(v)
8.1} rysdoupe THD Tovéotus worotpt SovAdorpe dovroy
(-aoiny ony (-eoinv -oinv) (-ooinvy -oiny
Tindots = TIW@s Toléors Fouts dovAdots dovdois
(-aoins §-@7 ‘s) (-eoins -oins) (-ooins -oins)
3| tide = Ti moot —- Trott Sovddoe Sovdoit ve
(-aoiy =p (-coin —-ofn) (-oof —_- ot) ¥
D.1
;
= 2) rysdowroy rip@royv | motéorroy mosoiroy | dovAdorovdouvh otroy
3 (-aoinroy ~gnTov) (-coinroy -oinroy) (-ooinrov -onrov. y
5‘ | 3) tepaoirgy rip@ryy | moveoirny moroirny ‘SovdooirnySouhoiryy .
Caoujrny -o7779) (-eountny -ounrny) C ooujrny -ounTnv)
ra TYdoupey Ting pey TOLeoEY TOLOL MEY ovdootpev d ovh oper
(-aoinpev -gnper) (-coinpev -oinuev) | (-ootnpev -oinpev)
2 Tisdoure Tin@re | moore motoire rept peat
(- aoinre ~oyT€) (-eoinre -oinre) Co -oinre)
3 | riydoev Tipgev | moore morotev Adovev Sovdoiev
(-coinoay -oinray)

* Obs.—The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type.

‘Table IV.

IL—CONTRACTED.
Indicative Mood.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN

12]

dowro TLUGVTO

‘ Middle and Passive,
‘| ruydopat Tip@pat | moopar morodpar | Sovddopar SovAodpar
Tidy, €& Tia Ton, 6 Torq, €t Sovddy, ec Sovrot
uderas «= TLpaTat | moeerat moveitas SovAderae SovAodvrat
ryadpeOoy Tipadpe- | woreducfov morovpe- | Sovdodpe- SovAovpe Gor
Gov Bow dor
tiysdeoOov tipaaOoyr | moéecbov roreicOov | dovddecOov Sovrodadov
‘rysderOov tipGaOov | roecOov moreiacOor | dovddecbov Sovrdodabor
TipadpcOa Tipm@peOa| woeducha morovpeda | Sovroducba SovrAovpeba
tyusdecOe tipaode | moecbe moreicbe |dovddecbe Sovdroicbe
Tiydovrat Tip@yvtat | woovrae morodytrat | SovdAdovra: SovAodvrat
Tydopar tTipG@pat | mowpat Tordpat SovAdwpat SovAGpat
Tia Toen Toln SovAdy SovdrAot
at Téparat | worenrat Wounrat SovrAdnrae SovdAGrat
iriam@pe- Tipape- | woewpedoy Totw@pe- Sovlompe- SovrAdpeOor
dov ov doy ov
incbov TipaaGor | roenobov mornadov | dovddncboy Soviaa bow
tipanobov tipaaOor | ronobov roinaOoy | dovrdnobov Sovrda Gov
risawpela Tipa@peba| roempeOa TotmpeOa | Sovrodpeba Sovtdpeba
tysdnoOe tipadobe | moenobe moinode SovAdnabe Sovrddabe
Tidevras Tipavrar | rowvra mora@ytat | dSovtdwvrae SovAGvrar
Tipaoipny Tipepnv | roteoipny moroipny | dovdrooipny Sovdoipny
Tydowo = TLL GO qov€eoto mTototo dovAdoto §=—- SovA OO
ridoiro §=6TLGTo mwoorro §=—- FoLotTO SovAdarro Sovdroiro
Tiaoipe- Tip@dpe- | moreoinedovy moroipe- | Sovdooipe- SovroipeGow
Oov Bor bor ov
tipdoobov remG@oOor| roacboy motoiaGoy | dovdAdoi- Sovroicbov
oOo
‘| rpacicOny ripgdoOny | roteoicOnv motocOnv | dovdooi- SevroicOnv
oOnv
| ripaoipeba ripgpeba | woeoipeda motoipeda grange SovrAoipeBa
peba
tysdobe ripadobe | roloicbe moroiabe | Sovddaicbe Sovroicbe
moowro morotvto | Sovddowro Sovdoivro

112

tindw, I honour movew, I make
[comp. Lat. am(a)o] | [comp. Lat. moneo}
Stems. ripa Tove 7
Active. R
S.2|ripae ripa molee molet Sothoe = BodXOV
3\riyatro tipdto | moelro moreit@ | dovloérm SovAovTe |
3 |D.2| rysderov riparoy | moteerov motetrov | dovAderov SovAovTor |
5 3| rysaérov Tipdtay | roeerov roteitay| dovhoéravdovhovTav
= |P.2|rydere repare | moere moreire | dovddere 8 ae: a:
’
z. TiMadvT@Y TLL @y- roveovT@v motovv- | Sovdodv- dovhovy.
5 T@OV ToV Tov
ripaérw- tipdre- | roeéra- roreitw-| dovhocra-SovhovTa
cay vav cay cay vay “ae
= . ‘5 <ge r
= Tyndew = Thay mouew moveiy dovrldew Sovdodv
—= :
3 Tid@oy =6TLLOY Toev Toley Sovtdav Sovldyv
eo =
3 Tydovga TipdGoa | woéovca wotodvea | dovAdoveadovAovca
8 Tysdoy §=Ttba@y moveov totouv |dovddov Sovkody |
“=
8.1) érivaov éripey ‘| éroicov érolouy | édovhoov ed0vhouyv
Q\erivaecs eripads | érolees émoiets | edovAoes edovAoUS |
8 | éripac(v) Eripa €moiee(v) Eroies | edovAoev) idothon
D.1} .
S| 2) eriderov ériparor| eroreroy éworeirov) edovdde- BBdovhoo-
y= Tov Tov
= 8 | éripacrny éripatny| éroveérny erroreityy| edovdoe- e8o0vhov- |
ie > , > cad > id > - > sigs - id | .
P.1| éripdopev eripdper| erovéopev Enotovper| edovAdo- a =
> ’ > * a > , > - ie)
2\ erysdere Cripare | emoere €moreire | edovddere €Sour oares
3| érivaov éripa@y | émoicov émoiovy | edovhoor édotovy 4

~~

~ I.—CONTRACTED.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 1.

113

|
|
}

Indicative Mood.
]
Middle and Passive.
Tyadouv TLL@ qroteou mood Sovkdov Sdovdrod
riwaétOm tipdcOw | roccbo moreicOw | dovrtodcdw Sovrovcbw
ryder Oov tipacbor | roéecbov moreiador | dovddecbov Sovr0dcbcy
tysatcbay tipdabarv| roctcbov moreiaGar | dovroccbav Sovrovicbuy
Tipdea Ge ripaaobe |mokterbe moreicde | dovddecbe Sovrdoiabe
rysaccdov tipacar woeecOwv moreiacbear | dSovioecbwy Sovrovubwv
ripacaOa- tipdabe- | rocécba- morcicbw- | Sovroccba- Sovovaba-
cay way wav cay oay cay
rysderOar tipag@at | moecOa moreicOat | SovdéecOa BovrodaGar |
TyLadpevos Tima@pme- | Toledpevos Totovpe- Sovrdodpe- Sovrovtpe-
vos vos vos vos
Tipaopevn Tipopevy Toveomern ToLoupervy Sovoopévn SovdAovpeéry |
TYAAOpLEVOY T ty @ LE - mouSpevov morovpe- | Sovrodue- SovdAodpe- |
voy voy voy voy
ériypaduny erepopny éroveduny érotovpny | eSovrodunv eSovrovpyy
éruysdov eripe emroveov é€moltov edovkdou €dovdo0d
erysaeTo eTipaTo |enoero eroteito eSovddero €dovdo0dTO
erisadpe- Eripa@pe- | eroceducOoy evrorovpe- | éSovdodpe- ESovAOUpe-
Oov dov dov dov Our
eripdeoOov ér tpa- eroverOov émotei- eSovdde- edovdod- |
oOov oOov oor aGov |
ertpaca Ony éripa- eroveeaOnv émotei- eSovhoé- edSovdAov-
aOnv o Ony oOnv o Orr |
eripadpeba eripape- | eroeducOa erotovpe- | Soviod- eSovdod-
6a Oa pela pela |
eripdeobe eripacbe | éroerbe erotciabe | eSovrtderbe doudoba be
éripdovro éTipa@vro | émoéovro émotodvro | édovdovro SeSgROeers |

A Synopsis of these’Tenses is given in the following Table :—

dpiOuew, I count
ayddw, I make clear
erehavdw, 1 crown

(npicw I punish

xovedo, I gild.

ld PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS 1N 02,
Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive.
Active Voice,
Future TtanTw@ TysH Tou
Trownow Toujoouse
dovAoco Sovladcoum
1 Aorist eriunoa TYNT® Tenoarpe
(Weak), eroinca TowngT@ Troumoayse
edovAwca dovloca dovrAdc aye ae
1 Perfect reTiunka TETLANK@ TETYANKCULL
(Weak). menoinka TETOLKW Temoun
dedo0vA@Ka dedovloK@ dedovreKoyu of
1 Pluperfect eTeTimNKely
(Weak). EMETFOLNKELY
ededovaxety
Middle and Passive Voices,
Future. Timnoopat TYynooiuny
Tmomoopat Tomooiuny
SovA@copat Awooipnt
Pertect. TeTipnpat TeTipnpevos @ TeT Yn pevos €
meroinuat merrounpevos & TeTOLNLEVOS Ein
dedovA@pat deSoviwpevos & | Sedovdwpevos eiqy
Pluperfect. ereriununy
€meTrotnuny
édeSovhopnv =
Future Perfect, TeTILNTOLAL TeTYNTolLNY :
TeTroungopat wr imny
SeBovrogopat bedovAwcoiuny
1 Aorist Pas- erty) nOnv Tysnbe tysnbeiny
sive (Weak), a We ronda inv
€dovA@Onv dovlobS Sovdovbeinv
1 Future Pas- TtpnOnoopa Typ Onooipny $A.
sive (Weak). | moOnoopa row On ;
dovhwOnoopat renner
Verbal Adjectives: 1. tysnréds 2. riepsnréos
moujTos ToujTéos
Sovdords Sovhwreos ;

cee ett salle Neale)

¥

continued. PARADIGMS OF VEKBS.—VERBS IN 1.
T1.—CONTRACTED.
Tenses.)
eS i
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.
.
Active Voice.
Tinoe Tino OV
ounce Touo@y
dovAwcety dovlocav
Tipnoov Tipo Tinoas
woingoy moujoat pirnoas
SovAwcov SovA@erat dovlacas
reTipnKe: TETUNKEVAL TETLUNK@S
Femoinke TETrowKEvat TETTOLNKOS
dedovAwxe deSovA@xevat deSovA@Kas
Middle and Passive Voices.
Tipnoeo Oat Tino opEvos
mounoeo Oat Troma opevos
dovleceo Oat SovAwadpevos
hr Tipnoo retry joOat TETLLNMEVOS
Deroingo meron ba Temounpevos
*eSo0vhwoo dedovddcGar dedovdwpéevos
rettunoea bat TeTINTOpEVOS
memroujoer Oat TeTOLNTOpEvoS
bedovddcer Gat dedoudwocpevos
ran Ore rynOnvas rynbeis
trounOnte mounOnvas mounbeis
AwOnre | SovrwOijvar dovrwbeis
rinOnoec Oar TiunOnodpevos
momOnoerOat mroinOnodpevos
SovlwOjoec bar SovlwOynadpevos

116 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q.
: a
B,—CONSONANT STEMS,
mdéxw, I plait (class 1); etyw, I flee (class 2);
‘Tenses, | Indicative. Subjunctive. 3
»
Active. 1
Present. Imperfect. .
Present. TrEKw émexov TEéKw
pevyo éevyov petyw
Tdogo@ éraggov tdoow
Future. ThEEw é
pevsoua
site
1 Aorist (Weak). émde£a mE,
2 Aorist (Strong). épuyov diye
1 Aorist (Weak). traba ribo
Perfect. Plupertect,
1 Perfect (Weak). mémdexa émemexew TeTrEXW
2 Perfect (Strong). mecbevya erebevyeww mrepevye °
1 Perfect (Weak). Téraxa ererayew TeTay@
_Middle and Passive,
Preseut. Imperfect,
Present. mrEKouat emexdpnv mréeK@pat
Tao copat eragadjeny Tago@pat
Future. mreEopat
rafopa
1 Aorist Middle (Weak), | ewdeEapnv mrcEwpar
éra&auny ragwpat aay
- Perfect. Pluperfect.
Perfect. mwémheypat ememéypny meteypevos &
réraypat ereraypny reraypevos @
Future Perfect. meme Loar :
rera&opat ;
2 Aorist Pass. (Strong). | émdaxny TaK@ >
1 Aorist Pass. (Weak). | érayOnv tax 6@ |
2 Future Pass, (Strong). | mAaxnoopat 3
1 Future Pass. (Weak). tax Oncopat J

4

Verbal Adjectives: 1. mexrés, heuxrdés, raxrés. >.

ya, 1 drive (Aor. ifyayov, Perf. Act. }xa); dpxw, I rule, both of class1;
rarely -Ew), see § 250, Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as

L 3

~

Tabie V.

IL—GUTTURAL STEMS.

taco, I arrange (class 4). Verbal Stems: mex, guy, ray.

PAxADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 2.

117

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive, Participle.
Active.
meKoupe méKe mAéxew mrEK@Y
evyoume pevye pevyew pevyov
Tao cous Tdooe Tdooev Tagowy
mhe fous mr€Eew TE Eo
evEoiuny pevgera ev&dpevos
ra€ouu ragew Tafov
mreEauue meov mreEat mékas
piyoun puye uyety puyav
je a raéat Tagas
memA€x out memrEXE meme xevat meTAEXOS
mepevyouue meevye mepevyevat mepevyas
TeTaxouue TéTAXe TeTAyXEvat TETAY@S
Middle and Passive.
mekoiuny mA€KOU mr€xer Oat mAEKdpevos
Tagcoipny Tagcov racoec Oat TUTTOMEVOS
meEoipny TAEEea Oat me Edpevos
imny Taker Oa ta&dpevos

mreEuipny mreEas mrcEag bat mAcEdpevos
taguipny raga ragac bai raédpevos
meteypevos einy | rérde£o meméx Oat memeypevos
TeTaypevos inv | térato reray Oat _TeTaypevos
memeEoipny memdéLeoOat meme Edpevos
rerafoipny reraker Oat reTakdmevos
mAaxeinv mAaknOs makivat mAakeis
tax Oeinv raxOnre raxOnvat _taxbeis
mAaknooipny mAaxnoecOae mAaknodpevos
raxOnooipny raxOnoer Oat Tax Onodpevos

2. mdexréos, hevxréos, Takréos.

“|

Conjugation.

épvece, I dig, Stem épvx, class 4,a; for other guttural Stems (Pres. -oow.
ro mAey-pa, the wreath ($47); 9 raéi-s, arrangement ; ) dpx-n, the governmeni

v

118 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 22. ‘able ‘
B.—CONSONANT STEMS,
Wevdoua, I lie (class 1), reiOw, J persuade (class 2); .
Tenses, Indicative, Subjunctive,
Active,
Present. Imperfect,
Present. meiba érevOov mrelOw
_Kopivo exopucoy Kopivo :
Future. mreiow
KOpL@
1 Aorist (Weak). | érea Teiow
exduioa Kopiow Sus
Perfect. Pluperfect. "a
2 Perfect (Stronz).| méroBa éremoibew rrerolOw |
1 Perfect (\Weak). | xexdpexa exe Kopixen KEKOMIK@ oe
Middle and Passive. |
Present, Imperfect,
Present. WevSoua éWevdduny Wevdaua
meiOouat érrecOounv me (Ocwpae
kopiCopat exopiCouny kopiC@pat
Future. Wevoopa
meigopat
_Kopuovpat
1 Aorist Middle | éWevoduny Wetoopa
(Weak). errecodpny meiv@pat
exopiodpuny kopiowpat
Perfect, Plupertect. , a
Perfect. . éWrevopat evetopny — eevopévos & ‘
TemEro pat eremeiopny mememopevos @
Kekopuo pat exexopio pny Kexopiopevos @ |
1 Aorist Passive | €WevoOnv Wevrbo
(Weak). exci Onv Trew OO
exopioOnv kopicb@
1 Future Passive | WevoOnocopas
(Weak). mer Onoopat
Koyo Onoopat ‘:

Verbal Adjectives: 1. Wevords, mevords, kopsotds. |

a ee ee

se me

i wio-ti-s, the faith ; 4 omovd-n, the libation; 6 xdvb-wv, Gen, kv8av-og,

Examples for
orévda, libo, Fut. oreiow, Perf. €omea, Perf. Mid. éomevopat, Aor. Pass,
For verbs of a Dental Stem with the Present ending in -oow see § 250, Oba,

, 2

a?
7.4

‘Table VL.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN 1), 119
IL—DENTAL STEMS.
copito, I carry (class 1, 6.). Verbal Stems: yevd, 70, coped.
Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. | Participle.
Active.
meiOouet meibe meibew metOcov
KopiCorpe cope kopicerp kopilov
meiooue meioew TELT@V
_ KOpeotpe Kopueiy Kop.@y
meioauye meioov Teva meioas
Kopioarue kOpucrov Kopioat kopioas
mremotOoust mémoue memoubevat meTvo.bws
kekopikouse KEKOpLKE KEKOULKEVat KEKOULKOS
Middle and Passive,
(unv evdou Wevdsobat Wevddpevog
meOoiuny mreiBov mei9erOat mrevOdpevos
— Kopitoipny kopivoy kopiveo Oat _koputdpevos
Wevooipny Wevoec Oat Wevodpevos
mewvoiuny treiverOar Teco dpevos
Koptoipny Koureta Oat KopLovpevos
Wevoaipny eto WevoarGu Wevodpevos
Teiraipnv weioat meicacOae Teo apevos
Kouioaiuny KOpicat kopioac Oat Kopurdpevos
eevepeévos ety éyevoo eWetobut éyrevorpevos
wemerapevos einv | mererro aerreigOat TETELT BLEVOS
_KeKopirpevos ein | Kexdpiro _kekopioOae KeKopugpevos
Wevobeinv WevoOnre Wevobjvae Wevobeis
mea Oeinv meio Onte reve Oijvat mevobeis
kopuaBeinv KopicOnre _ kop Oijvat Kop beis
evo Oncoipny Wevadjceaba Weve dnodpevos
reve Onooipny mea OnoerOat wea Onadpevos
Kopi Onooiuny kopiaOnoec Oat kopia Onodpevos
2. yevoréos, meiotéos, Kopuotéos.

Conjugation.

éameiaOnv; Kdifa, I wash against; dpmdtw, 1 snatch; édrifw, I hope.
Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stem, as: rd Weid-os the lie;
the wave ; 1 dpray-y, plunder,

120 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
B.—CONSONANT ST!
méurw, I send (class 1); deir@, J leave oan
—_
Tenses Indicative.
Active.
Present, Imperfect.

Present, wépre émeprov wepro
Aeiro €Xeurov Aelr@

_Kadorre éxddurrov xadinre

Future. repo
Aeiro
Kalive

Aorist 1. (Weak). | érepwa mrepyo

2. (Strong). | €Adrov Aire Pt
a Weak). éxahua Kaiveo
Perfect. Pluperfect. ‘ f
2 Perfect (Strong). | wérouda ere oucpew rerbppa
2 Perfect (Strong). | AeAoura €deAoirrew Aeroir@ |
Middle and Passive.
Present, Imperfeet,

Present. me pTropat érrepardpiny wepTropat
Aeiropat €Xertounv Xetropat
kadvrropat exadurropny Kadvnropas

Future, mepouat
AetWrouat

Kadvvopat

Weak). | érepyapunv Tréenpopae
ats fe Strong). sve en ithe
tdale (1. (Weak). | exaduyduny kadipopar |
Perfeet. Pluperfect, ,\.

Perfect. mere ppat eremeupny Terre ppevos eo |

AE Aetupat €deAeiuunv chetppevos b
KexdAvppat éxexadvppny kexaduppevos &

Future Perfect. AeAeiyvouas
kexadvouas

1 Aorist Passive ene, v meppea

(Weak). odor AeHOd
éxadvpOny Karupba

1 Futu Passive mepponoopat

(Weak). AeePOjropat
kahup6rcopat

Verbal Adjectives: 1. meumrds, eumrés, xadverés,.

faaleee

rpérw, I turn (class 1); ddeipwo, I anoint (class 2); rpiBo, I rub

(§ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as 6 mopm-d-s,
nerning, manner ; rd Gdeup-ap, the ointment ; 6 ra-o-s, the tomb, ee

‘ 4
- ~S

Table VIL

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

IIL—LABIAL STEMS.
xadumra, I cover (class 3). Verbal Stems: wep, Aum, kadvB.

121

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle,
Active.
méprroupt Terre Tréprrety Te pT Oy
Aetrrorpue heire Neirery Aeirav
kadvrrotut kdduare _xahurrew Karimov
mepryoupe méueuv Trepov
Aelyrouue AetWeuv Aeitrov
Kadvyoupse Kadvweov KadvWov
mepatpe meppov mepwpas wepas
Alrroupe Aime Nerrety Aurav
kadvyaipe kadvuiov kadvwat Kadvyas
memopnpotpe meroppe memoppevat meToppas
AeAolzroupue AeAourre AeNourrevat AeAourra@s
Middle and Passive.

mweprotuny 7éparov mwéeumrer Oat ep opevos
Aeuroipny Aeirov heirer Oa Aeu@dpevos
kadurroiuny kahuTrou kadirrec Oat kadumropevos
rep \poiuny mepper Oat Teuypdopevos
Aewyroipny Aeier Oar Aeupdpuevos
kadvypoipny kadvwpeo Oat kahudpevos
mepyyainny meurat mepwyarba mep\papevos

troiuny Aurov here Oat Aumdpevos
Kadvipainny Kaduwpat kadvWac bat kaduipapevos
memrepupéevos etnv | méreuo memenpbas TeTEULpEVvOS
AeAetppevos einv | AEAeuo AeeiPOat Aeetppevos
kexaduppévos einy | Kexdduo kexarupbat kekaduppevos
AeAeroipnv Acheter Oat AeAetWdpevos
_kexahupoiuny kexaruweo Bat Kexaduypopevos
mreupbeinv meppenre mepponvas weppbeis
eeOeinv Aeih4nre AechOjvac AecPOers
kahupbeinv Kahvpénrs KarupOjvat __|_xaruddeis
TeppOnovoipny mreppOnoer Oat meppOnadpevos
AecPOnooipny AecpOjnoer Oar AecpOnodpevos
kahupOnocoipnny KartupOjoecOar | xadkupOnodpevos

| 2. meumréos, Neumréos, KaduTTéos.

Conjugation.

(class 2), as to its Perf., see § 279; Odrrw, I bury (class 3), Stem rap
ihe escort; rowm-d-s, remaining; % KadvB-n, the hut; 6 rpdr-o-s, the

122

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

B.—CONSONANT
8épe, I skin (class 1); dyyé\\@, 1 announce (class 4, c); oneipo, I sow (class
Tenses, Indicative. Subjunctive. ae
Active, Present. Imperfect.

Present. dépw édepov d¢pw
dyyo fyyOXov ayy eo
oneipe €ometpov orcipo
puaiva é€piawvov praive

Future, Sepa
ayyearo
orepa
pve

1 Aorist (Weak). édeipa deipo
Hyyera ayy
éoreipa oreipa
€pidva pudya

Perfect. Pluperfect.

1 Perfect (Weak), | #yyedxa yyyerKew nyyake
éomapxa eomapKew €omdpKo
pepiayKa € me pudryKew pepeayKa

Middle and Passive. Present. Inipertect.

Present. dépopat edepsuny bépapat -
dyyeAopat HY VeARS uy dyyOA@pat
oreipopat éoreipouny oneipwpar
paivopat €peauvdpuny

Future. Sepodpa
dyyeovpae
o7Tepovpat
_plavovpat

1 Aorist Middle €Seepapny beipa, a"

(Weak). iyyeddyy dyycihopae
. €oTretpauny o7eip@pat
€pwavapny pidvepat
Perfect. Pluperfect,

Perfect, dSappar édeSdppny Sedappevos &
WyyeApat nyyaApny TyyeApévos &
éorrappat €oTmdppny €omappevos &
pewiagpat €pepiacpny pepiacpevos &

2 Strong. éddpny bapa
Aorist } 1 Weak. nyyedOqv dyyr0d
Passive } 2 Strong. | eondpnv onapo

1 Weak. | épsdvOnv poavdd |

2 Strong. | dapnoouas ;
Future ) 1 Weak. ayyeAOnoopas
Passive | 2 Strong. | oapynocopat

1 Weak. pravOncopat

Verbal Adjectives: 1. daprds, ayyeArés, omaprés, pare

Table VIIL

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

IV.—LIQUID STEMS Q, p, », p).

4, d); puaive, I soil (class 4,d). Verbal Stems: dep, dyyer, orep, pear.

123

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.
(y ddporpe d€pe d€pew dépev
| dyyéAdoupe dyyre ayyedrew dyyéov
| o7eipouse omTreipe omeipew omreipa@v
| peaivoyn plave puaivew puaiver
| bepotpe Sepeiv Sepav
| dyyedotpe dyyedeiv ayyeAov
OTEpoipe o7repely oTrEepa@v
| peavoipe peavety paver
Rt - - . s
detpare deipov Seipuc deipas
dyyetharpe a@yyeov dyyeiXat dyyeidas
oreipayu o7reipov oreipat omeipas
poudvarpe piavoy pudvat pudvas
Axor * Hyyede iyyerkéva YyAKas
ie €ordpKoune €omapke €omapkévat comapKas
, ‘ eee PEpLayKE PeplayKevat MEeplayKa@s
Bepolgqy dépov d<per bat Sepdpevos
| dyyeAdoipny ayyédXov dyyeAdeo bar dyyeAdGpevos
oTretpoinny o7meipou oneipec Oat o7retpopevos
| peawvoipny © puaivouv praiver Oat pavopevos
| bepoiuny depeio Par depovpevos
a ayyehoipny dyyedcio bar dyyeXovpevos
| oepoipny orepeioOat ore povpevos
| ptavoipny _peaveio Oat _PLavovpevos
: Setpaipny detpa Seipac Oa detpapevos
dyyehaipny ayyedat dyyeiiac bat ayyetAdpevos
oretpaipny o7reipat oneipacOa o7Tretpapevos
| peavaipny plava pdvac Oat puavapevos
dedappevos ei ety dédapao dedapOae deSappévos
HyYApéevos ciny Ryyedoo yyyedOae NYYeApEVOS
€omappevos einv €omapoo éomdpbat eoTrappevos
| PewLagpevos einy | pepiago pepeavOae _pepLaogpevos
Sapeinv ddpnbu Sapjva Sapeis
dyyedOecinr ayyed Gyre dyyedOjva dyyedbeis
orapeinv omapnOr oTaphvat omrapeis
puavOeinv pudvOnre _peavOjvat puavbeis
) Supnooiuny Sapnoca bat dapnodpevos
anal dyyeAOjoeo Oat dyyeAOnodpevos
orapnaoi, onapnocabat oTapnodpevos
. a lei puavOnoer bat puavOnobpevos

2. Sapréos, dyyedréos, oTrapréos, puavréos.

124

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN pl. — T

VERBS IN pu

ri-On-pu, J put di-3a-p1, J give | t-orn-pu, J place |
Pure Stems Oe 80 ora
Present Stems ri-de 81-80 i-arn
Present. Active.
S. 1 | ri-On-pe 6i-Sa-pu t-orn-pe
2 | ri-On-s bi-8-s i-orn-s
3 % : ri-0n-o1(v) 8i-8w-or(v) i-orn-or(v)
8 2 | ri-Oe-rov 8i-80-rov i-orii-rov
3 3 | ri-Oe-rov di-d0-rov (-oTd-roy
= | P. 1 | ri-Oc-pev 8i-50-pev (-oTd-pev
2 | ri-Oe-re bi-d0-re t-ord-TE
3 | rt-0€-"-or(v) 81-86-a-or(v) i-ord-or(v)
8S. 1 | 71-06 6-86 i-oT@
2 | r-Oj-s 61-86-s i-orj-s
g ‘ 4 Ti-07 &:-59 i-orp
3 2 | rt-O7-rov 61-5-rov i-orij-rov
> 3 | ri-On-rov 6t-66-rov i-orn-rov
wp | P. 1 | r-0d-pev 6.-56-pev i-or@-pev
2 | r-Oj-re 61-56-re i-orh-re
3 | 11-00-c1(v) _b1-8-or(v) i-ora-o(v)
S. 1 | re-Oein-v 6:-doin-v i-orain-v
2 | ri-Oein-s &:-d0in-s i-orain-s
3 | r-Oein 6:-d0in i-orain
D, 1
2 | ri-Oein-rov or 81-Soin-roy or i-orain-rov or
$ riOeirov d.dotrov iorairov
Ss 3 | ri-Oecy-rnv or :-doun-rny oF i-orauy-ryy or
2 ribeitny b.doirny iorairny rw
© | P. 1 | re-ein-pey or 6:-Soin-pev or i-crain-pev or
Tiecipev didoipev ioraipev
2 | ri-Oein-re or 6:-Soin-re or i-orain-re or
riOcire d.doire ioraire
3 | rt-Ocin-cay or 6:-Soin-cay or i-orain-cay oF
ribeiev d:dotev toraiev
S. 2 | ri-Oe 6i-Sov i-orn ¢
Ps) 8 | t1-0¢-ra 6.-56-ro i-ord-Tw
> , , o A
3 . 2 | ri-Oe-rov 8i-60-rov i-ord-rov
£ 3 | r-0€-rey 6:-86-Tev i-ord-rev
& | P, 2 | ri-de-re bi-do0-re i-ora-re
a 3 | rt-O€-vrev or &:-86-vr@v or i-ord-vrev oF
ti-0€-Trwcav 6.-86-rwcav i-ord-recay |
Infin. rt-Oe-vat 61-86-vae i-ord-vat
Part. ti-Gei-s, tt-Oet-ca,| 81-Sov-s, 81-S0d-ca, -ord-s, i-ora-ca,
| ribev G. tibévr-os| Siddv G, &-Sdv7-08| iordv G. dn

‘Table 1X.

_ WIRST CLASS.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN pe.

125

This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations

directly to the Stem.

Present. Middle and Passive.
\r-be-pat 6i-d0-pae t-or “-pae
| ri-Oe-car bi-S0-cat t-ord-oat
| ri-Oe-rar 8/-S0-rae i-ord-rat
| te-Oé-pe Aor 6:-356-peOov i-ord-eOov
| ri-e-cbov 8i-80-cOov i-cra-wOov
| ri-Oe-cbov 8i-S0-cOov i-cra-o ov
3 ti-O€-peba 6:-86-e8a i-ord-pe0a
| ri-Oe-oO6e bi-d50-c6e i-ora-obe
| ti-Oe-vrar di-d0-vrat t-ora-vrat
| t1-Oa-pat 6:-da-pae i-or@-pae
| m-67 &-36 i-orh
tt-On-rat 6:-8@-rat i-orn-rae
tt-O@-pebov 6-80-peOov i-cr@-pebor
| rt-07-08ov 6:-50-0 Bor i-ory-o8ov
tt-0n-0 bov 6-8-0 6ov i-orn-obov
| tt-Oa-peba 61-50-pe8a i-cro-peba
| tt-On-08e 6-56-06 i-orn-obe
| rt-O@-vrat 6:-88-vrae i-o0Td-vrae
rt-Oei- yy 8:-Sol-pnv i-orai-pyv
| ti-Oci-o 6:-Soi-o i-otai-o
| rt-Oci-ro © 6:-S0i-ro i-crai-ro
| te-Oei-peOov 6:-doi-pebov i-orai-peOov
_ | tt-Oei-c ov §:-Soi-c ov i-crai-c bor
2)
| rt-Oel-0Onv 8:-Soi-c Onv i-orai-oOnv
tt-Oci-peba 8:-Soi-peba i-orai-peba
t1-bei-obe :-doi-abe i-crai-obe
tt-Oci-vro §:-dSoi-vro i-crai-vro
-| ri-Oe-0o0 6i-d0-co i-ord-oo sae
71-0€-cb@ 8-80-08 i-ord-cbw
| ri-Oce-cOov 8i-80-c ov t-ora-oOov
| tt-O€-7bov &:-56-cOav i-ord-cbwv
ti-Oe-abe 8i-50-0 be t-ora-obe
71-0€-cOwyv or 6:-66-cO@v or i-ard-cOwy or
tt-6€-cOwoav 6-86-09 acav i-ord-cOwcav
ti-Oe-cbar 8i-50-c Oa i-cra-c Oat
i-O-pevo-s, %j, o-v 61-6d-pevo-s, , o- i-ord-pevo-s, 9, o-v

126

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN yw,

[ ri-On-p, I put 8i-3e-pu, J give | t-orn-pu, 1 place |
Pure Stems 66 80 ora
Present Stems ri-Oe 81-80 i-orn
S. 1 | é-ri-On-v e-di-dw-v t-orn-v
2 | é-ri-On-s €-di-Sw-s i-orn-s
“a 3 | €-ri-0n €-di-3@ i-orn
2s |D.1
Py 2 | é-ri-Oe-rov €-di-80-rov i-orii-rov
8 3 | é-ri-8é-ryv €-§1-86-rnv i-ord-rnv
= | PL. 1 | é-ri-Oe-pev €-5i-d0-pev i-ord-pev
2 | é-ri-e-re é-di-8o-re t-ord-re
3 | é-ri-Oe-cav €-di-50-cav t-ora-cav
Second or Strong Aorist. Active.
S. 1 | [€-dn-v] €-Ow-v €-oTn-v
2 €-On-s | €-Sa-s €-oTn-s
é 3 | | €-8n) é-8 | €-0T :
| od
§ 2 | €-Oe-rov €-80-rov €-o7n-Tov
3 3 | é-Oé-rnv €-56-rnv €-oTn-THv
A | P. 1] 2Oe-per €-d50-pev €-oTN- hE
2 | €-Oe-re €-8o-re €-oTN-TE
3 | €-Oe-cav é-5o-cav €-oTn-oav
Subj. 6a 8a oT®
6i-s 8o-s i-s
etc. as in the
Opt. Oein-v Soin-v orain-v
| | | | etc. as in the
S. 2 | de-s 60-s orn-Ot
3 8 | dé-ra b6-Tre oTH-T@ :
> ; : 7
er . 2 | 6€-rov 66-rov oT?-TOP
& 3 | O€-rev 86-rev OTH-TOV
Sy P. 2 | Oe-re 86-re OTH-TE
aa 3 | 6€-vrev or 86-vrev or ord-vrey Or
6¢-rwcav 66-reacav oTn-Tecav
Infin. Oci-vat dov-vat orn-vat
Part. bei-s, bci-ca, b€-v| dov-s, 800-ca, ord-s, ora-ca,
G. Oévr-os 86-v G. ddvr-os orav G. oravr-os
The following Tenses are formed
Active.
Future. Once dace
First or Weak| ¢6nxa édoxa
Aorist.
Perfect. _réBerKa b€daxa
Pluperfect. | éreOeixew ededaxew
Verbals.

continued.
FIRST CLASS.

PARADIWMS OF VERBS.—VERBS EN pu.

directly to the Stem.

This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations

€-71-0€-pnv €-6:-86-pnv i-ord-pny
é-ri-0e-c0 e-di-So-co i-ora-co
é-ri-Ge-ro é-8i-50-ro i-oTa-To
€-r1-0é-pe0oy €-5:-56-ebov Lord-pebov
é-ri-Oe-cbov €-5i-50-a6ov t-cra-aOov
€-r1-0€-a Onv €-5:-86-c Onv i-ord-o Onv
é-ri-Oé-eba €-51-86-peba i-ord-peOa
€-ri-be-0 be é€-di-50-a6e i-cra-abe
€-ri-Oe-vTo €-5i-S0-vro i-ora-vTa
Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive,
€-Oé-ynv e-56-pnv Wanting
€-Oov é-dov
é-Oe-ro €-do-ro
€-0¢-peOov €-5d-peOov
€-e-cbov €-50-abov
€-0€-c Onv €-56-cOnv
| €-Oé-peba é-5d-peba
| €6e-006e é-50-a6e
| €-Oe-vro é-d0-vro
| Oa-pat 66-pat Wanting
| 8 89 | ‘
Pres. Subjunctive.
~ Oci-pny Soi-pryy Wanting
Pres, Optative. | | b
600 80d Wanting
6é-cba 86-06@
0é-0Oov 86-0 Oov
6¢-cbav 86-cbwv
6€-cb¢ 86-06
6é-cbwy or 0é-cbacay | 86-cOwv or 86-cbacav
62-0 bat 86-08 Wanting
| Oe-pevo-s, 4, o-v 86-pevo-s, 9, O-¥ Wanting
on the analogy of Verbs in Q.
Middle and Passive.
Onoopar Sdaoopua oTnoopat
| Passive. reOjcouae | doOqropa orabjcopat
Mippie. Wanting Wanting éornoapny
Passive. éréOnv €d60nv éaradny
| reBerpat bedouat eorapat
5 | eredeipny eded6pny éorapny
Sl herds | Bares oratos
deréos Soreos oraréos

128

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN pu
VERBS IN w.—SECOND CLASS,

This Second Class consists of Verbs which form the Present Stem by addi1

vv to the Pure Stem,

Seixvupe, T shew.

Pure Stem, deck.

Present Stem, decx-vv.

Present Active.

Middle and Passives it

Indicative. 5. 1 Seix-vi-pe deix-vi-yae
2 | Seix-viis Seix-vi-oat
3 | deix-vi-or(v) Seix-vi-rat
Dp; k derk-vi-peOov
2 | Seix-vii-rov Seix-vu-cbov
8 | Sdeix-vii-rov Seix-vu-cbov
P. 1 | Seix-vi-pev Setk-vi-peba
2 | deix-vi-re Seix-vu-obe
3 | detx-vi-aou(v) Seix-vu-vrat
Subjunctive. decxvio, ns, 7, &e. decxviwpat, nenrat, &e. |
Optative. Secxrvoepe, ors, ot, &C. decxvvoipuny, 010, oro, &e.
Imperative. | S. 2 | deix-vi deix-vi-co
3 | Secx-vi-re bex-vi-cb@
D. 2 | deix-vii-rov Seix-vu-cbov
3 | decx-vi-rev Setx-vi-cbeov
Pl. 2 | Seix-vii-re Seix-vu-cbe F
3 | decx-vi-vrev or Sex-vv-c bay or cf
Secx-vi-recay Setx-vt-cbwoav
Infinitive. decx-vit-vac Seix-vv-cbat
Participle. Secx-viis, decx-vica, Serx-viv Secx-vd-pevos, ny ov
Stem. decx-vvu-vr
Imperfect S.. 1 | &-deix-vi-v é-Serk-vi-pny -
Indicative. 2 | é-Seix-vi-s €-Seix-vv-co :
3 | é-deix-vi €-d¢€ix-vi-ro ral
D. 1 €-Serk-vi-ppeOov
2 | é-8eix-vu-rov €-Seix-vu-0bov (
3 é-Seck-vb-ryy €-Serk-vd-c Onv
Pl. 1 | ¢-Seix-vi-pev €-der-vi-pe
2 | é-deix-vu-re e-belx-vu-7be
3 | é-Seix-vu-cuv €-deik-vu-yro
Future. Seite detEopat .
Passive. derxOnoopar |
First or édecka Mippie éderkduny |
Weak Aorist. Passive, édeiyOqv |
Perfect. déderya SeSecypat
Pluperfect. ededeixew ededetypny

. § 232. I, THE PRESENT-STEM. 129

Ouap. X.—F i1rst PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION
or Verbs in a.

I—Tuer Present-STEM.
A.—Inflexion of the Present-Stem.

§ 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains
after rejecting » in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act.

On the distinction of the Present-Stem from the
Verbal-Stem, see § 245, &e.

The following Table exhibits the way in which the
Personal Endings are affixed to the Present-Stem by
means of the connecting vowels.

§ 232, Active, ges
Present 1. Sing. | Av-o solv-o} Av-o-pat
Indicative. | 2. ,, | Av-er-s soly-i-s Av=n Or Av~er
8. 4, | Ad-ee solv-i-t Av-e-rat
1, Dual. Au-d-eOov
2. 4, | Avee-rov Av-e-cOov
9) | Ad-e=rov Av-e-c Boy

3.

1. Plur. | Av-o-vev [solv-iemus] | \v-d-yeda
2. ,, |Adv-e-re [solv-i-tis] | Av-e-cbe
8. 4, | Av-ov-or(v)[solv-u-nt] | Av-o-vras

Present 1, Sing. | Av-o solv-aem] | Av-w-pas
Subjunctive. |2. ,, | Av-y-s solv-a-s] Av-n
8. 4, | Aden soly-a-t] Avb-n-rat
1, Dual. Av-d-pedov
2. 4, | Av-n-rov dd-n-a ov
8. 4, | Av-n-rov Av-n-obov

y | Aven-re solv-a-tis] | Av-n-cbe

1, Plur. | Av-o-pev [solv-a-mus] | \v-o-peba
2.
8. 4, | Av-w-or(v) [solv-a-nt] | Av-w-vrat

130 I, THE PRESENT-STEM.
: Middle and
Active. Paniive:
Present 1. Sing. | Av-or-ps Av-ol-pny
Optative. 2 4, | Ad-ors Av-o1-0
3. 4, | Aveou Av-ot-To
1. Dual. Av-oi-pebov
2. 4, | Adxourov Av-ot-c ov
3. yy | Av-ol-rny Av-ol-c Onv
1, Plur. | Av-o1-pev Av-ol-pe
2. 4 | Av-ol-re Av-o1-o Oe
3. 45 | Av-ot-ev Av-o1-vro
Present 2. Sing. | Ad-e soly-e] Ad-ou
Imperative. [3. ,, | Av-é-ro [solv-i-to] du-€-0 bo
2. Dual, | Av-e-rov Av-e-c ov
3. 4, | Av-€-ror Av-€-c bor
2. Plur. | Av-e-re —_[solv-i-te] Av-e-obe
3. 4, | Av-d-vrewy [solv-u-nto] | Av-é-cOev, or
or Av-€-recay Au-€:
Sr ally Aimew di-e-oBau
Present Stem. A v-o-v r[solv-e-nt]
Participle. Av-wv Au-d-pevo-s
Av-ouvca Au-o-pévyn
Ad-ov Av-d-pevo-y
Gen. Ad-o-vr-os
[solv-e-nt-is }
Imperfect. | 1. Sing. | &Av-o-y €-du-d-eny
2. 4y | EAvee-s Nae
3. 4, | E-Av-e(v €-v-€-To
z 2 €-u-6-pe Oo
2. 4, | é-Av-e-rov €-hv-e-c bo
3. 4, | €-Av-e-rqv €-hu-€-c Ony
1, Plur. | é-Av-o-pev €-hv-d-
2. 4, | é-Av-e-re €-hi-e
8. 4, | €Av-o-v €-\v-0-vTo

a
sy

PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131

§ 283. Obs.—1. The E-sound (e, n, e+) is used as a connecting
vowel, except before nasals, where the O-sound (0, @, ov) is

2. In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. w is the connecting vowel lengthened,
the ending ps being dropped. In the 2 Sing. ers is for eo.
In the 3 Sing. e« for ere: Ad-er-s for Av-e-c1, Ad-ex for Av-e-Te
[comp. solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by
compensative lengthening (§ 42): Av-ov-o« from Av-o-vor for
the original and Doric Av-o-vrs [comp. solv-u-nt].—In the 8 Sing.
Imperf. ¢(v) stands for original e-r—comp. solveba-t—as r at the
end could not maintain its ground (§ 67).

3. In the 2 Sing. Ind. Pres. Mid. y or ex arose from e(o)as
(§§ 61, 38): Avy from Ave(o)ar; the ending'e: is the Old Attic
one exclusively used in otes, thou thinkest, Bovdeu, thow wishest ;
n is the one later in general use. Comp. the Fut. dyer (§ 259).

4. The Subjunctive has always @, 7, 7, for o (ov), €, «4; the
of the 2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from n(o)ae (comp. § 228).

5. In the 2 Sing. Imper. Act. the termination after the connecting
vowel is quite lost. ov in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf.
Mid. has arisen from e(@)o, €0: Avov=Ave(c)o, éAvov=
édve(o)o (§§ 61, 37); o+o in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from
ou(o)o.

§ 233. Dialects—1. The Epic dial. sometimes has the original
ending pu of the 1 Sing. in the subjunctive: e6da-py, velim; the
2 Sing. Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending o6a (for s):
€0n-cba= bedys, Kaiow-cba = kdaiots (kdaiw, I weep); the 3 Sing.

Subj. has the old ending o+(v) from re: eOéAn-or(v) = eOery.

2. The long vowels of the Subjunctive are often shortened in
Hom. : idivere for idivnre (idive, I put straight) (comp. § 228, D.).

8. The Epic dial. often has pevas or pey in the Inf. Act. cone
nected with the Stem by an accented €: duiv-é-pevat, or duiv-€-pev
= diver, to defend.

4, The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dial. :
AAatea, thow wishest ; Subj. éxna (habearis), also shortened, pio-yeat
(miscearis); Imperat. éreo, follow; Imperf. edeveo, thow wast in
want of. 0 is also contracted to ev (§ 37, D.): rev.

5. The 1 Dual and 1 Pl. Mid. in poetry often has o@ for 6:
BovAsdpueo Gov, -wecOa, we wish,

6. aro (§ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for yro in
3 Pl. Opt.: paxoiaro (= udxowro), they may fight. In New-Ion,
@rat, aro, are also sometimes found in other forms where « is the

132 I. THE PRESENT-STEM.

B.—The Augment.

_§ 234. The Augment (Augmentum, tnerease) is the
sign of the past in the Indicative of all the historical
tenses (§ 225, 3. B). It has two forms, mi: is, it ap-
pears either

a) As a Syllabie Augment, in the syllable e sxelken or

6) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the
initial vowel.

All verbs beginning with a consonant haye the
Syllabie Augment: &-\v-o-v, é-rut-d-unv, I was struck,
p is doubled after e: &ppirrov, from fpirra, I hurl.

Obs.—The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of 9

instead of ¢ in #-peAd-o-v, I was about to, from ped ; 7-BovA=
é-unv, I wished, from BovAopa; n-dvva-ynv, I could, from
dvvapat.

§ 235. The Temporal Augment is used in all verbs
which begin with a vowel, whether aspirated or not.
The Temporal Augment changes

a to 7 : ayo, I lead Imperfect fy-o-v

€ 5» 7 + €dabva, I drive - jAavy-o-y

o 4, @ : dvediCa, I reproach ne aveibil-o-v
t 4 t : ‘txerevo, I beseech P “ikérev-o-y

connecting vowel instead of o: xnd-é-arat = xnb-o-vrat, they care,

€Bovd-€-aro = €8ovdovro,

_ %. Hom., quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. roy, odor
for rnv, cOnv: érevxerov, the two made; and Attic writers have

rnyv for the 2 Dual of an historic tense: eixérny, ye two had, evpérny,

ye two found.

§ 234, Dialects.—In Hom., and also in other poets, the Augment
may be entirely omitted: revxe, he made; Exev, he had. i, p, v, o,
are also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment: €AAiooere
(from Aicoouat, I beseech); 5 only in the Stem 84: ed8eca (I
feared, § 317, 5). On the contrary, p is sometimes left single:
épamropev (iture, I sew, spin).

§ 235. Dialects.—By the Temporal Augment @ becomes 4 in Doric:
dyov, The Temp. Aug. is very often wanting in Herod. especially
in the case of diphthongs,

§ 238, THE AUGMENT. L133

tb to d : ‘UBpite, I insult Imperfect ‘éSput-o-»
at 5, 7 : alcOavopa, I perceive re no Gav-d-pnv
av ,, nu: avédave, I increase bs nv&av-o-y
ot 5, @ : oikreipa, I pity Ss @KTELP-0-V

Before vowels, a becomes a, not 7: diw, I hear, diov.
The long vowels 7, , i, ¥, and usually the diphthongs
€t, EV, ov, remain without Augment.
elxd{@, I conjecture, «ixa¢-o-v (also jfaCov),
tipioxw, I find, evpicx-o-v (seldom Aorist ndpov),
also av and ot immediately before a vowel: avaiva,
IT dry, avawov, oiaxifw, I steer, oidxifov, and other
diphthongs in isolated instances.
Obs.—The rough breathing precedes the augmented
form when the verb in tts unaugmented form had tt.

§ 236. « becomes ex (instead of 7) in some verbs, viz.
in édw, I leave; é0ifw, I become accustomed ; éXicow, I
roll; édxw or Edxvw, I draw; &ropat, I follow ; épyafopuat,
I work; &prw or éprifw, I creep; értidw, I entertain
hospitably ; éyw, I have. Comp. below the Aorists:
eiumy (§ 3138), efrov (aipéw, I take, § 327, 1), cioa, I
placed (§ 269, D., and § 275).

Obs.—These verbs originally began with a consonant, and there~
fore had the Syllabic Augment: Fepyaf-o-ya (§ 34, D.)
é-Fepyal-o-pnv ; cex-@ (§ 327, 6) é-cex-o-v. Then the consonant
was dropped: ¢-epyat-o-unv, é-ex-o-v, finally ee was regularly
contracted to « (§ 36): «ipyag-d-uny, efx-o-v.

§ 237. éoprate, I celebrate, las the Augment in the second
vowel: éapragoy for jdprafov (comp. § 37, D. 2). Verbs which
originally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with
a consonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial
vowel : dvdave, I please ; é-dvdavov ; otpéw, I make water; abéo,
IT push; dvéopa, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and
Temporal, are combined in épaa, I see, Ewpaov (Eopwv) ; dv-oly-w,
LT open, dv-éwy-o-v.

§ 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the

§ 237. Dialects—Hom. forms ewvoxder from olvoxoéw, I pour out
wine; énvdavov (Herod, édvdavov) and #vdavov from dvddve, I
please. Comp. § 34, D. 1 and 4 ;

134 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 239,

Augment immediately after the preposition: eis-pép-w, I
carry in, eis-é-pep-o-v ; mpos-ay-w, I lead to, rpos-fry-o-v ;
éx, out of, becomes ée& before the Augment: é&-fy-o-v, I
led out. The true forms of év, tn, and civ, with, altered
by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again be-
fore e: ovA-déy-w, I collect, cvv-é-Ney-0-v ; éu-Badr-o, 1
invade, év-é-BarX-o-v.

The final vowel of a preposition is elided : dr-é-ep-o-v,
I carried away, from do-ép-w; only wepi and mpo
never lose their final vowel ; but zpé is often contracted
with ¢€: mpov-Sawwov from spo-é-Bawv-o-v, I marched on.

§ 239. Excrertions.—Some verbs, which are not merely com-
pounded with prepositions, but derived from already compound
nouns (Decomposita), have the Augment at the beginning:
évayridopat (from evarrios, against), 7 apavriobpny (from oopny),
I was against 5 poet. #vapov from évaipe, I slay; mappnoragopa
(from wappnoia, freedom of speech), erappnovagsuny, I spoke
freely; but the majority nevertheless have it in the middle:
éxxAnouata, I assemble, from exxhnoua, assembly, e£exAnoiagor ;
tronretw, I suspect, from dmorros, suspicious, imamrevoy ;
xarnyopéw, I accuse, xarnyépovy (from coy). mapavoyew, I act
contrary to law (from mapd-vopos, contrary to law), has irre-
gularly mapnvdpouv (cov).

§ 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost
their distinctive meanings, that the verbs are treated as simple:
xabevdo, I sleep, éxabevdov yet xabnddoy also; xabitw, I sit,
éxabigov. Comp. the verbs tinue (dpinut, § 313), Evvyps (ap-
drévvypu, § 319, 5), far (xaOnua, § 315, 2). Some verbs
also have a double Augment: dvéyoua, I endure, qveryounv;
dvop$éo, I raise up, nvapbovy (oov); évoxdéw, I encumber,
nvaxdovy (eov) ; mapowew, I act as a drunkard, érapgvovy So
also d:airaw, J live (from diarra, mode of life), edujrav (aor);
dtaxovew, I serve, édinxdvovy, (cov).

§ 241, dus, bad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment
when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel:
dustruxéo I am unfortunate, édusrixovy (cov); duswméo, 1
make a sour face, édvsmmovv (eov); but short vowels receive
Temporal Augment after dvs: dustiperréw, I displease, dusy=
peorour (cor).

Compounds with e@ generally have no Augment: eirixouv (cor),
I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem-

“a

§ 243, CONTRACTED VERBS. 135

poral Augment after «d: ednpyérovy (cov), together with evep-
yérour, from evepyeréw, I do good.

§ 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the begin-
ning: 7Ovdpovy, from dbvpéw, I am without courage.

C.— Contracted Verbs.

§ 243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in a, ¢, or 0,
regularly contract these vowels in all forms of the
Present-Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence

§ 243. Dialects—The Ion. dial. very often does not contract;
but the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently.

A. Hom. inflects the a-Stems in three ways:

1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain
open and unchanged: do.did-er, he sings, vaerd-ovor, they dwell, and
the Fem. Part. vaerdwoa for vaverdovea, with a remarkable change
of ov to w.

2. Contraction takes place: dpera = dperd-e, he thrives, from
dperdw; mpos-nvda = mpos-nvda-e, from mpos-avddw, I address.
Sometimes ae becomes n (not a): mpos-avdnrnv (3 Dual Imperf.),
épyat—also with regular accent—(from dpd-ear) = Att. 6pa (2 Sing.
Pres. Ind, Mid.).

3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of
the same kind is inserted before the long one which results from
contraction : dpdw, I see, contracted dp@, extended 6pdo.

a) This inserted vowel is usually short. Hence éod is thus

inflected.
Act. Pr.Ind. dpd-o Att. dp Hom. dpdo

épd-eis gg: Ops » Opdas
Opd-ee yg Op » Spdg
épd-ovat. ,, dpact » OSpdace
Subj. dpd-o » ope » Opde@
épd-ns » Spas » Opaas, &e.

Opt. dpd-os 4, dp@ye » Opd@pe
Inf. dpd-ew »» Spay » Opday

Part. dpd-y » Opav » Opdov
épd-ovoa ,, dpaca » Opdoca
, Gen, dpd-ovros ,, dpavros ,, dspdwvros
Mid, 2.Sing. Ind. dépa- » pa » Opdaa
3. Pl. dpd-ovrat ,, dpa@vrae ,, spdwvrae

Opt.3. Pl. dpd-owro ,, dpovro ,, spdmvTo
. bpd-erba ,, dpacda ,, spdacdae
8. Pl. Impf. fwpu-ovro ,, éwpdvro 4 dpdwvro

136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 24s, .

are called Contracted Verbs. The laws of contraction ze
given in §§ 36-38 are observed. Paradigms of the three
verbs Tia, moéw, Sovddw are given on pp. 110-118,

Obs.—As the ¢« in the Infinitive exy is not original, aecy, oerv
do not become Gy, ov, but Gy, ovw (§ 37, Obs.).

Dialects,
b) sometimes long, e. g.
98d-ovea Att. 78aca Hom. 78 daca
from 78de, I am youthful, so also from 8pdw, I do
Spd-ovor Att. dpao. Hom. dpaact
and from prdoua, I remember
pvd-ecba Att. pvacba Hom. pyéacbas.
After long vowels the one following is sometimes shortened :-—
pva-dpevos Att, pyduevos Hom. pywdpevos
nBd-ovres ,, HBavres 4, Awovres

The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels should be long
or short. Such forms, for instance, as dperdg (““~™~), 9Bdvres
(~*~), are inadmissible,

In Herod. the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation of
the Stems in €: dpé@ (but dpas, 6pa), dpéopev, dpéovart, dpéovres.
Instead of ¢o we also find ew: dpéwvres. Hom. also has qvreov=
Att. j#vrev (from avrd-w, I meet), xpeapevos= Att. xypapevos, making
use of.

B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms,
eo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): €Ophveov, I com-
plained ; often also in Ionic contracted to ev: Hom. vedpat = Att.
véona, I return home. eov rarely becomes ev: verkevot = vetkovat,
they quarrel. ee¢ becomes n irregularly in Hom.: dpaprarnp 4
(spapréw, I meet with), awednrny (arevéo, I threaten), Soprarny
(dopréw, I sup), Inf. popnyevac = Att. hopeiv, to carry. An utterly
anomalous Infinitive is pophva..

The second ¢ in the 2 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped: puvOéat for
pudéeae (Att. pvb7, pvbei, thou sayest), madréo = Att. éwdod, thou
hadst intercourse ; sometimes ee are contracted to et: pvbeia. The
first way is usual in Herod. Hom. also prolongs ¢ to es without
contraction : verxeiw = Att. veuxad, éredeiero = Att. éreAciro (re,

I complete).

C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: yovvotpat, I supplicate,
Some have an extension like those in a: dpdéwo(v) = Att,
dpovoi(y), they plough ; dnidwev = Att. Snioiey they would destroy 5
inveovras = Att. imvoirras, the sleepers.

In Herod. o sometimes changes to e, and with o is cofitracted to
ev: edcxaievy = Att. éd:xaiovy, deemed right.

§ 245. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137

§ 244. Obs.—1. Monosyllabic Stems in ¢ admit only the com
traction et, All syllables which, contracted, would produca
another sound remain uncontracted.

Stem wre (Pres. mré, I sail, Inf. mreiv)
mréets = Aeis_ ~but mado
mréec ACL 4 mA€ovor
émdees emdeis 4, Emcor.
dé, I bind, forms an exception, having ré dodv (dor), Sodpar,
&c., to distinguish them from forms of dé, 1 am in want of,
Sei, tt is necessary, rd Séov, duty.

2. Some Stems in a have a preference for 7, which they admit in
the place of a: (a-w, I live, gis, Gh, Care, Civ; wevd-w, IT am
hungry, wewhv; dupd-o, I thirst, dupijv; so also xvd-o, I
seratch; opd-o, I stroke ; wa-w, I scrape, and xpd-opat, I make
use of.

8. pryo-w, I freeze, has and for ov and ot: Inf. pyar, Opt.
prydny.

4, Xovw, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the
connecting vowel after ov disappears: €-Aov for é-Aov-e, Aod-pat
for Xov-o-war, &c. In like manner of-o-pa: is often contracted
to oi-yat, I think, and the Impf. ¢-6-yny to o-pnv.

D.— Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal-
Stem.

§ 245. We call that part of a verb the Verbal-Stem
from the combination of which with the terminations
of persons, tenses, moods, infinitives and participles,
consistently with the laws of euphony, all the forms
of the verb may be explained: Av, Pres. Aww, Perf.
AeAvca, Fut. Wow; tTepwa, Pres. rywdw, Perf. ter/unea,
Fut. tiujow.

0bs,—From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of

the nominal suffixes : \v-c1-s, loosing ; dv-rijp, looser ; Av-rpo-v,
redemption fee ; ri-un-oi-s, valuation ; tipn-rh-s, censor,

When the Verbal-Stem cannot be traced further
back, it is called a Root: Xv, and a verb formed from
it, a Root-Verb: Avw. But when the Verbal-Stem is

§ 244, Dialects.—2. For ypyra: Herod. has xpéra.
4, Hom, 3 Sing. Imperf. Ade (for Aofe, § 35, Ube.) = Aove, Ehove,

138 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. TL a

itself a Nominal-Stem formed by means of a nominal
suffix, it is said to be derived: ripa is at once the
Nominal-Stem of ri, honour, formed by the nominal
suffix «a from the root rs, and the verb formed from
it is a derivative one: Tid.
Obs.—Roots are almost all of one syllable; derived Stems are of
two or more syllables.

§ 246. The Verbal-Stem is not always like the
Present-Stem, but the Present-Stem is frequently an
extension of the Verbal-Stem: Pres. Xeir-o, IL
Present-Stem X¢17, Verbal-Stem Aza (Aorist éduzrov).

Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ;
the Verbal-Stem divested of them is the pure Verbal-
Stem.

Obs.—Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem,
nouns are usually formed from the former, not from the latter:
Verbal-Stem vy, Present-Stem gevy, substantive guy-7
(fug-a), adj. puy-d(S)-s, fugitive,

§ 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the
Verbal-Stem produces four Classes of verbs with some
subdivisions.

1. First Crass (unenlarged).

The Present-Stem is like the Verbal-Stem.

This comprises first of all the pure verbs, ¢. ¢., verbs
whose Stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a
small number in ew, § 248), and many others besides:
Tyd-w, Sovr0-w, Travdev-w, I educate ; rv-w, I loose; ri-a,
I honour ; dpy-w, I rule; ay-, I lead; réy-0, T say.

§ 248. 2. Srconp Cass (lengthened class).

The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem,

This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a
mute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a

long vowel, as:

§ 248. Dialects—To these belongs the Hom. ceva, J hurry, from
the Stem ov,

§ 249. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 139

peiyro, I flee Pure Stem puy (Siy-4, flight, Lat. fuga)

Aein-w, I leave sa, get Nee
meid-w, I persuade ,, ,, we (miO-avd-s, persuasive)
tHx-@, I melt ao eel POM
T0tB-e, I rub ” » T7pIB

But besides these there are also six verbs in ea, viz. :

mrew, I sail Pure Stem rAv
mvéw, I blow 4, 5 mwvv

véew, I sail S fia eh
cs c

pew, I flow ss hk Be
béo, I run oe Pee OU

Xéo, I pour ” » XU

Obs.—The v of these Stems was lengthened to ev, but resolved
to eF before vowels (comp. § 35, D. 2), finally the F was
dropped : mAv-m\cvw-mAeFwo-rdéw. The diphthong appears in
the substantives unresolved: mved-pa, breath, ped-ya, stream.
Comp. § 260, 2.

§ 249. s. Turrp Crass (T-class).
The Present-Stem affixes + to the Verbal-Stem.
This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in
Labials, as
rint-a, I strike Pure Stem rum (rémos, stroke)
Bddarr-o, IT injure 4 4, BdAaB (BAGBN, injury)
Bdrr-w, I dip ” » Bad (Badn, a dip)
and besides
rixt-o, I bring forth ,, 4, rex (rékos, child)
The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here,

as in the verbs of the following class, the character. On
the changes of sound see § 45.

Other Examples.
xorrw, J cut, Stem cor
Krérro, I steal, Stem kre
kpumre, I hide, Stem kpud or xpvB
Odrrw, I bury, Stem rad (§ 54, c)

§ 249, Dialects—The Stem BraB in Hom. has a Pres. BAaBerat,
Like class 1.

140 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. -§ 250,

§ 250. 4. Fourru Crass (I-class).
The Present-Stem adds « to the Verbal-Stem [Lat.

fug-i-o, Pure Stem fug]. The « is here subject to the

various changes and transpositions discussed in §§ 55-58,
viz. :

a) The Gutturals x, y, x, form with 1, the group
oo (New-Att. rr) (§ 57):

gpvdaooe, I guard, instead of pudaxiw, Pure Stem dud ak (pudakh,

a guard)
racow, I arrange, rs TAyLo, 6 tay (rayds,
arranger)
rapaouw, I confuse, 4, Tapaxt@, yy Trapay (rapaxh,
confusion)
Other Examples.
rioow(k), I roll mpaicoa(y), I do éptoca(x), I dig

knptoow(k), 1 proclaim ohdrra(y), I slay
Obs.—The character of the Presents dppérro, I fit, maoco, I
scatter, maoow, I shape, Bpdoow, I seethe, épéoow, I row,
nricow, I stamp, Brirre, I abstract honey,—is a Dental; réooo,
J boil, has Stem mez irregularly,

§ 251. 5) 5, and more rarely y, with « form ¢
(§ 58): &€ouas, I sit, instead of éd/ouai, Pure Stem €6
(€£-os, seat, Lat. sedes); xpdafw, I ery, instead of xpayiw,
Pure Stem xkpay.

Other Examples,
ppafo(d), I say 6(o(5), I smell oxifo(d), T split
Obs.—Present-Stems in ¢ which express a sound have the Verbal
Stem in y: oreva{o, I sigh; oipelw, I wail; olpwy-h, a wailing;
moreover, oraf{w, I trickle; ori{w, I prick, Lat. in-stig-o,

§ 250. Dialects—The Stems of the Presents inacow, I whip;
Niocopat, I beseech; xopiocw, I arm; Herod. apaoce, I touch,—end
in Dentals (Air, kopv@); Hom. évicow, I blame, has irregularly
the Stem évir.

§ 251. Dialects—In all dialects Presents in -(# much more fre-
quently have a Gutturai for their character, in Hom. especially
in ddara{w, I conquer; daifo, I divide; peppnpif{o, I ponders
rodepifo, I war; orvpedifo, I strike, &e,

§ 253. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. es

paotitw, I whip, and some others. xrdfo, J call, Stem krayy,
krayy-n, & call ; rage, I mislead ; cadrife, I blow a trumpet—
havea Pure Stem in yy; vi{o, I wash, has irregularly the Stem
vip.

§ 252. ¢) X with forms XX (§ 56):
Bao, I throw, for Badio, Pure Stem Bad (Béd-os, @ shot)
@ropa, Ileap ,, ddropa ,, ,, GA [sal-i-o]
Tio, I pluck 4, TAM 4 4 TIA
Other Examples.
OidXw, Ibloom chadro, I cause to stagger srédro, I send
madro, I wield dyyéda, I announce Wd, I play on the lyre

§ 253. d) v and p throw the « into the preceding
syllable of the Stem (§ 55):
reivo, I stretch, for revo, Pure Stem rev (rédv-0-s, a stretching,
Lat. tendo)
Pbcipw, I corrupt ,, Pbepiw ,, 4, Pbep (pOop-d, corruption)
daive,I show ,, pavw ,, ,, hav (d-fiv-ns, invisible)

Other Examples.
paivopa, I rage oreipa, I sow éyeipw, I awaken
aipw, I raise dyeipa, I collect idaive, I weave

Obs.—If the Stem syllable has « or vu for its vowel, this is
lengthened by the retreating «: xptvw, I sever, judge, from
Kpiv-tw ; ctpe, I drag, from cvp-to.

A single Stem in A also follows this formation, viz. dpe, Pres.
épeiio, I owe, for dedi, to distinguish it from dpéAro, J
increase, with the same Stem.

The « unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems «av
and xAav, which then sacrifice their v (F): xa-io, I burn,
kda-io, I weep, Additional forms in Attic are kdw, krd@ (§ 35,
Obs.).

N. e De other less usual classes of verbs are given below.

§ 253. Dialects.—Hom. joins « immediately with Vowel Stems:
8a-iw, I burn, Stem Sa; pa-iowa, I seek, Stem pa; vario, I dwell,
Stem va; and he uses d6péAdq in the sense of the Att. dpeido ; but,
on the other hand he has eiAo, J press, from the Stem éA, for
which one might expect ¢\Aw (Class 4, ¢).

I7.—Tue Strrone or Seconp Aorist-STEeM.

§ 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and
Middle is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which
is like the Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases
named in § 257.

Pres. | Acin-w, J leave tunr-w, I strike | Badd-w, I throw
Stem | Air Tur Bar
Active.
Aorist| €-Aim-o-v, [left | €-ris-o-v, I struck| €-Bad-o-v, L threw}
Ind. | &Aiz-e-s €-TuT-e-s é-Bad-e-s
etc., like the Imperfects €\ewrov, érumrov, €8adhov
- |frAin-@ TUT-@ Badr-e
Subj. i aoe TUn-n-s Bad-n-s
etc., like the Pres. Subjunctive Aciza, rimre, BdAAo
Opt Aém-o1-pe TUT-Ol-p Bad-oi-p
; pata TUT-0l-s Bad-o1-s
etc., like the Pres. Optative Aeizroups, roost, Baddow
‘ Aimee TUT-€ Bad-e
Imper.|{ n-ne TUT-€-T@ Bad-€-ro
etc., like the Pres. Imper. Aetme, rumre, BadAAe
Infin. | Aer-eiv Tunr-eiy | Bad-eiv
Part. | Aur-ov, Auw-ovea, | TuT-oy, TuT-ovca, | Badt-dy, Bad-ov-
hum-dy, Gen. dur- | rur-dv, Gen. rur- | ca, Bad-dv, Gen.
6vros évTos Bad-dyros
Middle.
Inia (Sree
€-him-ov €-TUT-ov é-Bad-ov

etc., like the Imperf. cheurdyuny, erumTouny, €Badddpny

Subj. coo

Tom-o-pat
TUun-n

Bad-o-pat

Bar-y

etc., like the Pres. Subj. Acirapat, TunTro@pat, Bd\A@pat

Air-ot-o

Opt. fher-oym

TuT-ol-pny
TUT-0l-0

‘a-01-0

| Paes

etc., like the Pres. Opt. Aewroiuny, rurroipny, Baddolpny

Aumr-ov TUT~OU ‘ah-0v
Imper. ane tur-é-0 be pairs
etc., like the Pres. Imper. Aeizrov, rimrov, BadXov
Infin. | Aur-e-c ba tun-€- bat | Bad-€-c Oat
Part. | Aur-d-pevo-s, n, o-v | Tum-d-pevo-s, n, o-v| Bad-d-pevo-s, 1, 0-7

— —

§ 257. II, THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143

§ 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem
differs from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect and
Present tenses) only in the accent of the following
forms: the Infin. Act. is perispome (\u7reiv), the Infin.
Mid. paroxytone (AvwécOaz), the Part. Act. accents the
O-sound (Avr@v, Aurodca), the 2. Sing. Imper. Mid. is
perispome (Av7roD).

2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present
Middle, the meaning also of the Passive: thus
éBaddounv means only I threw for myself, but not, I was
thrown.

On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242.

§ 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such
verbs as have a Present-Stem different from the Pure
Verbal-Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First
(unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed
from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs
at all from any but Root-Verbs (§ 245).

Obs.—On the Aorists of the verbs 6/-@ and qi-o (class 1), see
§§ 316, 16, 17.

§ 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished
from the Pure Verbal Stem; viz. instead of e of the latter,
the Strong Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpen-o, I turn,
though belonging to the first class, has a Strong Aor. : érpdz-
o-v (Impf. €-rpem-o-v), é-rpam-d-ynv. An isolated formation is
Pres, rpay-o, I gnaw, Aor. ¢-rpity-o-v. dy-w, I drive, likewise
belonging to the first class, by doubling the Verbal-Stem forms
the Aorist-Stem dy-ay, whence Ind. : ify-ty-o-v, Subj. dy-ay-a,
Inf, dy-ay-civ.

§ 255. Dialects.—1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D.
extend likewise to the Strong Aorist ; 2 Sing. Subj. Badnoa, 3. Sing.
Badyot, &c. The Inf. Aor, Act. ends in Hom, also in éevw instead of
civ (Bade).

2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Steins cra (§ 316, 4), BAy
(§ 316, 19), otra (§816, 20), exceptionally have a Passive
meaning.

144 Ili. THE FUTURE-STEM.

UL—Tue Fourvure-Srem.

§ 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the Fut,
Active and Middle.

First Future Second Future
(The « Future). (Contracted Future),
Pres, | Avo, Stem AF Pres. haive, I show, Stem piv
Fut. Stem Ado Fut. Stem dave
Active.
Indic. | Afo-w, I shall loose pivéw, a, I shall show
Avo-ers, &e. hive-eis, eis, &e.
like the Pres. Avo like the Present roo
Opt. | Avo-or-ps pave-oiny, oiny
Infin, | Avo-euw pavé-eu, ely
Part. | Mase. \tio-wv pave-wr, Gy
Fem. Ato-ovca pavé-ovea, odoa
Neut. \do-ov pave-or, oop
Gen. Avo-ovros cpavé-ovros, ovvros
Middle.
Indic. | Avo-o-pa, I shall loose for | avé-o-par, odpat, I shall
myself appear
like the Present Avoupa | like the Present rrotoduat
Opt. | Avo-ol-pnv pave-oi-uny, olwny
Infin. | Avo-e-c Oar cbave-e-c bat, cio Oat
Part. | Avo-d-pevos, n, ov chave-d-pevos, ovpevos, , OV

§ 257. Dialects—Hom., in the case of several Stems with p, forms
the Strong Aorist by metathesis (§ 59), and by changing ¢ into a:
d€px-o-pat, I see, €-Spax-ov ; épO-w, I destroy, ¢-mpi6-o-v; in others
by the syncope of « (§ 61, c): e-arr-d-pqy (rér-opc, I fly), €~yp-e-ro
(Stem éyep, Pres. class 4, d, éyeipw, I awake); Part. dyp-d-pevot,
assembled ; Inf. dyep-orOau (Pres. class 4, d, dyeipo).

Reduplication occurs in Homer in a great many Aorists: é-mé-
ppad-o-v (Stem pad, Pres, class 4, b, ppdto, I indicate) ; wé-1t6-o-v
(Stem wt6, Pres. class 2, See I persuade); we-nid-av (Pres.
class 4, c, mdddo, I brandish); Aor. Mid. 3 Sing.: re-rdpm-e-t0

§ 260. I. THE FUTURE-STEM. 145

§ 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future-Stem is the
same as that of the Present-Stem, ¢.¢., that of the
o Future is the ordinary Inflexion, that of the con-
tracted future is the Inflexion of the contracted Present
of e Stems (§§ 231, 232, and 243),

§ 260. The o Future forms the Future-Stem by
adding o to the Verbal-Stem: Av, Ave. All Stems
ending in a vowel or a mute have the o Future, The
o, according to § 48, with gutturals makes & with
labials yy, and admits of no dentals before it (§ 49):
ay-o, I drive, Fut. af-; ypdad-w, I write, Fut. ypay-o ;
do-a, I sing, Fut. do-w; o7évd-w, libo, Fut. o7reic-w
for omevd-cw (§ 50). About Opéyw, Stem rped,
Giro, Stem trv¢, and others, see § 54,

2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248)
retain the extended Stem also in the Future: Xeiz-a,
Achy-w; the six verbs in ew mentioned in § 248 show
their strengthened form in the Fut., though it is not
seen in the Present: wAéw, wAevcouar; in like manner
kXaiw brings out its Pure Stem «rXav in xravca, and
Kai@ in Kavow (§ 253). About yéw, see § 265.

8. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of
the fourth or I class (§ 249, &c.), the Pure Stem must be
found in order to form the Future: riéarw (class 4), Pure
Stem ru, Fut. rio; gvdrdcow, Pure Stem durak,

(répr-o-pat, I rejoice); Stem rd (class 2), PeiSopat, Inf. Aor.
me-id-€-cba, also Fut. me-did-n-couat. Isolated Aorists are:
€-ké-x(e)A-e-T0, he called, from KéXopar; mé-dv-o-v, I killed (Stem
ev); ré-rpy-0-v (I hit, Stem rep); re-ray-wy (seizing, Stem ray,
Lat. tango). iv-in-tim-o-v (I scolded, Pres. évinrw) along with
év-évirr-o-v, and npux-ix-o-v (1 kept back, Pres. épixw) have the
reduplication in the middle of the word.—The reduplication in this
case everywhere belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Perfect-
Stem (§ 273), is preserved in ail the moods, in the Infin., and the
Participle. ‘The Indic. may add the Augment or omit it before the
teduplication.. (§ 234, D.)
§ 259. Dialects.—About the contraction, see § 243, D.
L

a
146 M1, THE FUTURE-STEM. $26,

Fut. dvrako; dpdtw, Pure Stem ¢pad, Fut. éodaia = ah

Accordingly, verbs ending in the Present in -co@ or
-77@ generally make the Fut. in -fw, and those having
the Present in & generally have their Future in -ca.

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of
lccw, I roll; xknpicow, I proclaim; mpaccw, I do;
oxife, I split; Sinatwo, I judge; omritw, I arm; and
let the Presents be found to the Futures dpigo, opako,
Sidcopat, Noyicomat.

Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present
in -cow or -rT@ naturally (§ 250, Obs.) make the Future
in -cw: TAdow (Pres. trrAdoow, I shape), appoow (Pres.
apyorre, I fit); and, on the other hand, those with the
character yy, which have the Present in -f@ (§ 251, Obs.)
make their Future in -fo: orevdéw (Pres. orevato, I
sigh), ori—w (Pres. otifw, I prick).

§ 261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before o;
a becomes a if preceded by e¢, , or p (§ 41), in all other
cases it becomes 7. Every other short vowel is changed
into the corresponding long one: éd-w, I leave, édo-w ;
id-onat, I heal, ido-opa; Spd-w, I do, Spac-w; but
Tipa-w, Tyino-w; Boa-w, I ery out, Bojo-opar; éyyva-o,
I hand over, éyyvjc-w; Tové-w, Towjo-w, Sovdde,
Sovrac-w.

The Stem ypa (xpac, I give an oracle; ypaopat, 1
use) exceptionally has 7 in the Future: ypijcw, ypnoopar;
whereas axpoaopat, I listen, has axpodcopat.

Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301.

§ 262. The contracted Future forms the Future-Stem

§ 261. Dialects—The Ion. dial. has » even after ¢, 1, p;
retpyjcopat, I shull endeavour. The Ep. dial. sometimes doubles thie
@ when the vowel is short: aidiéacopa (aidéopar, I feel shame).
The Hom. Futures d\ardéw, rorepiéo, orvpeAi~o, and others with
their Presents in -{w are explained in § 251, D.

§ 262. Dialects.—Stem Gep has in Hom. the Fut. Oépeopas, Pres.

bépopa, I grow warm; Stem xep (Pres. class 4, d, xeipo, I shave),
Fut. xépow; Stem dup, Pres. drpe, J mix, Fut. pipow.

~s
‘

§ 264, Ill, THE FUTURE-STEM. 147

by adding ¢ to the Verbal-Stem: ¢av, dave. This
form of the Future occurs in Stems ending in A, p, », p;
and the Stem vowel is short: veuw, I distribute, Fut.
vena; apive, I defend, apivd. Verbs of the seventh
class here show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253): Barra,
I throw, BO; hair, davd; xteivo, I kill, xreva;
Plcipw, POcpPa; ayyédrw, ayyero.

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of
oparrw, I cause to fall; atéd\d\o, I send; patvopa, 1
rave; aipw, I lift; and the Present (class 4) of o7epa,
TOLKIAM, ONMAVO, 75vVv0).

Exceptions.—The Stems xed (keAXa, class 4, c, I knock against)
and xvp (xupéw, I meet) have the o@ form of the Future:
KEACH, KPT.

Obs.—The contracted Future is properly a peculiar form of the
o Future, for davé-w has arisen from dav-é-c-w (§ 61, 6), in
which ¢ is the connecting vowel.

§ 263. Several Stems in e (Pres. ew), ad (Pres. af),
and 16 (Pres. fw), throw out the ¢ in the Future. Those
in ¢ and aod then contract the vowels e and a with the
connecting vowel: tedé-w, I complete, redéo-w, TEréw,
TA®; 1 Plur. teréopwev, TEeMoD ev (as in the Present) ;
BiBavw, I bring, BiBdo-w, BiBdw, BiBO; 1 Plur.
BiBdopev, Bi8Hpev. To these also belongs éAdw, ra,
2 Sing. Ads, 3 Sing. €dd, from the irregular Present
éravve, I drive; comp. § 321, 2.

Stems in 6 after dropping the o insert ¢, which is
contracted with the connecting vowel: xoyifw, I carry,
Put. Act. copic-w, copi-é-w, kope@, 1 Plur. copcéoper,
Kopwoduev; Fut. Mid. coprodpac.

This form of the Future is called the Attic.

§ 264. Some verbs take an ¢ after the o of the Future,
which is contracted with the connecting vowel: wvéw, 1
breathe, Stem vv, rvevoodpat; mréw, L sail, Stem 7d v,

§ 268. Dialects—The Futures in aw in the Hom. dial. are treated
exactly like the Presents (§ 243 D. A.), hence éAdw, eAdgs, eAdg.

A —.. erase oe =

ee ee a iq “a a8
* ’ ore a

Trevoodpar along with mrevoouar; hevyo, Tf :
guy, gevEoduar and devEoua. This kind of
which occurs only in the Middle voice with an Acti
meaning is called the Dorie. al

§ 265, Few verbs form their Future without
tense sign: yéo, I pour, Fut. Act. yéo, Mid. yéou e
and so also among the irregular verbs éouat, I she
eat (§ 327, 4), and winnie I shall drink (§ 321, oe

§ 266. The Future Middle generally has a Mi
sense, but in many verbs it has a Passive, and no
a few an Active meaning; the last is the case
cially in verbs denoting a bodily activity: de, I
axovw, I hear; aravraw, I meet; aroraio, IT
Badifo, I walk (Bassvodpar) ; Bode, I call out; 3 ye
I laugh; oipégfw, I bewail; cvyaw and cwrda, I
silent ; cmovdatw, I am zealous. Irregular verbs (8
&c.) very frequently have a Middle Future with A
meaning.

era
in
§ 265. Dialects,—The Hom. Beioua or Beopat, J shall Vive akin to
B.dw, I live, is likewise formed without a tense sigu.

§ 267.

IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM.

149.

IV.—TusEe WEak, or First Aorist-Srem.

§ 267. From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are
formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle.

Pres. dv-@ paiv-w
. Stem. Av Pure Stem dav
1. o Form. 2. Supplementary Form.
Stem of Weak Aorist Adaa | pnva
Active. Middle. Active. Middle.
Indicative. | €-Avoa, €-huod-pyy, I | €-dyva, €-bnva-pnv
I loosed loosed formyself| IL showed
é-Avoa-s €-hicw é€-bnva-s €-pnve
€-huce(v) é-\vaa-To é-cbyve(v) e-pyva-ro
€-vord-pe-Oov €-pyva-pe-Oov
é-\voa-Tov €-hivza-cOov | €-dpnva-rov e-pjva-o Oov
€-\vod-tTnv €-hvad-cOnv | é-yvd-ryy €-cpnva-o Onv
€-voa-pev €-Avod-peba =| -€-cpnva-pev e-nva-pe-Oa
€-hvca-Te €-di'ca-obe é-bnva-re ée-piva-abe
€-\voa-v é-hvoa-vTo é-bnva-v €-pnva-vro
Subj unct. ica Avow-pat pve pnve-uae
Avons vor pnryns pnyn
etc., like the Pres. Act. and Mid.
Optative. Avoai-pt Avoai-pny dyvai-pe pnvai-pny
Avoa-s OF Avoai-o pnva-s or nvai-o
Avoevas onvevas
hvoat OF Avoai-To gnvat or pyvat-ro
hicrere(v) Avorai-pebor bnvere(v) nvai-pebov
Avoa-Tov Avoa-obov pyvai-rov pnvai-o bov
Aveai-rnv Aveai-cOnv yvai-rnv nvai-cOnv
Avoa-pev Avoai-peba pnvat-pev pnvai-peda
Avoa-re Avoa-obe pyvai-re pnva-obe
Aveat-ev OF Avoat-vro pnvat-ev or pyvai-vro
hvoet-av pnvet-ay >
Iinperat, | Adoo-v Adoat jvo-v pnvat
Avod-Te Avod-7ba dnva-re dnva-cbe
Avoa-rov Avoa-c boy yva-rov nva-obov
= Avod-Tev Avod-c bor nvd-rev pnva-cbav
: hica-re voa-o be nva-re pnva-obe
; Avod-vrovor | Avod-cOwv or | dyvd-vrev or | dyvd-cOwv or
Aved-rocav =| Avod-cOwoary | dynvd-racay pnva-cbwcav
nfinit, | Avoae Avea-c Oat pjva pnva-cOat
Part. Avea-s, doa, av| Avod-pevo-s, | pyva-s,doa, av| pnvd-pevo-s,
Gen. Avoavt-os n, o-v yvarr-os n, O-v.

.

150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM, § 268 2

§ 268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of —
the Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act.
becomes ¢, but everywhere else remains unch
before the personal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is
lengthened to w and », whereby the endings become the
same as those of the Present. In the Optat. Act. the
forms with ev in the 2 and 3 Sing. and 3 Plur. are more
common than those with as: Avcevas, AUcere(v), AoeLav.
In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. v is added by which the a
is rendered so obscure as to become o: Adco-v; and in
2 Imp. Mid. « is added which with the a makes az. In
the 2 Sing. Ind. Mid. ¢ is thrown out as in the Pres.
and Fut., so that @Avca(c)o becomes éAvow according
to § 37.

Obs. 1.—Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing.
Opt. Act., the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid.; but in
accent they differ, for as the at of the Optat. is regarded as long
(§ 229), the first of these three forms is always paroxytone:
Avoat, yoda (ypadha, I write), raketoa (wadevw, 1 educate);
the Infinit. always has the accent on the penultimu: Adoat,
madedoa, ypaya; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible,
has the accent on the antepenultima: maidevoat, Adoat, ypayat.

Obs. 2.—The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor.-Act. is the same
in form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. Adcov, but in Verbal-Stems of
more than one syllable it differs from it by the accent: mai-
Seveov, but the Neut. Part. Fut. is rawdedcov (§ 229).

§ 269. The o form of the Aorist differs from the Stem

§ 268. Dialects—In the Jon. dial. the 2 Sing. Indic. Mid. fre-
quently leaves the vowels uncontracted: €Aveao.

Some Aorists in Hom. take the vowels o and e instead of a: f£ov,
I came, tées; ¢Bioero (Baivw, I walk); dicero (he set or went down,
8%@); so also the Imperatives Spoco, arise; dere, bring; oice,
bring; \ێeo, lie down; meAdooeroy=meddcaror, from mehdgo, 1
approach,

§ 269. Dialects —dgiccw, I draw water, has in Hom. the Fut.
advéa, but the Aor. aguveca. Irregular Hom. forms without @ are:
éxeva for éxevoa, from Pres. xéo, J pour ; éxna, 1 Plar. Subj. xnoper
or xetopev, Imperat. xijov or xeiov, Inf. «jac or xeiat, from Pres, xaio,
T burn; Stem xav (Att. &avoa); fooeva, Pres. cevo, I drive

eo

§270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 151

of the Future only by the addition of the a: Awe, Avca;
ypar, ypawa; pura, durata. Respecting the change
of yowels and consonants before o, comp. §§ 260, 261.
The irrezular yéw (§ 265) has the Aorist éyea for éyevca.
Comp. the irregularity in efza, I spoke; jveyxa, I bore,
§ 327, 12 and 13.

§ 270. The Stems in 2, p, v, p, forming their Future
without o reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist,
which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the
vowel of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for
the loss of the c.

after: and p becomes @: Pres. wepaive (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem
mwepay, Fut. wepaive, Aor. é-mépava (§ 41),

otherwise n: Pres. daiva (class 4, d), Stem dav, Fut.
pave, Aor. €-dnva.
€ becomes e.: Pres. dyyé\X\@ (class 4, c), I announce,

Stem dyyed, Fut. dyyed@, Aor. ifyyetha.

» Pres. vepw (class 1), J distribute, Fut.
ven@, Aor. €-veia.

t: Pres. xpwe (class 4, d), I judge, Stem
kptv, Fut. kpivo, Aor. €-xpwa.

i 2 d: Pres. dutve (class 4, d), I defend, Stem
dpuv, Fut. duiva, Aor. jpuva.

Obs.—The Stems dp (aipa, I lift) and &d (GAAopa, I leap) have
in the Indicat. » because of the Augment: jpa, jAdunv, but in

the other forms a: dpas, dAdpevos. a instead of q occurs in

ed
3

away ; the Infinitives ddevacOat or ddéucba, to avoid; dSaréacba,
from Saréopa, I distribute.

toa, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist, the Hom. Inf. is éecat,
Part. eicas and €acas (dvécas), 3 Sing. Mid. é€ocaro. _ On the
doubling of the o see § 261, D. Adeava QoF-e-ooa) = €Xovga (ovo,
i wash), with ¢ inserted. (Comp. § 35, Obs.)

§ 270. Dialects.—1. Homer makes the Aor. of several Stems in
A, # ¥, p With o: €Aca from cio, I press; the defective dmdepoa,
I tore away.

2. In the Aeol. dial. ¢ is assimilated to preceding A, p, v, p; an
example of it in Hom. is dpedda for SpedA-ca = Att. Specra, Pres.
éperro, I increase,

3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. feipa, Pres, etpw, I join, is
quite irregular, Comp, § 275, D. 2.

152 iv. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 271.

some few verbs: xepdaivw, I gain; dpyaive, I cause anger ;
onpaive, I indicate—éojpaiva along with éonpyva. On the
other hand y instead of a, in spite of the p, occurs in rerpaive
IT bore, érérpnva.

§ 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all
verbs which, according to § 256, cannot form the Strong
Aorist, that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of
the first class; but radical verbs of other classes, espe-
cially those with Stems in A, p, v, p, also have the Weak
Aorist.

The Weak Aorist Middle like the Strong one has
only a Middle sense and is neyer Passive (§ 477, &c.).

V.—Tue PERFECT-STEM.

§ 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfeet
and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future
(Futurum exactum) which occurs only in the Middle.

§ 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-
Stem is the reduplication (comp. wé-rny-a with Lat.
pe-pig-t), which generally takes the first place, but in
verbs compounded with prepositions is~ put, like the
Augment, after the preposition (§ 238): AéAv-«a, but
€x-é-vK-a.

The reduplication belongs to the Perfect-Stem, and
is therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the
moods, infinitives, and participles (comp. 258 D).

In verbs beginning with a consonant it consists in the
initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem:
Stem Av, Perf.-Stem Aerv, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act.
Né-Av-Ka.

§ 273. Dialects—The reduplication cannot, like the Augment, be
omitted in the Epic dial.; Séy-ya: forms an exception (3 Plur.
d€x-ara), though we also find d€-d8ey-pa, I expect, or receive, Part.
de-dey-pévos, from Pres. d¢x-o-par (comp. § 316, 84). Some verbs
beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the
New-lonic dialect,

Vv. THE PERFECT-STEM.

I, Active.

Present Av-o@

Stem Av

Perfect Stem AeAv
Perfect: 1. Weak form

$e

ure Stem dav
mepny

2. Strong form

Indic. | AeAv-x-a, I have loosed weé-pny-a, I have appeared
Aé-v-K-a-s mé-cnv-a-s
_ | Aé€-Av-K-e-(v) mé-pnv-e(v)
Ne-AU-k-a-Tov qwe-bnv-a-Tov
Ae-Av-K-a-Toy we-pnv-a-rov
Ae-Av-K-a-pev me-cpnv-a-pey
Ne-Av-K-a-Te me-pnv-a-Te
Ae-Av-K-G-ot(v) me-pny-a-or(v)
Subj. Ae-Av-K-w me-pnv-@
Ae-AvU-K-y-s me-ny-n-s
etc., like the Subj. Pres. § 2382
Opt. | Ae-Av-k-o1-pe OF AeAvKoinv | re-pnv-o1-pe OY mehnvoiny

etc., like the Opt. Pres. § 232

j Imperat.| Aé-du-k-e

mé-cpnv-e

ete., like the Imp. Pres. § 232

| Infin, ae me-cpnv-evat
Part. M. e-Av-K-ds me-pnv-as
F. e-Av-x-via me-nv-via
N. Ae-Av-x-ds mre-yv-ds
Gen. de-dv-x-dr-os me-cpny-dt-os
(Inflexion, § 147, 2)
Pluperfect.
Indic, | é-e-dv-x-er-v, I had loosed e-rre-pyv-ei-v, 1 had appeared

é-e-AU-k-€1-s

*
€-he-AU-K-€4
é-Ne-AU-K-€1-TOV
> ,
€-e-u-k-€i-THV
> *
€-he-h0-K-€1-pe
> ’
€-Ne-AU-K-€1-TE
€-he-v-x-e-cray or EAeAiKEtoan

> ,

€-rre-cpnv-e-s

é-e-pyy-es

€-rre-cpnv-€l-Tov

> ,

€-rre-chnv-el-

Sore’

€-7re-chnv-€t- ev
e-rre-pnv-et-Te

é-rre-ny-e-cav OY erepnveroay

153

a
1s ah

154 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. an
II. Middle and Passive, Py
* '
Perfect. |
Indic. | A€-Av-par, I have | de-Av-peOov Ae-Ab-peBa
loosed for myself,
or have been loosed
Aé-Av-crae Aé-Av-o bow Aé-v-obe
Aé-Av-rae Aé-Av-c ov hé-Avu-vrat
Subj. Ae-v-pévos, S, ys, 7, &c., § 315
Opt. he-Av-pevos einy, eins, ein, &e., § 315
Imper. | A€-Av-co Aé-Av-c ov hé-u-obe
he-Av-o bo Ae-Av-c bay Ae-Av-cOwy or
Ae-Av-c Oworav
Infin. | Ae-Avd-c Bae
Part. Ae-Au-pévos, 9, o-v
Pluperfect.
Indic, | €-de-Av-pnv, I had | €-de-i-peOov €-e-hv-peOa
loosed for myself,
or had been loosed
€-X€-Av-co é-hé-hv-cbov €-hé-hu-obe
€-hé-hv-To €-he-dv-c On €-hée-Lu-vto
Future Perfect.
Indic. Xe-Ado-o-pa, I shall have been loosed
Ae-v-o-n, &c., like the usual Fut. Mid. (§ 258)
Opt. X<e-Av-o-ol-pyy Inf. Ae-Avo-e-c Bae Part. Xe-Avo-d-pevo-s

§ 274. The following points, however, are to be

observed :

§ 274. Dialects.—The full reduplication, in spite of the initial p,
occurs in the Hom. fe-put@-pévo-s, soiled; on the other hand, the
Perfects €u-pop-a (Pres. peipopa, class 4, d, I obtain) and €o-c¥-pat
(Pres. cevw, class 2, I hasten), instead of pépopa, c€ovpat, are treated

like Stems with p.

‘2a
a -§ 275, V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 155

1. An aspirate, according to § 53 a, is represented
by the corresponding tenuis: Stem, ywpe, ywpd, I
retreat, xe-yopn-xa; Stem Ov, Ova, I sacrifice, ré-Ou-Ka;
Stem dav, ré-pyr-a.

2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the
first appears in the reduplication, and even this only
when it is a mute followed by A, p, v, or p: Stem ypad,
ypadbo, I write, yé-ypad-a; Stem ray, TANcocw, I
strike, mwé-mAny-a; Stem mvv, wvéw, I breathe, wé-
TVEU-Ka.

8. In every other case a Stem beginning with two
consonants takes only e for its reduplication: Stem
erev, xreivo, I kill, &-«rov-a; Stem Snre, Sn7a, I seek,
€-fnT9-Ka.

4, Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after
which the p is doubled: Stem pro, pirte, I throw,
&p-pid-a (comp. §§ 62, 234).

Exceptions.—Verbs beginning with yy, yA, and sometimes those
beginning with BA, have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem
yve, &-yve-xa, I have come to know; Stem Bracre (Braord, I
germinate), é-B\dorn-xa. The Stems xra (xrapa, I acquire)
and pva, on the other hand, have xé-«ry-pas and pé-pvn-pat,

¢ I remember, me-min-i. Comp. wé-rrw-xa, I have fallen, and

me-rra-pat, I am spread out, §§ 319. 8, 827. 15.

Instead of the reduplication « appears in ei-Anp-a, I have taken
(§ 322. 25), et-Anx-a, I have obtained (§ 322. 27), et-Aoya (from
eyo, I gather), 8:-ei-dey-par (from Scadéyoua, I converse),
et-py-xa, I have said (§ 327.13), and in the papirated €l-pap-Tat,
it ts futed, Stem pep.

§ 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of»

§ 275. Dialects.—1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in
Homer, as: dp-npo-ra from dpdw, I plough; dd-ddn-pat, from add-
o-pa, I wander ; ap-np-a, I am joined, Stem dp; 65-wd-a, I smell,
6(a, comp. od-or; dn-wr-a, I have seen, from the Stem ém; and
with a y inserted : ¢uv-jpyv-xa, from the Pres. juv-w, J droop the head.
—Herod. has dp-aipy-xa from aipéw, I take,

2. Instead of et-wa Hom. also has ¢-w6a, which is the only form
_ used by Herod. From the Stem éAm (originally Fem) é-oAn-a, 1

hope; from Stem épy (Fepy) ¢-opy-a, J have done. From the Stem
ép (Lat. sero), Pres. eipw, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. éepro, Part. Perf,

156 V. THE PERFECT-STEM.

the Temporal Augment (§ 235): Stem dp 00, 50, i

raise up, bores. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have

ei here also: eiAvypas, Pres. éXiccw, I roll.

1, Some Stems beginning with a, ¢, or o exceptionally take what
is called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening
of the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel
with its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of
the second syllable being lengthened : Stem drip (aeipa,
class 2, J anoint), dd-ndup-a ; Stem do, dxovw, I hear, ax-qKo-a
(for axnxofa, § 35. Obs.), but Mia Kovo pat 5 Stem épv x (épieca,
class 4, J dig) 6 dp-@pitx-a ; Stem dyep (dyeipw, class 4, d, T col-
lect) dy-nyep-Ka; Stem éda (Pres. edavve, I drive, § 321, 2)
€h-7Ali-xa, Mid. €A-yAa-war ; Stem édeyx, Pres. deyxo, I refute
(class 1), Perf. Mid. €d-7dey-par (comp. § 286, Ubs.); éyp-
nyop-a, I am awake, from the Stem éyep, Pres. éyeipw, I awaken
(class 4, @), is irregular. F

2. The Stems dr@ (dAicxopa, § 324.17, I am made prisoner),
dy (ayvum, § 319, 13, J break), eix (not used in the Pres.,
§ 317. 7), and ave (dvéopa, J buy) are likewise irregular; but
originally they had an initial consonant (§ 384. D): é-ddo-xa,
€-Gy-a, €-o1k-a, €-@vn-par; the Stem dvoty (dvolya, I open) has
dy-éwy-a. To these may be added ¢i-w6-a, I am accustomed,
from the Stem ¢6, originally Fe @ (comp. §§ 236, 237).

1. The Perfect Active.

§ 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are
appended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative by
means of the connecting vowel a. The first person has
no personal ending at all; in the third a is

into e. The Subjunctive, Optative, and the Imperative —

(which rarely occurs) have the vowels of the Present ;
the Infinitive ends in -évas (always paroxytone), and
the Participle in -#s, -via, -ds, Gen. -dros (Stem o7,
§ 188).

Mid. éeppévos (comp. § 270, D. 8). The following two are defective
Perfects in Hom. Siioabece’. it gushes forth, ér-ivob-akah. it is ay
Both also occur as Pluperfects.

§ 276. Dialects.—In the Hom. dial. the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes
has » instead of 0: reOvnaros = Att. reOvyxdros ‘from Ovycxo, 1
die); xexdnyares for xexdyydres, calling, from Pres. nad{w.

——

ir

Se ees

§ 278. THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 157

Obs.—The Subjunctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed
periphrastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms
of eipi, I am,

§ 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different
_ ways:
1, Tue Strona Perrect (SeconD PERFECT)
is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem :
Stem mpay, Pres. (Class 4, a) tpdcow, I do, Perf.
mé-rpay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist,
occurs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs
(§ 245), and is generally the older and rarer form,

§ 278. The following changes of vowels are to be
observed in its formation:

& after p becomes G: Stem pity, Pres. xpdtw, J )
scream, Perf. xé-Kpady-a
& otherwise becomes 7: Stem mdiy, Pres. mAjooo, I
strike, Perf. mé-mdny-a
Stem div, Pres. gaivo, I
show, Perf. mé-pny-a Comp.
7: becomes o: Stem orped, Pres. orpépw, I [§ 40 to § 43.
: turn, Perf. €-orpod-a

‘ » ao: Stem Aiz, Pres. Aelia, I leave,
Perf. X€-Nour-a
v te ev: Stem dvy, Pres. hevya, I flee,

Perf. wé-hevy-a

The change of &@ into w is quite isolated: Stem pay,
Perf. &6-pay-c, I am torn, Pres. pyyvi-pe (§ 319, 24), and
§ 277-280. Dialects—The Hom. dial. is partial to the Strong Per-
fect ; the aspiration does not occur in it: Stem kom (kdmrTw), Kexomras.
The Part. re-gug-dr-es, from Stem Puy (pevyw) is quite an isolated
Hom. form. Hom, forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems,
and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms: Stem dv, 3
Plur. Perf. Act. mevdor = Att. reixaor, from dio, I beget ; Stem
kore (xoréw, I am angry), Part. Perf. cexornas, § 317, D. In the
Fem, Part. Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur: Stem dp, Mase.
Part. Perf. dp-np-ds, joined, Fem. dp-tip-via; Stem Oar (OddrAo, 1
bloom), Mase. Part. Perf. re-@nd-as, Fem. re-Oid-via. The Perf.
ré-rpnx-a, 1 am restless, Pres, rapdoow, I disturb, Stem r[a]pax, is

158 V. THE PERFECT-STEM.

go also that of ¢ into w: Stem €0, Perf. Luba | bet F

accustomed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and Rs

in some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the —

vowel: Stem dpiry, dp-wpiy-a, Pres. dpvcocw, I dig; ye-
ypag-a, from ypada, L write.
§ 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants «, y, 7-8

change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally
without any lengthening of the vowels:

Stem xnpux, Pres. xnptoce, I proclaim, Perf, RE-KHPUX-a

» &Y; » aya, I lead, x» xa (aynox-a)
93 Kon, » konto, I hew, 9 -ké-Kodp-a
» BAB, 4 PBrdmra, I hurt, »» Bé-Pruig-a

In spite of the aspiration the vowels are changed in
Ké-Krop-a, Stem «rez, Pres. créwta, I steal ; wé-rropp-a,
Stem wey, Pres. wéumw, I send; rérpod-a, Stem
tpem, tpéro, I turn, which is in form the same as the

Perf. of the Stem tped (Pres. tpépw, I nourish); —

ei-hoy-a (comp.§ 274), Stem rey, Pres. Aéyw, I gather.

Obs. 1.—Few verbs have both forms with and without the aspi-
rate: the Stem spay (Pres. rpdcow, J do) has both mé-rpay-a
(intransitive, I have fared) and mé-mpay-a (transitive, 7 have
done) ; Stem dvovy, Pres, dvotye, I open, Perf. av-€gy-a (intrans.
I stand open) and dv-éx-a (transit. J have opened). —

2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs
also in a number of derivative verbs: StemdAday, dd\dAdooa, I
change, from GdXos, Perf. 7AXax-a,

§ 280. 2. Tue Weak Perrect (First PErrect)

is formed from the Stem by the insertion of «: Stem Av,
né-Av-x-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form,
and with all Vowel-Stems it is the only one in use,
while it is the more common with Stems ending in 7, 6,
@, and those in A, p, v, p.

Obs.—The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem bp

prose is dxyxoa (§ 275. 1); but comp. § 317,

§ 281. In regard to the vowel the Weak Perfect follows

the o Future (§§ 260, 261): Stem Spa, Spdcw, d¢-8pa-xa;

$283, THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. ‘159

Stem tipa, tyjow, tetiunxa; Stem rv, wrEvVTw, Té-
mrevea; Stem weO (reiOw, I persuade), weicw, wéreixa.
xéo, I pour, Perf. xéyixa, is an exception (§ 265). For
other exceptions see § 301.

Stems in 7, 6, 6, throw out these consonants before a
without any other change: Stem xowsd, xouitw, I carry,
xexopixa.

§ 282. The monosyllabic Stems in A, », p, having e in the Stem
syllable, change this e in the Weak Perf. into a: Stem oreA,

* oredda, / send, Perf. €-crad-xa; Stem pep, Pbcipw, I destroy,
Perf. €-p@ap-ca. Several in v throw out they: Stem xpty,
kpive, J judge, Perf. xé-pi-xa ; Stem xXtv, kriva, I incline, Perf.
ké-kNi-xa ; Stem wrAvv, mrAvvo, J wash, Perf. ré-7rt-na; Stem
rev, teivw, I stretch, Perf. ré-ra-xa. Wherever vy is not thrown
out before x, it becomes according to § 51 a nasal y: Stem
har, paiva, I show, Perf. stihayeca!

Other Stems of this kind and some in p anit of metathesis
(§ 59): Stem Badr, Barro, I throw, Perf. Bé-Bdy-x-a; Stem
Kap, kdpyo, I grow tired, Perf. Pea eet (§ 321. 9).

2. The Pluperfect Active.

§ 285. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the
Perfect-Stem ; its terminations are those of the his-
torical tenses. Between the Stem and the termination
the diphthong e« steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is
reduced to e.

Obs.—The 3 Plur. in ecoay is rare and more modern,

The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a
vowel is not recognisable, because their Perfect-Stem

§ 282. Dialects —The Hom. pé-pSdo-xa for pé-pdw-xa, from the
Stem pod (Aor. guodov, I went) is explained by metathesis. Comp.
§§ 51, D., 324, 12.

§ 283. Dialects,—The Tonic dial. has the antiquated endings of the
Pluperf.: 1 Sing. ea, 2 Sing. eas, 8 Sing. ee(v), contracted e, eww or

9; the 2 Plur, New-Ion. ea-re. Hom. ére-Orjnr-ea, J was astonished ;
3 Sing. dedeumvyjxewv, from deurvéw, I dine.

é-peunk-ov (Perf. pepnxa, I bleat) and fvwyov along with jveyea
(Perf. Gvwya, I compel) are formed quite irregularly according to the
manner of Imperfects.

160 V. THE PERFECT-STEM.

has already a long vowel: Verbal-Stem ay, ayo, I ane al
Perfect-Stem Hy, Hy-erv. The Syllabie Augment is
often omitted. The 1 and 3 Sing. in the older Attic Bs
dialect has 7 instead of ev and e-v, as é-NeAUK-H.

The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same
as that of the Perfect, and like it it is either strong or
weak, and has the vowel long or short or unchanged,

~§ 284. 3. The Perfect Middle and Passive

can be formed only in one way, that is, by appending
the personal endings of the principal tenses of the
Middle, without any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-
Stem, z.e. to the reduplicated Verbal-Stem: Stem Av,
Perf. M. Xé-Av-par.

The Infinitive and the Participle always have the
accent on the penultima: AeAvcPar, AeAvpévos; Stems
mavdev, temadedc0at, from mavdevo, I educate,

§ 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in
the Weak Perfect: Stem tema, reriunxa, TeTipnpat;
Stem 710, réreixa, wérercpar; Stem POep, EpOapxa,
&pOapnar; Stem Bar, BéBrnxa, BEBAnpwat. The verbs
tpépw, I nourish, tpérw, I turn, and otpéda, LT turn,
also take a instead of €; te-Opay-yat, TéTpap-pat,
é-oTpap-pat.

§ 286. The final Consonants of consonantal-Stems
change according to the general laws of sound (§§45-49):

§ 284. Dialects.—In the Hom. dial. the o of the 2 Sing. Perf. and
Pluperf. Mid. issometimes thrown out between two vowels: pépyyas
= pepynoa (meministi), contracted pépry; so also in the New-lonis
the Imperat. pépveo for péeprnoo.

§ 285. Dialects—The Hom. wé-rpa-ra, Stem mop (Strong Ade
éxopov, I gave) is explained by metathesis. The following have a
short vowel: rérvypa, from reixe, vi prepare, 3 Plur. reredyaras ;
nepvypévos from dhevyw, J flee; € footpat from oevo, I hasten;
instead of ev: me-mvi-pa, from mvéw, § 248.

§ 286. Dialects—The 6 of the Stem xopvO (xopicow, I arm)
remains unchanged in Hom.,: xe-xopv6-pévos, aicxive, I put to
shame, has Sor yupput: i

jac et a

$287. THE PERFECT MIDDLE. | 161

1. Before all terminations beginning with »

every guttural becomes y: Stem mAex, mrékw, I twist, wé-wrey-par

» dental » o: Stem ri, reidw, I persuade, re-reic-peba

» _ labial » p: Stem ypad, ypada, I write, ye-ypap-pévos.

Obs.—When a guttural or labial is preceded by a nasal, the latter
is thrown out before »: Stem capa, xauara, I bend, céxappar ;
Stem éreyx, eAcyxo, I refute, ednreypa (§ 275. 1). Some
Stems in vy by way of exception do not change the » before «
into ¢, but into pw: dupa, from dfivw, I sharpen; those
which throw out the v in the Perf. Act., do the same here
(§ 282); xéxpimac (comp. wé-pac-pa from the Stem ¢ @v);
onévie, I offer a libation, Fut. oreiow, has éomeropat.

2. Before «
every guttural becomes «, and this with @ becomes £: mé-mdefat
» _ labial ” Tw 5 9 ” » Wi yeypaya
» dental is thrown out we-Tewras

3. Before +

every guttural becomes x: se-mdexrae ; Stem Ney, A€-Aex-rTae
» labial » «ot -yé-ypan-rae
» dent. (except) ,, 0: mé-reio-rat (Stem day, mé-pav-ra)

4. The o of of after consonants (§ 61) is dropped,
and then
every guttural becomes x: mé-mdex-Oov for me-mdex-cOov

»y labial » : yé-ypap-Ge for ye-~ypap-obe

», dent.(excepty) ,, o: we-meio-Oar for me-merd-cbat.

v, A, and p remain unchanged before the @ which
has arisen from of: Stem dav, wepdvOar; Stem
AYYVEA, HY VEAGat.

§ 287. The ending vraz of the 3 Plur. is irreconcile-
able with Consonantal-Stems. Sometimes the Ionic

§ 287. Dialects—In the Ion. dial. the forms ara: and aro for the
$ Plur. are common : Hom. has Be-8An-arat (Badd, I throw), weno-
ryaro (wordopa, I flatter), dedaiara (Saiw, I divide), epxara,
€epxaro (cipyw, I shut in, § 319, 15); in New-Ion. napeoxevadaro
(mapackevatw, I prepare), xexoopéatar (xoopéw, I adorn). Three
Hom, forms insert 8: éppd-d-ara (paive, I besprinkle), axnyé-8-aro
{axvvpa, I am grieved), €dndd-d-aro (Stem éAa, edav’v, J drive);
epnpéedara from épeidw, I support, is irregular.

M

162

arat takes its place (§ 226, D), before which », «, 8, and —
7 are aspirated: ye-ypdd-ata, re-Tdy-atar (Stem ray, —

vy. THE PERFECT-STEM,

tdcow, I arrange), te-rpip-arar (Stem rpuf, tpiBo, I
rub). But the common practice is to use the periphrasis
by means of the Participle with ei-ci(v): yeypaypévoe

2
elo lV.

Comp. Lat. seripti sunt and § 276, Obs

The following paradigms supply examples of the
above-mentioned changes.

Perfect Middle and Passive.

id 4
me-mey-pevot Eliot

re-Treto-pevor etal

Guttural Stems, Dental Stems. Labial Stems,
mé-mey-at mé-TeELo- 2a yé-ypap-pas
care 9 mé-revrat yé-ypayras
ré-mek-Tat mwé-mreLo-TaL yé-ypan-rat
me-mey-peba me-mreio-1e0a ye-ypdp-peba
mé-mhex-Oe mé-mreto-Oe yé-ypap-be I

yé-ypap-peévor eioi

§ 288. After Vowel-Stems o is frequently inserted before the —

terminations beginning with p and r, but more especially when
the Stems have the vowel short: Stem rede, reAd, I complete,
Perf. re-réde-o-par; Stem ord, onda, I draw, 3 Sing, €-ona-o-
rat; but it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and
diphthongs : dxovo, I hear, fxovopa; xedevo, I order; xvdlo,
I roll; r<etiw, I stone to death; Evw, 1 polish; waiw, I strike;
mhéw (rérdevorat), I sail; rpio, I saw; ceiw, I shake; xpio, I
anoint ; yyavw, I touch, Others fluctuate: «eto or eAjo, J close;
xpovo, I push.

4 289, The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by
periphrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of
eiyi. (Comp. Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but
rarely evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves: krdopa, I
acquire, xé-xrn-pat, Subj. xe-xr@-pat, Ke-krp, Ké-xrq-rar, Opt.
xe-xr@-ynv (from xe-kraol-pnv), Ke-xtG-ro; besides these we also
have xexryjpnv, 770, jr.

§ 289. Dialects,—The Hom. Subj. from Stem pya (wepvnpat, me-
mini), 1 Plur. pepvepeda (New-lon. pepvedpeba); Opt. peuvqpnv; 3
Sing. AeAdru, 3 Plur. AcAdvro, instead of Aehu-t-ro, NeAv-t-vro, § 28,

EE — Sl vad,

-§ 291 THE FUTURE PERFECT. 163

—§ 290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and Passive

differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect
only by the addition of the Augment and the personal
endings which are those of the historical tenses. Re-
specting the 3 Plur. in vto and aro, and their places
~ being supplied by periphrasis, see § 287, which is here
applicable also.

§ 291. 5. The Future Perfect or Futurum Exactum

adds o to the Perfect-Stem with the inflexion of the
Future Middle; the o produces the same changes in
the preceding consonants as in the ordinary Future
Middle; wempdferas (Stem rpay, tpacco, I do), tt
will have been done; yeypdaperar (Stem ypad, ypado,
L write), tt will have been written.

There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active
endings: éor7&m (§ 311), I shall stand, and reOvijéw
(§ 824. 4.), I shall be dead, from the Perf. éornxa,
réOvnka.

Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the
Part. of the Perf. with the Fut. of eiué, I am (&copaz) :
AeuKws Exowat, I shall have loosed (solvero).

164 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. _

VL—Tue Srrona Passive Stem.

§ 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are form me at 6
Strong or Second Aorist, and the Strong or
Future Passive.

Present: daive, Pure Stem, Pay, Strong Passive Stem, hive. <.
1.—Strong or Second Aorist Passive. -

spel paiva pavein-v
appeared
3 | é-pavy-s 2 | dhar7-s avein-s
2 > ‘ > a ’
5 | bdo 3 | pag = | pavein
8 €-pdav-rov 8 | pavij-rov S | pavein-roy or
3 | &Gavy-ryy ‘= | Pavij-rov & | Pavecn-ryy or
= €-~pavy-pev BD | Pavo-pev pavein-pevOr
€-avn-re € avein-Te
€-pdavn-cav pava-o(y) pavein-cay or paveie
dvn-Os Inf, | havs-oets Part] havels, paveioa, ge
$ aes en. pavé-vr-os ie
‘3 | pavn-rov
£ | pavy-rev
A. | pavy-re
| a ‘@od or
2.—Strong or Second Future Passive.
Ind. | davn-copa cae
re E gary eres etc., the same as the Future Middle,
Part. | davy-cdpevos, n, ov i

of an Mitive nature, those of the Future Passive of t
nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the

§ 293. Dialects.—The Hom. dial. has the shorter ending ev in th
3 Plur, Ind. Aor. Pass.: é-dve-y or pave-v 5 Tpade-v = erp
from trpepo. ‘The Ionic dial. leaves the ¢ in the Subj. unc
ptyé-o (picye, d mix). ie: often lengthens the € in|

a ae a

ue ———————EE——<exXai- rr — 7"
war

§ 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165

Second Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem with-
out a connecting vowel, and the ¢ of the Stem is length-
ened in the Indicative and Imperative to 7. In the
Subjunctive the ¢ is contracted with the vowels of the
Subjunctive: davé-w, dav ; in the Optative the ¢ com-
bined with the modal sign sm becomes evn: have-ty-v.
The Infinitive always has the circumflex on the penul-
tima, and the Participle in the Nom. Sing. Mase. the
acute on the last.

§ 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong
Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very
rarely from derivative Stems, but it occurs in verbs of all
classes, even the first (§ 247), « being added to the Pure
Verbal-Stem: Pres. pdt-o (class 3, I sew), Pure Stem
pad, Strong Passive Stem fade, Aor. Pass. éppddn-v ;
oparre (class 4, I slaughter), Pure Stem o day, Strong
Passive Stem odarye, Aor. Pass. éoddyy-v, Fut. Pass.
shayi-coua ; Pres. ypad-o (class 1), Strong Pass, Stem
ypade, Aor. Pass. éypddy-v. The Strong Passive Aor.
occurs only in such verbs as have no Strong Active
Aorist. The only exception is tpémw, I turn, Aor. Act.
&-tpam-o-v, Pass. é&-rpdrn-v.

Obs.—By way of exception 7AAdynv is formed from the derivative

Stem adrAay, Pres. dAdo, I change.

§ 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257) the e
is sometimes changed into a: xXér-7-w, I steal, é-cNarrn-v;
atéhho, I send, é-crddyv; tpéh-w, I nourish, é-rpady-v ;
mréx-o, I twist, é-mréxn-v and é-mddKn-v; TAIjcow, I

and sometimes to 7: pavy-n = havy. In the Dual and Plur. the
modal vowel is shortened where this lengthening of the e occurs :
Sapei-ere (for Sapenre, Att. Sayjjre). In the Infinitive we find the
Hom. pevat or pev: prynpeva, Sapper.

§ 295. Dialects—Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59) as
in the Strong Aor. Act, and Mid. (§ 257, D.): Pres. répm-w, 1 de-
light, Aor. Pass. €-rdprn-v, Subj. rpimé-w, 1 Plur. rpiimeloper (gau-
deamus), Inf. rpdman-perat.

166 VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. § 296,

strike, has é-mdyyn-v, TAnyn-copat, but in composition
ek-e-rddyn-v, €x-Tray-couar; the Pure Stem of verbs
of the second class here reappears: o7j7-w (Stem oan,
I corrupt), é-carn-v; THx-w (Stem ta «, I melt), &-raxn-v;
péw (Stem pv, I flow), é-pavy-v, puyj-copar,

VII.—Tue Weak Passive STEM.

§ 296. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the
Weak or First Aorist and the Weak or First Future
Passive.

Pres. Avw, Stem Av, Weak Passive Stem Ave,

1.— Weak or First Aorist Passive.

Ind. é-AbOn-v Sub. Ava Opt. Avbein-v r
I was loosed Y
€-vOn-s Avbj-s Avbein-s

etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive,

Imp. AvOn-re : Inf. AvOj-var Part. AvOei-s, Avbcioa, AVG
AvOn-Te Gen. Avbێvr-os E

etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive.

2.— Weak or First Future Passive. |

Ind. AvOn-copa | Opt. AvOy-coipny | Inf. Avbq-cecOa 4

Part. AvOy-adpevo-s, 1, 0-v.

§ 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is
entirely like that of the Strong. ene the 7 of
AGOy-7e instead of AvOy-O1 see § 53. ¢.

§ 296. Dialects—The Weak Fut. Pass, is wanting in the Homeric
dialect.
'§ 297. Dialects.—Respecting the inflexion see § 293, D,
§ 298. Dialects.—The Hom. dial. after some Vowel-Stems inserts
v before 6: dpumvi-v-On (Stem mvv, mvéw, I breathe), t8pi-v-6n
(idpt@, J fasten), and changes the «of the Stem ¢aev (dhaciva,
daire, I appear) into a, padvOny.

:
|

§ 299, _ VI. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 167

§ 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the
Verbal-Stem by appending the syllable 6c. Before
this syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened
as in the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Per-
fect: Tia, ériunOnv; wetpa, éreipdOny, I tried. As
to the exceptions see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle,
o is inserted before @, especially after short vowels,
but often also after long ones: é-redé-c-Anv from Tedéa,
I complete ; é-xeded-c-Onv, from xedredo, I order; and
this is the case in the verbs mentioned in § 288, and
especially in yeAdo, I laugh, éyekdcOnv; Spdw, I do,
edpdcOnv; mavw, I cause to cease, érravcOnv, but also
érav0nv. The Aor. Passive of cdf, I save, on the
other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem ow without
the o: éowOnv.

As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect
Middle, the ¢ before X, v, p is sometimes changed into
a: Stem rev (relva, I stretch), é-rd0n-v (comp. § 282).

The changes of the consonants before @ are explained
by the laws of sound (§ 45): Stem rpay, mpdocw,
I do, é-apay-Oy-v; Stem wevd, eid, I deceive,
ewetc-Onv; Stem reya, réutro, I send, é-réud-On-v.
—Respecting ¢@pépOnv (Pres. tpédw), eOapOnv (Pres.

Odmrw) see § 54, Obs., and respecting éréOnv, érd@nv

(Stems @«, Ov), see § 53 4.

§ 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future
Passive are, on the whole, more common than the
Strong, and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly
all Vowel-Stems, they are the only customary forms of
the Aorist and Future Passive.

There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive
Stems are in use: Stem Praf, Pres. Ardrro, I hurt,
Aor. Pass. €8rdBnv and éSradOnv.

16s: VERBAL ADJECTIVES. § 300.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

§ 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive
Participles.

Pres. Aww, Stem Av, 1. Av~ros, 7, ov, loosed, capable

of being loosed,
2. Av-réo-s, a, ov, to be loosened,
solvendu-s, a, um.

The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of
the syllable to (Nom. ro-s, ry, To-v) from the Verbal-
Stem, and has the meaning either of a Participle Per-
fect Passive: Av-rd-s=solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable
of being loosened.

The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of
the syllable réo (Nom. réo-s, téa, réo-v), which is never
contracted, from the Verbal-Stem, and has the meaning
of necessity, like the Latin gerundive: Av-réo-s, one who
is to be loosened, Xvtéov éori, loosening must take place,
solvendum est.

The vowels preceding the + are in general treated
exactly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive
Aorist; o is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor.
Pass.: Tede-o-T0s, KeNev-o-Téov. The consonants before
rare treated in accordance with the laws of sound:
mpax-ros (Stem mpday, Pres. mpdcow), ypamn-r0-5
(ypapw), Kopso-réo-v (Stem cowed, xouifw, I carry.)

Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the formation
of their tenses.

§ 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in:

§ 300. Dialeets.—dpa-ré-s is derived by metathesis ($ 59) from
the Stem Sep (dépe, I flay).

§ 301. Dialects—The Hom. dial. épdw, T love, Aor. Mid. npiod-
pnv; apxéo, I ward off, ijpxeca; xopéw, I satisfy, éxdpera; Korea,
J grudge, xoréacaro; éptw, I draw, eiptca. On the usual doubli
of the o after short vowels (épdoaro, épicaaro) see § 261, D,

i a

_dpie, I draw,

§ 301. VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 169

I laugh,

Ordo, I squeeze, Fut. Artic,

kidw, I break,

Fut. rraoe,

ondo, I draw, Fut. oxdéca,

Fut. yeddoopat, ©

Aor. Act. éyeddica,
Aor. Pass. eyeddo Ony,

Fut. Pass. yedarOjoopat.

Aor. Act. €@\dea,
Verb. Adj. @Aacros
Aor. Pass. exhdoOnv
Perf. Mid. xéxXao pat
Aor. Act. €ordca,

Aor. Pass. éomdaOnv, Perf. Act. €omdxa,
Perf. Mid. €éoracpa, Verb. Adj. orarrés.

xaddw, I slacken Fut. yadaico,
aidéopat, I dread, Fut, aidécopa,
dxéopat, I heal, Fut. dxécopat,
déa, I grind, Fut. ddéo@ (6),
dpxéw, f satisfy, Fut. dpxéca,

euew, I vomit,
(éo, J seethe, Fut. (éco,
Ea, I scrape,
rereo, I finish,

Fut. Eco,
Fut, redéow (8),

dpm, I plough, Fut. dpdca,

Fut. dpice,
addit. form dpire

&kio, TI draw,

Aor. Pass. eyadaoOnv.
Aor. Pass. 7d€09yv
(328), Perf. 7decua,
Aor. nxeoduny.

Perf. Act. addyj\exa,
Perf. Mid. d\yAeopa.
Aor. Act. ijpxeoa,
Aor. Act. ijueaa.
Aor, Act. é(eoa,

Verb. Adj. Ceardés.
Verb. Adj. Eeards.

Aor. Act. éréXeca,
Aor. Pass. érehéaOnv,
Verb. Adj. reXeotds,

Perf. Act. reréAexa,

Perf. Mid. rereA emjzat.

Aor. Act. ipoca,
Aor. Pass. 7pd6nr.
Aor. Act. pica.

Aor. Act. efAxtoa,

Fut. Pass. AxvoOjgopat, Perf. Act. efdxiixa,

La

HTVH, I spit,

Perf. Mid. efAxvopas.
Aor, Act. érrica,
Verb. Adj. arvords.

2. The vowel is long in the Weak Aor. Act., and
short in the Perf., the Aor. Pass, and the Verbal

Adjective in:

3ém, I bind, Fut. dco,

Aor. Act. Znea,

Perf. Act. 8é8exa, Aor. Pass. €8€Ony,
Verb. Adj. derds, Perf. Mid.

Sdeua, 3 Fut. dedjoopa.

170 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL.

bio, I offer, Fut. bfca, Aor. Act. @ica,
Perf. Act. ré6vxa, Aor. Pass.
Perf. Mid. réOtpat.
Avo, I loose, Fut. A\7oo, Aor. Act. toa,
Perf. Act. AAAtxa, Aor. Pass. €AvOny,
Verb. Adj. Avrés, Perf. Mid, AeAvpat.

8. The vowel is short in the Future and Weak Aorist
Active and Middle, but long in the Perfect, Aorist
Passive, and Verbal Adjective of xadéw, I call, xaréoo,
KEKANKA, exp Oy, Kdn765 5 aivéw, I praise, has alvéca,
veka, WveOnv, aiveros, but Perf. Mid. jvnpat.

4. robéw, I long for; rovéw, I toil; and dt, I sink,

fluctuate between the short and long vowel: Tobécopat, —

and o@jcw 3 movécw, érovncdunv; Sicw, Aor. Pass.
edv0nv.

Cuap. XI.—Srconp Principat CONJUGATION
or Verbs in pe.

PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS.

§ 302. The Second Principal Conjugation ‘differs
from the First only in the inflexion of the Present and
Strong Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also
in the Perfect and Pluperfect Active.

The special terminations of this conjugation are:

1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient pe: gy-pi,

I say (§ 226).

2. 3 ” ” ” ” ” o(v) (for

Tt): "gnoty) (§ 226).
moi, oO Mie, s » 9 inserts the vowel a before the

§ 302. Dialects—The Hom. dialect often has the ending oa in
the 2 Sing. Ind. Act.: ri@n-c6a, thou puttest ; ¢-pn-cba,—and pevas
or pey instead of va: in the Inf.: dd-peva, pa-pev; and a short »
instead of the cay of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite: €-pa-v.

The Hom. dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the

Subj. and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor, Pass. (§ 298):
‘fouev=iopev (eamus).

: r. /.
mee

* x
ee ae Yee

§ 304, SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 171

termiration ox (for vrv) (§ 226, comp. Dial.), and this a is lengthened
by compensation (¢-dor(v), they go, from the Stem 2), and unites
with the a of the Stem: daci(v).

4, In the Optative om (ue, +), the Modal-sign attaches itself
directly to the Stem: qda-in-v; comp. § 293.

4 ing. Imperat. has the ending 6: da-

he ad es We ciding pa ‘yb ah } comps anes

7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has cay: é€-*-cay (3 Plur. Imperf.)

All terminations of these two tenses are appended to
the Stem without a connecting vowel: da-pév (comp.
Tipa-o-wev), a-Tw (comp. Tiwa-é-Tw) ; in the Participle
also vr attaches itself directly to the Stem: ga-vt, of
which the Nom. is formed by the addition of o: gas;
Stem So, dovs (comp. § 147, 1). In the Subjunctive
alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with
the long connecting vowels as in the ordinary contracted
verbs (§ 243): dd-w, $0; Ti-Pé-w, Ti-00, 50-w-paL,
dapat.

§ 303. In the Vowel-Stems of this conjugation a
change of quantity takes place in such a manner that

‘vowels in themselves short are lengthened in the Sin-

gular Indicative Active, a and e becoming 7, 0 w, andi v:
gn-pi, I say, Plur. $a-pév, é-pn-v, Dual, &pa-rov [&-0n-v,
I placed|; Plur. é-0e-wev; Selxvi-ps, I show, Plur. deé«vi-

WED.

Obs.—Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially
noticed below.

§ 304. All verbs in pu are divided into 2 classes:
1. Those which in the Present join their terminations

"directly to the Stem: $y-u;

2. Those which form the Present-Stem by adding vu
to the Pure Stem: Sdecx-vi-wr, I show, Pure Stem, Serx,
Present-Stem, Sevxvv.

172

FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pe,

I.—Fimst Crass or VERBS IN pt.
§§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs
are inserted on p. 124, fol. ..
§ 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in pz are formed

§§ 305, 306. Dialects—The following are Ionic secondary forms,
those enclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic.

Active.

.2. Sing. Pres. Ind. ri-@n-c6a
Seat Bios Sy aps werner 6:-80t
3. Plur. ,, 4, rt-Oeior(v) 6:-dover(v)
also (mpo)Oéover(v)
2. Sing. Pres. Imperat. bi-8a-Os
Inf. Pres. ti-Onpe-vat —--36-pev

6:-dotvat

Imperf, 1 Sing. [é-ri-6e-a] __[é-8¢-8ou-v]

3 ”

3. PL. Pres. . Ind.
~ » umperf. ,,

Pres,

Part.

2, Aor. Ind. 3 PI.

Subj. 1 Sing.

[ €-ri-Oe-e]
Middle,

[ri-O€-aras 8:-86-arat

r1-O7-pevos
Active.

beiw [ 0éa |

Oeins or Onns 86s

bein Saox(v) or
danou(v)

bgopev or Sooper
Ociopev
8aaor(v)

61-d50i-c6a also 8:-doi-s

[i-org]
[t-oré-aox(r)]

(caf)-i-ora .

(t-ora]

i-oré-ara)
(i-oré-aro}

éortiv

éoraicay

ornys

oryerov (§ 302,
Dz)

oréwpey Or
oreiopey
[oréwor}

O€peva, O€pev Sdpevar, ddpev orhperar

Middle,
eo, €bev (§ 37, D. 1)
(Herod. rposOjxavro |}
[@éapat] Ociouar
bo, Ged.

Oe eee ey

ee

§ 308. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pu. 173

after the First Principal Conjugation, as e. g., the 2 Sing.
Imperf. ériOeis, the 3 Sing. ériMe, as if from the Stem
ttOe. In the Imperf. the forms édidoupr, édiSous, édiSov
are the only ones in use from the Stem 51650; they are
formed in the same manner as those of contracted verbs
(§ 243). Other similar forms will be noticed in treating
of the separate verbs.

In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes
employed: tiOcior, Sivdodcr.

In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending @
is dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to com-
pensate for it: d/Sou for 5/506.

In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel
t only is dropped, and the remaining 0, according to
§ 67, is changed to s: 50-01, 805, but orf-0c, which
only in compounds sometimes appears as o7d, ¢. 9.
KaTaoTa.

In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the

‘@ between the two vowels is preserved : t/Oe-cat, Ti0e-co,

ériMe-co ; only the 2 Sing. of the Subj. is treated entirely
like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga-
tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the
other hand, the o is thrown out, which gives rise toa

contraction: é-0e-co, é-Oe-o, &Oov; Imper. Oé-c0, Oé-o,

God.

Obs.—The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with

monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction throw the accent

as a circumflex upon the last syllable: mpo-000 ; but Homer has
ovv-Geo and zrepi-Oov.

§ 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) dis-
tinguish the Present-Stem from the Pure Stem by re-
duplication, that is, the initial consonant with c is prefixed
before the Stem: So, 5150; 0, Tee (§ 536); ora for
ov-ora according to § 60 &. (comp. Lat. si-sto). In like
manner the Stem ypa in the Pres. becomes xi-xpa
(xi-ypn-p1, I lend); tra and wpa, with the insertion
of a nasal, become wi-w-rda, Ti-p-Tpa (TiuTAnMs,

174 FIRST CLASS. OF VERBS IN pt.

I fill; wiwrpnat, I burn); but cup-wi-ewdy-pt, eur
TAn-t; the Stem é becomes i-n-ys I send; and, with -
the reduplication within the Stem itself, 6yva becomes
o-vi-vn-yt, I benefit.

§ 309. The Deponents dvvapat, I can; érigrapat, I understands
cpépapa, I hang; together with the Aorists émpidpny, I bought ;
a@vnpny, I benefited, withdraw the accent, even in the Subjune-
tive and Optative, as far as possible from the end; divapas,
ériorawro (comp. icraépat, ioraivro).

Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are :

§ 310. The three Stems Oe (r/Onut), So (Sida@pe), and

é (%jut) form an irregular Weak Aorist in xa: €0yxa,
édxa, jxa, but in the Middle we find only jaunv. In
the Sing. of the Indicative the Active forms are custo-
mary instead of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the
Dual and Plural of the Indicative they are rare, The
other moods and the Participles have the strong forms
exclusively.

The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, —

are these:

Ind. Subj. 6a Mid. e0éuny
€6nxa Opt. Oeinv ~ Subj. O@pae
€Onxas Imp. 6és &e.
€Onxe(v) Inf. Ociva

€Oerov Part. Oeis

€bérnv

eOewev (seldom €Ojxapev)
éBere ( 4, €Onxare)
€becav( 4, €Onxay).

§ 311. 2. The rough breathing instead of the o of the
Stem ora is also used in the Perf. (§ 60 4): &o7-Ka
for ce-orn-xa. On the shorter forms: éorapev, &e., see
§ 317, 4. éorjEw, I shall stand, is a Third Future Active.
The Perfects of Oe and é are réOevxa, efxa; the same
vowel also remains in the Perf. Mid. ré0ecpas, efuar. The
Stems So and ora leave their vowel short in the Perf.

§ 310. Dialects—From the Stem 80 Hom, bas sometimes Fut.
&:-30-c@ instead of doaw.

§ 312, FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pu. 175

Mid. and Aor. Pass., and @¢ inthe Aor. Pass. : 8é-80-pae,
edd0nv, é€oraOnv, éréOnv, TeOjcopar. On the meaning of
the different forms of fornus see § 329, 1.

§ 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in pe there
also belong :

A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (comp. fornp):

1. 7-uéi (comp. Lat. a-to), I say, only in the Impf. jj»,
3 Sing. 7 (comp. § 213, Obs.).

2. d-vi-vy-ps (Stem dva, § 308), L benefit, Mid. ovivapas
(§ 309), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. ovum,
wvngo, avnto; Opt. dvaiuny, Imperat. dvnco, Inf. éva-
cat, Fut. dvjcw, ovicouat; Aor. Pass. avnOnv.

3. i-p-mAy-pe (Stem wa, § 308). Additional form,
mryjdo, I fill [Lat. ple-o|, Fut. mrjow, Perf, Mid.
mémrnopat, Aor. Pass. érAjoOnv.

4. wi-u-mpy-ue (Stem wpa), additional form, 7p70w
(quite like 3).

5. dy-pi (Stem ga), I say, 2 Sing. Impf. épnoGa
(enclitic in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., comp. § 92, 8),
Imperat. adi, or dav; comp. dacka, § 324, 8.

6. ypn (Stem ypa, ype) one must, Subj. yp7, Opt.
xpein, Inf. ypivat, Part. ypeov (only Neut. from
xpaov, according to § 387 D.). Impf. éeyphv or xpi»,

Fat. ypijcet ;—aroxpn, tt suffices, also 3 Plur. a7o-

xpact(v), &., as above dzroypaw.

7. Ki-xpn-yt (Stem ypa, § 308), I lend, Inf. ery pa-
vat, Fut. ypyjow, Aor. éypynoa. Further the depo-
nents :

8. wya-war (Stem aya), I admire, Fut. dyacopat, Aor.
Pass. yryacOnv, Verb. Adj. dyacrds.

9. dvva-par (Stem Suva) I can, 2 Sing. Ind. dvvy is
rare (§ 309), Impf. édvvdynv, 2 Sing, edvve, Fut.

§ 312. Dialects.—3. Hom. has the Aor. mdjro, i was filled,
3. Plur. mAjvro, Opt. mAgjyny, or mreipny, Imper. [€u}rAnoo.

6. Herod. dméypa.

8. Hom, dydopat, dyatouas,

~

176 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pt.

Surfoopat, Aor. SvviOnv, seldom eSuvdcOnv. The Auge
ment is frequently (§ 234, Ods.), Perf. Sedvvnuas, Verb.

Adj. Suvards, capable, possible.

10. éricra-par (Stem état a) I understand, 2 Sing.
érictacat, Imperf. jarvetayny, jricto, Fut. émioeri-
copat, Aor. yrvetiOnv, Verb. Adj. ériotnrtos.

11. épa-uar (Stem épa), poetic, I love (commonly
épaw), Aor. Pass. npdaOnv.

12. xpéua-ywar (Stem xpepwa), I hang (§ 309). Fut,
Kpepnoonat, Aor. éxpeudaOnv. Additional forms, § 319, 2.

Obs.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of
words: rd 6€-pa, the position; 6 So-rhp, the giver; 4 ord-ors,
the rise; % Svn-or-s, the benefit, from the Pure Verbal-Stem,
differing from the Present-Stem ;—% p7-pn, fa-ma, talk ; 4 diva-
pi-s, power; % émiary-pn, knowledge, from the Verbal-Stem,
which is the same as that of the Present.

Dialects.—13. Hom. dpeva, satiate, Stem. ad, Subj. wpe.

14, Stem Ba, Part. BiBds, stepping.

14, b. Stem dea, 3 Sing. Imperf. d€aro, seemed, Aor. 80d-rearo.

15. Stem ira, Adoxopat, iidopa, I am gracious, Hom. Imperat.
TAO.

16. Stem cepa (comp. xepavvus, I mix), Hom, 3 Plar. Subj.
Mid. xépwvra. To these belong also, in regard to the inflexion of
the Present-Stem, those Hom. verbs, which either are used only in
the Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem
by affixing the syllable -va:

a) Sap-vn-pe (also dap-vd-w), J tame, Mid. ddp-va-pat, Fut.
Bapdw, Saydas, Weak Aor. Inf. dapdoa, Sapdoarba, Perf. dédun-
pa, Aor. Pass, €du76nv, SapacOny, and Strong Aor. Pass. éddpny
(Subj. dapeio).

b) xipynype (also xepavyvun, § 319, 1), J mix, Part. xepyds, 3 Sing.
Imperf. éxipya, comp. § 319, 1.

¢) kp)Hpvadpas, poetic additional form of xpéua-par (12), comp.
also § 319, 2.

d) pdpvdpat, I contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. éudpyao.

e) répynpt, I sell, Part. reprds, repvapevos.

ra) midvapat, I approach, Stem wed, Aor. 3 Sing. Saas

9) ¢ iiss J spread, Part. mrvas, Imperf. rirvayro, comp. :

§ 319, 3
h) ekiboaie: I scatter, oxidvara, comp. § 319, 4,

§ 313,

§ 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in e (comp.
TiO) :
1. &y-ys (Stem é, Pres.-Stem i-¢ i.e. i-é according
to § 308), Z send.
Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. i&ou(v), Opt. teinv (secondary
forms fous, 3 Plur. tocev).
Imperf. i%-v (secondary forms | fovy], ‘ets, fer), Plur.
te-pev, 3 Plur. fecav, adier and Adie
(apinut, I send away). Comp. § 240.
Aor. #-x-a, RKxas, hxe(v), eltov, eityny, eiuev, etre,
cisav. .
Subj. 6, Opt. civ, Imperat. &, Inf. evar, Part.
eis (Stem évr). On this Aor. comp. § 310.
Fut. fow, Perf. ci-x-a.
Aid. Pres. t-e-yat, I hasten, strive, Subj. iduar, i, &e.,
Opt. ‘edunv (additional form, fo/unv), Imperat.
4 teoo, or tov, Imperf. i-¢unv.
+ Aor. eiunv, cico, efro, Subj. @pas, Opt. efunv
(additional form, ofunv).
‘ _ Gds.—The e+ of the Ind. ef-pny, is caused by the Augment (§ 236),
7 that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 302, 4).

FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN wu. 177

§ 313. Dialects—1. Hom.’2 and 3 Sing. Pres. tes, tee ; 3 Plur.
ieiot(v) ; 1 Sing. Impf. tev, tes, tec; 3 Plur. fev, 3 Sing. Subj.
inot(y) ; Inf. igwevac ; Aor. Act. éqxa; 3 Plur. éoav; Subj. eto; Aor.
Mid. 3 Plur. évro.

2. Fut. joo and (dv)éow [Herod. peperievos as a Part. Perf. of
peTinut=peOinuc, § 52, D., as if from periw with irregular reduplica-
tion].

Moreover :

8. Stem a(F)e, Pres. dnt, I blow, 2 Dual dyrov, 8 Sing. Impf. ay
and det, Inf. dyjvac and djweva:, Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. dévres, Mid.
dijpevos.

4, Stem de, (ev) diccar, they frightened, Sievrat, they flee, Opt.
diosro.

5. Stem 8uCe, diCquar, additional form, dito, Iseek, 2 Sing. 8i¢nat,
Inf. ditneOa, Fut. du¢noopae.

6. Pres. xixnue (comp. § 822, 18) I obtain, Subj. xiyelw, Opt,
«txeiny, Inf. xexrvar, Part. xeye/s, Mid. xixqpevos.

Impf, 2 Sing. éxixers, 3 Dual xeyirqy.’

N

178 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pL

Fut. #-cowas, Perf. ef-~ar, Plup. et-pp.
Aor. Pass. et@nv, Subj. 606. Fut. €Ojcopua.
Verb. Adj. éros, Eréos.
2. di-5y-ue (Stem Se), J bind, a rare additional form
of Séc (§ 244, 1).
§ 314. C) Verbs whose Stem ends in v:
1. ef-ys (Stem i, Lat. t-re), I go.

Pres. Ind. ¢7-j i-pey Subj, to tys ete.
et t-rov i-re Opt. i-olny i-o1s ete.

ei-at(v) t-rov t-Gor(v) Imperat.t-0 ire ete.
3 Plur. i-évrey or t-recay

Inf. i-é-var Part. i-dv, t-ovea, i-dv (Gen. i-évr-os, comp. Lat.
e-unt-is}
Impf. jeev or ja Hetpey OF per

TELS yy HecrOa Herov, Hrov, Herre 4, HTE
HEL 5, Hew Heitny, HTHY Heoay
Verbal Adj. irds, ivéos (additional form iryréoy, & is
necessary to go).
Obs.—The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future
meaning; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect, 9 is
produced by the Augment preceding e+,

2. xel-war (Stem «ev), I lie, has the inflexion of a

Perfect. 2 Sing. xei-car, 3 Plur. xeivtat, Subj. 3 Sing.
xéntat, Opt. xéovro, Imperat. xeioo, Inf. «etrOas, Part.
xeievos; the compound mapdxesat, Inf, mapaxetoBat,
(Comp. jar, § 315, 2).

§ 314. Dialects.—1. Stem i, 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. eto Oa, Subj. ing6a,
inow, 1 Plur. *fopev, Loper, and ’ voper, Opt. tor, dein or etm, Inf.
ipevat, tev.

Impf. jia and ii iov, 3 Sing. ffie(v) or te(v), 1 Plur. fopex 3 Plur.
qioy, fivay, with try, ipev, ioav.

Fat. eicopar, Aor. eiodpny and éetodpny,

. 2, Stem ces, 3 Plur. xeiarat, xéara, xéovras, Impf. xeiaro, karo
[x€erat=xeira], Part. Fut. xéwv, cubiturus, Inf. xevéwev.
évo is an Hom. Stem in o, Pres. dvoua, J vituperate, Gvoras,

3 Sing. Opt. dvorro (§ 309), Fut. ovdccopa, Aor, dvorduny, and

from the Stem 6v, dvazny.

pu or épu is an Hom. Stem inv, 3 Plur. elpvara:, they rescue,
protect, Inf. picOa, épveba, eiptpevos, Impf. 2 Sing. pico, 3 Plur
piaro, épvaro, eipuvro; moreover, Inf. Act. eipdpevas, to draw, Aor.
Mid. picaro, he rescued, épiacaro, he drew,

——-- -

§ 315. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN wu. 179

Obs.-When compounded with prepositions, xeiyat is almost
identical in meaning with the Perf. Pass. of the corresponding
compounds of ri@ne: troriOnu, I lay as a foundation,
iméxerrat, it is laid as a foundation,

§ 315. D) Verbs whose Stem ends in a consonant (c):

1, eipi (Stem és Lat. es-se), I am
Pres. Ind. ¢i-pi (for éope) €o-pev
ei (for éo-or) €o-tév éa-reé (es-tis)
éo-ti(v) (Lat. es-t) é€o-rdév_ «i-oi(v)

Subj. @pev Opt. etyy einpev or elev

» a > ” ” J ” oe
7S Hrov Are eins etnrov or etroy einre OF etre
ee ” bea oY ” 7
7 Arov dor(v) €in eintny or eirny eincay or elev
Imperat. io écrov gore Inf. eivae
éoTw €oTev torwcay Part. dv oda dy (Stem dvr)
(Lat. esto) crear, dvrov
Tmpf. iy or }} - , ipev ;
noba Roroy OY jrov fre or hore

hv Horny Or irnv joa
Impf. Mid. pny (rare)
Fut. écova 3 Sing. goras

V. Adj. eoréov.

Obs. 1.—The loss of the o of the Stem is compensated for by the
vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (§ 42): efi for éope, in
the 2 Sing. ef for éot, which has arisen from the ogi preserved in
Homer (comp. §§ 49, 61, b). In the 3 Sing. the original
ending rz is retained: éori(v), the 3 Plur. has eici(y) from
ég-vrt. The Subj. & stands for € (Hom.) from éow; the Opt.

§ 315. Dialects.—Jonic additional forms: 2 Sing. éo-ci or eis,
1 Plur. eipév, 3 Plur. acx(v) ; éoci is also enclitic, but not gaci(v).
Subj. 1 Sing. fo, eiw, 2 Sing. és, 3 Sing. enou(v), jou(v), &p,
3 Plur. gwor(v) .
Opt. also gous, €or, 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. grco, 3 Act. gor,
8 Plur. éorev
Inf. €upevar (for éo-pevar), Euper, Epevas, Eyer
Part. éov, éodoa, édv (Stem éovr)
Imperf. 1 Sing. ja, éa, gov ; 2 Sing. éna 6a [as], 3 Sing. Hey, Enr,
inv, [2 Plur. gare], 3 Plur. vay; 3 Plur. Mid. eiaro (jr)
Fut. gocopa, 3 Sing. éoera, éooera, éooeirat (§ 264)
2. 3. Plur. gara:, efarar, Imperf. éaro, eiaro
8. Inf. evar, to eat, Pres, érOw, écbiw, dw [Lat. es-tis = editis}
Comp. § 327, 4.
4. 2. Plur. Imperf. pépre=qépere, bring [Lat. ferte).

180 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN us

ely for éo-iny, as the Inf. elvae for éo-var; dy for ewv (Hom)
from éo-wy. In the Impf. the Dual has most fully preserved —
theo.

Obs, 2.—elyi is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing. ae
(comp. § 92, 3); €ors is paroxytone when it denotes existence
or means the same as é£eor “it is possible,” as well as at the
beginning of a sentence and after the particles ov, py, el, as,
kai: fort Oeds, there is a God; otk tort, it ts not possible.
When merely external causes prevent it from being enelitic
(§ 93, c), éori(v) is oxytone: didos early euod, he is my friend.

Obs. 3.—In the compounds of eizié the accent remains on the
Stem-syllable; e.g. in the Imperf. wapqy, in the Subj. and Opt.
az, areiev, in the Inf. and Part. dweiva:, mapoy, in the 3 Sing.
Fut. wapéorat.

sh

2. Hywar (Stem 4s), I sit, has, like xeiuas, the in-
flexion of a Perfect.
Pres. jar iucOov tycOa Imperat. joo.

Hoar noOov Habe habe, &e. 1
Hota. HoOov = Horan_—= Inf. Hoba ‘ .

Part. — fjevos d

Impf. juny, joo, &e. a

In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the com-
pound cé@npar, of which 3 Sing. caOnrat, Subj. eab@pat,
Opt. xaSoiunv, 3 Plur. xafoivro, Imperat. KaOnco or G
xaov (from xaGeco), Inf. cabjoPar, Part. xaOjpevos, |
Imperf. éxaOyjynv (§ 240) or xaOjyuny, 3 Sing. éxaOnro or
xabjorto, 3 Plur. éxa@nvro or xabivto. |
§ 316. The following Strong Aorists formed without a |
connecting vowel from verbs whose Present-Stem mostly
follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong |
to the First Class of Verbs in pe:- .

Stems tn a.

1. &-Pn-v (Stem 8a), Pres. Saivw, I go, Imperat. BAe,
in compounds also 8a (xarafa), Inf. Sivas, Part. Bas.

§ 316. Dialects —1. 3 Plur. €8ayv, Subj. Beia, Bin, or si Beiopes
[Her. Béwper], Inf. Bnpevar.

————

=e

§ 316, FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN wu. 181

2. ynpa-vae (Stem ynpa), Inf. to the Pres. ynpa-cxe,
I grow old, § 824, 1.

3. &Spa-v (Stem Spa), Pres. S:-Spd-cxw, § 324, 2,
T run, Inf. Spa-vat, Part. Spas.

4. &xra-v (Stem «7 &), Pres. xreivo, I kill, Part. xrd-s,
Part. Mid. xrd-pevos (killed).

5. é-atn-v (Stem wra, rte), Pres. wérowa, I fly,
Part. rrdas, Mid. wrapevos, Inf. rréc Oar. .

6. &tAn-v (Stem tra), I exdured, Subj. TAH, Opt.
vrainv, Imperat. rAHO, Inf. tAjvar, Fut. rrAjcopar,
Perf. rétAnKa (§ 317, D., 10).

7. &0n-v (Stem $a), Pres. dOdvw, I anticipate, Inf.
$6fvau.

8. é-mpid-ynv (Stem wpra), I bought, Imperat. mpio.

Stems in e.

9. &cPn-v (Stem oe), Pres. cBévvips, I quench,
§ 319, 7, Inf. cBjvac.
10. &cxArn-v (Stem oxXe), Pres. cxérro, I dry, Inf.

‘ oKAHVal.

11. Imperat. cyé-s, from cye-6c (Stem cre), Pres.
xa, § 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. &cy-o-v.

Stems mn o.
12. éddw-v (Stem drw), I was caught, Pres, ddicKo-

pas (§ 324, 17), Opt. droipy, Inf. ddrdvas, Part. drovs.

13. é-Biw-v (Stem Bia), Pres. Biow, I live, Opt.
Bron, Inf. Bidvar, Part. Brovs.

Dialects.—2. Part. ynpds.

3. (Her. é8pnv].

4, 3 Sing. xray 3 Plur. éxray, Subj. créwpev, Inf. krapevar, Mid,
exraro (he was killed, § 255, D. 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. éxraev.

5. Mid. érraro, Sabj. mrjra, Dor. 1 Sing. Act. érray.

6. 3 Plur. érdav.

7. Subj. 3 Sing. Onn, or POjox(v), (rapa)pbainodv), 1 Plu
pbeaper.

12. jor, Subj., dAdo, Opt. 3 Sing. ddoty, Inf. dddopevat.

182 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN po

14, Eyvw-v (Stem yva), Pres. yi-yva-oxno, I come to *
know (§ 324, 14), Opt. yvotny, Imperat. qvib, Inf.
yvaevat, Part. yvovs.

Stems in t.

15. Imperat. 7i-@. (Stem wz), Pres. rivo, I aruda '
1 Sing. Aor. Ind. ézvoy (§ 321, 4).

Stems in v.
16, &-S0-v (Stem Sv), Pres. Svea, I dive, Imperat. 8061,
Inf. Sdvar, Part. dds. As to its meaning see § 329, 4.
17. é&-i-v (Stem pv), I became, Pres. piw, I produce,
Inf. divar. ,

Dialects.—14. Subj. yvoo, Inf. yropeva.

15. Imperat. wie.

16. 3 Plur. @v-v, Subj. d¢0, des, 3 Sing. Opt. 8m (from dui)
Inf. Soper.

17. 3 Plur. épiv.

Besides these the followmg are peculiar to the Ep. Dial. :—

18. Part. drovpas, Pres. amavpda, I take away.

19. Stem Brn, Pres. Baddo, I throw, 3 Dual, EvpSryjrnv (met
together), Fut. EvpBrAncopa, Mid. €8rnro (was hit, § 255, D. 2),
‘Subj. Brn-e-ra, 2 Sing. Opt. Areio, Inf. Broa, Part. BAjpevos

(hit),

20. Stem odra, Pres. oirdw, I wound, 3 Sing. obra, Inf. obrdpe-
vat, Part. Mid. odrdpevos (wounded), Verb. Adj. otraros.

21. Stem wra, Pres. rrjacw, I stoop, 2 Dual, é-mrq-rqy, Part.
Derf. remrnas.

22. Stem wa, Pres. rekafw, I approach, Aor. Mid. wAjro.

23. Stem Spa, Pres. Bi-8pa-cxw, I eat (§ 324, 13), Aor. €8per.

24. Stem ra, Pres. roa, I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. éA@s, Part. rAd-s.

25. Stem «re, Pres. xri¢w, I found, Part. Aor. Mid. éi-«ri-pevos
(well-founded).

26. Stem $61, Pres. POivw, I waste away, Subj. Aor. Mid. p6ie-
rat, Opt. Pbipny, pOiro, Inf. PbicOa, Part. POipevos.

27. Stem «dv, Pres. cAvw, J hear, Imperat. Aor. ADO: or KeKABOt,
Kore OF Kex\uTe.

28. Stem Av, Pres. Avw, J loose, Aor. Mid. Adpny, Avro or dro.

29. Stem avv, Pres. wvéw, J breathe, Aor. Mid. aymviro a re-
covered breath).

30. Stem ov, Pres. oeto, I scare, Aor. Mid. cvro, Part. cvpevos.

31. Stem xv, Pres. xéw, J pour (§ 248), Aor. Mid. €xuro, xtro,
Part. xupevos.

§ 317, FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pu, 183

§ 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without
a connecting vowel:

A) Vowel-Stems.

A number of Vowel-Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind.
Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the
Perfect and Pluperfect Ind., in the other moods, and in
the Infinitive and Participle, may connect the endings
immediately with the Perfect-Stem.

1. Stem 8a, Pres. Baivw, I go (§ 321, 1).

Perf. Ind. Bé8nx-a BéBa-pev
BéBnk-as BéBa-trov BéBa-te
BéBnK-e BéBa-tov BeBa-cu(v)
3 Pl. Subj. Be8acu(v), Part. BeBas, BeBdca, Gen.
BeBartos.

2. Stem ya (for yev), Pres. yiyvouas, I become, Perf.
yé-yov-a, Plur. also yé-y %-wev (§ 327, 14), Part. yeyas,
Gen. yeyaros.

Dialects.—32. Stem 4d (@Aopa:, I spring), Aor. Mid. dao, ddro,
Subj. ddera:, Part. Gpevos.

33. Stem yey, only in yevro, he took.

34, Stem dex (Pres. déyopuar, I accept), Aor. édéypnv, 3 Sing.
Sexro, Imperat. d¢£o, Inf. déy6ae (comp. § 2738, D.).

35. Stem Aey (Acya, J collect), Aor. Mid. déxro, he counted.

_ 86. Stem Acx (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. Aێxro (he laid himself),
Imperat. A¢fo, Inf. A€xAar, Part. (kara)Aéypevos, Aor. Act. EreFa,
Mid. edc£aro, Fut. A€£opac.

37. Stem HEY, Pres. pioyw, I miw, Aor. Mid. €uikro, pixro.

38. Stem dp, dpyvupi, I excite, Aor. Mid. dpro, TEP épao or
épaeo (dpcev), Inf. épAa, Part. dppevos.

39. Stem ray (myyvun, J fix), Aor. Mid. émrnxro, it was fixed.

40. Stem wav (maddo, I wield), Aor. Mid. madre,

41. Stem rep (répOw, I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. mépOat (to be
destroyed),

To these are to be added the Participles which have become
Adjectives, dopevos, glad (Stem 45, dvdavo, I please), ixpevos,
favourable (Stem ix ixvéopar, I come).

§ 317. Dialects, —1. Hom. 3 Plur, BeSiacr(v), Part. BeBads, Dual.
BeBaare.

2. Hom. 3 Plur. veyiior(y), Part. yeyads, yeyavia, Gen. yeyaaros,
3 Dual Plup. (é+)yeyarnv.

184 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pt.

3. Stem Ova, Pres. Ovn-cxw, I die, Perf. re-Ovn-xa,

Plur. 7é-Ovd-wev, &e., Inf. reOvadvas, Part. reOvews,
reOvedoa, teOveds, Plupf. 3 Plur. éré@vao av (§ 324, 4).

4. Stem ora, Pres. i-orn-yu, Perf. &orn-xa I stand,
Plur. &ord-pev, Subj. écrdpev, Ectdor(v), Opt. éoraimy,
Imperat. €o7a0., écrdtw, érrator, éorare, Inf. éoravat,
Part. Eo ras, Ectaca, éords, Gen. Ect OrTos, 8 Plur.
Plupf. €rracay (§ 306 &e.).

5. Stem 60, Perf. 5é-8i-a or 5é-do1-xa, I fear, Plur.
d5éde-yev, Sediaor(v), Subj. Sediw, Opt. Sedvecqv, Imperat.
525100, Inf. Sedsévar, Part. Sedvws, Plupf. éded/ew, 3 Dual
ededirny, 3 Plur. édé8scav, also Aor. &evca, Fut. dei
coat,

0bs.—The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use.

B) Consonant-Stems.

In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303)
and consonants (§§ 45-49) must be observed.

6. Stem 38 (Aor. el8ov I saw, § 327, 8).

Perf. Ind. of3-a, 1know to-pev Subj. cida eldaper —
oi-c6a to-rov to-re elins _— ei Onrov eidzre

old-cv)ic-rov ic-aoi(v) «id9 eidjrov eiddor(v)
Opt. eideinvy, Imp.tc-64 to-rov io-re Inf, eidévas
to-tre ito-reav io-recap Part. eidds, eidvia,
eidds, Gen. eiddr-os
Plup. 78ecv — or H8n (1 knew) 7 Setpey or foper
7oercOa ,, 75n70a Hdetrovorjoroy Hoderre 4, Hore
noder(v) ,, 70 poeirny,, jot ydecay 4 Foy
Fut. cicopa, Verb, Adj. ioréov.

Dialects—3. Imperat. réOviti, Inf. rebvapeXac), Gen. Part.
reOveiros, TebvnGros, TeOveraros, Tebvndros, reOverdros, Fem. reOvnvia.

4, 2 Plur. Ind. also gornre, Part. éorads, Gen. éoradros { Her.
éareas, Eotedoa).

5. Seidsa, Seidipev, Imperat. deide61, 1 Sing. Perf. also deidorca,
Aor. €8d3ec0a (comp. § 77, D.).

6. 1 Plur. %8-pev [Her. and sometimes also in Att. writers otdapey,
3 Plur. otéacr] Subj. eid€@ or idéw, Plur. etdopuev, cidere, Inf.

iSuer(ar), Fem. Part. idvia, Plup. [p5ea] jeidns, Hdee(v) or Heidn [2
Plur, jd¢are], 3 Plur. tcay, Fut. cidjo,

§ 318, SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN pu 185

— a a

Obs.—Besides ofc6a we rarely have ofSas, more frequently 7des,
HOns, together with 7SerGa, and 7Sepev, 7dere instead of Fdepev
qoecre.

7. Stem ix, only in the Perf. go.«a I resemble, appear,

1 Plur. poet. Gorypev, 3 Plur. quite irregularly ¢7£a-
ot(v) (comp. icacr), Inf. eixévar (poet. with éovxévar)
Part. eixa@s (with éorxas), eixvia, eixods, Plup. édxecv.

8. Stem «pay, Pres. xpdvw, I ery, Perf. néxpaya, Im-

perat. xé-xpay-0.

Il.—Srconp Crass or VERBS IN pe.

§ 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in wz belongs
to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of

Dialects.—7. Impf. eike [Her. otka, oixas], Dual gixrov, 3 Dual
Plup. éixrny, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. #ixro or ixro,

Besides :

9. Stem pa, 2 Dual Perf. péparoy, strive, péepiiper, pepiire, pendaor,
Imperat. pepdro, Part. pepads, via, és, Gen. dros, 3 Plur, Plup.
pépiioay.

10. Stem rda, Perf. rérAnxa, I am patient, 1 Plur. rerddper,
Opt. rerhainv, Imperat. rérrAaOs, Inf. rerAdper(at), Part. rerAnos,
yuvia, Gen. rerAndros.

11. Stem dvwy, Perf. dvwya, I command, 1 Plur. dvwyper,
Imperat. dvwy6:, 3 Sing. dye, 2 Plur. dvwyde, Plup. qveyea.

12. Stem éyep, Perf. eyp-nyop-a, I am awake, 2 Plur. Imperat.
eypryopbe, 3 Plur. Ind. éypyydpOaou(v)

13, Stem €Av@, Perf. eiAndovba, I have come, 1 Plur, eidjdov-

14, Stem rev, Perf. rérovOa (Pres. racy, I suffer, § 327, 9),
2 Plur. mérrovbe (for werovO-re), Fem. Part. rerabvia.

15, Stem 716, Perf. mémoiba (Pres. reiOw, I persuade), 1 Plur.
Plup. éaém:Opev, Imperat. rérero bt.

Further the Participles :

16. Stem Spo, (P:Bpacke, I eat, § 324, 13), Part. Perf. BeSpes,
Gen. BeBparos.

17, Stem mre, mr (ninto, I fall, § 327,15), Perf. xérraxa,
Part. Gen. remredros, Nom. rerras.

§ 318. Dialects—Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -ior(v) together
with -tador(v). Hom. 2 Sing. Imperat. -d and -i 61 (Saivi, dvi),
Inf. Hom. -vpevat, bpey (Cevyviper). Hom. forms from daivipu,
I feast, the Opt. dawiro, for Sawu-t-ro, Similar cases see below,

186 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN stl.

is formed by adding the syllable vv to the Pure Stem.

2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules
in § 303, hence Sedxvipu, but ededeviper.

3. Vowel-Stems double v in the Present-Stem: Stem
Kepa, Kkepa-vrviju, I mix,

4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use
according to the First Principal Conjugation (devi),
especially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind.: Seavdover(v), and
these forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. and
Opt.

5. Most of the verbs of this class have the Weak
Aorist ; only cBévupu I quench (Stem o fe), forms the
2 Aorist érPnv, Inf. cBijvar, comp. §§ 316, 9; 319, 7.

The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on
p- 128.

§ 319. The following verbs belong to the Second
Class of Verbs in we:

Stems in a.
l. kepdvyvpe (Stem cepa, cpa), I mix
Aor. éxépioa Perf. Act. Kéxpaxa KpaOny
: »» Mid. xéxpadpa A by xepdo Onv
2. kpepavvupe (Stem xpepa), J hang, trans. Mid. xpépapat, 1
hang, intr. (§ 312, 12)
Fut. xpena (§ 263) expystota
Aor. éxpépaca
3. werdvyvpe (Stem wera), I spread
metr@ (§ 263) exeraoOny
énériga mén(e)rapae [pate-o]}
4, oxeddvvupe (Stem oxeda), I scatter, additional form oxid-
vont (§ 312, D. 16, h.)
oxeda (§ 263) eoxedaaOny

> ‘ov . 7
éoxedaca éoxédacpat.

§ 319,32. In the New-Ion. D. thes of the Stem Secx is lost in df,
deta, Sedeypar, €déxOnv; Hom. Pf. (deideypa, I salute) 3 Plur.
derd€xarat.

§ 319. Dialects.—1. Comp. § 312, D. 16, and § 312, Dz 16, b.
Other forms: xepdw, xepaiw, Aor. €xpnea.

2. Fut. xpepow, xpepaas (§ 243 D).

the Present-Stem. The Present-Stem of this Second Class

.

$319. = SFOOND CLASS OF VERBS IN wut. 187

Stems in e.
Obs.—Several of these Stems originally ended in s.
5. €vyvpe (Stem originally Fes, comp. Lat. ves-tis) I clothe, (only
dudi-évyupe is in use)
dpdt-@ (§ 263)
Fut, Mid. dudi-oopar = nubieopas
Aor. nudi-eoa (§ 240)
Inf. Aor. Mid. éemécacOa
6. kopévyvpe (Stem xope) I satisfy —

exdpeca exopéoOnv
Kekdpecpat
7. oBévvvpi (Stem ofe), J quench

oBéce } transi live éaBeopat éeoBeobny

éoBeoa

éoBnv éaBnxa

(§ 316, 9) intransitive (§ 329, 5)
Fut. o8noopa

8. gropévyupe (Stem grope) (comp. 11 and 25), I spread,
(comp, Lat, ster-n-o)
orope (§ 263) éoTopecpat
éoTdépeca,
Stems in ow.
9. (avvvpe (Stem (w), J gird

(oo eloopat
é{woa (Mid.) eCwodunv
10. povvvpc (Stem fo), I strengthen
poocw €ppwpa (J am strong) €ppoabny
11. orpovvvps (Stem orpo), comp. No. 8.
oTpoce éoTpepat eotpabny
éoTpwca
12. xpovvupe (Stem ypo), I colour
éxpoca Kéxpoopat éxpaobny,
Consonant-Stems.
13. dyvupe (Stem dy orig. Fay § 34, D.), I break
ako éaya (I am broken) edynv
aga (§ 237) (§ 275, 2)

Dialects—5. Impf. eivvoy for éo-vvoy [Inf. Pres. efvveOac], Fut.
ippuce, €row, Aor. éooa, Mid. ééocaro, Perf. Mid. efpa, éooay,
Part. eipévos, 2 Sing. Plup. goco, 3 Sing. oro, georo, 3 Pl. eiaro.

6. Aor. Mid. xopéocaro, Part. Perf. Act. xexopnas, satiated,
Mid. xexépnpat.

13. #€a with aga [Her. Perf. &yya}.

188 SECOND CLASS OF VERDS IN pu

14. Belxvupe, see § 318.

15, efpyvupe (Stem eipy), J shut in (addit, form dpys)
cipgo cipxOnv
eipéa Part. éptas etpypat

16. fevyvuvpe (Stem (vy), I bind

CevEw eCoynv
elevta elevypat [eed Onv]

17. krivyupe (Stem xrev), J kill, with xreivo (§ 253)
18. piyvupe (Stem pry), 1 mia, with picyo (§ 327, 7)

piéo peutxa { epixOnv
euska pepeypat epiyy
19. ofyvupe. (Stem oly), I open (with otyw)
oligo €oxa and épya (§ 279) édx On»
€wfa (§ 237) epypat
20. GAAvpe (Stem 6A and é6Xe), for ddvupt, I destroy
6rd@ (§ 262) éd\e@Aexa (§ 275, 1)
@deoa
Fut. Mid. d\odpa droAa). .
Béuny }intrans. I perish
21. Spvupe (Stem 3p, 80), I swear
Spodpat (Act.) dudpoxa (§ 275, 1) cpdaOnv
Gpora » Sing. Perf. Mid. {ipdnocs Verb. Adj. (dv)aporos
Ope@poorat
22. dudpyvupe (Stem dpopy), I wipe out
Suopta (Mid.) bubpxyy
23. rnyvupe (Stem ray), J fix [comp. Lat. pango]
énnéa nénnya (I am fixed) { éxiixOny
; énayny
24. pnyvupe (Stem pay), I tear
éppnéa (Mid.) éppwya (I am torn) €ppaynv
(§ 278) payjoopat
25. orédpyvpe (Stem orop), with oropévvyn (8) and orpov-
vupe (11)

26. dpdyvvpe (Stem dpay), also pdpyvyps, and ace. to
Class 4, a, ppacow, I shut in, lock in

Dialects.—15. Impf. eépyvi with éépye [épyo], 3 Plur. Perf. Mid.
tpxara, Plup. épxaro (§ 287) Part. Perf. eepypévos, Aor. Pass.
epxGcis, with Impf. épyabor.

18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37.

19. diga, d£a [avoréa], Imperf. dtyvurro.

20. éréacw [ddéw], Part. Aor. ovAdpuevos (destructive), with ohcca.

21. Spocca or Gpocca.
To these also belong:
27. aivvpat, droaivvpa, 1 take away, used only in the Pres,

4
8 i, ees i

§ 320, IRREGULAR VERBS. 189

Obs.—Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as 7 deiéc-s,
the announcement; 6 xpa-rnp, the mixing bowl; ro ef-pa, the
clothing—for Feo-pa; 7) (a-vn, the girdle; 1 po-pn, the strength ;
TO orp@-pa, the carpet; rd (vy-d-v, the yoke; 6 Ode-Opo-s, the
ruin; 6 cvv-wpd-rn-s, the conspirator ; 6 rdy-ors, the frost, hoar-
frost.

Cuap. XII.—IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE First
PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION.

§ 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly
consist in the Present-Stem differing from the Verbal-
Stem, in a way different from that which has been
pointed out above, § 245, &c. To the four classes there
enumerated the following four classes are to be added.

O%s.—In these as well as in the following lists, the principal
forms only are given from which the rest are easily formed.

Dialects.—28. dvuys (and dviw), I complete, only Imperf. Mid.
Hvbro.

29. dpvupa, I acquire, Aor. jpésuny, Inf. dpérOa, 1 Aor. 2 Sing.
qpao, 3 Sing. paro. .

80. dxvupa, I grieve, Aor. dxaxuvro (§ 257, D.), Perf. dxaynpa
(§ 275, 1), 3 Plur. dxnxédarac (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. dxaxeiaro,
Part. dxayjpevos and dxnxénevos. Moreover the Active dxayxife
(J grieve), Aor. ifkaxov and axaynoa (comp. § 326),

31. yavupa, I rejoice, Fut. yaviocera.

_ 82. daivuju, I entertain, Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. Sawidro (§ 318, D.),
8 Plur. da:vifar’, Fut. daicw (Mid.), Aor. Saica (Mid.)

83. xaivupa (Stem xad), I surpass, Perf. xéxacpar (I am dis-
tinguished).

84, xivupa, I move, additional form of xwéw, Preterite &-K-o-v.
J went, Subj. xi-o, Opt. xi-o1-pe, Part. ki-wv.

85. rivips, rivipas, additional form of rive, § 321, D. 5.

36. dpéyrups, additional form of doéy, J stretch out, 3 Pl. Perf.
Mid. dpwpéxara (§ 287).

387. dpvupi (Stem 6p), T excite, Fut. spr, Aor. dpopor (§ 257, D.),
Perf. dpwpa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing,
pro, arose (§ 316, 88), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. dpap-c-rar, Subj.
dpdonra:, with Imperf. Mid. dpéovro.

38. rdvvpar With tarda, teivw, I extend, stretch.

190 FIFTH OR NASAL CLASS.

Jean
(Mid.) added to a tense denotes that in addition to the Active, —_
the corresponding Middle form is also in use, e.g. in addition _

to értoa (No. 5), ériodpny also is used.

Fifth or Nasal Class,

§ 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the
addition of vor of a syllable containing v to form the
Present-Stem.

a) v alone, often united with lengthening of the
vowel, is added to the following Stems:

1, Stem Ba, Pres. Baive, I go

Aor. Act, Fut, Perf. Pass,
€-8n-v (§ 316, 1) Bhoopa BeéBnxa (§ 317, 1)
€8n-ca Bow (§ 329, 2) Verb, Adj. Bazés

2. Stem é€Aa, Pres. EX avve, J drive
f\a-ca XS (§ 263) — eApAaxa (§ 275, 1) HAGOnY

€dnAapat Verb Adj. €karéos

3. Stem 6a, Pres. /Oava, I anticipate
‘ie ie (§316,7) éjcopa épbaxa

é-p6i-ca

4, Stem mt, Pres. ive, I drink (additional Stem wo) comp,
§ 327, 10
é-m-o-v (§ 316, 15) miopat (§ 265)

5. Stem re, Pres. tive, I pay penalty

é-ri-ca (Mid.) Tig@ Tétika ériaOnv
réric pat
6. Stem (6.1, Pres. POtva, I perish, waste away
€-pbi-ca pia opat €pOypar €pOiOny
7. Stem 8v, Pres. Sdvm (with dve Cl. 1), J immerge
€-80-y (§ 316, 16) dicw déddKa edvOny

éstaa, I dipped
8. Stem Sa«, Pres. 8dxva, I bite
€-dax-o-y djEouat dé3nxa 66x Orv

§ 321. Dialects—1. Aor. Mid. €8ncero, § 268, D.

2. Pres. €Adw, Fut. eAdw, eAdas, § 243, D., Aor. kacoa, Mid,
ndodpnv. 3. Plup. Mid. edndadaro (287, D.) [prdo On].

3. Ep. POdve, Part. Aor. Mid. pOdpevos.

5. Ep. rive with ri-w and rivuu, § 319, D. 35,

6. Ep. POiva, Pbiw, Aor. épbipnny, épbiro, § 316, D. 26; with
Pres. Pbwibe.

7. Aor. Mid. édtcero, § 268, D. [Pres. évduvéw, I put on, Comp,

§ 323}.

|

a

—ee

§ 322. FIFTH OR NASAL CLASS. 191

9. Stem cap, Pres. kdpvw, I weary

é-Kap.-0-v Kapodpac kexpnka (§ 282)
10. Stem rep, Pres. répva, I cut
&-rep-o-v (€rdpor) TELO rérpnka (§ 282) = érpnOnv

§ 322. 6) The syllable dv is added to the following
Stems:

11. Stem aia, Pres. aio O-dv-o-pat, I perceive

na0-d-pnv aic6-7-copat 7o06-n-par
12. Stem dpapr, Pres. duapr-dv-a, I err, sin
jeapt-o-v dpapt-j-copar pdpt-n-Ka qpaptn-Ony
13. Stem avé, Pres. avé-dv-w and avfa, I increase [aug-eo]
nv&-n-ca avénow nvénka nvénOnv

avénoopat (Passive)
14, ‘Stem Braor, Pres. Bra ve I bud

é-BXaor-0-v BdXaor-7-o €Bdaornka (§ 274 exc.)
15. Stem dap, Pres. dap Daven I sleep

€-dap6-o-v Sap6-7-copat SedapOnxa
16. Stem ¢x6, Pres. (dr)ex Odvopas, I am hated

(amr)nx9- 6-pnv (amr )exO-H-copat (amr) xOnpat

17. Stem i¢, Pres. i€dvo and ifw, I seat myself
18. Stem xx, Tres. ciydvw, J meet (comp. § 313 D. 6)

é-KtX-0-v KIX-7)-copat
19, Stem 078, Pres. oiSdva and oidéa, J swell
oid7)-c@ ¢ OnKa
20, Stem 6rA10 98, Pres, dAccOdvea, I slip
do b0-v Ode 6-7-cw

21. Stem dap, Pres. dagpaivopar, I smell

-bapp-6-pqy dopp-n-copat

22. Stem ddA, Pres. dd~pd-toK-dv-w (comp. § 324) and ddeirw,
I owe
&ph-o-y épr--c@ SpAnka

Dialects—9. Part. Perf. cexunas, Gen. xexun@ros.

10. with ryjyw, Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. éryayev, with Pres. réper.

Peculiar to the Hom. dialect are: Aor. pd-e(v) ,illuait, Fut. we-pn-
gopat, from Stem da, Pres. daira (pacivw), I shine, shew, Aor.
Pass. padvOnv.

§ 322. Dialects —12, Aor. iju8poroy for nupiroy (§ 257, D., comp.
§ 51, D.).

13. a(FéEo.

15, Aor. epiiBoy (§ 257, D.).

18, Ep. kiydvo.

21, (Herod. éopdyny, 1 Aor.]

192 FIFTH OR NASAL CLASS.

23. Stem 43, _—~Pres. dvddva, J please
24. Stem Oty, Pres. Oryydve, [touch

€-6iy-0-v OiEopat

25. Stem Ad3, Pres. AapBave, I take
€-AGB o-v Anyoua etAnpa (§ 274) eAnOny

etAnppac (seldom A€Anppear)
26. Stem AGO, Pres. XavOdv@, Iam hidden, withd76 (Cl. 8),
Mid. I forget
€-iid-o-v Ajow eAnOa

Mid. eAaOdunv Ajovopat AAnopat

27. Stem Ady, Pres. \ayxdve, I attain
€-\ay-o-v Angopas €ihnxa (§ 274)

ethyypar

28. Stem pad, Pres. pavddve, I learn
€-.i0-0-y pad-7n-copae pepadnka

29. Stem rv 0, Pres. ruv@dvopat, I learn, with wevOopas, Cl. 2
€-1¥6-d-pnv mevoopat menue pat

30. Stem rv x, Pres. ruyydve@, I meet, with redyo, I prepare,
Cl, 2, é-rux-o-y revéouat TE-TUX--Ka

seldom rérevya
31. Stem dvy, Pres. puyydva, I flee, with pevy@ (CL. 2).
Obs. 1.—The verbs in 23—31, whose Stem forms a short syllable,
insert another nasal in addition to the affix ay. In Baiva (1)

and dedpaivopa (21) « has crept in ($ 253), as well as in xep- —

8aivw, I gain, which forms only the Perf. xexépdyxa from the
Stem xepda; all the other forms are regular according to
Class 4.—A large part of the verbs (No. 11—16, 18—22, 28
and 30) form either some or all the tenses, except those of the
Present-Stem, from a Stem in ¢ (comp. below, § 326).

Obs, 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of
nouns: 7d Bi-pa, the step; 4 dbi-oi-s, the consumption; 6 Kap-
aro-s, the exhaustion; rd dijp-pa, the assumption, » AnO-n, the

Dialects.—23. Imperf. § 237, D., Aor. [éadov] evadov (§ 237),
[a3jc@] €ada.

25, [Her. Fut. Adpyopa, Perf. XeAdB8nxa, Aor. Pass. eAaupOny.

AeAaupa, Verb. Adj. Aapsrés.]

Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. XeAaBéoOa (§ 257, D.).

26. Pres. with éxrnOdve, cause to forget, Aor. €dnoa and heabov
(§ 257, D.), AeAaOdspunv (I forgot), Perf. Mid. \eAacpae.

27. Aor. A€axov, I shared with (Fut. Nd£opuar], Perf. Aedoyyxa,

29. Aor. Opt. mervOorro (§ 257, D.). ,

30. Also revyw, Aor. reruxeiv, Mid. rerixovro, Perf. rérvypat, 3
Plur. rerevxarat, Aor. érixOny, with the Pres. rerboxopat (§ 324
D, 37) I aim at, Aor. érixnoa, I met (§ 326).

; $324, SIXTH CLASS OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 193

i
|

§
:

Baa

forgetting; 4 rix-n, the chance, accident,—and from Stems
which are lengthened by €: 4 aic6-n-at-s, the sensation; rd
dudpr-n-pa, the error; 6 wab-n-r7-s, the scholar,

§ 323. ¢) The syllable ve is added to the following

_ Stems:
32. Stem Bv, Pres. Suva, I stop up
€-Bi-ca Bico Mid. BéBvopat
33. Stemix, Pres.ikvotpac, I come, with ixdvw, according
to § 322
tx-d-any t£owae Typat
34. Stem«v, Pres. xvvéa, I kiss
€-KU-ca

35. Stem wer, Pres. rirvéa, I fall (comp. rimro $ 327, 15).
&-rea-o-v (for €-rer-o-v) together with ¢-irv-o-v
36, Stem imey, Pres.imicxvodpar, I promise (comp. exo, §
327, 6)
trecxdounv brocxnoopat iméoxnpar
so likewise dpa xvovpas I wear (also dyméxopat), Aor. iipmerxov
Inf. dumeoxeiv.

§ 324. Sixth Class or Inchoative Verbs.

The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing ox to form
the Present-Stem. This ox is added to Vowel-Stems
(exe. 21) at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the
insertion of the connecting vowel . Several of the
yerbs belonging to this class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 18, 14, 16,
20) further strengthen the Present-Stem by means of
a reduplication with the vowels: yi-yvo-cx-w [Lat.

(g)-no-sc-0].

§ 323. Dialects—32. [Herod. Bive].

33. ikw, Aor. ifov (§ 268 D.), Part. ikuevos, favourable (§ 316 D).

34, kvooa.

Moreover, (to a—c) the Verbs:

37. Stem ddr, Pres. dderaive, Isin, Aor. #Acrov, Mid, dXirovro,
Part. Perf. ddernpevos, sinful.

38. Stem add, Pres. dkpdve, J acquire, Aor. iApov.

39. dywéw, only in Pres., J lead, with ayo.

40. épvyyavw, I roar, Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also épetyouat.

41. Stem xa&5, Pres. xavddvw, I embrace, Aor. txadov, Fut.
xeloopat, Perf. xéxavda,

1)

194 SIXTH CLASS OR INCROATIVE VERBS.

. Be

As many of these verbs denote a beginning or
coming into being, all of them are usually called —
Inchoatives. a

Stems wn a,

1, Stem yypa, Pres. ynpd-ax-w, I grow old (seldom yypd-e)
comp. sene-sc-0
é-yiipa-ca ynpa-coun ye-ypa-xa
Inf. ynpa-vas (§ 316, 2)
2. Stem dpa, Pres. 8e-8pd-ox-@, I run (used only in com-

: pounds:

*-8pa-y 8pd-coua d¢-8pa-na (§ 316, 3)
3. Stem 78a, Pres. #Bd-ocx-@, I become marriageable (comp.
pube-sc-o0

Bn-oa
4, Stem @va (from Oy), Pres. 6vj-ox-«, J die, (usually

€-Oiav-oy biiy-odpa ré-Oyn-ka (§ 317, 3)
Fat. 3, reOvnfo§291 Ovn-ré-s

(mortal ) ;
5. Stem ida, Pres. Ad-cx-opa, J conciliate ?
Mid. i\d-od-pyy i\d-o-o-pat ihd-oOn-v :
6. Stem pva, Pres. ps-pvy-ox-o, I remember am. 2
€-pyy-oa pyi-7@ €-pyi}-0On-v *
pe-prn-pas prn-o Onropas a

[memint] uf

7. Stem wpa, Pres. ri-rpd-ox-o, I sell 7

(for the Aor. and Fut. dmeSdéuny, mé-mpa-xa — €-rpa-Onv
arodecopa) mé-mrpa-pat mpa-Oncopm
mé-Tpa-oo,

8. Stem ga, Pres. dd-ocx-w, I say, comp. hy-pi, § 312,5 :
9. Stem xa and x Gy, Pres. ya-ox-@, I open the mouth 4
€-xav-oy xav-odpat ké-ynv-a
Stem tn e. .

10. Stem dpe, Pres. dpé-cx-w, J please ;
Hpe-oa apé-cw npe-oOny. :
Stems in w. ;

11. Stem Bre, Pres. (dva)Bid-oKx-opat, I revive eas ;

(av)e-Biw-v (§ 316, 13)
(av )«Biwoduny, I revived, comp. § 329

“

i §3824. SIXTH CLASS OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195
12. Stem Pro (from pod, § 51, D.), Pres. BAd-cx-o, J go
€-20h-ov pod-ovpat

13. Stem Bpa, Pres. Bi-Bpa-ox- ow, I consume .
Bé-Bpw-ka (Part. BeBpas, § 317,
D.

16)
: Bé-Bpw-pat
14, Stem yva, Pres. yi-yvd-ox-«, J recognise [Lat. (y)no-sc-o|
€-yvw-v (§ 316, 14) yvo-copa €~yvo-ka €~yva-o Onv
€~yV@ -O- Lat
15. Stem 6p (from Oop), Pres. €pa-acx-w, I leap
€-Oop-ov
16. Stem rpa, Pres. ri-rpa-cx-w, I wound
€-Tpa-ca TPo-cw Té-Tp@-pat €-1 p@-Onp
17. Stem 4d and dda, Pres. dd-i-ox-opar, Tam taken
{ é-Go-v éXe@-copat €-d\w-Ka OF A@-Ka
jAay (§ 316, 12) (comp. § 237)
18. Stem az fd and dp Bro, Pres. du8d-i-ox-o, J miscarry
7p Brw-ca 7pBdo-Ka
19. Stem dvad and dvaXa, Pres. dvad-i-oKx-o, I expend
dyd\o-ca OF dvi\woa dvado-cw {dvado-ka avado-Onv
also jvdhw-ca { dvio-ka { dymho-Onv.

ee ee ee

Stem in t.
P - 20. Stem me, Pres. mi-mi-ox-w, I give to drink, comp. m-v-w
i ; § 321, 4
€-ml-oa ti-cw

Stems in v.

21. Stem xv, Pres. xv-i-ox-o, J fructify
' 22, Stem peOv, Pres. pedv-ox-w, I make drunk, Mid. J become
drunk
€-pé0v-oa €-n€0b-c Onv.
Consonant-Stems.
23. Stem dum, Pres. dumddk-i-ox-o, J fail

pad dK-ov dpmddk-n-ow
i 24. Stem (ém)adp, Pres. (ém)atp-i-ox-opar, I enjoy
: emnup-Suny

Tnf. émavp-€o0a

§ 324. Dialects—12. Perf. pé-p-B-Aw-xa (comp. § 51, D. and
§ 282, D).

13. Aor. ¢-Bpa-v (§ 316, D. 23), with the Pres. Be8pado.

15. 8. Plur. Fut. Oopéovra: [with 64p-vv-pat, according to § 319],

16. With rpo-o.

24, Aor. émnipoy Inf, emaupeiv.

190 SIXTH CLASS OR INCHOATIVE VERBS.

25. Stem evp, Pres. ebp-i-ox-a, I find r
eip-oy (Mid.) eip-i-ow eUp-n-K-a— etp=e-Ogy
evp-n-mat = €bp-e-Oj-copat

26. Stem orep, Pres. crep-i-ox-o, I deprive (with orep@,
Mid. orépopat, I am ets f

é-orép-n-oa OTEp-7}-7@ ¢-orép-n-Ka €-orep-1}-Onv
€-orép-n-pat
27. Stem dd vx, Pres. ddv-ox-w, J shun
fAvéa arvEw
28. Stem d:8ax, Pres. dcdd-cK-o, I teach
e-didaga dddE de-iday-a = e-Bay Onv
be-didaypat
29. Stem Adx, Pres. Ad-ox-o, J utter, speak
€ \uix-ov Aak--copat Aaphie
€-\ax-n-oa Aé-hdx-a,

Obs. 1.—The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before ox.
Several of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affix-
ing e to the Stem (comp. § 322, Obs., and § 826), especially
Nos. 23, 25, 26, 29.

Obs, 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation
of nouns: 6 Odv-a-ro-s, death; +d pyn-peio-v, the memorial;
6 airé-pod-o-s, the deserter ; 1 yvé-pn, the opinion; n Ge-ot-s,
the capture; 6 diddox-ado-s (from the Present-Stem), the
teacher ; 7 Sdax-7 (from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction, and
from Stems which are enlarged by €: rd etp-n-pa, the discovery;
4) orép-n-or-s, the deprivation.

Dialects—26. Aor. grepéoa:, Part. Pass. Aor. orepeis.

28. [didacxjoa] a scoondary Stem is da, Aor. dێdaov, J taught
(§ 326, D. 40).

29. Ton. form Ankéw (§ 325), Fem. Part. Perf. XeAdxvia.

And the Special Verbs :

30. Stem dda, Pres, dddjoxw, I become great, Aor. #ASavov, I
made great. /

31. Stem «de, Pres. xuxAjoxo, with caréw, I call.

82. Stem dav, Pres. [hav-cx-@] mi-pai-ox-o, J show,

33. Stem drad (from ap), Pres. dw-ap-i-ox-w, I deceive, Aor.
Frapoy, Subj. drape.

34. Stem dp, Pres. dp-ap-i-cx-w, I fit, Aor. #papov, I fitted, Perf.
Gpnpa, I suit, Fem. Part. dpdpvia, Part. Mid, dppevos, suitable, aj
Weak Aor. jipoa, T fitted, Aor. Pass. dp6qv. “3 oz

35. Stem ix, Pres. é-i-ox-w, I make equal, (comp. § 317, B 7).

36. Impf. toxe(v), he spoke.

37. Stem rvyx (comp. § 322, 30), Pres. riricxopar, I aim at. E

ae

————

ae ee ee

wy

———

§ 325, SEVENTH OR E-CLASS. 197

§ 325. Seventh or H-class.

A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by «.
A) The enlarged Stem in ¢ is the Present-Stem, the
shorter serves to form the other tenses.
1. Stem yap, Pres. yapé-o, Imarry (Act. uxorem duco, Mid. nubo)
&ynp-a yap- (Mid.) ye~yap-n-Ka
ye-yap-n-pat
2. Stem yO, Pros. yn Oé-a, I rejoice
ye-779-a, I am rejoiced
3. Stem dox, Pres. Soxé-w, I seem

€-doEa b6£@ Mid. d80y-p0r
4, Stem xvp, Pres. kup é-o, and xipa, I meet
é-Kup-oa Kipow ‘

5. Stem paprup, Pres. papripé-a, I am witness
Mid. papripopa, I call to witness
6. Stem fup, Pres. upée, I shave Mid. Ef popacr

e-E0p-dynv efvp-n-pat
7. Stem adr, Pres. raré-opat, J eat
é-raodpuny réeracpat
8. Stem ped, Pres. pumr-é-w, and pimr-w (according to § 249),
I throw
epprpa pio éppipa {<ppigny
eppippat eppipOny
9. Stem 26, Pres. &0€-w, I push
€-woa (§ 237) doo (@0jnc0a Mid.) &-wo-pat é-ooOnv

§ 325. Dialects.—1 Fut. yau-éw, 3 Sing. Fut. Mid. yapéocera,
she will marry.

3. [Soxnow, eddxnoa].

8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. €pépirro.

Besides :

a) Stem yeyor, Pres. yeyove-w, I call, Perf. yéyova, Fut.
yeyornce.

b) Stem Sir, Pres. Saré-ona, I distribute, Fut. Sdcoua, Aor,
ddocaro, Perf. déSacrat.

¢) Stem dovz, Pres. doume-w, I make a sound, Aor. é(y)Soimn-ca,
Porf. 8€-dour-a.

d) Stem eid, €A, Pres. e?-Ad-w, I press, Impf. éeideov (§ 237),
Aor. 3 Plur. €\cav, Perf. Mid, eda, Aor. Pass. éddny (§ 295),
8 Plur. ade, Inf. ddjpevat.

e) Stem xedXad, Pres, xehadé-w, I resound, Part. neddd-wv,

f) Stem xevr, Pres. xevré-w, I sting, Aor. Inf. xév-cas

198 SEVENTH OR E-CLASS.

‘

Ots.—In some verbs the Stem with ¢ extends even furth
the Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns:

6 yap-o-s, the wedding ; 7 dd£éa, the appearance ; rd paprip-o0-y
the testimony ; 7) &-ot-s Or &6n-o1s, pushing.
§ 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem, ‘the
enlarged one in ¢ serves to form the other tenses.

10. Stem aid(e), Pres. atd-opace and aidd-ona, Iam ashamed
11. Stem ddre &(€), Pres. dX é§-w, I ward off

HArc&-apny ade&-1-copat
12, Stem dy He), Pres. dx 6-opar, I am vexed rd
dx b€-copat 9xO€-cOny

18. Stem Book(e), Pres. Bdax-w, I pasture
Pookn-cw ; from the Stem Bo the Verb. Adj. f
14. Stem BovA(e), Pres. BovrA-opas, J will te
(Augment § 234) — Bovdrj-copat Be-BovAn-par é-Bovdn-Onv —
15. Stem de(e), Pres. d€-@, I need (dei, it is necessary), N
dopa, I re _
€-5€n-ca 8ej-co de-8én-ka é-beh-Onv (§ 328,2)
16. Stem ép(e), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13) é
np-ounv, Lasked épy-copat, Inf. épérba
17. Stem €f/(e), Pres. €p6-0, J go away
iiproe ‘ewe Sao

Dialects—g) Stem cruz, Pres. xrure-@, I ring, Aor. &xrim-or.

h) Pres. melo and muele-a, I press, Aor. éricoa. :

#) Stem pry, Pres. pryé-w, I shudder, Perf. ppiya.

k) Stem orvy, Pres. orvyé-o, I hate, shun, Aor. on eo
orvyjoa, €orvéa, I made dreadful.

1) Stem Prd, Pres. hiréw, I love, Aor. é-pid-d-pny.

m) Pres. xpacpew, I help, Aor. éxypaucpov.

Three Verbs in aw with a moveable a are here to be noticed:

n) Stem yo, Pres. you-w, I wail, Impf. €yo-ov.

0) Stem pax, Pres. pyxd-o-pa, I low, Perf. pé-pyx-a, Aor
€-piik-ov.

P) Stem pix, Pres. pixd-o-pa, I roar, Perf. pépsix-a, Aor,
€utK-ov. ae:

§ 326. Dialects.—10. 78¢c0aro, Imperat. aidecoat, Fut. acon “ii
Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. aideaOev.

11. dadkor (§ 257).

14, Pres. Béderat, Impf. €Bddovro, Perf. BéBouda.

15. Aor. édetinoa, once Sioa, I was in want of, also Pres. 8

16. Pres. eivoua, Fut. eipjropa.

r a

0 ee

§ 320. SEVENTH OR E-CLASS, 199

18. Stem €id(e), Pres. dda, J sleep (generally cabevdo)
Augm. § 240 (xad)etd7-07@

19, Stem éy(e), Pres. €y-a, I cook
Wea éyij-copat i y-pae ii-Onv

Verb. Adj. épOds

20. Stem Oed(e), or €OeX(e), Pres. O€d-w, or €6éd-@, I will
pOeAn-oa (€)6eAn-cw 70€An-ka

21. Stem i({e), Pure Stem €8, Pres. ifopac, I seat myself,

also if{avw, Class 5, comp. eCopat

_ €xabiodyny (§ 240) xabignoopat and xadedodpa (§ 263)

22. Stem cAav and kdace, Pres. kAaiw (KrAdw), I weep, comp.
§ 253
éx\au-ca kraijo@ ~— with kAavoopae
23. Stem pax(e), Pres. udyopar, I fight
e-paxe-oduny = axodpat (§ 263) pe-pdyn-pac
24. Stem pede), Pres. wéree por, tt is a care to me, Mid.
eropa, I care for, take care of
€-pehy-ce HeAH-ee pe-péAn-ke €-pweAn-Onv
(€mt)pednoopua
25. Stem ede), Pres. weAX-, I am on the point, hesitate
-HEAAN-Ca pEAAH-T@
(§ 234, Obs.)
26. Stem perce), Pres. pév-o, I remain [mane-o, man-si], Verb.
Adj. pev-e-rds
€-petva pev-O pee-L€vN-Ka
27. Stem pul(e), Pres. pig, I suck
e-pigy-oa putn-c@
28. Stem vep(e), Pres. véu-o, I assign

. Svea vep-@ ve-veun-Ka, (Mid.) é-vepn-Onv

29. Stem 6¢(¢), Pure Stem 64, Pres. d¢-@, I smell
&Cn-ca 8j-ow 6-wd-a (§ 275, D.) [Lat. od-or]
30. Stem oi(e), Pres. ot-opas, L think (comp. § 244)
olfj-copas @n-Ony
81. Stem ofx(e), Pres. ofy-opae, I am of
olxn-copas 0¢x-@k-a

Dialects—19. [Imperf. épee.]

23. paxé-opat, Part. paxerdpevos or paxeotpevos, Fut. paynoopas
and payéoopat.

24, Perf. péunre, Plup. peunret, Perf. Mid. peé-p-B-de-rae (Plup.
-ro), § 51, D.

26. Perf. uéuova, 1 am disposed, strive.

30. Pres, di-opat, di-w, Aor. Mid. dicaro, Aor. Pass. divOny.

31. Perf. ofynxa (otynuac), with the Pres. oly-vé-w, according to
§ 323.

200 SEVENTH OR E-CLASS. § 326,

(oty-wx-a, with irreg. Reduplication [§ 275] for oty-wx-a, comp,

§ 35, a)
82. Stem dgecd(e), Pure Stem ded, Pres, dpeidto, I owe
(§ 263, Obs.)

&per-ov [utinam] ddpedj-cw apein-Ka
apein-ca

33, Stem wep d(e), Pres. repdo '
€-rapd-ov rapon-copat né-ropd-a

34. Stem m(e)r(e), Pres. rér-opar, 1 fly
€-r(€)r-d-pny m(€)rh-copat

(§ 61 ¢)

35. Stem pv(e), Pres. péw, J flow (§ 248)
€pev-oa (rare, § 260, 2) pun-copas €ppty-Ka éppuy

(with pedoopar)
36, Stem or P(e), Pres. orei B-a, I tread
é-oTiBn-pat

87. Stem rumre, Pure Stem rur (§ 249), Pres, TumT a, IT strike
€-rurr-ov tunty-ow, Mid. ré-rup-pat €-rim-ny

38. Stem xacpe, Pure Stem yap, Pres. xyatpo, I rejoice (§ 253)

xatpn-cw ke-Xapn-ka €-xdp-nv
ke-xdpn-pat .

Obs.—The ¢€ sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present,
sometimes only in some of them ; sometimes it is added to the
pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: pev-e, ortPre,
ife, 6¢e, rvmre. The formation of nouns shows the same
varieties: aidj-por, shame-faced; 4 BodvAn-ors, voluntas;

Dialects.—38. Part. Perf. ceyapnas, Fut. xeyapnow, Aor. éxnparo,
and 3 Plur. xexdpovro, § 257, D. .
Besides : :
39. Stem ar O(e), Pres. GO-opa, I become well, Fut. ddOn-copat. .
40. Stem da, Aor. dédaov (§ 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. Inf.
Seddacba (to get to know), Aor. Pass. eddny (I learned), besides
Fut. danoopa, Perf, de3anxa, Part. Perf. dedads.
41. Stem «n8(e), Pres. xyd-w, I grieve, Fut. xydyq-cw, Perf. xé-
«nd-a (I am concerned), Fut. xexadjoopat.
42, Stem ped(e), Pres. péd-w, I rule, Mid. I reflect, Fut.
pedn-copat.
43, Stem 116, Pres. weidw, I persuade, Fut. also ri6qoo, Part.
Aor. mOncas.
44, Stem r.op(e), Aor. €-rop-ov and é-répy-ca, I bored rahe 4
Fut. reropn-co.
45. Stem id, Pres. eidoum, J spare, Aor, Mid. mequdeobar
(§ 257, D.), Fut, wegsPj-oonas

§ 327. EIGHTH OR MIXED CLASS. 201

ededn-porv, voluntary; 6 paxy-rh-s, the warrior; 7 pédAXAn-
ot-s, the delay; pév-tuo-s, remaining; 6 vdp-o-s, the law;
4 68-pn, the smell ; 4 xap-d, the joy.

§ 327. Eighth or Mixed Class.

Several essentially different Stems unite to form one
verb :

1, Present aipé-o, I take; Mid. I choose; Stems aipe and é2.

eid-ov (§ 236) aipn-ce Rpn-Ka npe-Ony
Inf. Xewy
eihdpunv aipy-copas neN- pau

2. Pres. €px-opar, I go, come; Stems épx and é€dA(v)d
HALv]O-ov €Xev-comat €\-700-a (§ 275)

Imperat. €d6é (§ 333, 12)
Inf. edéeiv. The place of the Fut. is generally supplied by ets.
8. Pres. €pd- and péf-«, Ido; Stems épd, épy, pey
é-pefa ép£a €pexOnv
Obs.—The original Verbal-Stem is Fep-y, hence rd Fépy-o-v (§ 34,
D.) Attic épy-o-v, work ; from (F)épy, by the addition of the en-
largement of the Present « (cl. 4), arose (F)epy-t-o, and from
this ¢pd-e. But by metathesis, Fepy became Fpey, and with
loss of the F, pey, whenee the regular Present according to
cl. 4, is péf-a, 7.¢., pey-t-@ (§ 251).
4, Pres. €a Oi-w, I eat, Stem éo 1, €5(e) [ed-0] and pay

€-plty-ov Fut. €-opa €3-7doKa (§ 275) nd¢-o On»
(§ 265) €6-ndeopar

5. Pres. €m-opar, I follow, (Impf. eimduny, § 236) Stems éx

and o(e)r

€é-o7r-dpnv eyopat Subj. omd-pas Inf. erécba

Obs.—The original Stem is oem, from which ém has arisen by
weakening o to the rough breathing (§ 605). In the Aor, Ind.
the rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the
Augment, Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61 c). .

§ 327. Dialects.—1. [dpatpnxa, dpaipnpa, § 275.)

2. Aor. #AvGov, Perf. ciindovOa (§ 317, D. 13), Part. eAnAovOes.

8. [Pres. épd-w] Perf. gopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. édpyes, Aor.
épéa and épe€a.

4, Pres, Ow and ¢da, Inf. €3-pevat, Perf. €-48-a, Mid. edq Soran.

; Pres. Act. érw, 1 am occupied, Aor. €-on-ov, Inf. omeiv, Part,
orov, Fut. é~o, Subj. Aor. Mid, géomwpa, éoroipny, éonécOay,
éomdpevos,

202 EIGHTH OR MIXED CLASS. $827,
-~ j
6. Pres. €x-@, Ihave, hold (Impf. efor § 236), Stems €y and ax(e)
é-cx-ov, I seized 1. &w (Mid.) +
Subj. cx@, Opt. cxoiny
Inf. cxeiv, Part. cxov 2. oxq-ow €-vyn-Ka e-oxe-Onv
Imperat. oxé-s (§ 316, 11) e-oxn-pae = xs: axe ds
Mid. é-cy-denv, cx@pat, etc,
Inf. ox-€oOae
Obs.—The original Stem is oex, from which éy has arisen by
weakening o to the rough breathing (§ 60 5), From vey by
syncope came €-cx-0-v, by metathesis oye, from which oxé-s,
€-cxn-xa. From éx came the Future é£o, and the Verbal Adj.
éx-ré-s, whilst in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was
changed into the soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the d
following syllable (§ 53 b, Obs.) : €y-@ for éy-@. Comp. also :
imoryvéopat and dpaiorxveopat, § 323, 36.—All the Stem forms
also appear in the formation of nouns: 1é oyjj-ya, the form; ;
4 €&«-s, the bearing; €x-vpd-s, firm, tenable,
7. Pres. picy-o, I mix, misc-eo, Stems pioy and pry, additional
form, peyvupe (§ 319, 18).
8. Pres. épa-o, I see, Stems dpa, 28, or
eid-ov = (Mid.) 6yrouar ێ-@pa-Ka SpOnv
én-wr-a (§ 275)
Imperat, id¢ Mid. i800 (§ 333, 12)

Inf. id-ety éopa-pat éparés
Sp-pat onrés

Obs.—On the irregular Augment of the Stem 6pa (Impf. éopav)
§ 237.—The Stem 78 was originally Fed (§ 34 D.). Comp, ©
vid-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, é-fid-or, with Syllabic Augment,
contracted to fd-0-v, but Subj. 1-@, Opt. 13-o1-~e. The Perf. of
this Stem is ofda, I know (§ 317, 6).—All three Stems appear
also in the formation of Nouns: rd épa-pa, the spectacle; rd
etd-os, the form, appearance; % dye-s, the sight; rd dp-pa, the

eye, look. ’ an
9. Pres. rdox-w, I suffer, Stem racy, wa6(e), revd
€-iib-ov qel-copat wé-mrov6-a wr

(for mevO-copa, § 50)

Dialects.—6. Perf. dy-wx-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. Sypat, 3 Plur.
Plup. éxaro.

8. Aor. i8ov, Weak Aor. Mid. écicaro and eicaro, Part. éevodpevos
to the Pres. eidoua, I appear, resemble (comp. § 34, D. 4). As a
shorter additional form of the Stem é6pa we find in Homer the
Stem ép(fop), thence 3 Plur. Pres. emi ép-o-vrat, they overlook,

9. 2 Plur. wémoade (§ 317, D. 14), Part. wemaévia.

Oe ——

§ 327. EIGHTH OR MIXED CIASS. 203

Obs.—From the shorter Stems we have the nouns: 1rd rdé-os,
the suffering ; 1d mév6-os, the mourning.

10. riv-w, I drink, Stems wiv, wt, wo [Lat. yo-tus] comp. § 321, 4,

€-7rt-ov Fut. wi-ouat (§ 265) mé-1rw-xa é-776-Onv
Imperat. wi-6 § 316, 15 mé-Tro-pat qo-Tds

Obs.—From the Stem zo we have the nouns: 6 wd-rn-s, po-tor;
) 16-o1-s, po-tio; rd mo-rnpto-v, po-culu-m.

11. Pres. rpéx-, I run, Stems rpex and Spep
é-Spiip-ov Spapodp-ac de-Spdun-xa — Opexréov

OpéEopar (§ 54 c)
Obs.—Nouns from both Stems: 6 rpox-d-s, the wheel; 6 Spop-ev-s,

the runner.
12. Pres. Pép-a, I carry [fero], Stems pep, éve(y)«, of
iveyk-ov oi-c@ = ewnvox-a (§ 275) —ol-o-Ojcopat
ol-o-rds
iveyk-a (§ 269) nvex-Onv
qveyk-d-pnv olcopar ev-vey-pat évex-Onoopate

Obs.—From the Stem ¢ep we have the nouns: 16 pép-e-rpo-v,
the bier; 6 ddp-o-s, the contribution, tax; 6 dp-ro-s, th

burden.
13. Aorist eimov, I spoke, Stems eiz, ép and pe
elr-ov
eiw-a(§ 269) ép-@ _—eit-py-xa (§ 274, Obs.) éppnOnv
Imperat. eiw-¢ Inf. etw-civ eit-pyn-par py-Onoopat
(§ 333, 12)
ei-pij-o-opat pn-T6-s.

Obs.—The Stem eim has arisen by contraction from é-em, and
é-er from fe-Fer, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-
Stem fem (éros, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason why
the diphthong «7 belongs not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.).
The Stem ép (Fut. ép@), to which the Mid. épécOa, to ask
(§ 326, 16) belongs, has likewise lost F, it being originally Fep
(comp. Lat. ver-bu-m). From fep, by Metathesis (§ 59) arose

Dialects.—11. €Opeéa [Spapéopar], Sédpopa,

12. 2 Plur. Imperat. Pres. pép-re [Lat. ferte], Aor. veka,
8 Sing. Opt. eveixar (eveixor) [ Perf. évivevypat], Imperat. Aor. oice,
Inf. oioéwevar (§ 268, D.)

13. Pres. efpw (Cl. 4. d), Aor. gom-ov (Stem oem, comp. 5) 1
spoke, Imperat. €om-ere, Pres, év-éx-w, Imperat. evvere (§ 62 D.),
Aor. éuorov, Subj. évicra, Opt. 2 Sing. eviowois, Imperat. émoze
and gnomes, Fut, eviyw and énorjco.

204 EIGHTH OR MIXED CLASS. §328.

Foe, after the loss of the Ff, pe, hence et-py-xa for Fe-Fpn-ka,
€ppn-On-v for e-Fpn-On-v, pn-rd-s for Fpn-ro-s. As Present forms
npi, A¢ye, and, especially in compounds, ayopedw may be used,
e.g. admayopetw, I forbid; Aor. dreimov, Fut. dwepo, Perf,
dreipnxa. Nouns from the Stems éw and pe: 4 dy, the voice;
ro pi-pa, the word ; 6 py-rwp, the orator.
In addition to these there are three verbs which re-
duplicate the Stem in the Present:
14, Present yi-yv-opa: (also yiv-opat), I become
Stem yt-y(e)v and yev(e) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-ui)
€~yev-6-pny yev'y-vopat yé-you-a
ye-yevn-pat
Obs.—From the Stem yev we have rd yév-os, the race, genus;
oi yor-eis, the parents; from yeve, i yéve-ct-s, the origin.
15. Pres. ri-mr-o (from ri-wer-o), J fall, Stem win, wer,
Tre
€-reo-oy from €-mer-ov (§ 60 a), meo-otpa (§ 264) wé-mra-ka
(comp. § 323, 35).
Obs.—F rom the Stem rr: 4 mré-ot-s, rd wrad-pa, the fall,

16. Pres. re-rpd-@, J bore, Stems 7 pa and rpa
€-Tpn-oa TpI-cw

(§ 270, Obs.).

IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING.

§ 328. The most important irregularities of meaning
consist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle,
and Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the
transitive and intransitive meaning.

A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning

1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future
with Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with
most verbs of classes 5 to 8.

2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle,

Dialects.—14. Perf. 1 Plur. yé-yd-pev, § 317, D. 2, comp. § 329, 8.
15. Perf. Part. me-mre-as, § 317, D. 17 \
Besides :

17. i-atw, Stem ad, af, I sleep (¢ as Reduplication, comp. § 308)

Aor. deca. :

Sa ny Tre

— |

§ 529. IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 205

and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form.
Those are called Passive Deponents, whose Aorist has a
Passive form : ¢.g., BovrAopuat, I wish, éBovanjOnv, I wished.
The most important Passive Deponents are the following,
of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which
is used along with the Middle:
@yapa, I admire (§ 312,8) «tdaBdoua, I am on my guard

*aideoua, I dread (§ 301, 1). *7Sopa, TI rejoice

a@dopa, I ramble *éy \ 6 es take to heart
Gusdddopa, I rival spo upéopas I am inclined
*dpveopa, I deny *eme > i am anxious
"Gy Oona, I am indignant peAopas
xOopar 9
*” (§ 326, 12) } pera I repent

BovdAopa, I wish (§ 326,14) dao I despair
Sopa, I need (§ 326,15) *da , I reflect
d€pxopa, I look PE cae: orale ponder
*Siadéyoua, I converse ™po I anticipate
dvvapat, I can (§ 312, 9) *olona, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30)
évayridopat, I am opposed o¢Bopa, I reverence

éxiorapat, I know (§ 312,10) iroripéopar, I am ambitious

Obs.—Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as

the Passive.

8. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a

Middle meaning: cid¢paive, I rejoice, eippavOnv, I
rejoiced ; atpépw, I cause to turn, éotpadny, I turned
—myself ; paive, I show, épavnv, I appeared, &e.
' 4, The Passive forms of several Deponents have also
a Passive meaning: idoyat, I heal, idOnv, I was healed ;
dixouat, I receive, édéyOnv, I was received; in some
even the Middle forms have both Active and Passive
meaning: pipéouat, I imitate, pwepiunuat, I have imi-
tated, or have been imitated.

§ 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning.
When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between

§ 329. Dialects.—The Strong Aor. érpadov (rpépo, I nourish) i in
Hom. has an intransitive meaning, J grew up. In Herod. dveyvov
(avayryvooxw) means I read, avéyvoca, I persuaded ; Hom. #piror,
d fell, Aor. to éepeire (cl. 2), 1 throw down; acca, I caused to
dwell, Aor. to vaiw, I dwell,

206 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING.

Transitive and Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the

intransitive and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the
transitive meaning; when there are two Perfects the
Strong likewise has the intransitive and the Weak the
transitive meaning; if there is only one Perfect, it is
intransitive. The most important cases of this kind are:

1. Stem ora, Pres. torn, I place, Weak Aor.
éxrnca, I placed, Fut. orjow, I shall place, Pres, Mid.
iotayat, I place myself, Strong Aor. éornv, I placed
myself—stood, Perf. éornxa, I have placed myself, or
stand (§ 503), Plup. éorjxew, I stood, Fut. éornto
(§ 291), I shall stand.

Obs.—This same important distinction appears in the numerous
compounds: adiornpt, I cause to revolt, to separate, améorny,
I revolted—separated, adéornxa, I have revolted; eiornu, I
put over, éréatny, I put myself over, épéornxa, I am put over;
xablornu, I put down, xaréorny, I put myself forward, rabe
ornxa, J stand there or forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially
Middle meaning, ¢. g., xarearjcaro, he determined for himself
(comp. § 479).

2. Stem Ba, Pres. Baivw, I go, is commonly intransi-
tive with the Fut. Bjcouar; but in the poets, I cause
to go, also in the Weak Aor. é8nca, Fut. Byow; but
intransitive in the Strong Aor. é8nv, I went, BéBnxa, I
have advanced, stand firm (BéBa-wo-s, firm).

3. Stem du, Pres. diw, I beget, Weak Aor. épvea,
¢vcw; but the Strong Aor. édiv, I was begotten,
aéhixa, I am by nature, to which the Pres. is dvopar.

4. Stem Sv, Pres. dvw, I sink, hide, often transitive:
xatadva, I cause to sink, also édvca, dvcw; but edvv, I
sunk myself, I dived; évédvv, I put on; e&édov, I

off.
5. Stem ofe(s), Pres. cBévviyut, I quench, Weak Aor.
é-oBe-ca, I quenched, Strong Aor. és 8nv, I was quenched,
éxPnxa, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is cBévyvpas.

6. Stem cxed, Pres. cxéddr\w, I dry, but Aor. éoxAny,
I gn-w dry, with the Pres. cxé\ropan

a
se
4

—

§ 331. ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 207

7. Stem uz, Aor. éiov, I drank, &rica (mimicxw), I
caused to drink.

8. Stem yev, Pres. yeivouat (comp. § 327, 14), I am
born, Aor. éyewapny, I begat.

9. Stem 6A, Pres. ddd, I rwin, Strong Perf. droXa,
I am ruined, perit, Weak Perf. éraXrexa, I have ruined,

perdide.

§ 330. In a number of verbs' the Strong Perfect alone
has only an intransitive meaning, as: 3
1. dyvumt, I break, Pf. éaya, I am broken (§ 275, 2).
2. éyeipw, I awake __,, éypiyryopa, Tam awake (§ 275,1).
3. wel0w, I persuade ,, wérovfa, I trust (weiPopa, I

follow, obey).
4. wiyvuu, I fasten ,, wérnya, I stick fast.
5. pyyvumt, I tear » eppewya, I am torn (§ 278).
6. ona, I cause to rot ,, céonra, I am rotten.
7. ryKw, I melt » TeTnKA, LT am melted.
8. daivw, I show (rarely shine), Pf. wépyva, I have
appeared (paivouat, I appear).
On the distinction between dvéwya and dvewya, and

between zémrpaya and zrérpaya, see § 279.

§ 331. GrnerAL VIEW OF THE ACCENTUATION
OF VERBAL Forms.

The general rule given § 229, that in the verb the
accent is removed as far back as possible from the end, is
subject to the following exceptions:

For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen
from § 87. Hence doxe, éddpev (§ 263), recoduas
(wimto, § 327, 15), TiOdpyar (§ 302), AvOd, AvOFs
(§ 296). Comp. however § 307, Ods.

§ 330. Dialects —9. Hom. Saiw, J set fire to, Pf. dédna, I have
caught fire.

10. Hom. ira, I give hope, Pf. oda, I hope.

ll. ,, Oecipw, I destroy ,, (d:)&pOopa, I am destroyed,

2us ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. g32or-

§ 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general

rule laid down in § 85, with the following limit-
ations :

1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable
on which the first word had it before the composition:
amddos, give back (amo), not amodos; émloyes, hold in
(éri), not eruryes.

2. In double compounds the accent never goes back
beyond the first: cuvéxdos, give out with; mapévOes, put
in besides.

8. The accent never passes beyond the Augment or
Reduplication: amie, he went away; adixras, he has
arrived. This is the case even when the Augment or
Reduplication is not expressed: tzretkov, I gave way ;
dvedpe, he found again; civoida, I know along with,
from oida, I know, forms an exception,

§ 333. The other exceptions are:

1. All Infinitives in vas have the accent on the
penultima: tiévat, Ocivar, NedvKévar, AvORvat.

2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs
in @ is perispome: AaPeiv.

8. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone:
rAaBéo Oa.
' 4, the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the
accent on the penultima: zawdedcat, érawécas (§ 268,
Obs. 1).

5. : likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle:
memradeva0at, Kexopicba.

6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs
in w is oxytone: AaPav.

7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong
Aorist Active of verbs in we is oxytone: tiels, amo
Sous.

8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active: —

deduKas (via, os, Gen. dros), and
9. that of both Aorists Passive: AvOeis, ypadeis.

.

—* S
- § 337,

FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209

10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxy-
tone: AEAupévos.

11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong
Aorist Middle is perispome: AaB8od. Only the com-
pounds of monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic preposi-
tions form an exception: mepiMov (mepitiOnut), comp.
§ 307, Obs.

12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active
in the following verbs is oxytone: eiré, speak; érOe,
come ; evpé, find ; idé, see; NaPé, take. But darere, &e.,
according to § 85.

On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the
Weak Aorist, see § 268, Ods. 1.

Precouniar Forms or VERBS IN THE Ionic DIALECT.

§ 334. Dialects—The Iterative form denoting the repetition of
an act is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic ©
prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters ox affixed to the histo-
rical person-endings in the Active as well as in the Middle by
means of the connecting vowels o and e; hence 1 Sing. Act. cxoy,
Mid. cxopnv. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod.
always. ‘The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect.

§ 335. Dialects—The Iterative ox may be affixed to the Present
as well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems; hence we
distinguish Iterative Imperfects, as: €x-e-cxo-v, 1 used to have, and
Jierative Aorists, as: %5-e-cx-o-v, 1 used to see, éddoa-cx-e-v, he
used to drive; the former denote the repetition of continuance, the
latter the repetition of the occurrence of an action (§ 492).

§ 836. Dialects.—In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation
is the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and
the Iteratives of the Strong Aorist: pev-e-cxov (uévw, I remain),
Book-é-cxovro (Bécxo, I pasture), piy-e-cxe (pevyo, I flee);
a occurs rarely in its stead: pimr-a-cxov (pita, I hurl), kpiat-a-oxov
(xptmre, J hide), Contracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the
two vowels uncontracted: xadéecxov (xadéw, J call), or reject one
of them: Séecxov (@6é, I push), etaoxov (éaw, I leave); the Stems
in a sometimes change ae to aa: vaerdackov (vaerdw, I inhabit),
comp. raerda, § 243, D.

§ 337. Dialects.—In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation
ox is aflixed immediately to the Stem: é-pa-cxoy (Stem ga, dnp,

FP

one =
210 ¥FORMS OF VERBS IN THE I a

I say), ord-cxov (orny, T placed myself), foxov i
(Stem és, efui, J am), xé-oxero (Stem Kes, cena.
Gidnae, 1 pu), irrwanon Ginyrne I tear) For
other formations (ddeca, ddéow), € is the c
Sr ecw.
ox is further appended directly to the Weak .
épnrica-cxe (épyria, J pacify), pynod-oxero (yrdopat, r

§ 338, Dialects.—Many Stems of the Present and Strong
in poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have @ added witho
cular modification of meaning. The Preterite is the m
of the Stems thus strengthened. The 6 is connec
Stems sometimes by a, sometimes by «. The most i
of this kind are:

Sixo, additional form dioxaOw, J pursue

cixa as » €xabo, I yield

apive a » nprvaboy, J warded off

eipyo Ve »» &pytOov (eépyabov), I separated, sk

Kio ss »» exiabov, I went

Geipopat yy 9» nepeBovra, they hover

aycipo sy, » myepeOovro, they were asseinWed | \

hbive a » pbwibe sey
exo a n oxedcey, Aor, Inf, to hold. :

J

SN ee

ae

§ 840. SIMPLE DERIVATION. 21)

Iil.—DERIVATION.

Cuap. XIII.

§ 339. A word is either simple, 7. e. sprung from a
single Stem: Ady-os, speech (Stem rev), yead-w, I write
(Stem ypad),—or compound, ¢. e. formed from two or
more Stems: oyo-ypado-s, speech-writer.

A) Smmpte Derivation.

Simple words are either primitive (Verbalia), i. e.
are formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245): dpx-n,
beginning, from the Verbal-Stem apy (dpya, I begin) ;
or derived (Denominativa), 7. e. formed from a Nominal-
Stem (§ 100): dpya-io-s, incipient, ancient, from the
Nominal-Stem apya, Nom. apy, beginning.

§ 340. Mouns are usually formed—whether from a
Verbal or from a Nominal-Stem—by means of a ter-
mination. This termination, added to the Stem, is
called a derivative-ending or sufiz. Thus dAdyo-s is
formed by means of the suffix o from the Verbal-Stem
Ney, apxa-io-; by means of the suffix so from the

_Nominal-Stem dpya. The suffixes serve more clearly

to define the idea of the noun, or to mark the different
relations in which the general idea of the Stem is to be
conceived: Verbal-Stem zrove (mow, I produce, com-
pose), ovn-T1}-s, compos-e7; oin-ct-s, composi-tion ;
roin-wa(t), composition, poem; Verb-Stem ypad
(ypado, I write), ypad-et-s, writer; ypad-i-s, writing
instrument ; ypday-ya, writing ; ypay-un, a line; Nom.-
Stem dSctxa (Sixn, right), Sixa-vo-s, right, just; Sixavo-
zuvn, righteousness ; Nom.-Stem Baccirev (Baoirev-s,
king), Bacine-id, queen; Bacire-ia, kingdom; Bacid-
ixo-s, kingly.
Obs. 1.—Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix:
gvrak, guard, Nominal and Verbal-Stem dvdAak (pvddoca,

212 SsUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES,

cl. 4, a, I guard); 8p, voice, Stem én, Verh-Stem
(eimeiv),

Obs. 2.—-The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary Pree
before suffixes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, &.): ypag,
ypdp-pa, Aey, ets, word; SiKad (Sixdlo), Suxag-ris. juge.
Vowel-Stems readily len gthen the vowel and sometimes insert
o before several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the
Weak Passive-Stem (§ 298): zoin-ya (comp. me-oin-pat),
oet-o-pd-s, shaking (comp. o€-cet-o-pat).

Obs. 8.—In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change
in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect
(§ 278): Stem AAO, ANO-y, forgetfulness, comp. A€-AnO-a ;
Stem wepa, moun-y, escort, comp. mé-ropd-a; Stem Aum,
hourd-s, remaining, comp. dé-Aow-a. The most frequent
vowel-change is that of e too: Stem wepam (wépro, T escort),
ropn-n, escorts; Stem rey (preyo, I burn), prog, flames;
Stem rpem (rpéra, J turn), tpén-os, turning, manner. | 4

Obs. 4.—A general rule for the accent of nouns is, that te =a
Neuters are almost ali barytone (§ 19): 7d yév-os, the race;
86-po-y, gift; eipavo-v, remains; mved-pa, breath,

§ 341. L—TZhe most important Suffixes for forming
Substantives,
A) Substantives denoting an agent are called nomena
-agentis. The person acting or occupied in and belonging
to something is indicated by the following suffixes :
1. ev, Nom. ev-s (always oxytone), Masc. (§ 137).

Examples of Primitive words are:
ypah-ev-s, writ-En, Verb.-Stem ypad, Pres. ypace (cl. 1)

yov-ev-s, begett-ER . yev 9 -yeyvopas (el. 8)
xoup-ev-s, barb-ER 55 Kep » keipe (cl. 4, d).

An example of the not very numerous Denomina-
tives is:
ropOp-ev-s, ferry-MAN, Nom.-Stem 0p 60, Nom. ropOpés, passage. 7
Obs.—Several Masculines in ev-s have Feminines in era Ce 4
paroxytones): Baothevs, king; Bacihea, queen.

2. rnp Nom. mp retpa Nom. reipa
TOp 5, Twp) Mase, tTpLa » Tpta S
Ta 9» TH-S rps gg Ts Femin,

18 » «Ths

§ 343. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 213

Examples of Primitive nouns are:
Stem and Nom. ¢w-r7p, deliver-En, Masc.) Verb.-Stem oo (cadfw)

Fe ‘s » TO-TELDA 4, Fem. (§ 298)
» PN-TOp 4, py-Twp, ora-ToR, Verb.-Stem fe, Fut. ép@ (§827, 13)
} » Kpt-Ta 4, Kpt-Tn-s, Judge re Kpt, Pres. xpiva
F (§ 253, Obs.)
a » TOLN-TA yy Trown-TH-s, poct \ 4 more, Pres, row
; Stem and Nom, srouj-rpia, poetess (cl. 1)

» @VAn-Ta ,, avAnri-s, flute-play-ER, Masc. ist ee ave,
9 @vAn-TpL8,, avAnrpi-s a Kem.) Pres. addAéw (cl. 1)

Examples of Derived words are:
Stem modi-ra, Nom. roXirn-s, citizen, Nom.-Stem woAr, Nom.

moX-s
» Olke-ta ,, oilkérn-s, domestic, ch Stem oixo, Nom.
> bee 9
» OltKe-TLd ,, olkeTi-s Fi Fem. oiko-s

§ 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are
called nomina actionis; the following suffixes are the
most common for them :

1, rt, Nom. ti-s

Tt ,, ots, from ti-s, according to § 60a { Feminine,

[comp. Lat. to] | Barytones,
o.1a,, ola

All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as:

nig-ti-s, faith, Verb.-Stem 710, Pres. Mid. weiOopa (cl. 2)
pipn-ot-s, imitation ax pepe, Pres. (Dep.) pipéopar (cl. 1)
oxeyi-s, contemplation ,, OKET, 5, 55 okemTopuat (cl. 3)
mpagi-s, action A apay, Pres. Act. mpaoce (cl. 4, a)
yeve-ot-s, origin ‘ yev(e), Pres. Mid. yiyvopat
(§ 327, 14)
Soxipa-ci-a, examination ,, Soxipad, Pres. Soxiyatw (cl. 4, b)

2. no, Nom. pé-s (always oxytone), Mase.

ora-o-pd-s, cramp, Verb.-Stem oma, Pres. omdw (cl. 1), J draw

Se-o-pd-s, bond 2 ‘Se » O€@ » Lbind
sup-pé-s, wailing ¥ dduvp ,, dddpopa (cl. 4, d, Obs.)
Obs.—From verbs in evw substantives in esd are derived, which
denote the action, and are all paroxytone: madevo, I educate,
_ madela, education; Bacievio, I am king, Bacideia, king's rule,

‘ Comp. § 341, 1 Obs.

§ 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by :—

214‘ SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. baie:

1. nat, Nom. pa, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. ati: es
mpay-palr], the thing done, Verb.-Stem mp ay, Pres. rpacow (cl. 4,) .
(almost the same as rd mempaypevov, Lat. factum) 2 8
67-palr], word, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. épd (§ 327, 18) |
(comp. 7d elpnpévov, Lat. dictum)
Tpij-palr], cut, Verb.-Stem rep, Pres. réuvw (§ 321, 10)
(comp. rd rerunpevoy, the piece cut off).
2. es, Nom. os, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4).
Stem Aax-es, Nom. Adyns, lot, Verb.-Stem Aax, Pres. Aayyavo

(§ 822, 27)

» €O-es » €6os, custom _g, é 6, Perf. etwOa (§ 275)
» TEK-E€s 4, TEéKos, child as rex, Pres. rixto

(cl. 3).

Obs.—The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality :
Badpos, weight, Adjective-Stem Bapv, Nom. Bapv-s
Babos, depth oJ Baév ,, Babv-s
pcos, length es paxpo ,, paxpé-s
§ 344. D) The Instrument or means for an action is
expressed by :

tpo, Nom. rpo-v [Lat. tru-m] (accent § 340, Obs. 4)
apo-t po-v, plough, Verb.-Stem dpo, Pres. dpdw (cl. 1) [ara-
tru-m]_

hi-rpo-v, redemption money ,, Av » Ave (cl. 1)
didax-r po-v, a teacher's fee ,, diday ,, didaoxw (§ 324, 28).
Obs.—The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rpa is less
fixed : £0-o-rpa (fda, I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing ;
épxn-o-tpa (dpxéona, I dance), dancing place; ae
(wakaiw, I wrestle), wrestling school.

§ 345. E) Place is indicated by:

1. rnpto, Nom. rnpio-v Neuter proparoxytone
axpoa-t pto-v, audi-toriu-m, Verb.-Stem, dxpoa, Pres. dxpodopat

(cl. 1) |
dixac-r 7 pto-v, judgment hall + dixad— gg Otxa@ 2%
(cl. 4 -b) Sm
2. ero, Nom. evo-v, Neuter properispome
hoy-eio-y, speaking place, from the Nom.-Stem Aoyo, Nom. Abyo-s
xoup-¢to-v, barber’s shop mi * KOUPEU 5, KkoUpEU-s
Movo-eio-yv, seat of the Muses ,, = Movoa,, Movoa

3. av, Nom. wy, Mase. oxytone,
denotes a place where anything is in abundance: dumedoy, vine-
yard ; advdpev, men’s room ; oivev, wine vault,

4
ry
.
4
x

a oa

ee a 7 oT F

§ 348, SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215

§ 346. F) Substantives of quality are derived from
Adjective-Stems by means of the following suffixes:
1. ryt, Nom. ry-s, Fem. [Lat. tat, tut, Nom. tas, tés]
Stem raxvu-ryT, Nom. rayxurnys, thickness, Adj.Stem ray v,
Nom. raxv-s

9» VEO-THT » -vedtns, youth ss veo
Nom. véo-s
9 boo-TnT 1» ladrys, equality » too
Nom. igo-s

2. cvva, Nom. cvvn, Fem. paroxytone.
Sixavo-c bv n, justice, Adj.-Stem S:xazo, Nom. Stkato-s
adadppo-cvvn, soberness ,, coppov 5 cadperv

3. ca, Nom. sa, Fem. paroxytone
cop-ia, wisdom, Adj.Stem coho, Nom. codd-s
evdatpov-ia, bliss RF evdatpov ,, evdaipor

The suffix sa with the vowel ¢ of the Adjective-
Stems in -es, Nom. -ns becomes eva; and when the
final o of an Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o,
it becomes ova, ova (proparoxytone).
ahnbe-ca, truth, Adj.Stem din 6e[s], Nom. ddnOns (§ 165)
evvo-ta, benevolence ,, evvoo » €Uvou-s

4. es, Nom. os, Neuter, § 343, 2,

§ 347. G) Diminutives are formed from N ominal-
Stems by the suffixes:

i. «0, Nom. to-v, Neuter

' watd-to-v, little boy, Nom.-Stem war, Nom. mat-s

knt-io-v, little garden + KNWO 4, kiyro-s.

Obs.—Other forms of co are 1dt0 (Nom. tdi0-v), apso (Nom.
apwo-v), vdpto (Nom, vdpio-v), vAdvo (Nom. vAdzo-v):
oikidto-v, a little house (oixo-s); maddpto-v, a little boy
(mai-s); pedvdpro-v, a little song (wédos) ; eid0AXLO-v, a little
picture (eidos).

2. Mase. toxo, Fem. taxa, Nom. toxo-s, oxy, paroxytone
veav-icko-s, adolescentulus, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. vearia-s
nad-ioKkn, girl ‘: mad 9 +«Tai-s
arepay-igko-s, alittle garland ,, orepavo ,, oaredhavo-s.

§ 348. H) Patronymics or substantives which denote
descent from a father (or ancestor)—more rarely the

descent from a mother—are most frequently formed by
the suffix 5a (Nom. 5y-s) for the Masculine, and only 6

216 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349,

(Nom. -s) for the Feminine. The Masculines are par-
oxytone, the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added
to Stems in a without any connecting vowel:

Mase. Boped-dn-s, Fein. Boped-s, Nom.-Stem Bopea, Nom. Bopéa-s
» Alved-Sn-s * Alveta ,, Alveid-s, |
The same is affixed to Consonant-Stems by means of .

the vowel : |

Mase. Kexpor-i-Sy-s, Fem. Kexpor-i-s, Nom.-Stem Kexpom, Nom.

: Kexpoy.
Stems in evand o of the Second Principal Declension

also adopt the connecting vowel 1, before which the v of

ev is dropped:

[ne-i-d n-s from the Nom.-Stem IInd ev, Nom. IAci-s

Homeric additional form InAxiadn-s (comp. § 161, D.)

Anro-i-dn-s from the Nom.-Stem Anro, Nom. Anta, son, of Leto.
The Stems of the O-Declension substitute « for 0:

Mase. Tavrad-i-5y-s, Fem. Tavrad-i-s, Nom.-Stem Tayrado, Nom.

Tones

» Kpov-i-8y-s ” Kpovo, Nom. %
Kpévo-s. ‘

Only those in so (Nom. vo-s) change these letters
to va: /
Masc. Gcorid-8y-s, Fern. Georid-s, Nom.-Stem Ocorr0, Nom, 4
O¢ori0-5 }

» Mevorrid-dn-s a Mevoirio, Nom.
Mevoirto-s. !

Obs.—A more rare suffix for Patronymics is tov or tov, Nom.
twv : Kpoviwy, son of Kpdvo-s. The Poets take many liberties
with regard to the metre,

§ 349. I) Gentile names or substantives describing
persons as natives of certain towns or countries haye
the suffixes :

1. ev, Nom. evs (comp. § 341) oxytone
Meyap-ev-s, Nom.-Stem Meyapo, Nom. rd Méyapa
Eperpt-ev-s a "Eperpto ,, ‘Eperpia.

2. ra, Nom. rn-s, paroxytone

Teyed-rn-s (Teyéa), Alywi-rn-s (Alyn), Hretpa-ry-s (“Harerpo-s),
Sixehid-ry-s (exe) ia).

io -

§ 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. pg fe

Obs.—The feminine gentile names end in 8 (Nom. -s): Meyapid,
Nom. Meyapis; Teyearsd, Nom. Teye@ris; Sexehiored,
Nom. Scxedcdris.

§ 350. Il—The most important Suffixes for forming

Adjectives.
1. to, Nom. to-s (proparoxytone)
expresses the most general relation to the idea of the

. substantive from which the adjective is formed: odpay-
; to-s, heaven-ly (ovpavés); éo7rép-to-s, belonging to
4 evening (éo7épa). The ¢ sometimes combines with

the final vowels of Vowel-Stems to diphthongs, which
then frequently receive the circumflex: dyopa-io-s,
forensis (ayopd) ; aido-to-s, modest, from the Stem aido
(Nom. aides); but dica-vo-s just, from the Stem dixa
(Nom. dixn, justice); so also after rejecting the s we
haye from the Stem Oepes (Td Oépos, summer) Oépe-co-s,
summer-like. By the suffix co, adjectives are also formed
from Adjective-Stems: éXev0ép-vo-s, liber-alis (€XevPepo-s,
liber) and gentile adjectives (§ 349) from names of places,
which, however, are also used substantively : MiAje-ro-s
(for Mirnr-ro-s, from Mirnro-s, according to § 60),
"AOnva-io-s ( A@jvat).
§ 351. 2. xo, Nom. xo-s (always oxytone)
is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel
t, and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes
fitness: apy-t-xo-s, suited for governing; ypaduxds, suited
for writing or painting (picturesque). Many Verba!-
Stems insert the syllable 7: before the suffix xo
(§ 342): aicOn-r-Kx0-s, capable of perceiving; mpa-
Krt-Ko-s, suited for acting. From Nominal-Stems the
suflix xo, Nom. xo-s, forms adjectives denoting what is
peculiar, belonging or referable to the thing expressed
by the noun: Bacwduixds, kingly; votxos, natural;
tmoneuKos, warlike.

Obs.—By means of this suffix are formed the names of many arts
and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally
with the addition of réyvy,-art, science: 7 povo-tKy, music,

Y18 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. § 352.

) yeanpar--xy, from ré ypdppara, litterae, grammar, the art of
writing; 4 raxr-i-xy, ‘tactics. The corresponding Masculine
denotes one who is experienced in such art or science: 6 pov-
ouxd-s, musician; 6 ypapparikd-s, grammarian ; 6 rakrikd-s,
tactician.

§ 352. 3. vo, Nom. wvo-s, proparoxytone, and

4. eo, Nom. eo-s [Lat. eu-s], proparoxytone (ous
perispome, § 183), denote the material of which any-
thing consists: \i0-cvo0-s, of stone (Oo-s); EvA-LVO-s,
wood-en (Evdo-v); ypva-eo-s, ypucods, gold-en | aur-eu-s|
(xpugo-s).

Obs.—i vo, Nom, wd-s, oxytone, forms adjectives of time: y@ec-
tvds, yesterday’s, from xOés, yesterday ; éapivds, vernus; with
enlarged suffix: vuxr-ep-.v d-s, noct-wr-nu-s.

5. evt, Nom. Masc. ev-s, Fem. ecoa, Neut. ev,
denotes abundance: yapi-ei-s, grace-ful (yapt-s) ; Ddrre ts,
wood-y (UA) ; Huabo-eu-s, sand-y (duabo-s). Comp. Lat
osu-s: gratiosus, silvosus, arenosus.

6. ov, Nom. Mase. pwr, Neut. por,

denotes the bent or inclination to something: prj-perv,

mindful ; tr}-wwv, patient ; érirjo-worv, forgetful.
Obs.—Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are:

vo, Nom. vo-s, oxytone, mostly passive ; dei-v é-s, terrible; oep-vd-s
(c€B-o-par), venerable

Ao 4, Xo-s, mostly oxytone and active: derAés, fearful ;
arratn-d é-s, deceitful

#O 4, po-s, proparoxytone, partly active; pdy-t-po-s, warlike;
and partly passive: doidi-po-s, capable of being
sung; akin to it is

Tio 4, Opo-s, proparoxytone: xpyotpo-s, usful; pvéimo-s,
capable of being fled from, avoidable

s$ y ns, Neut. es: wevd-ns, false, almost exclusively in com-

pound words (§ 355).

— § 353. TIl.—Derived Verbs

are formed in various ways from Wominal-Stems. The
most important endings of derived verbs, differing little
from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged
according to their forms of the Present:

os

a

§ 253 b. DERIVED VERBS—-ADVERBS. 219
l. ow: puc6d-a, I hire (p10 86-s, hire)
xprad-o, I gild ~ (ypvad-s, gold)
, , (nusd-@, I punish (Cnpia, punishment)
. 2. a-w: tyd-w, I honour (rin, honour)
airtd-opa, I blame (airia, blame)
yod-o, I wail (yéo-s, wailing)
7 3. €-w: dpiOpe-w, I number (dpiOpud-s, number)
; evtuxée-o, Iam fortunate (edruxns, fortunate)
icropé-w, I search (israp, searcher)
¥ 4, ev-w: Bacired-w, I am king (Baorred-s, king)
: Bovredt-w, I advise (BovAn, advice)
- 5. u-@: eAmif-w, I hope (€dri-s, hope)
XAnvit-o, I speak Greek ("ENAny)
urrit-o, I am inclined
: $ ¢ - to Philip } (®durro-s)
6. af-@: dixdl-o, I judge (8ixn, justice)
épyat-oua, I work (€pyo-v, work,
Bidg-opa, I use violence (Bia, violence)
7. aw-w : onpaiv-a, I sign (onpa, sign)
Aevkaiv-w, I whiten (Aeukd-s, white)
xareraiv-o, I am indignant (xaderé-s, severe, in-
dignant)
8. vw-a: 7dvv-o, I sweeten (750-s, sweet)

Aaumpiv-w, I brighten (Aapmpé-s, bright).

Obs. 1.—From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with
different endings and with different meanings; thus from
Sovro, Nom. SovddAo-s, slave: Sovdd-w, I enslave, Sovdret-w, J
am a slave; from wodepo, Nom. mddepo-s, war, modepe-@
and wonepif-o, I make war, rodepnd-w, I make hostile.

Obs. 2.—A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in cetw, as
well as to several in aw and saw: yedaceiw, I am inclined to
laugh ; Spaceiw, I desire to do; hovaw, I want to murder;
KAavoidw, I want to weep. The verbs of the last two termina-
tions frequently indicate a bodily weakness or illness: oxpide,
Lam pale; 6p0adpdw, I suffer in the eyes,

IV.— Adverbs.
| § 3533. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives,
comp. §§ 201-204.
From Verbal and Substantiwe-Stems adverbs are
formed by the suffixes:

220 FORM OF COMPOSITION,

Sév, oxytone: dva-pay-ddy, openly ; ayedn-ddv, gregatim
8nv (adnyv), paroxytone: xptB-8nv, clam; ovddnB-d ny, collectively,
briefly (Stem A aB); ; omop-ddnyv, scatteredly
(Stem omep), oreipw, I sow
ri, oxytone: dvopac-r i, by name (dvomdgw); &Anne-ri, graece
(Adrnvife).

B) Composition.
§ 354. I.—orm of Composition.

A noun, standing first in a compound, appears in the
form of its Stem: dotv-yeitwy, neighbour to the city;
yopo-OiddcKano-s, teacher of the chorus; caxés-rranos,
shaker of the shield (76 cdxos).
Consonant-Stems are usually united to the second part
by the connecting-vowel 0: dvdpiavt-o-rrow-s (6 avdpia-s),
maker of statues, statuary ; matp-o-xtovo-s, murderer of
a father. This o, further, is frequently inserted after
weak vowels: gvuat-o-hoyo-s, acquainted with nature ;
ixOv-o-payo-s, fish-eating, and regularly stands in place
of a in the Stem: syepo-dpduo-s, a runner by day;
xopo-ypao-s, describer of a country. The o is dropped
before vowels: yop-nyo-s, leader of the chorus; matp-
adderho-s, a father’s brother ; it remains, however, where a
the word originally began with digamma (§ 34, D.):
Hom. Snptoepyo-s, Att. Snuroupyés, artisan.
Obs.—Exceptions to these rules are frequent. Thus Stems in o
often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds: £«o-xrévos,
killing with the sword (Stem Eres); retxo-paxia, a contest
at the wall (Stem recxes); the final vowel of A-Stems is
sometimes preserved as a or n: dpera-Adyos, a speaker about
virtue; xon-pdpos, bearer of funeral offerings. A case-form
seldom occurs instead of the Stem-form: veas-orxos, shed for
ships; dperot-Barns, wandering on the hills,

§ 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat
altered in composition, especially when the compound
word is an adjective: rips, did0d-riy.0-s, ambitious ;
mpayya, Tokv-pdypwv, much occupied. The ending

es ee

§ 308. FORM OF COMPOSITION. 221

ns Masculine and Feminine, es Neuter, deserves special
notice; this ending occurs:

a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal-
Stems: a-BraB-js, uninjured (BraB, Pres. Brdrra) ;.
avrapK-ns, self-sufficient (adto-s and apKéw).

6) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a
substantive in es (Nom. os): dexa-eryjs, ten years old
(Eros); Kaxo-nOns, of a bad nature (780s).

Obs.—Observe also the compound adverbs in ec or ¢, oxytone:

avro-xetp-i, with one’s own hand; a-picd-1, without pay;
mav-Onp-el, with the whole people.

§ 356. A verb—without changing its nature—can
only be compounded with a preposition. The looseness
of the connection in such compounds is the reason for
the position of the Augment mentioned in § 238:
amoBadro, I throw away; améBarov, I threw away.
For the same reason prepositions are frequently sepa-
vated from their verbs in the poets and in Herodotus,
and in some cases even in Attic prose (comp. § 446).
This separation is called tmesis.

When any other word is to be compounded with a
Verbal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, eg.
from AiOo-s and Stem Bar, ALOo-Boro-s, throwing stones,

‘and thence \wOoforé-w, I throw stones ; so likewise from

vad-s and pdyopuat comes first vav-yadyo-s, fighting at sea,
and thence vavyayéw ; from ed and Stem épy, evepyerns,
benefactor, evepyeréw, I do good.

$357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only
be compounded with a preposition without changing its
termination: apd and SovdA7 make mpoPovd», previous
consultation. In every other compound the abstract
substantive must take a derivative ending: A/@os and
Bory make ALOoBorla, throwing stones ; vads and payn,
vaupaxla, sea-fight ; ed and mpafis, evrpakia, well being.

§ 358. Compounds having the first part formed

222 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.

directly from a Verbal-Stem are rarely met with xcept q

in the poets. They are formed in two ways, viz.

1. the Verbal or the Present-Stem is joined directly
to Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those begin-
ning with a consonant by means of the connecting-
vowels ¢, «, or 0: Sax-é-Oupo-s (Pres. Sdxv-w, el, 5),

heart-gnawing ; 7rei0-apyo-s, obedient to order (mweiBopar

and apy); apy--réxtwv, master-builder ; puc-d-yuve-s,
hater of women (picéw).

2. A form strengthened by o and resembling the
Weak Aorist-Stem is joined in the same way to the
second part of the word: Avc--rovo-s, freeing from
trouble; mdk-wmmo-s (mdjoow, cl. 4, a), whipping
horses ; otpewri-Sixo-s (arpépa, cl. 1), perverter of right.

§ 359. Il—WMeaning of Compounds.

In regard to their meaning compound Adjectives and
Substantives are divided into three principal classes:

1. Determinative compounds. In them the second —

word is the principal, which, without in any way
altering its meaning, is merely defined by the first.
These compounds may be paraphrased by changing
the first part either into an Adjective or an Advyerb:
axpo-ro-s, high town, castle, i. e. dxpa wos (Hom.
mods axpn); peo-nuSpia, mid-day, i.e. wéon hyépa;
Wevdo-xijpvE, i. e. wevdis xipv&, false herald; opo-
SovAo-s, fellow-slave, 1. e. opod Sovretwv; peyadorperis,
grand, properly, appearing as great ; dyri-yovos, late-born,
i. €. Owe yevopuevos. This class is the least numerous.

2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word
is indeed also defined by the first, yet so, that the latter
alters its meaning and together with the first forms a
new idea, which is attributed as a quality to another
word. These compounds can generally be paraphrased
by employing the Participle of éyw or a verb akin to it
in meaning, and adding to this the second word as an

7
a
4
‘
¢

§ 959. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223

object, the first becoming an attribute to the object
paxpo-xeup, longi-manus, long-handed, i. e. paxpas xeipas
&yev (not the long hand itself); dpyvpd-ro£o-s, provided
with a silver bow, i. e. dpyvpodv tofov pépwv; opo-
tporre-s, of the same kind, i. e. 8uouov tpoTov Exar;
yArauk-ari-s, bright-eyed, i. e. yAraveols dpGarpors
eyouea; mixpo-yapo-s, having a bitter wedding ; xoudo-
vou-s, frivolous, trifling ; c#-ppwv, of sound sense, sober ;
Sexa-erns, ten years old, i. e. having or lasting ten years ;
avro-yeup, making use of one’s own hands.
Obs.—To these belong the numerous adjectives in -wdys and
ocidys : yuvarxadys=yuvarko-eidys (eiSos), womanlike, womanish,
3. Oljective compounds, or those of dependency. In
them either the first word is grammatically governed
by the second or the second by the first, so that in the
paraphrase one of the two must be put in an oblique
case: Wvi-oyo-s=Ta yvia éywv, guiding the reins, driver ;

Royo-ypado-s, speech-writer, i.e. NOyous ypddov; a&id-

Royo-s, worth speaking, i. e. AOyou aEtos; PidAd-povco-s,
loving the Muses, i. e. pik@v tas Modvoas; Sevor-Saipor,
fearing the gods, i.e. Sedia@s Tods Saiwovas ; yevpoTrointos,
made by hand, i. e. xepot touts; OeoBraBys, injured
by God, i. e. bd Ocod BeBrappévos; oixoyerrjs, born in

‘the house, i. e. év olxw yevopevos.

Obs. 1.—Prepositions may be joined with substantives in any of
the three principal classes—(1) Determinative : dudi-O€arpov, a
round theatre, i. e. a theatre extending itself round in a circle ;
Gr-eevOepos, one who has been freed by another, not by himself,
i. e. a freedman (6 dé twos édevbepos Sy); (2) Attributive:
év-beos, i. e. ev Eavtd Oedv exav, carrying a god in himself,
god-inspired ; ducixiov, viz. veds, i.e. kiovas aud’ éavrov Exar,
a temple encompassed around with pillars ; (3) Objective: éyxo-
puos, i. &. ev TH xdpa adv, at home; epinmos, i.e. fp’ inr@ op,
being on a horse, belonging to a horse.

Obs. 2.—Against the general rule (§ 85), according to which
compound words draw back the accent as far as possible from
the end, those compounds in -o-s in the Nominative whose
second part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 356), usually
accent this Stem if it has an active meaning They are paroxy-

204 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.

is long: Aoyo-ypddo-s, Slane ; wu p-2-Rraa
murderer ; ratd-aywyd-s, boy-leader ; peo-rrowds, composer 2m
songs. When the meaning is passive, the second word remains —
wnaccented : abré-yparho-s, written by one’s self ; pntp-d-Krovo-s,
murdered by the mother ; dvc-dywyos, hard to guide,

§ 360. The prefix adv [comp. dvev, without, Lat. in-,
Engl. wn-| before consonants @ [comp. Lat. + im
i-gna-ru-s|, called alpha privative on account of its
meaning, is found in a very large number of com
which belong to the determinative class if the second
part has arisen from a verb or an adjective, but chiefly

to the attributive if from a substantive: d-ypados, w=

written, i. e. od yeypappévos; av-ehevOepos, unfree, 1. e.
ovx édevOepos ; av-ardys, shameless, i. e. aid@ odK Ey@v;
amai-s, childless, i. e. raidas ox éyov. Determinatives
with av (4) from substantives are rare and poetic :
HaATNP dyayrop, an unmotherly mother, i. e. pntnp ov
pyTHp ova.
Obs.—W ords originally beginning with digamma’ (§ 34, D.)
have a not av: d-é€xwy, contracted 4 dxaoy, unwilling ; d-eu-ns,

contracted aix-js, reproachful (Stem eix, €oua); d-epyd-s, Con
tracted apyd-s, inactive (€pyo-v, work).

The prefix Svs corresponds to the English mis, and,
as the opposite to ed, denotes something unfortunate,
awkward, difficult: Susdpecros (§ 324, 10), displeased ;
SusBounos, ill-advised, i. e. kaxas Bovias éxyov (attribu-
tive); Susddwtos, hard to capture (§ 324,17). Here,
too, determinative compounds from substantives are
rave: Hom, Adszrapis, unfortunate Paris,

ParT SECOND.

feaeN TAX.

aes tv eee -

WUXERCISES UPON THE SYNTAX OF THIS WORK ARE GIVEN IN
Initia Graca, Parr III

~

Preliminary Remarks

§ 361. 1. Syntax (cdvrafis, arrangement) teaches the
use of the forms discussed in the first part of the
grammar, and the way in which words are arranged
' into sentences, and sentences are combined together.

2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every
sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a
sentence occur only once.

3. The necessary parts of a sentence are:

a) the Subject, t.e., the person or thing about which
something is stated,

b) the Predicate, t.e., that which is stated.

Obs. 1.—Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a
complete sentence in itself, in which the personal ending contains
the Subject, and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate: npi, I say;
epaper, we said,

Obs. 2.—In many cases the Subject remains wndefined: gaci,
they say, people say ; or it is not defined, because readily under-
stood by the Greeks: vet, he rains, 7. e., Zeus, for he alone can
cause rain; éoddmeyée, he blew the trumpet, i.e., the trumpeter
—for it is his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs
Sei, xp7, tt is necessary, is also undefined.

4, The Predicate is either Verbal or Nominal; it is
Verbal when expressed in the form of a finite verb:
Kdpos éPacirevoce, Cyrus ruled; it is Nominal when
expressed in the form of a nown (substantive or adjec-
tive): Kipos Bacireds jv, Cyrus was king.

5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz.,
the Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number
apd case, and when it is an adjective, in gender also:

Q

226 PRELIMINARY REMARKS.

oi Toréuoe évixnoav, the enemies conquered; % oe
meyarn ay, the battle was great.

Exceptions, §§ 362-366.

6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient ta
express the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the
Subject: o yéyas dABos od podvipos, great prosperity ia
not lasting ; Aépwot xaxol, the Lerians (inhabitants of the
island of Leros) are bad. But mostly the Nominal Pre-
_ dicate is more clearly connected with its Subject by
the verb to de (substantive verb): 6 péyas 6ABos ov
. povypos éoriv, Aépior xaxoi cicw. This verb, thus used,
is called the Copula.

7. The intransitive and passive verbs, whieh denote
to become, be made, appear, be named, designated, chosen
and the like, in order to produce a complete sentence,
often require a Nominal Predicate along with the
Verbal one. In this case also the Nominal Predicate
must agree with the Subject: Kipos éyévero Bacineds,
Cyrus became king, Cyrus rex factus est, comp. § 392.

8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of
- time, order, aud kind, less frequently of place, by adjee-
tives, which are expressed in English by adverbs or
prepositions with substantives. These adjectives, which
must agree with the Subject, are to be considered as
supplementary Predicates: tpitaior amipOov, they went
away on the third day; Aaxedaipbvi0r botepor aixovro,
the Lacedaemonians arrived later, posteriores advenerunt ;
bpxios cot Aéyo, I tell you on oath.

On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate,

see § 589, &c.

9. A simple sentence is enlarged by an Odject
added to the verb, The Object is that to which the
action of the verb extends: of ’A@nvaiou drréwrewvay Tov
Lwxparny, the Athenians killed Socrates.

On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which oe
are indicated, see §§ 395—402,

a

§ 861. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. pot |

10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning
to the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, ze.
the verbs which denote to make, name, designate, choose
and the like, frequently also require a Nominal Pre-
dicate. But as this belongs to the Object, it must agree
with it: of Mépcat tov Kopov eirovto Baciréa, the
Persians chose Cyrus king [Persae Cyrum regem elege-
runt|. Comp. § 404. This kind of Predicate is called
a Dependent Predicate. As the Dependent Predicate
here appears in the Accusative, so it may in other cases
appear in the Genitive or Dative. Comp. § 4388; Oés.
§ 589, &e.

11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri-
bute, i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive
as essentially belonging to it and forming with it one
idea: «adds imros, a fine horse; 6 mwapwy Kaspos, the
present time (the present).

Obs.—The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to
the designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea: Hom. ~
npwes Aavaoi, ye herves Danai (ye warring Danai); dvdpes
Sixacrai, ye judges, judices.

12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition.

Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a

substantive as does not exactly form one idea with it,

but is superadded rather for describing or illustrating
it, and hence might generally be expressed in the form
of a descriptive clause : Ilapicaris, 4 tod Kipou punrno,
TovTOV padrov epider 7) Tov AptaképEnv, Parysatis, the
mother of Cyrus—who was Cyrus’ mother—loved him
more than Artaxerxes; évtedOev Kipos éfedatver Sia
Ppvyias eis KodXoocovs, rodw oixovpévyv, evdaliwova Kal
peyarny, from there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to
Colossi, a populous, prosperous, and large city (which
was a... . city).

The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the
substantive to which they belong, in the same way as
the Predicate (5, 7).

228 NUMBER AND GENDER. 93a

Cuar. XITV.—NuMBER AND GENDER.

§ 362. The Singular sometimes has a collective sense,
denoting a plurality: éo 07s, clothing, clothes; rrivOos,
bricks ; 4 twos, cavalry ; 4 domls, the heavy-armed.

Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural
refers to collective substantives in the Singular: “A@y-
valov TO TAHOOS olovrar "Immapyov Tipavvov dvTa
amoOaveiv, the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus
died as ruler; +o otpadtevma éropiteto citov Ko-
mTovTes Tors Bods Kal dvous, the army obtained food by
killing the oxen and asses.

A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, espe-
cially abstracts, which have no plural in English;
especially when the repetition of an idea is to be ex-
pressed: ai émripdverat cal KaumTpoTyTes EK TOV
ayavev yiyverOar dirodcwv, celebrity and glory usually
arise from the contests ; éuol ai cal peydhar edruxtat
ovx apécxovov, your (repeated) great success does not
please me; Hom. rdvtes Odvarot otvyepol, all kinds of
death are hateful.

Obs. 1.—Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where
we employ the singular with the indefinite article: ot« ay
yrvakay jocoves Kadoipe av, I should not like to be called
inferior toa woman; ira, a friend,

Obs, 2.—The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself
[comp. Lat. nos]. In this case the Masculine is used even
when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says, recovped’,
el xpn, marpt tipwpovpeva, J will fall, if it must be, as my
Sather’s avenger.

Obs, 3.—In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which
we express in the Singular; the Plural, however, properly
denotes the various manifestations of such ideas: immoouvns
éxéxagto, by horsemanship he was distinguished; appadings
véo.o, in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) of his mind,

§ 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its
meaning to the Singular. ‘This explains the peculiar
Greek custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in

§ 366, NUMBER AND GENDER. 229

the Singular : Tas TaUTa TWavoeTtat; how ts this to
end? ta mpadywata tadta Sewd éotiv, these things
are terrible,

Obs. 1.—Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of
persons, sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as: rd réAn,
in the sense of the authorities; ra €Ovn, the peoples.

Obs. 2.—The Homeric and the Commun Greek Dialects (Intro-
duction, 4), generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter
Plural: Hom. omdpra X€Avv rat, the ropes are loosed.

§ 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English,
wt) the Adjective Predicate is frequently in the Plural:
advvata éotw arodpvyciv, it is impossible to escape;
this is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in
TEO-S: ETLYELPHTEA Hy, tt was to be attempted.

§ 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the
Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and
both numbers may be used in referring to the same
thing: éyehXacdrny dugo, Bréwartes eis ANAN-
Lous, they both laughed after looking at one another ;
bore Tmapdderypa, @ Adyns Te Kal Nixia, give an example,
Laches and Nicias; & Adyns te cal Nuxia, eiratov
O Laches and Nicias say.

§ 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as
well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive: év
péow, in medio, in the midst; év 76 wapovTs, at the
present moment, for the present; éx tmodXod, for a long
time ; Sevvd, terrible things.

Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to
one or more Masculine or Feminine ‘substantives to
express a class or genus in general: Hom. ov« dya0@o1
modvkotpavin, the government of many is not a good thing ;
OpOdv drnOev det, truth is always the right thing ;
Secvodv of moddol, Kaxovpyous btav éxwou TpocTatas,
a bad thing is the many when they have base leaders ;
Tapayal kal oraces OXNEO pia Talis ToAcowv, disturbance
and discord are ruinous to states,

230 THE ARTICLE. §367

§ 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being —

in the Neuter as in English, frequently agrees in gender
and number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as
in Latin: otrol eiow dvdpes, those are men; obTOS
Spos ear Sixavoctvys adnOf Te réyerv Kal & dv AGB THs
amrodidovat, this is the idea of justice, to speak the truth
and to give back what we have received {haee notio justitiae
est |.

The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and
Number, not with the preceding substantive to which it
refers, but with the substantive following, which is added
as a Predicate: dirov, 6 wéyrotov ayabov éotiw, ov
dpovtifovar, they do not care for a friend, which ts the
greatest good.

Cuap. XV.—THE ARTICLE.

§ 368. The Article 6, 4, 76 is originally a demonstra-

tive pronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both ~

_in a substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also
in the language of the other poets: Hom. rv éy® ob
vow, HER I will not give up; poet. rov, @ Zed warep,
p0icov, HIM, father Zeus, destroy; Hom. pOice: ce TO
cov pévos, this thy courage will be thy ruin.

§ 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is
also employed in the following cases in Attie prose:

1. In connection with pév and Sé: 6 pév, the one; o 8é,
the other.

Obs.—Used adverbially, ri (rd) pev—rd (ra) S€, mean partly—

partly.

2. Sometimes also with «ai and 8€; xal Tov Kededoat,
and that he ordered; tov nai tov, the one and the other.

3. In mpo Tod, before that, formerly.

§ 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the
English definite article. It serves to set forth an object,

§ 374, THE ARTICLE. 231

either as a single one (the individualising article) or as
a class (the generic article).

Obs:.—6, 7, 7d in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power.
Yet in many cases—comp. especially § 379—the use of these
forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The
Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is
frequently omitted also in the Tragic writers.

§ 371. 1. The Individualising Article sets forth a

| single object above others of the same kind, and that:

a) as known or haying been pointed out before;
Herod. Xarx«idées ras em "Aptewicl elxoot vias Tapei-
xovto, the Chaleideans furnished the (before mentioned)
twenty ships at Artemision; FépEns ayeipas tiv ava-
plOunrov atpatiav HAOev éx tiv “EXXdba, after having
collected the (well-known) innumerable army, Xerxes
marched against Greece.

Obs.—In this sense proper names also, which in general do not
need it, may take the Article: 6 Zwxparns, Socrates, whom you
know, or who was mentioned before.

§ 372. 5) A thing as distinguished from others by the
addition of distinguishing circumstances : 6 tv’ AOnvalav
Shywos, the Athenian people (no other); 1% words ty qo-
AopKodper, the city which we are besieging (just this).

§ 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by
the Article is often indicated in English by the posses-
sive pronoun : éxactos Tay Snuioupyav THY TExVHY KANOS
é£eipyateto, each of the artisans practised his art well.

§ 374. In connexion with numerals the Article some-
times denotes that the number to which it is added
stands in a defined relation to another number: 7a dvo
pépn, two-thirds; tov tpijpwv tpiaxociwy oicdy trav
Tacav Tas Siaxoclas % modus Tapéoyero, of the triremes,
of which there were three hundred in all, the city furnished
two hundred. ‘The Article has a similar effect with
quantitative adjectives of a more general kind: zrodAo¥,
many—oi mroddoi, most ; mréoves, more—oi méoves, the

232 THE ARTICLE. § 375.

greater part ; addot, alii—oi adrot, caeteri ; driyot, a few
—oi dréyot, the oligarchs,

§ 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class
of homogeneous objects: of todirat, all the citizens ;
6 prjrwp, the orator (by profession); Set tov otpari@rny
Tov dpxovta paddov 7) Tos Torepiovs oBeicOat, the
soldier must fear his superior rather than the enemy.

Obs.—Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in

the plural when a whole class is to be described: of Anpo-
obévers, orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, comp. § 362,
Obs. 1).

§ 376. The Article is not used when a substantive
only expresses an idea in general: dvOp@rov yuyn Tod
Ociov petéyer, man’s soul partakes of the divine; so Beds
denotes the deity; o @Qcds, a particular god; so like-
wise, in many other current expressions, the more
ancient method of not using the Article has been pre-
served : vuxtos, by night ; jyépas, by day; ért Oaracon,
at sea; mpos dotv, to town; kat’ wypov, in the country ;
Kata ys, under the earth; év Seka, on the right ; éEaipa
Aoyou, I exempt.

§ 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub-
stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the
force of proper names: Bacirevs, the king (of the
Persians) ; mputdveis, the presidents (as officials); é&
axpotronet, in the Acropolis (Athens), .

§ 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, 10) generally has no
Article: Kipos éyévero Bacireds rev Tepody,
became king of the Persians; movos eixrdelas mary,
labour is father of fame; oi "A@nvaior Tlepixdéa etdovro
otparnyov, the Athenians chose Pericles general (comp.
§§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Oés.).

§ 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, par-—

ticiple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made
a substantive: Hom. 6 yépwy, the old man; oi mdovero,

the rich; 6 déyor, the speaker ; 6 rédas, the neighbour ;

= 4

———————— Slt

a i a A

§ 385, TUE ARTICLE. 233

oi maporres, those present ; Ta Katw, the under (part); o:
manrat, the ancients ; 7d pucetv, hating or hatred.

Obs.—With the Neuter Article any word, or even a whole sen-
tence, may be represented as one object: 7rd dynp, the word
dvjp or the idea “man ;” rd TvG& ceavrdy, the saying or rule
“ Know thyself.”

§ 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalises the
idea of a participle, which then is to be translated by a
relative phrase: qoveitw todto 6 Bovrdpevos, do that,

who will; wr &yreite tov Tadta Né€ovta, seek not (one)
who will say this (comp. § 500).

§ 381. By the Article many adverbs placed between it and a sub-
stantive become attributive adjectives: of rére avOpwrot, the people
of that time; ) mapadvrixa Hdovn, the momentary pleasure; ai
evOade yuvaixes, the women of this place; 7 dyav édevbepia, the
excessive freedom.

§ 382. In the same way a genitive or a preposition with a sub-
stantive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes
an attributive clause: ra rév "AOnvaiwy mpdypara, the affairs of the
Athenians ; oi ev ri moder avOpwma, the people in the city; 4 Kab?
npepav tpodm, the daily nourishment; ai avev Aumdy Hdoval, the
painless pleasures.

§ 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes
with the Genitive of a substantive (comp. §§ 409, 410),

sometimes with a preposition followed by a substan-

tive; in such a construction the Article has the force
of a substantive (§ 379): ta trav ’AOnvaiwy, the affairs
(possessions, interests) of the Athenians; oi év tH monet,
the (people) in the city ; Ta pera radra, what follows, the
later (events).

§ 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361,
11) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands between
the substantive and the article: 6 aya0os ayip, the good
man.

§ 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent,
and the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12),
the substantive stands first, and the adjective with the
article follows, thus :

234 THE ARTICLE.

a) The substantive without Article, when the case is
such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no
article, ri duadéper avOpwiros axpatis Onplov Tod
akpateotatov; m what does an ungovernable man
differ from the most ungovernable beast ? for if Onpiov stood
alone it would be without Article, @npiov, from a beast.

6) The substantive has the Article, when by itself, even
without an adjective, it must have the Article: of Xio
TO Telyos Teptetdov Td Kawvov, the Chians pulled down
(their) wall—the new one (which they themselves had
built) ; for even without the adjective it would haye to
be 70 teiyos eptetdov (§ 373).

§ 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the
position of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381
and 382: o ’A@nvaiwv dios, the Athenian people; o
Sjjpos, 6 Tov “AOnvatwv, the people, that is, the Athenian ;
6 peta Tadta ypovos, the after time; 6 ypovos Oo pera
tadra, the time which followed this.

§ 387. An adjective which without the Article either -

precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is
predicative, i.e. the character is assigned to the substan-
tive only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and 10): dyads 6
aynp or 6 avnp ayabds (viz. éotiv), the man is good ;
amavres Exouev TO cua Ovyntdv, we all have a body
(which is) mortal. The translation may often be effected
by a relative clause: of "A@nvaios iyyodvto avTovopev To
mp@tov cuppayev, the Athenians had the lead of allies
(who) at first (w ere) independent ; paivowar peyddas Tas
imocyéceis Trovovpevos, L seem to make promises which
are great. Comp. § 378.

Obs.—With proper names the use of the Article is very uncer-

tain, when the class is added to which they belong: 6 Eigparns
gorauds OF 6 merauds 6 Evparns, the river Luphrates; 9 Atrvy

rd Spos, Mount Etna; Sixedia 4% vicos, the island of Sicily;

9 médus of Tapooi, the city of Tarsi.
§ 388. The possessive pronoun is preceded by the
Article when a single definite object is referred to:

§386.

§ 391. THE ARTICLE. 235

6 éuos Etaipos, my (particular) friend; éuds éraipos,
a friend of mine.

§ 889. adros, as a predicate, put before or after a
substantive with the Article, means self: aidtds 6 matijp
or 6 matnp avtos, the father himself, tpse pater ; but as
an attribute it is put between the Article and the
substantive and means same: o avtds avnp, the same
man, idem vir.

With the demonstrative pronouns odtos, 65¢e, éxeivos,
a substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the
Article: odtos 6 dv7p or 0 dvnp obtos, this man; éxeivo
To Sa@por, that gift. But when the substantive is a pre-
dicate the Article is wanting: év Tlépcais vopos éotw
ovros, among the Persians this is law. Comp. § 367.

§ 390. was without the Article before a substantive
without the Article means in the Singular every: waca
mons, every city. The Article before was gives it the
meaning of whole: 1) waca rods, the whole city; tovs

qravras omditas, the whole of the heavy-armed. Most

generally mds as well as édos without the Article pre-
cedes or follows a substantive provided with the Article:
macay wpiv tiv adnOeav épd, I will tell you the whole
truth; tov apiOuov mavra Siva SverdBopev, we divided

the whole number into two parts ; ris hyuépas Ons SufAOov

ov TAéov Tévte Kal elxoor otadiwv, during the whole day
they proceeded no more than twenty-five stadia.

Obs.—nas with the Article added to a numeral may often be
translated by “altogether” or “in all:” Aapeios ¢Baciievce
ra mavra €& kal rptdxovra érn, Darius ruled altogether thirty-six
years.

§ 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently,
according to the position of the Article: ¢ryarov ré dpos, the extreme
end of the mountain; rd €oxarov dpos, the farthest mountain (in
contrast to other mountains); 4 dyopd péon, the middle (of the)
murket-place ; eon ayopa, the middle market, that placed in the
middle of several others, In Latin forwm medium means both.

226 THE NOMINATIVE,

Cuap. XVI.—Use or THE CASEs.

A) The Nominative.

§ 392. The Nominative is the case of the subject and
of the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4).

Hence, as in Latin with fio, dicor, videor, ereor, &e.,
so in Greek with verbs of the same meaning the predi-
cative noun referring to the subject is in the Nomina-
tive: xaBictatat Bacireds, he ts appointed king;
"AnréEavdpos Oeds wvoudtero, Alexander deus appella-
batur. Comp. § 361, 7, §§ 378, 403.

Obs.—dxovw, I hear, in the sense of J am called [Lat. audio],
also belongs to these verbs: of év ’A@jvas idummifovres
Kkédaxes Kai Oeois €xOpol Heovoy, the Philippizers in Athens
were called flatterers and objects of the gods’ hatred.

§ 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Voea-
tive in addressing a person, especially in connection with obros*
6 ’Amodddwpos otros, od wepipeveis; You! Apollodorus, won't you
stop? and also in exclamations: vymos, the fool !

B) The Vocative.

§ 394. The person or thing addressed-is in the Voca-
tive. In Attic prose & is generally put before it,
‘except sometimes in animated discourse: yi) OopuBetre,
@ avdpes "AOnvaio, don’t make a disturbance, Athenians ;
dxovers Aicyivn ; do you hear, Aeschines ?

Obs.—The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the

structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is
inclosed by commas.

C) The Accusative.

§ 395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark
an object as dependent, whence they are called cases of
dependence (casus olliqui, oblique cases).

The Accusative is the case of the Object, and therefore
denotes generally the person or thing to which an action
is directed.

§ 398, THE EXTERNAL OBJEC%. Pasi)

The Object is either external to the action by which
it is affected: turtw tov Soddov, I strike the slave,—or
internal, ze, already contained in the action itself:
TUnT@ TevTnKovTa TAHYyads, I strike fifty blows.

Obs.—The Accusative therefore in the great majority of cases is
dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen
that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an
Accusative: of ctppayo rebvaot tO Séet Tors Tovovrovs

aroarohous, the allies are dead (beside themselves) from fear
of such ambassadors.

§ 396. 1, The External Object

is expressed by the Accusative with éransitwe verbs as

in other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated

4 in Greek as transitive which in other languages are in-
transitive. Such verbs are: '

a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it
be by act or speech: ed or adyabov roréw, edepyeréw,
d benefit (rovs evepyetncavras, my benefactors); dvivnys,
aperéo, I am useful; xaxds or kaxov trovéw, xaxdo, I
do ul; adixéw, I do wrong; bBpitw, I insult; Brame,
T hurt, &e.; also xoraxedo, I flatter, and tipwwpéopa,
T avenge myself (rov éxOpdv, on my enemy) ; 6 Lwxparns
ovdeva TOV TOMTaY 7ndiknoev, Socrates acted unjustly to
none of his fellow-citizens.

§ 897.—Not unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as
its object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate
clause: kai pot Tov vidy eine, ef pepdOnke thy réxvqv, more animated
than kai por eimé, ci 6 vids pepdOne tiv réxvny, and tell me about
my son, whether he has learnt his trade, Comp. § 519, 5, Obs, 2.

§ 398. 6) The Accusative of the external Object is
used with the verbs: evyw (comp. fugio), dmrodiSpdoxe,
L run away from; p0dve, I get before ; Onpdw, Onpevu,
T hunt after ; pipéopar (comp. imitor), &pr$<o, I rival ;
apelPopat, I repay, I respond to; NavOdvw (comp. lateo),
éxheirw (comp. deficio); éxrelren pe 1) dais, spes me

238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. § 399,

§ 399. c) This Accusative is further used with verbs =

of emotion: aidouat, aicytvoyat, I am ashamed (rov
marépa, before my father); puratropa, etraPéopat, I
am on my guard against; Oappéw, I have confidence
(tiv loxdiv, in my strength); éxmdjtTopal, KaTaThjr-
touat, I am amazed at; similarly with duvups, T swear
by (rovs Oeods, the gods).

Obs.—As with dpuvvpt, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used

even without a governing verb: vai pa rdv Aia, Yes, by Zeus!
(§ 643, 16).

§ 399. The Space and Time over which an action
extends are often expressed by the Accusative: xownp
oddv AOopuev, we came by a common road ; Hom. «r\ipaxa
inp KateBnceto, she came down the high ladder ;
Trev Oaraccay, to navigate the sea; évradOa Kipos
Euewe tyuépas mévre, there Cyrus remained five days.
Comp. § 405.

On the Accusative of the aim, see § 406.

§ 400. 2. The Internal Object

is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive,
but also with intransitive and passive verbs.

The internal Object is:

a) a word of cognate origin with the verb: Hom.
GArot & aud arrow paxny eudyovto wiAgjow, alit
circa alias portas pugnam pugnabant; teiyos Teri
fovrat, they wall (build) a wall; wowmrhy wéwrew, to
send an escort, make a solemn procession; KakioTny
Sovrelav edovreucer, he served the worst service (endured
the worst slavery); Hom. 7@ meiceat 65 Kev apiorny
Bovry Bovrcion, you will obey him who advises (gives)
the best advice; tiv évavtlav vocov vocodpev, we suffer
(sicken) from the opposite sickness ; weyddnv twa Kpiow
xpivetat, he is judged (tried) in a great trial;

b) or a word akin to the verb in meaning ; mdnynv
tumretas Baputarny, he is struck a very severe blow ; wacas

I

§ 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 239

voaous Kapver, he suffers from all diseases ; poet. dddppata
yoacba, to moan lamentations; modenov éotpdtevoav
tov lepov Kadovpevor, they marched out to the so-called
holy war ; ypadiy Sioxew, to pursue with a writ (comp.
ypadhny ypaeo Gar) ;

¢) or a substantive defining the verb: ’Odvumia wiKay,
to conquer in the Olympic games ; ydpous éotidy, to give
a marriage-feast ; Hom. voorov ddupopevot, weeping for
the return ; wévea trvelovtes ’Axatol, the courage-breathing
Achaeans ; ayyérinv civ, to go a message ; wip dpOar-
protot SedopKas, looking fire with the eyes (flashing fiery
looks) ;

d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb:
hos ovtdcat, to strike a wound (produce by blows);
dpxia Tadpvew, foedus ferire, i. e. foedus hostiam feriendo
efficere; poet. de () avapyla) tpoTas Katappiyyvuct,
it (anarchy) breaks flight, i.e. produces flight by breaking
through the ranks.

§ 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjec-
tive or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as
a special qualification, almost like an adverb (§ 400, e):
orlyov areivat, to be a little way off; wéya Wevddera,

he tells a great lie (comp. péya weddos wWedderar) ;

TovTO xalpw, at this I rejoice; tl ypnocopar ToVTY,
what use shall I make of this? wavra reicopa, I will
obey in all things.

§ 402. 3. Double Object.

Many verbs have a double object, consequently a
double Accusative ; the following, which most frequently
occur with this construction may serve as examples:
diSdonw (edidaEav tov raida Thy povotkiy, docuerunt
puerum musicam); xpirtw, I hide; épwrdw, I ask ;
aitréw, I demand ; mpartopat, I exact (apyipuov tous
mapovtas, money from those who are present); Kaxov

210 DOUBLE OBJECT.

eyo Tovs ex8pous, I speak ill of my enemies ; ; andl <

péopat, arroatepéw, I deprive of ; dvapipynoKe, I remind ©
of ; évdtw, audiévveps, I put on (rwa yirdva,a tunicon
some one); mepiBadropat, I encircle (relyn thy modw,
the city with walls). Hom.: % 8€ uéyav iorov

Simraxa, she wove a double garment at the loom (§ 399, 6).

Obs. 1.—In the passive construction the thing remains in the

Accusative : d:ddcxopa ty povaotkny; apypnpa Tov immor,
I am robbed of the horse.

Obs, 2.—Many other verbs besides these have a double Acousn- :

tive, by an external object being added to the internal one:
Hom. dy Zeds hires ravroiny Gaddrare, whom Zeus loved with
multiform love, i. e. to whom Zeus manifested love in various
ways (§ 400, a); Aloyivns Krnowpavra ypapiy mapavépev
édiwxery, Aeschines prosecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of vio-
lating the law (§ 400, b); poet. wod\d oe ddvppara kareiBov Ti
“Hpdxdevov odor youpéevny, many wailings I saw you give vent
to about the departure of Heracles (§ 400, c); Hom. €dxos 6 pe
Bpords otracev avnp, the wound which a mortal man struck me
(§ 490, d).

§ 403. 4. The Accusative as a Predicate.
A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the
Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10,

and 392, which signify naming, deeming, making, appoint- —

tg, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double
Accusative in the Active, one of the external Object,
and one of the Predicate: oi cokaxes ’AéEavSpov Oeov
avopatoy, the flatterers used to call Alexander a ged ;
aipeicOai tiva otpatnyoy», eligere aliquem ducem; ob
TOUS TACioTa ExoVTas Evdatpovert dT oVs vomit, I do
not deem those possessing most the happiest; mapéyo
éwauTov evreO 7, I show myself obedient ; €\aBe todTo
Sapov, he received this (as) a gift.
Obs.—The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the
predicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the pas-

sive construction both Accusatives must become Nominatives
according to § 392.

§ 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined t

OEE ——

§ 405. DOUBLE OBJECT. 241

verbs and adjectives, to point out to what the idea ot
these words refers, in reference to what they are to be
understood: xkipyw tiv Kkeparny, I suffer in the head
(comp. § 400, 6); adios macav adtxiav, unjust in
every (kind of) injustice (in every way, comp. § 400, a) ;
"EnAqvés cior TO yévos, they are Greeks in race; &
Zyouev TA cH pmata, we are well in body; Hom. éppara
ka keharsv lxeros Aut reprrixepadve, in eyes and head
like thunder-loving Zeus; wapOévos Kad) TO etdos, a
maiden beautiful in form, or of beautiful form (facie
pulchra); ov8els dvOpwros aitis TadvTa codpds, no man
is himself wise in everything ; 0 Mapavas rotapos eixoot
xa wévte Todas elye TO Edpos, the river Marsyas was
twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called
the Accusative of reference.

Obs.—Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial,
Accusatives: 1d dvopa, in name, by name; rd mAjOos, in
number; tov tpdmov, tn character; rovrov tov tpdmov, im
this way ; tiv piow, by nature ; mpépacw, on the pretext, osten-
sibly ; Sixny, like; xapw, for the sake of (gratia); rd nav,
altogether, on the whole ; mwodd, by far; ri, quid, what? why?
ti kdalers; why weepest thow? aira raira jo, for this very
reason I am come,

_ § 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time,
the Accusative expresses extension (comp. § 399, b):
Hom. rav Huap depdunv, a whole day I was borne
along, totum diem ferebar ; Baciheds cal" EdAnves atretyov
adMpraov Tpidxovta orddea, the king and the Hel-
lenes were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Hom.,
Nelmeto Soupds epwnv, he remained a spear’s throw
behind ; tov pev ed trabdvta Set pepvicbar Tov wWdavTe
Xpovov, tov 8& roujcavta evOds ériredrjoOat, he who
has received kindnesses ought to remember them throughout
lg but he who has done them immediately to forget
€

Obs, 1.—An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard
to time, is to be translated by since before or ago: €Bddspyr
a:

« — sis
; "

242 THE GENITIVE, § 406.

jpépav } Ovyarnp air@ érerehevrijxer, his daughter had died
seven days before,

Obs. 2.—Freer Accusatives, referrible chiefly to time, are: rovrow
rov xpdvor, at this time; rd Aourdy, for the future, henceforth ;
réros, at last; mpdrepov, formerly ; apxny, wp to the beginning,
hence entirely; riv raxiarny, supply 68d», the quickest (way);
paxpdy, far, distant,

§ 406. In the poets the Aceusative joined to verbs of
motion also denotes the place towards which an action
is directed: Hom., rod 5é eros odpavoy ixe, his fame
reaches up to heaven; mas tOes”"A pyos; quomodo Argos
venisti? On the absolute Accusative of participles see
§ 586.

D) The Genitive.

§ 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing
belonging to another.

Obs.—Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a

noun, and even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles
that with a noun,

§ 408. 1. The Genitwe with Substantives,

One Substantive may be joined to another in various
ways; the most common are:
1. Lwxpdtns 6 LwppovicKor vids, Socrates son of
Sophroniscus: Origin.
2. 7) oixia TOD WaT pos, the father’s house: Possesston.
8. vouicpa apyuplou, a silver coin: Material.
Hom. dérras ofvov, a cup of wine: Contents.
4. of TrEloTon TV ‘EXXAnvewr, most of the Hellenes:
Partitive Genitive.
5. 6 hoBos r&v Toreulov, metus hostium, i. e., either
a) the fear of the enemy, i.e., the fear which the
enemy feels (Subjective Genitive), or,
b) the fear about the enemy, i.e., the fear of whieh
the enemy is the object (Oljective Genitive).
6. SodAos révte par, a slave worth five minae: Value,
7. ypady Kromis, an accusation of theft: Cause
8 modétou apery, a citizen’s virtue: Quality —

-

EE ————

§ 412, THE GENITIVE. 243

9. Hom. Tpolyjs mrodieBpor, the city of (called) Troy :
Designation.

Which of the two substantives in any particular case
has to be expressed by the Genitive, is generally quite
as clear from their meaning as in English.

But the following special peculiarities in the use

of the different kinds of Genitives deserve to be

noticed :

§ 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father,
even without the addition of a Substantive: Lwxpdrns
6 Lwdpovicxov, Socrates the son of Sophroniscus ; Midr-
riadns Kipwvos, Miltiades son of Kimon; poet., Avs
“Apreuis, Artemis, daughter of Zeus.

§ 410. 6) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive
has yery different meanings (comp. § 383): ta Tap
‘EAdjver, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes
(comp. ta “EXAnviKd); 7d Ths ddvyapyxias, the nature
of the oligarchy; on the other hand, 7d tod Anpo-
abévous, the saying of Demosthenes; ta tov piwv
xowd, the property of friends is common.

§ 411. ce) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the
expressions: eis SidacKxddov hovtar, to go to the master’s
(house), %.¢., to go to school; év or eis"Acdou (Homer,
eiv Aidao Sopors, in Hades’ dwelling, dominion), in or into
the lower world.

§ 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4), denoting a
whole to be divided, is most common with numerals
and superlatives: moXXol trav ’"AOnvalwr, multi Athe-
niensium; mwotepos Ttav aderdadv; which of the two
brothers? mavtwv dptotos, omnium optimus; but also
with yarious adjectives: of omovdaiou Tav TodTar,
the assiduous among the citizens. So, more freely in the
Homeric poems: dia Gedy, the divine one among goddesses ;
Sijpov avyp, a man of the people ; and similarly, avy ~av
pntopwr, a man from the number of the orators,

244 THR GENITIVE.

The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes a

the whole territory: @78a: ris Bowwrias, Thebes in
Boeotia ; with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a
whole which is attained by degrees. eis rodro dvoias
HrOov, eo usque insaniae progressi sunt.

Obs.— Adjectives which have a Partitive Genitive sometimes
follow the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them: 6
ijpiovs Tod xpdvou, the half of the time (instead of rd Hysov red
xpdvov); 7) mAeiorn Tis xa@pas, most of the land,

§ 413. e) The Oljective Genitive (5, 6) may be trans-
lated by various prepositions: etvoa trav pide», bene-
volence towards friends; atopia oltov, want of food;
Hom., gpos édntvos 75€ roriros, eagerness for food and
drink; jovyla éxOpav, peace from enemies; ayaves
oywv, contests in speeches ; adopur Epywv, stimulus to
deeds ; amoctacis tav ’AOnvaiwr, defection from the
Athenians ; dots Oavarov, deliverance from death; Bla
momTav, with violence against the citizens, in spite of the

2. Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs,

§ 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec-
tives and their adverbs, 7. e., to such adjectives and
adverbs as are conceivable only in reference to something,
and points out the person or thing they refer to. The
most important adjectives of this kind are:

1. Kowvos, common ; ‘dios, oixetos, own, peculiar, and
others which imply property or belonging to, as: vaos
iepds tod "AzréAXwvos, a temple sacred to Apollo (pos-
session, comp. § 408, 2).

2. Adjectives denoting plenty and want (contents,
§ 408, 3), as: peords, Eurdews, wArjpys, full; wroveros,
rich; évdens, evs, necessitous; further, the adverb
as, enough: mavra evppocivns mréa Hv, all was full
of Joy.

8. Those signifying acquainted or unacquainted with:
Zumrecpos, peritus ; d7etpos, imperitus ; émuotHu@v, skilled

‘
l
*

——— Ce

} 416, THE GENITIVE. 245

(réyvns, tn an art); urijpov, duviywv, mindful and
unmindful,

4. d&wos, worthy; avad£wos, unworthy: wrelotov aévov,
worth most, the worthiest thing (§ 408, 6).

5. Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4), whether
it be positive or negative: wéroyos Tod wévou, particeps
laboris ; dpowpos, without a share; aitios, author, guilty,
reus.

Obs.—To these belong many adjectives parental with dy (4,

§ 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the
genitive : poet. aidy kaka &yevoros, a life which has not tasted
of misfortunes ; pitwy akdavros, unwept by friends.

6. Adjectives in -cxds (§ 351) denoting capability or
fitness for (comp. 3) something: SdacKadixds ypap-
patixis, capable of teaching grammar ; TapacKkevacTiKos
Tov eis Tov TOdcpmor, skilled in obtaining the necessaries
for war.

§ 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a
Genitive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (comp.
$412): aod yis; where on earth? so with évtds, within ;
elow, inside; éxtos, without ; ew, outside; dyyu, éyyus,
mAnoiov, near ; mpocw or Toppa, forwards ; mwépa, beyond ;
evOv, straight towards; mpocbev, Eurrpocbev, in front ;
dmiaOev, behind; ayudorépwberv, on both sides; advo,
upwards (motapav, wp-stream) ; and corresponding with
these also some adverbs of time and manner: mnvixa
THs tpépas; at what time of the day? mas eyes Tis
yveuns; what do you think ? XdOpa trav yovéwr, secretly
from the parents.

§ 416. The Comparative may have the object with
which anything is compared in the Genitive (as in the
Ablative. in Latin): pelfwr tod adepob, major Sratre,
i. @., 7) 0 aberpos, than the brother ; ov mposHKet TOV
dpxovra TOV apxopevery TovnpoTEpoy Elva, i. €., 4) TOUS
apyopévous, tt is not becoming that the governor should be
worse than the governed.

Obs. 1.—This Genitive is used most frequently where it repre-

246 THE GENITIVE.

sents #7 with the Nominative or Accusative; yet it may also
more freely represent # with the Dative: poet. mdelov xpdvos,
by Sei pv? dpéoxew Tois Karw rev évOdde (if) rois évOdde), longeris
the time that I must please those below than that I must please
those here.

Obs. 2.—Like the Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes
joined with the Genitive of the things with which anything
is compared : poet., pdos kiduorov trav mportpwy, a light |
most beautiful in comparison with the former ones, where we
might have expected ddos xd\\uov trav mporépar, lux prioribus
pulchrior, or ddos ka\AoTov mavtwv, omnium pulcherrima,

Obs, 3.—All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule
of Comparatives: SurAdovos, doubly (as great as) ; Sevrepos (ov-
devds), second (to none); torepos, later than; €repos, another
than,

8. The Genitive with Verbs. ’

Very many verbs are joined with the Genitive on the
general principles mentioned in § 408.

§ 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361,
7 and 10) with verbs which denote being, becoming,
making, deeming, in order to predicate something of a
substantive, as originating from, possessing, consisting of,
or in any other way qualifying it, § 408: Lwxparns Lo-
dpovicKxov jv, Socrates was Sophroniscus’s son (§ 408, 1);
#) oixia Tod Tratpos éyéveto, the house became the father’s
property (§ 408, 2); 7d retyos X/Oou rerrotnrat, the wall
has been made of stone (§ 408, 8); of Qeccarol Tov
‘EAXjvev joav, the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes
(§ 408, 4); wodirov ayabod vouiterat rd Oappeiv, to be
courageous is deemed a good citizen’s quality (§ 408, 8).

Obs.—The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and

observation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a
noun or pronoun: rodro tpar padiota Oavpadfoper, this we most
adn, ve in you (properly: this of you we most admire).

§ 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 8) is also
used with verbs of plenty and want (comp. § 414, 2):
ripmAnpt, TAnpow, I fill; wrj0w, yéuo, I am full;
Beopar (Set por), I need; ta dra évérrdncav Saovias
sodias, they filled the ears with wondrous wiedom}; 6

a ces Mi itl

§ 419. THE GENITIVE. 247

Tapov Katpos ToAAs ppovTidos Kal Bovdjjs Setras, the
present time is in need of much reflection and advice.

§ 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used
with many verbs which only partially affect the object
of the action :

a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing:
petéyo (yétTeor! por), I have a share in; petarapBava,
I take a share in; peradiSomu, I give a share (ris delas,
of the booty); Kxowwvéw, I share (comp. § 414, 5); Hom.
citov & aidoin tapin TwapéOnxe yapifouévn Trapedvtor,
the modest stewardess brought bread supplying from the
store,

0bs.—éfa, I smell, also belongs to these: pvpwv d¢er, he smells of
myrrh,

6) With verbs which denote touching, laying hold of,
seizing: amroua, ryatw, I touch; &youa, I hold by,
border (rivds) on something ; avréyopuat, érikapBdvopat,
fF lay hold of ; A\apBdve twa THs yevpos, LT seize one
by the hand ; dpyoua, I begin (ris wardelas, with the
education) ; poet. Pavovtwy ovdev adyos ATTETAL, No
pain touches the dead.

¢) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at: oto-
xalouat Tod cxotrod, I aim at the goal; dpéyouar, I
strive; Sufdw, I thirst; tvyyave, I hit, attain (érvye
trav GOrwv, he won the prizes); éedixvodpuar, I reach,
attain ; jw, I have attained (Herod. duvdpsos, power).

d) With verbs which denote enjoying: écOiw, I eat ;
rive, I drink ; yebw, I give a taste ; érridw, I entertain ;
imoravo, I enjoy (ueylstwv ayabav, the greatest bless-
ings); évds avdpds ed ppovijcavtos Tool dv aTodav-
cerav, many would enjoy a man who has thought sensibly.

e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas
enumerated under a—d, that is, the exclusion from a
share in something: dméyouat, I refrain (cirov, abstineo
cibo); yopitw, I separate ; elpyw, I keep off ; crepioxe,
I deprive ; travowat, I cease; eixw, rapaxwpéw, I yield ;

“a

248 THE GENITIVE. -§ 420,

rvw, I loose; erevOepiw, I free; pelSouat, I spare;

duaptave, arotuyyave, I miss ; evSouar, opadropat,
I am deceived (ris éX a iSos, in my hope).

Obs.—Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative
when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by
the action: wAciorov pépos trivds peréxe, to have the greatest
part in anything ; rive oivor, I drink wine ; olvov, some wine ;
Aayxdvw ri, I attain something; tuvds, a share in something.

§ 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs
denoting a sensuous or moral perception or emotion
(comp. § 414, 3), as: dxovw, axpodouat, I hear; aicOa-
vonat, I perceive; pypvnrxopat, I remember (rod pirov,
memini amici); émiravOdvowa, I forget; pérer pot
TLVvos, erysedéouat, I aim concerned about something, I
care ; évtpéropat, Hom. adréeyw, adreyifw, I concern my-
self ; aperéo, I neglect; odvywpéw, I care little about ;
épaw, I love (§ 419, c) ; ériOupéw, I desire ; muvOdvopai
ti twos, I learn something about one.

Obs.—The Accusative also is admissible with several of these

verbs: with dove if the object is directly audible: @Odyyoy, a
sound, but rod d:dacxddov, the teacher.

§ 421. 5. With verbs of estimating, buying, selling,

&c., the Genitive denotes the value or price (comp.
§ 408, 6, and § 417): 6 dodA0s wévte pvdv Tiparar,
the slave is valued at five minae ; wood oveicbat, magni
emere ; TaXaytov atrodocOa, to sell for a talent.

§ 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni-
tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7, § 414, 5): roms
ypaperOa aicypov, furti accusari turpe est ; povov die-
«ew, to prosecute for murder; devyer tmapavopwv, he is
charged with violating the law; amépvye xaxnyopias,
he was acquitted of libel; édXwcav rpodocias, proditionis
condemnati sunt.

Obs.—With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the

cause, as: Oavpdle ce ris c@dpoaivns, I admire thee for thy
moderation ; Hom. xwdpuevos yuvarxds, angry about the woman.

§ 425. THE GENITIVE. 219

§ 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs
which imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as:
Kparéw (xpeirtav eiui), apyw (Kpoicos Avddy ijpyev,
Croesus ruled over the Lydians) ; Bacihevo, I rule ;
mepiewpt, Teprytyvopat, I am superior ; ayrrdopat (frTev
eit), IT am inferior ; Aelrropat, vatepéw, I am behind ;
Siapépo TLVOS, differo ab aliquo; BapBapav “EXXnvas
dpyew elds, tt is reasonable that Hellenes should rule
over barbarians.

§ 424. 8. he Genitive is joined with verbs com-
pounded with prepositions, which either always, or
in the sense which they have in the compound verb,
require the Genitive (comp. Chap. XVII.): éBarr(w
Twa Tihs, I eject some one from office ; mportatever THs
monews, he presides over the state; icxdv tod Sixatov
mpotiOnow, he prefers might before right ; xatadppoveiv
rivos, to despise any one; Katnyopetv Ti Twos, to accuse
one of a thing ; watpuov tv TH AOnvaiwy Tore. TpoErTa-
vat Tov “EXdijver, tt was a hereditary custom for the city

of the Athenians to be at the head of the Hellenes.

4. Freer use of the Genitive.

§ 425. The Genitive, without immediate connexion
with a noun or verb expresses:

1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the
language of poetry, and that either the place from
which something is removed: fotac@e Bdabpwr, get up
from the steps; imdyew rijs 0500, to go out of the way
(comp. § 419, e) ;—or the space within which something
takes Place (comp. §§ 412, 415): Tis "Iwvias tobto
aicxpov vevomuctat, within Ionia that is considered dis-
graceful ; Hom. védos od daivero dans yains, no cloud
appeared within the compass of the whole earth ; épyovras
mediowo, they go through or within the plain (comp. the
German ich gehe des Weges),

On another local Genitive, see § 412.

50 THE DATIVE.

§ 426, 2. Time (temporal Genitive), in which case it

is a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space
of time (§ 412), within which something takes place:

Tpis ToD éviavTod, thrice in the year; hpépas, by day;

vuxtos, by night; tod adtod yeydvos, in the same
winter ; Tod dovrod, for the future; ypovov cvyvod, for
some time; éxdotou Erous, each year.

§ 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, comp. § 408, 7,
§ 422), in exclamations: olwoe tis tvyns, alas! for
my fortune (comp. the German O des Leides); and in
Infinitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to).
§ 574, 3, Obs.

§ 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, &¢., as an
absolute Genitive, in connexion with participles, just like
the absolute Ablative in Latin: Kvpouv Baciredovros,
Cyro regnante, § 584 (comp. the German: stehenden
Fusses).

Obs.—The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute
Ablative of the Latins, without a participle; when the verb
to be occurs in the clause the participle dy is to be used:
te puero, vod maidds Srros.

E) The Dative,

§ 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or
thing more remotely connected with an action. —

Obs.—The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on
adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive,

§ 430. 1. Dative of the person concerned.

As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person
more remotely affected by something is in the Dative,
and:

a) with transitive verbs it is the so-called direct

object: Hom. éxta S€ of SHcw ebvaipeva mroricOpa,

and I will give him seven flourishing cities.

6) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or

a thing conceived as a person to which the action

| -

EEE

§ 435. THE DATIVE. 251

refers: mpémet por tr, a thing becomes me; Set por
twos, I need something ; éuol obtw Soxet éyew, it seems
to me to be so; BonOG Tots cvppdyos, succurro sociis ;
weiOov Tots vopors, obey the laws; evyecbe rots Oeois,
pray to the gods; péudowar trois pabntais, I reproach
the scholars.

Obs.—Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed
by the Dative: 7 €v r@ wodéu@ ois cvppaxors BonOea, the help
to the allies in the war.

ce) with Adjectives: 6 dya0ds 76 aya0@ povos piros,

the good alone is dear to the good.

§ 431. 2. Dative of interest.

The Dative denotes the person for whom—for whose

interest—something is or takes place; hence

a) the person benefited or injured (dat. commodi, tn-

commodi): mas avnp avT@® mTrovet, every man toils for
himself ; p@dvos péyrotov Kaxov Tots Exovow avtov, envy
is the greatest evil to them that have it.

§ 432. 5) the possessor with eiul, yiyvouat, and similar
verbs: modXoi pot piros ciciv, I have many friends.

Obs.—The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined
with a Substantive; Herod., of ou Bées, their oxen.

§ 433. ¢) the sympathising person (ethical Dative):
poet. @ réxvov, 7) BéBnxev Huw o Eévos, O child, has the
stranger left us? ti yap matip mor mpéaBus év Soporor
Spa, for what is my aged father doing in the house ?

§ 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (com-
monly id with the Genitive), which is then to be
viewed as one interested in the action: Hom. ronées
Sdpev “Exrops Sip, many were overcome by godlike
Heetor ; ti wémpaxtat tois addois; what has been done
by the rest? 'This Dative is regularly joined with the
Verbal Adj. in -réos: €uol rroreunréor eotiv, mihi puy-
nandum est.

§ 435. e) the person remotely connected with an

252 THE DATIVE.

action: téOvny’ buiv madat, he died to you long ajo;
Hom. waciv xev Tpwecot xiddos dpovo, thou mightest get
thee fame with all Trojans; Hom. totow davéorn, among
them arose; tirokapSavew Set tH Tovobrp Ste evHnOns
éoriv, in regard to such a one we must suppose him
simple.

Obs.—In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly
with, partly without, an accompanying noun: Hom, jpiv eiva-
tés eat TEepitporéwy emavros evOdde pipvdvrecow, it is the ninth
year for us lingering here ; ) SvaBdvrt tov worapov mpds éomépay
606s, the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai
rt €pot Bovropéve, something happens to me as I wish; ovve-
Advre OF Os GuvedAdvTt eizeiv, to speak briefly.

§ 436. 3. Dative of community.

With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote
community, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the
person or thing with which such a community, agree-
ment, or such a meeting takes place, is in the Dative.

a) Verbs of this kind are: xowwvéw, I share (rwi
twos, something with one); cvppwvéw, oporoyéw, cuvdda,
opovoew, I agree ; opovopa, I resemble; opiréo, I aseo-
ciate with ; Siaréyopar, I converse ; Siahépopat, I differ ;
payouat, I fight ; épitw, I dispute: ra épya ob cuppovet
tots Aoyous, the deeds do not harmonise with the words;
poet. Kaxoiow pu) Tposouires avdpdow, add aiel Tov
ayabdv éxyeo, with bad men do not associate, but always
hold to the good.

b) Adjectives: ios, like; 6ovos, TapatrAnotos, similar ,
6 autos, the same ; oixetos, idvos, peculiar ; Kowds, common
(comp. § 414, 1); opvupos, of like name 5 TUVOVULOS,
of like meaning ; Sudopos, different ; évavTios, opposite :
@Tdcpévor. joav Tois avtois Kip Srrdous, they were
armed with the same weapons as Cyrus.

c) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives

just mentioned, especially aya, at the same time; opod,

together: dma Td Etaipe, at the same time with his friend.

§ 487. The Dative is used with many verbs which,

§ 440 THE DATIVE. 253

compounded with prepositions, denote a contact or
union, especially with such as are compounded with
év, cw, ert, yet also with those compounded with pds,
mapd, epi, 01d, aS: émioTiuny eurroey TH Woy, to
bring knowledge into the soul; éixcicOai tii, to press
upon, to urge, one; émitimav Tivi 71, to reproach one with
something ; mposvévat TO Sry, to come before the people ;
mapiotacOa, mapeival Tiwi, to support one ; trepimimrew
tui, to meet one.

§ 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the

Latin Ablative, denotes that by or by means of which

an action is brought about, hence

a) the means or instrument (comp. did, § 458):
Hom. rév ev cata orOos Bare Soupi, the one he struck
on the breast with the spear ; opdpev tots dpOarpois, we
see with the eyes; ovd<ls Erawov Hdovais éxtncato, no
one gained praise by pleasures ; &nuiodv twa Oavate, to
punish one with death; Hom. ticevav Aavaol éua
Saxpua coict Bédecow, may the Danai pay for my tears
by thy darts.

Obs.—Hence the Dative is used with ypjaOa, to make use of ; as
the Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is
often added (§ 361, 10): rotray riot pidakw expijro, some of
them he used as guards,

§ 439. 2) the operating power or cause from which an
action proceeds: dvOpwros picet troduTiKdv, man (és)
, 2 / e
by nature fitted for the State ; ToANAKS ayvoia apap-
Tavopev, we often err from ignorance ; po8e, from fear.
Obs.—With verbs of emotion the Dative expresses the ground or
occasion of the emotion: Sopa, yaipw tH povorky, I delight in
music; Avrodvpa, I am grieved; yxaderaivo, I am angry;
arépyo, ayara, I am satisfied (with something) ; alcxivopa,
I am ashamed (about something).

§ 440. ¢) the measure, by which a thing is measured,
by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is
distinguished: ta pédAXovta Kpivopev Tois yeyevnpévors,

254 THE DATIVE,

the future we judge of by the past; Séxa erect mpo Ths
év Larapive payns of “AOnvaior év Mapabav évixncar,
ten years before the battle of Salamis the Athenians con-
quered at Marathon; word pelfwv, multo major (also
modu, § 404, Obs.); Suvahépew tivds ppovyice, to differ
from any one wn insight.

§ 441. 5. The freer use of the Dative expresses :

a) the way and manner, or an accompanying cir-
cumstance: tovT@ T® Tpdr@, in this way; Big, by
force; orrovdj, with zeal; ovyh, mm silence; Epyp, m
fact; +O dvtt, in truth; idia, privatim; Snpocia,
publice ; Hom. vnriénot, in his folly (§ 362, Ods.).

Obs.—The Dative with airés should be particularly noticed:

6 Sdurmos wevraxogious imméas €XaBev avrois rois dros, Philip

took five hundred horse together with their armour, (Comp. the
Dative of community, § 436.)

§ 442. 6) The place where something happens is
expressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in
poetry: Mapadau, at Marathon; Hom. ‘Edd db: oixia
vaiwv, inhabiting his house in Hellas ; Hom. tof dpowrw
éyov, having the bow on his shoulders ; poet. odois, on the
way.

§ 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as defi-
nitely limited in answer to the question when: rHde TH
vuxti, hae nocte; th borepaia, on the following day;
terapT@ €éret, in the fourth year; ’Oduvprrios, at the
Olympic games ; poet. yewepio voT@, in a stormy south
wind,

0bs,—Notice the difference between the Accusative (§ 405) and

the Genitive (§ 426), in their application to relations of time.

$41.

OE —_—

———-

§ 447, THE PREPOSITIONS. 250

Cuap. X VII.—TueE PREPOSITIONS.

§ 444. Prepositions have a double use. Hither they
are combined with a verb, to define the direction which
the action of the verb takes, or they are used inde-
pendently, and serve, in connexion with different cases,
to point out the relation of single words in a sentence
to one another more distinctly than could be done by
the cases alone,

§ 445. Obs. 1.—As the name praepositio (mpdecrs) points to the
first of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with
verbs, such as: dvev, without (poet. diya, xwpis); aypi, péxpt,
till; peraéd, between; évexa, on account of; mdnyv, besides,—are
called spurious. They are all used with the Genitive (comp. § 415),
except as, to, which has the Accusative.

§ 446. Obs. 2.—All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many
of them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose : mepi,
beyond, very; perd, later; mpds, in addition. On account of this
origin, their position in Homer is very free; they may be separated

_ from their verb, as well as from their substantive: Hom. év 8 airds

edvcero vepora xadkédy, and he himself put on the glittering brass ;
dppi 8¢ xairar Spos diccovra, and the manes wave around the
shoulders, On the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind,

see § 90, In prose only wepi is sometimes thus used.

§ 447. With regard to the cases joined with Preposi- —
tions, the following general rules are to be noticed:

1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the
object upon which, over which, towards which an action
extends (§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the
goal of an action itself (§ 406).

2. ‘The Genitive frequently denotes the place from
which an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral
relation (§ 408, etc.), whilst it depends on other Pre-
positions in the same way as on the adverbs mentioned
in § 415,

8. The Dative denotes a more external connexion
(§§ 435, 442),

255 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, gts. 2?

GENERAL VIEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS.

§ 448. I—Prepositions which can have only one
case:
A) the Accusative: eis, as.
B) the Genitive: dyti, do, é« (€&), mpo—éaven,
aypt, expt, weTakv, Evera, mI}.
C) the Dative: év, cvv (Evy).
II.—Prepositions which can have two cases:
A) the Genitive and Accusative: Sud, ard, inep.
Bb) the Dative and Accusative: avd.
-I1.—Prepositions which can have all the three oblique
cases: api, él, pera, wapd, trepl, pos, b7re.

L—PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE ONLY ONE CASE.
§ 449. A) Prepositions with the Accusative
1. eis or és (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter), to, into,

points out the goal towards which the action is directed. —

The opposite is é&, out. eis is used:

a) of place: oi Aaxedaipovior eiséSarov eis Thy *At-
ruxny, the Lacedaemonians invaded Attica ; eis Sucaethpiov
eisvevat, to come into court; Réyew eis TO WAHOOS, to
speak to the multitude; eis avdpas éyypddew, to enroll
among men. Comp. év, § 456, a.

b) of time: eis tiv borépalay, in diem proximum, for
the next day; eis éxmépay, towards evening; poet. Eros
eis Eros, year by year ; eis Karpov, for the right time.

c) of measure and number: eis Siaxoclous, up to two
hundred ; eis Svvaptv, up to one’s power, as much as is in
one’s power.

d) of purpose: ypjoipov eis Tov Torepov, useful for
the war; eis Tod HKopev, for that we have come.

In compounds it is to be translated by into, m, to.

§ 450. 2. a (comp. § 631), to, only of persons:

—=—-. ——

§ 453, PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257

Hom. aie) tov opotov dyer eds ws Tov opoiov, God

Blways brings like to like.

§ 451. B) Prepositions with the Genitive.

1. avti (comp. Hom. dvra, dvrnv, avtixpd), originally
opposite to (comp. év-avti-os), then instead of, for:
Hom. davti xacvyvytou Eeivos @ ixérns te tétuKTaL, a
stranger and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a
Yrother); dvti Ovntod cdépatos aOavatov S0€av addaka-
rat, to exchange a mortal body for immortal glory.

In compounds it signifies against.

§ 452. 2. ao (Lat. ad, a, Engl. off), from, in the
sense of separation, severance, and origin:

a) of place: Hom. ag’ imrav arto yapate, he sprang
off the chariot to the ground.

b) of time: from, since: am’ éxeluvns tis huépas, from
that day.

¢) of cause: by, from, through: adtovopes amo tijs
eipnyns, independent through the peace.

Phrases: a7é cxorod, far from the goal ; amd yvaepys,
contrary to expectation ; amd ordparos Aéyewv, to speak
from memory; oi amd cxnvis, those of the stage, the
actors.

In compounds it signifies from, off, away.

§ 453. 3. x, before vowels é& (Lat. ex, e), out of
(opposed to eis), denotes removal from within or from
amongst :

a) of place: é« Xadprys pevyer, he rs banished out of
Sparta. Z

b) of time: éx raldwv, from boyhood (a pueris).

¢) of origm: é« matpos xpnorod éyéveto, he sprang
from a brave father; seldom with a Passive verb:
rypacbar Ex Twos, to be honoured by any one.

d) close connection and conformity with: after,
secundum: doyov éx oyou eye, to deliver speech after

8

258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. — § 454

speech; x T&v duoroyounéver, according to the agree- Es?

ment (Lat. secundum).

Phrases: é« deEudis, on the right; ée& icon, equally ; i

dhoa, xpeuacar Te Ex twos, to fasten, to hang one thing
o another (Lat. pendére ex, ab aliqua re).
In compounds: out, away.

§ 454. 4. mpd (Lat. pro), for, before, enstead.

a) of place, before: mpd Ovpay, before the door

b) of time: mpd Tis wayns, before the battle.

e) of preference: mpd tovtwv rebvavar padrov ay

érorto, he would choose death before this, i.e., rather than —

this.
d) for, a rare use: mpo taldwy payecOa, to fight
for the children.
Phrase: mpd 7roAXod troveic Oar (c), to prefer greatly.
In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, forwards.

§ 455. The quasi-Prepositions :

5. dvev, without (poet. ywpis, diya, atep).

6. dypl, méxpt, until,

7. petakv, between.

8. Gvexa, also &vexev, eivexa (poet. obvexa), for the
sake of an olyect to be attained (Lat. causa): trijs
iyielas Evexa ypwpcba TS iatp@, we employ a physician
for the sake of health, (Comp. id with Ace. § 458, B.)

9. mAzjv, besides (praeter).

Obs.—z)jy is often used quite adverbially without governing a
case : poet. ovx Gp’ "Ayatois Gvdpes cial diy bbe; have then the
Achaeans no men but this? lt might be mA rovde, besides
this ?

§ 456. C) Prepositions with the Dative,

1. év (Hom. évi, év, Lat. in, c. Ablat. and iter), in,
unswers to the question where ?

a) of place: év ’AOjvats, in Athens; also among
(inter): év rovrow, among them; év Shum réyew, to
sjeak before the people (comp. § 449, a).

. «
Se ee

— +,
§ 458. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND acc. 259

b) of time: év TovT@ TO eres, in that year.

ce) a moral relation: with: év TG Oe@ 76 Tis paxns
rédos, the result of the battle rests with God.

Phrases: 7 ¢v Mapadadvu payn, the battle at Mara-
thon; év trois mpatos, first by far; év Kaip@, at the
right time; év mposOjxns péper, in addition; &v yepaot
Teva, to put into the hands (comp. Lat. i mensa
ponere).

In compounds: in, into, on. The accented = éveore
signifies, 7 is in, tt exists, it ts possible,

§ 457. 2. ovv or Eiy (Lat. cum), with, denotes com-
panionship (opposed to dvev, comp. perd with Gen.
§ 464, B.): ctv ’AOnvyn évixnoer, he conquered with (the
help of ) Athene; abv vou, in accordance with the law
| (opposed to rapa with Acc. § 465, C, 6).

In compounds: with, together,

IL.—PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE TWO CASES.

The Genitive and Accusative.

Obs.—Here, as everywhere in what follows, that use of a Prepo-
sition is placed first in which its original meaning is most
manifest.

§ 458. 1. dud (akin to dvo, as between is to two
[twain]}), originally between, then through.

A) with the Genitive:

a) of space: most frequently through (Lat. per):
: Hom. dia pév doridos 7rOe haewis SBpiywov é&yyxos,
through the glittering shield pierced the mighty lance.

b) instrumental: by or with: Sua tadv dpOarpav
opapev, by (by means of) the eyes we see (comp.
§ 438).

¢) of space and time: among (inter), during, in: Sia
yetpav éyew, to have in hand; va vu«rds, during
night ; Sua pirias iévar, to be on friendly terms. .

Phrases: 61a ordpatos éxyew, to have in the mouth, to

260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC, g459,

be talking about; & ovdevds roveicOar, to deem as
nothing ; Sia paxpod, after a long interval, interruption.

B) with the Accusative:

a) of space and time almost exclusively in the poets:
through, during: Hom. 8a 8epara, through the rooms ;
dia vixra, during night.

b) usually causal: on account of (the operating cause)
(comp. évexa, § 455, 8): Oia tiv vocov ypopcla Ta
iatp@, we employ the physician on account of the illness.

Phrases: avros 80 éavrov, by himself ; dia ti; why?

In compounds éa is through, or denotes separation
like Lat. dis-: d:apépw=differre, Siaipéw, I sever.

§ 459. 2. xara (comp. Adv. «dt, down), originally
downwards, down (the opposite to dvd).

A) with the Genitive:

a) of space: down from: Hom. BA 8é car’ Otriurn

xapnveav, he came down from the heights of Olympus;
below (sub): ta xata yijs, things below the earth.

b) tropically: about, against: réyew Katd twos, to

speak about, against one.

Phrases: dw kat’ dxpas édeiv, to capture a city
completely ; kata varou, behind.

B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general
sense extension over, relation to, direction towards some-
thing: :

a) of place: kata poov, down a stream; Kata yi
Kal @draccav, by land and sea; Hom. Zeds &Bn xaTa
daira, Zeus went to the feast.

b) of time: kar éxeivoy Tov xpovov, at that time;
of Kal tas, our contemporaries.

¢) of other relations: xata& todrov Tov tporrov, in in
this way; xata wavta, in every respect; Kata Suvape,

according to ability, as much as possible se KaTa TOUS

vopous, tr accordance with the laws; xa’ éué, as regarda
me; kata Uivsapov apiotov idwp, according to Pindar
water is best.

oe

4

§ 461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND Acc. 261

d) distributive in divisions: Hom. xara gira, by
tribes ; xara tpeis, by threes; xal jpépav, daily.

In compounds: down, downwards, against, towards,
very often untranslateable.

§ 460. 3. drép, Hom. also izreip (Lat. super), radical
meaning over,

A) with the Genitive:

a) of space: oO FrLos vrép Hudv Topeveras, the sun
passes over us.

b) tropically, for: payecOar iwép rivos, to Sight Sor
any one (originally over, e. g. over a corpse) : o uTrép Tis
Tarpibos Klvdvvos, the danger for one’s country ; instead
of: éy@ tirép cod arroxpwodua, I will answer instead
of you. ;

B) with the Accusative:
over, beyond—of space and measure: Hom. imép ovddr
éBnoeto, he went over or beyond the threshold; smép
dvvapw, beyond (his) power.

In compounds: over, away over, excessively, for.

With the Dative and Accusative.

§ 461. 4. dvd (comp. adv. ava, above), originally upon,
up (opposed to card).
' A) with the Dative only poet. on the top of, upon:
Hom. ypuoé@ ava oxnrrpe, on the top of a golden staff.

B) with the Accusative dvd denotes the direction
upwards, up towards something, then spreading out
over something (comp. card).

a) of space: ava poov, up the stream; ava tracav Thy
ryiv, over the whole earth, over the whole country.

b) of time: ava Tracav TY nuepav, per totum diem.

e) tropically: ava Aoyou, in accordance with.

d) distributive: ava rértapas, by fours (four men
deep, comp. card, § 459, d).

Phrase: ava ordpa yew, to have in the mouth, to be
talking about (comp. 61d).

In compounds: up, upwards, again, back.

262 PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 462,

II].—PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES.

Obs.—The original meaning is usually most manifest in connexion
with the Dative.

§ 462. 1. duds (Lat. amb-, German um, akin to
dudw, both), radical meaning around (i. e. on both sides,
comp. 7rep/).

A) with the Dative:
only poet.: Hom. Spaces teranav audi ornbecat, the
belt around the breast will sweat ; audi poo, from fear.

B) with the Genitive:

Hom. audi pirorntos aeidewv, to sing about love.

C) with the Accusative:
of place, time, measure, occupation: audi ta Spia, about
the boundaries ; audi todrov tov xpovov, about this time ;
audi ta é€jxovta, ecirciter sexaginta; ddl Seimvov
moveiv, to be occupied about a meal.

Phrase: of audi tiva, any one with his attendants ;

hence even: of audi IIddtwva, Plato and his followers.
In compounds: about, around, on two sides, doubly.

§ 463. 2. éi, radical meaning, upon, on, on the -

surface, by.

A) with the Dative:

a) of space: Hom, ért y@ovt cirov Sovres, eating
bread on earth; émi rh Oardoon oixeiv, to dwell by
the sea.

b) of teme: él rovrous, thereupon.

c) of an ethical relation: émt trois mpdypacw elvat, to
preside over the business ; émi tots morepulots elvas, to be
in the power of the enemy; éri tw xaipew, to rejoice at
a thing; especially also of purpose: él maWela todro
éuabes, yeu learnt this for education; and of condition:
émt toxows Saveifew, to lend on interest ; éml tobTr@, on
this condition.

B) with the Genitive:

a) of space, in answer to the question where: Kipos

a
“a
;
.
4

§ 465. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263

mpovpaiveto eh &puatos, Cyrus appeared on a chariot ;
and to the question whither: émt Xdyou wreiv, to sail to
Samos. (Comp. § 419, c.)

b) of time: émt Kpotcov dpyovtos, in the reign of
Croesus ; also in many connections: near, by.

C) with the Accusative:
on, on-to: dvaBaivav ef irov, to mount (on-to) a
horse ; émi SeEid, on the right.

Phrases: os él rd ond, for the most part; To ér
éué, for my part.

In compounds: on, at, by, in addition, be-, very often
untranslateable.

§ 464. 3. werd (German mit), radical meaning, én the
midst.

A) with the Dative:
in poet. only: amidst, among (inter): Hom. “Exropa, ds
Oeds Exxe pet avdpdot, Hector, who was a god among
men.

B) with the Genitive:
with, in the sense of participation with (comp. ov,
§ 457): pera trav Evppdyov kivduverew, to fight with
(in alliance with) the allies; peta Saxptwv, with tears.

C) with the Accusative:

a) into the midst, among: poet.: Hom. iov pera eOvos
étaipay, going among the crowd of companions.

6) usually after: Hom. oiyovtat peta Seirvov, they
go after (for) a meal; peta tov Tedorovyncvaxoy
morepnov, after the Peloponnesian war.

¢c) seldom in (as with the Dative): wera yeipas exer,
to have in hand (comp. did); we? juépay, interdiu.

In compounds: with, after, trans- (werariévas, trans-
pose).

§ 465. 4. mapa (Hom. mdp, wapat), radical meaning,
beside, near.

A) with the Dative:
at or near: Hom. rapa yvyvol xopwvlot pate, to

ee
F
; bt
_ °
,

264 PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466.

linger near the curved ships; xa map’ euol tis éumeipia
éoriv, I also have some experience (with me also is, &e.),

B) with the Genitive:

a) from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote
receiving either bodily or mentally: Hom. dzrovooreiv
mapa vndv, to return from the ships; NapBdvew, pavOa-
veww Tapa Twos, to receive, learn from some one.

b) by, very rare, and only poet.: vaverdv map’ "lops)-
vou pelOpwr, dwelling by the waters of the Ismenus.

C) with the Accusative:

a) to: Hom. to 8 aris irnv mapa vias, they went
again to the ships.

b) along, near by:

of place: Hom. mapa Siva Oardoons, along the sea
beach.

of time: during: map’ 6dov Tov Bilov, per totam vitam,
during the whole of life ;

compared with: Set tas mpdEes map’ addjras reévas,
you must put the acts by the side of (or compare with) —
one another; with the comparative, peitoyv rs ma
tovro, something greater than this ;

on account of (comp. propter, near, and on account of):
mapa tiv hpetépay apérevay Pidimmos av&eTrat, on
account of our negleet Fhilip becomes great.

Taken negatively: besides: éyouév Tt mapa tadra
Gdro réyewv, we have something else to say besides this ;

contrary to (opposed to xard with the Ace.): mapa
Tov vopov, contrary to the law, propel past the law, by
evading the law.

Phrases: wapa puxpov, nearly ; wap’ ovdev troveia Oar,
to deem as nothing.

In compounds: near, at, past, beyond, over (mapa-
Baiveww, overstep).

§ 466. 5. wept (Hom. adv. zrepi, very = Lat. per in
per-magnus), radical meaning around (from above), —
comp. audi.

ee

§ 467, PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE OASES. 265

A) with the Dative:
round, around, near, for: Hom. wep) Sxarjou wvdgo1,
round the Skaean gate; wept tois gudtatos KvBever,
to gamble for what is dearest.

Hom. zrepi xijps, at heart ; rept poBy, from fear.

B) with the Genitive:

a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: tiva
Sofav éxeis rept todtwr ; what opinion have you about
this? Bovrevovtat tept Tod moréuou, they consult about
the war.

6) in Hom. over, above: wept mdvtov Eupevar ddrov,
to be above all others; hence the prose phrases: epi
moAnXov ToreicOa, to place above much, i. e. estimate
highly ; mept ovdevds rroveicOar, place above nothing, i.e. ©
estimate at nothing at all.

C) with the Accusative:
almost the same as audi (§ 462): epi Alyurroy
(around, i. e. everywhere, in Egypt), about the country
of Egypt; figuratively: mm regard to, about, concern-
tng: tepl pirocopiay omovddfew, to be zealous about
philosophy.

In compounds (with adjectives = Lat. per-): round,

round about, besides, over.

§ 467. 6. xpos (Hom. sporti, zrori), akin to wpo,
radical meaning at, to (towards the front), comp. wapd.

A) with the Dative:

a) at, near: 6 Kipos wv mpos BaBvrdu, Cyrus was
near Babylon.

6) on, to: Hom. moti &é oxirtpov Bddre yay, he
threw the staff on the ground ; tov vodv mposéyete mpor
ToUT@, give your mind to this.

¢) besides, in addition to: mpds tovrois, besides this; —
mpos Tois adrots, besides the rest.

B) with the Genitive:

a) with, in the sense of community: Hom. pos yap
Ads eiow dravres Ecivol te wrwyxoi te, with (protected

~ ae

266 PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE TRREE CASES, § 468.

by) Zeus are all strangers and the poor; mpdos twos

elvat, to be with (on the side of) any one; mpods iatpod

éorw, it is with (belongs to) a physician, medici est,
mpos Twos déyeuv, to speak for (in behalf of) any one;
mpos Ocadv, with (in presence of, by) the gods, per deos,
form of an oath.

b) towards (versus): mpos peonuBpias, towards the
South, comp. mpos with Ace.

c) from, by (comp. mapa with Gen.): 680s ampos
Ocav, blessing from the gods; sometimes with Passive
verbs: pos twos pircicbat, to be loved by some one.

C) with the Accusative:

a) to: &pxovras mpos Huas mpécBews, ambassadors
come to us; mpos tov Shwov ayopeveww, to speak to thé
people.

b) towards, against (versus, adversus, erga): ampos
Boppav, towards the North (comp. mpés with Gen.) ;
SixdferOar mpos twa, to enter an action against any
one; muctas Siaxcicbar mpos tiva, to be faithfully dis-
posed towards some one; mpos Bacidéa crovdas trove
c0ai, to make a treaty towards (with) the king.

c) in regard to, according to: Svapépew mpos apernp,
to differ in regard to virtue; mpos Ta Kadota TeV
ia,yovtwv Set TA. ova zpdTTew, we cught to arrange
the future according to the best of the present means;
mpos tadra, according to this.

Phrases: mpds %Sovyv, according to pleasure; ampos
xapw, in favour of ; mpds Biav, by force; obdé mpoc
ene, nothing to me.

In compounds: to, in addition, near, together with.

§ 468. 7. imo (Hom. also bral, Lat. sud),
radical meaning under, below.
A) with the Dative:

under: Hom. tév id tocol péya orevayitero yaia,

under their feet the earth loudly groaned; im’ ’AOnvaiow
elvat, to be under (subject to) the Athenians; poet,

.-

§ 470. THE PRONOUNS. 267

yepsly id? juetépyow drodca, (Troy) conquered under
(by) our hands.

B) with the Genitive:

a) under, in space: v7rd vis, under the earth; in the
sense of dependency: tm’ avrAnt&v yopevew, to dance
under (the guidance of) flute-players ; hence

b) by, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning:

mods éddw bd Tov “ENXjvar, the city was taken by
he Hellenes ; mroddol aréPavov irs tHv BapBdpwr, many
were killed by the barbarians.

ce) from, because of: td yipws aoOevns jv, he was
weak from old age.

_C) with the Accusative:

a) under: Hom. ds eirav bd rovtov édtceTo Kupai-
vovta, having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy
sea; t7rd TO dpos nidifovTo, they spent the night under
(at the foot of) the mountain.

b) of time: towards (Lat. sub): id vix«ra, towards
night ; iro tiv vixra, during the night.

In compounds: under, down under, gradually, secretly,
often untranslateable.

Cuap. X VIII.—Tue Pronovns.

§ 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns
is used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be mer
tioned with special emphasis: cal od dyes adtov, tu
quoygue eum videbis, i. e. ob ovov éyw (not merely I).

§ 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is
frequently supplied by the article (§ 373). On the
article with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388.

a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun the Greek likes
to use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pro-
noun. Such a Genitive, when the substantive to which
it belongs has the article, usually stands either before

268 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN, §471,

the article or after the substantive: cod 6 vids or

6 vids cou, thy son, not 6 cod vids.

6) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near
to a possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2), it may be qualified
by a Genitive: raya Sverivou cad, my ils, the unfortu-
nate one’s [mea misert mala),

§ 471. 3. The Reflexive Pronoun refers either to the
subject of the clause in which it occurs: & dyabe, pH
ayvoes ceavtov, good friend, be not ignorant of thyself ;
or, in dependent clauses, it refers back to the subject
of the leading clause: eisvévas éxédrevoev, ei pédRots
abv éavt@ éxtrreiv, he bade you enter, if you were going
to sail away with him (secum).

Obs. a)—Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun the usual Personal
Pronouns also may be employed: dox@ pot odk dmapdoxevos
elvat, I think myself not to be unprepared.

Obs. b)—The simple Pronoun of the third person, of, of, €, &e., is
commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, but in Hom. it
is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, &c. (like the
Attic airod, aid, airdv, &c., according to § 474): Aéyera
*Amddav Exdeipar Mapovay épifovrd of mepi codias, dicitur
Apollo Marsyae cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom.
airoparos S€ of HAOe—Mevédaos, sponte sua ad eum venit
Menelaus.

Obs. c)—The Reflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the
place of that of the first and second : d¢i jas dvepéoOa éavrovs,
we must ask ourselves; in like manner the Possessive és
sometimes stands for the Possessive of the first two persons ;
Hom, od yap €ywye iis yains Sivapar yAvkeporepov G@Ado ideaOa,
Sor I can see nothing sweeter than my own country.

§ 472. The following are used as Possessives of the
Reflexive Pronouns:

a) the Genitives of the Reflexive Pronouns, especially
in the Singular: éuavtod, ceavtod, éavtod. When the
substantive to which they are joined has the article, the

Genitives stand between the article and the substan-—

tive: Zeds tiv “AOnvav Epvoev ex tis éavtod Keparas,
Zeus produced Athene out of his own head.
5) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, espe-

- 4 igs
ee ee

OO

§ 475. DEMONSTRATIVE AND JNTERROG. PRONOUNS. 269

cially in the plural: spérepos, tuérepos: oférepos is
exclusively Reflexive.

¢) the Possessives in connexion with the Genitives of
autos: aéTepos abtav, &c.

§ 473. The Reflexive Pronoun in the Plural is also
used instead of the Reciprocal Pronoun drdjrwv:
dteAeyopueOa Hyiv avtots, we conversed with one another
(among ourselves).

§ 474. On avros, self, and 6 avdros, the same, see
§ 389.

avros in the oblique cases, like the Lat. ¢s, ea, id, is
used as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person
or thing mentioned before: édéovro adrod rapapeivat,
they wanted him to remain.

The Genitive avrod, js, dv, like the Lat. ejus, eorum,
is the Engl. his, her, their, when it does not refer to the
subject. Its position is that pointed out in § 470, a:
6 vlog avTod or avTod Oo vids, filius ejus. Still the Geni-
tive of airés often supplies the place of the Reflexive of
the third person.

§ 475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, odtos points
more to what precedes and is already known; éd¢ to

_ what follows and has not yet been named; so likewise

are distinguished tovdros, of such quality; tocodros,

80 great; tndtKodTos, so old—from Tovdsde, Tocdsde,

TndwKosde.—On the article with these Pronouns, § 389.
On the demonstrative uses of és, § 213, Obs.

§ 4756. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in
§ 216: ris, morepos, motos, &c., are used exclusively
in direct questions. In indirect ones the compound
Relatives Goris, o7rorepos, o7roios, &c., are employed.
The former, however, are often used in indirect ques-
tions, though the latter never in a direct one: tis «i;
who are you? eimé pot, Satis €f or Tis el, tell me who
you are.

On the Attraction with Relative Pronouns, §§ 597-603

270 THE ACTIVE VOICE.

Cuap. XIX.—TueE Voices or THE VERB,

§ 476. 1. The Active Voice,

1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intran
sitive as well as a transitive meaning. Thus éAatvew
means to drive and to ride; éyewv, to have, hold, and to be
in a condition (Karas exer, bene se habet); mparrew, to do,
and to be (ed rpattw, I am doing well); Snrodv, to make
and to become manifest.

In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean-

ings: see above, §§ 329, 330.

2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become
intransitive when compounded: Pddreuw, to throw—
petaBarnrery, to change; ésBdrdXrew and éuBdrrew, to fall
into, issue (of rivers); Siddvar, to give—evddovar, to give
in; émdidovat, to grow; Komrew, to cut; mpoxomrew,

proficere, make progress; épew, to bear; Sdiahépew,

differre, to differ or be distinguished,

8. The Active often denotes an action which the
subject accomplishes not immediately bat mediately, that
is, causes or allows to be done by others: 6 Képos
Katréxavoe TA Bacideva, Cyrus had the royal castle burnt
down. This is called the Causative use.

§477. 2. The Middle Voice.

Its primary meaning is reflexive, i. e. the action of the
verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from
which it issues.

The Middle, in the first place, may be either transitive
or intransitive; it is transitive when it can haye an
object in the Accusative: mpdartopat XPNAT As I gain
for myself money ; intransitive when it is incapable of
having such an object: awéyouat, I restrain myself.

The Middle, further, can vary much in its mode of

referring back to the subject. We distinguish:

. ~

§ 480. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 271

§ 478. 1. The Direct Middle,
in which the subject is at the same time the direct object
of the verb: Aovopar, I wash myself ; tpéropat, I turn
myself ; émideixvupat, I show myself; tcrawar, I place
myself ; kardrropat, I hide myself. This kind of Middle
is the rarest. The Active with the reflexive pronoun

in the Accusative is more generally used to express
direct Reflexion.

Obs.—Through the direct Middle several middle verbs have
become intransitive or passive: wav, I cause to stop; mavopat,
T stop myself, cease; paiva, I shew; paivopar, I shew myself,
appear ; tnps, I send ; tepac, I send myself, hurry.

§ 479. 2. The Indirect, or Dative-like Middle (§ 431),
in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the
action. Here the action takes place for or in the
interest of the subject, so that in other languages the
Dative may generally be used to denote the reflex
influence: zropitw, I provide; wopifoua, I provide for
myself, e.g. ypnuwata, money ; dyopat yuvatca, I take a
wife to myself ; pucPotpar otpatiatas, L hire soldiers for
myself (but pucbodv, hire out, picOodv éavtov, to hire
one’s self out); petarréwrropal twa, I send for some one ;
Hom. avros éférKxetar avdpa aldnpos, the tron itself

‘draws a man to it. Hence the Athenian says: 6 vopo-

Gerns tiOnot vopovs, the lawgiver gives laws, but o Simos
riOetat vomous, the people gives laws to itself.
Obs.—The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object
being removed from its reach: dpdvopa kivduvorv, I ward off
danger from me ; _mpotepai twa, I send some one away from

me ;> dmroddécba vadv (to give away Jor one’s interest), to sell a
ship. (Comp. § 324, 7).

§ 480. 3. The Sudyective or ethical Middle.

This denotes that an action originates not only exter-
nally, but also internally from the subject, 7. e. from its
means, power, or disposition: mapéyew, to furnish;
mrapéxerOat, to furnish from one’s own means; croveiv

a

ae

272 THE MIDDLE VOICE. § 48).

elpnynv, to make peace; tovetcOar elpyvny, te strive to
make peace; apBdvew tt, to take something; NauBa-
verOai twos, to lay hold of something; ckoreiv, to
look at ; cxoreia@an, to reflect.

Obs.—The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive
verbs; it then expresses a state more intensively than the
active: modtrevew, to be a citizen; modcreverOa, to act as a
citizen; Bovdevew, to give advice; BovdreverOa, to deliberate
with one’s self.

§ 481. 4. The Causative Middle.

As the Causative Active (§ 476, 3) expresses an
action only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is
often used to denote that the subject Aas an action done
for or on itself: 6 mathp SiddcKxetas tov viov, the father
has his son instructed; wapatiOewar Setrvov, I have a
meal placed before me; Sixafowas, I have judgment pro-
nounced for me; amoréuvoua. tas yeipas, I have my
hands cut off.

§ 4815. As examples the following more important
verbs may be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle
essentially ‘differs in various ways from that of the
Active: dpye, I am first, dpyopa, I begin; 6 pyreap
ypader vopov, the orator proposes (writes down) @ law;
6 KaTiyyopos ypadetas Tov adixnoavta, the accuser prose-
cutes (has the name written down) the wrong doer ; tipwpa
rit, I help one; tipwpodpai twa, I avenge myself on one;
aipa, I take, aipodpar, I choose; Saveitw, I put out to
interest ; Saveifonar, I borrow at interest ; weiOw, I per-
suade, weiSouat, I allow myself to be persuaded, I obey.

One and the same Middle may occur in different senses: d:d8dacxo-

pat (4), I cause to teach, dr (1) I teach myself, learn ; tpémo-
pa (1), I turn myself, or (2) I turn to myself: tpémovrat ras
yvopas, they change their opinion; rpémovrat rovs modepious,
they turn away (rut to flight) the enemy (§ 479, Obs.).

§ 482. Obs.—The deponents are distributed among the different
kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by

having no active form. Thus tmoyvotpa, I pledge myself, is a

4
7
q

§ 484. USE OF THE TENSES. 273

direct Middle; but Séyouat, I receive; xrdowa, I acquire, are in-
direct; dyavitopa, I contend; otua, I think, are subjective: dva-
Bidcacba, to revive, is causative. On the Passive Deponents,
§ 328.

§ 483. s. The Passive Voice

has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. :

1, even such verbs as in the Active take a different
case from the Accusative, form a Passive: xatagdpova
twos (§ 424), I despise one; xatadpoveital tis bm’ euod ;
musTevovet TH Bacinel, they trust the king; 6 Baatrevs
mioreveTat UT aiTav; émiBovrever TO Trorcule, he plots
against the enemy ; 6 trodépos érriBovdreveras bm’ avrod,
a plot 1s made against the enemy by him.

2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even
from intransitive verbs: ta otpatevdmeva, the warlike
measures ; TA col TeToNTEVpeva, Your political course,
your policy.

3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents
are sometimes used in a Passive sense: Aiadfopyar, I
force, éBidaOnv, I was forced; in like manner a Passive
may be formed from a Middle: aipéw, I take, aipéopa,
Pass. I am chosen; petetréuhOn, he was sent for, pera-
wéwrropua, I send for (§ 479).

Cuap. XX.—UseE oF THE TENSES.

§ 484. In marking the time the Greeks distinguished :

1. The OrpeErR of time. The three Orders of time
being the Present, the Past, and the Future.

2. The Kixp of time. In regard to the Kind of time
an action is either

a) going on, e. g. yeyvdoxew (gradually), to learn to
know ; or,

b) momentary, e. g. yvavat, to perceive, know ; or,

T

274 USE OF THE TENSES.

¢) completed, e. g. éyvwxévar, to have learnt, to know =

(Lat. nosse).

Obs.—The momentary action may be compared to a point, the —
action going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface.

An action going on is indicated by the forms of the

Present-Stem.

A momentary action is indicated by the forms of the
Aorist-Stems.

A completed action is indicated by the forms of the
Perfect-Stem.

The Future denotes the future Order of time of an
action going on, as well as of a momentary action:
yvocoua, I shall (gradually) get to know, and I shall

perceive ; the Third Future (futwrum exactum) that of 3

a completed action: éyvwxas écowat, I shall have learnt
(Lat. novero).

In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative
indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, —
the Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the cor-
zesponding Indicatives only in regard to the Kind, not
in regard to the Order of time.

The following table presents a general view of these
relations :

Present. Past. Future.

Going on. Ind. Pres. Imperf.
Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf, Part., of the Present. :

Momentary. | Aor. Ind,
Subj., Opt.,._Imperat., Inf., of the Aorist.

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect. —

§ 485. Obs.—As the English as well as the Latin iepawase
generally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a
Momentary — it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar dis-

Completed. | Perf. Ind. Pluperf. | Futurum exact. |

oe

|
:
i

——————<

—— se eC

ts

§ 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 275

tinction, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as free
(hebyeww), and escape (pvyciv) ; flicker and flash; fear (poBeicba),
and be frightened (poBnOjvat, Seirat) ; wonder (Oavpdgew), and to be
surprised (@avpacat) ; to be busy about (mpagcew), and to accomplish
(pagar) ; yedav, to be laughing, and yehdoat, to burst out laughing.

1. Forms oF AN ACTION IN PROGRESS.
a) The Present Indicative.

§ 486. The Present Indicative denotes, as in English
and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the
present time: ixerevouév oe mwavtes, we all implore thee.
Hence by the Present are expressed general assertions,
valid for all times, and therefore also for the Present:
éatt eds, there is a God.

Obs.— Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past,
but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed
by this tense: dxovw, I hear, also in the sense: I have heard
and still bear in mind; vexdw, I conquer, i. e., I am victorious ;
pevya, I am banished ; ddixéo, Tam wrong (have done wrong) ;
O@vncker, he is dead. In this sense alone are used jjxko, I am
come; oixoua, I am gone.

§ 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may
be represented as present, hence the use, very frequent
in Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently

alternates with past tenses: poet. cal mas. opatar Kar

npeOn ; and how is she seen, and was she captured ? érres
yyeito “ApyiSapos Kal éropedveto él tods dvtimddous,
evrav0a oro ovx édéEavTo Tovs Trepl Tov ’Apyidapor,
GAN éykrivovew, as Archidamus took the lead and
marched against the enemy, the latter did not wait for
the troops of Archidamus, but retreat.

§ 488. 6) The Imperfect

is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin
Imperfect,

The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he
wishes to deseribe past states or past actions in their
progress, in their continuance along with others, or in

’

276 THE IMPERFECT. | §

their frequent, continued repetition: Hom. o: péev t

dp olvov Eutoyov évi xpytijpot Kal vdwp, ai & adre
omoyyourt ToduTpyToiot Tpamétas vitov Kat mporibev,
tot 5& kpéa Toda Satedyto, some were mingling wine and
water in mixing-bowls, others cleaning tables with porous
sponges, and placing them, the rest were carving much
meat; tovds pév ody meXTacTas édéEavto of BapBapor
Kal éudyovto, the barbarians met the peltasts, and then
were fighting,—Hom. d¢pa pév jas tv nal aéEeto tepov
hap, Toppa par dudotépwv Bére Harrero, wimré Te
dads, as long as it was morning, and holy day inereasing,
so long the darts of both were striking and people falling.

” a > , e / cal
—ovrote peiov amrectpatoTedsevovto of BapBapot Tav

‘EXAjvev éEjxovta otadiov, the barbarians (did not

encamp) used never to encamp less than sixty stadia from
the Hellenes.

§ 489. Obs. 1—The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely
attempted but not accomplished action: mparos KXéapyxos rods avrod
otparidras €Bidero iva, of 8€ avroy €BadXov, darepov Se emel eyva
Gre ov Suvncera Bidoacba, ovviyyayev éxxdyoiay, first Clearchus
tried to force his soldiers to go, but they shot at him; afterwards,
however, as he perceived he would not be able to force them he sum-
moned a meeting. So édidov sometimes means he offered to give, to
distinguish it from édexey, he gave.

§ 490. Obs, 2.—The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should
and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done,
in opposition to what was done: de: rovs Aéyovras pyre mpos
€x9pav roreic Oar Tov Adyov pyre mpds xdpwy, the speakers ought to
have made their speeches neither from hatred nor from favour (Lat.
oportebat) ; so xpiv, it ought ; eixds Rv, it would be fair.

On the Imperf. with dy, § 494, Obs. 1, and § 537, &c.

§ 491. c) The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Infinitive,
and Participle Present
simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in

the present, past, or future: pawoueba wavtes, OmoTay

opyif@pe0a, we are all mad when we are angry; éheyov
T@ EvOvinue, ote mavtes Erowpor ciev pavOavew, they

told Euthydemus that they were all ready to learn; ovra

—— |

§ 492. . THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 277

mowmow, Erws av od Kedevys, F will do as you may bid
me (sic agam, ut tu me agere jubebis); Tatra éywv
BopiBov ijxouse, Sid THv TaEEwY iovTos Kal HpeTo, Tis o
OspuBos ein, saying this, he heard a noise pass through the
ranks, and asked what the noise was.

Obs.—These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489),
express a mere attempt: 1d dmodidpdckoyra pr) SivacOae dmo-
Spavac odd} popia, for a man not to be able.to run away
when he tries to run away is great stupidity.

§ 492. 2. Forms or A Momentary AOTION.
a) The Aorist Indicative

is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore
denotes the actual beginning of an action in the past,
similar to the Historical Perfect of the Latins.

The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they
wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply
as haying happened, or to represent them as individual
facts without reference to other actions: pera thy év
Kopavela poaynv ot “AOnvaior éféurov thv Bowrtiav
macay, after the battle at Coronea the Athenians left all
Boeotia ;—Ilavoavias éx Aaxedaipovos otparnyos td
“EXAjvev é&erréudpOn peta elxoot vedv amd IleXorov-

‘yncov, Evvérdeov Sé Kal “A@nvator tpidKovta vavol Kal

éotpdtevoav és Kurpov cal airijs Ta Todd KaTeoTpée
yravro, Pausanias was sent out from Lacedaemon as
general by the Hellenes, with twenty ships from the Pelo-
ponnese, but Athenians also accompanied him (accom-
panying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they pro-
ceeded to Cyprus and subdued the yreater part of ut;
Tokikny Kab iatpixiy kal pavtixiy “AnOd\d@v avedper,
Apollo invented the arts of archery, medicine, and pro-
phecy ;—Hom. tiv 8& word patos ide Tyréuayos Oeo-
evs, 8A S iOds mpoOvpoto, vewecanOy & evi Ovp@ Ectvov
80a Ovpnow edectapev, eyyiO. Sé aotdas yelp’ Ere
SeEvrepiy Kal édéEaro yddxeov Syyxos, but her first
Telemachus of form divine beheld, and he went straight to

278 THE AORIST INDICATIVE. § 493,

the porch, and was grieved at heart that a stranger stood
a long time at the door, and going near he took him by the

right hand and eased him of his brazen spear.
§ 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an

action as having taken place in the past, it answers to —

all the different Preterites in other languages, especially
often in subordinate sentences to the Latin and English
pluperfect: Aapetos Kipov peraréwretas (§ 487) amo
Ths apxhs ts avtov catpdrny éroincev, Darius has
Cyrus sent for from the province, over which he had made
him satrap (fecerat). Thus the Aorist is used with the
Conjunctions of time, ézrei, &s, dre, as, when, like the
Latin Perfect with postguam, ubi, ut: os 6 Kdpogs
jo0etTo Kpavyis, averndnoev ert tov trmov datep évOov-
ciav, when Cyrus perceived (ut audivit) a ery, he sprang
upon his horse like one inspired.

§ 494, The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience
implying that a thing once happened, but admitting an application
to all times : poet. rd xpdvm 9 Sixn mavras HAO aroricapern, with
time avenging justice always came (and hence always comes); kat
Bpadds etBovdos cidev traxdy dvdpa bidxev, even a slow man, when
well advised, overtook (overtakes) by pursuit a quick man. In
English we employ the Present in such general assertions, and often
add such adverbs as usually, commonly, always, &c., ras rav pavr@v
guvovatas ddtyos xpdvos dieAvcev, a short time usually dissolves the
associations of the bad. This Aorist is called the gnomie Aorist,
because it is often used in gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Hom.
it is often also used in comparisons.

Obs, 1.—In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist some-
times has dy in order to express the case as one that may have
occurred, and therefore may occur oftener: €hekev av, he may
have said. In the same way the Imperfect is used, but re-
ferring to an action in progress: dva\apSavey abray ra mouhpara
dinpdrear av, ri éyouev, taking up their poems I would ask what
they meant.

Obs. 2.—The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing. is
frequently used to express actions and states beginning only at

the moment of speaking: é¢yéAaca, I burst out laughing; poet.

éxjves’ Epyov Kal mpdvorav tv eOov, I praise the deed and the
prudence which you have exercised.
On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, &c.

-

a,

a

§496. THE AOR. SUBJ., OPT., IMPERAT., AND INFIN. 279

§ 495. 6) The Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative,
and Infinitive,

denote a Momentary action simply, whether of the
present, past, or future: of tpudxovta mposétaEay arra-
yayev Aéovra, iv’ amoOdava, the Thirty commanded to
take Leon away to die; amopa, ti mpatov pvnc0a, I am
tn doubt what first to mention ; un Oavpdonte, éav Tapa-
Sofov eltrw Tt, be not surprised if I say something strange ;
GU fot aTroKpiwat, @ Tai, give me an answer, boy; wéya
olpat Epyov TO apynv Katarpata, Tord & ete peifov Td
haBovta Siacocacba, I deem it a great thing to found
a government, but a still greater to maintain it after
acquiring tt.

Obs.—The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive
Aorist, therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the.
Present, just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imper-
fect; the Aorist forms-express a single fact, conceived as a
point, the Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long
duration : yaXemrdy 76 roveiv, 7d Se KeAedorat padiov, it is difficult
to do, easy to command ; «t my €xeus dvridéyew, avtireye: ei 5é
pn, waioa wodddkis A€yav Tov adrov Aéyoy, if you have any-
thing to say in reply, reply (even in a long speech), if not,
cease (at once) frequently repeating the same statement.

§ 496. The Aorist Participle regularly expresses

‘something which took place earlier or before the act of

the principal verb: Kpoicos “Adw SiaBas peyddnv
dpynv Katartce, Croesus, after crossing the Halys, will
overthrow a great empire; wa@av Sé te viTiws éyvo
(§ 494), after suffering (by suffering) even a fool becomes
knowing.

Obs.—As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an
action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only
expresses that the beginning of an action took place before another
action, whilst its progress may continue simultaneously with that
other : yeAdoas ele, he began to laugh and said (laughing) [risu
oborto dixit|. Hom. &8de 8é rts etrecker iday és mdnoiov Gddov,
thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbour ; xyapicai
por droxpwvdpevos, answer and oblige me, inasmuch as the xapi-
zacOa: follows immediately after the beginning of the answer

280 THE FUTURE,

§ 497. As the Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by
the Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive
in assertions generally denotes something which took place before:
ob "Indol Erefavy bre weuece oas 6 "Ivddv Bacrdeds (Ind. or
Erenwe), the Indians said that the king of the Indians had sent
them ; Kuxdores déyovras €v Sixedig olxijra, the Cyclops are said to
have dwelt in Sicily.

§ 498. Many verbs whose Present-Stem expresses a
state, denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into
this state: dpyew, to rule, dpEa, to obtain dominion;
Bacihevew, to be king, Baciredoa, to become king;
iaxvew, to be strong, ioydcat, to become strong; cvyar,
to be silent, cvyfcat, to become silent; éyew, to have,
oxeiv, to obtain; haiverOa, to appear, pavivat, to become
apparent; voceiv, to be ill, voojoa, to become ial;
monepueiv, to be at war (bellum gerere), trodkeuhoat, to
begin war (bellum inferre). (Comp. § 485.)

Obs.—This meaning, however, is not always attached to these

oa érodéunoay may also signify simply bellum gesserunt

§ 499. 3. Toe Furure

expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and
of a Momentary action: adp£w, I shall become ruler, and
I shall rule. ;

0bs.—The 2 Person Future with od nearly resembles the negative
Imperative, ovx émiopxncers, thou wilt (shalt) not swear falsely.

§ 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses
with Gras, that, is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes
what may or should happen: ovx €xopuev Srov ciroy avngdpeba, we
have nothing with which we can buy food (non habemus, quo cibum
emamus); Sei Gravra dydpa rovto mapackevdler Oa, Gras os cope-
raros tara, every man should take care to be (that he shall be) as
wise as possible (comp. § 553). The Participle is similarly used:
7 x@pa todd Kal ayabi) hv cal évicay oi épyardpevor, the land was
large and good and there were people to (who could) cultivate tt; ris

€orat 6 ipynodpevos ; who will be there to (who can) guide us (comp. _

$§ 380, 578).
Obs.—ay (Hom. xé) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative
to denote that a case may possibly occur: ed of@ Ort Gupevos

[a |

§ 503 THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 281

dy mpds dvdpa ofos od ef amaddaynoera, I well know that he
will be glad to be reconciled to a man such as you are; Hom.
6 S€ kev KexyoNdoerar dv Kev tkopat, and he will doubiless be im
wrath whom I come upon,

§ 501. The verb péAdrAw is used with the Present,
Future, or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to
express an immediately approaching or at least intended
action: “éAXw buds aye eis "Aciav, I am going to lead
you to Asia (in Asiam vos ducturus sum). This is called
the periphrastic Future.

Obs, 1.—éAdAw may also be used in other tenses than the Present
with an Infinitive, like esse in Lat., with the Part. Fut.:
mAnciov ion Hv 6 crabpos évOa €uedrov KaTadvcew, jam prope
aderat statio ubi deversuri erant, where they wished to rest.

Obs. 2.—mr&s or ti od péAXo, is elliptical in the sense of Why
should I not ?

4. Forms or A CoMPLETED ACTION.

§ 502. a) The Perfect Indicative

is the Present of a completed action, ¢. e. by the Perfect
the Greeks denote an action completed for and with
reference to the Present: poet. Aoyos AéAeKTas Tas, the
whole speech has been spoken |dixi|; etpnxa, I have

found, I have it; Hom. 75n yap rerérxeotar & por diros

HOere Ovpos, for now has been finished what my dear soul
desired ; ) Toms Extictat Tapa Tov KopwOiwr, the city
has been founded by the Corinthians (of a still existing
city); Ta ypnuata Tois TAovaios 4 TUN ov SedHpnTat
arda Sedaverxev, Vortune has not given, but lent (at
interest), their money to the rich.

§ 503. Obs.—Several Perfects have entirely a Present meaning,
inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which
the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the Present : pupynoKo-
ut, I remind myself, pépynpa, I bear in mind, remember (memint) ;
cadéopa, I am named ; xéxAnpa, my name is; meiOopa, I follow
nemova, I confide in; dddupu, I am perishing ; ddwda, I am lost ,
xrdopat, I acquire; xéxrnpa, I possess; torapa, I place myself ;
éotyxa, I stand; Bava, I go; 8éByxa, I am gone,

- q =
i "Lae 7

282 THE FUTURE PERFECT. § 504.

§ 504. 6) The Pluperfect

is the Pretcrite of a completed action, te by the
Pluperfect the Greeks express an action completed for
and with reference to a past time: Hom. 8) Torte
y atpéuas edde NeXacpévos bac’ erreovOe, then truly
he slept quietly, Forgetting what he had suffered ; év Tos
Apdxovtos vopows pla aracw @pieto Tois auapTdvouct
fnwia Oadvaros, in Draco’s laws death had been appownted
for all criminals as the only punishment—says an
Athenian after the laws were abolished. (As long as
they were in force: @pucrat.)

Obs.—The Pluperfects of the Perfects enumerated in § 503, are to

be translated by Imperfects.
On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, § 493,

§ 505. c) Tue Furure Perrect (FuTURUM EXACTUM

is the Future of a completed action, 7. e. it denotes an
action which will be completed in the future. It is
only in the Middle that the Greeks have a special form
for this Third Future, which has generally a Passive
meaning. In the Active the circumlocution by means
of the Perfect Participle and the Future of elvac must
be used (§ 291): dv radr’ ciddpev, ta Seovta écdpeba
éyvaxortes, when we know this, we shall (thence) have got
to know our duty; Hom. éuol 8 rereiperar adyea
vypa, but I shall have gloomy woes left me.

Obs.—The Future Perfect of the Perfects mentioned in § 503.

serves as a common Future: pepvicopar, meminero, &e.
§ 506. d) The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitive,

and of the Participle

expresses a completed action generally, and may
refer to any of the three Orders of time: od Bovdeve-

cat @pa adda BeBovrcdcOat, now is not the time to

consult, but to have consulted (to be resolved); Eéptns
ws énvOeto tov “Erdjorovtov éledyOat, mponyev éx TOP

er

§ £11. USE OF THE MOODS. 288

SdpSewv, when Xerxes learnt that the Hellespont had
been bridged over (and was still provided with a bridge,
dre eCevxto), he marched forward from Sardis ; raita pév
obv mpoeipyncbw, thus much be said beforehand (now to
something else) ; Hom. érceras tap 67’ av ror’ ddk@AH
"TAvos ipy, a day will come when holy Llios will be lost
(has been lost) ; ypnowpov te éoxeppévos iw, I am come
after having devised something useful. —

Cuap. XXI.—UsrE or THE Moons,

A) THE Moons IN SmopLe SENTENCES.
§ 507. 1. Zhe Indicative.

The Indicative, in accordance with the usage of
other languages, is employed simply to state something
positively or negatively, or simply and directly to ask
a question: poet. Tis dperis SpHta Geol mpotrdpoiev
€Onxav, the gods placed sweat before virtue; Hom. robev
els avdpav ; from what class of men are you ?

Obs.—On the Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without
a, § 536, &c., in sentences expressing a wish, § 515. On the
Aorist Ind. with dy, to express what usually happens, see
§ 494.

2. The Subjunctive.

§ 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take
place; it always refers to the present, to reality.
Hence it is used in the following cases:

§ 509. 1. as a challenge in the first person: twper,
let us go [eamus|; dépe 5, Tas pwaptuplas bpiv avayvd,
well, come! let me read you the testimonies [recitem].

§ 510. 2. with the negative yu in prohibitions and in
negative admonitions (comp..§ 518): pz) rodro woujens,
ne hoe feceris, you ought not to do this.

§ 511. 3. In hesitateng questions, where it is asked

7

284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD, ay ae

what should be done: ti $a ; what am I to say? Hom.
mas Tis ToL Tpdppwv Ereow melOntrar "Ayardv; how
shall any of the Achaeans willingly trust thy words?
déEecOe Huds 7) amrimpev ; will you receive us, or are we

to depart ?

§ 512. 4. with uw in sentences expressing fear or
anxiety: pu) aypoiKoTepov 4 Td anes eizrety, if it be not
rather rude to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be
negatively expressed, 7) od is used: Hom. pp vv Tot ov
xpalopn oKxihrtpov Kal otéupa Oeoio, lest the staff and
wreath of the god should not help thee, i. e. it will cer-
tainly be of little help to thee [Lat. vereor ne non or
ut te juvet|. Comp. §§ 533, 616, Obs. 3, § 621, a.

§ 513. Obs.—The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of

future events, quite like the Fut. Ind. to express a thing that is”

to be expected (§ 545): od ydp mw rolovs iov avépas ovdé Deopas,
for never yet did I see such men nor may (shall) I see them, avis
sometimes added in Hom. to this Subjunctive : ov« ay roe xpaiopy
xidapts ta te Sap ’Adpodirns, the lyre and Aphrodite's gifts would
not help thee. Comp. § 500, Obs,

3. The Optative.
§ 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle

av) is used to express a wish that something may take —

place: poet. & rai, yévoio matpds edtuxyéotepos, O boy!
may you be happier than your father | Lat. Pres. or Perf.
Subj. |.

The particles used (like Lat. utinam) to introduce a
wish are: ef (Hom. ai), e/@e (Hom. aiOe), ei yap, os.

§ 515. Obs.—If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to &
realised, it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect cr
Aorist Indicative: if ica dvvatis Spay dcov mpdbvpos ef, wou
that you were able to do what you wish; eide cot rére cuveyevopuny,

would that I then had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed
by the Aorist édedov (properly “‘I owed”) and the Infinitive:

oréaba Sherov Hd jpepa, would that I had perished on that day —

[Lat. Imperf. and Plup. Subj.J]. Comp. § 537,
§ 516. 2. The Optative with the particle ay (Hom. xé

eee oe

Sg i

——- a

§ 519, THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 285

or xév) expresses possibility : todto yévour’ dv, that (could)
might be; ri yap yévort’ dv EXxos peiLov 7) pidos Kaxos ;
what greater evil could there be than a bad friend? ov
Sar’ dv elev of Eévor; why! where can the strangers be ?
[Lat. Pres. and Perf. Subj.| The Optative with dy is
therefore called the potential Optative.

§ 517. Obs. 1.—Hence the Optative with ay is used in modestly
expressed assertions: ov« dv Aéyoumt, I would not say [non dixerim] ;
Bpa dv ovoxevaterOat cin, tt is perhaps time to break up; ov« dv
dvvao pi Kapay evdammoveiv, you could not without taking trouble

be happy.
Obs, 2.—In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also

used without dv: Hom. peta beds 7 €6€Xav kai rmrdbev dvSpa cadcat,
a god who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this
use of the Optative to denote a possible and merely imaginary case
is originally peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in depen-
dent clauses, §§ 528, 529,532, Obs., 546, 552, Obs,

§ 518. 4. The Imperative.

The Imperative is the mood of command and, with
negatives, of prohibition.

A prohibition in the second person can be expressed
only in two ways, viz. either with 2) and the Present
Imperative: yn mparre, of a continued action, or with
un and the Aorist Subjunctive: pn mpdkns, of a
Momentary action, do not do: radta pot mpakov, téxvor,
Kal pn Bpdduve pnd éripvncOjs ett Tpolas, do me this,
child, and delay not nor think further of Troy.

In the third person also uj with the Aorist Imperative
is admissible: pndels tuav mposdoxncatw adds, let
none of you expect otherwise.

On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see
§ 577. On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypo-
thetical clause, § 545, Obs. 3.

B) THe Moops 1x Compounp SENTENCES.

§ 519. Preliminary remarks on the connexion of
sentences with one another.

wy {

286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 519.

1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be comanal
in two ways, viz. either

a) so, that the one may be quite independent of the -
other—this combination is called Co-ordination, or Para-
taxis (rapdtafis).

6) so, that they mutually are referred to each other E
and express a complete thought only in their combi-
nation—this combination is called Subordination, or
Hypotaxis (i7ora£is).

2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal
sentence, and in every respect independent of the
other: «ow? 7 tiyn Kal TO méddov dopator, fortune is
common, and the future invisible ; todto éym ov? eipnka,
ovte Aéyouwe av, I have neither said that, nor could I
say it.

On the manner in which coordinate sentences may
be combined, § 624, a.

3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in
such a way that one expresses the principal idea, the —
other a secondary one. ‘The former is called the
leading sentence, the latter the secondary, dependent or
Subordinate. One leading sentence often has several 2
subordinate ones dependent on it. The moods of sub-
ordinate sentences are in many ways determined by the __
leading sentence: Ticcadépyns Sva8ddrrXer Tov Kopov
mpos tov adedpov, ds ériBovdrcvor aitG, Tissaphernes ;
brings a calumny against Cyrus before his brother, “at
(saying) that he was plotting against him; Hom. coi
dp écrropel’, Sppa od yaipys, we have followed thee that
thou mayst rejoice.

4. The Correlative connexion of sentences is a special
kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences,
one always refers to the other. ‘The one is called the
Protasis, and the other the Apodosis. The Protasis, —
which requires to be completed by another sentence, is
subordinate (3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence,
which furnishes the necessary completion; Hom. as

§ 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287

iSev, @s pv edu yoros, as he saw it wrath seized him ;
Hom. 6rotév « eirncba eros Toiov K émaxovaats, the
kind of word you speak such you will hear.

Obs. 1.—This correlation is frequently expressed by two Pronouns
or Particles referring to each other (§§ 216, 217), as in the
examples just quoted, but not always: ef wy ¢xess dvrieyew,
dyrideye, if you can in any way reply, reply. :

Obs. 2.—The Apodosis often precedes the Protasis: ofros BéArioros’
dy cin Sotis Koopimrata Tas ovphopas héperv Sivarat, he would
be the best who can bear calamities with most dignity.

5. From the subordination of one clause to another,
there arises a compound sentence.

Obs. 1.—The same thought may often be as well expressed in two
Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence: prdevi
ovphpopay dvedions, Kow) yap 7 TUxn, reproach no one with
a calamity, for fortune is common ; or émel ) TvxN KoWwn éoTt,
pndevi cvpdopay dvedions, since fortune is common reproach ne
one with a calamity. The Homeric language abounds in series
of Co-ordinate sentences (the paratactic arrangement).

‘a 2.—Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence
‘is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in
different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first the ar-
rangement is called prolepsis (apédAnys, tuking beforehand):
Kai pou Tov vidy eimé, ef peudOnke THY TéxvNV = Kai pot «ime, ei 6
vids pepad@nxe rhv réxvnv (§ 897). Hom. Tudeidny & ovx dy
yroins, morépotar petein, you could scarce perceive on which side
Tydides stood ; xai ray BapBdpev érepedeiro, @s modepetv ixavol
einoay, he also took care that the barbarians should be capable of
carrying on war. On the other hand a substantive may pass
from the Principal to the Subordinate sentence: Hom. pera &
€ooera: Hv Tor arnvpwy Kovpny Bptojos, among them also will be
the daughter of Brises whom I then took away (comp. § 602).

6. On the different kinds of sentences according to
their substance, § 624, &e. Only those kinds will here

be noticed which are most important in regard to the
use of the Moods.

§ 520. The use of the Moods in Sesiiidait sentences
is subject to the following general rules:

1. The Indicative in Greek is very extensively used
even in Dependent sentences, the Greeks merely

988 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES, § 521.

annexing or inserting many sentences without any
mark of dependence where the Latin language marks
the dependence by the Subjunctive or Infinitive: pu
Me avépn, Tis eius, ask me not who I am [ne me interroges,
quis sim].

§ 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences
also denotes always that which ought to take place, and
can generally be employed only when the leading
sentence contains a principal tense,

Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense
which connects the action with the present ; hence the
Present (except the Historical Present, § 487), the
Perfect, and the Future Indicative, and all tenses of
the Subjunctive and Imperative.

§ 522. 3. The Optative (without dv) denotes some-
thing merely conceived or supposed (§ 517, Ods. 2), and
generally can be employed only when the Principal
sentence contains an Historical tense.

Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Histo-
rical tense which connects the action with the past,
hence the Historical Present (§ 487), the Indicative of
the Aorist, the Imperfect and Pluperfect.

A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the
Optative when this mood occurs in the Principal sen-
tence.

§ 523. 4. In indirect speech (ratio obliqua) the Opta-
tive (without dv), but only after an Historical tense, is
used to denote something which is to be stated, not as
the opinion of the speaker, but of another person: oi
"A@nvaiot Tlepixréa éxaxifov, bre otpatnyos Ov ove
émeEdyou eri tovs Todeuious, the Athenians reproached
Pericles because being a general he did not lead them out
against the enemy [quod non duceret|; edEavto cwrnpia

Oicew évOa mpatov eis diriav yhv adpixowrTo, they vowed
to offer thank-offerings whenever they should first come to —

a friendly land; ei ris wars él rodw oTpatevoot, emt

j
1

§ 526. MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. 289

tavTny édbn iévas, si qua civitas contra [aliam] civitatem
pugnatura esset, contra hane se dixit iturum.

In this case, however, the Indicative also is admis-
sible according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive even
after a Principal tense, its employment being limited to
the case mentioned in § 527.

§ 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with dv) may occur
in Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent,
sentences (§ 516) to denote something as merely pos-
sible: Aéyw, ott TodTo ovK adv yévorto, I say that this
probably could not happen.

The further use of the Moods in Dependent sentences
is treated of specially in what follows according to the
different kinds of Dependent sentences.

I.—Moops In DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS AND IN
DEPENDENT INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.

§ 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are
those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion
to a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions,
71, ws, that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sen-
tences are connected with the Principal sentence by
means of ef, if; morepov...7 [utrum...an], whether...or (in
double questions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or
Adverbs.

§ 526. 1. The Indicative
is used in those sentences, which when conceived inde-
pendently would have the Indicative, and thus

a) when the leading sentence has a Prinetpal tense
the Indicative must be used (§ 521): eiré pow, tiva
yvounv exews, tell me, what opinion you have (direct:
riva yvounv eyes) [Lat. die mihi, quam sententiam
habeas) ;

6) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense

~ the Indicative may be used (§ 522): elzov, fytiwa

yvopnv elyov, dixi quam sententiam haberem; Axer
UC

290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. § 522,

ayyOXov Tis, Os ’EXdteva Katreidnrat, some one came
bringing the news that Blatea was taken (direct: Es
dteva Kate ANT TAL).

Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this
case admissible, § 528, a.

§ 527. 2. The Subjunctive
cannot occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in
Dependent Interrogative sentences only if, when con-
ceived as independent, they would necessarily haye the
Subjunctive, and thus

a) when the leading sentence has a Prineipal tense
the Subjunctive must remain: Povdevopat, mas cE
arodpa, I am planning how to escape from you (direct
according to § 511: was ce d7ro8pé) [delibero, quo modo
te effugiam] ;

6) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense
the Subjunctive may sometimes occur: éSovAevdpmmpy,
mas ce atodpa; but the Optative is more frequent in
this case than the Subjunctive (§ 528, 4). The Sub-
junctive in Dependent Interrogative sentences accord-
ingly is to be translated by may or shall.

§ 528. 3. The Optative (without dv)
may occur in such sentences:

a) as a substitute for the Indicatwe (§ 526, b), @. e.
when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen-
tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde-
pendently, ought to have the Indicative: elov, jytwa
yvouny exouus (direct: elyov) [Lat. dixt, quam senten-
tiam haberem|; éyvwcav Sti Kevos 6 PoBos ein, they knew
that the fear was groundless (direct: 6 pd8os Kevods iy),
comp. § 523.

b) as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 527, 6), 2. e.
when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sen-
tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde-
pendently, ought to have the Subjunctive: éSoudevdumy,
ais oe atrodpainy (direct: as ce drrodpa) [ Lat. delibe-

§ 530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 291

rabam, quo modo te effugerem], I was reflecting how 1
should escape you.

In the second case the Optative is to be translated

by should. ‘

Obs.—Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is
generally perceived from the connexion quite as easily as in the
Latin nesciebat quid faceret, he knew not what he did or what
he should do.

§ 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found
also without a Conjunction in the continuation of a direct speech:
EXeyov modKol, dre mavrds afta Eyer (§ 526 b), epav yap ety Kat
otkade drromheiv ov Suvardy ein, many said that he says what is worthy
of the utmost regard, for that it was winter, and that it was impossible
to sail home,

On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser-
tions, § 593.

Mixed examples :

Tlv@ayopas 6 Xapwos mpdtos év trois” EXAnow érorApnoev
elmeiv, OTL TO pev cdua TeOvy£eTas (§ 291), 4 Se yoy?
dvarrraca (§ 316, 5) oiyjcetas dOavatos Kal ayijpas,
Pythagoras the Samian was the first among the Greeks
who ventured to maintain that the body will be dead, but the
soul, flying upward, will depart immortal and ever young 5
Ocpiorordijs véos éTu ov eheyev, @ ws Kabevdew adtov ovK
éon TO TOD MuAtiddov tpdtraov, Themistocles, when still
young, used to say, that the trophy of Miltiades would not
let him sleep ; ’Arrop&, Tod (§ 214, Obs. 1) rparov prob,
I am at a loss what to mention first ; of ’Emiddprioe tov
Oedv émnpovto, et mapadotey KopivOious tiv troduv, the
Epidamnians asked the god whether they should give up
their city to the Corinthians.

IL—Moops 1n SENTENCES OF PURPOSE, OR
Finau SENTENCES.

§ 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose
are introduced by the Conjunctions fa, (Hom. dpa),
@s, d7rws, in order that, that, in order to, yn, or Orws pr,
iva on, in order that not.

292 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE.

As such sentences express something which ts e a
pected to happen, they take :

§ 531. 1. The Sudjunctove

a) necessarily, when the leading sentence has a Prin-
cipal tense: eis xarpov feeis, S7ws THs Sikns axovens,
you have come at the right time to hear the trial |in
tempore ades, ut causam audias\.

b) more rarely, when the leading sentence has an His-
torical tense: eis xaipov ijxes, ws Tips Sins axovons
[aderas ut audires]; ézirndés ce ovk tyeupov, wa ws
jovota Suayns, I purposely did not wake you that you
might pass your time as pleasantly as possible.

Obs.—The Conjunctions s, Srws, sometimes have av (Hom. xé,
xév) added to them in this sense: todr’ atré viv didacy’, érws
dy éxpdbo, explain that very thing now that I may learn it.
The purpose is thereby represented as one whose attainment
depends on conditions (as here, if you explain it), Comp. § 554.

§ 532. 2. The Optative

as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 531, 8),
when the leading sentence has an Historical tense: émri-
THnoées GE OvK *yELpov, Wa ws HdiocTa Sudryous 5 ; Hom.
Tvdeiby Avopnjdei TladrAds ’AOjvn Saxe pévos Kal Capos
iv’ &xdndos peta wracw “Apyeioucs yévoito, to Tydides
Diomedes Pallas Athene gave strength and courage that
he might be distinguished among all the Argives | Diomedi
Minerva animos dedit, ut insignis fieret inter cunctos
Argivos|.

Obs.—The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in
sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the
rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or
demand that may be attained, the Optative, more as the thought
or conception of the acting person (comp. §§ 521, 522).

On the Future Indicative with dros, §§ 500, 553. On the hypo-

thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500, om the
non-intended consequence (acre), § 565,

§ 533. Sentences expressive of fear introduced by py (Lat. ne),
or pi ov (Lat. ut) follow the construction of seutences of purpose
(comp. § 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when depen-

—wr

_ 53€. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293

dent on a Principal tense: od oBei, pi Sn mpecBirepos js ; dovyou
not fear to be already too old [nonne times, ne aetute provectior sis] ?
The Optative is commonly used after an Historical tense: époBSodvro,
uy Tt mado, they feared he might suffer somewhat [verebantur ne quid
alli accideret|; but not unfrequently also the Subjunctive: ot
*AOnvaios Ttods Evppdxous édediecay, pi) droataow, the Athenians
were alarmed lest the allies should revoli (comp. § 519, 5, Obs. 2).

Obs.—pyn and Gras py after verbs of fearing seldom have the
Future Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear
refers toa completed action : poBovpeba, pi aupotépoy jpaptn-
caper, we fear we have failed in both.

Mixed Examples:

TOUTO Ov Tponpnuar éyeLv, iva Ticly KudY aTreyOdvopat,
I have not chosen to say this in order to be hateful to some
of you; Kipos dirwv eto SeicOar, as cuvvepyovs Exot,
Cyrus thought friends necessary that he might have
helpers; AéSorxa, pn érrirabapeba Tis olxade od00, I am
afraid lest we should forget the way home; Bidiros év
poe hv, pry expvyo. Ta mpadypata avtov, Philip was in
fear lest the affairs might escape him.

Ii]—Tue Moons in ConpiTionaAL SENTENCES.

§ 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong
to the Correlative sentences (§ 519, 4). The Protasis
states a condition under which something is to occur;
the Apodosis states that something happens under a
certain condition. Both sentences together form a
Hypothetical Period.

§ 535. In the Protasis ei (Hom. ai), édy (i.e. ei-cyv),
contracted to jv, or av (Hom. ¢ xe-v), if, are employed ;
in the Apodosis the particle ay is sometimes used to
show that it is true only under certain conditions.

In Greek there are four principal forms of the Hypo
thetical Period :

§ 556. 1. in the Protasis ef with the Indicative, in
the Apodosis the Indicative without av, or the Impera-
tive,

294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, § 537.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed
when the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is
to be represented as one absolutely necessary, actual,
without any opinion being expressed by the speaker as
to the probability or improbability of the case: ef Oeot
elolv, ott Kal Epya Oedv, if there are gods, there are ala
works of aods ; cot el wn addy Sédoxra, éye kat didacKe,
if you have any different opinion, speak and explain.

Obs.—All tenses may be used in this form, consequently also

Historical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not
to confound this first principal form with the second: é&mv cos
dmiévat éx Tis TOAEws, €t ju) Hperkdv Gor of vopot, you were free
to leave the city, if its laws did.not please you (in the present:
eEeori—ei pi) dpéoxovor); et Te TaY Sedvrwv émpaxOn, Tov Katpor,
ovx éué hnow airiov yeyevioOa, if anything right was done, he
says that the occasion, not I, was the cause. A sure sign of the
second principal form is the partiele dy in the apodosis,

§ 537. 2. in the Protasis, e¢ with the Indicative of am
Historical tense ; in the Apodosis, dv with the Indicative
of an Historical tense. Zz

This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be
represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the
same time neither of them as real. The Indicative in
such conditional sentences is called the Hypothetical j
Indicative, which, therefore, always denotes the opposite
to reality (comp. § 515).

In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contra-
dictory of the Protasis may always be supplied in
thought.

Hence the Protasis may have the following forms:

§ 538. a) The Imperfect is used when a condition is
stated as not existing at present: ef tov Didummov ta
Sixaa mpattovta é@pwv, ohodpa av Oavpacrov hryovpny
avrov, if I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, I should
deem him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the
Protasis the thought viv S€ ody Opa Ta Sixata mpar-

§ 541, MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295

rovra, but now 1 see him not act justly. The verb of this
contradiction to be supplied is in the Present.

To this form corresponds in Latin the meee Sub-
junctive: st viderem, putarem.

§ 539. 6) The Aorist Indicative is used when a con-
dition is stated which did not take place in the past:
améBavov dv, ei wn % TOV Tplaxovta apyy KaTervOn, I
should have died, if the government of the thirty had not
been overthrown.

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought
Katervdn Sé, but i was overthrown. The verb of this
contradiction to be supplied is in the Aorist.

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub-
junctive: periissem, nisi dominatio eversa esset.

§ 540. ce) The Pluperfect is used when a non-completed
condition is stated: ¢¢ rodTo ®pmodoynTo Hyiv, padiws av
diepayoucba, if in this we had been agreed, we should easily
carry the contest through.

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought
GN ody @poroyntat, but we have not been agreed. The

_ verb of this contradiction to be supplied is in the

Perfect.
_ To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect. Sub-
junctive : st inter nos convenisset.

§ 541. The <Apodosis to a Hypothetical Protasis of
this kind may have either the Imperfect or the Aorist
Indicative, or the Pluperfect with dv [Hom. xé-v], and
that quite independently as to which of the three tenses
occurs in the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect
corresponds to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the
Aorist and Pluperfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Sub-
junctive: ¢ tore éBonOjcapev, oie dv tveynres viv 6
Diumos, tf we then had rendered help Philip would
not now be troublesome; ei abtdpkn ta Whdicpata jp,
Dodurmos mada av &eddxer Sixnv, si plebiscita per se
sufficerent, Philippus dudum poenam dedisset.

+

296 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

§ 542. Obs. 1.—The particle dy is sometimes omitted in the
apodosis : joxvvduny, el tad modepiov ye dvros e&nmarnOny, I showdd
be ashamed, if I had been aeceived by an enemy.

§ 543. Obs. 2.—The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time
when the continuance of an action is to be made particularly em-
phatic: «f rodr’ emotes (not émoincev) éxaaros, évixwy av, if each
had been acting so, they would be victorious. On the other hand,
the Aorist is sometimes used referring to present time, when the
rapid commencement of an action is to be indicated: et ris oe #pero,
ri Gy drexpivw (not dmexpivov); if any one asked you, what answer
would you give ?

§ 544, Obs. 3.—A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the
Protasis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context:
€Boudduny av, I should like (ei eSvvdpny, tf I could, dared) ; ov byas
avrov’s mada dy drod@dere, you would long since have perished
tough yourselves (i.e. if left to yourselves),

§.545. 8. in the Protasis édv (jv, av, Hom. ef xé-v)
with the Subjunctive ; in the Apodosis the Indicative of
a Principal tense or the Imperative.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to
express or prescribe something in regard to a case that
is to be taken for granted and expected. It is admissible
only in connexion with present and future time (§ 521),
and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs: de
Ta Bédticta avtl tTav Hdéwv, dv ph cvvapydorepa €Ef,
NapBavew, you must choose what is best rather than what
ts agreeable, when both together are not allowed; ay Ta
TapeAnrvboTa pvnwovedns, aewvoyv Tepl Twi! WEANOVT@V

vrevoet, tf you remember the past, you will judge better
«bout the future.

Obs. 1.—The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences
often comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect: véos dp
movnons, yipas kes evades, st Juvenis laboraveris, senectutem
habebis jucundam.

Obs, 2.—We find ei with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion-
ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as édy, ei dy and et
xe-v; Soph. avdpa, kei ris } cods, 7d pavOdvew TAN, aicxpov
ovdey, for a snan, even if he is wise, to learn much, is no dis-

race,

ois, 3.—The Subjunctive in Conditional sentences is akin to the

§ 542,

a a

oe ei —_

§ 548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 29T

Subjunctive of Challenging (§ 509). The speaker thereby puts
or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires
the hearer’s assent: rodro éadv oxomyre, evpnoere, Or TavTay
apiora exer, tf you consider this you will find that it ts the best
of all; which is almost identical with the challenge: consider
this, &e. [comp. Lat. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque
recurret]. In a similar way the Jmperative sometimes takes the
place of a Hypothetical Protasis: Poet. mdotres re yap Kar’
olkov, «i Bovder, péya Kal Ch Tupavvoy oxip exav, cay 8 ath
TovT@y Td xaipetv, TAAN ey® Kamvov cKias od« dv mpraipny, for
be rich, if you will, at home, and live in the splendour of @
great ruler; but if joy be wanting to it, I would not give the
shadow of smoke for the rest. (Comp. § 549.)

§ 546. 4. in the Protasis «/ with the Optative ; in the
Apodosis dy («é-v) with the Optative.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed
intentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain,
as merely possible, as a merely conceived ease: ef Tus KEKTY-
pévos ein TrOVTOV, yp@ro 5é adTS pr), ap’ dv evdatpovod ;
should any one possess wealth and not make use of tt
(suppose any one possessed), would he be happy? Comp.
§§ 516, 517, Obs, 2. The Present or Perfect Subjunc-
tive in Latin corresponds to this form: s¢ possideat (or
possederit), num beatus sit ?

Obs.—In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes
has ké-v or Gy: ef rovrw Ke AdBosper, dpoiweOd Kev KrEos EcOASY,
if we should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The
Attic writers very rarely use dy in the Protasis.

§ 547. Since e¢ with the Optative intimates that a
thing is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the
past what possibly might have been, 7. ¢., a repeated case
(comp. § 494, Ods. 1); the Apodosis then usually has
the Indicative: «i? mov é£edav’vor ’Aotudyns, éf’ trou
xpucoxanivov mepiiye Tov Kdpov, if ever Astyages rode
out (might ride out) he took Cyrus with him on a horse
with a golden bridle,

§ 548. ei with the Optative in the oratio obliqua, takes
the place, according to § 523, of ed with the Ind. (1),

pod

298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, §549

or éav with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical
sentence depends on a Historical tense: jer Kidpos, ote
el Tu pwadyns Tore Sejoot, x Tdv hirwv alto mapactatas
Antréov ein, Cyrus knew that, if ever any battle should
be necessary, he would have to take his supporters from his
own friends. In direct language, Cyrus would say, jv
mote denon or el tote Sejcei—Anrrtéov éori. It in its
relation to the time of the governing verb, the condition
lies in the Future, the Future Optative is used. We
seldom, in this case, find éév with the Subjunctive.

The following general remarks also are to be observed
in regard to Conditional sentences:

§ 519. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period
are not so dependent on each other, as that the one
necessarily requires a special form in the other. A
Protasis of one form may, on the contrary, be joined
with the Apodosis of another form. It occurs very
frequently that a Protasis is in the first or third form,
and the Apodosis in the fourth, in order to represent the
Assertion which it contains as merely possible: ei todre
Aéyeis, duaptdavos av, if you mean this, you would be im
error; édav éOcdjonte mpdatrew akiws tuav avtev, tows
dv péya te xtTnocacbe ayabov, tf you should be disposed
to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you would perhaps
gain great good. The connexion of a Protasis of the
second form with an Apodosis of the fourth is rare:
Hom. xai vi xev &P arorotto dvaE dvdpav Aiveias,
ei py) ap o&0 vonoe Atos Ovydtnp "Adpoditn, and now
assuredly Aeneas, ruler of men, would there have perished,
af Zeus’ daughter Aphrodite had not kept a sharp look
out.

§ 550. 2. A Hypothetical Peried may partly or entirely be in-
serted in another sentence. The most peculiar, in this respect, are

sentences expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional

sentences: ef yap Sedov oloire elvae of woddol Ta péytora KaKa
eLepyaterOat, iva oloire Hoav ad cai dyaba ra péeyota, I would that
the many were capable of doing (to a man) the greatest evil, in order

VO

:
1

§ 552. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 299

that they might also on the other hand be capable of (effecting) the
Greatest good (instead of: for if they were capable, they would alse
be capable). The Hypothetical Indicative here denotes the im-
practicable purpose (§§ 515, 537).
On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583, 595. On the Hypothetical
Infinitive, § 575, &e.

Mixed Examples.

Ei id didov éOérers ayaTracOat, tovs dlrous evep-
yeTnTéov, tf you wish to be loved by your friends, you
must benefit your friends ; Ei 76 éyew obtws domep TO
AapBavew 780 hv, Tord av Siédepov eddarpovia oi mrov-
ciot Tay TevynTtar, tf having were as sweet as getting, the
rich would be greatly distinguished above the poor tn
blessedness; Poet. Ei maou raité xarov épv codov 0
Gua, ovk Hv av audirextos avOperrois épis, if the same
thing were to all beautiful and wise, people would have no
bitter disputes ; [IXatwv rps tia tév raider, pepactt-
yooo av, edn, ei wn wpyiounv, Plato said to one of his
servants, you would have been flogged if I were not angry ;
"Ea pév te tpiv Sond adnbés réyerv, Evvoporoyjoate, if
you think I utter any truth, agree with me; Ei rods
avopay ayabdy yévorro, repiuayntov av ein TO uh Apel,
wstrep vuvi TO apyeww, if there were a state (consisting) of
good men, tt would be an object of contention to avoid
ruling (how one might not rule), as now to rule; "Hv
Tav otpatiwtav Soypa, él Tis, omdTe 1) oTpaTid é€ioL,
idta AniforT0, Snwoora eivar TA ANPOEévTa, it was a decision
of the soldiers, if, when the army went out, any one took
booty by himself, what he took was common property (direct
éav AniGntai—dnpdo.a EoTw).

IV.—Tue Moons 1n RELATIVE SENTENCES.

§ 551. Relative sentences are those which are con-
nected with others by means of Relative pronouns
($$ 213, 214, 216), or Relative adverbs (§ 217).

§ 552. In Relative sentences all moods are possible in
the same meanings as in independent or hypothetical

—
300 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES, § 553.

sentences: od« éyw 6 te mpatov AaB, Ihave (know) not
what I shall take first (§ 511, comp. § 527); opd ce di@-
KovTa ov pn TUxoLs, I see you pursuing what, I pray, you
may not attain; (§ 514); bpets dore wap’ dv av Kadota
Tis TOTO pdOot, you are they from whom any one might
best learn this (§ 516); od Ocdov réyew pos das
To.atta of av ipiv Hdvot tv axovew, I did not wish to
say to you such things as might be pleasantest to you to
hear. Comp. § 544.

Obs.—Sometimes, especially in the Poets, Relative sentences have
the Optative without dy in an indefinite assertion, very much
like the potential Optative with dv: éy médts ornoese, Tovd.
xp?) KAvey, whom the State may appoint, him we must listen to
(comp. § 517, Obs. 2).

§ 553. On the Future Indicative in Relative sentences
expressive of purpose, see § 500. dézras, how, that, in
order that, very frequently has the Future Indicative
(yet, according to § 531, also the Subjunctive of other
tenses) after verbs which denote looking after, caring for,
striving, avoiding : cxo7ret, b@ws TA Tpaypata cwOncerTat,
see that the affairs (the state) shall be safe; Set éx mavtos
TpoTov admavta avdpa todto tapacKevatec Oat, bras ws
copatatos éctat, every one ought to take care in every
way to (that he shall) become as wise as possible,

Obs.—éras is often used in challenges and warnings in such @
manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied: ém@s
mapéece eis tiv éomépay, that you shall be here for the evening
(more completely somewhat like: oxdmet Gras, see that you,
&c.); Srws wepi tov modépou pndév épeis, that you shall say
nothing about the war (supply something like : @vAdrrov, take
care).

§ 554. The particle av (Hom. xé-v) is added to the
Relative when the Relative sentence expresses some-
thing merely conceived, so that the assertion contained
in the leading sentence is true only when what is asserted”
in the Relative sentence really occurs. Such a Rela-
tive is called a Hypothetical Relative. The Hypothetical

€ 555. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES, 301

Relative with dy in general is used only where the verk
in the leading sentence is in a prinetpal tense, and is then
accompanied by the Subjunetive. Such a Relative sen-
tence may easily be changed to a Hypothetical sentence
of the third form (§ 545): may 6 ts av pérrns épeiv
mpotepov emicKoTre TH yvoun, Whatever you may be about
to say (= édv tu épeiv pédrXys), examine tt first in your
mind ; in which it is left quite undecided, whether one
wishes to say anything; @reoOe brn av Tis iyfhrat,
follow wherever any one may lead you (= édv tis 7,
Hynrat), Where you must first wait to know whether any
one leads.

Obs, 1.—As the Relative is generalised by the addition of dy, it
may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. cunque): ds
av rovrav te Spa rebvarw, quicunque horum aliquid fecerit,
perito; déye bo dv OedAns, say whatever you wish (comp. édv
tt OeAns dee).

Obs. 2.—In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a
Relative without dy (or xé-v): ray S€é mnpovay pdduora AvTOve’
at havac’ aidaiperor, the sufferings afflict most which appear
self-caused (comp. ef with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homer
has also the Fut. Ind. with xé and the Relative (§ 500 Ods.).

§ 555. If the verb in the leading sentence is an His-
torical tense or an Optative, the Relative without av
with the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a
substitute for the Subjunctive (§§ 522, 523).. These
Relative sentences take the place of those mentioned in
§ 554, in the same way as the fourth kind of Con-
ditional sentences takes the place of the third (§ 548):
éxédevoev avtois &reabat, Grou Tis ayoito, he bade them
follow wherever any one might lead. Thus we read in
Homer: év Sé « éyav amdvevOe payns eOédovta voncw
pipvaterv, ov ot Errevta apkiov écoeliras huyéew Kivas 70
oiwvovs, but whomsoever I may see inclined to remain away
Jrom the battle, to him there shall be no security of escaping
dogs and birds (t.e., death), but: dvrwa wey Bacidja
kal &Eoxov dvdpa xiyein, Tov 8 ayavois éréccow épntv-
cake, but whatever (where a) king or prominent man he

302 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES, —-§ 556.

1 or oe

might meet with, him he soothed with gentle words. Hom.
as dmrdXovTo Kal ddXos 6 Tis ToLadTa Ye péfot, 80 may any
other perish who shall do such things (but ds ay péty—
aTroréc Ow).
Obs. 1.—This Optative often implies repetition, Syria xeyein, as
often as he might find one (§ 547).
Obs, 2.—The Subjunctive and the Relative with dy occur only
exceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with
the Relative and dy, in the same case (comp. § 546, Obs.).

V.—Tue Moons 1x Temporat SENTENCES.

§ 556. Temporal Sentences, 7. e. those which indicate
time, are properly only a particular kind of Relative
sentences, and follow them almost entirely in the use of
the Moods. The particles of time employed in such
sentences, are: ézrei, évreidy, as (when, after, as); ore,
Tote, hvixa, when, as; ws, este, péxpi-s, till; mpin,
before; in Hom. ddpa, as long as, till ; tos, when; and
besides the Relative expressions: dd’ od, €& ob, since ;
év , whilst ; dypt od, eis 8, until.

In these sentences the Indicative is used when any-
thing actual is stated; the Optative may supply the
place of the Indicative in indirect speech after an His-
torical tense (§ 522).

§ 557. When a Temporal sentence states something
merely conceived, occurring only conditionally, the par-

ticle of time, like the Relative, has dv («é-v) joined toit

(§ 554). This occurs usually only when the leading
sentence has a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must
then follow. By combination with ay, are formed the
Hypothetical particles of time: érav, d7érav, émredy, or
émny, émeddy: éreidav Tdvta aKovonte, Kpivate, when
ye have heard all, gudge; &ws av cotta Td oKddos, TOTE
xp Kal KuBepyyrny Kal mavt’ avdpa tpoOdpous elvat, a8
long as the vessel is safe, the sailor, the pilot, and every one
ought to be zealous,
Obs.—Here also dy is sometimes wanting (§ 554, Obs, 2).

§ 558, MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 303

§ 558. If the leading verb is in an Historical tense, the
particle of time with the Optative without dy occurs in
the same sense: édeyey Ott, eeidn wavTa axovceLar,
colvetay.

Obs, 1.—Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (comp.

§ 554, Obs., and § 547), so that dre, éadre, émei with the

Optative may be translated by, ‘as often as,” ‘ whenever :”
Ordre of "EXAnves Trois modepiows émiorev, padiws arepevyor, as

often as the Hellenes went up to the enemy, the latter readily
ed.

bbs 2.—Here, too, exceptionally, dv and the Subjunctive some-

times occur after an Historical tense ($ 555, Obs. 2).

On mpiv with the Infinitive, § 565.

Mixed Examples of Relative and Temporal sentences.

‘Tweis avira Noyiodpevot TadTa yerpotovell’, 6 Tu av
bpiv Sonn pddiota cupdhépew tH Tore, after having
weighed all this, vote for what you think will most benefit
the state; Oi trav BapRdpwv imreis, oti evtvyyavotev
E\Anu, wavras éxtewvov, the cavalry of the barbarians,
whatever Greek they met, killed them all; Méypis
dy éy® Kw, ai orovdal pevovtor, till I come, let the
treaty remain; Poet. Mirror’ érrawnons, mplv av ids
avopa cadnvas, opyiv kal puOuov Kai TpoTrov GaTis av 7,
never praise a man before you clearly know his temper, and
bearing, and character ; "Exedy tt éubayovev, avictavto
kal érropevovo, after having eaten something, they rose and
proceeded ; ‘O Xwxpatryns tods cuvovtas émoie ov povov
omote b7d TaY avOpeTrwv opavTo, atéxecOat TY adikwv
kal aicypdv, adrAa Kal ordte év épnuia elev, Socrates
caused his disciples to abstain from what was unjust and
shameful, not only when they were seen by men, but also
when they were in solitude.

304 THE INFINITIVE. § 559

Cuap. XXIf{—Tae INrrnirive.
A) The use of the Infinitive generally.

§ 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5)
which, as such, has certain properties in common with a
verb, others with a noun.

With a noun the Infinitive agrees

a) in expressing the acticn of a verb in general, like
the nomina actionis (§ 342): qovety, mparrew, doing;
comp. Troinos, mpakis.

b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns:
TO Tole, TO TpaTrew, the doing; comp. 4 motnots, 7

mpakts.
With the verd, on the other hand, the Infinitive
agrees

a) in its power of denoting different times: soveiv,
moujcat, temrounxévat, and of being formed from the
Active, the Middle, and the Passive: mojoat, roumoa-
cat, woinOjva.

b) in being occasionally joined with dy, and thereby
sharing the functions of mood (§ 575, &c.).

ce) in governing the same case as the verb.to which
it belongs: zroveiv ta Séovta, doing your duty ; ypnocOa
Tots GAos, making use of arms.

d) in being qualified, like the finite verb, by adverbs, —
never by adjectives: kad@s mpdrrew, doing nobly, but
Kart mpakis, a noble action.

2. The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek.
Very often, besides the more definite mode of expres-
sion, by means of a Conjunction with a finite verb, the
less definite, by means of the Infinitive is admissible.

§ 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify
different sorts of verbs, viz. :

1. those which express the occasion, capability,
modality of an action: Stvavras daredOeiv, they can ga

ES

- § 562, THE INFINITIVE. 805

away; peifov te eyes elreiv, he has semething greater to
say (can say); Poet. otros cuvéyPew adda oupdireiv
épuv, I am born not to join in hating but in loving ; dpxo-
uar eye, I begin to speak ; émitpérw cot trovety & Te av
Bovry, I leave you to do whatever you wish ;

2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception,
opinion: doxeis dwaprteiv, you seem to have erred ;

8. such verbs as denote striving after something, im-
pelling towards, or frightening, deterring, preventing,
something: 2) omevde mdovteiv, do not hasten to be
rich; Hom. xéreai pe pvOjcacbar, you bid me to speak;
mavtTes aitobvtat Tovs Ocois Ta hatrAa atoTpéTre,,
omnes homines precantur deos, ut mala avertant ; poBod-
pat Siedeyyew oe, Iam afraid of refuting you ; &deyov
cot pr) yapelv, dizi tibi, ne uxorem duceres; tis avtov
Korvoet Sedpo Badifev ; quis eum impediet, quominus
hue veniat ? dveBdrrero por SiareyOjvat, he put off con-
versing with me.

§ 561. Even the purpose of an action may be ex-
pressed by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the
Infinitive with to or im order to: Zevodpav td tuo
Tov otTpatevpmatos KaTédiTre huAdTTEW TO oTpaToTredo?,
Xenophon left half the army behind to guard the camp ;
mapéyo euautov TO latp® téwvew Kab Kalew, I give
myself up to the physician to cut and burn (me); mueiv
diddvar tevi, to give any one (something) to drink.

Obs,—Not only with verbs of this kind, but also with those men-

tioned in § 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application
in Homer: dpioredeorxe payerOa, he used to be the first in
Jighting ; cioi wat otde rad eirepev, these too, then, are (able)
to say this; Bn ievat, he started to go; Evvenxe payerOa, he
urged (them) to fight.

§ 562. The Infinitive serves to complete or qualify
adjectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the
English Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the
Latin supine in uw: yaderov ebpeiy, difficult to find | diff-
eile inventu]; oixia diern evdvartacOat, a house very

x

306 THE INFINITIVE.

pleasant to live in; dEvs éote mAnyas AaBetv, he deserves
to get blows ; o€vratol éore yvavar Ta pybevra, you are
very keen in perceiving what is said; Sewods Aéyew,
powerful in speaking ; 6 xpovos Bpaxds akios Supynca-
a0a: ta TpaxGévra, the time is short for worthily nar-
rating what has happened.

lA

Obs.—In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent: péya
kal €ocopévoiot mrvbécOu, great also for posterity to learn;
Geiew dvéporory Sporor, like the winds in running ; so with some
substantives + @adpa idéoba, a wonder to see.

On olos, oidsre, and dos, with the Inf., § 601.

§ 563. The Infinitive, as in English and Latin, is
used as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate
is a neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive
verb: maow ddciv yarerov, to please all is difficult ;
klvdvuves éotw jTTac Oat, there is danger of being worsted ;
cov Epyov éyewv, speaking is your business.

§ 564. The infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending
on a particvlar word, with and without the particle os, in several
phrases almost like a free Accusative (§ 404): as elmeiv, 80 to speak ;
enol Soxeiv, as seems to me; ddrLyou deiv, almost ; 7d viv elvat, for the
present ; Kata rovro eivat, in this respect,

On éxay eivar, § 570, Obs.

§ 565. The Conjunctions dste, so that; mpiv, before,
and its Homeric synonym mdpos, are joined with the
Infinitive: iropabéctaros iv 6 Kipos, ste mavTa
mOvov avaTAnvat ToD érraweicba Evexa, Cyrus was very
fond of learning, so as to endure any trouble for the sake
of being praised; mpl tiv apxiv opbas vrobécOat,
paTaov ryyodmat TEepl THs TeXEvTHS OvTivodY ToLeicOaL
Aoyov, before properly establishing the foundation I deem
st useless to make any words whatever about the end.

Obs. 1.—These conjunctions may also be joined with the finite
verb (comp. § 556); éore with the Indicative represents a
sentence as an actual consequence more independent and by
itself, and may accordingly be often translated by therefore,
hence: els riv iarepaiay ovx jixev, Ss" of "ENAnves, eppdvri{ov,

=
§ 563,

—————

§ 567. THE INFINITIVE. 3807

he came not on the following day, therefore the Hellenes became
anxious,

Obs. 2.—For piv we also find amply 7, preus-quam; properly
mpiv, when it means sooner than, is always to be regarded as an
abbreviation for piv 7, mpiy originally answering entirely to the
Latin prius. On the Infinitive after 7, than, see the following §,

On 颒 dre, on condition that, with the Infin. § 601.

§ 566. After a comparative-the Infinitive is preceded by # dste or
# alone in the sense of than that: hoBodpa pn re peifov i) Ssre
pepe SvvacOa kaxdv ri rodet cvpB7, 1 fear lest too great an evil
should befall the state for it to be able to bear (greater than that it
should be able).

On the Genitive of the Infinitive with the Article, which also is
possible here, § 574, 3, Obs.

B) The case of the Subject and Predicate with the
Infinitive.

§ 567. The Sudyect of the Infinitive is that word from
which the action of the verb in the Infinitive proceeds.
When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive
it appears :

1. most generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which
gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the
Infinitive: iyyyetxkav tiv Kipov vwiijcat, nuntiabant
Cyrum vicisse. The use of the Accusative with the

Tnfinitive, like that of the Infinitive alone (§ 559, etc.),

is more common in Greek than in Latin. Not only
can the substance of a statement or perception—which,
however, may be also expressed in one of the forms dis-
eussed § 525, ete.—be given in this construction, but
also the effect and consequence of an action. Hence
the Accusative with the Infinitive also. occurs after
verbs of happening, and is admissible after verbs of com-
manding, demanding, forbidding: madvrtes oporoyodas
Thy opovoray péyrotov ayabor eivat, all agree that concord
ts a very great good; cvvéBn pndéva tTdv otpatnyav
mapeivat, tt happened that none of the generals was pre-
sent; éyparya arom ely tiv taxiotny Tors mpéaPers,
proposui.ut quam celerrime legati proficiscerentur.

“oe
) ',
' \ ‘<

Ps

308 TIE INFINITIVE, § 508

The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the
verb of the leading sentence (comp. the English: I hear you
sing, I hid you go), and is explained by the prolepsis mentioned
in § 519, 5, Obs. 2. Instead of #yyerdav Gre 6 Kopos évixnoer,
we might have: #yyeaAav rov Kipoy dre évixnoev; and for ore
éevixnoev, vuxjoat, according to § 560, 2; thus we obtain ifyyeAay
tov Kipoy uxjoa. If the governing verb is intransitive or

passive, the Accusative is of a freer kind (§ 404): €Amis éors

mavra Kaas €xew, there is hope that all is well.

Obs, 1.—The impersonal verbs dei and xpi, it is necessary, are
joined with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet :
xpi) ToApay xaheroiow ev Gyeot keipevoy avdpa, the man that
lies in painful sufferings ought to be cowrageous.

Obs, 2.—Agv 9 continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive
the same construction may be employed in indirect speech in
Relative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and
circumstances : aautr’ drra oas en diedexOevras lévarr eel
5€ yeveo Au eri TH wikia t7, AydOavos, dvewypevny karahapBavew
riv Bvpar, he said that after such conversation they went ; but
that when they reached Aguthon’s house, they found the door open.

§ 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject
must necessarily Le in the Accusative: tov aduxov Kal
movnpov avdpa dnl aPuov elvar, I maintain that the
unjust and bad man 7s miserable.

Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires
an indefinite Subject (rwa) to be supplied: ta tovatra
eect (Twa) perpnoavta Kal dpiOuncavta €idévat, one
may know such things by measuring and counting.

§ 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is the
same as that of the leading sentence, it is usually not
expressed at all: vopifw vevixnnévar, puto me vicisse, I
think I have conquered ; édrrifers tevEecOar dv av Sén,
you hope to obtain what you need; imécyeto mapécerOa
eis THY EoTrépay, promisit se affuturum ad. vesperam.

Obs,—For greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some-

thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that
either in the Accusative or Nominative: Herod. of Aiyimrwot évd-
pov Ewutois rpawrous yeverba avOporey, the Egyptians thought
that they first of all men came into existence ; ei otea Oe Xadxidéas.
i Meyapéas ri ‘ENdda caaew, tucis 5€ drodpdcerOa Ta rpay-

§ 571, THE INFINITIVE. 309

para, ovx dpbas otecbe, if you think the Chalcidians and Mega-
rians will save Greece, but you escape from trouble, you ara
mistaken,

§ 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the
Principal Subject are in the Nominative: 6 ’AréEavspos
&packev eivar Ards vids, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovis
filium ; éy® ode oporoyjcw &kdynTOs Hew, GAN bd cod
Kexrnpévos, I will not acknowledge that I am come unin-
vited, but invited by you; oi Soxodvtes codol eivar, they
who seem to be wise.

Obs.—From the Predicate éxav joining the freer Infinitive eivas
(§ 564), arises the combination éxadv eivar: todro éxay eivas ov
mowoa, this (if I am) to be of free will Iwill not do.

§ 571. 5. In many cases a personal instead of an
impersonal form of expression is used in Greek, the
Subject of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the
leading sentence; so instead of the English, “ it was
announced that Cyrus had conquered” (7yyéXOn Tov
Kdpov wxijoa), we have, 6 Kipos HyyerOn vixfoas,
Cyrus was announced to have conquered. This form of
expression occurs not only—as in Latin with diatur,
videtur—with doxe?, EoLKe, it seems; Néyeras [dicitur,
traditur] ; ayyédreran, tt is announced ; oporoyeirat, tt is

agreed, but also with cupBaiver, tt happens, and with

several adjectives with e/ui, as: Sixavos, just ; ésrvri)-
Sevos, émixaiptos, fitting; émido£os, probable ; avayxaios,
necessary: avos pot Sox® évOdde xatapeveiv, tt appears
to me that I myself shall remain here; Sixatos ef cryew
avOparous, it 1s just that you should lead men (y ou are
justified in leading men); é7ido£ol eict 16 aito Teice-
cat, it is to be expected that they will suffer the same ;
Poet. mpérwv epus mpd tavde poveir, it becomes you to
speak in their presence.

The Personal construction is explained, like that of
the Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis
(§ 519, 5, Obs. 2). For ajryyéXOn 514 6 Kipos éevinnoe
there might be yyed@n o Kopos dtu évuxnce, and for

310 THE INFINITIVE. § 572

this again ayyéAOn 6 Kipos wxjoa; for ériSokiv éorw |

étt TO abto weicovrai—eridokoi eiat OTL TO avTd Tel-
oovrat, and hence éridefoi eiat rd abto tweisec Oat.

Obs.—The Accusative construction, however, is almost every-

where applicable: Aéyerae rdov Kipoy vxijoa, dicunt Cyrum
ViCisse,

§ 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a
Genitive or Dative may be in these cases: #Oov ert twa
Tav SoxovvTwv copay eivat, I came to one of those who
seem to be wise; Edeyov Tots Soxoder codois eivat, I said
to those, &e.; Kupou édéovro &s mpoOupordarou yevéc Oat,
they begged Cyrus to be as ready as possible; qmavth
aipxovte mposijxet ppoviup eivat, tt becomes every ruler
to be judicious. :

Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative: ovpdéeper avrois

irovs elvar padXov f) wodealovs, it is to their advantage rather
to be friends than enemies.

C) Zhe Infinitive with the Article.

§ 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is
made more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the
Infinitive with the Article must nevertheless have a
noun in the case required by the verb to which the
Infin. belongs: 7d tas ndovas evyewv, the shunning of
pleasures ; the Infinitive in this case also is qualified by
adverbs: To xaras Sv, living rightly.

The rules given §§ 567-572 for the case of the Subject
and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with
the Article. Thus the Accusative with the Infinitive is
often preceded by the Article: 7d mpoewdévat tov Oeov
TO péddov Kal TO Tpoonpaivey @ PBovdeTat, Kal TodTO
mavres Kal éyovet Kal vopifovcr, God’s foreknowing the
future and pointing it out beforehand to whom he will, all
assert and believe.

§ 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive
becomes declinable, and thus answers to the Latin
Gerund.

§ 574. THE INFINITIVE. 3il

1. Nominative:
Poet. 7d dpoveiv eddaipovias mpatov tmdpyet, to be
thoughiful is the first step to happiness; 10 dpaptdvew
avOpwrous évtTas ovdev Oavuacrov, that those should
commit errors who are human is nothing surprising.

2, Accusative:

avtd Td atobuicKew ovdels hoBetrat, dying itself no one
dreads. Uspecially to be noticed is the Accusative
with the Prepositions eis, card, in reference to; Sud, on
account of, because; mpos, érri, besides: Kipos dia 7d
didowabys (Nominative according to § 570) elvas movrd
Tovs Tapovtas avypwra, Cyrus, through being eager for
knowledge, asked those present about many things; mpos
To petpiav SeicOar Karas trevraidevpat, I have been well
trained to require what ts moderate.

Obs.—This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article has
sometimes a freer connexion with a verb or adjective after the
manner of the freer Accusative (§ 404): oi I[eXorovwjow
qvAmiroi eit rd és riy yi nav ésBaddew, the Peloponnesians
have no hope in regard to invading our country.

8. Genitive:

émOupia tod muciv, desiderium bibendi; td eb mpdrrew
mapa THY akiay adopyr Tod Kaxds poveiv toils dvorrous
“yiyverat, prosperity without merit is an vecasion to fools
of base sentiments; uot ovdéy mpecButepov rod dre
Bérriatov ene yevéo Oar (§ 416), nothing is more important
to me than my becoming as good as possible. Especially
to be noticed is the Genitive with the prepositions é«,
from ; wp, before ; Evexa, because, on account of ; irép,
for, for the sake of, in order to; Sia, by, through; dvev,
without: oi avOpwro. rdvta Trowtow brip tod ph
Sodvat Sixnv, people do everything in order not to suffer
punishment.

Obs.—Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive
even without a preposition: rot py Siahevyew rov Aaydv ék Ta&v
dicrvav oxorovs Kabiorapev, we place scouts that the hare may
not escape from the nets. (Comp. the rare use of the Lat. Geni-
tive of the Gerandive: arma cepit opprimundae libertatis.)

312 THE INFINITIVE. § 575.

4. Dative.

The Dative is especially frequent to express Instru-
mentality (§ 438); it is then, like the Latin Ablative of
the Gerund, to be translated, by: Didurmos Kxexparnxe
T@ tTpotepos (§ 570) mpds tods moreulovs iévar, Philip
has gained the victory by going first against the enemy
[eomp. the Latin, docendo discimus|; also with the pre-
positions éy, in ; emi, on, on condition that ; mpos, besides,
and others: pos T@ pndev ex ths mpecBelas aBeiv
Tous aiyparwrous x Tav Siwy éhvoduny, besides gaining
nothing from the embassy, I set free the captives at my own
expense,
D) The Infinitive with av.

§ 575. By the addition of ay the Infinitive acquires a
potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore
either that something only might happen, or that under
certain circumstances something would happen, or would
have happened. Here two cases are possible:

1. the Infinitive with dy can be replaced by the Opta-
tive with dv: padiora olpat dv cod rvbécOas (67t mvbol-
pny av), I think I could learn it best from you; Soxeiré

pot modw Bédtiov av tepl Tod rodéuov BovrevcacOar

(6rt dv Bovrcicarcbe), ei Tov TOTOY THs Yopas TMpos Hv
Tonepeite evOuvpnOeinte, tt seems to me you would much
better settle about the war tf you took into account the
lcealities of the country against which you are making
war.

This Infinitive with dy therefore answers either to the Potential

Optative (§ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period
of the fourth form (§ 546).

§ 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with dv can be
supplied by the Hypothetical Indicative with dv: Kipos
ei €Biwcev, dpiotos av Soxet dpywv yevéoOas (oipar Stu

dv éyévero), if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have

become one of the best of rulers; tods Tatra awyvoovvtas —

Lexparys dviparobades av xexdjcOas iyeiro (i.e. &.

|
i
.
.
|

—————————e OO

ie ee ek

§ 578 THE PARTICIPLES. 313

Hyeito, OTe el Ties TadTa yvoovr, éxéxAnvTo dv avdpa-
modwoets), Socrates thought that, if any did not know this,
they would be called slavish.

This Infinitive with Gy thus answers to the apodosis of a Hypo-
thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, &c.).

Obs.—The context must show into which of the two forms the
Infinitive with dy is to be resolved.

E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative

§ 577. belongs almost entirely to poetry; it is used
for the second and, rarely, for the third person. The
Subject and Predicate are in the Nominative: Hom.
Oapcav viv, Awpnoes, ért Tpwecor pdyecbat, cou-
rageously now, Diomede, fight against the Trojans; raida
& éuol Adcai te pity ta 7 drrowa SéxyeocOat, deliver up
to me my dear child and accept the ransom.

Cuarp. XXIII.—Tur Parrvicipyes.

Preliminary Remark.
A Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 559, 1), is a verbal-

‘noun (§ 225, 5). It has the same things in common with

the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common
with the noun ; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive
inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis,
whereas the Participle has the nature of an adjective.

§ 578. A) Their Attributive Use.

A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to a
relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe
to it a permanent quality: adds edpelas ayuids Exovea,
t.¢. Hom. edpudyuia or 7) edpeias ayuids yet, a city
having broad streets ; ai kaXovpevar Aiddov vijcot, the so-
called islands of Aeolus; 6 wapwy Ka‘pds, the present
opportunity (comp. § 361, 11).

a

314 THE PARTICIPLES. $37,

Obs.—Like an adjective the Participle also becomes a substan-
tive by having the article prefixed: of mapévres, those present
(comp. § 379); 6 ruxdy, the first comer. Such participles may
often be translated by substantives: 6 dSpdoas, the doer; ot
Aéyorres, the speakers ; rd cupépov, the advantage ; ra d€éovra,
the duty ; mpos Td redevtaiov (§ 361, 8) éxBav exacroy Tay mp
brap$dvrev kpiverat, everything that happened before is judged
of in accordance with its final result.

On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part. with the Article, § 500.

B) Their Appositive Use.

§ 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substan-
tive a merely transient quality or activity. In this case
the Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of
expression for what is otherwise expressed by sub-
ordinate clauses with conjunctions of the most different
kinds (comp. § 583, O6s.).

A Participle used in this way is:

§ 580. 1. Temporal,

with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX.
(esp. § 496): arposéyere TovTois avayvyvwcKopévois Tov
voor, give attention to this whilst being read; Hom. é
dpa pwvicas aTreBioeto = érrel Hs pounce, after having
thus spoken he went away. Observe especially éyov and
$épwv in descriptions, which may frequently be trans-
lated by the English with: tas vats awéoreihav exoura.

"AncBar, they sent away Alcidas with (having) the ie} ;
xpepevos, in a similar sense: TONG TEXVD xpadpevos,
with (using) much skiil. So also, ap apyopevos, at first ;
terevTav, at last; Siadurwv ypovov, after a time; &
TOLD, fortunately 3 Karas woor, justly. The Participle
ov cannot be omitted when being is to be ascribed to a

substantive: "AX«iSiadns ert rats dv eOavpatero, while

yet a boy (Lat., merely eee) Alcibiades was Goi
(§ 428, Obs.).

§ 581. 2. Causal and final,
where the Participle is to be resolved by since, by or by

re |

lOO

i
~

oe

§ 583. THE PARTICIPLES, 815

the fact that, when referring to the present or past, and
by that, in order that, when referring to the future: ot
éotw adixodvta Sivayw BeBaiav xtjicacbat, firm power
ts not to be gained by acting unjustly; tov ddiKodvra
mapa tovs Sixactas ayew Set Sixnvy SHcovra, he who
acts unjustly ought to be brought before the judges in order
that he may suffer punishment.

§ 582. 3. Concessive,
a somewhat rarer use: 7d Udwp edwvdrarov apiaroy dy, water is
the cheapest though it is the best ; ipeis bpopwpevor Ta wempaypeva
kal dusyepaivorres ifyere tiv eipnyny Sues, though suspicious of
what had been done, and indignant, you still maintained the
peace.

§ 583. 4. Hypothetical,
a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be re- -
solved by #f, and corresponds to one of the forms of the
Hypothetical Protase’s mentioned in § 534, etc.: tovs
hirovs evepyetodvres Kal Tods éyOpors Suvijcece Koda-
few, if you benefit your friends you will be able also tc
punish your enemies (édv); also with the article: o py
Sapels dvOpwiros ov traideveT as, a person is not educated if
he has not been beaten. Such a Participle with 7) may

often be translated by without: od éotw dpyew py

Sidovta pucbov, a man cannot rule without giving pay.

Obs.—With the varied use of the Appositive Participles it must
not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clearly
express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but that
we make use of the one or the other turn in translating, only in
order to express in a more precise way what is simply suggested
by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions between
these meanings, especially between the ‘l'emporal and Causal,
but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical meanings, just
as in Latin sentences introduced by quum: mavra taita cvm-
Sdvras Gmavras (ipas) det Bonbeiv, it becomes every one of you,
when you have considered all these things, to render help;
vopif@ duewoy iy buds mept Sv viv epd kpivat, pixpd Tay
mpérepdv tote pndevray prnpovevoavras, I think you would
better judge about what I am now going to say, when you
remember a little what was said before.

316 THE PARTICI LES. § 5.4,

C) The Participle with an Absolute Case.

§ 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute
Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative, serves to point out the cireumstancei
mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Pars
ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject, since from it proceeds thif
action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, may
be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, in
which the word in tne Genitive or Accusative must appear in the
Nominative: rovroy dvayryvackopévay tov votv mposéxere, attend
whilst this is being read (comp. § 580),

1. The Absolute Genitive (comp. § 428),

for which may be substituted clauses with temporal,
causal, concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions: Tlepi-
Kéous aYyyoupévov Toda Kal Kara epya amredelEavTo oi
’"AOnvaiot, as long as Pericles led them (Pericle duce), the
Athenians produced many and splendid works ; vavpayias
yevouevns TérTapas Tpijpers AapPdver Topywrras, navali
pugna facta Gorgopas quattuor triremes capit ; bdns Ths
mokews €v Tois TodeutKois KWwodvvois émiTpeTromerns TO
oTpaTnyo, peydra Ta T Ayala KaTopOodvTos avTod, Kal
Ta Kaka SvapapTdvorTos eikos yevéc Oat, as the whole state
in the dangers of war is committed to the care of the
general, it is natural both that great good should happen
when he is successful, and great evil when he fails.
Poet. yévorr’ dv wav Oeod Texyvwpévov, all may be done if
a God contrives it (et Teyv@ro).

§ 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding
Latin construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points,

a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in
Greek, when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or
from the meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (comp.
§ 361, 3, Obs. 2): mpoidvrwy, as (they) went forwards; vovros, when
he (Zeus) rains ; eLayyeAOevrov, when it had been announced,

b) On the necessity of the Participle of efvaa—ood madds Svros
[Lat. te puero] see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case
of the adjectives ékav and dxwyv, which very much resemble Par-
ticiples: éuod éxdvros, with my will; €uod axovros, me invito. The
Poets take other licences.

c) As the Grecks have two active Participles to express a past
action, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle lesa

— eee. lee

————— — eS Se

—————— ee eS ve ”.hLCUhLerCrhL eh er.

anything else.

§ 587. THE PARTICIPLES. 317

frequently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative; 6 Kigos,
tov Kpoigoy uxnoas, kateatpeWaro tovs Avdovs, Cyrus, Croeso victo,
Lydos sibi subjecit.

d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of
the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence: rair
eimévtos avtou edof€ Tt Aéyew TO Aotudye, after thus speaking he
seemed to Astyages to say something (of importance), [Lat. ita
locutus—visus est. ]

§ 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative
is usual in the case of some impersonal yerbs, especially
déov, tt being a duty; é£ov, mapov, it being allowed,
feasible ; mposijxov, tt being befitting ; do£av, it having been
decided: ovdels éEdv eipnyny aye ToXELoV aipijcerat, No
one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war ; moddaKis
buiy é£ov wrEoventicai ovK HOEAncare, though it was often
easy for you to gain more you were unwilling; oi Xupa-
KovaLoL Kpavyi ovK OdrALyn éxpAvTO, advvaTov dv ev VUKTL
aro To onputvat, the Syracusans raised no small shout,
wt being impossible to make a signal during the night by

D) Supplements to Participles.

§ 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain par-

ticles are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to

Participles joined with an absolute case; they give more
distinct prominence to the idea expressed by the Par-
ticiple. Such Supplements to Participles are:

1. dua, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness: oi
"EdAnves €udxovro dua mopevdpevor, the LHellenes fought whilst
marching.

2. perakv, between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning :
émeoxe pe heyovra peragv, he checked me in the midst of my speech.

8. avrixa and et@vs to express immediate succession: r@ defra
xépq evOds dmoBeBnxdre éméxewro, they pressed upon the right wing
timmediately_after its landing.

4. rére, cira (xara), recta, oUrws, are added to the principal verb,
to indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and
uke up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: xataAuroy
Ppoupiv otrws er oikov dvexounoer, after having left a garrison

818 THE PANTICIPLES,

he thus went away home : Poet. pi) viv puydvtes 10’ Cheaper Gorepov,
lest though now escuping we should afterwards be caught.

5, xaimep (more rarely cai alone), with a Participle, to be trans-
lated though, renders prominent the concessive meaning: kaimep
obra copds dy Bedriay dy yévow, though so wise you might perhaps
become better; Homer often separates xai from mep: of 8€ Kas
dxvipevoi mep ex’ aird 15d védagcay, and though vexed they
heartily laughed at him; Sums in the same sense though or yet, is
used with the principal verb : Herod. derepov dmtxdpevor ris cvpBodis
ipeipovro Suws OenoacOa trois Midous, though they did not come
till after the engagement, yet they desired to see the Medes,

6. dre with a Participle (like ofov, ofa 87) answers to the English
tn as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning :
xartdap0e mdvu mond Gre paxpov ray vuxrav over, he slept a great

while since the nights were long. [Comp. Lat. guippe quum, quippe

quit. |
§ 588. 7. ds and dszrep added to a Participle suggest

—

vai

that what is expressed in the participle is subjective, i.e.

is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal

subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive
Participle as well as to a Participle connected with an
absolute case, either the absolute Genitive or the abso-
lute Accusative. The latter case in this connexion is
far more extensively used than without those particles
(§ 586). If the opinion expressed in the Participial
construction is to be characterised at once as false, as
and dsmep may be translated by as if: Sediace Tov

Odvatov ws ed ElddTEs OTL péyLaTOY TaY KaK@v éoTW,

they fear death as tf they well knew that it was the
greatest of evils; but by in the belief that, since, in the
feeling that, etc., if the correctness of the opinion is to
be left undecided: seis wdavres éBXéropev mpds avTov
Os aitixa dda dxovodpevor Oavpaciovs Twas OYouS,
we all looked at him expecting immediately to hear
some wonderful statements ; Poet. eats pwveiv ws euod
povns médas, you may speak out since (in the conyic-
tion that) I alone am near; réyeu ws Siaxrod ovens
ths aperijs, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of
being taught ; ameBdépate mpos GAX‘RoUS Ws aVTOS MED

i

§ 590. THE PARTICIPLES. 31¥

&caotos ov tromowy Td Sdkav, Tov 8 TAnclov mpakovTa
(absolute Accusative), you looked at one another thinking
that each one of you would not do what was decided upen,
but that his neighbour would.

E) The Predicative Particrple.

§ 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560),
serves to complete a verb, by attributing to a word con-
tained in the sentence something which is not a mere
addition but an essential part of the statement. The
Supplementary or Predicative Participle may refer either

1. to the sudject of the sentence (§ 361, 5, 7, 8):
maveoOe det tept Tav avTadv Bovdevopevor, cease always
consulting about the same things ; ic0u AuvTnpos wv, know
that you are troublesome, or

2. to a dependent word in the sentenc (comp. § 361,
10, and § 403): 6 woXeuos érauee Tods "AOnvaiovs deb
Tept Tav avTav Bovdevomévous, the war caused the
Athenians to cease from always consulting about the same
things; ota avrov AvTnpov dvta, I know him to be
troublesome.

In English such Predicative Participles are mostly
expressed by the Infinitive with to, or by sentences with

that, sometimes also in other ways. In some cases

however, the English language also makes use of a
Participle in a similar way: I feel myself affected by it,
he found him armed (comp. § 361, 10, Obs.).

The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle
may be classified as follows :

§ 590. 1. Verbs which express a condition,
as: éyw, I am in a condition; tvyydve, I chance te be
(Poet. xupéw) ; NavOdve, I escape notice ; paivopar, Snow,
davepos, SHros eis, I am manifest ; go.xa, I seem; dia-
Teréw, Sidryw, I continue ; avéxowat, xaptepéw, I hold out,
endure; kayvo, I grow weary ; amayopeto, I despair ;
as well as the verbs which denote the beyinning, inter-
rupting, or ending of a condition ; dpyopuar, I begin; pbavay

321) THE PARTICIPLES, § 591.

I am befirehand ; otyopwat, I depart, I am off 3 éxv, 8va-
reir, I break off, I suspend; raiw, I make to cease
(wavopat, I cease). In translating we frequently change
the Participle into the principal verb, and render the
principal Greek verb by an adverb. Examples: xnpvéas
éy (more emphatic than éxypu£a, comp. Lat. nuntiatum
habeo), I have announced ; ris érvye mapayevopevos ; who
happened to be present? Siatehd eibvoray éyov Taow
tiyuiv, I continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all;
un Kans pirov dvdpa evepyeradv, don’t grow weary of
benefiting a friend ; ddXa pupia émireir@ déyov, I re-
frain from saying innumerable other things ; Hom. @yer
aromTapevos, he was gone flying away.
Obs.—Even the verb «iyi may be joined with a Participle:
i) ToUTo ovK art yryvdpevoy rap’ jypiv; is this not happening
(usual) among us? A Participle is necessarily so used with
eiui to complete certain verbal forms, comp. §§ 287, 291, espe-

cially the Participle of the Perfect or Aorist with edi instead of
the Future Perfect: Sedaxas or Sods €oes = dederis,

§ 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving,

as: opdw, I see (wepiopdw, I overlook, endure); dxove,
I hear ; ot8a, I know; pavOdve, I learn ; yeyoono, I
get to know ; aicOavopa, I perceive ; eipicxw, I find ;
péuvnyat, I remember, In several of these the object
is in the Genitive according to § 420. Hxamples:
@s eldov avtovs meéedalorvtas, of AenraTovvTes evOds
adévres Ta ypypata Edevyov, cum eos appropinquantes
vidissent, praedantes praeda statim relicta fugam capes-
siverunt; ijxovea Tote Lwxpdtovs mep. pirov Siadreyo-
pevov, I once heard Socrates discoursing about friends
faudivi Socratem disputantem|; Xeppovnoov Kxatréuabe
mores Evdexa 4 Swdexa Exovcav, he learnt that the
Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities; dv@pwmrot Kadob
Karyabot émrevdav waow amucTovpevot (comp. § 483, 1),
ov dirodar Tors amiotodvras, when good men pereeive that
they are distrusted, they do not like those who distrust
them.

—— eS )hC

*~
ae ae

§ 595, THE PARTICIPLES. 821

Obs.—With civowda pot, 2 am conscious, the Participle may be
eonnected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative
(uo) : exauTd cuvydew oddev emiordpevos Or emiotapeve, I was
conscious of knowing nothing. In the sense of “ to be aware”
it may also have the Accusative with the Participle.

§ 592. 3. Verbs of emotion,

as: yaipw, Hoouat, tépropuat, I rejoice; wyarrdw, I am
satisfied; yarerads fépw, aegre fero; ad Oowar, I am
dissatisfied ; ayavaxréw, I am vexed ; aicydvowa, I am
ashamed ; petapéhowar or petapérer prot, I repent.
Examples: Hom. o Sé ¢peot réprer’ axotvav, but he
rejoiced in heart at hearing (it); perapérer ad’T@ wWevea-
yéve, he repents having told a lie.

§ 593. 4. Verbs of pointing out and asserting,

as: Selxvumt, atropaiva, I shew; é&ereyyo, I prove,
convict; ayyédro, I announce; oporoyéw, I assent.
Examples: @idurros mwavta vera éavtod troudy é&ed7-
Reyxtat, tt has been proved that Philip does everything
for his own sake; arodaivovot robs petyovtas maar
movnpovs dvtas, they make manifest that the banished had
long been base.

§ 594, Obs.—The Infinitive according to § 560 may be used as well
as the Participle with many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590-
598, but in a somewhat different sense: dpyopa: diddoxov, 1
begin to be a teacher; dpxopa Siddoxew, I begin to teach (my
teaching) ; aioxtvopa éyor, I am ashamed though I say tt;
aicxvvopat déyew, shame prevents me from saying.

F) The Participle with av.

§ 595. By the addition of the Particle dv the Par-
ticiple, in every case like the Infinitive (§§ 575 and 576),
acquires the meaning of possébility or that of an Apodosis
in a Hypothetical Sentence, and may therefore be resolved
in two ways:

1. by the Optative with ay (§§ 516 and 546):
ey® ci Tdv Hdéws pev dv ereyyOevtwv, déws 8 ay
éeyEavtwv, I am one of those who would gladly be
refuted (oi dv édreyyOeciev), and would gladly refute (ot ds

¥

—————— a

822 THE PARTICIPLES, § 596,

eréyEevav) ; edpioxm tadbrnv ay povnv yevouévny trav
peAdMVToV KWdvvev atrotporiy, I find this would be the
only prevention of the coming dangers (bre dv yévorro) ;
lopev kal tuas av Kal dddous, ev Th abth Suvdper huty
yevopévous, Spavras dv avto, we know that you as well as
others in the same position would do the same thing, i.e.
bre ef yévourbe Sp@re av.

2. By the hypothetical Indicative with av (§ 536, &e.):
Pidvr7ros loridacav édov kal Suvnbels dv adrds eyew, et
€BovryOn, OrvvOios arédaxev, when Philip had taken
Potidaea and might have (dre évvyOn cv) kept tt himself,
if he had wished, he gave i back to the Olynthians,

G) The Verbal Adjectives.

§ 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal
nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from participles
by a usage much more restricted, and referring to no
special time, which has been treated of generally in § 300,

The Verbal Adjectives in -réos, implying necessity,
are worthy of notice. A double construction is here
possible :

1. The object of a necessary action becomes the subject,
and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it: 6 maryp cot
tysmtéos eorw, pater tibi venerandus est ; 1 modus Tols
mworitas a@perntéa, the state must be assisted by its
evtizens. In this construction the subject is emphatic.

2. The Neutral or impersonal construction, where the
necessity of the action is made specially prominent ; the
object of the action is in each instance in the case
required by the verb: Siwxréov thy aperyv, we must
pursue virtue; eipivnv axréov éotiv, pax agenda est;
amtéov ToD Tohéuov, you must try war ; BonOnréov hyiv
éors Tois mpaypacw, we must help the state.

The person, who is to, or must, do something, is in
both cases in the Dative: in the second, according to
the analogy of de? ($ 567, Obs. 1), sometimes in the

§597. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 323

Accusative: odSev) tpom@ Eéxdvtas adixntéov, in no way
must you willingly do injustice.
Obs, 1.—The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a
Middle: wecoréov éoriv, we must obey (meiBopat not meidw),
Obs. 2.—In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural:
moepunréa eariv, we must fight (comp. § 364).

Cuap. XXIV.—Some Pecuniaritigs oF RELATIVE
CLAUSES.

A) Attraction.

§ 597. 1. The Relative Pronoun in general follows
the rule, that it agrees in Gender and Number with its
antecedent, that is, with the word to which it refers,
but in Case with what follows ; that is, it accommodates
itself to the sentence in which it stands: péuvynobe Tod
dpxov dv owopoxare, be mindful of the oath which you
have sworn.

2. An exception from this rule is the Attraction, or
the process, by which the Relative is attracted in Case
also by the word to which it refers, so as to take its
‘case: péuvnobe Tod dpxou ob duopoxare.

8. With Attraction another process is frequently com-
bined, viz., shortening. This consists in the Article or
the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, and the
Relative with the word to which it refers being drawn
together into a single clause: uéuvnobe ob oumpoxate
épxov.

4. If the word referred to by the Relative is a mere
pronoun, the Relative remains quite alone, but stands
in the case which the Demonstrative would have had:
péurnobe 08 dumpoxate = péuvnabe TovTov b duwpoxare,
remember that which you have sworn; aperd dv pe Sei
TpaTTew = a"erd TovTov & pe Sel mparrew, I neglect

what I should do,

324 PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 598

§ 598. Attraction, however, can oceur only under the
following conditions :

‘4. The Relative clause must be closely connected
with the word to which it refers, must be an essential

of it. Attraction is inadmissible in a Relative clause,
which only loosely adds a remark to a substantive,
which might quite as well be wanting, or be annexed
by means of xai and a demonstrative pronoun.

2. The sentence must be such as would haye the
Relative pronoun in the Accusative, but its antecedens
in the Genitive or Dative: tis 4) wpéreva tots Denis
Tuyxdavet ovca amd Tdv Swpwov ov Tap’ budv NapBa-
vovow, what advantage have the gods from the presents
which they receive from you? ecishépere ad’ bowv Exactos
éyet, contribute from what each has (amd tocovrwy bea);
Aéyers oF ciphwva ois TO TP@TOV Edeyes, You do not say
what harmonises with what you first said (rovrows G);
TO Hyeuov TicTevcopey @ av Kidpos 5, we shall trust
the commander whom Cyrus gives (us), (rovr@ by).

Obs.—Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases: dy

évruyxdvoa pddvora Gyapat o€, i, €., rovrey ois, I admire you
most of all I meet.

§ 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sen-
tence, so far as they consist of words referring to the
Relative, and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be
modified in the Attraction: ofs obow tperépows eyet,
TouTols TavTa Tadd\XNa aodharas KéxTyTAal, i.e, & dvTa
ipérepa Eyer, Tovrous, he keeps all the rest in safety by
means of what he has of yours.

§ 600. ofos, and sometimes égos and 7Aixos have quite a peculiar
attraction ; viz., etvat is often omitted when it would stand with
otos in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its
antecedent : ol yé uot ravrdracty Gropov roiT9, i. &., Tosobre@ otos
ey ei, that is quite impossible to such a man as Iam, Sometimes
the article is prefixed at the same time: rots ofous quiv, to such as
we. By the same ellipsis éstisovy acquires the fixed meaning, who-
ever, i. e., any whatever: otx €att Stxaiov avdpds BAdwrew évrworw
wipaorer, it is nut a just man’s nature to injure any person what-

§ 603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325

ever (i.e@., any one, whoever he may be). [Comp. Lat. cuteunque
homini nocere.] So éstis Bower means the same as odros Sv Botdet,
like qutvis.

§ 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either
Shortening or Attraction, are:

av? av, because, i. e. avtit tovTwv ad, or dvtl TovTa@V
éTt: od ed éroincas av dv érabes, you did good
because you received good (for that which you received).

ép , éf re (Herod. emi todr@, én’ re), for the
purpose of, on condition that, i.e. émt tovT@ dste, often
with the Infinitive: of tpudxovta npéOnoav éf dre ovy-
yparyat vopous, the thirty were chosen for the purpose of
drawing up laws.

€& od, ad’ ov, ex quo, since, i.e. since the time that.
On év 6, eis 6, dype ob, § 556,

oios, more complete tovodros ofos, with the Infinitive,
of the kind that, of the kind to, and ofdste, with the In-
finitive, able, possible: od iv dpa ota dpdew Td Tediov,
it was not the season to water the field; ody oioire Hoav
BonOjcas, they were not able to render help (comp. § 562).
écov, for tocodto bcov, enough to, with the Infinitive:
éxomev Scov atrotiv, we have enough to live on.

§ 602. An inverted Attraction takes place when a
‘noun or pronoun is put in the same case as the Relative
which refers to it: tiv odciay iy Katédire TH viel ot
mretovos akia éotiv, the property which he left his son is
not worth more, instead of 7 otcia hv; Poet. rasde
& astrep eisopds Hxovor mpos oé, those whom you see (the
girls) have come to you (aide ds). So ovdeis, pndeis,
become one word, as it were, with dstis od: oddevt btw
ovx amroxpiverat, properly ovdels éotw St@ ovdK, nobody
whom he does not answer. Observe also such expressions
as: Oavyacros bcos, i. e. Oavpacrtov éoti bc0s, wonder-
fully great; Oavpactads as, i. e. Oavpactov éotw ws,
it is wonderful how. Comp. § 519, 5, Obs. 2.

§ 603. A singular anomaly is presented by Relative sentences
after €or, in the sense of “there is.” ore is in the Singular even

826 COMBINATION OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 604.

when the relative is in the Plural: &rrw of, there are those who,
i.e. some; f€orw ols ody otras @okev, there are some to whom
it did not appear so. So éorw dre (= éviore), sometimes; tatw ov
in some places; €orw 7, in some ways,

B) Complication.

§ 604. In translating Greek Relative clauses into
English, difficulties sometimes arise through the parti-
cular relations of the sentences :

1. When the Relative as an Accusative of the Subject
belongs to an Infinitive: of qwodéusot ods @ovTo arro-
duyeiv, Ealdyns tapioca, hostes, quos aufugisse putabant,
subito aderant, the enemy whom they thought to have fled,
were suddenly there.

2. When the Relative depends on a participle: Kata-
hapBavovat Tetxos 3 Terxloapevol TOTE “Axapvaves
Kow® Sikactnpio éxpavro (= éxypa@vTo Tevyiodpevot
airé), they take possesston of the fort which the Acarna-
nians, after building it, used as a common judgment hall.

3. When the Relative is in the Genitive dependent
on & comparative: dpery, js ovdey KTHua cEmvoTEpor,
virtue, than which no possession is more venerable (§ 416).

4. When the Relative depends on the verb of an
inserted clause: aipotucOa abropuorous, ois omoray Tis
trelova picbov 8150, per’ éxeivay &koNovOncovew (duces)
eligimus transfugas, quibus si quis plus stipendii praebuerit
illos sequentur (i. e. of, oTdTav TUs—81b0, akoNovOncovew,
qui, si tis—praebuerit, sequentur), we choose deserters, who,
if any one gives them more pay, will follow him.

Obs.—In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those

discussed in § 605, and others besides, the Greek language satisfies

itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied
in different cases for several clauses belonging to one another.

§ 605. C) Combination of several Relative Clauses,

When several Relative clauses follow one another, the Relative
pronoun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, it
would require to be in a different case: Hom, dvwy6: d¢ pw ya-

§ 606, INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 327

péecOa TO Stem re maryp Kéderat Kal dydaver adr7, bid her marry
whomsoever her father urges and (who) pleases herself; ’Aptaios, év
tpeis 7Oedopev Bacriéa kabcordvae Kai [6] edadkapev cai [ad ob]
eAdBopev miata, ovTos Nuas KakOs Toeiv metpara, Ariaeus, whom we
wished to make king, and (to whom we) gave and (from whom we)
received pledges of fidelity, attempts to il use us.

Obs.—Sometimes instead of the repeated Relative airdés is substi-
tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence.
So likewise piv in Homer: of mpédyovor, ofs otk éxapifov® oi
héyovres odd’ eidovy airovs, dSsmrep byas obrou viv, mévre kai
rerrapakovra érn Tov “EAAnvev jpEav éxdvrwv, your ancestors,
whom the speakers did not gratify, nor did they flatter them, as
these now do you, ruled forty-five years over the readily sub-
mitting Hellenes. Hom.: dvtideov Modvdnpor, Sov xpdros éoti
peéeyiotov maow Kukdorecot, Odaca Sé pu réxe vipdn, godlike
Polyphemus whose power is the greatest among all the Cyclops,
and him (whom) the nymph Thoosa bore.

Cuap. XX Y.—INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.

§ 606. 1. The simple direct question may be intro-
duced by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs men-
tioned § 214, etc. In Greek several different questions
“may be included in one interrogative sentence: Hom.
tis mo0ev els avdpav ; what man, whence are you? dro
1ovTav fhavepov yevncetat, tls Tivos altids éotiv, from
this it will be clear who is chargeable with what (who is
chargeable and with what).

Obs, 1.—An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon-
strative : ESN pépo Bapeiav riva TauTyY 5 I bring heavy
tidings; what (is) that? (ris abtn éoriv i)

Ods, 2.—A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause
and by a participle: mére & xpi mpdkere ; emevdav ri yévnra;
when will you do your duty? when what shall happen? ri i8adv
tov KptirdBovdov mowotvra radra xaréyywxas airod; what have
you seen Critobulus doing that you have charged him with thie?
of mddat AOnvaios od Siedoyicavro, trép ola memounxdrov avOpo-
rav kwSvvetcovow, the old Athenians did not calculate how

828 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES, § 60/,

much people have done for whom they were going to incur risk,
Of this kind also are the phrases: ri waOdv; what have you
passed through, that? ri padov; what have you got to know,
that? ri mabav adixeis tiv rarpida; what have you passed
through to make you act unjustly towards your country #

§ 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single

word, but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated

a) merely by the tone of voice: od oPet pr Hd
mpeaBurepos 7s; do you not fear that you are already
too old ?

b) by Interrogatie particles, which, in translating into
English, cannot always be expressed by separate words,
but often may be rendered by the position of the words
and the tone of pronunciation. The most important
Interrogative particles are dpa and 4, both comparable
to the Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected, is
indicated by neither of these particles: dp’ eiul wavris ;
am I a prophet? % obrot wodémol eiow; are those
enemies ?

Obs.—If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated od is

added, if a negative, yy is added to dpa. Hence dpa ov corre-
sponds to the Latin nonne. dpa pn to the English, surely not.

§ 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may be
noticed: # ydp; isn’t it? 4 mov; surely? ado tT H, properly GAXo
rt €orw 4: does anything else happen than? hence, also with #

omitted (comp. § 626, Obs.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirm- _

ative answer is expected: Go tt # ddixodper; are we not doing
wrong? Xo Tt obv mavra Taira dy ein pla emiothpn; would
not this, then, be all one science? od put in a question also anticipates
an affirmative answer, and may be compared with nonne and the
English not. The opposite to it is yy, which may often be translated
by surely, as pay, formed from px) ody, surely not, always points to
a negative answer. pi) AxiAAéa ott hporricat Oavarov kai Kwduvou~
surely you do not think Achilles cared about death and danger ?

§ 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according
to § 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in
regard to Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct
Interrogatives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used
instead of the indirect ones: ai yuvaixes np@Tav avdTovs,

§ 612, THE NEGATIVES. 329

tives elev, the women asked them who they were
(§ 475, 6).
§ 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative 7¢f or
whether is represented by ei (§ 525, etc.), more rarely
av (with the Subj.), sometimes by dpa, and in Hom.
by 4 (né). Whether or not or whether perhaps may be
rendered by pj: oxo7reire, € Suxcalos Xpigopuar TO
Royo, see whether I speak justly ; 3 Opa, wn traifev eneyer,
see whether or not he spoke in gest.

On the subject of the Interrogative Sentence being drawn pro-
leptically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, Obs. 2.

§ 611. The direct double question (disjunctive ques-
tion) is most generally introduced by zorepov (métepa)
—}, Lat. utrum—an: motepov Sédpaxev 1 od ; ToTepov
dxov i éxov; has he done tt or not? willingly or unwil-
lingly ? In an indirect double question the same Inter-
’ rogatives may be used, but also ei—7), whether—or, and
elre—eite: atropovper, elite dxwv elite Exwv Sédpaxer, we
are in doubt whether he did tt willingly or unwillingly.

0bs.—The Homeric language has for the direct, but more fre-

quently for the indirect double question, the conjunctions # (7é),
® (He): Bpp ev vyecor Woceddov edapaccer, } mov avdpovr
Gvdpes edndjoavr’ emi xépaov; did Poseidon overpower you in
your ships, or have hostile men injured you on land? eine b€
pot prnoris GAdxov Bovdny re vdov re, He pever mapa mardi Kat
éumeda mavra puddocet, H dn pw eynuev "Axatdv Sstis Apiotos,
tell me the purpose and inclination of the wooed wife, whether
she remains with the son and guards all carefully, or has
already married him who is the best of the Achaeans? # (Hé) is
also used for 9 (je).in the second member,

Cuar. XXVI.—Tur NEGATIVES.

A) Simple Negatives.
§ 612. The Greeks have two different negatives, ov
and ys. Numerous compounds and derivatives are

330 THE NEGATIVES, § 613,

formed from each, as: ore, pyre, oddels, undels, ovdayds,
undapas. The principal distinction between od and yy
is that od denies, but pr declines, Hence arise the
following special rules:

§ 613. 1. od is used in all direct statements, whether
the reality of something is denied by the Indicative,
or the possibility or probability of something by the
Optative with dv: Pidumros ovk ayer eipnynv, Philip
does not maintain peace; ov« dv dyou eipnyny, he would
not (will hardly) maintain peace; ovx dv Svvato ph
Kapov edvdarpoveiv, you could not be happy without labour-
ing (§ 516).

Obs.—od is also used in the peculiar Subjunctive of the Homeric

language mentioned § 513,

2. ov is used in direct questions to which an affirma-
tive answer is expected (§ 608) ; but 4 when a negative
answer is expected (§ 608).

§ 614. 3. In independent sentences y# is used with
the Subjunctive (§§ 510, 512), with the Optative of
wishing (§ 514), with the Indicative of wishing (§ 515),
and with the Imperative : Ln OopuBnonte, do not make a
disturbance; jr yévovro, may it not happen; Hom. é os 7)
aberre yevérOar, would it never happened! pnmor er
ampnktoict voov exe, never devote your thoughts to what
is impracticable.

Obs.—In these cases py generally corresponds to the Latin ne. It
is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as
the swearer declines something (§ 612): Hom. toro viv rdde
Taia.... py Sc env idrnra Moceddwv... . mpaives Tpoas,
let Gaea now know this... . not with my consent does Poseidon
afflict the Trojans.

§ 615. 4. od in general is used in all those dependent
sentences which do not express a negative purpose or a
condition: Hdew, Ste ov padvov ein, I knew tt was not
easy ; & ov éate Tods Taidas Toveiv, TadTa avTol Trotetre,
what you do not allow your children to do you do your- —
See,

£616, THE NEGATIVES, 331

Obs. 1.—In indirect questions od as well as yi may be used with
ei in the sense of whether: cxomapev, «i mpémret 7) ov, let us
consider whether it is becoming or not; weipdcopa pabeiv, ef
andes 4} wn, I will try to learn whether it is true or not.

Obs. 2.—In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general
idea, py may be used: 4 pi ofda, ovde olopar eidévar, what J
do not know, I do not think I know.

§ 616. 5. ju} in general is used in all those dependent
sentences in which a negative purpose or a condition is
_ expressed ; hence ju} is the negative in sentences denoting
intention or purpose (§ 530), in those indirect Interroga-
tive and Relative sentences where a purpose of hinder-
tng is implied, in all the Protase’s of Hypothetical
Periods (§ 534, &c.), and lastly in Hypothetical Relative
(§ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal
clauses (§§ 556, 557): éav tus ayy, twapaxanels iatpov,
draws pun amoOdvyn, when any one is ill, you send for a
physician, that he may not die; :wndicacbe toadra é&
av pmdérote buiv petaperAnoes, vote for such things as
will never cause you to repent [ea quorum numquam vos
poemteat|; dpa, Oras py cot atrootncovtat, see that they
do not abandon you; é&fv cot amvévar ex Tis TOES, EL
pe) NpecKov cot oi vopor, it was at your choice to leave the
state, if its laws did not please you ; Oedcacbe, ws cabpov
éott TAY, 6 Te dv py Sixalws 4 TeTpaypévory, see, how
rotten everything is, which is not justly done; peylctn
yiyvetat owrnpia, bray yuvi) mpos dvdpa pn Svxoorarh,
it is the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with
her husband.

Obs. 1.—In sentences of this kind, sometimes od is used to
negative a single word: mdvrws otras exer, édy re ob pijre édv
re pire, it is entirely so whether you deny or assert +t.

Obs. 2.—The Optative expressing repetition likewise has py
(§ 547).

Obs. 3.—With verbs of fearing, pj, like the Latin ne, signifies
lest or that: d€Soixa, pi) emtAabapcOa rijs oixade 6800, I fear
lest we forget the way home (comp. § 533). Even without a
governing verb the fear that something may happen is intro-
duced by py, which in this case is to be translated if only not,

332 THE NEGATIVES. § 617

or if but not : pi) éridabdpeba ris otkade 5800, if only we do
not forget the way home (comp. §§ 620, 621, and 512),

§ 617. 6. The Infinitive generally has 7}, particularly
when the Infinitive has the article: tas opuolas yaprras
py» avrididdvar aicypdv, not to return equal thanks ts
base; col Td pr) ovyfioat Novrrov hy, tt remained for you
not to be silent.

Obs. 1.—od may be put with the Infinitive after verbs of declaring
and conceiving: dpokoy od xara rovrous evar pyreap, I
acknowledge I am not an orator in their sense.

Obs, 2.—désre, so that, when joined with the Infinitive generally
has py, more rarely ov.

Obs, 3.—After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying,
and others which contain the idea of declining ($ 612), pH is
usually added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by
from, or not expressed at all: kohvdpeba Bi pabeiv, we are

hindered from learning ; npvodvro ph mentoxevar, they denied
having fallen,

§ 618. 7. With Participles ym is used when they are to
be understood hypothetically, 7. e., in the sense of a Hypo-
thetical Protasis (§ 583): ov« dv Svivato ph Kapeov evdat-
poveiy, i.e, ef pry Kdpous (§ 613); so, likewise, when the
Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a
hypothetical or a hypothetical relative clause : Oo py)
Sapels dvO perros ov TraWeveTat, i.e. édv Tis pn Saph, or
ds dy un Sapp (§ 583).

Obs. 1.—When py is added as a Negative to single vid they
are likewise to be taken hypothetically : 7d) py dyabdy, the not
good, i. e., & dv pi ayabdr 7}.

Obs. 2.—With Participles as well as with other words pf often
occurs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining,
or hypothetical nature of the whole’ sentence: yydpieacde tov
moreov pi) PoBnOevtes 7d adrixa Sewédy, determine wpon the war
without fearing the immediate danger.

B) Several Negatives combined.

§ 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralised by a subsequent
compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued.
In translating, the Negative is employed only once in

§ 621, THE NEGATIVES. 333

English, and the place of the other Negative is supplied
by an indefinite: Poet. ov« éxtw oddév xpeiocov 7) vopot
qonet, there is not anything better for a state than laws ;
obdels ma@TOTE LwKpaTovs ovdey aceBées ovSE avdcLOV OTE
MpaTTOVTOS oUTE AéyovTOS *Kovcev, no one has ever heard
Socrates either doing or saying anything impious or unholy.
Obs.—A Negative is neutralised by a subsequent simple Negative
of the same kind: ovdels avOparav adixay riow ov« drodece,

no one who does wrong will not (%. e., every one will) pay the
penalty.

§ 620. 2. od followed by u7 with the Subjunctive or
Future Indicative is an emphatic negative. This mode
of speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being
supplied after od (comp. § 616, Obs. 3): od px) mroujoe,
about the same as ov doSnréov pi) Troujow, there ts no
fear that I shall do it, i.e. 1 shall certainly not do it:
ovdels pjtroTe evpyoet TO KaT ewe ovdev EAreiPOEy, no one
will ever find that anything, as far as depends on me, is
neglected ; ob pnrrote eEapvos yévapat, I shall certainly
never deny. .

§ 621. 3. yj followed by od is used in very different

ways :
i After verbs of fearing, 2) od corresponds to the
Lat. ne non, or ut, and is to be translated by that not:
SédorKa, uy OV Oepstov 7, vereor, ne non justum sit, I fear
that it is not just (comp. § 616, Obs. 3); also without a
governing yerb, 4.2) ov Oeyutov H, if it be but not right, i.e.
if it be only not wrong (comp. § 512, and § 616, Oés. 3) ;
Hom. pj vb tot od ypaicpyn cxirtpov Kai oréwpa Geoio,
the god’s staff and garland will surely not help you.

6) In indirect questions where yj would mean ?f
perhaps (§ 610), 42) ov means tf or whether perhaps not:
dOper pr ov TodTO 7 TO ayalov, look whether perhaps
this ts not the good.

Obs.—In the cases adduced under a and }, yy is a Negative Con-
Junction, and od the Negative to a special word.

334 THE NEGATIVES. § 622,

¢) wa od is used with the Infinitive after Wegative
expressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to: ovdeis
oloste GAXwS Aéyov pr) OV KaTayéXNacTos elval, NO One
speaking otherwise is able not to be ridiculous,

d) yw od is further used with the Infinitive after nega-
tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering,
forbidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, Ods. 3), The In-
finitive in this case is often preceded by the Article.
In English the negative is not expressed: od kwAvopeba
ue) ov pabeiv, we are not hindered from learning ; ph
Taphs TO un ov ppacat, do not omit saying it; Tiva ole
amapyncecbat pun) ovyt érictacba Ta Sixara; whom
do you think will deny at all understanding what is
just ?

Obs,—od is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in

the principal sentence,

C) Some Negative Phrases.

§ 622. 1. ovdér, pndéy, and obt1, ptt, nothing, are
often used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil,
meaning not, not at all; comp. § 404, Obs.

2. ove, unre, not yet; are to be carefully distin-
guished from ovxért, wnxétt, no longer: ovmw temoinxa,
nondum fect ; odxére troujow, non amplius faciam.

8. ovy Srz stands for od Aéyw bri, I do not say that,
not to mention; xal ovy drt 6 Kpitav év jovyla hy, Gra
kal oi pirot avtod, and not to mention (i.e. not only)
Crito was quiet, but his friends also were.

4, ya) Ste for px) eirw Stet (pu Sms) means don’t
suppose, nedum, by which the mention of something is
declined as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be
translated in Negative sentences by not only not: pa) Gre
Oeds, GAA Kal GvOpwrrot od Pirodot Tos amicTobvTas,
don’t suppose that only God, but men also do not love the
faithless [non homines infidos amant ; nedum deus}. In
like manner ovy 67s, properly not that, don’t suppose,

§ 62h, THE PARTICLES. 335

may frequently be rendered in connexion with Nega-
tives by not only not.

5, povov ov, povov ovyi, only not, is equivalent to
almost, nearly ; Scov ov, temporal [tantum non], nearly,
almost: xatayerad tm avdpav ods od pdvoy ov mpos-
xuveis, you are ridiculed by men whom you almost worship.

6. ov pv or ov pévtot GAA, however, notwithstand-
ing, is to be explained by an ellipsis: 6 fr7os puxpod
éxeivoy eEetpayryrucev' od py (viz. éEetpayrjducev) GNA
éméuewvev 6 Kipos, the horse nearly threw him off, (did)
not, however, but Cyrus kept his seat.

On ode, punre, ovdé, pndé, § 625.

Cuap. XXVII.—Tue Parrticuzs.

§ 623. Particles are those indeclinable words which
serve partly to connect sentences, partly to give em-
phasis to particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven
language. The Particles which serve to connect sen-
tences are called Conjunctions ; those which give pro-
minence to particular parts of a sentence, or impart
animation by making entire sentences prominent, are
called emphatic particles.

In regard to position they are either prepositive, i. e.
take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, i.e.
always stand after at least one other word in a sentence.

Obs.—The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according

to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong
equally to different classes. They will be arranged according
to their original or primitive signification.

A) Conjunctions.

Preliminary Remark.

§ 624.a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated
without regard to the formal relation of sentences to
one another (§ 519). But

a
oe
‘.

=

836 THE PARTICLES. ~ § 624,

1. Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis-
junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with
the exception of dues which is used principally in the
Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions ydp, and all
Illative Conjunctions except aste ;

2. Subordination is implied in all the rest.

Obs.—Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely
also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another
in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (dciv-
derov, want of connexion) takes place more frequently only in
an Epemegesis (éreEnynots), t.¢., & subsequent explanatory
addition to something already alluded to in the previous sen-
tence: eli tis yedotos ltarpds: idpevos peifov rd vdonpa
rom, I am an odd physician ; by curing the disease I make it
worse. Wherever the Asyndeton occurs in other cases, the
speaker generally intends to produce a special effect by it.

I.—Copulative Congunctions.

§ 624, 1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are xaé,
which in general corresponds to the Latin ef, and the
postpositive enclitic 7é, which in general corresponds to
the Latin gue. The language of poetry has besides 45é
and ’%é with the meaning and [comp. atque],

2. The Greeks, like the Romans, are fond of expressing
the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence,
either by xai—xai or té—xai, or Té—ré: Kal Kata yh
kal kata Odraccav, both by land and by water ;-Hom.
’Atpetdai re Kal arrow eixvypides "Ayasoi, ye Atridae as
well as ye other well-greaved Achaeans ; Hom. aiel yap
Tou épis Te Hidy ToAEuol Te payat Te, for strife is always
pleasant to you and wars and battles. We may further
add the Epic nuév—7dé, as well—as also.

Obs.—In single instances we also find ré—8é, where the second

member is made more prominent by contrast, °

8. xai has, moreover, the meaning also: Hom. zap
Ewouye Kab ddXot, of Ké pe Tiyunoovat, with me are also
others, who will honour me. tsi

§ 625, THE PARTICLES, 337

Tn this sense, also, cai is frequently used in both the
connected parts of a sentence: Kat jyiv radra Soxet daep
kat Bacire?, we also approve the same thing as the king
does (also). The meaning also by intensification be-
vomes even: xal diay, even very much ; and in the oppo-
site case even but: cal Bpaydv xpovor, even but a short
time. «at dé answers to the English and also: Sixatov Kai
mpémov Sé dua, just and at the same time also becoming.

After words of resemblance or likeness xa/ means as:
dpolws Kal, aeque ac.

4. Mos re cai properly means, “both in other respects, and
also;” it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or
words, and may be translated by especially: yademndv éort SiaBaivew
Tov mrorapov GAs Te Kal ToAepiov TOAaY eyyvs SvTar, tt is difficult
to cross the river especially as many of the enemy are near. xat 5)
kat is used to make the last part of a series emphatic: Herod.
Kpoicov Bacidedbovros ameixvéovrar és Sdpdis GAdou re of mavres ex
ris “EXAddos coduorail, kai 81) Kal Sddov, during the reign of Croesus
there came from Hellas both all the other wise men and especially
Selon (Lat. cwm—tum).

5. In the Epic Dialect ré is frequently employed to indicate the
agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole
sentences, often, too, in connexion with other Particles, such as
ai, pev, d€, ddd, and with relatives (dsre, daosre). In these cases
ré must generally be left untranslated or rendered by an unaccented
also: Hom. és xe Ocois émurei@nrar pada 1 &xdvov adrov, whoever
obeys the gods they greatly | listen to him also.

Obs.—The re in &sre, oldste, which occurs also in prose, is of the
same origin.

6. The rising climax is also expressed by od povov—
arra Kai, not only—but also. On ody Sr1, pr) Stt, ody
érrws, see § 622.

§ 625. 1. The Particles ovdé, pndé and odre, pte
serve to form a negative series. Two different meanings
belong to ovdé and pndé, viz.

a) nor either, and not ; in this sense they are used to
connect a single member of a sentence with a preceding
one negatively: Hom. Bpwpns oy amrreat od8é troTiros,
you touch not meat nor drink either ; wpos cod oS €uod
pace, to your advantage and not to mine I will speak

Z

338 THE PARTICLES. § 620,

b) also not, not even: édrifw ovdé rods sodepulous
peveiv rt, I hope that the enemy also will not longer stay ;
ovdé Todro éEjv, not even this was allowed [ne hoe quidem
licebat |.

2. ore—ovre, untre—pyre, are used with mutual re-
ference to each other, and may be translated neither—
nor: Hom. otte wor’ és wodepov mwdéoKeTo, ote TOT’
eis wyopyv, he neither went to war nor to the assembly.
Sometimes a negative member of a sentence is brought
into relation with a positive one, by means of ovre or
pnte—ré [Lat. neque—et|]: @pocay pure mpoddcew
GdAnAous cvupayol Te ExecOat, they swore not to betray
one another and to be allies.

Obs.—If something else be added to two members connected by
ovre—oire, or pyre—pire, it may be done by odd€, pydé. When,
on the contrary, ovdé or pndé corresponds to a preceding ove
or pyre, it must be called an irregularity (comp.-re-d¢, § 624,
2, Obs.), and the member thus added is emphatic, ad\Ad yap
ovre rovtwy ovdéy eat adrnbés, ovd€ x’ «i Tivos axnKéare, ws
ey madevew emtxerp@ avOpwrovs, but neither is any of these
things true, nor even if you have heard from any one that 1
undertake to train men,

IL.—Disjunctive Conjunctions.

§ 626. 1. 4, carefully to be distinguished from 7
(§§ 643, 607), means

a) or, and in this sense is often doubled : #—#, etther—
or, for which 77o1.—# is used when greater emphasis is
to be given to the first member of the sentence: #1 aderds
tis 7) Eévos, either some citizen or a stranger.

b) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives
like anos, alius; Erepos, alter; Suddpopos, different ;
évayTios, opposed to, &e.: tive av paddov micteicayu H
coi; whom should I trust more than you? ovdév adro
émitndevovow 4 amoOvncney, they think upon nothing
else than dying.

Obs.—After méov (mdeiov contracted weiv), more, and édarror,

peior, less, 4 is sometimes omitted with numerals, just as guam

§ 629 THE PARTICLES. 839

is after plus: rn yeyovds meio éBdopnxovra, more than seventy
years old [plus septuaginta annos natus]|. ‘lhe same is the case
also after @Ao re in questions (§ 608).

§ 627. 2. eite—eiire, édvre—édvte are used like the
Latin sive—sive, when it is to be left undecided which of
two sides is to be chosen: ei're addnOés cite Yeddos, ov
Kadov pot Sox? TodTO Toivoua eyew, whether true or false
it seems to me not fair to have this name.

Ii L.—Adversative Conjunctions.

§ 628. 1. dé, expresses so slight a contrast or oppo-
sition, that though it is generally rendered by bud, it
may also, and especially in Hom., be translated by and.
The Greeks, however, also like to indicate the first of
two sentences which are contrasted to one another,
and this they do by pév, tn truth, truly, indeed; but it
may often be left untranslated: Hom. a)\)or pév pa Oeoi
Te Kat avépes immoxopvatat evdov travvvyiot, Ala & ov«
eye vndujos Urrvos, the other gods, indeed, and the horse-
hair crested men slept through the night, but sweet sleep
did not hold Zeus. As here, wév—Sé express a contrast,
so elsewhere they indicate only a difference: Aape/ou
kat Ilapvodridos yiyvovtat traides S00, mpecBuTepos pev
"ApraképEns, vewtepos 5& Kipos, Darius and Parysatis
had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the younger Cyrus ;
Hom. zrepi péev Bovry Aavady rept & écte padyerOas, in
council, on the one hand, and in battle on the other, you
are distinguished among the Dana.

Obs.—In Homer an Apodosis also may be opposed to its Protasis
by means of 8¢, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a
temporal conjunction: éws 6 ravé’ Sppawe card hpéva Kal xara
Obupdv, HAOe 8 ’AOnvn, while he pored on this in his mind and

spirit Athene came. ‘This is founded on a combination of co-
ordination and subordination. Comp. § 519, 1 and 5, Obs,

§ 629, 2. adra, yet, but (originally Acc. Pl. Neut. of
Gos), denotes a stronger contrast than 6¢: Hom.
VP arrow pév Tavres errevpyunoav "Ayatoi—arW ov«
"Arpeidn ’Ayapéuvov Hvdave Oud, adrAa KaKkds adiet,

310 THE PARTICLES, § 630,

then all the other Achaeans assented, yet it did not meet
the feelings of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly dis-
missed him.

Obs. 1.—After a hypothetical sentence either expressed or under-
stood, ddAd, sometimes with a strengthening yé added to it, may
frequently be rendered by but or yet at least: e< pi) mavra,
GANA Toda ¥ tore, if not all, yet you know at least much;
Poet. & coi matp@ot ovyyévec Oe y’ Gdda viv, oh gods of my
fathers, be with me at least now [if not before},

Obs, 2.—dadAd frequently serves to break off a long discussion and
emphatically to introduce a request: Hom. d\da wibeoOe kai
types, but do you also follow me.

Obs. 3.—After negatives GdX’ 7 or d\Ad alone means except :
dpyvpioy pev ovk €x@ add’ fj pexpdv ti, I have no money except a
little. On od pry adda, § 622, 6.

§ 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast

or a transition to something different are:

8. ad, adte, properly again, then on the other hand, yet,

4. Hom. airdp, and ardp, but, on the contrary, yet.

5. pévtot, certainly, however, see § 643, 13.

6. Kaito, and yet, still.

7. Gus, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast

[Lat. tamen, nihilominus}]. On éuas as a supplement to
a participle, § 587, 5

§ 631. IV.—Conjunctions of Comparison.

1. as, as (Lat ut)
is properly the adverb of és, 4, 6. It differs in accent
from os, so or thus (§ 99), except when in poets and the
Homeric Dialect, it is placed after the word compared
(§ 98, a) in which case it is oxytone: matnp &s Aros
jev, he was gentle as a father. Like the Lat. ut it is
employed in very different ways:

a) In its original comparative sense @; means as or
how, and is used in comparisons: ws; Botnet, as you wish ;
waxpov ws yépovtt, far for me an old man (Lat. tan-
quam); Hom. @¢ pou déyetar Kaxov éx Kaxod aiei (how
with me one evil follows another, Lat. quam); with super-

§ 632, THE PARTICLES. 84]

latives like the Lat. quam: as taysora, quam celerrime ,
as quickly as possible (comp. 671). In statements of
number and measure it means about, nearly ; a> SéKa,
about ten; @s ént To word, for the most part ; with verbs
of motion or action it indicates what is merely intended,
apparent: da7jeu ws eis Tovs ToNEwlous, he went away in
the direction of the enemy (as if he went against the
enemy); hence it occurs with participles in the manner
described § 588. On its use with the Infinitive, § 564,
and on @s as a preposition, § 450.

6) In a temporal sense ms means when, as soon as
(comp. Lat. ut): Hom. as €i8’, ds piv paidrov &u yoXros,
when he saw him, anger pierced him the more; os taxirra
Ews trrépaiev, eOvovto, as soon as dawn appeared, they
sacrificed [ Lat. ut primum].

ec) In acausal sense os means as (Lat. guum), since, and
with subsequent statement of the reason, for: Séomar
god Tapapeivat, as éy® Hdvota axovoayu ood, I beg
you to stay here, as I should hear you with the greatest
pleasure.

d) After verbs of saying and declaring és means that:
Kev ayyéd\Xwv tis, @s "EXdtea KaTeiAntTat, some one
came announcing that Elataea was taken. § 526, 6.

€) ws is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that
((aste).

Ff) In a final sense &; means in order that: es ph
mavres Ghovrat, in order that all may not perish. Comp.
§ 530, &c.

g) On os expressing a wish (Lat. utinam) see § 514.

§ 632. 2. dszrep, as,
is only a strengthened as (comp. § 641, 8), and is used
only in a comparative sense.
. 8. bras, how, that, in order that,
is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then

342 THE PARTICLES. ; § 956.

he translated by that, or in order that, comp. § 530, &e,
On oby d7aws, § 622, 4.

4. ste, as, so that,
has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the
consecutive so that, when it is followed either by an
Infinitive or a finite verb. Comp. § 565.

5. Hom. ire, as, just as, like, only in comparisons.

§ 633. V.—Declarative Conjunctions.

1. 671, that, because | Lat. quod], |
is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun
dstis, 6 Tt, on the distinction of which from 671, compare
§ 214, Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, 67. has two prin-
cipal meanings, the declarative that, and the causal
because.

a) ére means that after verbs of saying and declaring
(comp. § 525): ‘Hpd«revtos Aéyer, Ste wavTa yopet Kal
ovdev pévet, Heraclitus says, that everything moves and
nothing ts stationary. Hence the phrase dor 6ru (also
written SyAovodre), zt is clear that, manifestly.

Obs.—Sometimes, also, a direct speech is introduced by érz, so that

the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation: ednAov
h ypadn, Gri OeyicroKAjjs xo mapa oé, the letter stated (that) 1
Themistocles am come to you.

b) because, that [Lat. quod]: Hom. xywopevos, tov
dpistov "Ayaiav ovdev éticas, angry that you have not
honoured the best of the Achaeans.

The use of 67 (or 6 rv) with a superlative deserves.
attention: 67: tdyvora like ws tdycTa, as quickly as
possible ; and dru ju}, except, besides: od« hv Kpnvn bre um
uia, there was no fountain except one,

2. ws, that, § 631, d.

8. duos, that, § 636, 2.

4. ovvexa, that, § 636, 3.

§ 635, THE PARTICLES. 843

VI.—Temporal Conjunctions.
§ 634. (Respecting the Moods, see § 556, &c.)

1. 8re, drdre, when, as [quando, cum]: étav, orétay,
when, if : tv more ypovos, dte Geol péev Hoav, Ovnta sé
yévn ovx av, there once was a time when gods existed, but
mortal races did not exist; Hom. of & dre 5%) Apévos
monuBevbéos évtos txovto, iotia wev oreidavto, but when
they got within the deep harbour they furled the sails.
ére and ovore with the Optative, according to § 558,
Obs. 1, mean whenever, as often as: Hom. &@a mdpos
Koad ore pv yAuvKds Urrvos ixdvot, where formerly he
used to lie down whenever sweet sleep came upon him.
Sometimes ére has the causal meaning sznce.

2. Hom. edre = ore.

8. jvika, omnvixa, when, at the time when (§ 217),
denotes rather a point of time: #vixa jy Selrn, éEarrivns
émipaivovtat ot Todéutot, when tt was evening the enemy
suddenly appeared.

4. tyuos, poet. when:

Hom. jos 8 Héduos pécov ovpaviy dudiBeBnxet, kat rére 5) xpv-
wea marnp érirawe rdadavra, when (at the moment) the sun
had entered mid heaven, just then the father raised the golden
scales,

§ 635. 5. érel, after, when, as: éredv, émny, érayr,
when; Hom. aitap érel méctos Kal edntvos é& pov evo,
but when they had quenched the desire for food and drink ;
Kdpos imécyeto avdpl éxdotm Sdcew mévte apyvplou
pvas, érav cis BaBvAOva Heoow, Cyrus promised to give
each man five silver minae when they should come to
Babylon. érei frequently introduces a reason, and then
is to be translated by because or Sor: >: Hom. dara
wiOcobe Kal v UPES, érrel treiQecOat dpewvor, but do you
also obey me, for it is better to obey.

6. érreidy, now since, since: éredav, when, is ére
strengthened by 6%} (§ 642), and points more strongly
‘to the reason assigned than éze/: ézevd)) dvedyOn 76

844 THE PARTICLES. § 656

Scopwryptov, eis Ooper, now since the prison was opened
we entered.

7. €ws, as long as, till [quamdiu, dum, donee]: Ews &rt
éxaris, as long as there is still hope; meprepévopev Eas
dvorxOein Td Seopmrnpiov, we waited till the prison should
be opened,

8. ésTe. Z

9. peypt, aypt (comp. § 455) } pastg

10. poet. ddpa, as long as, till:

Hom. édpa pév nas fv, as long as it was morning; Hom. éyet
xérov, édpa reréoon, he nurses wrath till he fulfils it. Spa is
very often a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be

translated by that, in order that: Hom. édpa jij otos dyépacros
€w, in order that I may not be alone unhonoured,

11. mpiv, before, sooner [ priusquam] (comp. § 565),
is joined sometimes with the Infinitive, sometimes with
a finite verb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously,
earlier, has been preserved, especially in ro apiv, for-
merly. In Hom. the Conjunction zpiv may refer back
to the adverb wpiv: ovd Oye mpl Aavaciow deéa
Aovyov atrace, Tpiv yf amd watpl dirp Sopevat OuKa-
muda Kovpyny, and he will not avert the dreadful suffering
from the Danai, before they have given back the quick-eyed
maiden to her father.

12. mdpos, Hom. = mpiv.

VII.—Causal Conjunctions.

§ 636. 1. Br, § 633, 8.

2. Svort, because, properly Sia tobro bru, for this reason
that, or that.

8. obvexa, because, poet., from ob évexa, for rovrouv
&vexa br, for this reason that; because, also declarative
that. So likewise o0ovvexa from 6rov (obtwos) Evera.

4, érrel, § 635, 5.

5. Gre, § 634, 1.

6. yap (always postpositive), fur, namely, to wit.
Special peculiarities in the use of yap are:

§ 637 THE PARTICLES. 345

a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a
reason is often put before the one for which the reason
is given, especially after a Vocative: Hom. ’Artpeidn,
ToAXol yap TeOvaor KapnKxopowrtes ’Ayatoi—T@ ce xp?)
morepov Travaa, Atrides, for many rich-haired Achaeans
have died, therefore you ought to put an end to the war.

6) By namely, yap may be translated when it intro-
duces the substance of a speech or opinion before
announced, so especially after rexprjpiov dé, waptiptov
dé (supply éorv), for that there is a proof, a testimony.

c) In answers ydp may often be rendered by yes,
certainly, but must in reality be explained by an
ellipsis: dywvictéov pév apa apiv mpos todvs dvOpas ;
avayen yap, &bn, must we then contend with the men?
yes, ut ts necessary, said he—the complete answer would
be, we must contend, for it is necessary.

d) In animated questions ydp serves to give emphasis
like the Lat. nam: ti ydp; quidnam? how so? 4 yap;
ov yap ; is it not so? mas ydp od; how could tt be other-
. wise? ei ydp is the Lat. utinam. adda yap [at enim)
corresponds to the English but surely; od yap dddXa
properly: for it 7s not so, but, hence however.

VIIL.—Inferential Conjuncetions.

§ 687. 1. dpa (Ep. dp and enclitic fd, poet. also dpa,
postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers
to something known or resulting from what has gone
before. It is most frequently used in Homer to connect
sentences slightly: as dp’ én, thus then he spoke;
*Arpeldns 8 dpa vija Ooh ddade mpoépvacer, and Atrides
accordingly drew the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be
expected). ov« dpa often means not forsooth, ei dpa if
then or tf perhaps, and in indirect questions whether
perhaps.

On the Interrogative dpa, § 607, 0.

2. ovv (New Ion. wy, postpositive), then, consequently,

816 THE PARTICLES. § 638

is more emphatic than dpa: Hom. #rot voorros am@XeTo
matpos €uoto' ov’ obv ayyedin Ere treiOomat, el moe
EOor, ovte Ocompotrins éurafopar, surely my father’s
return is lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, if
one comes from anywhere, nor concern myself about pro-
phecy. ev odv (comp. § 643, 12), no doubt, certainly,
well then ; § ody, certainly ; aN obv, but certainly ; yap
ovv, yet surely. When joined to relatives, ody has the
generalising meaning of the Lat. cunque: dstusobdv, who-
ever, quicunque (§§ 218, 600),

By combination with otv we obtain the Wegative
ovxouvv, not then, to be carefully distinguished from
ovxodv, which is properly an Interrogative, not then?
but as an affirmative answer is expected after an inter-
rogative with od (§ 608), it has acquired the positive
meaning, therefore, accordingly, now: ovxovv Ewovye Soxel,

hence I do not think so; Poet. obxodv bray 8) ph ceva,

merravoopat, well, then, I will cease when I really have no
strength.

8. viv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened voy, cor-
responds to the unaccented English now.

4. toivur, hence, therefore, surely, is a viv strengthened
by the assuring roé (§ 643, 10).

5. tovyap, 8o then, therefore, yet ; more emphatic Tos
YyapTOL, Tovyapouy.

6. waste, so that, § 632, 4.

IX.—Final Conjunctions.
(Respecting the Moods, § 530, &e.)

§ 638. 1. iva, that, in order that, in order to [Lat. ut],
as an adverb also signifies where in a relative sense and
in indirect questions: ody opds wv ef xaxod; do you
not see in what: (position of) evil you are? wa as a
Particle of purpose is elliptical in a ri; where yévnrat
must be supplied, i. e. that what may happen? why ?

§ 539. THE PARTICLES. 347

On 2. ds and

8. b7ras, see §§ 631, 632, 3.

4. ddpa, § 635, 10.

5. 4) = Lat. ne, that not, in order that not, §§ 530,
ete., 614; after verbs of fearing, § 616, Obs. 3.

X.—Hypothetical Conjunctions.

(Respecting the Moods, § 535, etc.)

§ 639. 1. ei, 7,
in indirect questions whether, § 610; in wishes (where
elOe, ei yap are also used), 7f only, if but, §514. Observe
also e/ yy in the sense of except, like the Lat. nist: ayiv
ovdév éotww ayabov dro «i pr) bra Kal dpeTy, we have
no other good except weapons and valour ; ei pur) el, nist st,
unless ; eltrep, siquidem, tf indeed, certainly if, contains
an emphatic assurance: Poet. } Kal yeynOas tadr’ dei
AéEew Soxeis; eirep ti yf eats Tihs adnOelas abévos, do
you really think you will always speak thus joyously ?
(answer) ¢f indeed (certainly if) there ts any force m
truth.

2. éav, i.e. ef av (Gv, jv), tf;
in indirect questions, whether, § 610.
8. av, I suppose, perhaps (postpositive)
always denotes that something may happen only under
certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable.

On dy with the (potential) Optative, § 516.

on a (hypothetical) Indicative, § 537.

* * Indicative, denoting repetition, § 49+.
oe % Future Indicative, § 500, Ods.

= pi Subjunctive with relatives, § 554.

ss - », with particles of time, § 557.

» 3 Tubeiiien §§ 575, 576.
9 * Participles, § 595.

Obs.—ay is often used twice in the same clause: ovx« dy ép6as
etd yas 6 rodro mouncas sept ovdevds dv Noyioaro, he who did

B48 THE PARTICLES. § 640.

this would not, I suppose, judge correctly or soundly about any-
thing.

4, Hom. «é, xév (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely
like a.

XI.— Concessive Conjunctions.

§ 640. 1. ef xai (cay wai), if even, although,
denotes a simple concession: poet. moduw, ef Kab pn
Prérreus, hpove’s & bus, ola viow Evvertw, though you
have not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city
ts involved.

2. kal ei (kal édv, Kav), even tf, even though

denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi: mryetro
avopos elvat ayabod awderciv tods pirous, Kal eb pndeis
perro elcecOau, he deemed it to belong to a good man to
benefit his friends, even tf no one should know tt.

Obs.—The distinction between ei kai and kai ¢? consists mainly in
the former giving the emphasis of the «ai to the Protasis, the
latter to the Apodosis, Hence the meaning is in many cases
almost the same,

38. xaimep with the participle, § 587, 5,

In the Apodosis the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed by
bps, notwithstanding, § 680, 7.

B) Particles of Emphasis.

§ 641. 1. yé (enclitic and postpositive), at least [ Lat.
quidem|, gives the word before it greater weight,
and is often represented in other languages merely by
a more emphatic accent on the word to which ye is
attached: Hom. eizrep yap” Exrwp ye xaxov Kal avarKiba
gjce, GAN ov treicovtas TpaHes, for if Hector shalt call
(you) base and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe
(it); Hom. dra oF, ef Sivacai ye, mepioyeo ravdds, but
do you, if you can, protect the son; tovTo ye olwat tpas
adravras noOjcOa, this at least I think you all have per-
ceived ; Hom. éo71g Tovadta ye pétor, whoever should do
such things. yé is very frequently affixed to pronouns:

“a

§ 642, THE PARTICLES. 349

eye, ego quidem, dye (Hom. he, he specially); dsye
strengthened és, gut quidem.

2. yodv (postpositive), at least [Lat. certe], is com-
pounded of yé and ody, and hence more emphatic than
ye alone.

3. mép (enclitic and postpositive), gust, exactly, very, is
shortened from the adverb epi, very (§ 466), serves to
give precision to the relative: dszep (§ 218), the very
one who; ws trep, just as. In Homer it is added to
participles in asense similar to that of «adzep (§ 587, 5):
pnd ovtws ayabds Tep éw@v OeoeixeN ’AyiAred KrErTE
vow, be not so stealthy in purpose, divine Achilles, though
you are so very noble (ironical).

§ 642. 4. 3y (certainly, to be sure, well then, therefore),
points to what is obvious in a single idea, or in a whole
sentence. 7 is used principally in three ways:

a) to emphasize single words: oid éotw & tas
agerel ; tylieva Kal ioyds Kal Kaddos Kal TrodTOs 8,
what kind of things are those which benefit us? health and
strength and beauty, and, certainly, wealth; dira Sn, to.
be sure tt is clear ; viv opate dy, now you surely see; aye
5y, well! come; ri dn; what then? padiota 8n, very
much so, at the beginning of an apodosis; xal rére 5n,
now, just then. On «al 8) Kai, § 624, 4.

6) to confirm a sentence by referring to what pre-
cedes: tov pev 81) méurrer, him, then, he sends; Poet. oi
TyrdiKoide Kal SidakdpecOa 8) dpoveiv mpos avdpos THAL-
Kodoe ; we even at such an age are, then (according to the
preceding speeches), to be taught wisdom by aman of such
an age? ws & tut dpovpad éopev of avOpwrrot, Kal ot
Sef 82) Eavtov é« tavrns Avew, We men are, as tt were,
placed at some post, and tt is therefore not proper to
abandon tt. .

¢e) referring to time, very much like the particle of
time, 75n, Lat. jam: nab rodra 87) ddXra AéEas elzrer,
and after having already stated many other things, he

a. es
j - —

300 THE PARTICLES. ' §esm

said ; viv 8}, just now. Hom. ra 8%) viv wavta Teretrat,
all that is just now being done.
5. dnrrov, surely, I suppose, also dirovbey,
is often used ironically in assertions which admit of no reply :
tpéeperar Se Wuxi rim; pabypace Sirov, the soul is nourished
by what? (answer) surely by learning. ri dimou, well then,
what do you suppose ?
6, dra, certainly,
negative ov dra, certainly not ; ri dja, well’ what then?
7. 870ev, clearly, evidently.
8. dai,
another form of 87, but only used in questions: ri 8a: ; well!
what? how so?

§ 643. 9. 4, verily, truly,

(to be distinguished from #, or, than, § 626), strengthens
an assurance. 7 yyy (Hom. 7% pév) is the common form
of an oath: @pocav SpKovs 7 py ph pynouaKnoeW.
they swore that they would truly not cherish revenge. On
the Interrogative 4, §§ 607, 608.

In Homer 7 is appended to éze/ and ri, to add
strength to them: ézrel 7, ri 7, for which also ézreu, te)
is written,

10. roi (enclitic and postpositive), I assure you, let me tell you.
otro, truly not, strengthened forms: rolyap, roryapovy, Toi-
yapra (§ 637, 5).

11. iro, verily, faith (4 and rot),
serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry: fro 6y ds elmav .
kat ap’ &Cero, now when he had so spoken he sat down,

On the disjunctive #ro—7, either, or, see § 626, a.

12. pyv (Hom. pay, pév), verily, truly (Lat. verum,
vero],

Hom. ade yao éFepéw, ai pv TeTerecpévov Eorat, for 80 4
will I speak wt, and truly it will be fulfilled; ri pry;
why! what? why not ? (comp. § 404, O6s.).

13. pévrot, yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero,
from pév the weaker form of pv: és Oimddas éotpa-
Tevoav Ka érro\opKour, od jevToL elNOV ye, GAN ave
xepncav én’ olxov, they made an expedition against

§ 643, THE PARTICLES. ous

Oeniadae, and besieged it ; yet they did not conquer it, but
returned home.
14. vai, yea, in fact.
15. vn, truly,
followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, who
ere invoked as witnesses in an oath: v7 Ala, by Zeus.
16. pd, truly,
In negative oaths: od wa Ala, no, by Zeus; also in
positive ones, when vai precedes: val wa Ala, truly by
Zeus (§ 399, Obs.).
17. Hom. On» (enclitic), truly, surely,
similar to the Attic dyov (§ 642, 5), often with an ironical
meaning: od Ov pu waduv adris aries Oupds dyfvwp verKetew
Baorrjjas, his courageous heart will surely not again incite him to
taunt kings,

Se sa

( 352 )

ENGLISH INDEX.

{The numbers indicate the §, not the pages.)

ABODE,

* Abode,” to be supplied, 411.

Absolute Genit., 428; 584—
Acc., 586.

Abstracts in the Plur., 362,
Obs.—mostly Fem., 103.
Accent, 17, etc. — General
rules, 79, ete. —of Nouns,
Yo7, etc.; 118; 123; 148—
of Comparatives, 171 — of
Pron., 207 — Irregularities
in the declensions, 121;
123 5 1315 1335 1425 163;
166; 181; 183—in Adverbs,
2013; 165—in Verbs, 229;
331, etc—in the Strong
Aor., 255—in the Perf,
276; 284—in the Strong
Pass. Stem, 293— irreg.,
332, a derivation,

340, Obs. 4, e

Accusative, orig. inline, 173+
Obs, — meaning, 395—of
the outer obj., 396, etc.—of
the inner obj., 400, etc.—
of double obj., 402, etc.—of
the predicate, 403 — free
Acc., 404, etc.—Adverbial,
2013; 203; with Prep., 447,1
—with the Inf., 5674, etc,

“ Accustomed to,” expressed
by Aor. and Ampert Ind.,
with av, 494, Obs. 1

“ Acquainted with”? or “tgno=
rant of,’ with Genit., 414,

3.
Action, Suffixes for, 342.
Active, 476—Act., Mid., Pass.
meaning, 328.
ning "wean 17; 80, ete.—

« Adapted for” Saffix, 351.
Adjectives, declens., 114; 126;
154; 164, etc. — Compar.,
? —Genders, 180, etc.—of
ndings, 185, etc.—of 2
iendings, 182; 189—of 1
Ending, 190—Derived, 350
—Contr., 183—Subs. fem.,
127, 4— — with Art., 37
follow the Genit., is he Obs.
Adverbs, 201, etc. — Co’
lative, 217, etc. — Sein.

ATTRIBUTE,

Adv., 223—with the Art.,
379—as Adject., 382.

“ Aim,” expressed by Acc.,
Alphabet, 3.
Anastrophe,
Aorist, wea with trans,

meaning, 329—with x, 310
—strong with intrans.
meaning, 329—of ee
and gnomes, 494—Ind., 492,
etc.—in Condit. sentences,
543—in Condit. sentences,
5393 541—Moods, 495, etc.
—Subj. in cond, sent., 545,
Obs. 1.—Opt. and Inf., 497
—Part., —

Apocope, 64, D.

Apostrophe, 153 64; 65, D.

Apposition, 361, 123 385—
ER sitive — 5795 3583.

Arti 106 — Crasis, 65 —
without Accent, 97, I—as
Demonstr. Pron., 212, D.—
for the Relative, 213, D—
Origin in Homer, 368 3 370
Obs.—omitted, 376, ete—
Meaning, 369, etc—Neut.,
with Genit., 3813 410—Po-
sition, 383-390.

Aspirates, 323 52, etc.—at the
begin. of two successive
syll., 53; 274, 1—Redupli-
cated by Tenues, 62.

Aspiration dropped or re-
moved, 32, D.—thrown back,
54—omitted, 52, D.—in the
strong Perf., 279.

Assimilation, 45 ; 47, etc. 3 50,
b; 513 56.

Asyndeton, 624, a, Obs.

Atona, 9}—before Enclit., 93,

€; 98.
« Sitempting an action,” ex-
pressed by the Imperf., 489.
Attic Decl., 132—Ending, 157
—Fut., 263—Reduplic., 275,

1; 278.
597, etc. — in-

Attribute, 361, 11 — Attri-
butive Adject. Art., 384—

COMPLETED,

Attr. compounds, 359, 2, and
Obs, (Comp. 360) Attrle
butive additions, 383-306
Attributive Partic.,

apr ir Ps
gee D.; 23 o- Daabie: 2393
ih Compounds, 238,
pe aT inh 270, D.
, 19.

Barytones,
“ Be,” “become,” “ make,”
etc., 417 5 361, 4.

“ Begin, < inte: tz? “ end,”
Hike — Part 590—with
eni

“ Benefiti ba ‘verbs of, 3

= Buge a with G Aaa
421.

“ Capability, Verbs
ten Tee 560, sg

Cardinal N un.., 220.

Case, 1oo—Use of, 392, ete.—
Endings, 100 — a ons?

153—in Compas 354
* Cause,” in Fea Pi 408,
—4225 426—Dat., 439—
‘art., 581.
Challenge or Gommand —in
the Sutjune, 509—by dws,
ge

Characteristic, 249.
a 21; 803 83, etc.5

84, a.
Classes of Verbs in w, 247-
2503;,320-327; of Verbs in

ft, 305-319.
Collective Peres 362.
Common 12%, 55 149.
“ Community, press by
Dat., 436.

Com Son
clens., 1'J0, Pe ash
—Adv., 203—with

tient i Adj. and Verbs with)

Sas 416, Obs. 35 423.”
eo 42—for v, 49, Obs. 3;
147, €3 233, 2—for v7, v8, v8,
50; 147, rg PP gros: a, Vere

Completed Ac

4845 43535 pa ae

————<-- -— |

ENGLISH INDEX.

853

COMPOUNDS.

Compounds, Divis, of Syll., “}3
_—Accent, 853 1313 165;
1835 332—Adj., 182, etc.;
189, 3 — Augm. in Comp.
Verbs 238, etc.—treated as
simple Verbs, 402 — with
Genit., 424— with Dat.,
43

Pe ee Participle, 582.

Conditional Sentences,
5. gat., 616,

Conpunctions, 623, etc.

Connecting Vowels, 233, I, 2,
53 262, etc. ; 275.

Consonants, Divis of, 30, etc.,
44—in dividing Sy iL, 4,
etc,

ete—in De-
clens., 118; 1223 1283 130,
etc.; 163, D.3 1663 1
Double, 167—-Omitted, 355
= 2 165; 166, D.; 233,
243, ’D.; 268, D—of
Mie Saas Stem, 243, etc.—
by Adv., Feel ve dog
long, 75, —Accent, 87;
163; 331—Contr Fut., 259;
262, etc.
Coordination, 519, 1 a, 2.
Coronis, 16; 9
519, 4— Correl.
Pron, 216; 218—Adv., 217,
ete,

Orasis, 16; 65—Accent in,
89. ;

534,

Dative, Perispome, 1o9—Oxy-
tone, 133, 2—in Monosyl.,
142—in aul), 68; 165, D.

a4 ne ey ae
ean 429, etc.
with Pre om
vant.

etc.—of measure, 440—free,

1-443.

» Declare ”” Verbs at

with Acc. and Inf.

with Inf, s60,2—with | Pen,
593—with gs 617, Obs. 1—

Sentences Ce FS Pa

eae 3475
Demonstrative jole, 369-—
Pron., 2123 216; 47
follows the predicate, 307—
Art. with, 389.
Denominatives 339.
tat Cons., 30—dissim. 46
o, 47; 67—mutes
dropped before o, 493 147,
1; 149; 260—in Perf, 281
—Charact. in Verbs, 250,
Obs.—Fut., 260, 3,

GENDER,

ts, 482—Pass., 328, 2
ass. Mean., 328, 43 483, 3.
Derivative Ending in Comps.,

357.

Deseription expressed by the
Imperf., 488.

Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2.

Determinative Comps.. 359, T,
and Obs, (Com). 360),

Diueresis, 9; 22, Obs.

Digamma, J D; 34, D,

. 23 63, D5 95, D.5 1

237; 3 253, Obs.; 360, Obs,

Diphthongs, Pronunt., 8—Ori-
gin, 26; 35, 2— before
Vowels, 35, Obs. ; 160; 248,
Obs.— without Aug, 235
—spurious, 27.

Disjunctive questions, (See
Double question.)

Dissimilation, 46.

Distributives, 223.

Doric Fut., 264.

Doubling of Conson., 62 3 34.

Double questions, 611 — od
and py, 615, Obs. 1.

Dual represented by PL, 365.

Effect and Consequence ex-
a by Acc. and Inf.,

Ehsan, 64— Accents, 88—
before Enclit., 96, 3.

Enclitics, 92, etc.—retaining
the Accent, 96.

Ending, 100 — changed in
Comps., 355—of the 1st De-
clens., 134—of 2nd, 172.

Enjoying, verbs of, with Ge-
nit., 419, d.

Epexegesis, 624, a, Obs.

Ethical Dative, 433.

Eaclamations, 393—in <Ace.,
399, Obs.—in Genit., 427.

; | Bactent, exp. by Acc., 405.

Fear and Anxiety, 5335 5125
616, Obs. 3.

Feeling, verbs of, with Acc.,
399—with Dat., 439, Obs.—
with Genit., 422, Obs.—with
Part., 592.

ie She 1035 1273 1383

163.

Final letters, 67, ete.—Syl.
long—bef. vowels short, 75,
7 2—Contr. Accent, 87;
183.

Future, 499, ete, 484—Act.
with trans. Meaning, 329
—-periphrastic, sor — Fut.
Perf., 505—Ind. with xé,
554, Obs, 2--Part. with
Art., 500,

Gender, known by general
rules, 101, ete.; 127 —by
ending of Stem, 1253 13,
etc —by Declens., 105; 122

5 35»

INTERROGATIVE,

—in A Declens., 122—in O
Declens., 127—in Cons. De-
clens., 137, etc.

Generic Article, 375.

Genitive Perispome, 100; 118
—Oxytone, 133, 2—Paroxy-
tone, 181—in Monosyl., 142
—represented by @ev and
uv, 178, ie. A ; 118—Meaning.
4°7—Wi repos., 447, 2—-
Cl sabst, 408, oe wiih
Adj. and- Adv., 414, ete.—
with Verbs, 414, etce.—tree
Genit., 425, etc.

Gentile Names, 3493 350.

Grave accent, 19, ete. 3 86,

Gutturals, 3o—with o ? form é
48; 260—before p, become

y 47—with t, become goa,
37-—Charact, of Pres., 250;
251, D.

Heteroclites, 174.
Hiatus, 63—apparent, 63, D

4.
Hypothetical Sent, (See Con-
ditional Sent.),

Imperative, 228—1 Aor., 53—
268, D.; 518—in Cond. Sent.
545, Obs. 3—exp. by 2 Pers.
Fut. with od, 499, Obs
supplied by Inf., 577.

Imperfect, 488, ete—in Cond.
Sent., 543— in Prot. and
Apod., 5385 541.

Inclination, 91, etc.

Incomplete Action, 484, etc.

Indefinite Subject, 361, 3, Obs.
2—in Neut., 364.

Indefinite Pronouns, 214, etc. ;
2106—Adv., 92, 4.

Indicative, 507 — in Bene
Sent., 5203 523—1in de
declar. and interr. bea
se Condit. Sent., 5 26,

, 545—in temp. ‘Sent.,
eetsirucie Ind. in Cond.
Sent., 537—in Sent. of pur-

pose, 550.
Indirect Object, 430 a.
ape ea Article, 391,
Inf ve initive Act., in ae pev,

233, D. 33 255, D—in vat

Aor, and Perf. Accent, 333,

1-5; 268, Obs. 1—Use, 559

—with Art., 379—as "Sub-

ject 563; 574,1—Acc., 2—

Gen., 3— —Dat., 4—with pj,
and ov, 617-—with ph ov,

621, e d—for Imper., 597.

« Injure,” Verbs—with Acc.,

3

Sistas suffix, 344— "Ya
tive of, 4383 574, 4

Interest or Avante Dat.
of, 431, etc.—Middle of, 479

Interrogative Pron., 224, 22€

2a

35+ ENGLISH INDEX.
IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, PRESEXT,

—direct and indirect, 475, b; | Narrative in Aor, Ind., 492. | Patronymics, 348.

6o9—in depend. Sent., 525 | Nasals, 33—in divis. of Syl, | Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351

mS itn with Demonstr.,| 72, 1. —Genilt., 408, 8.

, Obs. 1. Necessity, exp. by Verbal | “ Perceive,” Verbs of with

Irregular Nouns, 177—Verbs, | —Adj., 300. Genit., 4203; 414, Obs,—

320, Obs. Negatives, 619, and Obs, with” Inf. 560, 2— with
Iterative form, 334, D., etc.— | Negative Pron. and Adv., 219. Part., 591.

in Imperf, and Aor., 335, D.

Judicial Proceedings, Verbs of
—with Genit., 422.

Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2.

Labials, 30—before p, 47—
before o, 48; 260—verbal
stem, 249.

Lengthening, 40, ete.3; 1475
155; 1653 173, Obs.—in
Pres., 248—in the Fut., 260,
2; 261—in Redupl, 275.
Comp., 273, D.; 278).—of

owels, 243, D. 33 263, D.

Liquids, 33—Iin divis. of Syll.,
92, 1.

Locative, 179.

Long by Nature, 75.

Manner, exp. by Dat., 441.

Masculines, 102 ; 137—disting.
from Fem., 113; 1225 134
—for Fem., 362, Obs. 2.

Material, suffix, 352, 3, 4—
Genit., 408, 3; 414, 25 418.

Measure, in Dat., 440.

Mediae, 32.

Metaplasm, 175.

MJetathesis, 59; with strong
Aor. Act. and Mid, 257;
D., 282, 285; with strong
Aor, Pass., 295, D.

Middle, 477, etc.—direct, 478
—indirect, 479—Subjective,
480—Causative, 481—Aor.
with Mid. meaning, 255, 2;
271, Fut. with Act, mean-
ing, 264; 266; 328, 1—with
Pass. meaning, 266,

Modesty of Assertion, exp. in
Opt., with dv, 517, Obs. 1.

Momentary Action, 484; 492-

8.

Monosyllabic Stems, length-
ened, 142, b—in A, v, p, Perf.,
282—Accent of Mon. words,
142—with Enclit., 94.

Moods, 225, 4.

Multiplicatives, 223.

“Must” and “ Should,”
Verbs of, in Imperf., 490.

Mutes, 31, etc.—Assimilation,
49, D.; 52—before Liquids
and Nasals, 7 of
Verbs, 248.

Name in Genit., 408, 9—of
Animals, Gender, 140.
Name,” “Select,” etc., Verbs

of, 361, 7, 105 3925 403

Neuters, 104; 139 — Dental
Stems, 147, b; — Liquid
Stems, 151—Sigma Stems,
165—Marks of, 105, 35 1253
136—Accent, 340, Obs, 4—
as Adv., 2013 203;
Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 363
—Adj. as Predic., 366,

Nominal Predicate, 361, 4,

etc.

Nominative Dual oxytone,
131, 1—for Voc., 129; 393—
meaning, 392.

Nouns from Verbal Stems,

245.
Numbers, 100, 13 225, 1—
“two” in the Pl., 365.
Numerals, 220, Obs. — with
Art., 374.

Objective Inf. 561 —Genit.,
574, 3 Obs.—Part., 581 ; 361,

95 395-

olgictiv Comps., 359, 3, and

.—Genit., 408, 5, b; 413.

“Opinion to be of,’ Verb,
with Inf., 560, 2; 567.

Optative, 228—Pres., 2 Pers.
Sing. in o@a, 233, D. 1—
Perf. Mid., 289-514 — po-
tential with ay, 517, Obs. 25
552, Obs.—in dep. sent., 524
—Opt. in dep. Sent., §22, etc.
—in indir, Speech, 523—Iin
depend. declar. and interr,
Sent., 528—in Sent. of pur-
pose, 532—in Sent. of fear,
533—1n Condit. Sent., 546,
etc.—in Relat. Sent., 555—
in tempor. Sent., 5565 558—
exp. interest, 430.

Ordinai Numbers, 220 — in
Acc., 405, Obs. 1.

Oxytones, 17—before Enclit.,
93; de

Participles,
Voce. Sing., 148—Perf. Act.,
276, D.—Fem., 188; 277,
D.— Pres. Aor. and Perf.
Mid., 333, 6-10—-with Art.,
379, etc.; 578, Obs. — in
Dat., 435, Obs.— hypoth.
with uy, 533, 618.

Particles, 92, 5 ; 623, etc.

Partitive Genitive, 408, 45
4125 419.

Passive, 483 — with Dative,
434 -— Aor. in Act, verbs
with Mid, meaning, 328, 3.

Perfect, weak, 294, D.; 280,
etc.—strong, 277, etc.—in-
trans, meaning, }30—trana
and intrans, meaning, 329
—use of the 3 502—
Moods, Inf., Part., 5o6—Per-
fects with Pres, meaning,

503.

Period, hypoth. 534—Inter-
posed, 550—Negative, 616.
Perispomes, 21—before En-

clit., 93, b.

Personal Endings, 226—Pro-
noun, 250, etc.; 92, 2—
Meaning, 469—-Genit., 440,4
—for reflec. pron., 471,

a, b—Personal Constr., 571.

Place, Suffix of, 345—Genit.
of, 4123 4153 425—Dat.,
442—Adv. with Genit., 415
—Desig. of, 82, 25 1795 412

Plenty ~~ tk ae of,
414, 2—Ver 18.

Plural, 3 Pers. th. Mid. in
-arat, -aTo, 226, D.; 233, D.,
6—1 Mid. in peoGa, 233, D.
5, 362, etc,

Position, 71, ete.; 193.

Pot with Ase ee
208—wit! 3883 470—
of the reflective, ps8 ce
Poss. ex! Genit., 408, 25

414, I— <>
peers.
etc. ; pF Part, with dy,

595.
Prektcalé, 3603. Mean
Pinoet irc eek ee
without 378, 387.
icative Acc., bak

verbial,
io oe
enit., 451, ete.— —
etce.—Genit. and Acc., -
with three cases, 462, et.—
spurious, 445.

ment of, 246—Stem, 231—
Bs the Verb Stem, 247—

th em
Vowel, 248 —-from Verb

-

i o

ENGLISH INDEX.

855

PRIMITIVE,

Stem with 7, 249—with ¢,
250, etc.

Primitive words, 339.

Principal Conjugations, 230
—first, 231, etc. ; 320, ete.—
second, 302-319 — Declen-
sions, 1r1—first, 112-134—
second, 135.

Proclitics (see Atona).

“ Prohibition,” 518; 5103 499
—Prohibit, Hinder, Deny,
etc.—have the Inf. with ny,

th pi ov,

Proparonytones, 17 — before

Encel., 93, d.
i ,» 21 — before

Encl., 93, a.
Proper Names in -a, 115, D. 2

—"NS> 114—kAjjs, 167—with
Art. 371, Obs.; 375, Obs. ;
Praperty.” Suffix £, 346
“ Property,” of, 346;
343, Obs. :

Quantity, in Crasis, 65—Iin
MonosyL, 142— doubtful,
75, D., I—reversing quant.,
37, D., 2; 161, Obs.

Quantitative Adj. and Adv.,
224—with Art., 374.

Questions, dubious in the
Subj., 511.

Reciprocal Pron., 211.

Keduplication, 53, 10, a—in
the Perf., 273, etc.—in the
2 Aor., 254, d—in Verbs in

J 308.
Reflective Pron., 210—Mean-
g, 471—3rd for ist and
2nd Pers., Obs. c—to denote
possession, 472—for Recipr.,

Crasis, 6;—Compound, 214,
Obs. 2—Hypoth., 554—fol-
lows the Predic. Subst., 367
—used once only, 605.
Relative Sentences, 55;1—with
Fut. Ind, s00—with py,
615, Obs. 2— complication,
mnection, 605,
“ Reference to,” exp. by the

Ace., 404.
Rejection of letters, 61—of a
owel at begin., see Syn-

cope—of a vowel at end,
see Elision
Repetition, exp. the Opt.

547 pn lly Bh Oe 2)
555, Obs. 15 558, Obs. 1.

SUBJUNCTIVE,.
Result of an Act, 343—in the

Acc., 400, a,
Root, 245.

“ Scare,” “Obstruct,” and
other Verbs, with the Inf.
560, 3.

Semivowels, 31.

Sentences, Compound, 519, 3,
5 —Principal, Subordinate,
519, 4—Moods of, 525, etc.

mdit., 5343 549, etc.—
Negat., 616—of Experience
in Aor. Ind., 494—Interr.,
525—of Purpose, 5 30-533—
Negat., 616.

“ Shew,” Verbs of with Part.,
5933 580. ;
Shortening, at the begin.,
74, D.—of the final sylL,
5, D. 2—in the Perf., 285,
.—in the Subj., 228, D.;
233, D. 2—in Rel. Sent.,

597, 3-

“ Should,” exp. in depend.
Sent. by the Subj., 527, 0,
Opt., 528, b.

Sigma, future, 259; 260, etc.
—dAor., 269.

Singular, 3 Pers. in e (v), 68,
4—Accent on Imp. Mid,
268, 2—Accent on 2 Aor,
Imper. Act. and Mid., 333,
II, 12, 362.

“Space,” exp. by the Acc.,

3 's

Spitus, position, 125 22—
with p and pp, 13—Spir.
Asper, 60, b—in Augm.,
235, Obs.—Spir. Lenis, 11.

Stem, 1co—St. Vowel length-
ened, 147, 23 248; 253, Obs.;
261, 279 changed to e, 157.

“ Strive,” “Aim at,” Verbs
with Genit., 419, c—with
Inf., 560, 3.

Subject, 361, 3—Omitted, Obs.
2—with Genit. Abs., 585, a4
—of a Subord. Sent. as
Object of the Principal
Sent., 3973 519, 5—Obs. z—
Subj. of Prin. Sent. in the
Subord. Sent., 602; 519, 5,
Obs. 2.

Subjective Genit., 408, 5, a.

Subjunctive, 228—Shortened,
233, D.23 255, D. 15 302,D.
—of the Perf. Mid., 289—
of verbs in ju, accent, 3og—
Meaning, 508, etc.—similar
to Fut., 5t3—in dep. sent.,
521 — in dep. assert. and
interrog, 527—in sent. of
purpose, §31, 532, Obs.—
express. fear, 533—in condit,
Bent, 545, 554. 555, Obs. 2

WORTH.

—in tempor. sent., 554, 5538,
Pm po! 57,55
Subordination, 519, 3.
Substantive, degrees of, 199,
D.—joined to the Dat., 430,
Obs., 432, Obs.
Suffixes, 340; 178.
Superlatives, Adv., 203—with
Genit., 416, Obs. 2—with «<,
631, a—with ort, 633, 1, b.
iar Seon to the Part., 365

Supplementary Aorist, 270,
etc,

Syllabic Augm., 234—with
initial vowel, 237—omitted,

283.
Syllables of both quantities,
75, Dy 13 77-
Synizesis, 39; 665 243, D., 3.
Syncope, 61, ¢; 257, D.

“Taking part in,” with Ge-
nit., 414, 53 419, a.

Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.—
Augm., 234, b; 235.

Tenses, 225 ; 3 Princip. Tenses,
521—Subord.. 522—Tetse
Stems, 227.

— 32—for Aspirates, 32,

Time, in Acc., 399; b; 405—
in Genit., 426—in Dat. 443
— Adv. of with Genit., 415—
kinds, degrees of, 484, 1, 2.

Transitive and Intrans. Mean-
ing, 329, ete.; 476—Mid.,

477+
“Touch,” and other Verbs
with Genit., 419, 6.

Uncontracted Syll., 35, D., 1.

Verba Contvacta among Itera-
tives, 336, d—V, pura,
impura, 247.

Verbal Predic., 361, 4—Nouns,
225, 5—Stem, 245, etc.—
Pres, Stem, 246 ; 260, 3.

Vocal Stems, 1 Perf., 280,

Vowels, 24, ete.—in divis. of
SylL, 470— before others,
74—long without Augm.,
235—Changes, 40, etc.—in
2 Perf., 278—in derivation,
340, Obs, 3.

Weakening of Conson., 60.

“ When,” exp. by Dat., 443.

“ Whither,” exp. by Acc., 406

« Wish,” exp. in the Opt., 514.
tc,

e
Worth and Price, in the Ge
nit., 408, 6; 421

( 856 )

GREEK INDEX.

. a bec.w, 268 ; 278—bec. o, 268.
a bec. n, 40; 115, 1,¢; 116,d3
2353 270; 268; 2785 303.
a bec. ¢, 37, D. 2; 169, D.;

243, D. 3.

a bec. at, 24, D. 3.

a from ao, aw, See ao.

a after ¢, u, p, 413 115, 1,43
116, C3; 1213 1805 261;
2703 278.

a defore vowels, 235.

a, connecting vowel, 276;
336, D.; 338, D.—in the
3 Plur., 302, 3.

a, characteristic of the First
or Weak Aorist, 268.
privative, 360—in Adj.
with the Genit., 414, Obs. 5.

-a, ending of the Accus., 141;
156; 173, Obs. ; 1815 276.

-a, quantity of, 15 1215
161; 169; 181,

-a, Plur. ending of Neuters,
125, 23 136; 1413 173.

-a, Adverbs in, 202.

-a, Nom. of Substant. in, 172.

7. ge ao in the Genit., 122,
0

aya6és, Comparison, 199, I.

fens Cavdones) 312, 8—
Pass. Depon., 328, 2.

ayavexréw, With the Particip.,

5

PR ay with the Dative, 439,
Obs.—with the Partic., 592.

ayyéAAo.a1, construed person-
ally, 571 —ayyéAAw, with
a 34, 643, 593-

aye Ns +44

eres: 2 Aor., 257, D.—Perf.,
275, I.

&yjoxa, 279.

ayivew, 323, D. 39.

Zyvups, 319, 13—Perf., 275, 2
—Signif. 330, 1.

&yxt, Comparison of, 203, D.—
with the Genit., Ya 5. ;:

Gym, 2 Acr., 257— r. of I

"Aor. 268, D.
adcAdds, Voc. Sing., 129,

axovw.

adixéw, With the Accus., 396—
Signif., 486, Obs,

ae (an). into a, 383 into »,
wa sp ei pct aa, 336, D.

ae. in 3 a, ‘
rape at, 38, Obs. -

adéw, 322, D. 1 -

deco, 327, D. 1

oe Verbs in 353, 6—Fut.

dnb, Gen. Sing., 163.
ant, 313, D. 3.

regard to the Accent, 83,
Obs. 25 108 ; 2293 268, Obs. 1.

al, aide, see et, ie.

aiddouat, aldouat, 301, 1 3 326,
to—Pass. Depon., 328, 2—
with the Accus. 399.

"AiSns, 177, D. 19—éy, els
"Acdov, 411.

aidas, 163.

-aty, in the Dual, 173, 4.

-a.va, Fem. ending, 115, 1 DB.

aivéw, 301, 3.

aivupat, 319, D. 24.

-acve, Verbs in, 353, 7.

aif, of both genders, 140,

aipéw, 327, 1—Perf., 275, D. 1
—Distinct. between Act. and
Mid., 481 b.—Pass, meaning,

-a1s, in the Dat. A, IT9.

aig@dvouat, 322, 1x—with the
Gen., 420—with the Partic.,
591.

aiaxpds, Comparison of, 198. .

aicxvvoua, with Acc., 399—
with Dat., 439, Obs.—with
Partic,, 592—with the Inf.,
594—aioye vw, Perf., 286, D.

aizéw, with double Acc,, 402.

axaxiSw, 319, D. 30.

axéouat, 301, I.

axyKou, 275, 15 280, Obe,

axnxéaro, 287, D.

axovw, Perf, Act, 275, 1—
Perf.
Nom., 329, Obs.—with Gen.,

Mid, 282—with the aperew

199,
adSjoKw, 324, D. oa
— Beads

ade agi) iS, Ke
Pips ct tots eee

140.
dAev, adjpuevar, 325, D. d
geet

GAA#AOLY, etc., 211.
GAAo; 1 Aor., 230, Obs —
_.2 Aor., 316, D, 32.

Ee |

a>

————— nn << el

GREEK INDEX.

857

aptdAdopat.
ee Depon, Pass.

scene, with Genit., 414, _
&morpos, with Genit., 414, 5
auds, éuds, 208, D.

auméxa, 53, de
apTUTXVOUHLAL, 323, 36.

. 29.

audi, 462— without Ana-
strophe, go. »

Gyerévvume, 319, 5—Augm.,
240—with double Acc., 402.

ép.dw, apdorepor, éuhsrepor,
221 — audotépwlev, with
Genit., 415.

av-, affixed to form the Pre-
sent Stem, 322.

dy privative, 360,

ay, see éav.

&v, 639, 3—with particles of
time, 557—in the Apodosis
of Conditional Sentences,
5353 5375 en oe 5425
545—with Aor., 494, Obs. 1
—with ‘Seth, 513 — with
Phe = of geal

1—wit

= gh ee aie wih Inf.,
575, etc.—with Opt., 516;
cae Part., 595—with
tives, 5543 555, Obs. 2.

om. Mas. and Neut.,

ava, a
avd, 461—Apocope, 64, D.—
without Riastropbe, go.
dvapadrAopat, with Inf., 560, 3.
avapiioKopac, 324, I.
avarykatos eit, construed per-
, sonally, 571.
324, 19

touetion with double
Acc., 402.

avat, Voc. Sing., 148, D.

avaévos, With Genit., 414, 4.

avdavw, 322, 23—Augm., 237

svbpdrrodov, Dat. Pl, 175, D.

avéeyvav, errr: Diff. of
Signif., 329, D.

avev, 4455 455,

avexomat, doable Augm., 240
—with hee 590.

avéwya, avévxa, 319, I9-—
Distinction, 279.

airjvodev, 295, D.
Nae 171, I—Genit., 51,

a , Obs. 1.
id! bw, 601.
jvotyw, Augm., 237 — Perf.,
, 275, 25 279.
Sova d double Avgm., 240.
Pia avrTikpv, see

Hac with Genit., 419 0.

’

apxyv.
avti, 45t—without Ana-
strophe, go.
avw, Compar. 204 — with
Genit., 415.

aa Ng 317, D. 11— Plup,,

this" with Genit., 414, 4—
with Inf., 562.

a£idxpews, 184.

ao into a, 37, D 33 122, D. 2.

—into w, 373 122, D. 3. c—-

into ew, AN 3 122, D. 3b;
1325 243, D.

-ao, Genit. Sing., Pe Ohk: etc.,
D. 3 b.

aot, into w, 37.

aou, into cw, 243, Dz. 3B.

amayopopevw, With Part., 590.

aravraw, Fut. Mid. with Act,
meaning, 266.

arapicKe, 324, D. 33.

arretTrov, 327, 12.

amrecpos, with Genit., 414, 3.

amexPavonar, 322, 16.

améxopat, with Genit., as é.

a6, 452—Apocope, 64, D
Compar., 204.

dmo8iSouat, with Genit., 421.

arodidpecKe, ro ‘Acc., 398,

amdepoa, 270, D..

amoAavw, Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning, 266—with Genit.,
419, d.

*AréAAwv, Acc. 191; Voc.,
148, Obs.

age with Double Acc.,

daserpciew, with Genit.,
419, €

arovpas, 316, D. 18.

aropatve, with Part., 593.

aaroxpn, 312, 6.

arrouao, with Genit., 419, b.

“ap, Subst. in, 172.

dpa and Spa Distinction, 99-

gs Ld Apocope, 64, D. ;

dpa, £ “apestion oh, b—in-
irect, 610; ov, dpa
1, 7, dp’ ov, dpa mi),
dpapicxw, 324, D. 34—Perf,,
, 275 Dit.

“Oba apioros, 199, 1, and

apéoxw, 324, 10,

dpnpes, 280, D.

"Apns, 17), 2

~aptov, Neuters in, 347, Obs. 1.

apkéw, Aor., 301, I.

apuottw, 250, Obs.—Fut.,
260, 3.

épvéonat, Depon. Pass,, 328, 2.

apvds, etc., 177, 3.

apvupa, Aor., 319, D. 29.

baa 301, 1—Perf. Pass., 275,

I.

doom, 289. 3

epve, ,t.

epxiv, 405, Obs. 2

Bacrdrevs.
Gpxouar and dpyw, Distinction,
481, b.
apxopna, with Genit., 419, b—
with Inf., 560, 1 —with Part.,
590—with Inf. and Part.

594.

dépxw, with Genit., 423—Diff.
of Pres, and Aor., 498.

eas, Ending of the Acc. PL,
141.

-ds, Fem. in, 138.

-as, Neut. in, 139.

-as, Subst. in, 192.

ene 319, D,— Compar.,
I ;

adgcov, aocorépw, 203, D.

aormjp, Dat. Pl, 153.

dorv, 158—Gend., 139.

-arat, -aTo, 3 Pl. Mid., 226, D.5
233, D. 6; 28, — D.

ardp, aitap, 630,

are, with Part., eh 6.

arep, 455) 5-

arra, | arra, 214.

ad, are, 630, 3.

3 | avgdvw, avéw, 322, 13.

-avs, Fem. in, 172.

abrixa, with Part., 587, 3.

avrés, 200—position with the
Art., 389—with Dat., 441,
Obs.—in the Genit. with
Possess., 474—for the Relat.,
605, Obs.—o avtds, wih
Dat. 436, b.

adatpéouat, with double Acc.,

402.
abdoow, 250, D,
adinut, 313, 1—Augm. 240.
ad’ ob, 5563 bor.
adicow, I Aor., 269, Dz
axapes, compar. 193, D.
GxPo01, 326, 12 — Depon.
Pass., 328, 2—with Part,

592.

axv ues 319, D. 30— Plup.

287, D.

Seule 69, Obs. 33 4453
455, 6; without Elision, 64,
Obs. I—axpr ob, 556.

-aw, Verbs in, 353, 2, and
Obs. 2—lengthening, 243,

D. 3.
-ow, Fut. in, 263 D.

B, inserted between and p,
5, hy 2, and D.; 6 for p,

Babigo, Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning, 26

meaning, 329, 2—of the
Perf., 503.

| Badr, Aor, 316, D, 19—
Perf., 282—Signif., 476, 2.

Bépdieros, 198, D.

RactAeca and 4 Manat 11}.

| BaotAevs, 161, D,

$58

GREEK INDEX.

BaciAsvw.
Bacireiw, with Genit., 423—
Dif. of Pres. and Aor., 498.
BeBpwOw, 324, D. 13.
Betopar, Béopa, 265, D.
Bete, Bin, etc., 316, D, 1.
BeAriov, BéArioTos, 199, I.
Biafouar, Pass. meaning,
483, 3.

Bias, 312, D. 14.

BcBAos, Fem., 124, 5. r

BiBpwoxw, 324, 13 — Aor.,
316, D. 23— Perf. Purt.,
317, D. 16.

Bidw, Aor., 316, 13.

BA, Redup., 274, Ex.

PAdBerot, Hom. oes 249, D.

Brarrw, Aor. Puss. 299 —
with Acc., 396.

BAacrivw, 322, 14.

Anco, etc., 316, 19.

BAcrtw, 250, Obs.

BAdoxw, pe 123

Bode, Mid. vn Act.
Sensing 236.

BoAerar, 366, D. 14.

Boppas, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs.

Book, 326, 13.

Bozpus, Masc., 140.

BovAopar, 326, 4 Augm.,
234, Obs. —2 Sing. Pres.
Mid., 233, 3—Depon. Pass.,

328, 2

poss, 159; 1603 35, Obs —of

two Genders, 140.

Buve, 323, 32.
Bucas, 35, Db. iL

y, Pronunt., 4 — Char. of
Verbs, 251, Obs. — their

Fut., 260, 3—Perf., 279.
yauew, 325, 1.
yavupar, 319, D. 3 31.

yap, 636, OL A ag Re kgs
p, 153—rem.,
oe of Verbal "Stems,
251, Obs.
ye, 641, 1—Affix, ibid.
yeyova, 327, ‘5
véw, adr *
cvopat, SL +» 329,
Suihe. 301, 1—Aor. Pass., 298
— Fut. Mid. with Act.
meaning, 266.

yéAws, 169, D.

yéuw, with Genit., 418.

v-vér@at, yevnrouas, etc, 327,
"4.

y-vre, 316, D. 33.

yepads, Compar., 194.

yevw, with Genit., 419, D.

yntéw, 325, 2.

ypdcKe, 3 og, So 316, 2.

ye into ¢, 585 251.

yeyvomac, 327, 14—Perf., 317,

Sadranee.
2—with Genit.,, 417—with
Dat., 432.

yryvoonw, 324, 14—Aor., 316,
14—Wwith Part, 5

yA, YY, a with, 274, Ex.

youu, 325,

youu, 177, +

your, 641, 2.

ypavs, 159.

ypadoua, > vith Genit., 422.
yosgopas and ypadw, Diff,
481, b.
yor", 177, 5.

b,0708.
, D.—
Shyernes gt 273 3, De

h 153.
éyv, m position, 77, D.
8 inserted betw. » and p, 51, u affix, 218 bi
Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612—Chae | dyrov, dijrovBev, 642, 5.
racter, 251. See Dentals. Mase. in, 348.
Sai, 642, 8. dnca, 326, D. 15.
Sainwv, "of two Genders, 140. 642, 6.
Sacvyr, 319, D. 32—Opt., | & into ¢ 58; 251.

318, D. dd, 448; 458—without Ans-
Saiw, Meaning, 330, D. 9. 8 go—with A
Saxvw, 321, 8. Article, 574, 2, 3.

Saxpvov, 175 - ae 181, D. nn
Sapuap, 147, 1, Ex. ayo, diadeira, Srarcrdw,
Saurynuc, 312, D. a@— Aor, with Part.

Subj. Pass., 293, D. Siacra, 115.

Savei~w, Diff. of Act. and | d:a:réw, with double Augm.,

Mid., 481, b. 240.

SapOavw, 322, 15. dcaxovéw, With double Augm.,
égs, Accent. of Genit. Pl. and ie

Dual, 142, 3. wadéyouar, Depon. Paas.,
Saréouar, 325, D. b—1 Aor.| 2—Redupl, 274, Ex.—with

Inf., 269, D. Dat., 436, a.

-Se, affixed, 94; 2125 216— | duddexros, Fem., 127, 5-

Enclitic, 92, 3—) ocal Suffix, | dad 4

178. Stadépw, 4235
é, b28—s" ovy, 637, 2. Scaopos, 436, =
SéarTo, 269, D. ddacxw, 324, 28, *
déyuar, 312, D., 14, b. 326, D. 40—with double
Sedaov, 324, D. 28; 326,D.40.| Acc, *
SéSeypnar, Sew, etc., 318, D. Snr, 313, 2.

Séd:a, Sé5orcxa, 317, 5, and D. | &iSwyr,
Sei (see S€w), with Acc. and| 476, 2—with Inf., 561.

Inf., 567, ybs, 1—éd5et, if SSpacxw, 324, 2—Aor., 316, 3.
SeiSw, forms Position, 77, D.— | Sieray, etc., 313, D. 4.

Doubling of the 6, 234, D. | &nuar, Sigw, 313, D. 5.
Seixvupr, 318 — with Part. | duxagoua, ng, 481

593. Sixards cipy,
Sciva, Indef. Pronoun, 215. sonally, 571.
Secvos, with Inf, 562. Sixny, free Acc., 404, Obs.
Seipy; 115. Bes, 636, 636, 2.
SevSpov, 175. bum
es Yea Pass., 328, 2.) ‘with Ge Genit., ak Obs. 3.
See 6 txa, 445-
Séov, 586. | Supaw, Cont Se
béras, Dat. PL, ~ 169, D SuoKw, wi
Sépxouat, Depon. °ass., 328, 2 Suds, Phi eelaae ks

—2 Aor, 257,-D.; 59, D.— | Sou, 220, D.

with Acc., 400, c. S0xéw, 325, 3—With Inf., 560, 2
Secuds, Nom. Acc. Pl,

175, D. Soxds, Fem., 127, 5-

irs, Voc. Sing., 121— | ddfav, Acc. Abs., 586.
Acc, Sing., 174, D. Sopu, 177, 6.
Sevoua, 326, D. 15. Souméw, 325, D.c.
Sevraz0s, 199, D. “eon 4 Spapeiv, v ete., 32}
Sevrepos, With Genit., 41 a
bs. 3, | 8ga7ds, 300, D,

GREEK INDEX.

399

Spdw.
Sadw, Aor. Pass., a
Spdcos, Fem., 121, 5.
Svvapat, 312, 9—Augm., 234,
Obs.—Subj., Opt., Accent.,
309—Depon. Pass., 328, 2—
ith Inf., 560, 1.
bus, Compounds with, 360,
Obs.—Augm., 241.
Siw, Sivw, 321, 75 300, 4—
1 Aor. Mid., 268, D.—2 era
316, 16—Meaning, 329, 4.

« for a, 268, D.—bec. a, 2575

2825; 2855 2953; 298.

bec. n, 495 147, 25 1513

161, D.; 233, 43 2353 293.

€ bec. ex, 24, D. 33 425 £47, 15
236; 243, D. B; 270; 293, D.

€ bec. 0, 10552785 ey bs. 3

e for Manoa: 34, D. 43
234, D.

e inserted, 264; 269, D.

rejected, 153; 243, D. B;

257, D.—-in Synizesis, 59, D.

oan with preceding vowel,

I

« affixed to the Stem, 322,
Obs.; 324, Obs.; 325, etc.—
considered as Stem-vowel,

a

43.

« in the Augm., 236; 295.
See Syllabic Augm.

« in Redupl., 275—as Redupl.,
214) 3) 4

€ pamtocting vowel, 233, I,
and D, 3, 6; 2623 336, D.;

4

ea bec, a, 130—bec. », 38.

‘-ea for eva, 185, D—for vy in
Acc. Sing. 185 —in « and
v Stems, 157 —in Diphth.
Stems, 161—bec. y and a,
tbid.—bec. y in the Acc.
PL, thid.—bec. & or 7 in
Fem. of Adj. 183—Ending
of the Plup., 283, D.

€aya, 275, 23 Pi. 13.

eat, bec. 4, 38—bec. ev, thid.,

éav, 639, 2—in Condit. Sent,

pt 5455 548— “ whether,”
te et.

lrietdowe6 2J6

éaga, 319, 13.

-eas bec, -es in Acc. Pl. 159
—from yas, 161, Obs,

farar, etc. 315, D. 2.

éavrov, 210—used as a pos-

33%, 2

elrov,
eyeriyoos, 275.
€yxeAus, 15
do, 8 66 — Eywye,
641, 1 {

ESuevat, 315, D. 33 324, D. 4.

éSouat, Fut. 265. See codiw

ee bec. et, 36—bee. ec and y
243, D. B—bec. n in the
Dual. See ~.

€¢pxaro, 287, D.

sees bec. evs in Nom. PL, 1549 -
bec, exs-and ns, 161, d.

-ey for -eva, 185, D.

éns, 213, D.

édigw, Augm., 236.

ec for ¢, 24, D. 3—for ae 264,
etc.—from ¢, t, See €

e, Redupl, 274, ete.—i the
Plup., 283.

-e. in the Dat. Sing, 1573
161, b—connecting sowel,
233, I—3 Sing. Ind. Act.,
233, 2—2 Sing. Ind. Mid.
233, 3.

ei, 639, t—Atonon, 97, 3—
in Cond. Sent., §35—with
Ind, 536—with Opt., 546,

etc.—for € éav, 545, Obs. 2.

el, ei0e, ei yap, in a Wish, 514

— whether” in Depend.

Interr. Sent., 5255 610.
ei-H, b11—et kev, see éav—
et dpa, 637, I—ei yap, 637,
ei Kai, 640, I—ei py,

639, I.

Ela, Fem. in, 185—Quantity,
117; 341, Obs. 342, Obs.

claro, 315, Ms 2.

eldov, 327, 8.

-evy, Fem. in, 115, D. 2,

elke, éixrov, 314, D. 7.

cixoo(v), 68, 33 220.

eixw, with Genit., 419, ¢

eikav, Genit., 163.

eiAéw, 625, D. d.

eiAyjAovda,: 40, D.3 319,

elAnda, ciAnxa, 274,

eiAoxa, 274, EX.5 pep

elAov, etc, 327; I.

elAw, 253, ey Aor., 270, D,

elpat, 319, D

etwaprat, 214, Ex.

eiui, 315, I—Enclit., 92, 35
315, Obs. 2— with Part.
2875 28953 2915; 5055 59%
Obs. — with Genit. 417 —
with Dat., 432—Accent of
compounds of eipé, 315,
Obs. 3—av, 428, Obs.; 5805
585, b—7@ ovtt, 441.

ar ty 1 — Meaning, 314,

a, 13.

elvexa, see évexa,

etvvoy, 319, D. 5.

etgact, 31, 7.

wELOV; Neuters in, 345, 2.

eirep, 639, I.

z, | etrov, $29, 13—Aor. Imper.
Accent, 333, 12,

| etpyka, 294, EXx.;

Eu.Tretpos.

ep, Subs. in, 172,

etpyvupt, 319, 15.

eipyw, Perf. and Plup., 287, D
—with Genit., 419, e

ior 13.

etpoat, 326, D,

Be 1 Aor. Bese D.—Perf.

and Plup., 275,D 2.

els, 2 Sing. of etai, 92, D,

eis, és, 448; 449 — Atonon,
97, 2—with Inf. and Art,
514, 2—eis 5, 556.

-ecs, Nom, PL, 1575 161, d.

-ecs, Mas. and Fem. in, 192.

~ecs, 2 Sing. Ind. Act., 233, 2.

rers-ecoa-ev, Adj. in, 352, 553
beeen PL, 50, Obs, 15

149.

clea, def. Aor., 269, D

cick, 324, D. 35.

eivopza, etc. 314, D. r

etow, With Genit, 415

elra, with Part., 5e) 4

etre, 9 Leib e™ 11, 627.

elwOa, 275,25 278.

éKx, eé, 69, Obs. 25 4485 453—
with Augm., 238—Atonon
97, 2—with Inf. and Art,
574, 3—unaltered, 45, Obs. ;
47, Ex.—é& of, 556; Sot.

éxas, Compar., 203, D.

éxetvos, 212.

ExEKAETO, 257, D.3 61, D

éxexetpia, 53, 10, 4’

Exxdnorracw, Augm., 239

éxdcitw, with Acc., 398

exAnPavwr, 322, D. 26.

xrAyrropat, with Acc., 399.

éxrés, 324, 6.

éxros, with Genit., 415.

éxav, Genit. Abs, 585 b—
éxav elvat, 579, Obs.

éAdcowv, éAaxicTos, 199, 4
rath, without 7, 626,

éAatvu, 32%, 2—Fut., 263—
Perf., 275, 1—Plup., 289, 1.

—Meaning, 476, 1.

éAéyxw, Perf. Mid, 295, 13
286, Obs,

éAciv, 327, I.

eAcvbepdw, with Genit., 419 ¢.
edAGetv, pnp t P 3 329, 2.
eAnrabaro, 284, D.

éAtoow, 236.

et €Akw, 301, I—Augm.

annie Pith Eek,

éArrigw, W n

€Arw, Perf., 275, ’D. 2—Mean
ing, 30, D. ro.

éAga, 240, D.; 325, D. d.

énavtod, 210—P ‘088.5 472, a.

€uéunkoy, 283, D.

éuew, 301, I.

Eupevan, 315, D. re

€upopa, 274, D.

EuvijpuKa, 275, D. 1.

éurrecpos, With Genit., 414, 3

360

GREEK INDEX.

eurrdews.

Eurdreot with Gentt, 414, 2.
eur, oo6 ey, with Genit., 415.
ev (évd), 448; 436—unaltered
in compounds, 49, Obs. 1
p, 51, Obs. ition
9} “Powith, inf, and Art,
514 4—ev $ 556.
wel 3 Sing , 68, 4.
-ev, Nom. of Neuters, aaa
“ev, 3 Pl. Aor, Pass, 293, D.
vevat, Inf., 276.
évaipw, Augm., 239.
évayridomar, Depon.
328, 2—Augm., 239.
évaytios, With Dat., 436, b.
évaroa, Meaning, 329, D.
evdeqs, With Genit., 414, 2.
évdvw, With double Acc., 402—
Meaning, 329, 4.
éveixat (éveikor), 329, D. 12.

Pass.,

évexa, 4455 4483 445, 8—with | €

Inf. and Art. 574 3-

évérw, pk éviorw, etc,
327, D1

évéprepoy na D. (Defect.)

é jvobev, 275, D. 2.

evqvoxa, 327, 12.

ev, 99.

évintw, 2 Aor. 257, D

évioow, 250, D.

Evvupt, 319, 5.

evoxdéw, double Augm., 240.

€vT0s, with Genit., 415.

evrpéropat, with Genit., 420,

éfeAéyxw, With Part., 593.

apes with Genit., 419, c.
‘év, 586.

243, D. B, C.

Zo, eb, €lo, etc., 205, D.

cot bec. ot, 37.

€otxa, 319, 73 275, 2—con-
strued personally, 571 —
with Part., 590.

éodra, 275, D. 2.

€opya, 327, D. 3.

coprasw, Augm., 237.

€0s, 208,

~€0S, Genit. in, 161, D.

“€0s, ay: in, 352,43 182—for
-ews, 184, D.

eov bec. ov, 37—bec. ev, 37;
D. 13 243, D. B.

éravpicxopat, 324, 24.

eet, 55 eed, ery, éray,
557; 635, 5—in Synizesis,
66—with Aor. Ind., 493—
“whenever,” 558, Oos. I.

érevdy, 5563 635, 6.

retro. with Part., 584, 4.

éxi, 448; 463—with Inf. and
Art., 574; 2 4.

éwxiSo€os, émixaipids ely, COn-
strued ay~eR 571.

emtécacOat, 319,

érOupéew, With Gentt., 420.

érdOnv.
émirapBavona, éridavOdvo~
pat, With Genit., 419, b; 420.
émActrw, With Nie 590.
émipédonar, Depo ruped be
328, 2—with Genit, 420,
ériorapar, 312, 10—Accent,
of Subj. and Opt. 309—
Depon. Pass., 328, 2.
éruoripw, with Genit., 414, 3.
émerpderds eit, construed
personally, 571.
émurpér, with Inf., 560, 1
éxAnro, 312, D,
Eropat, 327 s—Augm, 236.
épase, 178, D.
Epapat, 312, t I.
épaw, Aor, Mid,, 301, D.—with
Genit., 420,
epydgopac, Augm., 236,
aor, BES D. 15.
dhe, 327, 3.
épérow, 250, Obs.—Fut., 260, 3.
épevyopat, 322, D. 40.
épypedara, 287, D.
épicw, with Dat., 436, a.
épinpos, Nom. PL, 175, D.
éprw, nis Augm., 236,
é eppadarat, 284, D.
Sie, 326, ug
éppwya, 2785 319, 24.
éppwpévos, Compar., 196, b,
épon, 115,
pony, 189, D
spyyre, 323, Dd. va
é€pvxw, 2 Aor., 257, D
épva8ax, etc, 314 D.
épiw, Aor., 301, D,
épxarat, etc, 319, D. 15.
Epxopat, 327, 2.
te. 327, 13, and Obs,
pws, 1775 D. 20.
épwrdw, with double Acc., 402.
-es, Nom. of Neuters, 172.
-es, Ending of Nom. PL, 141;
173, 8, 2
€a0iw, 315, ‘D. 3 itd 3 32%4
—with Genit.,
éoxor, 337, D.
éorreropat, 286, 1, Obs.
éoropyy, etc., 327, 5.
éorov, 327, D. 13.
-eooa, Fem. of 189.
éooa, ae 269,
-ecouly Date PL . 24%.D.3
153, D.3 158 D.5 3 165, D.
Eroupat, 274, D
érowr, 199, D. 2.
éore, “until,” 556.
-egrepos, -eotaros, Compar.
Ending, 196.
érriEw, 311, 291.
éori, Accented, 965; 315, ss 2
—éorw ol, ov, etc.,
éoridw, Augm. 236— with
Acc. 400, c—with Genit.,
419, d.
éxxaros, 2003 391.
éow, Compar., 204.—See «iow.

| érdBqy, 298.

Scvvupes
érddny, see Odarre.
erepos, eve Geni, 416, Obs. 3.
pin 123.

evAaBéouat,
328, 2—with Acc., 399.

elves) Meas 183—Compar,
caper 324, 25—with Part.

, 59E-
evpus, Acc. Sing., 1 15, Dz.
“evs, Genit. in, 161, D.; 165, T.
-es, Nom. 341, 1
FAH T5 1375 172
evre, see Gre.
evppaivw, Meaning of the
Aor, Pass., 328, 3.
-evw, Verbs in, 353, 4.

Hayor, 327,
eu ee Bee
exea,

exOpés,

324, ast 236-—

“xo
eee ne Te 1— Diff. of
with
Int. ad 1—with 590
—exwv, § with

Genit., 419, b. wen

, 326, 19.

ew for ao, see ao—in the Attic
Declens., 132, ete—in Con-
tracted Verbs, 3. Ds
Herod.—as one 124

D. 3, b5 133, 13 157.
ew, Genit. Sing., 121, D. 3,5;
177, 11—Verbs in, :
ape 3—Fut., 260, 23
203.

€wOa, 295, D. 2.

Ewper, etc., 312, D. 13.
sewr, Genit. of a-Decl., 178, D
dos (* till”), $565 635, 9.
€ws, Decl. 163.
-ews, Genit., 161, Obs,

Comp. 263.
Sevvvpe, 319%

bad co
+ lee el ee

GREEK INDEX.

36]

)

y for a, 24, D. 1; 115, D. 25
180, D.3 244, on 161, D.;
270, Obs.—See e.

n after o, 180, Ex.—bec. w, 43.

=? IL. Augm., 234, Obs,

‘oc. Sing. 121—in Acc.

or, 157—In the Dual, 158; | 7

166—in the Acc. Sing., 161,
}).; 166—Conn. vowel, 233,
maa of 1 and 3 Pl.

gat
2g Ind, and Subj. Mid,
5 3,4.
and om 66—Diff,

v7] 5 ASS Gje), 611, Obs.

H in indir. questions, 610—
q gh 3 626, a, and Obs,
¥00. H Sore, with Ini.,

i "atest, 607, b—“really?”
eit

3,

ya, as 314.
ere. 324, 3.
7

he

75

aN
, 328, 2—
with Te 439 ters Solr

592.
nous, Fem. 185, D,
yetpa, 270,
ia, $13.
nxigra, 199, 2.
Ke, Raacing: 486, Obs.
nAtkos, Attr. in, 600.
nActov, 323, D. 37.
y jAvOor, se
: phe 33 22 D.t
y v,3 2.
nuév-75é, 624, b, 2.
nut, hv, » 312, 1. <=
iynos, 556; 634,
TLOXOV, 323,
quTAaKov, 324, 23.
nupieoa, 319, 5.
nv, Nom., 172.
v, see éav.
pee 324, 12.

prov, meaning, 529, 329,
7 v, 326, 1
pegs es PL, 161, d.
-ns, Nom, Sing., 1723 174, D.
names {

be
jogo, 199, 2.
NIVXOS, Compar., 195,
wee, 643, 11—yroe- jj,

Frop, Gender, 139.
HrTdonax, with Genit., 423.

pier, 2405 313, I.
X% 279.
Xo 217, D.

nws, 163, D.

6, Pronunt., 7—1n the Perf.,
286, 4—in the Weak Pass.
Stem, 298— Nom. Sing. of
Stems in, 147, Obs. 2—
Affixed to Pres. and 2 Aor.
Stems, 338, D.—bec. a, 307.
—See also Dentals,

Oavetv, 324, 4.

OarTw, 54,€; 298.

Oappéw, with Acc. 399.

@accor, see Taxus.

Oarepov, 65, Obs. 1

Oavuage, with Genit., 417,
Obs.; 422, Obs.

Baynacros 6 dos, etc., 602.

Ged, 115, D, 25 117.

Oérw, E0Aw, 326, 20,

Oguts, 177, D. 21.

-Oe(v), Suffix, 178, 2; 68, D.—
for boy Genit., 205, es

178, D.
Geds, Vor, Sing., 129, D.
@€petos, 350.
Ocpopzat, Fut., 262, D.
Ogu, 248—Fut., 260, 2.
HAvs, as Fem., 185, Obs.
Onv, Enclit., 92, 5; 643, 17.
Onpaw, with Accus., 398.
@ bec. oo, 57.
-%, Loc. Sulf., 178, 1—Ending
of 2 P, Imper., 228; 302, 53
307.

Ocyyave, 322, 24.

Ord, 301, I.

OrnoKw, 324, 4—Perf., 317.3 3
erf. Part., 276, D.—3 Fut.,

291—Signif,, 486, Obs.
Pap ah 65, Obs. 1.
Odpyvpat, 324, D. 15.
Gots, 54,3 145.

Bipaorier, 179,
pacr(v), 179.
~ 301, 2—Aor. Pass., 53,

0, b.
Bibs, t Genit., Pl. and Du., 142, 3.

t, Pronunt., g—Long by Nat.,
83, Obs, 1— Lengthened,
253, Obs— t bec, t, et, ot
40; 278—+ of the Stem bee,

€, 157— Changes, 55; 168;
250, etc. |

ios.

-, Locative Ending, a
pry 212— Neut. in,
1393 17

-, Nom. "Ending in the PL,
134, 9— Dat. Sing., 141;

173, 2.

s Sign of the Opt., 228—Re-
dupl., 308: 327, D.17—Con-
nect. vowel, 348; 351 —
Affixed to the Stem in tlie
Dat. PL, 119; 134, 8.

l, Subscribed, 85, 125. 293, 65;
Obs. 2—Dat. Sing., 134. 33
1693 173, 2.

t, Verbs in the Pres. with,
250, etc.; 322, Obs.—their
Fut., 260, 3; 262.

ta for vo, 348.

-ta, Fem, in, 346, 33 185,
ete.

ta, ifs, if, tp, 220, D. 1.

idowat, Meaning of the Aor
Pass., 328, 4.

iavw, 324, D. 17.

-caw, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2.

ibd sco ),.624, b, —(CImper.}
329, 85 333, 12.

doy, Neut. in, 347, 1, Obs,

tétos, with ram 8. 1—with
Dat., 436, b.

‘pus, 1583 189, 3.

idpiw, Aor. Pass., 298, D.

iSpas, 1 D.

iepds, With Genit., 414, I.

igaver, 322, 14.

iGouat, 326, 21.

cae Verbs in, 353, 5—Fat.

ie? ‘Ghar, of the Opt. 293;
302, 4.

ines 313, 1.

iBus, Superl., 193, D.

ixpevos, 316, D.3 5 323, D. 33.

ixvéopat, ixvodpat, 323, 33-—
I Aor., 268, D.

“UKOs, Adj. in, 351 — will
Genit., 414, 6.

iAdoKouat, 3% 5—Impe,

, 31% D. 15.

iAews, 184.

inéoew, 250, D.

-wv, Subs. in, 172 —-w, Du
Ending in Genit. and Dat.,
134, 63 173, 4.

tva, 638, ote Sentences v1

-tvos, Adj. fies 352, 3, 4, Obs.

-vo, Genit. Ending, 128, D.

-cov, Neut. in, 349, I.

-vos, Adj. in, 350.

tov, 323, D. 33.

ipés, 35, D. x

-us, Nom. of Fem. in, 138; 172
ee bs in Acc, Sing.
15

toxe, 324, D. 36.

-toKos, -coxn, Subs. in, 347,

tvos, Compar., 195 —with Bat.
436, b,

GREEK INDEX.

“orepos, -toratos, Compar.,,

197.

tomy Perf. 317, 4—Meaning,
329, 1—of the Perf., 503.

icxtw, Diff. of Pres. and Aor.,

498.
ixévs, Dat. Sing. 158, D.—
Acc. PL, 158—Masc., 140.
ixwp, Ace, Sing., 175, D.
«wy, Nom, of Masc, in, 348,

-wwv, ~caros, Compar., 198,

x, in ov«, 69, Obs. r—New-
lon. for 7, 216, D.—Asp. in
the Perf. 279.—See also
Gutturals.,

«a, 1 Aor. in, 310.

xaSedovpar, 326, 21.

«abevdu, 326, 18—Augm., 240.

xaOynpuat, 315, 2—Augm., 240.

«aig, Fut. etc, 326, 21—

ugm., 240.
nai, 624, b—Crasis, 65 — with
Numbers, 222—with Part.,
587, 5—kal ds, kat Tov, 369,
2—xat &¢, 624, 3—Kai-Kxat,
624, & 3—Kai oh Kai, 624, 4
—«xai ei, 640, 2—Kai tore
57, 642, 4, a
caivupar, 339, D. 33.
xairep, With Part., 584, 5.
xairot, 630, 6; 94.
xaiw, 35, Obs.; 253, Obs —
Fut., 260, 2—1 Aor., 269, D.
_kaxdv A€yw, KakOs Trovéw, With

«adds, Compar., 199, 6.

kdpvw, 321, 9— Perf, 282—
with Acc, 400, b—with
Part., 590.

Kaveov, Kavovuv, I3f, 3.

«apa, 177, D. 22.

ee with cytes 590. é

xara, 3 459—Apocope, 64,
D. Lag As inf. and Art.
574, 2.

katarAntropa, With Acc.

399-
Katnyopéw, Augm., 239
xatTw, Compar., 204,
xetas, etc., 269, D.
Keipat, 314, 2.
KELVOS, SCE Execvos.
xetpw, Fut., 262, D.
xéxacpuat, 320, DV. 33.
xéxAnwat, Meaning, 503.
xeéxTypat, 274, Ex.—M
289—Meaning, 503.
xedadéw, 325, D. ¢
xedetw, Perf., 288.
KéAAw, Fut., 266, Ex.
xéAouat, Aor., 257, D.
«e). 68, D.—Enclit., 92, §.—

av.
«evréw, 325, D.f.

Kuvew,
Kepdvvyps, 319, 1—Sub. Mid,
312, D, 16,

kepdaivw, Aor. 270, Obs.—
Pert, 322, Oks,

xéaxeto, 337, D.

xijau, ete., 269, D.

xydu, 326, D. 41.

«npvé, 83, Obs. 15 145.

KUuCAHT KM, sag 31.

kivupat, 319, D. 34.

kipyvywt, 312, D. bd.

KUXaver, 321, 18.

Knut, 313, D. 65 322, 18.

rexpnt, 312, 7.

xwwv, ete., 319, D. +t

KAdfw, 251, Obs.—Meaning of
the Perf. Act., 276, D.

KAaiw, 253, Obs.; 326, 22—
Fut., 260, 2,

KAdw, 301, I.

x) eis, Acc, 156.

kAciw, KAjw, Perf. Mid., 288.

xAérrns, Compar., 197.

xAérrw, Perf., 279—Aor. Pass.,
2

5.
nde, Proper Names in, 1673

174.

xAivw, Perf. 232.

kAvw, Aor., 316, D, 27.

kvaw, Contr., 244, 2.

xvicon, 115, D. 2.

Kowvds, Kowwwvew, With Genit.,
414 1; 419, a—with Dat,
430, a, b.

Kolos, Kécos. etc., 216, D.

coAaxedw, With Acc., 396.

xé77w and compounds, Mean-
ing, 476, 2.

Kopévvupe, 319, 6.

Kopéw, Aor, 301, D.

Kopy, KOppy, 115.

kopvocw, 250, D, — Perf,
286, D.

-x6s, Adj. in, 351.

xoréw, Aor. 301%, D, — Perf.
Part., 277, D.

xpatw, 251—Perf., 317, 8.

xparéw, With Genit., 423.

Kparés, etc., see Kapa.

Kparus, Positive, 199, D. 1.

Kpetoowr, iToTOs, I I,
Obs. 3 ae

Kpendvvume, Kpénapat, 319, 25
312, 12—Acc. of Sub, and

‘o0ds, | xpovw, Perf. Mid., 288.

kpUmTw, With double Acc., 402.
xtetvw, Aor., 316, 4.

xrivvupt, 319, 17.

xtuTéw, 325, D. g.

xviokw, 324, 21.

xuxewv, Acc, Sing., 171, D,
xvAiw, Perf. Mid, 288.

kuvéw, 323, 34.

Maxpdv,
xvvrepos, 199, D. au
xupé ’ Kv, » 325, baad
O62, Ex.—-with Parks en
Kioa, kiooa, 323, D. 34.
kiwv, 177,

«wAvw, With Inf., 560, 3.
A doubled after

Position, 77, f, and i

A, v, p, Monos. Stems in, Perf.
282—Aor. Pass., Bs
Aayxavw, 322, 2 t.

and Acc., in Ole
Aayiws, 174.
Ad@pa, with Genit., 415.
AdAos, Compar., 197.
sBaver, 322, 25—Perf, 274,
—with Genit., 419, b—
Mean.,
Adupouat, 322, D. 25.
AavOavw, 322, 26—with Acc.
398—with Part., 590.
Aas, 17), 9-
Adoxw, 324, 29, and Obs.
Aéyouat, constr,

571.
Aéyw (collect), Perf. 2
2 Aor. M., ea D. 35. a

, g

-Aos, Adj. in, 352,
Aovw, ace 244,4—1 Aor.

Avrovpat, With Dat., 439, Obs.

Avw, 301, 2—Perf. rete Mid.
289, D.—Aor., 316, D, 28—
with Genit., 419, e.

Awtwy, AGaTos, 199, I

a tel 9 56 Se

16.
-~pa, Nom. of Neuters, 343, 1
139.
puxparv, 405, Obs. 2,

GREEK INDEX.

pode.

pada, paddAov, padtora, 202—

padvora 83). 642, a.
pay, see piv.
uavéavw, 322, 28—with Part.,
pate of both Genders, 140.
Bdpvawat, imper,, 312, D. d.
MapTupéw, 325, 5.
Maprus, 177, 10. 98, D

TTIW, LYKLTTOS, T
pe yas Obs. — Fut.

200, 3.
ndorté, 177, D, 23. Sh be
Omar, wax éonat, r
we D. nerith Dat., 436, a.
néyas, 191—Compar, 198~
peéya, 401.
pedouat, 326, D. 42.
pedvoKw, 324, 22.
petipowat, Pert. 274, D.
Mets, x1 D. dD. a

pelwv, — petov
without ¢. » 626, ¢;4

peédas, 186.
pwede, 326, 24—with Genit.,

420
néddw, 326, 25—Augm., 234,
—as Fut., 50l1—7as, ti
ov pédAAw, 501, Obs, 2.
péparoy, etc., 319, D. 9.
penBAetru, etc., 326, D. 24.
pweuPdAwka, 51, D.; 282, D.;
324, D. 12.
MepeTuLevos, 313, D. 1.
eprnuat, 274, Ex.—Sub. Opt.,
D.— meaning, 503 —
with Part., 591.
mév, COMP. nv—pev- Sé, 628
—pév ody, 637, 2
-pev, I Pers. Dual and Pl, Act.
226.

-pevat, sev, Inf, Act. 233,

, D. 35 255, D.—Aor. Pass.,
293, D.—in Verbs in ps
302, D,

pevTou, 630, 5.

pwévw, 326, 26.

peonuBpia, 51, Obs. 2.

»éxos, Compar, 195—mean-
ing, 301.

neorde, with Genit., 414, 2.

MeTa, 4485 “ypeartee

wer ily ET aver,
with oats Y rhewaee

perapédonar, Dep. Pass, 328, 2
rab Part., 592.

werat, 4455 4435 455, I—

Part

with » 58, 2.

peTamre i
483.3 indir. Mid, 47.

pts péroxos, With Geait,
Apts, 05, Obs 31. 4453
& Ss);
Bis 455. 63 pa tt A ee
ision, 64, Obs. 1

py, Synizes' 66—_Neg. 612,
etc.—in sentences of pur-
pose, 530—with Verbs of
prohibiting, 518; 510—with

véaros.

Verbs of fearing, 5123 533;
616, Obs. 3 — with Fut.
and Perf, Ind., 533, Obs.—
with Hypoth. Partic., 58;—
in questions, 608—* whether
aig 610— py ov,

pats 5125 533 —ph Ort,

622, 4.

pnfdeis, ym, etc., see ovdeis,
ovr, etc.

LyKdowat, 325, D.o

pay, 643, 12.

MyTyPs 150, 153.

hy : Pers, Sing. Act., 226;
302, 1—Subj., 233, D. 1 p
255, D.

piyvupy, 319, 18.

MuKpos, Compar., 199, 3.

preouae, Sf Ges 328, 4—

witb Acc., 398.

MumryiTKw, 274, Ex.; $ 324, 6—
pumvicKo.at, Wilh Genit.,
420.

piv, 205, D.

Mis, Ace, Sing., 163, D.;

114 D.
were: 327, 7—Aor. Mid. 316,

376
py, in divis, of SylL, 72, 1.
ava, Genit. Sing., 116, ¢.
BVM, with Genit., 414, 3.
Hodotpat, 324, 12.

fOvov ov, ovxi, 622, 5.

povoayos, comp. 197.

“0S; tes: ere 342, 2—Adj.
in, 352, O!

pig, 326, a.

puKdowat, 325, D. p

pus, Masc., 140,

v, before o (and ¢) dropped,
493 147,15 149; 187—bef.
other Conson., 51—bec. y,
51; 282—VPres, Stems in,
253— dropped in Perf.
Stems, 282; 286, 1, Obs.—
inserted in 1 Aor. Pass.,
298, D.—affixed to Verb.-
Stem, 321—doubled after
the Syll. Augm., 234, D.—
doubled in the Pres. Stem,
318, 3—moveable, 68.

-v, in the Ace. Sing., 134, 43
1415 355 etc.3 173, 3—in
Neuters, 125—1 Pers. Sing.
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226—
3 Pl. in Hist, Tenses, 226;
302, D.

-va, affixed to Verb.-Stems,
312, D.

-vat, Inf., 302, 63 333, 1.

vat, 643, 14.

vaverow, Contr., 243, D, 1.

vavs, 17), 11.

vd, v0, vr, dropped before oa,
50—147, 15 1

“ve, xed ‘to Verb. -Stems,
323.
véatos, 200,

oixade,

véuw, 326, 28.

véw, 248—F ut, 260, 2.

vy, 643, 15.

vigw, 251, Obs,

vikdw "“Oddvumia, 400 ¢—
mean., 486, Obs,

vo, 205, 'D.

amo-, dta-, év-, mpo- voeouat,
Dep. Pass., 328, 2.

vouicw, with Genit, 41y—
with Inf., 569.

-vos, Adj in, 352, Obs.

vooéw, Diff. of Pres. and Aor.,
498.

vogos, Fem., 127, §.

-v7., 3 Pl. of Princ Tenses
Act., 226.

-vtwv, 3 Pl..Imper. Act., 228.

-vu affixed to Verb. Stems,
304, 25 318, 1,

vida, Voc, Sing. 114, D. 3.

vu(v), 68, D.—Encl., 92, 5—
Diff. of wiv and vuv, 993
637, 3—vbv i, 642,46

vwirepos, 208,

&, 343 485 260.

-€, ine oe Fem. in, 192.
féw, 301, 1.

eng: 325,

évw, Perf. Mia, 288,

o, bec. ov, 4D 3 ; + 147, 1.

- o, 24, D Ce a
495 147,25 1513 1933 233,4

—bee. €, 243, D. c—dropped
after ar, 194—for a, 268, D.
354 — Conn. Vowel, 178,
233,15 354

-o, Genit. nding, 122, Obs.;
128; 131, D.

6, for os, 213, D.—Neut. for
ort, 633, I—Crasis, 65.

6 peév-o Sé, 369, i—rov Kal Tév

369,2. See rd,
oa bec. w, 37—bec, a, 183.
ode, 2123 475. See also

Demonst. Pron.
ddvperGat, With Acc, 400, ¢.
odwda, 275, D. 1.
oe bec. ov, 37.
oe bec, o« Or ov, 373 243, Obs,
-oevdys, Adj. in, 359, 2, Obs.
6G, 326, 29—Perf. 295, D. 1.
on bec, w, 37.
661, 7601, 760, 214, D
b0ovvexa, 636, 3.
ot from 1, 4o—bec. @, 235.
-ot, dropped, 64, D.—Short ir
regard to Acc., 83, Obs, 2
108—Voce. ending, 163.
OlyvuUML, 319, 19.
olda, 317, 6—with Part., 591.
oiddvw, otdéw, 322, 19.
Oidirrous, 174, D.
-ovn, ending for -ora, 115, I). 2
-ouv, Genit. and Dat. Iual
128, D.; 141, D.
oixade, 94; 178.

364

GREEK INDEX,

oixetos.
oixeios, with ve 414, I—
with Dat., 436, 0.
OixOL, 17

ae cis 198.

ones ey oot Obs.—Fut, 260, 3
ean. of Fut. Mid., 266.
ow, ending of Genit. and Dat.
Dual, 140; 173, 4.

oivoxoew, Augm., 237, D.

ovo, in the Genit., 128, D.—
2 Pers. Sing. ‘Opt. Mid.,
233, 5.

oto, 213, D.

ovopmat, Stouat, 326, 30—2 Pers.
Sing. Pres., 233, 3—Dep.
Pass., 328, 2.

otos, Attr. and Article, 60oo—
with Inf., 60z—oldsTe, 94—
oiov, ole 6%, with Part.

ols, in

oice, 268, D.—oicet, 327, 12.

-oc(v), Dat. Pl, 128, D.

oicw, etc., 32) 12.

oixouat, oixvew, 326, 31, and
> —Meaning, 486, Obs.—
with Part., 590.

dAEKw, 319, D. 20.

OALYOS, Compar., 199, 4.

OArywpéw, With Genit,, 420.

oAcoOdvw, 322, 20.

GAAumt, 319, 20— Mean. of

Perf., 329, 9; 503—Lterative,

Ouvupt, 319, 21—with the
Acc., 399.
6.0105, mesingee ORs sg sey
ouod, etc, wi t. 436,
a, b,c.
éorar, constr. person-
_ ally, 571.

ue 5.

-ov, Nom. of Neuters, 172.

Gvetpos, 175.

évivnut, 312, 2—Acc. of Aor.
Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309—
with Accus., 396.

bvouat, 314, D.

dtivew, Perf. Mid., 286, Obs.

oo bec. ov, 363 130.

-oos, Adj. in, 133.

dov, 213, D.

omnvixa, 634, 3.

éz.cGev, With Genit., 415.

Ordre, O7dTay, §56; 634, I—
“as often ax,” 558, Obs. I.

étwra, 275, D. 1.

dws, 632, 3—in sentences of
purpose, 530— with ay,
ta b., Obs.— with Fut.

Ind., 500; 553—in Chal-

Jeages and Warnings, 553,

ovf.
Obs.—Srws 2}, With Verbs
of Fearing, 533, Obs.
épam, 327,8—Double Augm.,
239—Perf., 327,83 275, D.1
—with Part., 591.
dpyaive, Aor., 270, Obs.
opeyvume, 319, D. 36.
dpéyonat, with Genit., 419, ¢.
dpéovto, 320, D. 37.
opus, 1'77, 12—Acc. Sing., 156,
dpvume, 319, D. 37—2 Aor.
Mid., 31 "D. 38.
Spovrat, 327, D. 8.
dpdw, 243, D. 3.4.
dpceo, 268, D.

; dpirow, Perf., 295, I.

Spwpu, 320, D. 37.

-os, Neuters in, 243, 2, and
Obs. ; 139; 172--Ending of
Sontt., 1415 154, D.; 173,

i

ds, Relative, 213—Demonst.,
212, D; 213, Obs. and D.—
for the Possessive of 1 and 2
Pers., 471, Obs, c.; 208, D.

bos, Attr., 600—dc0v, 601—
dcor ov, 622, 5.

bocarios, 216, D.

bace, 177, D. 25.

boris, 94—214, Obs. 2—Seris
and éo7ts ovy, meaning, 600,

bodpaivoxat, 322, 21, and Obs.

ore, Grav, 556; 634, I—with
Aor. Ind., 493—*as often
as,” 558, Obs. 1.

Src and 6 71, 214, Obs, 2.

67, 633, I—without Elision,

Obs. 1—in Dependent

Declarative Sentences, 525
ir 2%, 633, 1, 0.

orin, 218,

ores, 214, D.

ov from o,—See o.

-ov,; Genit. ending, : 122, 23128;
134, 2—Conn. Vowel, 2331
—2 Pers. Sing. Imper. and
Imperf. Mid. 233, 5.

ov, dK, ox, 69, Obs. 13 52, D.
—aAtonous, 97, 43 612, etc.
—with Pro Tibitives, 499
Obs.—in questions, 608—ov
yap, ob yap adAd, 636, 6, d.
—ov dq7a, 642, 6—ovx apa,

“5. I—ov 7, 620-08 pn
me GAAG, 622, 6—ov

é, etc, meaning, 471,

obte 3 cos, I.

ovbdeis, 221—Attr., 602—ovdéy,
622, 1.

ouKéery 622, 2.

— Nea ovxour, Diff. 995

Pri eal 319, D. 20
ovy, 637, 2—Affixed, ay
-ovv, Acc. Sing., 1€3. D.
ovvexa, 636, 5

ovg, 65, D,

wax,
ovmrw, 622, 2.
ee i fe
. nm, 183
Nom, of Subs., SB a
ods, 17) 135 142, 3 — Neut.

140.
obra, Aor,, 316, 20, D.

ovror, 643, TO,
obros, 2123 475;—1n address-

Beeches oiac 32.
dhéAAw, I Aor., 270, D,
bs egenr 322, 22.
odpa, 5363 635, 10.—See tra.
oppus, A cc, PL, 158.
dxos, Pl. 174, D.
dxwxa, 327, D. 6.
dybros, Comp. 195.

24 ‘
263, D.—Verbs in, 353, 1
and Obs. 1.

7", — 214, D. (62, D.)—

rerraraole) 68, 3.

sprees ee

198, D.
alent, 327, 9—Perf. 317 D

~

GREEK INDEX.

maréopat.

oer nagr + 325, Je

warnp, 153.

ravonat, Aor, 298 — with
Genit., 419, e— with Part.
mean., 590.

reiOw, ‘Aor. 257, D.—Perf.,
317, D. 15—Fut. and Aor.
Part., 326, D. 43—meaning,
330,33 503.

Tewde, Contr., 244, 2.

be age 32%, 9-

‘w, 1 Aor. Imper., 268, D.

Trémpaya and
330.

méxpwrat, 285, D.

wénrapat, 274, Ex,

TEnTWKA, 274, Ex. 5 327, 15.

néwwKa, 327, 10.

mérwy, Compar., 196, a,

wép, 641, eee 92, 5—

Affix, 2
~~ with er aenit 415—Com-

x pio, 38 cae. 257, D.; 59, D.

wets i ae ei
Te, . 10U

fe Ope 1—Anastr.,
446— Adverb, ibid. —with

Augm,, 238.
PadAoper, with double
mepieyu, with

ity 4235
répoyet, Part. 312, D. &
repuat(v), 68, 3.
receiv, 327, 15.
réoow, “tc Obs.
nerdvvupe, 3 19, 3
Merews, Genit. Sing, 131, D.
wéeropat, 326, 34—2 Aor., 61,¢;

t.,

319, 23—2 Aor.
e506 D. 39—Meaning,
yviea, with Genit., 415.
nyxus, Masc, 140; 154.
mregéw, muegw, 325, D. h.

mit, 316, ye
rikvapat, Aor. 312, D. f.

er a 312, 3—with east;
4

ripmpnut, 312, 4.

wivw, 321, 4; 327, 1o—Fut.,

265—Aor., 321, 43 316, 15—

Meaning, 329, 7— with

Genit., 419, d, and Obs.—
riopar, 265 5 32%, 10,
FiTrioKw, 324, 20.

TpatTw.

mimpacKe, 324, 7.

aes be 15—Perf. Part.,
(317 D. 1.

mioupes, 220, D. 4.

TiTVvew, 323, 35.

nity, 312, D. g.

mupavoKw, 324, D. 32.

miwy, Compar., 196, a.

mAdgw, 251, Obs.

TrAdcow, 25% Obs. — vias

260, 3»

trelwv, mrelarosy. 199,
mAéov, Withont 7, 626, Obs.
—raedv, 199, D. 5.

TAékw, Aor. 295.

mAéw, 248—Fut. 260, 25 264
—Perf. Mid., 288.

mAdws, 184— with Genit.,

414, 2.
"| hse, 312, 3—with Genit.,
18,

TAY, 4455 455, 9-

TAnpys, TAnpdw, With Genit.,
414, 25 418,

mAnotov, Compar. 195—Wwith
Genit., 415.

wAjoow, 2 Aor. and Fut. Pass.,

295.
TAjTO, 316, D. 22.
-rAovs, in Multiplicat., 223.
mAovctos, With Genit., 414, 2.
tAvvw, Perf. 282.
TAa@w, Aor, 316, D. 24.
8—Fut., 260, 25 264

Tvew,
—Perf., 285, D. —with’ Acc.
400, ¢.

Tvvé, 177, 14.

ar0d6s, SCe Trovs.

mobev, Encl., 92, 4.

7r08éw, 301, 4.

00, see wov.

rol, Encl., 92, 4.

moro and todopat, 480—
with Genit., 417.

méAus, 159, D.—Gender, 138, b
Compos., 189, 3.

moAuTevw and rodcrevou.at,

480, Obs.

moAAdx«(s), 69, Obs. 3; 224.

modus, I91—Compar,, 199, §
—rodv, 404, Obs.—rr0AAg,
with Comp., 440.

trovéw, 301, 4.

mwéppw, with Genit., 415.

Hoceday, Acc. Sing, 11—
Voc., 148, Obs.

rroré, Encl., 92, 4.

morepov 4, 611—in depend.
interr. sentences, 525.

Trott, see mpds.

ov, Encl., 92, 4—with Genit.,

415.
Tovdvs, Fem., 185, D,
trovs, Dan. Phy a, bs if: I, a
65 141, D.
Din sestthy 160—
Minds 140,
fos, 19K.

te 770, meaning, 476. 1—

c

mpatrouat, With double
Acc., 402,

mpéaBus, 177, 15+

HpynOw, 312, 4.

Tpiouar, 2 Aor, 316, 8—
Accent. of Aor. Sub. Opt.,

309.

mptv, 556; 635, 1r—with Inf,
565, and Obs. 1, 2.

mpi, Perf. Mid., 288.

™po, 448; B; 454—Crasis, 65—
with Augm., in Compos.,
238—with Inf. and Art.,
574 3—zpd Tov, 369, 3.

ae ap mport), 448, IFT.;
467—Adv., 446—with Int
and Art., 514 2 4

mposOev, mpoow, ‘with Genit.,

415.
mposijKov, 586.
mpdswrov, Nom. Acc.
195, D.
TPOTEPOS, TPMTOS, 200.
mpovpyov, Compar., 195.
mpwtos, Compar., 195.
mmoow, 316, D. 21.
mrigow, 250, Obs. — Fut,
260, 3.
TTbW, (30%, I.
m™Twx6s, Compar., 197.
TruécGat, 322, he
Tukv6s, 177), 14.
mUparos, 190, D. (Defect.).
muvOdvomat, 322, 29— with
Genit., 420.
mp, 142, b; 1513 195—Neut.,

PL,

140.

To, meas), Encl., 92, 4.

TOS, with Gentt, 415—1es
yap ov, 636, 6, d.

p, doubled, 62 — after the
Augm., 234—after Redupl.,
214, 4—Metathesis, 59—in
2 Aor., 257, D—p, p Pps 13.

pd, Encl., 92, 5.—See dpa.

papsos, Fem., 12%, §.

pgdvos, Compar., I » 7

paivw, Plup, 287,

peso, 327, 3.

PEpuTr@pevos, 274, D.

pew, 2483; 326, 35—Fut, 260, 2.

PHYyvypt, 319, 24 5 278—meau-
ing, 330, 5.

pnPycopat, oe 327, 13.

pryéo, 325, D.

plyrov, 199, he

prydur, Contr., 244, 3.

purréw, pirrw, ry 8.

piobat, etc., 314,

pdvvupe, 319, 10,

oa, 23 33, ¢.—effect on pre-
ceding Vow. and Cons., 46,
etc,; 260, etc.; 286— Com-
bin., 48—Assim. to p, 50,b
—to Ay My Vy py 270, D.—bee.
Spir. oa © 60, bs 3085 327
5 Obs.—irom 7, see 7.

366

GREEK INDEX.

o, dropped, 61, a, b—in Sigma
Stems, 166—in Pres. Stems,
233, 3 4+ 5—in the Fut.,
262, Obs., etc.—in the 1
Aor, 268; 269, D.; 270—
*‘n the 2 Aor, Mid., 3o7—in
the Perf. and Plup. Mid,
284, D.

@ iuserted in the Perf., 288—
in the Weak Pass. Stem,
298—in the Verb. Adj., 300
in deriv, 340, Obs. 2—in
Compos., 358, 2.

go, doubled in the Dat. Pl,
158, D.—in the Fut., 261, D.
in the 1 Aor., 269, D.—atter
Syl. Augm., 234, D.

s, dropped, 69, Obs. 3 — in
Compar., 204.

s, ending of Nom. Sing. 173, 13
E13; 122,13 134,15 1415
1453 147 15 1555 160—
wanting, 122, D.15 147,25
1513 163.

s, ending of Dat. PL, 119;
134, 8—of Acc. PL. 134, 105
173, 7—of 2 Pers. Sing. in

ist. Tenses Act. 226—
Nom. of Fem., 348; 349
Obs.

-oa, Fem, ending, 187.

gadrigw, 251, Obs.

-cay, 3 Pl.in Ayame 302, 9.

Laprydav, 174, VD.

oBevvupe, 319, 12 Aor., 316,
9; 318, 5—meaning, 329, 5.

-#, Local Suffix, 178.

ceavrTov, 210—Poss., 472, a.

céBomat Dep. Pass., 328, 2.

-ceiw, Verbs in, 353, Obs, 2.

oeiw, Perf. Mid., 238.

cevw, 248, D.—1 Aor., 269, D.
—Perf. Mid., Aa then D, 285, D.
—2 Aor., 316,

ow, meaning of Port, 330, 6.

* ons, Genit., PL and Du., 142, 3.
o@, after Cons., 61, a; 286, 2.

6a, in the 2 Pers, Sing. Su
and Opt., 233, D. 13 255,
D. 1—Ind. 302, D.—in the
1 Pers. Plur, Pres. Mid,
233, D. 5.

oe, 2 Pers, PL, Imper. Mid..

228.

-ofov, 1 Pers. Du. Pres. Mid.,
233, D. 5 —3 Pers. Du.
Imperf., 233, D. 7—2 Pers.
Ibu. Imper. Mid., 228.

-790, -cOwv, -cAwoav, 3 Pers.
Sing. Du. PL Imper. Mid.,
228.

-o., 2 Pers. Sing. of Princ.
Tenses Act., 226; 302, 2.
-o(v), Dat. PL, 68, 15 119;
134.8; 141; 160; 173, 6—

3 Pers. Sing. Pres. Subj.
233, D. 13 255, D. 1—
ending, 179; 63, 2—3 Pers.
PL and Sing, 68, 5.

oe.
-o1a, -o1s, Fem. in, 342, 1.
is os Diff. of Pres. aud Aor.,
meaning of Fut. Mid,

inca Adj. in, 352, Obs.

st meaning of Fut, Mid,
2
ox, in forming Inchoatives,

324—Iteratives, 334, D., etc,

oxedavvupt, 319, 4.

oxédAAw, Aor, 316, 1oO—mean-
ing, 329, 6.

ondvnpt, 312, D. he 319, 4

cKoréw and domar, 480.

oxKéros, 174.

SKvAAn, 115, D. 2.

orp, 176.

cudw, Contr, 244, 2.

-co, 2 Pers. Sing. Imper. Mid.
228.

ord, 301, 1—Perf. Mid., 288.

oréviw, Fut., 260, 1—
Mid, 286, Obs.

oréos, 166, D.

aorécbat, etc., 327, 5.

orevdw, With Inf., 560, 3.

orovddgw, meaning of Fut,
Mid., 266,

oo, 573 250.

-cow, Verbs in, 250—Fut,

ar =
“OTA,

orevatn 251, Obs. — Fut,

orev Masc., 124, 2.
, With Dat., 439, i

prepbons 324, 26—
Genit., 410.

orf, 251, bs.—Fut., 260, 3.

orod, 115 (Ex.).

oropevvupite ao 8.

orépvy 319, 2

oT0xa ope eith Genit.,
419,

oT 5 hi Perf., 285—meaning
of Aor. Pass., 328, 3.

OTPOVYUILL, 319, 11.

orvyéw, 325, D. ke

een Constr. personally,

Aes ovv¢ sw, with Dat,

pos, bef. ¢
tributives, 223.

-ovyn, Fem., 346, 2.

ag pou, With Part, sor,

cvvevupos, with Dat. 436, b.
~ At b—of two

Loc. ogarhouas, with Gent, 419,

oHé, 205, D. +472, 6

—7c$0s, 208,

odyt, Mase. t
pt i
oxés, Cte, 316, 15 329, 6

Ta vyMats 319,
“Oo 2 212—7Hv taxlammy, 405,

Perf, | raxvs, Conigir. Oaocwv, $4, 0;

1
Boe Pers. Pl. ree 226 —

ree 624, 2, and
L

Teiv, 298,
— Perf, 282—1 Aor. Pass.

TELve, 32, 10.
Téo, Ted, Tew, etc. 214, D.

TéTaxa, 282.
rérAnka, 317, D, 10,
Tétpov, 257,
TeTpaiver, Aors 270, Obs.
térpnxa, 277, D.
TeTUKELY, 322, D. 30.
"hs" D. 322, 30— Perf. Mid,

—-a ye

GREEK INDEX.

Th
3 Pers. Sing. Act. in the
Princip. Tenses, 226.
n; ae ? 404, Obs.—rt yap;

d—ri 5y ; 642, 4,4

at Syrov ; 42, 5— 7
Sijra ; 642,6—ri poder 5 Ti
mabuyv ; 606, Obs. 2—ri jv;
643, 12.

rin, 218.

riba Aor. Pass., 53, 0.

UKTW, 249.
nude, with Genit., 421.

TYyLwpdop.at and -éw, 481, b—
_~éomat, with Acc., 396.

rivupt, Ad D. 35.

tive, 321,%

rine, 61, D.

Tipuvs, 50, b, Obs. 2.

-ris, Nom, Fem., 341, 23 342, 1.

ts, rt, 214—for dsris,

tis, ri, 214—Encl., 92, 1—rwva,
to be supplied, 5

TiTpaw, 327, 16.

TITPwTKYW, 324, 16.

qTiTvcKomat, 322, D. 305 324,

. 37).
rhjvar, etc, 316, 6.

Tuyo, 321, D. 10.
70, 319, Obs. ; 1043 559, b—
pee, To 8é, 369, Obs.—rd
mpiv, 635, It,

760, TdDEV, THs, 217, Dz.

rot, 643, to—Encl., 92, $.

Totyap, Tovyapovv, Tovydprot,
3, 103 634, 5 — tow,

637, 4.

rot, etc., 212, D.

rovovTos, ToLdsde, 2125 475.

roisdect, uta

TOApa, 115

-rov, 2 and 3 Pers, Du. Act.,
226—3 Pers. Du. Imperf,
233, D. 7—2 Pers, Du. lun-

rf., 228.

s, Verbal Adj. in, 300.
Togovros, Toadsde, ord 415.
TOTE, with Part., 587, 4.

Tov, TH, 214, Obs. 1.
“a -rep in the Dat. PL,

5.
Tpe c—Perf., 279; 285
ery) Pen 295—Aor, Act.
Meaning, 329, D.

rpyoTw, 327, 16,
“a Fem. in, 341, 2—Quan-

TPow, 324,
TT, -TTw, See ver “TTW,

deiSomor.

tTvyxdvo, 322, 30, ete.—with
the Genit., 419, ¢ — with
Part., 590.

Tov, 205, D.

Tintw, 326, 37].

TUPM, 54, C.

TUxELY, 322, 30.

Tw, -Twv, 3 Pers, Sing, and
Du. Imper. Act. 228.

~rwp, Nom. Mase. in, 341, 23
13%.

-Twoav, 3 Pers. Pl. Imper
Act., 228,

v bec. F, 35, D. 23 1605 248,
Obs.—bec. ¥, 40—bec. ev,
40; 278—bec. ov, 4o, D.—
of the Stem bec. e, 157—
Long by nature, 83, Obs, 1
—lengthened, 253, Obs.—
cropped, 253—not dropped,

64.

-v, Neut. in, 1393 172.

dBpiGw, with Acc., 396.

bBpiorys, Compar., 197.

-ydprov, Neut. in, 347, Obs. 1.

tdwp, 176—Neut., 140,

ve bec. 3, 158.

vt, Diphth., 28.

-via, Fem, of Perf. Part., 188.

vids, 177, 1).

Tuer, Duy, etc, 207 — buds,
208, D.

-vy, Nom. of Masc. and Neut.

in, 172.

“UV, Verbs in, 353, 8

vrai, see td.

Uraros, 200.

bép (u7eip), 448, IL, A.; 460
—with Inf, and Att., 514, 3

Urirxvovpar, 323, 36— with
Inf, 569.

apt lL; 468— Apoc.,

brorredvw, Augm., 23
-us, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 172
ee in Acc, Sing.,

156.

topivm, Dat. Sing., 115, Dz

FeO Serena voTaTLos,
2003 199,

Uarepos, Sorepée, with Genit.,
416, Obs. 35 423.

¢, Pronunt., 6,
padvOnv, 321, D.
haew6s, Superl., 193, D.

daivw, pacivw, 321, D.—Perf,
282—Meaning, 330, 8—Aor.
Pass., 298, D.— Meaning,
328, 3— of Pres. and
Aor., 498.

daivouat, havepds eiut, with
Part., 590.

ddoxw, 324, 8.

deBouc, ge D. 45—Aor. and
Fut., 257, D.—with Genit.,

419, &

| xptw.

dépre, 315, D. 4.

éptepos, péptatos, dépreros,
199, D. 1.

épw, 327, 12—Imperat. of
1 Aor. Act., 268, D.— Mean-
ing, 476, 2—épwr, 580.

devyw, 322, 31—Fut. Mid, 264
—Perf. Mid., 285, D.—with
Acc., 398—with Genit, 422,
—Meaning, 486, Obs.

yet, 312, 5—Pres. Ind. Encl.,

92, 3.
d0avw, 321, 3 —2 Aor., 316, 7
—with Acc, 398 — with

Part., 590.

p0cipw, Perf., 282—Meaning,
330, D. 11.

b0ivw, 321, 6—Aor. Mid., 316,
D. 26.

Pirdéw, 325, D. 1.

tdos, Compar., 195.

didotyséopas, Dep,
328, 2.

-pu(v), 178, D.

oBovjor, Mean. of Aor., 328,
3—with Inf. 560, 3.

oivg, 83, Obs. 15 145.

dopjvat, see dépw

bt hig dapyvups; 319, 26.

Ppagw, A tha 257, D.

péap, 176,

dpyjv, Fem., 140.

duyaéde, 173, D.

dvyyavw, 322, 31, and Obs,

-duns, Adj. in, Acc. Sing., 166.

vdAarromat, With Acc., 399.

dipw, Fut., 262, D.

gdvw, Aor. 316, 17—Meaning,

329, 3.
as, dys, Genit. Pl and Du.,
1 42, 3.

Pass.,

xaipw, 326, 38— with Dat.
439, Obs. ox ith Part., 592.

XaAdw, 301,

Xaderraive, "with Dat. A3% Obs

xaAerds, with Inf., 562.

xaremras hépw, with Part., 502

xavdave, 323, D 41

xavovpmat, 324, 9.

Xap, O4, Obs.

xapis, Compar, of compounds
with, 197.

XdoKw, 324, 9.

xeip, 177, 18—Fem., 140

xetpwv, xelpioros, 199, 2.

xetoopar, 323, ae
épys, etc., 199, D. 2.

ay 248 — Fut. 265— Perf.,
281—1 Aor, 269—2 Aor.
316, D. 31.

Xara pew, 325, D. m,

Xpdonat, xpdw, Contr, 244, 2
Ce 261—with Dat., 438,

Py 3 312, 6) piv, 490—with
Ys poe: _ 4g Obs. 1.
xey , Genit. 123.
arhorp9 Mid., 288

368 a
xpoa. os. q ’ v
xpda, 115 (Ex.). Oéw, 325, 9—Syll. Augm.,| ds, Atonon, 97, 35
xpovvupt, 319, 12 Ns pag he a-
xpis, 169, D. 65, D. es
xwpige, with Genit,, 419, ¢, Sppar, 327, 8. bere
AMPK» 455s 5+ -wy, Nom. of Mase. and Kem.,| with we
Y, 343 485 260. URI ILS | gps that
“Ws, in, 172. dvduny, ete., 314, D. feaarative
: oa aera dvaé, 65, D. re me —‘in or a
Genit., 41 byéouat, Syll, Augm., 2 tences of Purpc
daw, Conn 244; 2. "Pert, 275, 2—with Genit.,} with ay 6;
PeiSouae, with Genit,, 419,¢. ) 421. RA ee
Y, my he
w, for o, 276, D.—See Att. | -wp, Subs. in, 172. oS. ne)
Declens—from 0, see o—| dpacc(v), 179. wsrrep, 6; :
from », see y. -ws, Nom. 17 ’ sre, 945 —
~w, Fem. in, 138—Nom., 172] Perf. Part.,276; 188—Kem.,| Inf. 566
” — Adv, 204 — 138— Adv. 201; 203 — +
Names in Acc. Sing. 163, D. of
—in the Genit, 122, D.3,¢] 161—with « and v-
—Conn. Vowel, 233, t—]| 157—Iin -ev Stems, 161, a.
1 Pers. Ind. Act., 233, 2. paper fine
327, VD. ws OS, 9 219
i agli 63r }
THE END.

LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, STAM! on

AND CHARING

CROSS,

5O, ALBEMARLE Srreet, Lonpon,
October, 1881.

MR. MURRAY'S .
LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS.

MURRAY’S STUDENT’S MANUALS.
A Series of Class-books for adoanced Scholars,

Formina A Cuain of History rrom THE Earuiest Aces
powN TO Mobern Times.

‘*We are glad of an opportunity of directing the attention of teachers
to these admirable schoolbooks.”"—THE MUSEUM.

English History and Literature.

THE STUDENT’S HUME: A History oF ENGLAND,
FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES TO THE REVOLUTION IN 1688. By
DAVID HUME. Incorporating the Researches of recent Historians,
New Edition, revised, corrected, and continued to the ‘Treaty of Berlin
in 1878, by J. S. BREWER, M.A; With Notes, Illustrations, and
7 Coloured Maps and Woodcuts. (830 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6,

*,* Questions on the “ Student's Hume.” 1210, 28.

THE STUDENT’S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY OF
ENGLAND. From tHe Accession or Henry VII. to THE
Deatu or Georce Il. By HENRY HALLAM, LL.D. (680 pp.)
Post 8vo, 7s, 6d.

THE STUDENT’S MANUAL OF THE ENGLISH
LANGUAGE. By GEORGE P. MARSH. (538 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.

THE STUDENT’S MANUAL OF ENGLISH LITE-
RATURH. By T. B, SHAW, M.A. (510 pp.) Post 8vo... 7s. 64

TIE STUDENT'S SPECIMENS OF ENGLISH LITE.
RATUREH. Selected from the Best Writers, and grranged Chrono-
logically. By THOS, B, SHAW, M.A. (560 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s, 6a

2° MR, MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL —_—

Seripture and Church Hira

THE STUDENT'S. OLD TESTAMENT :
From THE CreaTION OF THE WorLD To THE RETURN OF
Jews FROM senheg ttt With an Introduction to the
the Old Testament. PHILIP SMITH, B,A. wis 40.
and Woodcuts. . (630 Pt Post 8vo. 75. 6.

THE STUDENT'S NEW TESTAMENT :
Wir an INTRODUCTION, CONTAINING THE CONNECTION OF “THE
Op anp New Testaments. .By PHILIP SMITH, B.A, |
With 30 Maps and Woodcuts. (680 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. e

THE STUDENT'S MAWUAL OF ECCLESIASTICAL 4
HISTORY, From the Times oF THE AposTLes to the Furr |
EsTABLISHMENT OF THE Hoty Roman Empire ane THE PAPAL *
Power. By PHILIP SMITH, B.A. (654 pp.) With Woodcuts.
2Vols. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. each. +

Book I.—To the ESTABLISHMENT OF THE Hoty RoMAN EMPIRE
AND THE Papat Power.
Boox II.—The Mippie Aczs and the REForMATION.

THE STUDENT’S MANUAL OF THE ENGLISH
CHURCH. From the Planting of the Church in Britain to the i
18th Century. By G. G. PERRY, M.A., Canon of Lincoln.
2Vols. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. each. : : it

First Pertop.—To the Accrssion or Henry VIII.
Sreconp Periop.—To the EiguTzentH CenTuRY.

=

Ancient History.

THE STUDENT'S ANCIENT HISTORY OF THE
EAST. From the Earliest Times to the i nae? of Alexander Prod

Great, including Egypt, .Assyria, Babylonia, M: BS
Minor, and Phonnicia’ B By PHILIP SMITH, BAL ith 70 Wood
cuts, (608pp.) Post 8vo. 75. 6d.

THE STUDENT’S HISTORY OF GREECE. From
THE Eartiest Times TO THE ROMAN ent Est. With See
on the History of Literature and Art. WM. SMITH DCls
With Maps and 100 Woodcuts. (640 Be fe 8vo. 75. 6d, iin

*,* Questions on the ** Student's Greece.” 1210. 25.

THE STUDENT'S HISTORY OF ROME. From THE |
oe Times To THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE Empire. With _
ae on the History of Literature and Art. By DEAN LID-

ELL. With 80 Woodcuts. (686 pp.) Post vo. 7s.6@ ——

= J

THE STUDENT'S GIBBON; An EPiTOME OF THE
History OF THE DECLINE AND Faun OF THE RomMAN EMPIRE.

By EDWARD GIBBON. Incorporating the Researches Spe recent

istorians, With 200 Woodcuts. (joo pp.) Post 8vo, 75,.6¢@. ©

MR. MURRAY’S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. 3

Europe.

THE STUDENT’S HISTORY OF EUROPE DURING
THE MIDDLE AGES. By HENRY HALLAM, LL.D.
(650 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.

THE STUDENT’S HISTORY OF MODERN EUROPE,
From THE END oF THE MIDDLE AGES TO THE TREATY OF
BERLIN, 1878. Post 8vo. Lin Preparation.

———_—

France.
THE STUDENT’S HISTORY OF FRANCE. FROM THE

Earuiest ‘TIMES TO THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE SECOND EMPIRE,
1852. With Notes and Illustrations on the Institutions of the Country.
ar H. JERVIS, M. A. With Woodcuts. (724 pp.) Post 8vo.
7s.

a en

Geography and Geology.

THE STUDENT’S MANUAL OF ANCIENT GEO-
GRAPHY. By CANON BEVAN, M.A. With 150 Woodcuts.
(710 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d,

THE STUDENT'S MANUAL OF MODERN GEO-
GRAPHY, Maruematicar, Puysicar, AND DescripriveE. By
CANON BEVAN, M.A. With 120 Woodcuts. (684 pp.) Post

. 8yo. 7s. 6d.
THE STUDENT’S ELEMENTS OF GEOLOGY. By

SIR CHARLES LYELL, F.R.S. With 6oo Woodcuts, (602 pp.)
Post 8vo. gs.

Law and Penns.

THE STUDENT’S MANUAL OF MORAL PHILOSO-
PHY. With Quotations and References. By WILLIAM FLEM-
ING, D.D. (440 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.

THE STUDENT'S BLACKSTONE. AN ABRIDGMENT
OF THE ENTIRE CoMMENTARIES. By R. MALCOLM KERR,
LL.D. (670 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.

THE STUDENT'S EDITION OF AUSTIN’S JURIS-
PRUDENCE, Compiled from the larger work. By ROBERT
CAMPBELL. (544 pp.) Post 8vo. res. i

AN ANALYSIS OF AUSTIN’S LECTURES ON
JURISPRUDENCE. By GORDON CAMPBELL. (ery pp.)
Post 8vo. » 6s.

HORTENSIUS: AN Historicar, Essay ON THE OFFICE

. AND Duties of AN ApvocatE. By WILLIAM FORSYTH, Q.C.
Adapted for School Prizes, Woodcuts, 8yvo. 7s. 6d.

4 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS,

Dr. Wm. Smith’s Smaller Histories.

These Works have been drawn up for the Lower Forms, at the request of
several teachers, who require more elementary books than the STUDENT'S
HISTORICAL MANUALS, 5

A SMALLER SCRIPTURE HISTORY OF THE OLD |
AND THE _NEW TESTAMENT, Iv Turee Parts;—I. Old -
‘Testament History. II. Connection of Old and New ‘Testaments. —
III. New Testament History to a.p, 70, Edited by WM. SMITH,
D.C.L. With 40 Illustrations. (370 pp.) 16mo. 3s. 6d.

This book is intended to be used with, and not in the place of, the Bible,
The object has been to supply a condensed manual of Scripture history, ~
comprehensive, but at the same time concise, for Junior Classes. ,

“ Students well know the value of Dr. Wm. Smith's larger Scripture His-
tory. This abridgment omits nothing of importance, and is presented in
such a handy form that it cannot fail to become a valuable aid to the less ~
learned Bible Student.”—People's Magazine. ert

A SMALLER ANCIENT HISTORY OF THE EAST, ~
From THe Earuiest Times To THE ConquEsT OF ALEXANDER
tHe Great. By PHILIP SMITH, B.A. With 7o Woodcuts.
(310 pp.) 16mo. 3s. 6d. '

“ This book is designed to aid the study of the Scriptures, by pissing se

fof

eir true historical relations those allusions to Egypt, Assyria, onia,
heenicia, and the Medo-Persian wg which form the backgrouns of the
story of. Israel from Abraham to Nehemiah. ‘The p work is an ins
ispensable adjunct of the ‘Smaller Scripture History;’ and the two have
been writtcn expressly to be used together.” A

A SMALLER HISTORY OF GREECE, From THE
“ Earuiest Times To THE Roman Conquest. By WM. SMITH, -
D.C.L. With Maps and 74 Woodcuts. (268 pp.) 16mo. 35. 6d. —
This pwn? A has been drawn up at the request of several teachers, for the

use of lower forms, elementary pupils, ‘The table of contents presents a full —
analysis of the work, and has been so arranged, that the t er can

from it QUESTIONS FOR THE EXAMINATION OF HIS CLASS, the answers to
which will be found in the corresponding pages of the yolume.

oaoaeh=

“SMALLER HISTORY OF ROME, . From THE

Earviest Times TO THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE EmiirE. By —
setes pesteey D.C.L. With Maps and 70 Woodcuts. Ghee :
r6mo. 3s. Gd.

The “‘ Smaller History of Rome” has been written and

of the countries with whic’!

f I arranged on the same
plan, and with the same object, as the “Smaller History of Greece.” Like -
that work it comprises se; aris chapters on the institutions and literature Hie
it deals. a iT

A SMALLER CLASSICAL MYTHOLOGY. With Trans-
lations from the Ancient Poets, and Questions on the Work. By H.
R. LOCKWOOD. With 90 Woodcuts. (300 pp.) 16mo, 35. 6d.

This work has been prepared by a lady for the use of schools and young
pees of both sexes, In common with many other teachers, she has
elt the want of a consecutive account of the heathen deities, which mi: ri
safely be placed in the hands of the young, and yet contain all that is gene-
rally necessary to enable them to understand the classical allusions may
meet with in prose or poctry, and to appreciate the meanings of works ofart.
A carefully prepared sct of QUESTIONS is appended, the answers to which _
will be found in the corresponding pages of the volume, = '

WR. MURRAY’S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. §

A SMALLER MANUAL OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY.
ByCANON BEVAN, M.A. (240pp.) With Woodcuts. 16mo. 3s. 6d.

“This work has been drawn ‘up chiefly for the lower forms in schools, at
the request of several teachers who require for their pupils a more elemen-
tary work than the ‘Student’s. Manual of Ancient Geography.’ The arrange-

_ment of the two works is substantially the-same. The more important
towns alone are mentioned ; the historical notices are curtailed; modern
names are introduced only in special cases, either for the purpose of identifi- -
cation or where any noticeable change has occurred; and the quotations
from classical works are confined for the most part to such expressions as are
illustrative of local peculiarities. A very ample Index is supplied, so that
the work may supply the place of a dictionary for occasional reference.”

A SMALLER MANUAL OF MODERN GEOGRAPHY.
; By JOHN RICHARDSON, M.A., Diocesan Inspector of Schools.
16mo. (240 pp.) 2s. 6d.

‘Great pains appear to have been spent on the verification of facts, and
the arrangement is a model of good method. Throughout the book there
are unmistakable indications of solid, conscientious work, sound judgment,
and practical acquaintance with teaching.”—School Guardian.

This “Smaller Manual” has been compiled for pupils who are acquiring
for the first time the chief facts of General Geography, and no pains have
been spared to render the learner’s task as easy and as pleasant as the
nature of the subject admits of. Accuracy as to details has been striven
after, in order that the young student may have a solid and safe foundation
for his future studies in the advanced branches of the Sciences.

A SMALLER HISTORY OF ENGLAND, From THE
Ear.iest Times TO THE Present Day. By PHILIP. SMITH,
B.A. With Maps and 60 Woodcuts. (400 pp.) 16mo. 35. 62.

** The most recent authorities have been consulted, and it is confidently
believed that the Work will be found to present a careful and trustworthy
account of English History for the lower forms in schools, for whose use it is
chiefly intended.” —Preface.

** This little volume is so pregnant with valuable information, that it will
enable vo hed who reads it attentively to answer such questions as are set

_* forth in the English History Papers in the Indian Civil Service Examina-
tions."—Reader.

A SMALLER HISTORY OF ENGLISH LITERATURE:
Giving a sketch of the lives of our chief writers. By JAMES ROW-
LEY. (276 pp.) 16mo. 3s. 6d.

The important position which the study of English literature is now
taking in education, has led to the publication of this work, and of the
accompanying volume of specimens. Both books have been undertaken at
the Ne ames of many eminent teachers, and no pains have been spared to
adapt them to the purpose for which they are designed, as elementary works
to be used in schools.

SHORT SPECIMENS OF ENGLISH LITERATURE.
Selected from the chief authors and arranged chronologically. By
JAMES ROWLEY. With Notes. (368 pp.) 16mo. 3s. 6d.

While the “Smaller History of English Literature” supplies a rapid, but
trustworthy sketch of the lives of our chief writers, and of the successive.
influences which imparted to their writings their peculiar character, the
Pp worl pplies choice examples of the works themselves, accom-
panied by all the explanations required for their potent explanation, The
two works are thus especially designed to be used together,

6 MR. MURRAY’S LIST. OF SCHOOL BOOKS.

Dr. Wm. Smith’s Biblical Dictionaries:

FOR DIVINES AND SCHOLARS.

A DICTIONARY OF THE BIBLE; Compristnc 1Ts

ANTIQUITIES, BioGRAPHY, GEOGRAPHY, AND Natura History.
By Various Writers. Edited by WM. SMITH, D.C.L. and LL.D,
Editor of the ‘‘ Classical and Latin Dictionaries.” With Illustrations.
3 vols. (3158 pp.) Medium 8vo._ 52. 5s.

“Dr. Smith's Bible Dictionary could not fail to take a very high place in
English literature ; for no similar work in our own or in any other language
is for a moment to be compared with it."—Quarterly Review.

“ Our Churches could scarcely make a better investment than by addi
- work of unsurpassed excellence to their pastor's library.”"—B.

agazine.

are book of reference alike for scholar and student. The most complete,
learned, and trustworthy work of the kind hitherto produced.” —A theneum.

A CONCISE DICTIONARY OF THE BIBLE. Con-

densed from the larger Work. For Families and Students. With
Maps and 300 Illustrations. (1039 pp.) 8vo. ets.

A Dictionary of the Bible, in some form or another, is indispensable for
every family, The Divine, the Scholar, and all who seek to in
thoroughly the various subjects connected with the Bible, and to master
those controversies which are now exciting such deep and general interest,
must still have recourse to the Larger Dictionary; but to students “in the
Universities, and in the Upper Forms at Schools, to private families, and to
that numerous class of persons who desire to arrive at results sii A
Concise Dictionary will, it is believed, supply all that is necessary
elucidation and explanation of the Bible.

_A SMALLER DICTIONARY OF THE BIBLE.

aohe ca from the larger Work. . For Schools and Young Persons.
With Maps and Illustrations. (620 pp.) Crown 8vo. 7s.

A smaller and more elementary work than the preceding Dictionaries is
needed for the use of schoo!s, Sunday School Teachers, and yon pemcos
in general. This “Smaller Dictionary” contains such an account iblical
antiquities, biography, geography, and natural history as a young person is
likely to require in the study of the Bible. In addition to the woodcuts
inserted in the text, several maps are added to illustrate the articles relating
to geography and history.

** An invaluable service has been rendered to students in the condensation

of Dr. Wm. Smith’s Bible Dictionary, The work has been done as only a “

careful and intelligent scholar could do it, which preserves to us the essential
scholarship and value of each article.” —British terly Review,

———- > ———_

Dr.. Wm. Smith’s Ancient Atlas.

AN ATLAS OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. BIsricar

AND Crassicat. Intended to illustrate the ‘ Dictionary of the Bible,’
and the ‘ Classical Dictionaries.’ Compiled under the superintendence
of WM. SMITH, D.C.L., and GEORGE GROVE, LL.D. With
Descriptive Text, Indices, &c. With 43 Maps. Folio, half-bound.
Price Six Guineas,

“ The students of Dr, Smith’s admirable Dictionaries must have felt them-
selves in want of an Atlas constructed on the same scale of precise
minute information with the article they were reading. This want has at
length been supplied by the superb work before us. The indices are full, the
engraving is exquisite, and the delineation of the natural features very
minute and beautiful. It may safely be pronounced—and higher praise can
scarcely be bestowed—to be a worthy companion of the volumes which it is
intended to illustrate.”—Guardian,

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. — 4.

Dr. Wm. Smith’s Classical Dictionaries.

AN ENCYCLOPZDIA OF CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY.
By Various Wrirers. Edited by WM. SMITH, D.C.L. and LL.D.

“Tt is an honour to this College to have presented to the world so distin-

~ guished a scholar as Dr.“Wm. Smith, who has, by his valuable manuals of
classical antiquity, and classical history and biography, done as much as any

man living to promote the accurate knowledge of the Greek and Roman
world among the students of this age.”—Mr. Grote at the London University.

I. ADICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMAN ANTIQUITIES.
Including the Laws, Institutions, Domestic Usages, Painting, Sculpture, Music, ’
Drama, &c. (1300 pp.) With 500 Illustrations. Medium 8vo, 28s,
II. A DICTIONARY OF BIOGRAPHY AND, MYTHOLOGY.
Containing a History of the Ancient World, Civil, Literary, and Ecclesiastical.
(sje pp.) With 560 Illustrations. 3 vols. Medium 8vo. 84s.
Til. A DICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMAN GEOGRAPHY.
Seeding the Political History of both Countries and Cities, as well as their
Geography, (2500 pp.) With 530 llustrations. 2vols. Medium &vo. 56s.

FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES.

A CLASSICAL DICTIONARY OF BIOGRAPHY,
MYTHOLOGY, AND GHOGRAPHY. Forthe Higher Forms in
Schools. Condensed from the larger Dictionaries. 750 Woodcuts. 8vo.
18s.

A SMALLER CLASSICAL DICTIONARY. For Junior

Classes. Abridged from the above Work. With 200 Woodcuts.
Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.

A SMALLER DICTIONARY OF ANTIQUITIES.

For Junior Classes. Abridged from the larger Work. With 200
Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.

The two following Works are intended to furnish a complete account of the leading
personages, the Institutions, Art; Social Life, Writings, and Controversies of the
Christian Church from the time of the A ‘postles to the age of Charlemagne. They
commence at the period at which the“ Dictionary ofthe Bible” leaves off, and

form a continuation of it,

A DICTIONARY OF CHRISTIAN ANTIQUITIES.
The History, Institutions, and Antiquities of the Christian Church,
By Various Writers. Edited by WM. SMITH, D.C.L., and
ArcupEacon CHEETHAM, D.D. With Illustrations, Medium
8vo. 2Vols. £3 135. 6d.

“ The work before us is unusually well done. A more acceptable present
for a candidate for holy orders, or a more valuable book for any library, than
the ‘Dictionary of Christian Antiquities,’ could not easily be found.”—
Saturday Review. re

A DICTIONARY OF CHRISTIAN BIOGRAPHY,
LITERATURE, SECTS, AND DOCTRINES. By Varipus
Wrirrrs. Edited by WM: SMITH, D.C.L., and Proressor
WACE, M.A. Vols. I. and II. Medium 8vo. 31s. 6d. each. (To
be completed in 4 vols )

** The value of the work arises, in the first place, from the fact that the
contributors to these volumes have diligently eschewed mere compilation.
In these volumes we welcome the most important addition that has been
made for a_century to the historical library of the English theological
student.”—Zimes, .

7 .

: ee. ‘se i
8 MR, MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS.

Dr. Wm, Smith’s Latin Dictionaries,

“I consider Dr. Wm. Smith’s Dictionaries to have conferred a t lasting
service on the cause of classical learning in this ee ean LIDDELL.

“Ihave found Dr. Wm. Smith's Latin pa eee end a great convenience to me. Tr
pues that Be, ae been vary Janieieee in what he omitted, as well as what he

A COMPLETE LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, Basep

ON THE WorkKS OF FORCELLINI AND Freunp. With ee c
Roman Calendar, Measures, Weights, and Money. By WM. SM
D.C.L. and LL.D. (1200 pp.) edium 8vo. 215,~ ’ .

This work holds an intermediate plaee between the Thesaurus of For-
cellini and the ordinary School Dictionaries. It makes.no eager super-
le Forcellini, which would require a dictionary equally fais i Lit aims
at performing the same service for the Latin lan as Liddell and Scott's
Lexicon has done for the Greek. Great attention has been paid
mology, in which department especially this work is admitted to n
superiority over all existing Latin Dictionaries. y
**Dr. Wm, Smith's ‘ Latin-English Dictionary’ is lifted, by its indepen-
dent merit, far above comparison with any school or college dictionary
commonly in use.”"—Zxaminer. : :

A SMALLER LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, wire
A SEPARATE DicTIoNary OF Proper Names, TABLes OF RoMAN
Moneys, &c. Abridged from the above Work, for the Use of Junior
Classes. (672 pp.) Square 12mo. 7s. 6d. ¥

“This abridgment retains all the characteristic excellences of the larger
work—its clearness and correctness of explanation, simplicity of arrangement,
sufiiciency of illustration, exhibition of etymological affinities and modern
derivatives.”—A unt.

A COPIOUS AND CRITICAL ENGLISH-LATIN DIC-

TIONARY. Compiled from

By WM. SMI

D.C.L. and LL.D., and
(970 pp-) Medium 8vo. ars. ;
It has been the object of the Authors of this work to produce a more com-

- plete and more
every article has

Original Sources. be.
THEOPHILUS D. “HALL, M.A.

ect ENGLISH-LATIN DicTIONARY than yet exists, and —
en the result of original and independent research.

Great pains have been taken in classifying the different senses of the
English words, so as to enable the Student readily to find what he wants. 3
Each meaning is illustrated by examples from the classical writers; and
those phrases are as a general rule given in both English and Latin. .

“This work is the result of a clear i into the faults of its
sors as to plan, classification, and examples. In previous dictionaries the
various senses of ap. ys words are commonly set down hap-hazard. This
has been avoided in the present instance by the classification of the senses of
the English words according to the order of the student's ne Not less
noteworthy is the copiousness of the examples from the Latin, with which
every English word Is illustrated ; and, last not least, the exce) accu-
racy of the references by which these.exampiles are to be veri

"_Satur-
day Review.

A SMALLER ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. Abridged
from the above Work, for the use of Junior Classes. (730 pp.)
Square 12mo. 7s.6d. | aa

“An ge “eR Dictionary worthy of the scholarship of our age and
sr it will take absolutely the first rank and be the standard

Latin Dictionary as long as either tongue endures. Evena exami-

nation of the pages will serve to reveal the minute pains taken to ensure its

fulness and philological value, and the ‘ work is toa large extent a dictipn-
ary of the English language, as well as an English-Latin Dictionary,’”—

English Churchman, . :

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. 9
Dr. Wm. Smith’s Educational Series.

‘‘The general excellence of the beoks included in Mr. Murray’s educa-
tional series, is so universally acknowledged as to give in a great degree
the stamp of merit to the works of which it consists.” —SCHOOLMASTER,

INTRODUCTION TO FHE LATIN COURSE.
THE YOUNG BEGINNER’S FIRST LATIN BOOE:

Containing the Rudiments of Grammar, Easy Grammatical Questions
and Exercises, with Vocabularies. Being a Stepping Stone to Princi-
pia Latina, Part I., for Young Children. (x12 pp.) 12mo.. 2s.

THE YOUNG BEGINNER’S SECOND LATIN
BOOK: Containing an easy Latin Reading Book, with an Analysis
of the Sentences, Notes, and a Dictionary. Being a Stepping Stone
to Principia Latina, Part II., for Young Children. (98 pp.) 12mo, 2s.

Latin Course.

PRINCIPIA LATINA, Part I. First LATIN CourRSsE.
A Grammar, Delectus, and Exercise Book with Vocabularies. (200 pp.)
I2mo. 35. 6d.

The main object of this work is to enable a Beginner to fix the Declensions
and Conjugations thoroughly in his memory, to learn their usdee by construct-
ing simple sentences as soon as he commences the study of the language,
and to accumulate gradually a stock of useful words. It presents in one book
all that the pupil will require for some time in his study of the language.

The Cases of the Nouns, Adjectives, and Pronouns, are arranged both
AS IN THE ORDINARY GRAMMARS AND AS IN THE PuBLIC SCHOOL PRIMER,
together with the corresponding Exercises. In this way the work can be
used with equal advantage by those who prefer either the old or the modern
arrangement. :

APPENDIX TO PRINCIPIA LATINA, Part I. Containing
Additional Exercises, with Examination Papers. (125 pp.) r2mo. 2s. 6d.

PRINCIPIA LATINA, Part II. ReApinc Book. An
Introduction to Ancient Mythology, Geography, Roman Antiquities,
and History. With Notes anda Dictionary. (268 pp.) 12mo. 3s. 6d.

PRINCIPIA LATINA, Part III. Porrry. 1. Easy
Hexameters and Pentameters. 2, Eclogee Ovidianz. 3. Prosody and
Metre, 4. First Latin Verse Book. (160 pp.) 12mo. 3s. 6d.

PRINCIPIA LATINA, Part IV. Prose Composition.
Rules of Syntax, with Examples, Explanations of Synonyms, and

; Exercises on the Syntax. (194 pp.) 12mo. 35. 6d,

PRINCIPIA LATINA, Part V. Suort TALES AND
ANECDOTES FROM ANCIENT History, FoR TRANSLATION INTO
Latin Prose. (140 pp.) 12m0. 3. ;

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Arranged according to
Subjects and Etymology ; with a Latin-English Dictionary to Phedrus,
Cornelius Nepos, and Ceesar’s ‘‘Gallic War.’’ (190 pp.) 12mo. 35.°6d.

THE STUDENT’S LATIN GRAMMAR. For THE

: HiGcHer Forms. (406 pp.) Post 8vo. 6s.

SMALLER LATIN GRAMMAR. For THE MIDDLE AND
Lower Forms. Abridged from the above. (2zopp.) ‘r2mo. 3s. 62.

TACITUS. GERMANIA, AGRICOLA, AND First Book OF
sHE ANNALS. With English Notes. (378 pp.) rzmo. 3s. 6d.

*,° Keys may be had by AUTHENTICATED TEACHERS on application.

10 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS.

Greek Course.

INITIA GR2Z®CA, Part I. A First Greek Course,
containing Grammar, Delectus, Exercise Book, and Vocabularies,
r2mo. (194 pp.) 3s. 6d. nh ad

*,° The present Edition has been very thoroughly revised, and many additions
and improvements have been introduced.

The great object of this work, as of the “ Principia Latina,” is to make
the study of the language as easy and simple as possible, by giving the
grammatical forms only as they are wanted, and by enabling the pupil to
translate from Greck into English and from English into Greek as soon as
he has learnt the Greek characters and the First Declension. - For the con-
venience of teachers the cases of the nouns, &c. are given according to the
ordinary grammars as well as according to the arrangement of the Public
Schools Latin Primer.

APPENDIX TO INITIA GRZCA, Part IL Containing ;

Additional Exercises, with Examination Papers and Easy Reading
Lessons with the Sentences Analysed, serving as an Introduction to
Initia Graca, Part II. xomo. 2s. 62.

INITIA GRZCA, Part II. A ReEApING Book. Con-
taining short Tales, Anecdotes, Fables, Mythology, and Grecian
History. Witha Lexicon. r2mo. (220pp.) 3s. 6d.

INITIA GRZECA, Part III. Prose COMPOSITION.
Containing the Rules of eA with copicus Examples and Exer-

cises. z2mo. (202 pp.) 3s. 62.

THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. FoR THE

Hicuer Forms. By Proressor Curtius. Edited by Wm. Smirn,

D.C.L. Post 8vo. (386 pp.) 6s.

The Greck Grammar of Dr. Curtius is acknowledged by the most com-
petent scholars to be the best representative of the present advanced state
of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost the only Grammar which
exhibits the inflexions of the language in a really scientific form; while its
extensive use in schools, and the high commendations it has received from
practical teachers, are a sufficient proof of its excellence as a school-book.
It is surprising to find that many of the public and private schools in this
country continue to use Grammars, which ignore all the improvements and
discoveries of modern philology.

A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR. For THE MIDDLE

Anp Lower Forms. Abridged from the above Work. xz2mo,
(220 pp.) 35. 6d.

THE GREEK ACCIDENCE. Extracted from the above

Work. 12mo. (125 pp.) 2s. 6d.

PLATO: THE ApoLocy oF SOCRATES, THE CRITO, AND
Part OF THE PHa:po; with Notes in English from STALLBAUM.
ScHLEIERMACHER'’S Introductions. 12mo. (242 pp.) 3s. 6d,

*.* Keys may be had by AUTHENTICATED TEACHERS on application,

aa
4
‘

as

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. 11

French Course.
FRENCH PRINCIPIA, Part I. <A First FRENCH

Course. Containing Grammar, Delectus, Exercises, and Vocabu-
laries. r2mo. (172 pp.) 38. 6d. } .

This work hasbeen compiled at the repeated request of numerous teachers
who, finding the ‘‘ Principia Latina” and “Initia Greeca” the easiest books
Sor learning Latin and Greek, are anxious to obtain equally elementary
French books on the same plan. There is an obvious gain in studying a
new language on the plan with which the learner is already familiar, The
main object is to enable a beginner to acquire an accurate knowledge of the
chief grammatical forms, to learn their usage by constructing simple sen-
tencesas soon as he commences the study of the language, and to accumu-
late gradually a stock of words useful in conversation as well as in reading.

APPENDIX TO FRENCH PRINCIPIA, Part I. Con-

taining Additional Exercises and Examination Papers. r2mo. 2s. 6d.

FRENCH PRINCIPIA, Part II. A READING BOOK.
Containing Fables, Stories, and Anecdotes, Natural History, and
Scenes from the History of France. With Grammatical Questions,
Notes, and copious Etymological Dictionary. 12mo. (260 pp.) 4s. 6d.

FRENCH PRINCIPIA, Part III. Prose Composirion.
Containing a Systematic Course of Exercises on the Syntax, with the
Principal Rules of Syntax. x2mo. [ln preparation. é

THE STUDENT'S FRENCH GRAMMAR: PRACTICAL
AND Historica. For tHe HicHer Forms. By C. HERON-WALL.
With Intrropuction by M. Littré. Post 8vo. (490 pp.) 7s. 6d.

This grammar is the work of a practical teacher/of twenty years’ ex-
perience in teaching English boys. It has been his special aim to produce a
book which would work well in schools where Latin and Greek form the
principal subjects of study.

"*This book as a whole is quite a monument of French Grammar, and
ye sit to become a standard work in high class teaching.”—School Board
ronicle., ;

“Tt would be difficult to polot more clearly to the value of Mr. Wall’s
work, which is intended for the use of Colleges and Upper Forms in schools,
than. by quoting what M. Littré says of it in an introductory letter :—‘ 1
have carefully tested the principal parts of your work, and have been com-
pletely satisfied with the accuracy and correctness which I found there.’”—
Saturday Review.

A SMALLER FRENCH GRAMMAR. For THE
Mippie anv Lower Torms. Abridged from the above Work
S2mo. (230 pp.) 35. 6d.

*,* Keys may be had by AUTHENTICATED TEACHERS om application.

12 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS...

German Course.

GERMAN PRINCIPIA, Part r. A First GERMAN
Course, Containing a Grammar, Delectus, Exercise Book, and
Vocabularies. 12mo. (164 pp.) 3s. 6d. rh

*.° The present edition has undergone a very careful revision, and various
donfrceenients and additions have been introduced.

This work is on the same plan as-the “ French Principia,” and thérehne >:
requires no further description, except in one point. Differing from the
ordinary grammars, all German words are printed in Roman, and not in
the old German characters. The latter add to the difficulty of a learner, —

and as the Roman letters are not only used by many modern Germar*writers,
but also in Grimm's great Dictionary and Grammar, there scems no reason
why the beginner, especially the native of a forcign country, who has learnt —
his own language in the Roman letters, should be any longer debarred from
tht advantage of this innovation, It is believed that this alteration will pic
litate, more than at first might be supposed, the acquisition of the language. —
But at the same time, as many German books continue to be printed in the —
German characters, the exercises are printed in both German and Roman
letters. ?

GERMAN PRINOCIPIA, Part Tr. <A READING Book, |
Containing Fables, Stories, and Anecdotes, Natural History, and
Scenes from the History of Germany. With Grammatical Questions,
Notes, and Dictionary. 12mo. (272 pp.) 3s. 6d.

PRACTICAL GERMAN GRAMMAR. With a Sketch

of the Historical Development of the Language and its is Peiatiga
Dialects. Post 8vo. (240 pp:) 3s. 6d. :

*,* Keys may be had by AUTHENTICATED TEACHERS on application, ~*~

Italian Course.

ITALIAN PRINCIPIA,- Part I. <A First ITALIAN
Couxse. Containing a Grammar, Delectus, Exercise Book, with
Vocabularies, and Materials for Italian Conversation. By SIGNOR
RICCI, Professor of Italian at the City bo London School. 12mo.
38. 6d.

ITALIAN PRINCIPIA, Part II. A First ITALIAN
ReEAp1NG-Book, containing Fables, Anecdotes, History, and
from the best Italian Authors, with Grammatical Questions, Notes,”
and a Copious Etymological Dictionary. By SIGNOR ‘RICCI. — Bi
r2mo. 3s. 6d. (Nearly Ready, — 4

*e® Keys may be had by AUTHENTICATED TEACHERS om application 3

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. 13

Dr. Wm. Smith’s English Course. -

A PRIMARY ENGLISH GRAMMAR for Elementary
Schools. With 134 Exercises and Questions. By T. D. Hart, M.A.
(120 pp.) x6mo. - 1s. 5 ; .
This Work aims at the very clearest and simplest statement possible of
the first principles of English Grammar, It is designed for the use of chil-
dren of all classes from about eight to twelve years of age. se ce
“*We doubt whether any grammar of equal size could give an introduction
to the English tyne 9 more clear, concise, and full than this."—Watchman,
*,* Keys may be had by AUTHENTICATED TEACHERS on application.

A SCHOOL. MANUAL OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
With 194, Exercises. By Wm. Smiru, D.C.L., and T. D, Hatt,
M.A. ith Appendices. (256 pp.) Post 8vo. 3s. 6d.

‘This Work has been prepared with a special view to the requirements of
Schools in which English, as a living language, is systematically taught, and
differs from most modern grammars in its thoroughly practicai character.
A distinguishing feature of the book is the constant appeal for every usage
to the authority of Standard in Authors.

Dr, Smith and Mr. Hall have succeeded in producing an admirable
English Grammar. - We cannot give it higher praise than to say that as a
school grammar it is the best in this country. ‘The writers have throughout
aimed at making a serviceable working school-book, There isa more com-

lete and systematic treatment of Syntax than in any other works: of the
Kind. It is a work thoroughly well-done.”—Znglish Churchman. z

A MANUAL OF ENGLISH. COMPOSITION. With
Copious Illustrations and Practical Exercises. By T. D® Hatt,

M.A. (210 pp.) zr2mo. 35. 6d. :

** Mr, Hall’s ‘ Manual’ is certainly the most sensible and practical book

upon English composition that we have lately seen. The great variety of
subjects which it suggests as themes for exercising the imagination as well
as the literary powers of young students will be found a great assistance to
teachers, who must often be sorely puzzled to hit upon subjects sufficiently
diversified without being ridiculously beyond the scope of youthful experi-

ence.”"—Saturday Review. .

A PRIMARY HISTORY OF BRITAIN. Edited by Wm.
Smiru, D.C.L. and"LL.D. (368 pp.) remo. 2s. 6d.

This book is a Primary History in no narrow sense. It is an honest at-
tempt to exhibit the leadin, facts and events of our history, free from political
and sectarian bias, and therefore will, it is hoped, be found suitable for
schools in which children of various denominations are taught.

“This Primary History admirably fulfils the design of the work, Its style
is good, its matter is well arranged, and the pupil must be very stupid who
fails to gather from its lively pages an anccuigen account of the history of
our united nation. It cannot fail to be a standard book.”"—Fohn Bull.

A SCHOOL MANUAL OF MODERN GEOGRAPHY,

Puysicat AND Pouiticat. By Joun Ricuarpson, M.A. (400 pp.)
Post 8vo. 5s. 4

This work has b wn yy fa hnniges Forms in Public Schools, Ladies’
Serge, Trainin es, Assistant and Pupil Teachers, Middle Class
and Commercial Schools, and Civil Service Examinations,

“Tt fully sustains the high reputation of Mr..Murray’s series of school
manuals, and we venture to predict for it a wide popularity, Bearing ia
mind its high character, it is a model of cheapness.”=Schvool Guardian.

A SMALLER MANUAL OF MODERN GEOGRAPHY,
For Scuooits anp YouNnG Persons. By Joun RicHarpson, M.A.
(290 ape.) 16mo. 25. 6d. ;

**Great pains appear to nore been spent on the verification of facts, and
the arrangement is a model of good method. ‘Throughout the book there
areunmistakable indications of solid, conscientious work, sound judgment,
and practical acquaintance with teaching.”—Schocl Guardian.

14 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS,

Standard School Books.

A CHILD’S FIRST LATIN BOOK. Comprisinc
Nouns, Pronouns, AND ADJECTIVES, WITH THE ACTIVE VERS.
With ample and varied Practice of the easiest kind. Both old and
new order of Cases given. By THEOPHILUS D. HALL, M.A.
z6mo. (124 pp.) 2s.

‘The speciality of this book lies in its presenting a great variety of
vivé voce work for class-room practice, designed to render the young
beginner thoroughly familiar with the use of the Grammatical forms.

This edition has been thoroughly re-cast and considerably enlarged;
the plan of the work has been extended so as to comprise the Active
Verbs; and all Paradigms of Nouns, Adjectives, and Pronouns are
given a second time at the end of the book, wiTH THE CASES —
ARRANGED AS IN THE OLDER GRAMMARS,

we wers th ti planations
pies poe ym full ¥ indeed. omen. we nny oe WILL ving jeer

A METHOD SUPERIOR TO ANYTHING OF THE KIND WE HAVE SEEN."—
Watchman,

KING EDWARD VI.’s LATIN GRAMMAR; or,
An Introduction to the Latin Tongue. (324 pp.) ram. PE

KING EDWARD VI’s FIRST LATIN BOOK.
Tue Latin AcciwweNce. Syntax and Prosody, with an | ENGLisit
TRANSLATION. (220pp.) i2mo. 25, 6d.

OXENHAW’S ENGLISH NOTES FOR LATIN
ELEGIACS, designed for early proficients in the art of Latin
Versification. (156 pp.) x2mo. 3s. 6d.

HUTTON’S PRINCIPIA GRAZCA. AN apa
DUCTION TO THE Srupy or Greek. A Grammar, Delectus, and
_ Exercise Book, with Vocabularies. (154 Pp) 12mo, 35. 6.2.

MATTHIZ’S GREEK GRAMMAR. Abridged by _
BLOMFIELD. Revised by E,.S, CROOKE, B.A, (412 pp.) Post
8vo. 45. }

LEATHES’ HEBREW GRAMMAR. With the Hebrew _
text of Genesis i.—vi., and Psalms i.—vi. Grammatical Anais aaa wee
ae. @s2 pp.) Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. : eS: =

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS. 15

Natural Philosophy and Science.

THE FIRST..BOOK OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY;
an Introduction to the Study of Statics, Dynamics, Hydrostatics,
Light, Heat, and Sound, with numerous Examples. By SAMUEL
NEWTH, M.A., D.D., Fellow of University College, London.
(200 pp.) Small 8vo. 3s. 6a.

*,* This work embraces all the subjects in Natural Philosophy re-
quired at the Matriculation Examination of the University of London.

ELEMENTS OF.MECHANICS, INCLUDING HYDRO-
STATICS. With numerous Examples. By SAMUEL NEWTH,
M.A., D.D., Principal of New College, London, and Fellow of
University College, London. (362 pp.) Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.

This Edition (the Sixth) has been carefully revised throughout, and
with especial reference to changes recently made in the Regulations of
the University of London.

MATHEMATICAL EXAMPLES. A Graduated Series of

Elementary Examples in Arithmetic, Algebra, Logarithms, Trigono-
metry, and Mechanics. (378 pp.) Small 8vo. 8s. 6d,

THE CONNECTION OF THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES.
By MARY SOMERVILLE. Portrait and Woodcuts. (468 pp.)
Post 8vo. 9s. :

“Mrs, Someryille’s delightful volume. The style of this astonishing pro-
duction is so clear and unaffected, and Lig pe be with so much simplicity, so
great a mass of profound knowledge, that it should be placed in the hands of
every youth, the moment he has mastered the gencral rudiments of edu-
cation.”—Quarterly Review.

PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By MARY SOMERVILLE,
Portrait. (548 pp.) Post8vo. gs.

Mrs, Somerville’s ‘ Physical Geography’ is the work she is most gene-

’ rally known by, and notwithstanding the numerous works On the same sub-

ject that have since appeared, it still holds its place as a first authority.”—
Nature, :

ad

* Ga

16 MR. MURRA Y'S LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS, “"

Mrs. Markham’ Histories. «+

“Mrs, Markham’s Histories are constructed on a plan which is novel and we
think well chosen, and we are glad to find that they are deservedly popular, for they
cannot be too strongly recommended.”—JOURNAL OF EDUCATION, ee. |

HISTORY OF ENGLAND, FROM THE First INVASION |
BY THE Romans. By Mrs. MARKHAM. Continued down to
Times. .With Conversations at the end of each Chapter. With 100
Woodcuts, (528 pp.) xr2mo. 35. 6d.

“ Mrs, Markham’s ‘ History of England’ is the best history for the young
that ever appeared, and is far ee grr to many works of much higher ;
tensions. Tt is well written, well informed, and marked by sound fidget :
and good sense, and is moreover extremely interesting. no
history used in any of our public schools at all com le to it."—QQin
Notes and Queries. .

HISTORY OF FRANCE, FROM THE CONQUEST BY THE
Gauts. By Mrs. Markuam. Continued down to Recent Times.
With Conversations at the end of each Chapter. With 7o Woodcuts. |
(sso pp.) xz2mo. 3s. 6d. : Peas : be |

“Mrs, Markham’s Histories are well known to all those cognged ate) ,

instruction of youth. Her Histories of England and France are ly
very popular; and we have been given to understand, in proof of this asser-
tion, that of her Histories many thousand copies have Bees sold."—Bell's
Messenger. : . 4

HISTORY OF GERMANY, FRoM THE INVASION OF
tHE Kincpom BY THE RoMANS UNDzR Martius. Continueddown
to Recent Times. On the plan of Mrs. MARKHaM. With 50 Wood-
cuts. (460 pp.) 12mo. 3s. 6d.
* A very valuable compendium of all that is most important in
History. The facts have been accurately and laboriously collected
authentic sources, and they are lucidly a ed so aS to invest them 24
the interest which naturally pertains to them.”—Evangelical Magazine, =

LITTLE ARTHUR’S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. By 4
Lapy Ca.icotrt. Continued down to Recent Times. With 36
Woodcuts. (286 pp.) 16mo. 1s. 6d.

“«T never met with a history so well adapted to the capacities of children
or their entertainment, so philosophical, and written with such simplicity.”
—Mrs, MARCETT. :

Z2SOP’S FABLES. A New VERSION. Chiefly from the |

Original Sources. By Rev. THomas James. With roo Woodeuts,

(168 pp.) Post 8vo. 2s. 6d. dy =

“‘ Of ZEsop’s FABLES there ought to be in every school many copies, full —
- of pictures.”—Fraser’s Magazine.
““This work is remarkable for the clearness and conciseness with which
“each tale is narrated ;'and the book has been relieved of those tedious and
unprofitable appendages called ‘ morals,’ which used toobscureanddisigure
the ancient editions of this work.”—-7he Examiner. by

THE BIBLE.IN THE HOLY LAND. Bsinc Extracts —
: From DEAN STANLEY'S SINAI AND PALESTINE, With |
Woodcuts. .(210 pp.) 16mo. 2s. 6d. ~ : ra

" JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.
Bradbury, Agnew, & Co.] (Peinters, Whiteftiars |

pie
Pie ae

, oy ae ee +o ay

SY
Wy

4
1
'
ae
%,
iY
4
-

MAUR Se EM
NEN
‘ ih
WEEN
WY bY
wit S
Wh ¢ a,
wy . WN
Le) yy,
A} \* Wes
SENS EN)
SNE
\ ‘
‘ iy
MS
iY
x4
We A
Habe
4
\) iN .
| * 4
AAS |
: 4 Mo
. NN
S
Ws

EET POT mt
Pgh
Ou ft
fir :

. Fares as ‘ ¢
lh a

opt tig at git

yk)
*)

se Col tats

‘

,
of tS,

i”
ey 7 7
~ ¢
oe ed tes
ed ~

. Si
’ t
wah ;
hy

~
~

/ elon
re

rs
oe AG

: ae a
Sob pool ar

ie ie
»,

Pas Goh coat chs
tia

:: LS “ a : Ne
Se ne eS a, :